table of contents 1mrk 580 227-xen technical reference ... · table of contents technical reference...

– 1Table of contentsTechnical reference manualREL 521

1MRK 580 227-XEN

Version 2.2-00October 1999

Section Name of document Page Document number Version

2 Revisions 2–3 1MRK 580 236-XEN Version 2.2-00

Service notes 2–5 1MRK 580 312-XEN Version 2.2-00

3 Requirements 3–37 1MRK 580 262-XEN Version 2.2-00

Technical data 3–43 1MRK 580 245-XEN Version 2.2-00

Ordering data sheet 3–67 1MRK 580 348-XEN Version 2.2-00

4 Installation and commissioning 4–5 1MRK 580 289-XEN Version 2.2-00

Local human-machine interface 4–25 1MRK 580 290-XEN Version 2.2-00

LED indication module 4-41 1MRK 580 676-XEN Version 2.2-00

Menu tree 4–43 1MRK 580 291-XEN Version 2.2-00

Appendix – Menu tree structure for REx 5xx termi-nals

4–53 1MRK 580 292-XEN Version 2.2-00

5 Terminal identification 5–3 1MRK 580 294 -XEN Version 2.2-00

Activation of setting groups 5–7 1MRK 580 295-XEN Version 2.2-00

Restricted settings via human-machine interface 5–11 1MRK 580 296-XEN Version 2.2-00

I/O system configuration 5–15 1MRK 580 297-XEN Version 2.2-00

Configurable logic 5–25 1MRK 580 298-XEN Version 2.2-00

Self-supervision 5–45 1MRK 580 299-XEN Version 2.2-00

Blocking of functions during test 5–49 1MRK 580 300-XEN Version 2.2-00

Time synchronisation 5–51 1MRK 580 302-XEN Version 2.0-00

Internal events 5-55 1MRK 580 303-XEN Version 2.2-00

6 Introduction to functions 6–29 1MRK 580 313-XEN Version 2.2-00

Distance protection 6–33 1MRK 580 321-XEN Version 2.2-00

Phase selection for distance protection 6–77 1MKR 580 323-XEN Version 2.2-00

Power-swing detection 6–93 1MRK 580 324-XEN Version 2.2-00

Power-swing logic 6–109 1MRK 580 325-XEN Version 2.2-00

Pole slip protection 6-123 1MRK 580 677-XEN Version 2.2-00

Scheme communication logic for distance protection 6–163 1MRK 580 326-XEN Version 2.2-00

Current reversal and WEI logic for distance protec-tion

6–173 1MRK 580 327-XEN Version 2.2-00

Automatic switch-onto-fault function for distance pro-tection

6–189 1MRK 580 329-XEN Version 2.2-00

Local acceleration logic 6–193 1MRK 580 330-XEN Version 2.2-00

Dead-line detection 6–197 1MRK 580 331-XEN Version 2.2-00

Instanteaneous phase overcurrent protection 6–203 1MRK 580 335-XEN Version 2.2-00

Time delayed phase overcurrent protection 6–213 1MRK 580 336-XEN Version 2.2-00

Directional inverse time phase overcurrent protection 6-221 1MRK 580 678-XEN Version 2.2-00

Stub protection 6–239 1MRK 580 337-XEN Version 2.2-00

Breaker-failure protection 6–247 1MRK 580 339-XEN Version 2.2-00

Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (non-dir)

6–259 1MRK 580 340-XEN Version 2.2-00

Time delayed residual overcurrent protection (nondir) 6–269 1MRK 580 318-XEN Version 2.2-00

Residual overcurrent protection (dir and nondir) 6–277 1MRK 580 345-XEN Version 2.2-00

Table of contents Technical reference manual REL 521

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 227-XENPage 1 – 2

Communication logic for residual overcurrent protec-tion

6–291 1MRK 580 346-XEN Version 2.2-00

Current rev. and WEI logic for residual overcurrent protection

6–297 1MRK 580 421-XEN Version 2.2-00

4 step residual overcurrent protection 6–305 1MRK 580 350-XEN Version 2.2-00

Time delayed undervoltage protection 6–329 1MRK 580 351-XEN Version 2.2-00

Time delayed overvoltage and residual overvoltage protection

6–335 1MRK 580 352-XEN Version 2.2-00

Broken cunductor check 6-343 1MRK 580 354-XEN Version 2.2-00

Loss of voltage check 6–349 1MRK 580 355-XEN Version 2.2-00

Overload supervision 6–357 1MRK 580 356-XEN Version 2.2-00

Current circuit supervision 6–363 1MRK 580 357-XEN Version 2.2-00

Fuse failure supervision (zero sequence) 6–369 1MRK 580 359-XEN Version 2.2-00

Command control 6–379 1MRK 580 382-XEN Version 2.2-00

Synchro- and energising check for single circuit breaker

6–385 1MRK 580 363-XEN Version 2.2-00

Synchro- and energising check, double circuit break-ers

6–411 1MRK 580 362-XEN Version 2.2-00

Phasing, synchro- and energising check, single CB 6–429 1MRK 580 365-XEN Version 2.2-00

Phasing, synchro- and energising check, double CBs 6–459 1MRK 580 366-XEN Version 2.2-00

Autorecloser, single, two and/or three phase 6–485 1MRK 580 367-XEN Version 2.2-00

Autorecloser, three phase 6–515 1MRK 580 368-XEN Version 2.2-00

Three pole trip logic 6-539 1MRK 580 378-XEN Version 2.2-00

Single or two pole trip logic 6–541 1MRK 580 379-XEN Version 2.2-00

Pole discordance logic 6–551 1MRK 580 380-XEN Version 2.2-00

Binary signal transfer to remote end 6–557 1MRK 580 381-XEN Version 2.2-00

Serial communication 6–595 1MRK 580 301-XEN Version 2.2-00

Command function 6–609 1MRK 580 310-XEN Version 2.2-00

Communication channel test logic 6–613 1MRK 580 332-XEN Version 2.2-00

Event function 6–621 1MRK 580 393-XEN Version 2.2-00

Disturbance report - Introduction 6–633 1MRK 580 383-XEN Version 2.2-00

Disturbance report - Settings 6–639 1MRK 580 384-XEN Version 2.2-00

Disturbance report - Indications 6–649 1MRK 580 386-XEN Version 2.2-00

Disturbance report - Disturbance recorder 6–651 1MRK 580 387-XEN Version 2.2-00

Disturbance report - Event recorder 6–659 1MRK 580 385-XEN Version 2.2-00

Disturbance report - Fault locator 6-661 1MRK 580 388-XEN Version 2.2-00

Disturbance report - Trip value recorder 6–677 1MRK 580 389-XEN Version 2.2-00

Monitoring of AC analogue measurements 6–681 1MRK 580 390-XEN Version 2.2-00

Monitoring of DC analogue measurements 6–699 1MRK 580 391-XEN Version 2.2-00

Pulse counter 6–719 1MRK 580 394-XEN Version 2.2-00

7 Hardware design 7–3 1MRK 580 395-XEN Version 2.2-00

Construction and hardware characteristics 7–9 1MRK 580 396-XEN Version 2.2-00

Remote end data communication modules 7–21 1MRK 580 397-XEN Version 2.2-00



1MRK 580 227-XENPage 1 – 3

Version 2.2-00

Serial communication module 7–25 1MRK 580 398-XEN Version 2.2-00

8 Terminal diagrams and default configurations 8–1 1MRK 580 401-XEN Version 2.2-00

Terminal diagram N/A 1MRK 001 452-AA Rev.ind 2

3-phase default configuration N/A 1MRK 001 697-22 Rev. ind 01

1-phase default configuration N/A 1MRK 001 697-15 Rev. ind 01

9 Index 9–1 1MRK 580 410-XEN Version 2.2-00



Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 227-XENPage 1 – 4

1

Contents Page

Revisions .....................................................................................................2–3Revised documents........................................................................................ 2–3

Service notes...............................................................................................2–5

Revision and service notes

Revision and service notesPage 2 – 2

3Revisions

1 Revised documentsSince this is the first version of this manual, no documents are revised.

1MRK 580 236-XEN


Revisions

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 236-XENPage 2 – 4

5Service notes

Currently no service notes are issued.

1MRK 580 312-XEN


Service notes

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 312-XENPage 2 – 6

1

Contents Page

Requirements ................................................................................................. 3–3General ................................................................................................ 3–3Voltage transformers............................................................................ 3–3Current transformers ............................................................................ 3–3

Classification.............................................................................. 3–3Conditions .................................................................................. 3–3

Requirements ..............................................................................................3–3Fault current............................................................................... 3–4Cable resistance and additional load......................................... 3–4Calculating transformer requirements........................................ 3–5

Serial communication........................................................................... 3–6SPA............................................................................................ 3–6LON............................................................................................ 3–7IEC 870–5–103.......................................................................... 3–7

Personal computer for human machine interfacing.............................. 3–7

Introduction..................................................................................................... 3–9

General data................................................................................................... 3–9AC measuring accuracy (DA01-DA15) ................................................ 3–9DC (mA) measuring accuracy (MI11-MI66) ......................................... 3–9

Technical data .............................................................................................3–9Configurable logic .............................................................................. 3–10

Additional configurable logic .................................................... 3–10Contact data....................................................................................... 3–10Energising quantities.......................................................................... 3–11Environmental influence..................................................................... 3–12Electromagnetic compatability ........................................................... 3–12Insulation............................................................................................ 3–12Vibration............................................................................................. 3–13CE compliance................................................................................... 3–13Size and weight.................................................................................. 3–13

Line impedance............................................................................................ 3–14Distance protection (ZM1-ZM5) ......................................................... 3–14Phase selection logic (PHS)............................................................... 3–15Power swing detection (PSD) ............................................................ 3–15Power swing logic (PSL) .................................................................... 3–16Pole slip protection............................................................................. 3–16Scheme communication logic for distance protection (ZCOM) .......... 3–16Current reversal and weak infeed logic (ZCAL) ................................. 3–17Automatic switch onto fault function for distance protection (SOTF) . 3–17Dead line detection (DLD).................................................................. 3–17Local acceleration logic (ZCLC) ......................................................... 3–17

Current, phase wise ..................................................................................... 3–18Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection (IOC) ............................ 3–18Time delayed phase overcurrent protection (TOC)............................ 3–18Stub protection (STUB)...................................................................... 3–18Breaker faílure protection (BFP) ........................................................ 3–19

Product introduction

Product introductionPage 3 – 2

Current, residual (earth fault) ....................................................................... 3–20Residual current ................................................................................. 3–20

Voltage ......................................................................................................... 3–22Time delayed undervoltage protection (TUV) .................................... 3–22Time delayed overvoltage and residual overvoltage protection (TOV)3–22

Power system supervision............................................................................ 3–23Broken conductor check (BRC).......................................................... 3–23Loss of voltage check (LOV) .............................................................. 3–23Overload supervision (OVLD) ............................................................ 3–23

Secondary system supervision..................................................................... 3–24Current circuit supervision (CTSU) .................................................... 3–24Fuse failure supervision (FUSE) ........................................................ 3–24

Control.......................................................................................................... 3–25Syncro- and energising check (SYN1-SYN4) .................................... 3–25Autoreclosing (AR01-AR04)............................................................... 3–25

Logic............................................................................................................. 3–26Trip logic(TRIP) .................................................................................. 3–26Pole discordance logic (PD)............................................................... 3–26Communication channel test logic (CCHT) ........................................ 3–26Binary signal transfer to remote end (RTC) ....................................... 3–26Binary signal interbay communication (CM01-CM80)........................ 3–26Serial communication......................................................................... 3–27Remote end data communication ...................................................... 3–28

Monitoring..................................................................................................... 3–29Disturbance recorder (DREP) ............................................................ 3–29Event recorder (EVR)......................................................................... 3–29Fault locator (FLC) ............................................................................. 3–30Increased measuring accuracy .......................................................... 3–30

Metering ....................................................................................................... 3–31Pulse counter ..................................................................................... 3–31

Ordering data sheet ..................................................................................3–33Ordering ....................................................................................................... 3–33

3

1 Requirements

1.1 General The operation of a protection measuring function is influenced by distor-tion, and measures need to be taken in the protection to handle this phe-nomenon. One source of distortion is current transformer saturation. Inthis protection terminal, measures are taken to allow for a certain amountof CT saturation with maintained correct operation. This protection termi-nal can allow relatively heavy current transformer saturation.

Protection functions are also affected by transients caused by capacitivevoltage transformers (CVTs) but as this protection terminal has a veryeffective filter for these transients, the operation is hardly affected at all.

1.2 Voltage transformers Magnetic or capacitive voltage transformers can be used.

Capacitive voltage transformers (CTVs) should fulfil the requirementsaccording to IEC 186A, Section 20, regarding transients. According to thestandard, at a primary voltage drop down to zero, the secondary voltageshould drop to less than 10% of the peak pre-fault value before the shortcircuit within one cycle.

The protection terminal has an effective filter for this transient, whichgives secure and correct operation with CVTs.

1.3 Current transformers

1.3.1 Classification Current transformers should be of type TPX or TPY with an accuracyclass of 5P or better. The characteristic of the linearised current trans-former type TPZ is not well defined as far as the phase angle error is con-cerned, and we therefore recommend contacting ABB Network PartnerAB to confirm that the type in question can be used.

The current transformer ratio should be selected so that the current to theprotection is higher than the minimum operating value for all faults thatare to be detected. The minimum operating current is 20% of the nominalcurrent, and for the earth fault overcurrent protection it is 5%.

1.3.2 Conditions The requirements are a result of investigations performed in our networksimulator. The tests have been carried out with an analogue current trans-former model with a settable core area, core length, air gap and number ofprimary and secondary turns. The setting of the current transformer modelwas representative for current transformers of type TPX and TPY. Theresults are not valid for TPZ.

Requirements 1MRK 580 262-XEN


Requirements

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 262-XENPage 3 – 4

The performance of the distance protection was checked at both symmet-rical and fully asymmetrical fault currents. A source with a time constantof about 120 ms was used at the tests. The current requirements below arethus applicable both for symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents.

Both phase-to-earth, phase-to-phase and three-phase faults were tested infault locations backward, close up forward and at the zone 1 reach. Theprotection was checked with regard to directionality, dependable tripping,and overreach.

All testing was made without any remanence flux in the current trans-former core. The requirements below are therefore fully valid for a corewith no remanence flux. It is difficult to give general recommendationsfor additional margins for remanence flux. They depend on the reliabilityand economy requirements.

When current transformers of type TPY are used, practically no additionalmargin is needed due to the anti-remanence air gap.

For current transformers of type TPX, the small probability of a fullyasymmetrical fault, together with maximum remanence flux in the samedirection as the flux generated by the fault, has to be kept in mind at thedecision of an additional margin. Fully asymmetrical fault current will beachieved when the fault occurs at zero voltage (0°). Investigations haveproved that 95% of the faults in the network will occur when the voltageis between 40° and 90°.

1.3.3 Fault current The current transformer requirements are based on the maximum faultcurrent for faults in different positions. Maximum fault current will occurfor three-phase faults or single-phase-to-earth faults. The current for a sin-gle phase-to-earth fault will exceed the current for a three-phase faultwhen the zero sequence impedance in the total fault loop is less than thepositive sequence impedance.

When calculating the current transformer requirements, maximum faultcurrent should be used and therefore both fault types have to be consid-ered.

1.3.4 Cable resistance and additional load

The current transformer saturation is directly affected by the voltage at thecurrent transformer secondary terminals. This voltage, for an earth fault,is developed in a loop containing the phase and neutral conductor, andrelay load. For three-phase faults, the neutral current is zero, and only thephase conductor and relay phase load have to be considered.

In the calculation, the loop resistance should be used for phase-to-earthfaults and the phase resistance for three-phase faults.

Requirements 1MRK 580 262-XENPage 3 – 5

Version 2.2-00

1.3.5 Calculating transformer requirements

The current transformer secondary limiting emf (E2max) should meet therequirements below:

(Equation 1)

(Equation 2)

Ikmax Maximum primary fundamental frequency current for for-ward and reverse faults

Ikzone1 Maximum primary fundamental frequency current for for-ward and reverse fault at zone 1 reach

Ipn Primary nominal CT currentIsn Secondary nominal CT currentIR Protection terminal nominal currentRCT CT secondary winding resistanceRL CT secondary cable resistance and additional load

a This factor is a function of the network frequency and the timeconstant for the dc component in the fault current, see figure 1 onpage 5

k A factor of the network frequency and the time constant forthe dc component in the fault current for a three-phase fault atthe set reach of zone 1; see figure 2 on page 6. The time con-stant is normally less than 50 ms.

Figure 1: Factor a as a function of the frequency and the time constant

E2max

Ikmax Isn⋅

Ipn------------------------------- a RCT RL

0,25

IR2

------------+ +

⋅ ⋅>

E2max

Ikzone1 Isn⋅( )

Ipn------------------------------------ k RCT RL

0,25

IR2

------------+ +

⋅ ⋅>

60 Hz

50 Hz

Requirements

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 262-XENPage 3 – 6

Figure 2: Factor k as a function of the frequency and the time constant

1.4 Serial communication

1.4.1 SPA The optical fibres that are supplied by ABB Network Partner AB fulfil allthe requirements for the communication in the station. Both plastic fibresand glass fibres can be used. For distances up to 30 m, plastic fibres andfor distances up to 500 m, glass fibres are suitable. Glass and plastic fibrescan be mixed in the same loop. The transmitter and reciever connectors atthe bus connection unit has to be of corresponding types, i.e. glass or plas-tic connector. See also table 2 on page 7.

For communication on longer distances, telephone modems are used. Themodems must be Hayes-compatible ones using “AT” commands withautomatic answering (AA) capability. The telephone network must com-ply with the CCITT standards.

For connection of the optical fibre loop to a PC or a telephone modem, anopto/electrical converter is required. The converter uses RS–232C and ithas a D25 connector on the electrical side. The converter is supplied byABB Network Partner AB.

60 Hz

50 Hz

Requirements 1MRK 580 262-XENPage 3 – 7

Version 2.2-00

1.4.2 LON The protection terminal can be used in a substation control system (SCS).For that purpose, connect the LON communication link to a LON StarCoupler via optical fibres. The optical fibres are either glass or plasticwith the following specification:

A PC can be used as a station HMI. The PC must be equipped with a com-munication card for LON (e.g. Echelon PCLTA card). Control functionsin the station HMI that is used with REC 561 are available as the High-voltage MicroLibrary (HVLib) functions, which is a library of standardapplication functions and images for the application engineering inS.P.I.D.E.R. MicroSCADA ver. 8.4 or later.

To configure the nodes in a SCS, the LON Network Tool is needed.

1.4.3 IEC 870–5–103 As an alternative to SPA communication, the terminals can use theIEC 870–5–103 standard protocol for protection functions. The terminalscommunicate with a primary station level system. In IEC terminology aprimary station is a master and a secondary station is a slave. The commu-nication is based on a point to point principle, where the terminal is aslave. The master must have a program that can interpret the IEC 870–5–103 communication messages. The IEC communication link is connectedvia optical fibres. The optical fibres are either glass or plastic with the fol-lowing specification:

For more detailed requirements refer to the IEC 870–5–103 standard.

1.5 Personal computer for human machine interfacing

The PC shall comply with the following requirements:

• 100% IBM compatible running with DOS 5.0 or higher• 640 kb RAM or more (at least 450 kb available)• VGA screen and floppy disk drive 3 1/2” (1,44 Mb)• 3 Mb disk space required for the HMI program SM/REx 500 with

SMS-BASE for communication to the front port

Table 1: Cable connection requirements for LON bus connection

Glass fibre Plastic fibre

Cable connector ST-connector Snap-in connector

Fibre diameter 62.5/125 µm 1 mm

Max. cable length 1000 m 30 m

Table 2: Cable connection requirements for SPA/IEC connection

Glass fibre Plastic fibre

Cable connector ST connector Snap-in connector

Fibre diameter 62.5/125 µm 1 mm

Max. cable length 500 m 30 m

Requirements

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 262-XENPage 3 – 8

• Additional disk space required depends on the application, see Buy-ers Guide for Rex 5xx, requirements for SMS 010

• one serial port (COM) available.

9

1 IntroductionAll setting values are related to the rated voltage or current of the termi-nal, in order to simplify tables. However, under thumb index 6, wherefunctions are described, setting values are related to the base voltage orcurrent, in order to increase flexibility at system design. See the section“Terminal identification” for details concerning base values and their def-inition.

2 General data

2.1 AC measuring accuracy (DA01-DA15)

Note: The actual number of available function blocks may be less than thenumber referenced, depending on ordered options.

2.2 DC (mA) measuring accuracy (MI11-MI66)

Note: The actual number of available function blocks may be less than thenumber referenced, depending on ordered options.

Function Setting range Accuracy

Frequency (0.95-1.05) x fr ± 0.2 Hz

Voltage (RMS) (0.1-1.5) x Ur ± 2.5 % of Ur,at U ≤ Ur± 2.5 % of U,at U > Ur

Current (RMS) (0.2-4) x Ir ± 2.5 % of Ir,at I ≤ Ir± 2.5 % of I,at I > Ir

Active power *)

Reactive power *)at |cos ϕ| > 0.9at |cos ϕ| ≤ 0.8

± 5 %± 7.5 %

*) Measured at Ur and 20 % of Ir


mA measuring function ± 5, ± 10, ± 20 mA0-5, 0-10, 0-20, 4-20 mA

± 0.1 % of set value

Max current of transducer to input, I_Max

(-25 to +25) mA in steps of 0.01

Min current of transducer to input, I_Min


High alarm level for input, HiAlarm


High warning level for input, HiWarn


Low warning level for input, Low-Warn


Low alarm level for input, Low-Alarm


Alarm hysteresis for input, Hys-tereses

(0 - 20) mA in steps of 1

Amplitude dead band for input, DeadBand

(0 - 20) mA in steps of 1

Integrating dead band for input, IDeadB

(0 - 1000) mA in steps of 0.01

Technical data 1MRK 580 245-XEN


Technical data

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 245-XENPage 3 – 10

2.3 Configurable logic

2.3.1 Additional configurable logic

2.4 Contact data

Timers

Function Number Setting range Accuracy

Timer, TM 10 (0-60) s in steps of 1 ms ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Long timer, TL 10 (0-90000) s in steps of 0.1 s ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Pulse timer, TP 10 (0-60) s in steps of 1 ms ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Pulse long timer, TQ 10 (0-90000) s in steps of 0.1 s ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Logic

Function Number Description

AND 30 4 inputs (1 inverted),2 outputs (inverted and non-inverted)

OR 60 6 inputs, 2 outputs (inverted and non-inverted)

XOR 39 2 inputs, 2 outputs (inverted and non-inverted)

INV 20

SR 5 2 inputs, 2 outputs (inverted and non-inverted)

Timers

Function Number Setting range Accuracy

Pulse timer, TP 40 (0-60) s in steps of 1 ms ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Logic

Function Number Description

AND 239 4 inputs (1 inverted),2 outputs (inverted and non-inverted)

OR 159 6 inputs, 2 outputs (inverted and non-inverted)

INV 59

Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays Fast signal relays

Max system voltage 250 V ac, dc 250 V ac, dc

Test voltage across open contact, 1 min

1000 V rms 800 V dc

Current carrying capacitycontinuous1 s

8 A 10 A

8 A10 A

Making capacity at induc-tive load with L/R>10 ms

0.2 s1.0 s

30 A10 A

0.4 A0.4 A

Breaking capacity for ac, cos ϕ>0.4

250 V/8.0 A 250 V/8.0 A

Breaking capacity for dc with L/R<40ms 48 V/1 A

110 V/0.4 A220 V/0.2 A250 V/0.15 A

48 V/1 A110 V/0.4 A220 V/0.2 A250 V/0.15 A

Maximum capacitive load - 10 nF

Technical data 1MRK 580 245-XENPage 3 – 11

Version 2.2-00

2.5 Energising quantities

Quantity Rated value Nominal range

Current

Operation rangePermissive overload

Burden

Ir = 1 or 5 AIr = 1 or 5 A for I5(0.004-100) × Ir4 × Ir cont.100 × Ir for 1 s *)

< 0.25 VA at Ir

(0.2-30) x Ir

Ac voltage Ph-Ph

Operation rangePermissive overload

Burden

Ur = 100/110/115/120 VUr = 200/220/230/240 V

(0.001-1.5) x Ur1.5 × Ur cont.2.5 × Ur for 1 s< 0.2 VA at Ur

(80-120) % of Ur

Frequency fr = 50/60 Hz ± 5 %

Auxiliary dc voltage EL

power consumptionbasic terminaleach output relay

power dissipationRL24 = (24/30)VRL48 = (48/60)VRL110 = (110/125)VRL220 = (220/250)V

EL = (48-250) V

≤ 16 W≤ 0.15 W

max. 0.05 W/inputmax. 0.1 W/inputmax. 0.2 W/inputmax. 0.4 W/input

± 20 %

Binary input/output moduledc voltage RL

power consumptioneach I/O-moduleeach output relay


RL24 = (24/30) VRL48 = (48/60) VRL110 = (110/125) VRL220 = (220/250) V

≤ 1.0 W≤ 0.15 W


± 20 %± 20 %± 20 %± 20 %

Binary input moduledc voltage RL

power consumptioneach input module


RL24 = (24/30) VRL48 = (48/60) VRL110 = (110/125) VRL220 = (220/250) V

≤ 0.5 W


± 20 %± 20 %± 20 %± 20 %

Binary output modulepower consumption

each output moduleeach output relay

≤ 1.0W≤ 0.25 W

mA input moduleinput range

input resistance

power consumptioneach mA-moduleeach mA-input

± 20 mA

Rin = 194 Ω

≤ 4 W≤ 0.1 W

Technical data

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 245-XENPage 3 – 12

2.6 Environmental influence

2.7 Electromagnetic compatability

2.8 Insulation

Ambient temperature 20 °C -5 °C to +55 °C

Ripple in dc auxiliary voltage max. 2 % max. 12 %

Relative humidity (10-90) % (10-90) %

*) max. 350 A for 1 s when COMBIFLEX test switch included together with the productI2t = 10 kAs

Quantity Rated value Nominal range

Dependence on: Within nominal range Within operative range

Ambient temperature 0.01 % / °C Correct function

Ripple in auxiliary dc voltage Negligible Correct function

Interruption in auxiliary dc voltagewithout resettingcorrect functionrestart time

< 50 ms0 - ∞< 100 s

< 50 ms0 - ∞< 100 s

Test Type test values Reference standards

1 MHz burst disturbanceFor short-range galvanic modemFor galvanic interface *)

- common mode- differential mode

2.5 kV2.5 kV

1 kV0.5 kV

IEC 60255-22-1, Class IIIIEC 60255-22-1, Class III

Class IIClass II

Electrostatic dischargeFor short-range galvanic modemFor galvanic interface *)

8 kV8 kV-

IEC 60255-22-2, Class IIIIEC 60255-22-2, Class III

Fast transient disturbanceFor short-range galvanic modemFor galvanic interface *)

4 kV4 kV1 kV

IEC 60255-22-4, Class IVIEC 60255-22-4, Class IVClass II, level 2

Radiated electromagnetic field disturbance

10 V/m, (25-1000) MHz

IEC 60255-22-3, Class IIIIEEE/ANSI C37.90.2

*) For FOX6Plus the following modes are not applicable:- V.36/V11 Co-directional according to CCITT- RS530/RS422 Co-directional according to EIA

Test Type test values

Dielectric testFor short-range galvanic modemFor galvanic interface *)

2.0 kV ac, 1 min2.5 kV ac, 1 min1.0 kV ac, 1 min

Impulse voltage testFor short-range galvanic modemFor galvanic interface *)

For other circuits

5 kV, 1.2/50 µs, 0.5 J1 kV, 1.2/50 µs, 0.5 J5 kV, 1.2/50 µs, 0.5 J

Insulation resistance >100 MΩ at 500 V dc

Reference standard:IEC 60255–5


Version 2.2-00

2.9 Vibration

2.10 CE compliance

2.11 Size and weight

Test According to Reference standards

Vibration Class I IEC 60255-21-1

Shock and bump Class I IEC 60255-21-2

Seismic Class I IEC 60255-21-3

Test According to

Immunity EN 50082-2

Emissivity EN 50081-2

Low voltage directive EN 50178

Weight approx. 1/2 of 19" rack: ≤ 8.5 kg3/4 of 19" rack: ≤ 11 kg

Dimensionswidth

heightdepth

1/2 of 19" rack: 223.7 mm3/4 of 19" rack: 336 mm

267 mm245 mm

Storage temperature -40 °C to +70 °C

Technical data

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 245-XENPage 3 – 14

3 Line impedance

3.1 Distance protection (ZM1-ZM5)

Note: The actual number of available zones may be less than the numberreferenced, depending on ordered options.

Function Value

Operate timetypicalmin and max

28msPlease refer to the separate isochrone dia-grams

Min. operate current (10-30) % of Ir in steps of 1 %

Resetting ratio typical 105 %

Resetting time typical 40 ms

Output signals, start and tripzone 1-3zone 4,5

single and three phasethree phase

Setting accuracy included in the measuring accuracy

Number of zones 3 direction selectable

Impedance setting range at Ir = 1 A *)

reactive reachpositive-sequence reactance, X1PP/X1PEzero-sequence reactance, X0PE

resistive reachpositive-sequence resistance, R1PP/R1PEzero-sequence resistance, R0PE

fault resistancefor phase - phase faults, RFPPfor phase - earth faults, RFPE

(0.1-400) Ω /phase in steps of 0.01 Ω(0.1-1200) Ω /phase in steps of 0.01 Ω

(0.1-400) Ω /phase in steps of 0.01 Ω(0.1-1200) Ω /phase in steps of 0.01 Ω

(0.1-400) Ω /loop in steps of 0.01 Ω(0.1-400) Ω /loop in steps of 0.01 Ω

Setting range of timersfor impedance zones (0-60) s in steps of 1 ms

Static accuracy at 0° and 85°voltage range (0.1-1.1) x Urcurrent range (0.5-30) x Ir

± 5 %

Static angular accuracy at 0° and 85°voltage range (0.1-1,1) x Urcurrent range (0.5-30) x Ir

± 5°

Max dynamic overreach at 85° measured with CVT’s 0.5 < SIR < 30

± 5 %

*) Divide specified values by 5 for Ir = 5A


Version 2.2-00

3.2 Phase selection logic (PHS)

3.3 Power swing detection (PSD)

Function Value


reactive reachpositive-sequence reactance, X1PP/X1PEzero-sequence reactance, X0PE

resistive reachfor phase-phase faults, RFPPfor phase-earth faults, RFPE

(0.1 - 400) Ω/phase in steps of 0.01 Ω(0.1 - 1200) Ω/phase in steps of 0.01 Ω

(0.1 - 400) Ω/loop in steps of 0.01 Ω (0.1 - 400) Ω/loop in steps of 0.01 Ω


± 5 %

Static angular accuracy at 0° and 85°voltage range (0.1-1.1) x Urcurrent range (0.2-30) x Ir

± 5°



Impedance setting range at Ir =1A *)

reactive reach, XIN

resistive reach, RIN

reach multiplication factor, KXreach multiplication factor, KR

(0.1-400) Ω/phase in steps of 0.01 Ω(0.1-400) Ω/phase in steps of 0.01 Ω(120-200) % of XIN in steps of 1 %(120-200) % of RIN in steps of 1 %

Initial PSD timer, tp1Fast PSD timer, tp2Hold timer for activation of fast PSD timer , tWHold timer for PSD detected, tHTimer overcoming 1ph reclosing dead time, tEFTimer to time delay block by the residual current, tR1Delay timer for blocking of out-put signal at very slow swings, tR2

(0-60) s in steps of 1 ms(0-60) s in steps of 1 ms


(0-60) s in steps of 1 ms



± 0.5 % ± 10 ms± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

± 0.5 % ± 10 ms± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Static accuracy at 0° and 85° voltage range (0.1-1.1) x Urcurrent range (0.5-30) x Ir

± 5 %

Static angular accuracy at 0° and 85°

voltage range (0.1-1.1) x Urcurrent range (0.2-30) x Ir

± 5°


Technical data

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 245-XENPage 3 – 16

3.4 Power swing logic (PSL)

3.5 Pole slip protection

3.6 Scheme communication logic for distance protection (ZCOM)


Operate time difference between higher and lower zone, tDZTime delayed operation of lower zone detected difference, tZLConditional timer for sending of carrier signal, tCSConditional timer for tripping of power swings, tTripTimer for blocking the non-con-trolled zone trip, tBlkTr






± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Function Value

Min. operate current (5-30) % of Ir in steps of 1 %

Resetting ratio typical 105 %

Resetting time typical 65 ms


for both reactive and resistiv reach (0.1 - 400) Ω/phase in steps of 0.01Ω

Setting range of timersfor impedance zones (0-60) s in steps of 1 ms


± 5 %

Static angular accuracy at 0° and 85°voltage range (0.2-1.1) x Urcurrent range (0.6-30) x Ir

± 5°

Max dynamic overreach at 85° measured with CVT’s 0.5 < SIR < 30

± 5 %



Operational mode Intertrip/Permissive under-reach/Permissive over-reach/Blocking

Coordination timersCoordination timer, tCoordMinimum send time, tSend-Min

(0-60) s in steps of 1 ms (0-60) s in steps of 1 ms

± 0.5 % ± 10 ms± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Unblocking logicsecurity timer, tSecurity (0-60) s in steps of 1 ms ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms


Version 2.2-00

3.7 Current reversal and weak infeed logic (ZCAL)

3.8 Automatic switch onto fault function for distance protection (SOTF)

3.9 Dead line detection (DLD)

3.10 Local acceleration logic (ZCLC)


Operate time difference between higher and lower zone, tDZTime delayed operation of lower zone detected difference, tZLConditional timer for sending of carrier signal, tCSConditional timer for tripping of power swings, tTripTimer for blocking the non-con-trolled zone trip, tBlkTr






± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

± 0.5 % ± 10 ms


Weak end infeed trip and echo function

Operate voltage U<phase - phase

phase - earthCoordination time, tWEI

(20-170) % Ur in steps of 1%

(10-100) % Ur in steps of 1%(0-60) s in steps of 1 ms

± 2.5 % of Ur,at U ≤ Ur ± 2.5 % of Ur,at U > Ur ± 2.5 % of Ur ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Current reversal logicactivation time delay, tPickuptime delay of CR, CS, tDelay


± 0.5 % ± 10 ms± 0.5 % ± 10 ms


Minimum duration for openbreaker condition

200 ms fixed ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms


Automatic check of dead line condition

operate phase voltageoperate phase current

(10-100) % of Ur in steps of 1%(5-100) % of Ir in steps of 1%

± 2.5 % of Ur ± 2.5 % of Ir

Function Setting range

Operation zone extension On / Off

Operation loss of load On / Off

Technical data

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 245-XENPage 3 – 18

4 Current, phase wise

4.1 Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection (IOC)

4.2 Time delayed phase overcurrent protection (TOC)

4.3 Stub protection (STUB)

Setting range Operate time Accuracy

Operate current I>>phase measuring elements

residual measuring elements

(50-2000)% of Irin steps of 1%

(50-2000)% of Irin steps of 1%

-± 2.5 % of Ir,at I ≤ Ir ± 2.5 % of I,at I > Ir

± 2.5 % of Ir ,at I ≤ Ir ± 2.5 % of I,at I > Ir

Operate time at I > 10 x Iset

max 15 ms

Dynamic overreach at τ < 100 ms

- - < 5 %


Operate current I>phase measuring elements


(10-400) % of Ir in steps of 1 %


± 2.5 % of Ir,at I ≤ Ir ± 2.5 % of I,at I > Ir ± 2.5 % of Ir,at I ≤ Ir ± 2.5 % of I,at I > Ir

Time delayphase measuring elementsresidual measuring elements

(0-60) s in steps of 1ms(0-60) s in steps of 1ms

± 0.5 % ±10 ms± 0.5 % ±10 ms

Dynamic overreach at τ < 100 ms - < 5 %


Operate current I> (20 - 300) % of Ir ± 2.5 % of Ir,at I ≤ Ir± 2.5 % of I,at I > Ir


Version 2.2-00

4.4 Breaker faílure protection (BFP)


Operate current (one measuring element per phase)

(5-200) % of Ir in steps of 1 % ± 2.5 % of Ir,at I ≤ Ir ± 2.5 % of I,at I > Ir

Retrip time delay t1 (0-60) s in steps of 1 ms ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Back-up trip time delay t2 (0-60) s in steps of 1 ms ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Value

Trip operate time max 18 ms

Operate time for current detec-tion

max 10 ms

Technical data

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 245-XENPage 3 – 20

5 Current, residual (earth fault)

5.1 Residual current

Table 1: Additions to the IOC block specifikations


Basic current, inverse time delay: 3I0

(5-300) % of Ir in steps of 1 % ± 5 % of set value

Selection of E/F protection Non-directional or Directional

Operate value for directionalcurrent measurement

forward 3I0 at ϕ = 65°reverse

(5-35) % of Ir in steps of 1 %60 % of the setting for forward operation

± 1.5 % Ir

± 1.5 % Ir

Characteristic angle 65° lagging ± 5° at 20 V and Iset = 35 % of Ir

Independent time delay (0-60) s in steps of 1 ms ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Normal inverse characteristic k = (0.05-1.1) in steps of 0.01 IEC 255-3 class 5 ± 60 ms

Very inverse characteristic k = (0.05-1.1) in steps of 0.01 IEC 255-3 class 7.5 ± 60 ms

Extremely inverse characteristic k = (0.05-1.1) in steps of 0.01 IEC 255-3 class 7.5 ± 60 ms

Logarithmic characteristic± 5 % of t at I = (1.3-29) x 3I0

Min. operate current for inverse characteristic IMin (100-400) % of 3I0 in steps of 1 % ± 5 % of Iset

tMin for inverse characteristic (0-60) s in steps of 1 ms ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Rated voltage Ur

Minimum polarising voltage 1 % of Ur ± 5 % at 50 Hz-15 % to -5 % at 60 Hz

Operate time Value

Resetting time < 70 ms

Table 2: Earth fault scheme communication logic (EFC)


Communication scheme None, Permissive, Blocking

Coordination timer, tCoord (0-60) s in steps of 1 ms ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

t 5,8 1,35 I3I0-------ln⋅–=


Version 2.2-00

Table 3: Additional earth fault scheme communication logic (EFCA)


Operate voltage for WEI tripCurrent reversal pickup timerCurrent reversal delay timer

(5-70) % of Ur in steps of 1 %(0-60) s in steps of 1 ms(0-60) s in steps of 1 ms

± 5 % of set value± 0.5 % ± 10 ms± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Table 4: 4 step earth fault protection (EF4)


Current level for step 1 (50-2500) % of Ir in steps of 1 % ± 5 % of set value

Definite time delay for step 1 (0-60) s in steps of 1 ms ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms





Current level for step 4 definite time delay or minimum operate current for inverse time delay


Definite time delay for step 4 or inverse time additional delay

(0-60) s in steps of 1 ms ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Basic current for inverse time delay


Time multiplier for inverse time delay

(0.05-1.10) s in steps of 0.01 s ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Inverse time minimum delay (0-60) s in steps of 1 ms ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Operate value for directional current measurement

forward 3I0 at ϕ = 65°reverse

(5-40) % of Ir in steps of 1 %60 % of the setting for forward operation

± 1.5 % Ir

± 1.5 % Ir

Level of harmonic restrain (20 or 32) % of fundamental level

Characteristic angle 65° lagging ± 5° at 20 V and Iset = 35 % of Ir

Normal inverse characteristic k = (0.05-1.1) in steps of 0.01 IEC 255-3 class 5 ± 60 ms

Very inverse characteristic k = (0.05-1.1) in steps of 0.01 IEC 255-3 class 7.5 ± 60 ms

Extremely inverse characteristic k = (0.05-1.1) in steps of 0.01 IEC 255-3 class 7.5 ± 60 ms

Logarithmic characteristic± 5 % of t at I = (1.3-29) x 3I0

Switch onto fault active time, t4U (0-60) s in steps of 1 ms ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Rated voltage Ur

t 5,8 1,35– lnI

3I0-------⋅=

Technical data

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 245-XENPage 3 – 22

6 Voltage

6.1 Time delayed undervoltage protection (TUV)

6.2 Time delayed overvoltage and residual overvoltage protection (TOV)


Operate voltage U< (10-100) % of Ur in steps of 1% ± 2.5 % of Ur Time delay (0-60) s in steps of 1ms ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms


Operate voltage U>phase measuring elements


(50-200)% of Ur in steps of 1%

(5-100)% of Ur in steps of 1%

± 2.5 % of Ur,at U ≤ Ur ± 2.5 % of U,at U > Ur ± 2.5 % of Ur

Time delayphase measuring elementsresidual measuring elements

(0-60) s in steps of 1ms(0-60) s in steps of 1ms

± 0.5 % ± 10 ms± 0.5 % ± 10 ms


Version 2.2-00

7 Power system supervision

7.1 Broken conductor check (BRC)

7.2 Loss of voltage check (LOV)

7.3 Overload supervision (OVLD)


Operate currenttime delay

(10-100) % of Ir in steps of 1 %(0-60) s in steps of 1 ms

± 2.5 % of Ir± 0.5 % ± 10 ms


Operate voltage U< (10-100) % of Ur in steps of 1% ± 2.5 % of Ur


Operate current I>

Time delay



± 2.5 % of Ir,at I ≤ Ir ± 2.5 % of I,at I > Ir ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Technical data

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 245-XENPage 3 – 24

8 Secondary system supervision

8.1 Current circuit supervision (CTSU)

8.2 Fuse failure supervision (FUSE)


Operate current I> (5 - 100)% of Ir in steps of 1% ± 2.5 % of Ir


Zero-sequence quantities:operate voltage 3U0operate current 3I0

(10 - 50)% of Ur in steps of 1%(10 - 50)% of Ir in steps of 1%

± 2.5 % of Ur ± 2.5 % of Ir

± 2.5 % of Ur ± 2.5 % of Ir


Version 2.2-00

9 Control

9.1 Syncro- and energising check (SYN1-SYN4)

Note: The technical data includes data for the phasing function, whichcannot be present without the syncro-check function.

9.2 Autoreclosing (AR01-AR04)


Synchro check frequency difference limit, FreqDiffvoltage difference limit, UDiffphase difference limit,PhaseDiff

(50-300) mHz in steps of 10 mHz

(5-50) % of Ur in steps of 1 %

(5-75)° in steps of 1°

≤ 20 mHz

± 2.5 % of Ur

± 2°

Energisingvoltage level high, UHighvoltage level low, ULowauto-energising period,tAutoEnergmanual energising period,tManEnerg

(50-120)% of Ur in steps of 1%(10-100) % of Ur in steps of 1%

0-60) s in steps of 1 ms


± 2.5 % of Ur ± 2.5 % of Ur

± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Phasingslip frequency, FreqDiffSynchbreaker closing pulse dura-tion, tPulsebreaker closing time, tBreaker

(50-500) mHz in steps of 10mHz

(0-60) s in steps of 1ms

(0-60) s in steps of 1ms

≤ 20 mHz

± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Phase shift ϕline - ϕbusVoltage ratio Ubus/Uline

(0-360)° in steps of 5°(0.20-5.00) in steps of 0.01

Operate time Value

For synchro check functionFor energising check function

typical 190 mstypical 80 ms


Number of autoreclosing shots 1 - 4

Number of autoreclosing pro-grams

8

Auto-reclosing open time:shot 1 - t1 1phshot 1 - t1 2phshot 1 - t1 3phshot 2 - t2 3phshot 3 - t3 3phshot 4 - t4 3ph

(0-60) s in steps of 1 ms(0-60) s in steps of 1 ms(0-60) s in steps of 1 ms(0-9000) s in steps of 0.1 s(0-9000) s in steps of 0.1 s(0-9000) s in steps of 0.1 s

± 0.5 % ±10 ms± 0.5 % ±10 ms± 0.5 % ±10 ms± 0.5 % ±10 ms± 0.5 % ±10 ms± 0.5 % ±10 ms

Reclaim time - tReclaim (0-9000) s in steps of 0.1 s ± 0.5 % ±10 ms

Inhibit reclosing, reset time -tIn-hibit

(0-60) s in steps of 1 ms ± 0.5 % ±10 ms

Duration of reclosing pulse - tPulse

(0-60) s in steps of 1 ms ± 0.5 % ±10 ms

Synchro-check/Dead line time limit - tSync

(0-9000) s in steps of 0.1 s ± 0.5 % ±10 ms

Breaker closed before start - tCB 5 s ± 0.5 % ±10 ms

Resetting of “AR Started“ after reclosing - tTrip (0-60) s in steps of 1 ms ± 0.5 % ±10 ms

Wait for Master release - tWait (0-9000) s in steps of 0.1 s ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Technical data

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 245-XENPage 3 – 26

10 Logic

10.1 Trip logic(TRIP)

10.2 Pole discordance logic (PD)

10.3 Communication channel test logic (CCHT)

10.4 Binary signal transfer to remote end (RTC)

Note: The RTC function uses internal logic signals and/or a binary I/Omodule as a data source, and remote end data communication links forcommunication with remote end terminal(s). See “Introduction” on page 9for specifications of the binary I/O module, and “Remote end data com-munication” on page 28 for specifications of the remote end data commu-nication links.

10.5 Binary signal interbay communication (CM01-CM80)

Note: The CM01-CM80 function blocks uses internal logic signals and/orbinary I/O modules as a data source, and the LON protocol based commu-nication bus for communication with other terminals and/or a station con-trol system. See “Introduction” on page 9 for specifications of the binaryI/O module, and the following section for serial communication specifica-tions. The actual number of available function blocks may be less than thenumber referenced, depending on ordered options.


Tripping action 3-ph, 1/3-ph, 1/2/3-ph


Auxiliary-contact-based function - time delay

(0-60) s in steps of 1 ms ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms


Time interval for automatic start of testing cycle, tStart

(0-90000) s in steps of 0.1 s ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Time interval available for suc-cessful test of an external func-tion, tWait

(0-90000) s in steps of 0.1 s ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Minimum time interval for repeated tests of an external function, tCh

(0-90000) s in steps of 0.1 s ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Duration of CCHT-CS functional output signal, tCS

(0-90000) s in steps of 0.1 s ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Duration of a CCHT-CHOK func-tional output signal, tChOK

(0-90000) s in steps of 0.1 s ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Duration of an inhibit condition after the CCHT-BLOCK input sig-nal resets, tInh

(0-90000) s in steps of 0.1 s ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms


Version 2.2-00

10.6 Serial communication

Table 5: SPA protocol

Function Value

Protocol SPA

Communication speed 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 bit/s

Slave number 1 to 899

Remote change of active group allowed yes/no

Remote changed of settings allowed yes/no

Connectors and optical fibres glass or plastic

Table 6: LON protocol

Function Value

Protocol LON

Communication speed 1.25 Mbit/s


Table 7: IEC 870-5-103 protocol

Function Value

Protocol IEC 870-5-103

Communication speed 9600, 19200 bit/s


Table 8: Front panel connection

Function Value

Protocol SPA

Communication speed 300, 1200, 2400, 4800 or 9600 bit/s

Slave number 1 to 899

Remote change of active group allowed yes

Remote changed of settings allowed yes

Connectors special electric/optic cable

Technical data

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 245-XENPage 3 – 28

10.7 Remote end data communication

Function Value

Data communication between the terminals

transmission typedata transfer rate

synchronous56 or 64 kbit/s, For G.703 only 64 kbit/s

Galvanic interface Connection

Interface type V.36/V11 Co-directional

V.36/V11 Contra-direc-tional

X.21/X27

RS530/RS422 Co-direc-tionalRS530/RS422 Contra-directionalG.703

According to CCITTAccording to CCITTAccording to CCITTAccording to EIAAccording to EIAAccording to CCITT

Connector type D-sub 15 or 25 pins (G.703 screw)

Short-range galvanic modem

RangeCableLine interfaceConnectorIsolation

max 4 kmTwisted pair, minimum 2 pairsBalanced symmetrical three-state current loop5-pin divisible connector with screew connectionGalvanic isolation through optocouplers and isolating DC/DC-converter

Optical interface

Type of fibreGraded-index multimode 50/125µm

Single mode9/125 µm

Optical connector

Wave length Optical transmitter

injected power Optical receiver

sensitivityTransmission distance

Type FC,e.g. Diamond HFC-131300 nmLED-16 dBmPIN diode-40 dBmmax 20 km

Type FC-PC,e.g. Diamond HPC-101300 nmLED-21 dBmPIN diode -40 dBmmax 30 km

Interface type ABB FOX specific protocol

Short-range fibre optical modem

Transmission distanceOptical fibreOptical connectorsOptical budgetInterface type

max 5 km1300 nm, multimode fibreST15dBFiberdata specific protocol


Version 2.2-00

11 Monitoring

11.1 Disturbance recorder (DREP)

11.2 Event recorder (EVR)

Function Setting range

Number of binary signals 0 - 48

Number of analogue signals 0 - 10

Sampling rate 2 kHz

Recording bandwidth (5-250) Hz

Overcurrent triggering (0 - 5000) % of Ir in steps of 1 %

Undercurrent triggering (0 - 200) % of Ir in steps of 1 %

Overvoltage triggering (0 - 200) % of Ur in steps of 1 % at 100 V sec

Undervoltage triggering (0 - 110) % of Ur in steps of 1 %

Pre-fault time (10 - 300) ms in steps of 10 ms

Post fault time (100 - 3000) ms in steps of 100 ms

Limit time (500 - 4000) ms in steps of 100 ms

Number of recorded disturbances Max 10 disturbances

Total recording time with 10 analogue and 48 binary signals *) recorded

maximum 40 s

Voltage channelsdynamic rangeresolutionaccuracy at rated frequency fr

U ≤ Ur U > Ur

(0.01-2.0) x Ur at 100 V sec.0.1 % of Ur

± 2.5 % of Ur ± 2.5 % of U

Current channelsdynamic range

without dc offsetwith full dc offset

resolutionaccuracy at rated frequency fr

I ≤ Ir I > Ir

(0.01-110) x Ir(0.01-60) x Ir0.5 % of Ir

± 2.5 % of Ir ± 2.5 % of I

Built-in calendar for 30 years with leap years

*) The amount of harmonics can affect the maximum storage time

Function Value

Time tagging resolutionEvent buffering capacity

Max. number of events/disturbance reportMax. number of disturbance reports

Time tagging error with synchronisation once/1sTime tagging error with synchronisation once/10sTime tagging error with synchronisation once/60s

(minute pulse synchronisation)Time tagging error without synchronisation

1 ms

15010± 1.5 ms± 1.5 ms

± 1.5 ms± 3 ms/min

Technical data

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 245-XENPage 3 – 30

11.3 Fault locator (FLC)

11.4 Increased measuring accuracy


Distance to fault locatorreach for Ir =1 A in

resistive directionreactive direction

phase selection

(0 - 1500) Ω/phase(0 - 1500) Ω/phaseinternal

± 2.5 % (typical)


Frequency (0.95-1.05) x fr ± 0.2 Hz

Voltage (RMS) (0.8-1.2) x Ur ± 0.25 % of Ur,at U ≤Ur± 0.25 % of U,at U > Ur

Current (RMS) (0.2-2) x Ir ± 0.25 % of Ir,at I ≤ Ir± 0.25 % of I,at I > Ir

Active power *) at |cos ϕ| > 0.90.8 x Ur < U < 1.2 x Ur

0.2 x Ir < I < 2 x Ir

± 0.5 % of Pr,at P ≤ Pr

*)

± 0.5 % of P,at P >Pr

*)

*) Pr active power at U = Ur , I = Ir and |cos ϕ| = 1


Version 2.2-00

12 Metering

12.1 Pulse counter


Cycle time for pulse counter (0.5-60) min in steps of 30 s ± 0.1 % of set value

Technical data

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 245-XENPage 3 – 32

33Ordering data sheet

13 OrderingThe basic version of REL 521 is a phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth linedistance protection terminal with five impedance measuring zones andscheme communication logic including logic for current reversal andweak end infeed. Instantaneous and time-delayed phase overcurrent pro-tection and event recorder are also included in the basic version.

1MRK 580 348-XEN


Ordering data sheet

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 348-XENPage 3 – 34

Basic functions

Self-supervision with internal event recorder

Real-time clock with external time synchronisation

Four groups of setting parameters

Local Human Machine Interface (HMI)

Configurable logic

Service value reading

Monitoring of ac analogue measurements

Monitoring of dc analogue measurements

Ordering Number: 1MRK 002 494-AA Quantity:

Includes basic functions and the selected functions and hardware options below

Basic data:

Frequency, fr 50/60 Hz

Dc voltage, EL 48/60/110/125/220/250 V

Basic data to specify:

Ac inputs

1 A, 110 V 1MRK 000 157-MA

5 A, 110 V 1MRK 000 157-NA

1 A, 220 V 1MRK 000 157-VA

5 A, 220 V 1MRK 000 157-WA

Interface dc voltage

24/30 V 1MRK 000 179-EA

48/60 V 1MRK 000 179-AB

110/125 V 1MRK 000 179-BB

220/250 V 1MRK 000 179-CB

Factory configurations

Standard configuration, three pole tripping Quantity:

Standard configuration, single or two pole tripping Quantity:

Customer-specific configuration Quantity:

Ordering data sheet 1MRK 580 348-XENPage 3 – 35

Version 2.2-00

Functions;

= function always included

Line impedance

3 zones phase-phase protection 1MRK 001 456-CA

3 zones phase-earth protection 1MRK 001 456-DA

Additional zone 4 protection 1MRK 001 456-FA

Additional zone 5 protection 1MRK 001 456-GA

Phase selection logic 1MRK 001 456-KA

Power swing detection 1MRK 001 456-LA

Power swing additional logic 1MRK 001 456-SA

Scheme communication logic 1MRK 001 456-NA

Current reversal and weak end infeed logic 1MRK 001 455-PA

Automatic switch onto fault logic 1MRK 001 456-RA

Local acceleration logic 1MRK 001 456-TA

Current, phase wise

Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 1MRK 001 457-AA

Time-delayed phase overcurrent protection 1MRK 001 457-BA

Time-delayed two step phase overcurrent protection 1MRK 001 459-LA

Stub protection 1MRK 001 457-TA

Breaker failure protection 1MRK 001 458-AA

Current, residual (earth fault)

Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (non-directional) 1MRK 001 456-VA

Time-delayed residual overcurrent protection (non-directional) 1MRK 001 456-XA

Inverse time residual overcurrent protection (non-directional)Note: Not selectable in combination with 4-step residual overcurrent prot.

1MRK 001 456-YA

Residual directional check, inverse time residual overcurrent protection and communication logic (direc-tional element)

1MRK 001 456-ZA

4-step residual overcurrent protection (directional and non-directional) 1MRK 001 459-HA

Voltage, phase wise

Time-delayed undervoltage protection 1MRK 001 457-RA

Time-delayed overvoltage protection 1MRK 001 457-GA

Voltage, residual (earth fault)

Time-delayed residual overvoltage protection 1MRK 001 459-FA

Power system supervision

Broken conductor check 1MRK 001 457-UA

Loss of voltage check 1MRK 001 457-VA

Overload supervision 1MRK 001 457-FA

Pole slip protection 1MRK 001 457-SA

Secondary system supervision

Current circuit supervision (current-based) 1MRK 001 457-XA

Fuse failure supervision (Zero sequence) 1MRK 001 457-ZA

Ordering data sheet

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 348-XENPage 3 – 36

ControlNote: Only one alternative for Command control, Synch-check and Autorecloser can be selected respectively.

Command control (16 signals) 1MRK 001 458-EA

Synchro-check and energising-check, single CB 1MRK 001 458-GA

Synchro-check and energising-check, double CB 1MRK 001 458-FA

Synchro-check with phasing and energising-check, single CB 1MRK 001 458-KA

Synchro-check with phasing and energising-check, double CB 1MRK 001 457-HA

Autorecloser logic, 1 and/or 3 phase, single CB 1MRK 001 458-LA

Autorecloser logic, 1 and/or 3 phase, double CB 1MRK 001 457-KA

Autorecloser logic, 3 phase, single CB 1MRK 001 458-MA

Autorecloser logic, 3 phase, double CB 1MRK 001 457-LA

Logic

Three pole tripping logic 1MRK 001 458-VA

Single or two pole tripping logic 1MRK 001 458-XA

Pole discordance logic (contact based) 1MRK 001 458-UA

Additional configurable logic 1MRK 001 457-MA

Communication channel test logic 1MRK 001 459-NA

Binary signal transfer to remote endNote: See Communication module alternatives for selecting a comm. module

1MRK 001 458-ZA

Binary signal interbay communication, high speed (protection application) 1MRK 001 455-RA

Monitoring

Disturbance recorder, 40 s 1MRK 001 458-NA

Event recorder 1MRK 001 459-KA

Fault locator 1MRK 001 458-RA

Trip value recorderNote: This function is already included in the Fault locator, if selected

1MRK 001 458-SA

Increased measuring accuracy for U, I, P, Q 1MRK 000 597-PA

Metering

Pulse counter logic 1MRK 001 458-TA

Hardware options;

Casing

Case size 3/4 x 19" (max. 8 I/O)1MRK 000 151-GA

Standard

1/2 x 19" (max. 3 I/O)1MRK 000 151-FA

Optional

Combined binary input/output and output modules (max)4 3

mA input module (max) 1 1

Note: The communication module option, if selected, occupies one I/O position


Version 2.2-00

I/O modules

8 modules are available in the 3/4 x 19" case and 3 modules are available in the 1/2 x 19" case.

InterfaceDC voltage

Quantity Ordering number

Binary input module(16 inputs)

24/30 V 1MRK 000 508-DA

48/60 V 1MRK 000 508-AA

110/125 V 1MRK 000 508-BA

220/250 V 1MRK 000 508-CA

Binary input/output module (8 inputs and 12 outputs)

24/30 V 1MRK 000 173-GA

48/60 V 1MRK 000 173-AB

110/125 V 1MRK 000 173-BB

220/250 V 1MRK 000 173-CB

Binary output module (24 single outputs or 12 command outputs)

1MRK 000 614-AA

mA input module (6 channels) 1MRK 000 284-AA

Note: One binary input/output module is required for standard factory configuration.

Remote end data communication module alternativesNote: Applicable only when function Binary signal transfer to remote end is selected. Only one alternative can be selected. Optical fibre or electrical wire is not included.

V.35/V.36 contra-directional galvanic interface 1MRK 000 185-BA

X.21 galvanic interface 1MRK 000 185-CA

RS 530/422 contra-directional galvanic interface 1MRK 000 185-EA

Fibre optical modem 1MRK 000 195-AA

Short range galvanic modem 1MRK 001 370-AA

Short range fibre optical modem 1MRK 001 370-BA

V.35/V.36 and RS 530/422 co-directional galvanic interfaces On Request

Serial communication modules

Serial communication for SMS and SCS; (one alternative per port)

SMS, port SPA/IEC 870-5-103 (location X13)

Plastic/Plastic 1MRK 000 168-FA

Glass/Glass 1MRK 000 168-DA

LED indication modules

IB LED indicators 1MRK 000 008-DA

SCS, port LON (location X15)

Plastic/Plastic 1MRK 000 168-EA

Glass/Glass 1MRK 000 168-DA

Engineering facilities

HMI languageSecond language besides English

German 1MRK 001 459-AA

Russian 1MRK 001 459-BA

French 1MRK 001 459-CA

Spanish 1MRK 001 459-DA

Italian 1MRK 001 459-EA

Ordering data sheet

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 348-XENPage 3 – 38


Version 2.2-00

Customer-specific ordering

Customer-specific order number

Combiflex

COMBITEST test switch module RTXP 24 mounted withthe terminal in RHGS6 case with window door 1MRK 000 371-CA

Internal earthing RK 926 215-BB External earthing RK 926 215-BC

On/Off switch for the dc supply RK 795 017-AA

Mounting details with IP40 degree of protection from the front:

19" rack 1MRK 000 020-BR

Wall mounting 1MRK 000 020-DA

Flush mounting 1MRK 000 020-Y

additional for IP54 (protection terminal only) 1MKC 980 001-2

Semi-flush mounting 1MRK 000 020-BS

additional for IP54 (protection terminal only) 1MKC 980 001-2

Accessories:

User documentation

Technical reference manual, REL 521 Quantity: 1MRK 606 004-UEN

Combiflex

Key switch (for locked Settings) Quantity: 1MRK 000 611-A

Resistor unit for creation of 3Uo voltage (RXTMA 1) Quantity: 1MRK 000 486-AA

Communication (remote terminal communication)

Interface converter (dc voltage 48 V)

RS 530/422 contra-directional to G.703 co-directional converter 1) Quantity: 1MRK 001 295-AA

Optical/electrical converters for short-range optical modems (dc voltage 48-110 V)

V.35/V.36 Quantity: 1MRK 001 295-CA

X.21/G.703 / RS 530 Quantity: 1MRK 001 295-DA

Fibre optic repeater and multiplexer (FOX 20)2) available from ABB Network Partner Ltd (Turgi, Switzerland)

1) For dc-supply 110-250 V an extra dc/dc converter type RXTUG 22H is needed, see 1MRK 513 001-BEN.2) Compatible with Fibre optical modem according to 1MRK 000 195-AA.

Configuration and monitoring tools

Front connection cable for PC (Opto/9-pol D-sub) Quantity: 1MKC 950 001-1

CAP 531, Graphical configuration tool (IEC 1131-3) Quantity: 1MRK 000 876-KB

CAP/REx 500, CAP software module Quantity: 1MRK 000 876-PA

LNT 505, LON configuration tool Quantity: 1MRS 151 400

SLDT, LON configuration module REx 500available on our website: www.abb.se/net

1MRK 001 700-4

SMS-BASE, Basic program for all SMS applications Quantity: RS 881 007-AA

SM/REx 500, SMS software module Quantity: 1MRK 000 314-MA

REPORT, program for event and alarm handling in SMS Quantity: RS 881 011-AA

RECOM Disturbance collection program Quantity: 1MRK 000 077-DC

REVAL Disturbance evaluation program, English version Quantity: 1MRK 000 078-AB

MicroSCADA tools

LIB 520, MicroSCADA engineering tool Quantity: On request

Ordering data sheet

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 348-XENPage 3 – 40

For our reference and statistics we would be pleased to be provided with the following application data:

Country: End user:

Station name: Voltage level: kV

1

Contents Page

Installation and commissioning ................................................................4–5Receiving and storage.................................................................................... 4–5

Installation ...................................................................................................... 4–5Mechanical installation ......................................................................... 4–5

19" rack installation.................................................................... 4–5Rack mounting - Example 1 ............................................... 4–6Rack mounting - Example 2 ............................................... 4–6

Flush mounting .......................................................................... 4–8Semi-flush mounting .................................................................. 4–9Wall mounting .......................................................................... 4–10Wall mounting .......................................................................... 4–10

Electrical connections ........................................................................ 4–11Voltage connectors ............................................................................ 4–13Fibre optic connections ...................................................................... 4–14

Setting and configuration.............................................................................. 4–15Local human-machine interface (HMI) ............................................... 4–15Front communication.......................................................................... 4–15Serial communication......................................................................... 4–16Configuration of inputs and outputs ................................................... 4–17

Commissioning............................................................................................. 4–18Test of internal circuits ....................................................................... 4–19Secondary injection test ..................................................................... 4–19Check of external connections ........................................................... 4–19

COMBITEST test-switch RTXP 24 .......................................... 4–19Functional test.................................................................................... 4–20Test termination ................................................................................. 4–20

Fault tracing.................................................................................................. 4–21Using information on the local HMI .................................................... 4–21Using front-connected PC or SMS..................................................... 4–22

Repair instruction ......................................................................................... 4–23

Maintenance................................................................................................. 4–24

Local human-machine interface ..............................................................4–25Introduction................................................................................................... 4–25

Human-machine interface module - design.................................................. 4–25LEDs .................................................................................................. 4–26LCD display........................................................................................ 4–26Buttons............................................................................................... 4–26

HMI modes ................................................................................................... 4–28Idle mode ........................................................................................... 4–28Reporting mode.................................................................................. 4–28Configuration mode............................................................................ 4–28Test mode .......................................................................................... 4–28

Menu window ............................................................................................... 4–29

Dialogue windows ........................................................................................ 4–31Starting a dialogue ............................................................................. 4–31

Installation, commissioning and human-machine interface

Installation, commissioning and human-machine interfacePage 4 – 2

Idle mode ........................................................................................... 4–32Confirming a command ...................................................................... 4–32Selecting a command......................................................................... 4–32Cancel a command ............................................................................ 4–33Selecting and cancelling a command................................................. 4–33Commands with parameter settings................................................... 4–33

Data window................................................................................................. 4–34Reading and setting values................................................................ 4–34Reading and setting of non-numerical parameters ............................ 4–35Reading and setting strings................................................................ 4–36Setting local terminal time .................................................................. 4–36Additional information......................................................................... 4–37Saving the settings in a setting group ................................................ 4–37

LED indication module............................................................................. 4-41Introduction.................................................................................................... 4-41

Design ........................................................................................................... 4-41LEDs ................................................................................................... 4-41Acknowledgment/reset ................................................................................................... 4-41Description text ................................................................................... 4-41

Menu tree...................................................................................................4–43General......................................................................................................... 4–43

Disturbance report menu.............................................................................. 4–44Disturbances ...................................................................................... 4–44Calculate distance to fault .................................................................. 4–44Manual trigg ....................................................................................... 4–44Clear disturbance report..................................................................... 4–44

Service report menu ..................................................................................... 4–45Service values.................................................................................... 4–45Phasors .............................................................................................. 4–45Functions............................................................................................ 4–45I/O ...................................................................................................... 4–45Disturbance report.............................................................................. 4–45Active group ....................................................................................... 4–45Time ................................................................................................... 4–45Internal signals ................................................................................... 4–45

Settings menu .............................................................................................. 4–46Disturbance report.............................................................................. 4–46Functions............................................................................................ 4–46Change active group .......................................................................... 4–46Time ................................................................................................... 4–46

Terminal report menu ................................................................................... 4–47Self- supervision................................................................................. 4–47Identity number .................................................................................. 4–47Modules.............................................................................................. 4–47Analogue inputs ................................................................................. 4–47

Configuration menu ...................................................................................... 4–48Analogue inputs ................................................................................. 4–48I/O modules........................................................................................ 4–48Differential function ............................................................................ 4–48

Installation, commissioning and human-machine interface Page 4 – 3

Terminal communication .................................................................... 4–48SPA communication................................................................. 4–48IEC communication.................................................................. 4–49LON communication ................................................................ 4–49Remote terminal communication ............................................. 4–49

Time synchronising source ................................................................ 4–49Local HMI blockset............................................................................. 4–49Identifiers............................................................................................ 4–49

Command menu........................................................................................... 4–50

Test menu .................................................................................................... 4–51

Appendix – Menu tree structure for REx 5xx terminals ........................4–53Introduction................................................................................................... 4–53

Menu tree structure ...................................................................................... 4–54Disturbance report.............................................................................. 4–54Service report..................................................................................... 4–55

General .................................................................................... 4–55Functions, part I ....................................................................... 4–56Functions, part II ...................................................................... 4–57Functions, part III ..................................................................... 4–58Functions, part IV..................................................................... 4–59Functions, part V...................................................................... 4–60Functions, part VI..................................................................... 4–61Functions, part VII.................................................................... 4–62I/O ............................................................................................ 4–63Remaining menus.................................................................... 4–64

Settings .............................................................................................. 4–65Functions, part I ....................................................................... 4–66Functions, part II ...................................................................... 4–67Functions, part III ..................................................................... 4–68Functions, part IV..................................................................... 4–69Functions, part V...................................................................... 4–70Functions, part VI..................................................................... 4–71Remaining menus.................................................................... 4–72

Terminal report................................................................................... 4–73Configuration...................................................................................... 4–75

Part I ........................................................................................ 4–75Part II ....................................................................................... 4–76Part III ...................................................................................... 4–77

Command........................................................................................... 4–78Test .................................................................................................... 4–79

4Installation and commissioning

1 Receiving and storageRemove the terminal from its transport case and perform a visual inspec-tion to see any possible transport damage. Check that the delivered termi-nal has the correct data concerning rated current, rated voltage and rateddc voltage on the rating plate at the front of the terminal.

If storing the terminal before installation, it must be done in a dry, dust-free place and preferably in its original transport case.

2 InstallationThe terminal is assembled in a closed case of 1/2, 3/4 or full width of astandard 19-inches wide rack. The height is 6U.

If a COMBITEST test-switch is included an additional box type RHGS isused. It has the same principal design as the terminal case and the width1/4 of 19-inches. It is possible to mount the RHGS-box by the side of aREx 5xx terminal smaller than 19-inches.

2.1 Mechanical installation

The REx 5xx terminal is designed with the mechanical packaging andconnecting system described in the “Buyer’s Guide Series REx 5xxMechanical design and mounting accessories”.

Most of the REx 5xx terminals can be flush, semi-flush, rack or wallmounted with the use of different mounting kits. Semi-flush mountingcannot be applied for the 1/1 of 19-inches wide terminals which have ven-tilating openings at the top and bottom part. The mounting details forsemi-flush installation cover the ventilating openings.

The degree of protection is IP 40, according to IEC 529, for terminalswith the widths 1/2 and 3/4 of 19-inches. For the 1/1 of 19-inches wideterminals IP 30 is valid for the top and bottom part.

IP 54, for the front area at flush installations, can be obtained with acces-sories. The accessories are mounted at the production of the terminalwhich means that it must be specified at the ordering. The rear side fulfilsIP 20.

For different types of mounting, special mounting kits are available. Allmounting kits contain assembly instructions.

A protective cover for the rear side of the terminal is available.

Avoid dusty, damp places or conditions that cause rapid temperature vari-ations, powerful vibrations or shocks.

2.1.1 19" rack installation

For installation of the terminal in a 19-inches rack structure, mountingangles are needed. If two terminals are mounted side-by-side, an addi-tional side-by-side mounting kit is needed as well. All necessary screwholes in the box are already prepared.

1MRK 580 289-XEN


Installation and commissioning 1MRK 580 289-XENPage 4 – 5

Version 2.2-00

2.1.1.1 Rack mounting - Example 1

One terminal mounted in a 19-inches structure

• If the size of the terminal is 1/2 of 19-inches: One set of mounting details for 1/2x19” terminal width (including eight screws/TORX T20).

• If the size of the terminal is 3/4 of 19-inches: One set of mounting details for 3/4x19” terminal width (including eight screws/TORX T20).

• If the size of the terminal is 1/1 of 19-inches: One set of mounting details for 19” terminal width (including eight screws/TORX T 20).

Figure 1: One terminal mounted in a 19” structure.

2.1.1.2 Rack mounting - Example 2

One terminal with an additional box size 1/4 of 19-inches mounted in a19-inches structure.

• If the size of the terminal is 1/2 of 19-inches: One set of mounting details for 3/4x19” terminal width (including eight screws/TORX T20) and one side-by-side mounting kit (including eight screws/TORX T 20).

(98000037)

1

2

3

4

Installation and commissioning

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 289-XENPage 4 – 6

• If the size of the terminal is 3/4 of 19-inches: One set of mounting details for 19” terminal width (including eight screws/TORX T20) and one side-by-side mounting kit (including eight screws/TORX T20).

Figure 2: One terminal with an additional box size 1/4 x 19”.

(98000030)

Mounting angle

Mounting angle

Screws (TORX T20)

Screws (TORX T20)

Side-by-side mounting plate

Side-by-side mounting plate


Version 2.2-00

2.1.2 Flush mounting For flush installation of the terminal in a panel cut-out a mounting kit isavailable. It includes:

• Four side holders.

• Four small screws (grip type TORX T10).

• Four big screws (grip type TORX T25).

• Assembly instruction.

• A sealing strip.

Figure 3: Flush mounting.

(98000031)

1

2

3

4

5

6


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 289-XENPage 4 – 8

2.1.3 Semi-flush mounting

For semi-flush installation of the terminal in a panel cut-out a mountingkit is available. It includes:

• Four side holders.

• Four small screws (grip type TORX T10).

• Four big screws (grip type TORX T25).

• Assembly instruction.

• A sealing strip.

• A distance frame.

Figure 4: Semi-flush mounting.

The mounting kit for semi-flush mounting consists of the same parts asfor flush mounting, except for the additional distance frame. The distanceframe shall be mounted around the REx 5xx terminal case before placingthe terminal in the cut-out.

Rear view

Wall


Version 2.2-00

2.1.4 Wall mounting For projection mounting of the terminal on a wall, a mounting kit is avail-able. It includes:

• Two side plates.

• Screws (grip types TORX T20, T25 and T30).

• Two mounting bars to be mounted on the wall.

Figure 5: Wall mounting

Two rails provided with screw terminal blocks can be attached to themounting bars (one above the terminal and one below). Depending on thewidth of the case there is room for 40-75 screw terminals on each rail.Screw terminal blocks and rails for the blocks are not included in themounting kit.

(98000038)

1

2

3

45

6


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 289-XENPage 4 – 10

2.2 Electrical connections Make the external connections on the screw terminals according to theterminal diagram. All connections are done on the rear side of the casewith a screw-compression type of terminal blocks.

There are two types of connectors for electrical cables:

• Current connector, for connections to the current transformers. One conductor up to 4 mm2 or two conductors up to 2.5 mm2 can be con-nected to the external side of each screw terminal.

• Voltage connector, for the other connections. One conductor up to 2.5 mm2 can be connected to each screw terminal.

Each connector has an identification number, for example X11. Thefemale connectors can be marked in the same way. The individual termi-nals are numbered from top to bottom with 1, 2, 3,... (see a voltage con-nector in Figure 7:). At installation, all wiring to the female part of theconnector is preferably performed before plugging it into the male part.

Identify the cables from the current and voltage transformers regardingphases and connect the cables to the proper screw terminal, according tothe terminal diagrams.

The current connector is located on position X11. This connector consistsof so called feed-through terminal blocks with flat tabs on the internalside.

The voltage connector, X12, is a dividable connector with two parts:

• A female part for conductor connections.

• A male part mounted inside the case on a circuit board.

Connect a separate 2.5 mm2 earthing wire from the earthing screw(TORX T20 grip type) on the rear of the REx 5xx terminal, to the panelearthing bar.

Since there are three possible sizes for a REx 5xx terminal, some of theconnector identities vary depending on actual size. Figure 6: (a and b)shows typical rear views for the 1/1- and the 3/4 of 19-inch rack. The 1/2of 19-inch rack size is only equipped with less connectors and I/O-boardsthan the 3/4. All designation identities are the same between them.


Version 2.2-00

Figure 6: Rear view of REx 5xx, full size (a) and 3/4 size (b).

Note: The use of connectors for external connections are specific for thedifferent sizes. The 3/4- and the 1/2 of 19-inch units have the same usage.Below are the lists of designations for different connectors, valid for theunits.

a) b)

Table 1: Connector designations for 1/1 of 19-inch casing

Connector: Designation:

X11 Current transformer inputs

X12 Voltage transformer inputs

X13 Optical fibre connectors for serial communication SPA/IEC 870-5-103

X15 Optical fibre connectors for serial communication LON

X16, X17... Input/output connectors for I/O modules

X40, X41 Input/output connectors for digital communication module, if ordered. Can also be as X16 etc.

X44 Connector for the power supply module, (in Figure 6:a)

Table 2: Connector designations for 3/4 and 1/2 of 19-inch casing

Connector: Designation:

X11 Current transformer inputs

X12 Voltage transformer inputs

X13 Optical fibre connectors for serial communication SPA/IEC 870-5-103

X15 Optical fibre connectors for serial communication LON

X20, X21... Input/output connectors for I/O modules


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 289-XENPage 4 – 12

(Note that the maximum number of optional I/O modules depends onchoosen size of the REx 5xx terminal.)

2.3 Voltage connectors

Figure 7: Voltage connector, showing connection point X20:5.

Above all external connectors, on the rear side of the case, the position(e.g. X12) for the connector is marked. The screw terminals of the con-nectors are numbered from 1 to 12 (current connector) respectively 1 to18 (voltage connector).

Apply these rules when connecting to the voltage connector:

The ferrule (ABB Network Partner’s order no. 1MKC 840 003-4 or Phoe-nix type AI-TWIN 2 ⋅ 1,5 - 8 BK) is applied with ZA3 crimping plierstype from Phoenix (see Figure 8:).

X34,X35 (3/4)X24,X25 (1/2)

Input/output connectors for digital communication module, if ordered. Can also be as X20 etc.

X18 Connector for the power supply module, (in Figure 6:b)

Table 2: Connector designations for 3/4 and 1/2 of 19-inch casing

If you connect to the voltage connector... Then...

One conductor It can be 0.2-2.5 mm2

Two conductors Can be 0.2-1.0 mm2

Two 1.5 mm2 conductors Use a ferrule. One fer-rule is contact crimped on the two conductors.

X20

X20:5

(98000035)


Version 2.2-00

No soldering is needed.

If a COMBITEST test-switch is added, COMBIFLEX wires are used.

Figure 8: Connected cables with ferrules.

2.4 Fibre optic connections

On each REx 5xx terminal, one or two optical ports can be equipped witha fibre optic bus connection module for serial communication. The con-nections are done on the rear side of the case by fibre optic connectorstype Hewlett Packard (HFBR) for plastic fibres or bayonet type ST forglass fibres.

Each channel consists of one pair of fibres, where one fibre is used forreceiving and one for transmitting data. They are distinguished by thecolour of their fibre contact. Receiver fibre contacts (blue for plastic, darkgrey for glass) must be plugged into the receiver sockets (blue for plastic,dark grey for glass). Transmitter fibre contacts (grey or black) must beplugged likewise into the transmitter sockets (grey or black).

Note: Plug the correct fibre contact into the correct socket.

Fibre optical cables are sensitive to mechanical damages. Never bendthem! As for the curvature radius, these minimum values are valid:

• 5 cm radius for plastic fibre.

• 15 cm radius for glass fibre.

When the optical fibre shall be connected or disconnected, the terminationand not the optical fibre must be used for pulling.

In case the optical fibre is too long and cable straps must be used, thecable strap must not be applied too hard. Always leave some spacebetween the optical fibre and the cable strap.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 289-XENPage 4 – 14

The Serial communication modules are inserted into slots on the Mainprocessing module. There are four different types of cards — with plasticconnections for SPA/IEC 870-5-103, with plastic connections for LON,with glass connection for SPA/IEC 870-5-103 and with glass connectionfor LON. SPA/IEC 870-5-103 communication can only be applied with amodule intended for SPA/IEC 870-5-103 inserted in the SPA/IEC 870-5-103 slot (X13) on the Main processing module. In the same way, LONcommunication can only be applied with a module intended for LON,inserted in the lower slot (X15).

3 Setting and configurationAll settings can be done in the following ways:

• Locally, via the local human-machine interface (HMI) module.

• Locally, on a PC via the optical front connector (using SMS in the PC).

• Locally or remotely, via one of the communication ports on the rear (using SMS or SCS).

All configuration is performed with CAP 531.

3.1 Local human-machine interface (HMI)

The setting access on the local HMI can be blocked by the binary inputsignal HMI--BLOCKSET. When this signal is active, the LEDs can stillbe cleared from the front.

3.2 Front communication When a PC is used for connection to the front, you need the SMS-BASEand the SM/REx 5xx softwares. For the collection of disturbances to afront connected PC, RECOM is not required because necessary function-ality is included in the SM/REx 5xx.

A special cable is needed when connecting a PC to the front of the REx5xx terminal. This cable can be ordered from ABB Network Partner, orderNo. 1MKC 950 001-1. It must be plugged into the optical contact on theleft side of the local HMI. The other end of the cable shall be pluggeddirectly into the COM-port on the PC. The cable includes an optical con-tact, an opto/electrical converter and an electrical cable with a standard 9-pole D-sub contact. This ensures a disturbance-free and safe communica-tion with the terminal.

When communicating from a PC, the slave number and baud rate (com-munication speed) settings must be equal in the PC-program and in theREx 5xx terminal. For further instructions on how to set the parameters inthe PC-program, see the User’s Guide of SMS-BASE and of the SM/REx5xx.


Version 2.2-00

The slave number and baud rate settings of the front port for the REx 5xxterminal is done on the local HMI at:

ConfigurationTerminalCom

SPAComFront

3.3 Serial communication Settings can be performed via any of the optical ports at the rear of theREx 5xx terminal. When a PC is connected to the SMS system, the SMS-BASE and the SM/REx 5xx softwares are used. For the collection of ana-logue data to a PC, RECOM is also required in the PC. Settings can alsobe done via the SCS system, based on MicroLIBRARY.

For all setting and configuration via the SPA communication bus, theSPA/IEC 870-5-103 port on the rear, it is necessary to first inactivate therestriction for settings. Otherwise, no setting is allowed. This setting onlyapplies for the SPA/IEC 870-5-103 port during SPA bus communication.The already limited communications on the IEC 870-5-103 bus and theLON bus, the LON port, are not affected. The parameter can only be seton the local HMI, and is located at:


SPAComRear

SettingRestrict

It is also possible to permit changes between active setting groupswith ActGrpRestrict in the same menu section.

When communicating with SMS or SCS via the SPA/IEC 870-5-103 port,the slave number and baud rate (communication speed) settings must beequal in the PC-program and in the REx 5xx terminal. For further instruc-tions of how to set these parameters in the PC-program, see the User’sGuide of SMS-BASE and of the SM/REx 5xx.

The slave number and baud rate settings of the rear SPA/IEC 870-5-103port on the REx 5xx terminal, for SPA bus communication, is done on thelocal HMI at:


SPAComRear


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 289-XENPage 4 – 16

The slave number and baud rate settings of the rear SPA/IEC 870-5-103port on the REx 5xx terminal, for IEC 870-5-103 bus communication, isdone on the local HMI at:


IECComCommunication

When communicating via the LON port, the settings are done with theLNT, LON Network Tool. The settings are shown on the local HMI at:


LON Com

From this menu, it is also possible to send the “ServicePinMsg” to theLNT. For further instructions, see “Remote communication(1MRK 580 142-XEN)”.

3.4 Configuration of inputs and outputs

The REx 5xx terminal has a default configuration for all functions, sincethere is a default internal configuration of the terminal. All input and out-put contacts are also wired to functions in the terminal.

A new configuration is performed with the CAP 531 configuration tool.The binary outputs can be selected from a signal list where the signals aregrouped under their function names. It is also possible to specify a user-defined name for each input and output signal.

When downloading a configuration to the REx 5xx terminal with the CAP531 configuration tool, the terminal is automatically set in configurationmode. When the terminal is set in configuration mode, all functions areblocked. The red LED on the terminal flashes, and the green LED is litwhile the terminal is in the configuration mode.

When the configuration is downloaded and completed, the terminal isautomatically set into normal mode.


Version 2.2-00

4 CommissioningBefore testing, set the REx 5xx terminal into test mode. This can be doneon the local HMI at:

TestTestMode

Operation

Test/TestMode/Operation = On sets the terminal in test mode, but is notactivated until the setting has been saved and the yellow LED starts toflash. The test mode can also be activated via a binary input connectedto TEST-INPUT. So select the Operation above to BinInput in that case.

When the terminal is in test mode, the setting of the disturbance reportparameters have the effects:

Table 3:

Test

/Mo

de

Op

erat

ion

Test

/Mo

de

Dis

turb

Rep

ort

Test

/Mo

de

Dis

turb

Su

mm

ary

Then the results are...

On Off Off - Disturbances are not stored.- LED information is not displayed on the HMI and not stored.- No disturbance summary is scrolled on the HMI.

On Off On - Disturbances are not stored.- LED information (yellow - start, red - trip) are displayed on the local HMI but not stored in the terminal.- Disturbance summary is scrolled automatically on the local HMI for the two latest recorded dis-turbances, until cleared.- The information is not stored in the terminal.

On On On or Off

- The disturbance report works as in normal mode.- Disturbances are stored. Data can be read from the local HMI, a front-connected PC, or SMS.- LED information (yellow - start, red - trip) is stored.- The disturbance summary is scrolled automati-cally on the local HMI for the two latest recorded disturbances, until cleared.- All disturbance data that is stored during test mode remains in the terminal when changing back to normal mode.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 289-XENPage 4 – 18

Events occurring while the terminal is set in test mode can be reported tothe SCS system as below:

• All event are reported.

• No events are reported.

• Events are reported according to the event mask.

This selection is done in SMS or in SCS.

4.1 Test of internal circuits

The A/D conversion module, the power supply module, the main process-ing module, the signal processing module and the I/O modules are contin-uously supervised and internal signals present the result (OK, Warning, orFailure). If an internal fault is detected, it will be indicated on the localHMI. In the front-connected PC or SMS, the fault creates an event in theinternal event list.

The power supply of the REx 5xx terminal is supervised continuously andif a failure occur, the internal signal INT--FAIL is activated and a specialoutput contact on the power supply module is activated (Internal fail).

4.2 Secondary injection test

Secondary injection testing is a normal part of the commissioning work ofa terminal with analogue inputs. Check the operate value of all functions.The test equipment should be able to provide a three-phase supply of volt-ages and currents. The magnitude of voltage and current as well as thephase angle between voltage and current must be variable. The voltagesand currents from the test equipment must be obtained from the samesource and they must have a very small harmonic contents. If the testequipment cannot indicate the phase angle, a separate phase-angle meteris necessary.

In the distance protection, the time-lag elements need not to be switchedoff to record the operating characteristic for the different zones. Operationfor each zone can be read as indications on the local HMI.

Note! This terminal is designed for a maximum continuous current of fourtimes the nominal current.

4.3 Check of external connections

When a REx 5xx terminal with line protection functions included is to beswitched into service, it must be checked that the intended voltages andcurrents reach the relay. Also check the phase sequence and identify eachphase in both the voltage and the current circuits.

Tighten all screw terminals firmly.

4.3.1 COMBITEST test-switch RTXP 24

The REx 5xx terminal can be equipped with a test-switch of type RTXP 24.The test-switch and its associated test plug handle (RTXH 24) are a partof the COMBITEST system, which is described in the “Buyer’s GuideCOMBITEST Test system”.


Version 2.2-00

When the test-handle is inserted into the test-switch, all current circuits onthe transformers side are short-circuited and all voltage circuits and tripcircuits are opened, except for terminal 1 and 12. They are used for dcsupply of the REx 5xx terminal. The test equipment connected to the test-handle is automatically connected to the terminal.

The test-handle can be plugged into the test-switch or withdrawed fromthe test-switch to the intermediate position. In this position, the trip cir-cuits are blocked, but the voltage and current circuits are connected to therelay. The test-handle can be plugged into the test-switch or removed fromthe test-switch completely by releasing the top and bottom latches on thehandle.

4.4 Functional test All included functions are tested according to the test instructions in eachfunction description. The functions can be blocked individually during thetest, so only the function which is to be tested is active. In this way, it ispossible to test slower back-up measuring functions without the interfer-ence of faster measuring functions. The REx 5xx terminal can also betested without changing the configurations and settings.

The functions are blocked on the local HMI at:

TestTestMode

BlockFunctions alt. BlockEventFunc

The setting is only valid in test mode. If the functions are blocked in thismenu, they are blocked only while the terminal is in the test mode. Whentesting a function in this blocking feature, remember that not only theactual function must be activated, but the whole sequence of intercon-nected functions (from measuring inputs to binary output contacts),including logic and so on.

4.5 Test termination When the test is finished, reconfigure the REx 5xx terminal into normaloperating mode on the local HMI at:

TestTestMode

Operation

Set Test/TestMode/Operation = Off, and save the test mode setting. Theyellow LED is turned off.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 289-XENPage 4 – 20

5 Fault tracing

5.1 Using information on the local HMI

If an internal fault has occurred, the local HMI displays informationunder:

TerminalReportSelfSuperv

Under these menus are the indications of eventual internal failure (seriousfault) or internal warning (minor problem) listed.

Shown as well, are the indications regarding the faulty unit according to table 4.

Also the internal signals, such as INT--FAIL and INT--WARNING can beconnected to binary output contacts for signalling to a control room.

In the Terminal Status - Information, the present information from theself-supervision function can be viewed. Indications of failure or warn-ings for each hardware module are provided, as well as information aboutthe external time synchronisation and the internal clock. All according totable 4. Loss of time synchronisation can be considered as a warning only.The REx 5xx terminal has full functionality without time synchronisation.

Table 4: Self-supervision signals

HMI information Status Signal nameActivates summary signal

Description

InternFail OK / FAIL INT--FAIL Internal fail summary

Intern Warning OK /WARNING INT--WARNING Internal warning summary

CPU-modFail OK / FAIL INT--CPUFAIL INT--FAIL Main processing module failed

CPU-modWarning OK /WARNING INT--CPUWARN INT--WARNING Main processing module warning (failure of clock, time synch., fault locator or distur-bance recorder)

ADC-module OK / FAIL INT--ADC INT--FAIL A/D conversion module failed

Slotnn-XXXyy OK / FAIL INT--IOyy INT--FAIL I/O module yy failed

Real Time Clock OK /WARNING INT--RTC INT--WARNING Internal clock is reset - Set the clock

Time Sync OK /WARNING INT--TSYNC INT--WARNING No time synchronisation


Version 2.2-00

5.2 Using front-connected PC or SMS

In this case, two summary signals appear. Self-supervision summary andCPU-module status summary. These signals can be compared to the inter-nal signals as:

• Self-supervision summary = INT--FAIL and INT--WARNING

• CPU-module status summary = INT--CPUFAIL and INT--CPU-WARN

When an internal fault has occurred, extensive information can be retrievedabout the fault from the list of internal events. The list is available in theTERM-STS Terminal Status part of the PC program. This time-tagged listhas information with the date and time of the last 40 internal events.

The internal events in the list do not only refer to faults in the terminal, butalso to other activities, such as change of settings, clearing of disturbancereports and loss of external time synchronisation.

These events are logged as Internal events:

Table 5:

Event message: Description: Set/reset event:

INT--FAIL Off Internal fail status Reset event

INT--FAIL On Set event

INT--WARNING Off Internal warning status Reset event

INT--WARNING On Set event

INT--CPUFAIL Off Main processing module fatal error status Reset event

INT--CPUFAIL On Set event

INT--CPUWARN Off Main processing module non-fatal error status Reset event

INT--CPUWARN On Set event

INT--ADC Off A/D conversion module status Reset event

INT--ADC On Set event

INT--IOn Off In/Out module No. n status Reset event

INT--IOn On Set event

INT--RTC Off Real Time Clock (RTC) status Reset event

INT--RTC On Set event

INT--TSYNC Off External time synchronisation status Reset event

INT--TSYNC On Set event

DREP-MEMUSED On >80% of the disturbance recording memory used Set event

SETTING CHANGED Any settings in terminal changed

DISTREP CLEARED All disturbances in Disturbance report cleared


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 289-XENPage 4 – 22

The events in the internal event list are time tagged with a resolution of1 ms.

This means that when using the PC for fault tracing provides informationon the:

• Module that should be changed.

• Sequence of faults, if more than one unit is faulty.

• Exact time when the fault occurred.

6 Repair instructionIf a module in any REx 5xx terminal needs to be repaired, the whole ter-minal can be removed and sent to ABB.

An alternative is to open the terminal and send only the faulty circuitboard to ABB for repair. When a printed circuit board is sent to ABB, itmust always be placed in a metallic, ESD-proof, protection bag. The usercan also purchase separate modules for replacement.

Note! Follow all safety rules for utility power network companies.

Before disassembling the REx 5xx terminal, remember the consequencesof the ESD phenomenon. Most electronic components are sensitive toelectrostatic discharge and latent damage may occur. Please observe usualprocedures for handling electronics and also use an ESD wrist strap. Asemi-conducting layer must be placed on the workbench and connected toearth.

Disassemble and reassemble the REx 5xx terminal accordingly:

1. Switch off the dc supply.

2. Short-circuit the current transformers and disconnect all current and voltage connections from the terminal.

3. Disconnect all signal connectors.

4. Disconnect the optical fibres.

5. Unscrew the main back plate of the terminal.

6. If the transformer module is to be changed — unscrew the small back plate of the terminal.

7. Pull out the faulty module.

8. Check that the new module has correct identity number.

9. Check that the springs on the card rail have connection to the cor-responding metallic area on the circuit board when the new module is pushed in.

10. Reassemble the terminal.

If the REx 5xx terminal has the optional increased measuring accuracy, afile with unique calibration data for the transformer module is stored inthe Main processing module. Therefore it is not possible to change onlyone of these modules with maintained accuracy.


Version 2.2-00

7 MaintenanceThe REx 5xx terminal is self-supervised. No special maintenance isrequired.

Instructions from the utility power network company and other mainte-nance directives valid for maintenance of the power system must be fol-lowed.

24Local human-machine interface

1 IntroductionThe local human-machine interface (HMI) provides local communicationbetween the user and the REx 5xx terminal.

Local communication can also be performed by using a PC connected tothe local HMI via the special optical interface. Using a PC gives the samefunctionality as using remote communication within the station monitor-ing system (SMS) described in corresponding documents.

This chapter describes in detail the structure of the local HMI, basic prin-ciples of local human-machine interfacing and basic structure of the ter-minal menu tree.

The “Menu tree appendix” contains the detailed menu tree for theREx 5xx terminal with its all options.

2 Human-machine interface module - designThe local HMI module is equipped with three light emitting diodes(LEDs), a liquid crystal display (LCD), six membrane buttons and anoptical connector, for galvanic separation to a RS232 connector, whichenables communication with a personal computer (PC).

Figure 1: Local human-machine interface module, front panel.

E

C

green red

LEDs

yellow

Optical connectorfor local PC

Push buttons

Liquid Crystal Displayfour rows16 characters/rowREx 5xx *2.0

C = QuitE = Enter menu

Start TripReady

064.ai

1MRK 580 290-XEN


Local human-machine interface 1MRK 580 290-XENPage 4 – 25

Version 2.2-00

2.1 LEDs The three LEDs provide primary terminal status information when lit orflashing.

The HMI has an automatic entry to an idle mode. The idle mode is a kindof screensaver for the LEDs and the LCD display. When everything isnormal but no operation has been ordered for a period of time, the HMIenters this idle mode. See section 3.1 for details.

The green LED will be lit and the others switch off when the terminal is inthe idle mode. The LEDs will be activated if a disturbance occurs or if anykey is pressed during idle mode.

2.2 LCD display The back-lit liquid crystal display (LCD) provides detailed informationabout the REx 5xx terminal and the parameter setting. Normally, the back-light is off and no text is displayed. Pressing any button will activate thedisplay. See section 5.1 for details.

The display shuts down after exiting the menu tree (pressing the C buttonin the highest level) or if no button is pressed for more than 45 minutes.

If a disturbance occurs, the display will be activated and display the dis-turbance summary until acknowledged. The summary shows short-handconditions of the last two occurred disturbances.

2.3 Buttons The number of buttons used on the HMI module is reduced to the mini-mum acceptable amount to allow a communication as simple as possiblefor the user. The buttons normally have more than one function, depend-ing on actual dialogue.

Table 1:

State Indicates that…

Green LED, steady light The operating condition of a terminal is nor-mal.

Green LED, flashing light An internal error is detected. The terminal can be blocked or operate with reduced functionality, depending on the type of error and the internal configuration.The LED will also flash during start-up.

Yellow LED, steady light One or more disturbances are recorded and stored in the terminal.

Yellow LED, flashing light The terminal is in test mode.

Red LED, steady light At least one of the protection functions issued a trip command during a disturbance recording.

Red LED, flashing light The terminal is in configuration mode or is blocked by an internal or external com-mand.

Local human-machine interface

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 290-XENPage 4 – 26

Pressing any button in idle mode will activate the LEDs and the display.See section 3.1 for details.

The C button has three main functions, it will:

• Cancel any operation in a dialogue window.

• Exit the current level in the menu tree. This means, it cancels the current function or the current menu selection and moves one step higher (back) in the menu tree.

• Clear the LEDs when the start window is displayed.• Bring the LEDs and the display into idle mode if pressed when the

idle window is displayed (Quit function).

The E button mainly provides an Enter/Execute function. It activates, forexample, the selected menu tree branch. Further it is used to confirm set-tings and to acknowledge different actions.

The left and right arrow buttons have three functions, to:

• Position the cursor in a horizontal direction, for instance, to move between digits in a number during the parameter setting.

• Move between leafs within the same menu branch.

• Move between the confirmation alternatives (yes, no and cancel) in a command window.

The up and down arrow buttons have three functions, to:

• Move between selectable branches of the menu tree. This function also scrolls the menu tree when it contains more branches than shown on the display.

• Move between the confirmation alternatives in a command window.

• Change parameter values in a data window.


Version 2.2-00

3 HMI modesWhen the terminal is left unattended (no HMI button pressed) for a periodof time, two things might occur:

• The display exits to the idle mode.

• A disturbance occurs and the HMI enters the reporting mode.

The REx 5xx terminal is automatically set into configuration mode when-ever a configuration is downloaded from CAP 531 (the configurationtool).

3.1 Idle mode When the latest disturbances has been acknowledged or no disturbance isstored in memory, no one has operated the HMI for more than 45 minutesand the terminal is in normal operation, the yellow and red LEDs togetherwith the LCD will be turned off. The green LED will remain active. TheHMI has entered the idle mode. This only affects the HMI and does notaffect the control and protection functions of the REx 5xx terminal.

The display and the LEDs will be activated if any button is pressed orwhen a new disturbance occurs.

3.2 Reporting mode The HMI enters the reporting mode whenever a new fault is issued by anyprotection function since the latest acknowledged disturbance. In thereporting mode, the green LED will be lit and the yellow LED will be lit ifa disturbance is recorded. The red LED will be lit only if a protectionfunction issued a trip command.

The display will show a disturbance summary, a short-hand list of the dis-turbance conditions for the two latest faults.

3.3 Configuration mode The REx 5xx terminal will automatically be set in configuration modewhenever a configuration is downloaded by the CAP 531 configurationtool. In configuration mode the green LED will be lit and the red LEDflashes. No configuration is possible from the HMI.

Note: In the configuration mode, the control and protection functions areinactivated.

3.4 Test mode The REx 5xx terminal will be set to test mode when the test functions inthe test menu branch is selected. In test mode the green LED will be litand the yellow LED flashes. During test mode it is possible to block anyor all of the control and protection functions respectively, as well as theSMS communication.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 290-XENPage 4 – 28

4 Menu windowThe menu window is displayed when the E button is pressed in the start-up or idle window. The menu window displays a part of the menu tree.

A menu tree is a hierarcial way of presenting selectable alternatives andfunctions grouped in a logical manner.

Figure 2: The menu tree.

The tree is divided into branches. The lowest level, usually a command, iscalled a leaf. Sometimes the menu structure is also called a cascadingmenu.

Figure 3: Menu window, generalised operation (a) and typical example (b)

Row one always contains:

• pbranch, the name of the previous menu branch. A dot is displayed in front of pbranch if the previous menu branch is below the top level

• cbranch, the name of the current menu branch, command or data window.

If the top level menu branch is reached, the terminal product name, REx5xx, will be displayed instead of pbranch.

The remaining three rows always display three instances of the selectablemenus or commands of the current menu branch. The up arrow appears inrow two when more menus are available before the n:th menu. The downarrow appears in the bottom row when more menus are available after then+2:th menu. Scroll the menu by pressing the up or down button.

Top level menu

First level menu First level menu First level command

Second level menu Second level command Second level command

Third level menus and commands

Menu branch

Menu leaf

.pbranch/cbranchMenu nMenu n+1Menu n+2

V

Va)

.Set/FuncGroup2Group3Group4 V

b)

V


Version 2.2-00

The currently selectable submenu or command is indicated with invertedtext. In the example above, Menu n (or the Trip function) is the selectablealternative. Use the up or down buttons to select the appropriate submenuor command. Then press the E button to display the new menu branch orcommand window.

As an example, Figure 3:b shows the submenu Functions of the Settingsmenu branch.

Pressing the E button will select settings of Group2 for editing, since thealternative Group2 is displayed inverted. The up and down arrows informthat additional menu alternatives, currently not displayed, are in the list. Inthis case Group1 and Group4.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 290-XENPage 4 – 30

5 Dialogue windows

Figure 4: Dialogue windows, typical examples.

The dialogue window displays instructions and selectable alternatives.Normally a dialogue window is displayed whenever a menu leaf isreached. If numerical parameter values are to be set, the dialogue windowis replaced by the data window, as described in the next section.

Further, the dialogue windows inform how to perform the actions definedin the third and fourth text rows. The first and second rows usually displaya headline to provide more information about the proposed action or aboutthe terminal.

The REx 5xx terminal has several different dialogue windows included,depending on the choosen options. The different windows are:

• Start window.

• Idle window.

• Command without a selection.Simple decision commands - Yes/No.

• Command with a selection.Alternative command selections.

• Command with a cancellation.

• Command with a selection and a cancellation.

• Parameter setting window.

5.1 Starting a dialogue The start dialogue window, Figure 5:, is displayed if the C button ispressed in the reporting mode (during disturbance report summary dis-play).

Figure 5: Start dialogue window.

Press the:

• C button to clear the LEDs (if required).

RE.5.. VER 2.0C=Clear LEDsE=Enter menu

a) b)

TripStartReady RE.5.. VER 2.0C=QuitE=Enter menu

TripStartReady

RE.5.. VER 2.0C=Clear LEDsE=Enter menu

TripStartReady


Version 2.2-00

• E button to enter the menu tree.

The text Ready Start Trip in the dialogue’s top row describes the LEDsabove the display.

5.2 Idle mode The local HMI will enter the idle mode when the latest disturbances hasbeen acknowledged or no disturbance is stored in memory, no one hasoperated the HMI for more than 45 minutes and the terminal is in normaloperation.

In the idle mode is the display and the yellow and red LEDs turned off, thegreen LED still active. The HMI is in a standby mode.

The display and the LEDs will be activated if any button is pressed orwhen a new disturbance occurs.

5.3 Confirming a command

Figure 6: shows a typical example of a dialogue window with simple deci-sion commands. The instructions in the first two rows describe possibleactions. The confirmation alternatives, YES and NO, appear in the bottomrow. Move the flashing cursor from one to another alternative by pressingthe right or left arrow. After selecting desired alternative, it must be con-firmed by pressing the E button.

Figure 6: Dialogue window for a command without selection.

Move the cursor to YES and press the E button to confirm the actions(commands) in rows one and two.

Move the cursor to NO and press the E button to exit the dialogue windowwithout doing any changes, or press C with the same result.

5.4 Selecting a command Figure 7: shows a typical example of a dialogue window with alternativecommand selections.

Figure 7: Dialogue window for a command with a selection.

Instruction 2Instruction 1

NOYES

AlternativeInstruction 1

NOYES

V


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 290-XENPage 4 – 32

Use the up or down buttons to move the cursor to desired alternative of acommand. Select YES and press E to execute the command. Select NO tocancel and exit the dialogue window.

5.5 Cancel a command Figure 8: shows a typical dialogue window with the possibility to cancel acommand. Use the right or left arrow to move between YES, NO andCANCEL. Then press E to confirm. The alternative CANCEL togetherwith a confirmation, will close the dialogue window and the previous win-dow will be shown.

Figure 8: Dialogue window with a command with cancellation.

5.6 Selecting and cancelling a command

Figure 9: Dialogue window for a command with a selection.

In this dialogue window it is possible to select either the Instruction, rowone, or the Command, row two. This is indicated by the up or down arrowat the end of the row.

Use the right or left arrow to move the cursor to YES, NO or CANCEL.Select YES to execute the command. Select NO or CANCEL to canceland exit the dialogue window.

5.7 Commands with parameter settings

This category applies to commands where a certain numeric value, eg. atrip current, must be set. These settings are done in a data window,described in the next section.

Instruction 2Instruction 1

NOYES CANCEL

Command Instruction V

NOYES CANCEL


Version 2.2-00

6 Data window The data windows and branches are used to read information and to setparameters.

Figure 10: Data window, general setting (10a) and typical example (10b).

Row one has the same information here as in the menu windows. Rowtwo displays the name of a particular parameter and the rows three andfour provide more information about the value in the parameter.

The left and right arrows in the bottom row indicate that more data isavailable in the same menu branch. Press the right or left arrow button toscroll the data.

Figure 10:b shows the data window which appears on the display duringthe setting procedure for Impedance Zone 1 of the distance protection.Only one value is relevant for the impedance (X1 = 15.00 Ohms). Theright arrow indicates that additional parameters are available for Zone 1(reach in resistive direction, time delay etc.).

6.1 Reading and setting values

The setting procedure is identical for all different types of parameters.Figure 11: shows a typical example of such a procedure.

The top row shows the previous and present menus (.path1/path2). Whenthe parameter name is highlighted, it is possible to enter a new value asdescribed below.

Press the E button to switch from Figure 11:a to Figure 11:b. Row three ofthe data window displays the current value with corresponding unit (sec-onds, Ohm etc.) for the parameter.

Figure 11: The procedure of setting a real value for a parameter.

.path1/path2Data name=Data 1Data 2

a)

.Imped/Zone1X1=15.00 Ohm

V

b)

V

V

.path1/path2Parameter=xx.xx unit

a)

xx.xx unit

b)

.path1/path2Parameter=xx.xy unit

d)

zx.xy unit

e)

.path1/path2

xx.xy unit

c)

.path1/path2

zx.xy unit

f)

E

.path1/path2Parameter=


Parameter=

Parameter=E

V

V


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 290-XENPage 4 – 34

It is only possible to change a digit of the current value when the actualdigit is underscored by the cursor (second window). The up arrow anddown arrows respectively are used to increase or decrease the value.Release the arrow button when desired value is reached. Use the left andright arrows to switch between the digits (Figure 11:c and d).

The new parameter value must be confirmed by pressing E. Thereafter isthe parameter changed and the parameter name is highlighted (Figure11:f), as from the beginning of the procedure.

Note! The new parameter value does not immediately appear in the corre-sponding setting group because all setting procedures are performed inseparate editing areas.

New setting values for a setting group are activated after saving all set-tings in one of four groups of setting parameters and then exit from theediting area. See “Saving the settings in a setting group” on page 36.

6.2 Reading and setting of non-numerical parameters

Non-numerical parameters can be set to predefined non-numerical values,for example, On - Off to activate or deactivate a certain function.

Figure 12: Setting and reading the non-numerical parameters.

The top row shows the previous and present menus (.path1/path2). Whenthe parameter name is highlighted, it is possible to enter a new, pre-defined, value as described below.

Press E to switch from Figure 12:a to Figure 12:b. The current non-numerical value appears in the third row.

Press the up or down arrow to switch between the predefined, non-numer-ical, values (Figure 12:b, c, and d). When desired value is displayed, pressE to enter it (transition from Figure 12:d to Figure 12:e).

.path1/path2

ABC

a)

ABC

b)

.path1/path2Parameter=XYZ

d)

XYZ

e)

.path1/path2

XBA

c)

E



Parameter=

E

Parameter=

V

V

V

V


Version 2.2-00

6.3 Reading and setting strings

The strings are the parameters within the REx 5xx terminal that can haveuser-defined names. Typical examples of strings are identities of substa-tions, lines within substations and names of different input signals con-nected to the binary inputs of the terminal.

Figure 13: Setting a string.

Each string is displayed in one row and contains a maximum of 13 charac-ters.

Row one in the data window displays the last two branches of the menutree. Row two displays the present parameter. Row three displays thestring (Figure 13:a). A highlighted parameter can be changed.

Press E (Figure 13:a) and a character is underscored by the cursor (Figure13:b).

Press the up or down arrow button to change the character, or use the leftand right arrows to switch between characters in a string (Figure 13:c).

After the string value is set (user-defined value, Figure 13:c), press E andthe data window changes as shown in Figure 13:d. This indicates a newvalue for the string.

6.4 Setting local terminal time

Local date and time for the REx 5xx terminal is set from the Time sub-menu in the Setting menu, according to Figure 14:..

Figure 14: Setting local date and time within the REx 5xx terminal.

Row one in the data window displays the last two branches of the menutree. Row two displays the date and time parameter. Row three displaysyear, month and day. Row four displays hour, minutes and seconds.

.path1/path2Parameter=LIMbft34ytr7nlhd

a)

Line 37ytrnlhd

b)

.path1/path2Parameter=Line 37

c)

Line 37

d)

E


.path1/path2Parameter=E

V

V

V

V

.Set/TimeDate & Time=YYYY-MMM-DD

a)

YYYY-MMM-DD

b)

E.Set/TimeDate & Time=

hh:mm:ss hh:mm:ss


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 290-XENPage 4 – 36

When the parameter is highlighted (Figure 14:a), press E to change thedata window from Figure 14:a to Figure 14:b and enable setting of thedate and time. The first digit in the seconds will be underscored by thecursor (Figure 14:b).

Press the up or down arrow button to change the digit, or use the left andright arrows to scroll in the date and time string.

After a new date and time is set, press E and the data window changes tothe previous window. A new local time will be displayed.

Real time in the REx 5xx terminal uses the following values:

• YYYY, year.

• MMM, first three letters of the month’s name.

• DD, day in the month.

• hh, hour.

• mm, minutes.

• ss, seconds.

Apply the rules for setting a string when to set the month. All other valuesare real values.

6.5 Additional information The REx 5xx terminal provides information about its operation, configu-ration and service conditions. The following information is available:

• Phasors of primary and secondary voltages and currents and other measured values.

• Logical signals activated during the communication procedure.

• Summary of the recorded disturbances under observation.

• Time of the disturbances under observation.

• The software version in the terminal.

• The hardware version in the terminal.

(Also see the Menu tree - Appendix).

6.6 Saving the settings in a setting group

The parameter settings as described in the previous sections are alwaysdone in a temporary editing area. After editing, a possibility to discard thenew settings will be given. If accepting and confirming them, all settingswill be saved in appropriate setting group.

After changing one or more parameter, climb up the menu tree by repeat-edly pressing C until the Save As Group n dialogue window is displayed.

If, accidentally, pressing the C button once too much, the terminal willdisplay a dialogue window which requires a confirmation. In this windowit is necessary to confirm the cancellation of the previous setting activity


Version 2.2-00

by pressing the E button. Otherwise, if pressing C again, the menu treewill return to the previous dialogue window. No settings will be dis-carded.

The terminal prompts a saving of the changed settings in the same settinggroup as started with (setting group n in Figure 15:). Confirm the savingor request that the settings shall be saved in another setting group, whichis available within the current menu window.

Figure 15: Saving the settings in desired setting group.

Use this function to copy the setting parameters from one setting group toanother when it is necessary to change only a few parameters for differentoperating conditions. Just select and edit appropriate setting group andsave it as another.

It is also possible to do a straight copy by selecting a parameter for editingwithout changing its value. Then press C appropriate number of times,followed by a save with a new name.

Press the E button to save the values which were set in the editing area forthe selected setting group.

.Set/FuncGroup (n-1)Group n

V

Group n

.Func/Grp n

Function mV

.Set/FuncGroup n-1

Group (n+1) Function (m+1)

E

V

V

Function (m-1)

Group nSave as:

NOYES CANCEL

Group n+1Save as:

NOYES CANCEL

Group (n+1)

V

V

E

C

C2 x

Setting procedure as described inthe instructions for setting and readingof different variables and parameters

Group nSave as:

NOYES

V

V

E C E C

CANCEL

Group nSave as:

NOYES CANCEL

E

C

procedureSaving

cancelled

V

VGroup nSave as:

NOYES

V

V

CANCEL

V

V

V

V

No settingssaved

Settingssaved


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 290-XENPage 4 – 38

Confirm the saving when prompted in the dialogue window. Press the Ebutton and the first menu window, for selection of setting groups, is dis-played. Then new parameter values appear in the desired setting group.

39LED indication module

7 IntroductionThe LED indication unit is an additional feature for the REx 500 terminalsfor protection and control and consists totally of 18 LEDs (Light EmittingDiodes). It is located on the front of the protection and control terminal.

The main purpose is, to present on site an immediate visual informationsuch as protection indications or alarm signals.

This chapter describes the use and the design of the LED. The function isdescribed in section “LED indication function”.

8 DesignThe LED indication module is equipped with 18 LEDs, which can light ineither red, yellow or green color. The LED is also equipped with adescription text for each of the LEDs.

Figure 16: LED indication module, front panel

8.1 LEDs The color of the LEDs is selected in the function block. The input signalfor an indication has separate inputs for each color. If more than one coloris used at the same time, the following priority order is valid; red, yellowand green, with red as the highest priority. The flash frequency is fixed at0.5 Hz.

The information on the LEDs is stored at loss of the auxiliary power forthe terminal, so that the latest LED picture appears immediately after theterminal has restarted successfully.

8.2 Acknowledgment/reset

Manual acknowledgment/reset of indication signals is performed from theC-button on the local HMI. The acknowledgment/reset has the same func-tion as Clear LEDs and can be performed when the start window is dis-played.

8.3 Description text The description text is written on a paper label with dimensions accordingto figure 17. Two labels are needed for one LED module. The labels areinserted into slots on the upper side of the LED module.

Indication descriptionLED

1MRK 580 676-XEN


LED indication module

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 676-XENPage 4 – 40

The figure 17 shows a layout example of a label made in a word processoras a table for one column and 10 rows with dimensions and text sizeaccording to the figure.

Figure 17: Layout of text label for LED module

27.00

6.10

6.40

8.25

66.0

0

81.5

0

25.00

START L1

Example:

16 pt

23 pt

24 pt

23 pt

24 pt

23 pt

24 pt

23 pt

24 pt

27 pt

Text: Arial, Bold, Size 10

6 pt

41Menu tree

1 GeneralThis chapter presents the main layout of the menu tree for the localhuman-machine interface (HMI). The menu tree includes menus for:

• Disturbance report• Service report• Settings• Terminal report• Configuration• Command• Test

Use SMS or SCS to activate or deactivate menus on the local human-machine interface (HMI).Note! It is possible to completely turn off parts of the menu tree!

Figure 1: Menu tree for REx 5xx.

HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACEMENU TREE

DISTURBANCE REPORT

SERVICE REPORT

SETTINGS

CONFIGURATION

TERMINAL REPORT

TEST

COMMMAND

Service valuesPhasorsInformation of all functionsInformation of I/O modulesDisturbance reportActive groupInternal time and date

Information of 10 latest disturbancesCalculation of distance to faultManual triggering of adisturbance recordingClearing of the disturbancereporting memory

Disturbance report settingsFunctions: Parameters within the four set-ting groups for different functionsChange of active groupInternal time

Self supervision reportTerminal identityInformation of modulesAnalogInputs

[Functions] - Access with CAP 531[I/O] - Access with CAP 531Analogue inputsI/O modules (operation etc.)Line differential functionTerminal communicationTime synchronising source[Disturbance report]- Access with CAP 531Local HMI (BLOCKSET)Identifiers (station, object, unit)Language

Activation and present status of command

Test mode

OperationBlock protection functionsBlock event functionsDisturbance reportLine diff. prot.

Configuration mode

1MRK 580 291-XEN


Menu tree

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 291-XENPage 4 – 42

2 Disturbance report menuUse this menu to display the information recorded by the REx 5xx termi-nal for the 10 latest disturbances. In this menu, these commands are avail-able:

• Display information of a disturbance.

• Calculate the distance to fault.

• Manually trigger the disturbance reporting unit.

• Clear the disturbance report memory.

To view the complete disturbance report, including the result of the eventrecorder and the disturbance recorder, use a front-connected PC or theSMS or SCS.

2.1 Disturbances A disturbance instance will show:

• The time of disturbance, which is defined as the local terminal date and time when the first triggering signal started the disturbance recording.

• The trig signal, which started the recording.

• Indications, activated during the recorded disturbance. Indications to be recorded are selected during the terminal configuration proce-dure.

The fault locator will also report:

• Fault location, provides information about the distance to the fault and the fault loop used for the calculation.

• Trip values, are displayed as phasors (RMS value and phase angle) of the currents and voltages, before and during the fault.

2.2 Calculate distance to fault

Possible to recalculate the distance to fault with a different fault loop orwith different fault locator setting parameters. The recalculation isenabled since trip values are available for each disturbance that caused aphase-selective trip of the distance protection function.

2.3 Manual trigg Using the manual trigger creates an instant disturbance report. Use thisfunction to get a snapshot of the monitored line.

2.4 Clear disturbance report

The disturbance report has a dedicated storage memory, sufficient enoughto save the ten latest disturbances. The memory operates by the first-in –first-out principle (FIFO). This means that when the memory is full, theoldest recorded disturbance will be deleted from memory when a new dis-turbance occurs.After clearing, the entire disturbance memory will be empty.

Menu tree 1MRK 580 291-XENPage 4 – 43

Version 2.2-00

3 Service report menuThe Service report menu displays the operating conditions of the terminalas well as measured and calculated values and internal signal status.

3.1 Service values Presents the mean values of measured current, voltage, active and reactivepower and frequency. Available when the transformer module option isinstalled.

3.2 Phasors Presents the primary and secondary phasors of measured currents andvoltages. Available when the fault locator option is installed.

3.3 Functions Presents the presently measured values and other information of the dif-ferent parameters for included functions.

3.4 I/O Displays present logical values of all binary inputs and outputs of allinstalled I/O modules in the REx 5xx terminal.

3.5 Disturbance report Provides information about the below listed items concerning the distur-bance recording.

• Available free memory for further disturbance recording.

• The sequence number for the next possibly recorded disturbance (can be viewed or set).

• The present status of analogue triggers that can start the disturbance recorder.

3.6 Active group The present setting of active groups can be viewed here.

3.7 Time The current internal time for the REx 5xx terminal can be viewed here.The time is displayed in the form YYYY-MMM-DD and hh:mm:ss. Allvalues but the month are presented with digits. The month is presentedwith the first three letters in current month.

3.8 Internal signals Presents information about all functional outputs and internal signals inthe terminal.

Menu tree

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 291-XENPage 4 – 44

4 Settings menuUse this menu to select and set the different parameters for included pro-tection and control functions in the REx 5xx terminal. There are fourselectable and editable settings group, each independent of the other, tostructure desired functions and applications.

4.1 Disturbance report This menu includes all setting parameters for the disturbance report. Thefollowing features are available:

• Activate or deactivate the disturbance report by setting the opera-tion to On or Off.

• Sequence number can be set for each recorded disturbance.

• Sampling rate is fixed at 1000 Hz.

• Recording times for pre-fault, post-fault and time limit shall be set.

• Triggering and masking of binary signals selected in the configura-tion menu shall be set. Up to 48 binary signals are possible.

• Triggering and recording of analogue signals shall be set. Up to five voltage signals and five current signals are possible.

• Fault locator settings shall be done here. It includes measurement duration and presentation of the result.

4.2 Functions Settings of the parameters for the included protection and control func-tions are done here. Four separate setting groups are avaible. First selectdesired group and then desired function. One group can contain one orseveral functions.

4.3 Change active group Select and change the active group setting. Each of the four groups can beset independently of each other.

4.4 Time To set the internal time in the REx 5xx terminal. The time is set in theform of YYYY-MMM-DD and hh:mm:ss. All values but the month arepresented with digits. The month are presented with the first three lettersin current month.


Version 2.2-00

5 Terminal report menuUse this menu to display information of the self supervision, terminalidentity, software version, modules and the analogue inputs.

5.1 Self- supervision The REx 5xx terminal has extensive built-in self-supervision functions todetect if internal faults occurs. If an error occurs, the green LED on thefront panel will flash and a warning signal will be activated. Use the self-supervision report to get information about detected faults.

The self-supervision report can also be used to check the status of eachinstalled module as well as CPU, memory and clock operation.

5.2 Identity number The terminal identity feature contains information as serial number andthe software version installed in the terminal.

5.3 Modules This menu includes information about all included modules, such as I/O-modules and MPM-module (CPU).

5.4 Analogue inputs Includes information about the analogue inputs, voltage and current, con-cerning nominal and rated values.

Menu tree

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 291-XENPage 4 – 46

6 Configuration menuUse this menu to make a general configuration of the REx 5xx terminal.The CAP 531 configuration tool must be used to configure protection andcontrol functions and the I/O modules. The following can be set and con-figured:

• Identifiers.

• Analogue inputs.

• I/O modules (operation and oscillation).

• Time synchronising source.

• Local HMI blockset.

• Terminal communication.

• Differential function.

6.1 Analogue inputs Use this menu to configure general analogue input settings, such as:

• general data about the power network, such as rated voltage, current, frequency and the position of the earthing point.

• CT and VT ratio.

• user-defined labels for the analogue inputs and for the measured voltage, current, active and reactive power and frequency.

6.2 I/O modules In this menu it is possible to:

• reconfigure added or replaced I/O modules.

• set the level for blocking of oscillating binary inputs.

6.3 Differential function Use this menu to configure the differential protection functions as a partof networked terminal system. Possible to change:

• the differential synchronisation scheme

• the master terminal identity

• the remote (slave) terminal identity.

6.4 Terminal communication

Use this menu to configure the REx 5xx terminal communication buses, ifany connected.

6.4.1 SPA communication

Use this menu to set the parameters for the front and rear ports used forSPA communication. Each communication channel must be set sepa-rately.


Version 2.2-00

Slave number and baud rate (communication speed) must be set for boththe ports. These settings must correspond with the settings in the used PC-program. For the rear port it is possible to set permission of changesbetween active setting groups, ActGrpRestrict, and the setting restrictions,SettingRestrict, as well. Also see section 6.6.

6.4.2 IEC communication

Use this menu to set slave number and baud rate when to communicate onthe IEC 870–5–103 communications bus, also known as Schnittstelle 6 orVDEW 6. The IEC bus uses the same rear optic port as the SPA bus, butthe settings must be done separately. Other settings and blocking of somefunctions can also be done.

6.4.3 LON communication

Use this menu to view node information as address and location, whichare set from the LON Network Tool, as well as the Neuron identity. Func-tions for address setting during installation (ServicePinMSG), LON con-figuration reset (LONDefault) and session timers are also available.

Note: Session timers are for advanced usage and should only be changedupon recommendation from ABB Network Partner AB.

6.4.4 Remote terminal communication

Use this menu to configure the different protection fiber optics communi-cation bus. This communication requires certain digital communicationmodules. The parameters to set are:

• the bit rate

• the fiber optics transmitter output power

• the terminal master/slave operation.

6.5 Time synchronising source

The internal terminal time can be synchronised with an external unit con-nected to the SPA/IEC 870-5-103 port or the LON port. It is also possibleto use a minute pulse synchronisation signal asserted on a digital input.

6.6 Local HMI blockset The HMI--BLOCKSET includes the SettingRestrict parameter. The set-ting restriction enables and disables external settings via the SPA commu-nication bus connected to the rear SPA/IEC 870-5-103 port. Thisparameter can only be changed from the local HMI.

6.7 Identifiers Use the identifiers to specify the location of and to define a terminalwithin the power system. All identifier names are typed as strings, maxi-mum 16 characters, and the identity numbers are typed with digits. Typi-cal usage are:

• name and number of the station.

• name and number of the bay or object.

• name and number of the actual REx 5xx terminal.

Menu tree

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 291-XENPage 4 – 48

7 Command menuUse this menu to manually select and execute any single or multiple sig-nal command, as defined from the configuration menu or the CAP 531configuration tool. The signal(s) can be connected to any internal functionor to a binary output of the terminal. It is possible to assign a user-definedname to these binary signals.


Version 2.2-00

8 Test menuUse this menu to enable easier secondary injection tests of the REx 5xxterminal. It is possible to block functions to prevent trip of circuit breakersand activation of alarm signals etc. to the control room during the testingactivities.

The selectable modes, from the HMI, is the TestMode and ConfigMode.

The test mode allows:

• Setting the terminal in test mode operation.

• Blocking of one or several protection and control functions (select-able) during test operation.

• Blocking of one or several event functions (selectable) during test operation.

• Setting the disturbance report and the disturbance summary to On or Off during test operation.

• Special test mode to facilate the testing of the line differential protec-tion function. This Diff. TestMode disables the trip-out from the remote terminal and enables test from one end.

The configuration mode allows:

• Setting the terminal in configuration mode operation. This will auto-matically be done when down-loading a configuration from the CAP 531 configuration tool. When the down-loading is completed, the terminal automatically enters the normal mode.

Menu tree

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 291-XENPage 4 – 50

51Appendix – Menu tree structure for REx 5xx terminals

1 IntroductionThis appendix describes the menu tree structure for the complete REx 5xxseries of terminals. This means that the menus in a certain terminal is onlya part of what is shown in this appendix. What is shown in a terminaldepends on:

• the type of terminal• installed terminal options.

In some terminals, the menu tree can be partly hidden (programmable).

To operate the local human machine interface (HMI), refer to the section“Local human-machine communication”.

The text “According to function block”, present at menu leafs, is meant asa reference to the corresponding function block description that can befound in the sections “General functions” and/or “Functions” .

1MRK 580 292-XEN


Appendix – Menu tree structure for REx 5xx terminals

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 52

2 Menu tree structure

2.1 Disturbance report

REX 5XX/DistRep .DistRep/Disturb .Disturb/Dist1 .Dist1/Time .TripVal/PreFlt

Disturbances Disturbance1 TimeOfDisturb TimeOfDisturb U11

CalcDistToFlt Disturbance2 TrigSignal U21

ManualTrig Disturbance3 Indications .Dist1/TrigSig U31

ClearDistRep Disturbance4 FaultLocator TrigSignal U41

Disturbance5 TripValues U51

Disturbance6 .Dist1/Indic I11

Disturbance7 CalcDistToFault,command with confir-mation according to the section ”Local human-machine inter-face”

Indications I21

Disturbance8 I31

Disturbance9 .Dist1/FltLoc I41

Disturbance10 FltLoop I51

Dist Frequency1

.DistRep/CalcFlt

Disturbance1 .Dist1/TripVal .TripVal/Fault

Disturbance2 PreFault U11

Disturbance3 Fault U21

Disturbance4 U31

Disturbance5 U41

Disturbance6 U51

Disturbance7 I11

Disturbance8 I21

Disturbance9 I31

Disturbance10 I41

I51

Manual Trig,command with confir-mation according to the section ”Local human-machine inter-face”

Clear DistRep,command with confir-mation according to the section ”Local human-machine inter-face”

1. User name. Default name is shown


1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 53

Version 2.2-00

2.2 Service report

2.2.1 General

REX 5XX/ServRep .ServRep/ServVal .Phasors/Primary

ServiceValues U1 U11

Phasors I1 U21

Functions P1 U31

I/O Q1 U41

DisturbReport f1 U51

ActiveGroup I11

Time .ServRep/Phasors I21

Primary I31

Secondary I41

I51

U1U2

U2U3

U3U1

.Phasors/Second

U11

U21

U31

U41

U51

I11

I21

I31

I41

I51



Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 54

2.2.2 Functions, part I

REX 5XX/ServRep .ServRep/Func .Func/HLED HLED/Outputs .ZGEN/ImpVal GFC/Outputs

ServiceValues HMI LED FuncOutputs Signals according to function block

.ZGEN/ImpVal Signals according to function blockPhasors Impedance XL1

Functions Differential .Func/Imp RL1

I/O InstantOC General .Imp/ZGEN XL2 .PHS/Outputs

DisturbReport TimeDelayOC GenFltCriteria ImpValues RL2 Signals according to function blockActiveGroup InvTimeDelayOC PhaseSelection ImpDirection XL3

Time DirInvTDelayOC HighSpeed RL3

OverLoad HighSpeedBO .Imp/GFC .HS/Outputs

Stub Zone1 FuncOutputs .ZDIR/ImpDir Signals according to function block: Zone2 L1

: Zone3 .Imp/PHS L2

: Zone4 FuncOutputs L3 .HSBO/Outputs

: Zone5 Signals according to function blockTimerSet1 ComLocal .Imp/HS

SRWithMem1 ZCommunication FuncOutputs

LocalHMI Com1P .ZM1/Outputs

ComIRevWei .Imp/HSBO Signals according to function blockPowerSwingDet FuncOutputs

PowerSwingLog

SwitchOntoFlt .Imp/ZM1 .ZM2/Outputs

FuncOutputs Signals according to function block

.Imp/ZM2

FuncOutputs .ZM3/Outputs

Signals according to function block.Imp/ZM3

FuncOutputs

.ZM4/Outputs

.Imp/ZM4 Signals according to function blockFuncOutputs

.Imp/ZM5 .ZM5/Outputs



1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 55

Version 2.2-00

2.2.3 Functions, part II

REX 5XX/ServRep .ServRep/Func .Func/Imp .Imp/ZCLC .ZCLC/Outputs

ServiceValues HMI LED General FuncOutputs Signals according to function blockPhasors Impedance GenFltCriteria

Functions Differential PhaseSelection .Imp/ZCOM

I/O InstantOC HighSpeed FuncOutputs .ZCOM/Outputs

DisturbReport TimeDelayOC Direction Signals according to function blockActiveGroup InvTimeDelayOC Zone1 .Imp/ZC1P

Time DirInvTDelayOC Zone2 FuncOutputs

OverLoad Zone3 ZC1P/Outputs

ThermOverLoad Zone4 .Imp/ZCAL Signals according to function block: Zone5 FuncOutputs

: ComLocal

: ZCommunication .Imp/PSD .ZCAL/Outputs

: Com1P FuncOutputs Signals according to function blockTimerSet1 ComIRevWei

SRWithMem1 PowerSwingDet .Imp/PSL

LocalHMI PowerSwingLog FuncOutputs .PSD/Outputs

SwitchOntoFlt Signals according to function block.Imp/SOTF

FuncOutputs

.PSL/Outputs

Signals according to function block

.SOTF/Outputs



Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 56

2.2.4 Functions, part III

REX 5XX/ServRep .ServRep/Func .Func/DIFL .DIFL/DiffVal .ChInfo/ChInfo

ServiceValues HMI LED DiffValues IDiffL1 TransmDelay

Phasors Impedance DiffCom IBiasL1 NoOfShlnterr

Functions Differential FuncOutputs IDiffL2 NoOfMedlnterr

I/O InstantOC IBiasL2 NoOfLonglnterr

DisturbReport TimeDelayOC .Func/IOC IDiffL3 CommStatus

ActiveGroup InvTimeDelayOC FuncOutputs IBiasL3 NoOfTXD

Time DirInvTDelayOC NoOfRXD

InternalSignals OverLoad .Func/TOC .DIFL/ChInfo SyncError

ThermOverLoad FuncOutputs DiffCom

Stub ClearCounters Clear Counters, command with confir-mation according to the section ”Local human-machine inter-face”

PoleDiscord .Func/OVLD

BreakerFailure FuncOutputs .DIFL/Outputs

EarthFault Signals accordingto function blockTimeDelayUV

TimeDelayOV

LossOfVoltage .IOC/Outputs

: Signals accordingto function block:

:

: .TOC/Outputs

TimerSet1 Signals accordingto function blockSRWithMem1

LocalHMI

.TOC2/Outputs

Signals accordingto function block

.TOC3/Outputs


.OVLD/Outputs



1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 57

Version 2.2-00

2.2.5 Functions, part IV

REX5XXServRep .ServRep/Func .Func/THOL .THOL/Temp .TEF/Outputs

Service Values HMI LED ThermOverLoad T LineT Amb

Signals accordingto function blockPhasors Impedance FuncOutputs

Functions :

I/O : .Func/STUB .THOL/Outputs .EF4/Outputs

DisturbReport : FuncOutputs Signals accordingto function block

Signals accordingto function blockActiveGroup :

Time DirInvTDelayOC .Func/PD

OverLoad FuncOutputs .STUB/Outputs .WEF1/Outputs

ThermOverLoad Signals accordingto function block

Signals accordingto function blockStub .Func/BFP

PoleDiscord FuncOutputs

BreakerFailure .PD/Outputs .EFC/Outputs

EarthFault .Func/EarthF Signals accordingto function block

Signals accordingto function blockTimeDelayUV TimeDelayEF

TimeDelayOV 4StepEF

LossOfVoltage WattmetrEF I .BFP/Outputs .EFCA/Outputs

DeadLineDet EFCom Signals accordingto function block

Signals accordingto function blockBrokenConduct ComIRevWei

CTSupervision

: .Func/TUV EarthF/TEF

: FuncOutputs FuncOutputs

:

: .EarthF/EF4

TimerSet1 FuncOutputs

SRWithMem1

LocalHMI .EarthF/WEF1

FuncOutputs

.EarthF/EFC

FuncOutputs

.EarthF/EFCA

FuncOutputs

.TUV/Outputs



Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 58

2.2.6 Functions, part V

REX5XXServRep .ServRep/Func .Func/TOV .TOV/Outputs .AR01/ARCount1 .ARCount/Count

Service Values HMI LED FuncOutputs Signals according to function block

Counters 1ph-Shot1

Phasors Impedance ClearCounters 3ph-Shot1

Functions : .Func/LOV 3ph-Shot2

I/O : FuncOutputs .LOV/Outputs .AR01/Outputs1 3ph-Shot3

DisturbReport : Signals according to function block


3ph-Shot4

ActiveGroup : .Func/DLD NoOfReclosings

Time EarthFault FuncOutputs

TimeDelayUV .DLD/OutputsClear Counters, command with confirmation according to the section ”Local human-machine interface”

TimeDelayOV .Func/BRC Signals according to function blockLossOfVoltage FuncOutputs

DeadLineDet .SYN1/SyncVal2

BrokenConduct .Func/CTSU .BRC/Outputs UDiff

CTSupervision FuncOutputs Signals according to function block

FreqDiff

FuseFailure PhaseDiff

AutoRecloser .Func/FUSE

SynchroCheck FuncOutputs .CTSU/Outputs .SYN1/Outputs2

1. AR02 to AR06 as AR01

2. SYN2 to SYN4 as SYN1

Trip Signals according to function block

Signals according to function blockComChanTest .Func/AutoRec

FaultLocator AutoRecloser1

ActiveGroup AutoRecloser2 .FUSE/Outputs

: AutoRecloser3 Signals according to function block: AutoRecloser4

: AutoRecloser5

: AutoRecloser6 .AutoRec/AR011

TimerSet1 Counters

SRWithMem1 .Func/Sync FuncOutputs

LocalHMI SynchroCheck1

SynchroCheck2 .Sync/SYN12

SynchroCheck3 SyncValues

SynchroCheck4 FuncOutputs

.Func/TRIP TRIP/Outputs


.Func/CCHT

FuncOutputs CCHT/Outputs



1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 59

Version 2.2-00

2.2.7 Functions, part VI

REX 5XX/ServRep .ServRep/Func .Func/FLOC .FLOC/Outputs Count/Count

ServiceValues HMI LED FuncOutputs Signals accordingto function block

Counter1

Phasors Impedance Counter2

Functions : .Func/GRP Counter3

I/O : FuncOutputs .GRP/Outputs Counter4

DisturbReport : Signals accordingto function block

Counter5

ActiveGroup : .Func/CN01 Counter6

Time Trip Count

ComChanTest .CN01/Count

Clear Counters, com-mand with confirma-tion according to the section ”Local human-machine interface”

FaultLocator .Func/ICOM Counters

ActiveGroup Signals accordingto function block

ClearCounters

Counters

IEC103Command

DisturbReport .Func/DREP

InternSignals Signals accordingto function blockTest

Time

MI11--61error .Func/INT

CD01--11 Signals accordingto function blockAND1A

AND1B

: .Func/TEST

: Signals accordingto function block:

:

TimerSet1 .Func/Time

SRWithMem1 Signals accordingto function blockLocalHMI

.Func/MI11Err1


.Func/CD012

Signals accordingto function block 1. MI12Err to MI61Err

as MI11Err2. CD02 to CD11 as

CD01


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 60

2.2.8 Functions, part VII

REX 5XX/ServRep .ServRep/Func .Func/AND1A .Func/TQ1 .CtrGts1/Outputs

ServiceValues HMI LED Signals accordingto function block


Signals accordingto function blockPhasors Impedance

Functions :

I/O : .Func/AND1B .Func/TQ2 .TimSet1/Outputs

DisturbReport : Signals accordingto function block


Signals accordingto function blockActiveGroup :

Time Time

MI11--61error .Func/OR1A .Func/CtrGts1 .SM1/Outputs

CD01--11 Signals accordingto function block

FuncOutputs Signals accordingto function blockAND1A

AND1B .Func/TimSet1

OR1A .Func/OR1B FuncOutputs

OR2A Signals accordingto function blockXOR1 .Func/SM1

INV FuncOutputs

SR .Func/XOR1

Timer Signals accordingto function blockTimerLong

Pulse

Pulse2 .Func/INV

PulseLong1 Signals accordingto function blockPulseLong2

ContrGates1

TimerSet1 .Func/SR

SRWithMem1 Signals accordingto function blockLocalHMI

.Func/TM


.Func/TL


.Func/TP



1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 61

Version 2.2-00

2.2.9 I/O

REX 5XX/ServRep .ServRep/I/O .I/O/BIM1 .BIM1/Outputs

ServiceValues Slot12-BIM11 FuncOutputs Signals accordingto function blockPhasors Slot14-IOM21

Functions Slot16-BOM31 .I/O/IOM2

I/O Slot18-MIM11 FuncOutputs .IOM2/Outputs

DisturbReport Slot20-BIM51Signals accordingto function blockActiveGroup Slot22-IOM61 .I/O/BOM3

Time Slot24-BOM71 FuncOutputs

Slot26-MIM21 .BOM3/Outputs

Slot28-BIM91 .I/O/MIM1 Signals accordingto function blockSlot30-IOM101 FuncOutputs

Slot32-BOM111

Slot34-MIM31 .I/O/RTC1 .MIM1/Outputs

Slot36-BIM131 FuncOutputs Signals accordingto function blockRemTermCom1

RemTermCom2 .I/O/RTC2

FuncOutputs .RTC1/Outputs


.RTC2/Outputs


1. This is an example of a full framework


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 62

2.2.10 Remaining menus

REX 5XX/ServRep .ServRep/DREP .DREP/Memory

ServiceValues MemoryUsed MemoryUsed

Phasors SequenceNo

Functions AnalogTrigStat .DREP/SeqNo

I/O SequenceNo

DisturbReport .ServRep/GRP

ActiveGroup ActiveGroup .DREP/AnaTrig

Time U1>1

.ServRep/TIME U1<1

Date&Time U2>1

U2<1

U3>1

U3<1

U4>1

U4<1

U5>1

U5<1

I1>1

I1<1

I2>1

I2<1

I3>1

I3<1

I4>1

I4<1

I5>1

I5<1

.INT/Outputs




1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 63

Version 2.2-00

2.3 Settings

.REX 5XX/Set .Set/DREP .DREP/Oper .Binary/Input13

DisturbReport Operation Operation UserName2

Functions SequenceNo PostRetrig TrigOperation

ChangeActGrp SamplingRate TrigLevel

Time RecordingTimes .DREP/SeqNo IndicationMask

BinarySignals SequenceNo SetLed

AnalogSignals

FaultLocator .DREP/SRate .Binary/Input483

SamplingRate UserName2

TrigOperation

.DREP/RecTime TrigLevel

tPre IndicationMask

tPost SetLed

tLim

.Analog/U13

.DREP/Binary UserName2

Input11 Operation

Input21 >TrigOperation

- >TrigLevel

- <TrigOperation

Input471 <TrigLevel

Input481

.Analog/I13

.DREP/Analog UserName2

U11 Operation

U21 >TrigOperation

U31 >TrigLevel

U41 <TrigOperation

U51 <TrigLevel

I11

I21

I31

I41

I51

.DREP/FltLoc

DistanceUnit 1. User name. Default name is shown

2. Read only3. User name will not be

shown


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 64

2.3.1 Functions, part I

REX 5XX/Set .Set/Func .Func/Grp1 .Grp1/HLED .Imp/ZGEN

DisturbReport Group1 HMI LED Settings accordingto function block

Settings accordingto function blockFunctions Group2 Line Reference

ChangeActGrp Group3 Impedance

Time Group4 Differential .Grp1/LRF .Imp/GFC

InstantOC Settings accordingto function block

Settings accordingto function blockTimeDelayOC

InvTimeDelayOC

Save as Grp1 DirInvTDelayOC .Grp1/Imp .Imp/PHS

Save as Grp 2 OverLoad General Settings accordingto function blockSave as Grp 3 ThermOverLoad GenFltCriteria

Save as Grp 4 Stub PhaseSelection

Command with Confir-mation according to the section ”Local human-machine inter-face”

PoleDiscord HighSpeed .Imp/HS

BreakerFailure Direction Settings accordingto function blockEarthFault Zone1

TimeDelayUV Zone2

TimeDelayOV Zone3 .Imp/ZDIR

LossOfVoltage Zone4 Settings accordingto function blockDeadLineDet Zone5

BrokenConduct ComLocal

CTSupervision ZCommunication .Imp/ZM1

FuseFailure Com1P Settings accordingto function blockAutoRecloser ComIRevWei

SynchroCheck PowerSwingDet

Trip PowerSwingLog .Imp/ZM2

ComChanTest SwitchOntoFlt Settings accordingto function blockContrGates1

TimerSet1

SRWithMem1 .Imp/ZM3

Counters Settings accordingto function block

.Imp/ZM4

Settings accordingto function block

.Imp/ZM5



1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 65

Version 2.2-00

2.3.2 Functions, part II

REX 5XX/Set .Set/Func .Func/Grp1 .Grp1/Imp .Imp/ZCLC

DisturbReport Group1 HMI LED General Settings accordingto function blockFunctions Group2 Line Reference GenFltCriteria

ChangeActGrp Group3 Impedance PhaseSelection

Time Group4 Differential HighSpeed .Imp/ZCom

InstantOC Direction Settings accordingto function blockTimeDelayOC Zone1

InvTimeDelayOC Zone2

DirInvTDelayOC Zone3 .Imp/ZC1P

Save as Grp1 OverLoad Zone4 Settings accordingto function blockSave as Grp 2 ThermOverLoad Zone5

Save as Grp 3 Stub ComLocal

Save as Grp 4 PoleDiscord ZCommunication .Imp/ZCAL


BreakerFailure Com1P Settings accordingto function blockEarthFault ComIRevWei

TimeDelayUV PowerSwingDet

TimeDelayOV PowerSwingLog .Imp/PSD

LossOfVoltage SwitchOntoFlt Settings accordingto function blockDeadLineDet

BrokenConduct

CTSupervision .Imp/PSL

FuseFailure Settings accordingto function blockAutoRecloser

SynchroCheck

Trip .Imp/SOTF

ComChanTest Settings accordingto function blockContrGates1

TimerSet1

SRWithMem1

Counters


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 66

2.3.3 Functions, part III

REX 5XX/Set .Set/Func .Func/Grp1 .Grp1/Diff

DisturbReport Group1 HMI LED Settings according to function blockFunctions Group2 Line Reference


Time Group4 Differential .Grp1/IOC

InstantOC Settings according to function blockTimeDelayOC

Save as Grp1 InvTimeDelayOC

Save as Grp 2 DirInvTDelayOC .Grp1/TOC

Save as Grp 3 OverLoad Settings according to function blockSave as Grp 4 ThermOverLoad

Command with Confirma-tion according to the sec-tion ”Local human-machine interface”

Stub

PoleDiscord .Grp1/TOC2

BreakerFailure Settings according to function blockEarthFault

TimeDelayUV

TimeDelayOV .Grp1/TOC3

LossOfVoltage Settings according to function blockDeadLineDet

BrokenConduct

CTSupervision .Grp1/OVLD

FuseFailure Settings according to function blockAutoRecloser

SynchroCheck

Trip .Grp1/THOL

ComChanTest Settings according to function blockContrGates1

TimerSet1

SRWithMem1 .Grp1/STUB

Counters Settings according to function block

.Grp1/PD

Settings according to function block

.Grp1/BFP

Settings according to function block


1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 67

Version 2.2-00

2.3.4 Functions, part IV

REX 5XX/Set .Set/Func .Func/Grp1 .Grp1/EarthF .EarthF/TEF EF4/GEN

DisturbReport Group1 HMI LED TimeDelayEF Settings accord-ing to function block

Settings accord-ing to function block

Functions Group2 Line Reference 4StepEF

ChangeActGrp Group3 Impedance WattmetrEF I

Time Group4 Differential EFCom

InstantOC ComIRevWei .EarthF/EF4 EF4/Step1

TimeDelayOC General Settings accord-ing to function block

Save as Grp1 InvTimeDelayOC Step1

Save as Grp 2 DirInvTDelayOC Step2

Save as Grp 3 OverLoad Step3

Save as Grp 4 ThermOverLoad Step4 EF4/Step2

Command with Confirmation according to the section ”Local human-machine interface”

Stub Direction Settings accord-ing to function block

PoleDiscord 2ndHarmStab

BreakerFailure SwitchOnToFlt

EarthFault

TimeDelayUV .EarthF/WEF1 EF4/Step3

TimeDelayOV Settings accord-ing to function block


LossOfVoltage

DeadLineDet

BrokenConduct

CTSupervision .EarthF/EFC EF4/Step4

FuseFailureSettings accord-ing to function block


AutoRecloser

SynchroCheck

Trip

ComChanTest .EarthF/EFCA EF4/Dir

ContrGates1 Settings accord-ing to function block


TimerSet1

SRWithMem1

Counters

EF4/2ndHarm


EF4/SOTF



Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 68

2.3.5 Functions, part V

REX 5XX/Set .Set/Func .Func/Grp1 .Grp1/TUV

DisturbReport Group1 HMI LED Settings accordingto function blockFunctions Group2 Line Reference


Time Group4 Differential .Grp1/TOV

InstantOC Settings accordingto function blockTimeDelayOC


Save as Grp 2 DirInvTDelayOC .Grp1/LOV

Save as Grp 3 OverLoad Settings accordingto function blockSave as Grp 4 ThermOverLoad

Command with Confirma-tion according to the sec-tion ”Local human-machine interface”

Stub

PoleDiscord .Grp1/DLD

BreakerFailure Settings accordingto function blockEarthFault

TimeDelayUV

TimeDelayOV .Grp1/BRC

LossOfVoltage Settings accordingto function blockDeadLineDet

BrokenConduct

CTSupervision .Grp1/CTSU

FuseFailure Settings accordingto function blockAutoRecloser

SynchroCheck

Trip .Grp1/FUSE

ComChanTest Settings accordingto function blockContrGates1

TimerSet1

SRWithMem1

Counters


1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 69

Version 2.2-00

2.3.6 Functions, part VI

REX 5XX/Set .Set/Func .Func/Grp1 .Grp1/AutoRec .AutoRec/AR011

DisturbReport Group1 HMI LED AutoRecloser1 Settings accordingto function blockFunctions Group2 Line Reference AutoRecloser2

ChangeActGrp Group3 Impedance AutoRecloser3

Time Group4 Differential AutoRecloser4 .Sync/SYN12

InstantOC AutoRecloser5 Settings accordingto function blockTimeDelayOC AutoRecloser6


Save as Grp 2 DirInvTDelayOC .Grp1/Sync

Save as Grp 3 OverLoad SynchroCheck11. AR02 to AR06 as

AR012. SYN2 to SYN4 as

SYN1

Save as Grp 4 ThermOverLoad SynchroCheck2


Stub SynchroCheck3

PoleDiscord SynchroCheck4

BreakerFailure

EarthFault .Grp1/TRIP

TimeDelayUV Operation

TimeDelayOV

LossOfVoltage .Grp1/CCHT

DeadLineDet Settings accordingto function blockBrokenConduct

CTSupervision

FuseFailure .Grp1/CtrGts1

AutoRecloser Settings accordingto function blockSynchroCheck

Trip

ComChanTest .Grp1/TimSet1

ContrGates1 Settings accordingto function blockTimerSet1

SRWithMem1

Counters .Grp1/SM1


.Grp1/Count



Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 70

2.3.7 Remaining menus

REX 5XX/Set .Set/GRP

DisturbReport Settings accordingto function blockFunctions

ChangeActGrpChangeAct Grp, Command with confirma-tion according to the sec-tion ”Local human-machine interface”

Time

.Set/TIME



1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 71

Version 2.2-00

2.4 Terminal report

.REX 5XX/TermRep .TermRep/SelfSup

SelfSuperv InternFail

IdentityNo InternWarning

Modules MPM-modFail

AnalogInputs MPM-modWarning

ADC-module

Slot12-BIM11

Slot14-IOM21

Slot16-BOM31

Slot18-MIM11

Slot20-BIM51

Slot22-IOM61

RemTermCom

RealTimeClock

TimeSync

.TermRep/IdentNo

SerialNo

SW-Version

.TermRep/Modules

Slot12-BIM11

Slot14-IOM21

Slot16-BOM31

Slot18-MIM11

Slot20-BIM51

Slot22-IOM61

I/O-diff

.TermRep/AnInp

Ur

Ir

U1r

U2r

U3r

U4r

U5r

I1r


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 72

I2r

1. Follow the IdentNo installed on each pos. in the framework

I3r

I4r

I5r


1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 73

Version 2.2-00

2.5 Configuration

2.5.1 Part I

REX5XX REX5XX/Config .Config/AnInp .AnInp/GeneraI

DisturbReport AnalogInputs General fr

ServiceReport I/O-modules U1 CTEarth

Settings DiffFunction U2

TerminalReport TerminalCom U3 .AnInp/U1

Configuration Time U4 Name

Command BuiltInMMI U5 U1b

Test Identifiers I1 U1Scale

SelectLanguage I2

I3 .AnInp/Q

I4 Name

I5

U .AnInp/f

I Name

P

Q

f .AnInp/TRM

TrafoInpModule Ur

Ir

U1

U2

U3

U4

U5

I1

I2

I3

I4

I5


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 74

2.5.2 Part II

REX5XX REX5XX/Config .Config/I/O-mod .I/O-mod/Oper .Osc/BIM5

DisturbReport AnalogInputs Operation Slot11-PSM12 BIM5-OscBlock

ServiceReport I/O-modules Reconfigure Slot15-IOM32 BIM5-OscRel

Settings DiffFunction Oscillation Slot17-BOM42

TerminalReport TerminalCom Slot19-BIM52

Configuration Time .Config/DIFL 2. This is an example

Command BuiltInMMI DiffSync Reconfigure, command with confir-mation according to the section ”Local human-machine inter-face”

Test Identifiers

SelectLanguage .Cmd/ARBlock

Operation

.Config/TermCom .TermCom/SPA/IEC

SPA/IECCom X13Com .Cmd/ZComBlk

SPACom .I/O-mod/Osc Operation

IECCom .TermCom/SPACom Slot19-BIM52

LONCom Rear .Cmd/BlkFun

RemTermCom Front .SPACom/Rear Operation

SlaveNo

.TermCom/IECCom BaudRate .Cmd/LEDRes

Commands ActGrpRestrict Operation

Measurands SettingRestrict

FunctionType .Cmd/SetGrp1

Communication .SPACom/Front Operation

BlockOfInfoCmd SlaveNo

BaudRate .Cmd/SetGrp2

Operation

.IECCom/Cmd

ARBlock

ZCommBlock .Cmd/SetGrp3

BlockFunctions Operation

LEDReset

SettingGrp1 .Cmd/SetGrp4

SettingGrp2 Operation

SettingGrp3

SettingGrp4


1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 75

Version 2.2-00

2.5.3 Part III

REX5XX REX5XX/Config .Config/TermCom .TermCom/IECCom .IECCom/Meas .NodeInf/AdrInfo

DisturbReport AnalogInputs SPA/IECCom Commands MeasurandType DomainID

ServiceReport I/O-modules SPACom Measurands SubnetID

Settings DiffFunction IECCom FunctionType .IECCom/FunType NodeID

TerminalReport TerminalCom LONCom Communication Operation

Configuration Time RemTermCom BlockOfInfoCmd MainFuncType .NodeInf/NeurID

Command BuiltInMMI NeuronID

Test Identifiers .Config/Time .TermCom/LONCom .IECCom/Com

SelectLanguage TimeSyncSourc NodeInfo SlaveNo .NodeInf/Locat

ServicePinMsg BaudRate Location

.Config/MMI LONDefault

SettingRestrict SessionTimers

BlockOfInfoCmd,command with sta-tus and confirma-tion according to the section ”Local human-machine interface”

.Config/Ident .TermCom/Comm

StationName TerminalNo

StationNo RemoteTermNo

ObjectName BitRate

ObjectNo OptoPower

UnitName CommSync

UnitNo .LONCom/NodeInf

AdressInfo

.Config/SelLang NeuronID

ActiveLanguage Location

Save Language,command withconfirmationaccording to the section ”Local human-machine interface”

.LONCom/SesTime

SessionTmo

RetryTmo

IdleAckCycle

BusyAckCycle

ErrNackCycle

ServicePinMsg,LONDefault, Com-mandwith confirmationaccording to the section ”Local human-machine interface”


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 76

2.6 Command

REX5XX .REX5XX/Cmd .Cmd/CD01CD01-CmdOut1 to CD01-CmdOut16,commands with status and confirmation accord-ing to the section ”Local human-machine inter-face”

DisturbReport CD01 CD01-CmdOut11

ServiceReport CD02 CD01-CmdOut21

Settings CD03 CD01-CmdOut31

TerminalReport CD04 CD01-CmdOut41

Configuration CD05 CD01-CmdOut51

Command CD06 CD01-CmdOut61

Test CD07 :

: :

CD09 CD01-CmdOut141

CD10 CD01-CmdOut151

CD11 CD01-CmdOut161

(CD02 to CD11 conforms with CD01, only present in REC 561)

CD01-CmdOut111. User name. Default

name is shown


1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 77

Version 2.2-00

2.7 Test

REX5XX .REX5XX/Test .Test/Mode .Mode/TestOp

DisturbReport TestMode Operation Operation

ServiceReport ConfigMode BlocktFunctions

Settings BlockEventFunc .Mode/BlkFnc

TerminalReport DisturbReport Signals accordingto function blockConfiguration Differential

Command

Test .Test/CnfMode .Mode/BlkEv

ConfigMode Signals according to function block

.Mode/DistRep

Operation

DisturbSummary

.Mode/Diff

DiffTestMode

ReleaseLocal


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 78

HMI LED HMI LED

Line Reference Line Reference

Impedance Impedance

Differential Differential

InstantOC InstantOC

TimeDelayOC TimeDelayOC

InvTimeDelayOC InvTimeDelayOC

DirInvTDelayOC DirInvTDelayOC

OverLoad OverLoad

ThermOverLoad ThermOverLoad

Stub Stub

PoleDiscord PoleDiscord

BreakerFailure BreakerFailure

EarthFault EarthFault

TimeDelayUV TimeDelayUV

TimeDelayOV TimeDelayOV

LossOfVoltage LossOfVoltage

DeadLineDet DeadLineDet

BrokenConduct BrokenConduct

CTSupervision CTSupervision

FuseFailure FuseFailure

AutoRecloser AutoRecloser

SynchroCheck SynchroCheck

Trip Trip

ComChanTest ComChanTest

FaultLocator ContrGates1

ActiveGroup TimerSet1

Counters SRWithMem1

IEC103Command Counters

DisturbReport

InternalSignals

Test

Time

MI11--61error

CD01--11

AND1A

AND1B

OR1A

OR2A

XOR1

INV


1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 79

Version 2.2-00

SR

Timer

TimerLong

Pulse

Pulse2

PulseLong1

PulseLong2

ContrGates1

TimerSet1

SRWithMem1

LocalHMI


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 80

1

Contents Page

Terminal identification................................................................................5–5Application...................................................................................................... 5–5

Parameters..................................................................................................... 5–5

Setting ............................................................................................................ 5–6

Reports........................................................................................................... 5–6

Appendix ........................................................................................................ 5–7Setting tables ....................................................................................... 5–7

LED indication function.............................................................................. 5-9Application....................................................................................................... 5-9

Theory of operation ......................................................................................... 5-9Operating modes................................................................................... 5-9

Collecting mode .......................................................................... 5-9Re-starting mode ........................................................................ 5-9

Acknowledge/reset................................................................................ 5-9Operating sequences .......................................................................... 5-10

Sequence 1 (Follow-S) ............................................................. 5-10Sequence 2 (Follow-F).............................................................. 5-10Sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S).................................................. 5-11Sequence 4 (LatchedAck-S-F).................................................. 5-11Sequence 5 (LatchedColl-S)..................................................... 5-11Sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S).................................................. 5-12

Design ........................................................................................................... 5-13

Setting ........................................................................................................... 5-13

Testing........................................................................................................... 5-13

Appendix ....................................................................................................... 5-14Function block..................................................................................... 5-14Signal list............................................................................................. 5-14Setting list............................................................................................ 5-15

Activation of setting groups ....................................................................5–17Application.................................................................................................... 5–17

Design .......................................................................................................... 5–17

Configuration and operation ......................................................................... 5–17

Testing.......................................................................................................... 5–18

Appendix ...................................................................................................... 5–19Function block.................................................................................... 5–19Signal list............................................................................................ 5–19

Restricted settings via human-machine interface .................................5–21Application.................................................................................................... 5–21

Installation and setting instructions .............................................................. 5–22

Testing.......................................................................................................... 5–23

Appendix ...................................................................................................... 5–24Function block.................................................................................... 5–24

General functions

General functionsPage 5 – 2

Signal list............................................................................................ 5–24Setting table ....................................................................................... 5–24

I/O system configuration..........................................................................5–25Application.................................................................................................... 5–25

Design .......................................................................................................... 5–26General .............................................................................................. 5–26Binary input module ........................................................................... 5–26Binary output module ......................................................................... 5–27Input/output module ........................................................................... 5–28mA input module ................................................................................ 5–28Power supply module......................................................................... 5–29Differential communication module .................................................... 5–30I/O position ......................................................................................... 5–30

Configuration ................................................................................................ 5–31

Setting .......................................................................................................... 5–32

Testing.......................................................................................................... 5–33

Appendix ...................................................................................................... 5–34Signal list............................................................................................ 5–34Setting table ....................................................................................... 5–34

Configurable logic ....................................................................................5–35Application.................................................................................................... 5–35

Design .......................................................................................................... 5–36Additional configurable logic .............................................................. 5–36Inverter (INV)...................................................................................... 5–36OR...................................................................................................... 5–37AND.................................................................................................... 5–37Timer .................................................................................................. 5–38Pulse .................................................................................................. 5–40Exclusive OR (XOR) .......................................................................... 5–41Set-Reset (SR)................................................................................... 5–42MOVE................................................................................................. 5–42

Setting .......................................................................................................... 5–45

Reports......................................................................................................... 5–46

Configuration ................................................................................................ 5–47

Testing.......................................................................................................... 5–48

Appendix ...................................................................................................... 5–49Function blocks .................................................................................. 5–49Signal lists .......................................................................................... 5–52Setting tables ..................................................................................... 5–53

Self-supervision........................................................................................5–55Application.................................................................................................... 5–55

Design .......................................................................................................... 5–55

Blocking of functions during test............................................................5–59Application.................................................................................................... 5–59

Design .......................................................................................................... 5–59

Time synchronisation...............................................................................5–61


Application.................................................................................................... 5–61

Theory of operation ...................................................................................... 5–62

Setting .......................................................................................................... 5–63

Appendix ...................................................................................................... 5–64Function block.................................................................................... 5–64Signal list............................................................................................ 5–64Setting table ....................................................................................... 5–64

........................................................................................................Application65

Internal events...............................................................................................65

5Terminal identification

1 ApplicationSerial number, software version and the identification names and numbersfor the station, the object and the terminal (unit) itself can be stored in theREx 5xx terminal. Also the serial numbers of included modules are storedin the terminal. This information can be read on the local HMI or whencommunicating with the terminal through a PC or with SMS/SCS.

The base currents, voltages and rated frequency must be set since the val-ues affect many functions. The input transformers ratio must be set aswell. The ratio for the current and the voltage transformer automaticallyaffects the measuring functions in the terminal.

The internal clock is used for time tagging of:

• Internal events.

• Disturbance reports.

• Events in a disturbance report.

• Events transmitted to the SCS substation control system.

This implies that the internal clock is very important. The clock can be syn-chronised (see Time synchronisation) to achieve higher accuracy of the timetagging. Without synchronisation, the internal clock is useful for compari-sons among events within the REx 5xx terminal.

2 ParametersUxr and Ixr (x = 1-5) are the rated voltage and current values for the ana-logue input transformers within the REx 5xx terminal. UxScale and IxS-cale are the actual ratio for the main transformer at the protected object.These values will be used to calculate the present voltage and current inthe protected object. Uxb and Ixb defines base voltage and current values,used to define the per-unit system used in the terminal for calculation ofsetting values.

The current transformer secondary current (IsSEC) is:

(Equation 1)

where ISEC is the secondary rated current of the main CT and IPRIM is theprimary rated current of the main CT. The relay setting value IP>> isgiven in percentage of the secondary base current value, Ixb, associated tothe current transformer input Ix:

(Equation 2)

The value of Ixb can be calculated as:

(Equation 3)

Name is possible to set for respective analogue input, to easily identifyand refer the values within the disturbance report to the correspondingobject.

IsSEC

ISEC

IPRIM------------ Is⋅=

IP>>IsSEC

Ixb------------- 100⋅=

IxbRated primary current

CT ratio----------------------------------------------------------=

1MRK 580 294-XEN


Terminal identification

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 294-XENPage 5 – 6

3 SettingThe identification settings (station, object and terminal names and num-bers) are done and displayed at:

ConfigurationIdentifiers

The analogue input settings Uxb, Ixb, UxScale, IxScale, names, f andCTEarth are done at:

ConfigurationAnalogInputs

The Uxr and Ixr are configured at delivery and can only be reconfiguredthrough the CAP 531 configuration tool.

The settings of the internal clock is done at:

SettingsTime

4 ReportsThe serial number of the terminal and the software version can be dis-played at:

TerminalReportIdentityNo

The serial number of included modules in the terminal can be displayedat:

TerminalReportModules

The Uxr and Ixr configurations can be displayed at:

TerminalReportAnalogInputs

The present primary and secondary voltage and current phasors can beviewed at:

ServiceReportPhasors

Primary or Secondary respectively

UxScale, IxScale and the identifiers are displayed at the same place aswhere they were set.

The present internal time is read at:

ServiceReportTime

Terminal identification 1MRK 580 294-XENPage 5 – 7

Version 2.2-00

5 Appendix

5.1 Setting tables

Table 1: Identifiers

Table 2: AnalogInputs - General

Table 3: AnalogInputs - Voltage

Parameter Range Unit Default Parameter description

Unit No 0 - 99999 Int 0 State an identity number for the terminal

Unit Name 0 - 16 char Unit Name State an identity name for the terminal, 16 characters

Object No 0 - 99999 Int 0 State an identity number for the protected object

Object Name 0 - 16 char Object Name State an identity name for the protected object, 16 characters

Station No 0 - 99999 Int 0 State an identity number for the station

Station Name 0 - 16 char Station Name State an identity name for the station, 16 characters


CTEarth 0 - 1 Int 1 Direction of CT earthing,0 = In = towards the bus, 1 = Out = towards the line

fr 0 - 1 Int 0 Select system frequency: 0 = 50 Hz, 1 = 60 Hz


U1r 10.000 - 500. V 63.509 Rated voltage of transformer on input U1

U1b 30.000 - 500. V 63.509 Base voltage of input U1

U1Scale 1.000 - 20000.000

2000.000 Scale for nominal primary voltage, input U1

Name 0 - 13 char U1 State an user-defined name of input U1, 13 characters



U2Scale 1.000 - 20000.000





U3Scale 1.000 - 20000.000





Terminal identification

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 294-XENPage 5 – 8

Table 4: AnalogInputs - Current

U4Scale 1.000 - 20000.000





U5Scale 1.000 - 20000.000





I1r 0.1000 - 10. A 1.0000 Rated current of transformer on input I1

I1b 0.1 - 10.0 A 1.0 Base current of input I1

I1Scale 1.000 - 40000.000

2000.000 Scale for nominal primary current, input I1

Name 0 - 13 char I1 State an user-defined name of input I1, 13 characters



I2Scale 1.000 - 40000.000





I3Scale 1.000 - 40000.000





I4Scale 1.000 - 40000.000





I5Scale 1.000 - 40000.000



9Activation of setting groups

1 ApplicationDifferent conditions in networks of different voltage levels require highadaptability of the used protection and control units to best provide fordependability, security and selectivity requirements. Protection units oper-ate with higher degree of availability, especially, if the setting values oftheir parameters are continuously optimised regarding the conditions inpower system.

The operational departments can plan different operating conditions forthe primary equipment. The protection engineer can prepare in advancefor the necessary optimised and pre-tested settings for different protectionfunctions. Four different groups of setting parameters are available in theREx 5xx terminals. Any of them can be activated automatically throughup to four different programmable binary inputs by means of external con-trol signals.

2 DesignThe REx 5xx control and protection terminals have four independentgroups (sets) of setting parameters. These groups can be activated at anytime in five different ways:

• Locally by means of the local human-machine interface (HMI).

• Locally by means of a front-connected personal computer (PC).

• Remotely through the Station Monitoring System (SMS).

• Remotely through the Station Control System (SCS).

• Locally by means of up to four, programmable binary inputs.

In the document “Local human-machine interface”, the procedure of howto change the active setting group from the local HMI is described. Oper-ating procedures for the PC aided methods of changing the active settinggroups are described in the corresponding SMS documents and instruc-tions for the operators within the SCS are included in the SCS documenta-tion. This document deals with the option to change the active settinggroup by means of the control signals connected to the programmablebinary inputs of the terminal.

3 Configuration and operationThis function has four included input signals, as shown in Figure 1:. Eachis configurable to any of the binary inputs in the terminal. Configurationmust be performed under the menu:

ConfigurationFunctions

ActiveGroupFuncInputs

The submenu Functions is only accessible for service personnel, so theconfiguration must be done by an authorised service person.

1MRK 580 295-XEN


Activation of setting groups

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 295-XENPage 5 – 10

The number of the signals configured must correspond to the number ofthe setting groups to be controlled by the external signals (contacts).

The voltage need not be permanently present on one binary input. Anypulse, which must be longer than 200 ms, activates the corresponding set-ting group. The group remains active until some other command, issuedeither through one of the binary inputs or by other means (local HMI,SMS, SCS), activates another group.

One or more inputs can be activated at the same time. If a function is rep-resented in two different groups and both the groups are active, the groupwith lowest identity has priority. This means that group 2 has higher prior-ity than group 4 etc.

It is possible to change active group from the local HMI at:

SettingsChangeActGrp

Figure 1: Connection of the function to external circuits.

This function includes four output signals as well, for confirmation ofwhich group that is active.

4 TestingConfigure the GRP--ACTGRPn input signals to the corresponding binaryinputs of a terminal and browse the local HMI for the information aboutthe active setting group under the menu:

ServiceReport ActiveGroup

Connect the appropriate dc voltage to the corresponding binary input ofthe terminal and observe the information presented on the HMI display.The displayed information must always correspond to the activated input.Check that corresponding output indicates the active group.

GRP--ACTGRP1

GRP--ACTGRP2

GRP--ACTGRP3

GRP--ACTGRP4

IOx-Bly1

IOx-Bly2

IOx-Bly3

IOx-Bly4

ACTIVATE GROUP 1ACTIVATE GROUP 2

ACTIVATE GROUP 4ACTIVATE GROUP 3

+RL2

Activation of setting groups 1MRK 580 295-XENPage 5 – 11

Version 2.2-00

5 Appendix

5.1 Function block

5.2 Signal list

ACTGRP1ACTGRP2ACTGRP3ACTGRP4

ACTIVATE SETTING GROUP GRP--

GRP1GRP2GRP3GRP4

Table 1:

Block Signal Type Description

GRP-- ACTGRP1 IN Active Group-Select setting group 1 as active group




GRP-- GRP1 OUT Setting group 1 active




Activation of setting groups

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 295-XENPage 5 – 12

13Restricted settings via human-machine interface

Note! Do not set this function in operation before carefully reading theseinstructions and configuring the HMI--BLOCKSET functional input tothe selected binary input.

The HMI--BLOCKSET functional input is configurable only to one of theavailable binary inputs of a REx 5xx terminal. For this reason, the termi-nal is delivered with the default configuration, where the HMI--BLOCK-SET signal is connected to NONE-NOSIGNAL.

1 ApplicationSetting values of different control and protection parameters and the con-figuration of different function and logic circuits within the terminal areimportant not only for reliable and secure operation of the terminal, butalso for the entire power system.

Non-permitted and non-coordinated changes, done by unauthorised per-sonnel, can cause severe damages in primary and secondary power cir-cuits. They can influence the security of people working in close vicinityof the primary and secondary apparatuses and those using electric energyin everyday life.

For this reason, all REx 5xx terminals include a special feature that, whenactivated, blocks the possibility to change the settings and/or configura-tion of the terminal from the HMI module.

All other functions of the local human-machine communication remainintact. This means that an operator can read all disturbance reports andother information and setting values for different protection parametersand the configuration of different logic circuits.

This function permits remote resetting and reconfiguration through theserial communication ports, when the setting restrictions permit remotechanges of settings. The setting restrictions can be set only on the localHMI.

1MRK 580 296-XEN


Restricted settings via human-machine interface

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 296-XENPage 5 – 14

2 Installation and setting instructionsFigure 1: presents the combined connection and logic diagram for thefunction.

Configuration of the HMI--BLOCKSET functional input signal under thesubmenu is possible only to one of the built-in binary inputs:

ConfigurationBuiltInHMI

Carefully select a binary input not used by or reserved for any other func-tions or logic circuits, before activating the function.

Figure 1: Connection and logic diagram for the BLOCKSET function.

Set the setting restriction under the submenu:

ConfigurationBuiltInHMI

SettingRestrict

to SettingRestrict = Block:

The selected binary input must be connected to the control DC voltage viaa normally closed contact of a control switch, which can be locked by akey. Only when the normally closed contact is open, the setting and con-figuration of the REx 5xx terminal via the HMI is possible.

&

HMI--BLOCKSET

SettingRestrict=Block RESTRICT

SETTINGS

+

REx 5xx

SWITCH WITHKEY

SETTING RESTRICTION


1MRK 580 296-XENPage 5 – 15

Version 2.2-00

3 Testing1.1 Configure the HMI--BLOCKSET functional input to the binary

input, which is determined by the engineering or the input that is notused by any other function.

1.2 Set the setting restriction to SettingRestrict = Block.

1.3 Connect the rated control DC voltage to the selected binary input.

1.4 Try to change the setting of any parameter for one of the functions.Reading of the values must be possible. The terminal must notrespond to any attempt to change the setting value or configuration.

1.5 Disconnect the control DC voltage from the selected binary input.

1.6 Repeat the attempt under item 1.4. The terminal must accept thechanged setting value or configuration.

1.7 Depending on the requested design for a complete REx 5xx terminal,leave the function active or reconfigure the function into the defaultconfiguration and set the setting restriction function out of operationto SettingRestrict = Open.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 296-XENPage 5 – 16

4 Appendix

4.1 Function block

4.2 Signal list

4.3 Setting table

SETTING RESTRICTION

HMI--BLOCKSET

Table 1:


HMI- BLOCKSET Inter-nal

Input signal to restrict the setting and configuration options by the HMI unit.Warning: Read the instructions before use. Default configuration to NONE-NOSIGNAL.

Table 2:


SettingRe-strict

Open, Block Open: Permits changes of settings and configuration by means of the HMI unit regardless of the status of input HMI--BLOCKSET.Block: Inhibits changes of settings and configuration via the HMI unit when the HMI--BLOCKSET input signal is equal to logic one.

17I/O system configuration

1 ApplicationThis document describes the I/O system configuration that is used to add,remove or move I/O modules in the REx 5xx terminal products. To con-figure means to connect the function blocks that represent each I/O mod-ule (BIM, BOM, IOM, DCM, MIM and PSM) to a function block for theI/O positions (IOP1).

Available I/O modules are:

• BIM, Binary Input Module with 16 binary input channels.

• BOM, Binary Output Module with 24 binary output channels.

• IOM, Input/Output Module with 8 binary input and 12 binary output channels.

• MIM, mA Input Module with six analogue input channels.

• PSM, Input Output Power Supply Module with four inputs and four outputs.

• DCM, Differential Communication Module. The only software con-figuration for this module is the I/O Position input. Refer to the “Remote end data communication module” hardware design for fur-ther description.

A REx 5xx terminal houses different numbers of modules depending ofthe casing size and which kind of modules chosen.

• The 1/1 of 19-inch size casing houses a maximum of 13 modules. But when Input/Output- or Output modules are included, the maxi-mum of modules are four. The maximum number of mA Input mod-ules are limited to six.

• The 3/4 size casing houses a maximum of eight modules. Also for this casing, the limitation is four modules when Input/Output- or Output modules are included. The maximum number of mA Input modules are three.

• The 1/2 size casing houses a maximum of three binary modules or one analogue mA Input module.

It is possible to fit modules of different types in any combination in a ter-minal, but the total maximum numbers of modules must be considered.

1MRK 580 297-XEN


I/O system configuration

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 297-XENPage 5 – 18

2 Design

2.1 General Each I/O-module can be placed in any CAN-I/O slot in the casing. Any-way, there is one exception. The DCM-module has a fixed slot positionwhich depends of the size of the casing.

To add, remove or move modules in the terminal, the reconfiguration ofthe terminal must be done from the graphical configuration tool CAP 531.

Users refer to the CAN-I/O slots by the physical slot numbers of theCAN-I/O slots, which also appear in the terminal drawings.

If the user-entered configuration does not match the actual configurationin the terminal, an error output is activated on the function block, whichcan be treated as an event or alarm.

The BIM, BOM, IOM, DCM and PSM share the same communicationaddresses for parameters and configuration. So they must share I/O mod-ule 1-13 (IOxx), which are the same function block. A user-configurablefunction selector per I/O module function block determines which type ofmodule it is.

All names for inputs and outputs are inputs on the function blocks andmust be set from the graphical tool CAP 531.

2.2 Binary input module The binary input module (BIM) has 16 inputs. These inputs appear as out-puts on the IOxx function block. The BIM supervises oscillating input sig-nals.

Figure 1: Function block for the binary input module (BIM).

ERROR

BI2BI3BI4BI5BI6

IOxx-

BI1

POSITION

BI7BI8BI9

BI10BI11BI12BI13

BI15BI16

BI14

BINAME01BINAME02BINAME03BINAME04BINAME05BINAME06BINAME07BINAME08BINAME09BINAME10BINAME11BINAME12BINAME13BINAME14BINAME15BINAME16

I/O-module

BLKOUT

I/O system configuration 1MRK 580 297-XENPage 5 – 19

Version 2.2-00

2.3 Binary output module The binary output module (BOM) has 24 outputs. The outputs are used inpairs when used as command outputs. Refer to the “Apparatus Control”document, which describes the application of using these outputs. Theseoutputs appear as inputs on the IOxx function block.

Figure 2: Function block for the binary output module (BOM).

ERROR

IOxx-

POSITION

BO1BO2BO3

BO5BO4

BO6BO7BO8BO9

BO11BO10

BO12BO13BO14BO15

BO17BO16

BO18BO19BO20BO21

BO23BO22

BO24

BONAME01BONAME02BONAME03

BONAME05BONAME04

BONAME06BONAME07BONAME08BONAME09

BONAME11BONAME10


BONAME16BONAME15


BONAME21BONAME20


I/O-module

BLKOUT


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 297-XENPage 5 – 20

2.4 Input/output module The input/output module (IOM) has 8 inputs and 12 outputs. The func-tionality of the oscillating input blocking, available on BIM and on thesupervised outputs on BOM, are not available on this module.

Figure 3: Function block for the input/output module (IOM).

2.5 mA input module The mA input module (MIM) has six inputs for mA signals. The POSI-TION input is located on the first MIM channel for each MIM module. Ifthe configuration is incorrect:

• the ERROR output is set on the first MIM channel (MI11, MI21-MI61) of that MIM.

• the InputErr is set on the outputs on all MIM channels of that MIM.

ERROR

BI2BI3BI4BI5BI6

IOxx-

BI1

POSITION

BI7BI8

BO1BO2BO3

BO5BO4

BO6BO7BO8BO9

BO11BO10

BO12

BINAME01BINAME02

BINAME04BINAME03

BINAME05BINAME06BINAME07BINAME08

BONAME02BONAME01


BONAME07BONAME06

BONAME08BONAME09BONAME10BONAME11BONAME12

I/O-module

BLKOUT


Version 2.2-00

For more information about the mA input module including the signal listand setting table, refer to the document “Direct Current Measuring Unit”.

Figure 4: Function blocks for the mA input module (MIM).

2.6 Power supply module The power supply module (PSM) has 4 inputs and 4 outputs, to be usedfor I/O operations just as BIM and BOM inputs and outputs.

Note: These I/O signals are only present in half and 3/4 width units.

Figure 5: Function block for the power supply module (PSM).

ERROR

RMINALHIALARM

HIWARNLOWWARN

LOWALARM

MIx1 (x = 1..6)

BLOCK

RMAXAL

POSITION

INPUTERR

MIM

RMINALHIALARM

HIWARNLOWWARN

LOWALARM

MIxy (y = 2 - 6)

BLOCK

RMAXAL

INPUTERR

MIM

channel no. 1 ofMIM no. x

channel no. 2-6 ofMIM no. x

ERROR

234

PSMx-

BLOCK

1

POSITION

INPUTERR

PSM

234

1


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 297-XENPage 5 – 22

2.7 Differential communication module

As already mentioned, the DCM-module only has the I/O-position inputto configure (to the I/O Position block). Anyhow, the module has a fixedslot position which depends of the size of the casing (slot S38 in the fullwidth case, S19 in the half of full width case and S29 in the 3/4 of fullwidth case).

Figure 6: Function block for the differential comm. module (DCM).

2.8 I/O position The IOP1 (I/O position) function block is the same for the different cas-ings, independent of the number of slots available. Anyway, it looks dif-ferent depending of actual configuration. All necessary configuration isdone in the CAP 531 configuration tool.

The Sxx outputs (xx = 11, 12..28, 30, 32, 34, 36) are connected to thePOSITION inputs of the I/O Modules and MIMs.

Figure 7: Function block of the I/O position block (IOP1-).

DCM--

POSITIONDCM

IOP1-

S11

S14S15S16S17S18

S13S12

S19S20S21

S23S22

I/OPosition

S24S25S26S27S28S30S32S34S36


Version 2.2-00

3 ConfigurationThe configuration can only be performed from CAP 531, the graphicalconfiguration tool.

To configure from the graphical tool:

• First, set the function selector for the logical I/O module to the type of I/O module that is used, BIM, BOM, IOM, DCM, MIM or PSM.

• Secondly, connect the POSITION input of the logical I/O module to a slot output of the IOP function block.

Figure 8: Example of an I/O-configuration in the graphical tool CAP 531 for a REx 5xx with two BIMs.

IOP1-

S11

S14S15S16S17S18

S13S12

S19S20S21

S23S22

I/OPosition

S24S25S26S27S28S30S32S34S36

IO01-

IO02-

I/O-module

I/O-module

POSITION ERRORBI1

BI6

.

.

.

POSITION ERRORBI1

BI6

.

.

.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 297-XENPage 5 – 24

4 SettingThe user shall set the input names for binary input and binary output mod-ules (BIM, BOM, IOM and PSM) from the CAP 531 configuration tool.

The binary input module (BIM) has a suppression function which blocksoscillating inputs on the module. It is possible to set the oscillation block-ing/release frequencies from both the SMS or from the local HMI.

The appendix contains the parameters and their setting ranges for BIM,BOM, IOM and PSM.

Refer to the document “Direct Current Measuring Unit” to set the mAinput module.


Version 2.2-00

5 TestingNot configured I/O modules are not supervised. When an I/O module isconfigured as a logical I/O module (BIM, BOM, IOM, DCM, MIM orPSM), the logical I/O modules are supervised. See “Self-supervision”.

Each logical I/O module has an error flag that is set if anything is wrongwith any signal or the whole module. The error flag is also set when thereis no physical I/O module of the correct type present in the connected slot.

The user can find status for inputs and outputs as well as self-supervisionstatus from the local HMI in menus:


..., Slotxx-BIMyy=, ...OK/FAILED

ServiceReportI/O

Slotxx-BIMyyFuncOutputs


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 297-XENPage 5 – 26

6 Appendix

6.1 Signal list

6.2 Setting table


IOxx- (xx=01-13)

BLKOUT IN Block outputs

IOxx- POSITION IN Position of I/O module

IOxx- BIy IN Binary input y (y=1-24). Valid for IOM and BOM modules

IOxx- BOy OUT Binary output y (y=1-24). Valid for IOM and BOM modules

IOxx- ERROR OUT I/O module status. Activated if the I/O module has failed

IOxx- BINAMEnn (nn=01-24)

See settings table

IOxx- BONAMEnn (nn=01-24)

See settings table


BINAMEnn (nn=01-24)

User def. string

String IOxx-BIn (n=1-24)

User defined name for binary input of function block IOxx (xx=01-13). String length up to 13 characters,all characters available on the HMI can be used

BONAMEnn (nn=01-24)

User def. string

String IOxx-BOn (n=1-24)

User defined name for binary output of function block IOxx (xx=01-13). String length up to 13 characters,all characters available on the HMI can be used

OscBlock 1-40 Hz 40 Oscillation blocking frequency for I/O module. Common for all channels of a BIM module

OscRel 1-40 Hz 30 Oscillation release frequency for I/O module. Common for all channels of a BIM module

27Configurable logic

1 ApplicationDifferent protection, control, and monitoring functions within the REx5xx terminals are quite independent as far as their configuration in the ter-minal is concerned. The user cannot enter and change the basic algorithmsfor different functions, because they are located in the digital signal pro-cessors and extensively type tested. The user can configure different func-tions in the terminals to suit special requirements for differentapplications.

For this purpose, additional logic circuits are needed to configure the ter-minals to meet user needs and also to build in some special logic circuits,which use different logic gates and timers.

1MRK 580 298-XEN


Configurable logic

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 298-XENPage 5 – 28

2 DesignThe number of blocks of configurable logic circuits available in basicREx 5xx:

6 ms cyclicity:

• 30 AND gates

• 60 OR gates

• 20 INV (INVerters)

• 10 timers (for On or Off delay)

• 10 pulses

200 ms cyclicity:

• 10 timers (for On or Off delay) with extended maximum time delay

• 10 pulses with extended maximum pulse length

• 5 SR (Set-Reset)

• 39 XOR (eXclusive OR)

2.1 Additional configurable logic

The number of blocks of configurable logic circuits available as addi-tional logic:

6 ms cyclicity:

• 40 pulses

200 ms cyclicity:

• 239 AND gates

• 159 OR gates

• 59 INV (INVerters)

• 6 MOVE (3 MOF and 3 MOL)

2.2 Inverter (INV) The INV function block is used for inverting boolean variables. The func-tion block (Figure 1:) has one input, designated IVnn-INPUT, where nnpresents the serial number of the block. Each INV circuit has one output,IVnn-OUT.

Figure 1: Function block diagram of the inverter (INV) function

INPUT1 OUT

IVnn

Configurable logic 1MRK 580 298-XENPage 5 – 29

Version 2.2-00

The output signal from the INV function block is set to 1 if the input sig-nal is 0 and is set to 0 when the input signal is 1. See truth table below.

2.3 OR OR function blocks are used to form general combinatory expressionswith boolean variables. The function block (Figure 2:) has six inputs, des-ignated Onnn-INPUTm, where nnn presents the serial number of theblock, and m presents the serial number of the inputs in the block. EachOR circuit has two outputs, Onnn-OUT and Onnn-NOUT (inverted).

Figure 2: Function block diagram of the OR function

The output signal (OUT) is set to 1 if any of the inputs (INPUT1-6) is 1.See truth table below.

2.4 AND AND function blocks are used to form general combinatory expressionswith boolean variables. The function block (Figure 3:) has four inputs (oneof them inverted), designated Annn-INPUTm (Annn-INPUT4N is

Table 1: Truth table for theINV function block

INPUT OUT

1 0

0 1

Table 2: Truth table for the OR function block

INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 OUT NOUT

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0

0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 0

1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0

≥1INPUT1

INPUT2

INPUT3

INPUT4

INPUT5

INPUT6

Onnn

1

OUT

NOUT

Configurable logic

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 298-XENPage 5 – 30

inverted), where nnn presents the serial number of the block, and m pre-sents the serial number of the inputs in the block. Each AND circuit hastwo outputs, Annn-OUT and Annn-NOUT (inverted).

Figure 3: Function block diagram of the AND function

The output signal (OUT) is set to 1 if the inputs INPUT1-3 are 1 andINPUT4N is 0. See truth table below.

2.5 Timer The function block TM timer has outputs for delayed input signal at drop-out and at pick-up. The timer (Figure 4:) has a settable time delay TMnn-Tbetween 0.00 and 60.00 s in steps of 0.01 s. The input signal for each timedelay block has the designation TMnn-INPUT, where nn presents theserial number of the logic block. The output signals of each time delay

Table 3: Truth table for the AND function block

INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4N OUT NOUT

0 0 0 1 0 1

0 0 1 1 0 1

0 1 0 1 0 1

0 1 1 1 0 1

1 0 0 1 0 1

1 0 1 1 0 1

1 1 0 1 0 1

1 1 1 1 0 1

0 0 0 0 0 1

0 0 1 0 0 1

0 1 0 0 0 1

0 1 1 0 0 1

1 0 0 0 0 1

1 0 1 0 0 1

1 1 0 0 0 1

1 1 1 0 1 0

INPUT1

INPUT2

INPUT3

INPUT4N

Annn

1

OUT

NOUT

&


Version 2.2-00

block are TMnn-ON and TMnn-OFF. The first one belongs to the timerdelayed on pick-up and the second one to the timer delayed on drop-out.Both timers within one block always have the same setting.

Figure 4: Function block diagram of the Timer function

The function block TL timer (Figure 5:) with extended maximum time delayat pick-up and at drop-out, is identical with the TM timer. The difference isthe longer time delay TLnn-T, settable between 0.0 and 90000.0 s in stepsof 0.1 s.

Figure 5: Function block diagram of the TimerLong function

The input variable to INPUT is obtained delayed a settable time T at out-put OFF when the input variable changes from 1 to 0 in accordance withthe time pulse diagram, Figure 6:. The output OFF signal is set to 1 imme-diately when the input variable changes from 0 to 1.

Figure 6: Example of time diagram for a timer delayed on drop-out with preset time T = 3 s

t

t

Time delay 0.00-60.00 s

INPUT

T

OFF

ON

TMnn

t

t


INPUT

T

OFF

ON

TLnn

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

T = 3 s

1

0

1

0

INPUT

OFF

Configurable logic

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 298-XENPage 5 – 32

The input variable to INPUT is obtained delayed a settable time T at out-put ON when the input variable changes from 0 to 1 in accordance withthe time pulse diagram, Figure 7:. The output ON signal returns immedi-ately when the input variable changes from 1 to 0.

Figure 7: Example of time diagram for a timer delayed on pick-up with preset time T = 3 s

If more timers than available in the terminal are needed, it is possible touse pulse timers with AND or OR logics. Figure 8: shows an applicationexample of how to realise a timer delayed on pick-up. Figure 9: shows therealisation of a timer delayed on drop-out. Note that the resolution of thesetting time must be 0.2 s, if the connected logic has a cycle time of 200ms.

Figure 8: Realisation example of a timer delayed on pick-up

Figure 9: Realisation example of a timer delayed on drop-out

2.6 Pulse The pulse function can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or limit-ing of operation of outputs. The pulse timer TP (Figure 10:) has a settablelength of a pulse between 0.00 s and 60.00 s in steps of 0.01 s. The inputsignal for each pulse timer has the designation TPnn-INPUT, where nn

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

T = 3 s

1

0

1

0

INPUT

ON

INPUT1INPUT2INPUT3INPUT4N

AND

PulseINPUTT

OUT

FIXED-ON

OUTNOUT

0.00-60.00 s

INPUT1INPUT2INPUT3INPUT4

OR

PulseINPUT

T

OUT

FIXED-OFF

OUTNOUT

INPUT5INPUT6

INVINPUT OUT

0.00-60.00 s


Version 2.2-00

presents the serial number of the logic block. Each pulse timer has oneoutput, designated by TPnn-OUT. The pulse timer is not retriggable, thatis, it can be restarted first after that the time T has elapsed.

Figure 10: Function block diagram of the Pulse function

The function block TQ pulse timer (Figure 11:) with extended maximumpulse length, is identical with the TP pulse timer. The difference is the longerpulse length TQnn-T, settable between 0.0 and 90000.0 s in steps of 0.1 s.

Figure 11: Function block diagram of the PulseLong function, TQ

A memory is set when the input INPUT is set to 1. The output OUT thengoes to 1. When the time set T has elapsed, the memory is cleared and theoutput OUT goes to 0. If a new pulse is obtained at the input INPUTbefore the time set T has elapsed, it does not affect the timer. Only whenthe time set has elapsed and the output OUT is set to 0, the pulse functioncan be restarted by the input INPUT going from 0 to 1. See time pulse dia-gram, Figure 12:.

Figure 12: Example of time diagram for the pulse function with preset pulse length T = 3 s

2.7 Exclusive OR (XOR) The function block exclusive OR (XOR) is used to generate combinatoryexpressions with boolean variables. XOR (Figure 13:) has two inputs,designated XOnn-INPUTm, where nn presents the serial number of theblock, and m presents the serial number of the inputs in the block. Each


INPUT

T

OUT

TPnn


INPUT

T

OUT

TQnn

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

T = 3 s

1

0

1

0

INPUT

OUT

Configurable logic

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 298-XENPage 5 – 34

XOR circuit has two outputs, XOnn-OUT and XOnn-NOUT (inverted).The output signal (OUT) is 1 if the input signals are different and 0 if theyare equal.

Figure 13: Function block diagram of the XOR function

The output signal (OUT) is set to 1 if the input signals are different and to0 if they are equal. See truth table below.

2.8 Set-Reset (SR) The function block Set-Reset (SR) (Figure 14:) has two inputs, designatedSRnn-SET and SRnn-RESET, where nn presents the serial number of theblock. Each SR circuit has two outputs, SRnn-OUT and SRnn-NOUT(inverted). The output (OUT) is set to 1 if the input (SET) is set to 1 and ifthe input (RESET) is 0. If the reset input is set to 1, the output is uncondi-tionally reset to 0.

Figure 14: Function block diagram of the Set-Reset function

2.9 MOVE The MOVE function blocks, also be called copy-blocks, are used for syn-chronisation of boolean signals sent between logics with slow executiontime and logics with fast execution time.

Table 4: Truth table for the XOR function block

INPUT1 INPUT2 OUT NOUT

0 0 0 1

0 1 1 0

1 0 1 0

1 1 0 1

=1INPUT1

INPUT2

XOnn

1

OUT

NOUT

SET

RESET1

OUT

NOUT

&≥1

SRnn


Version 2.2-00

There are two types of MOVE function blocks - MOF located First in theslow logic and MOL located Last in the slow logic. The MOF functionblocks are used for signals coming into the slow logic and the MOL func-tion blocks are used for signals going out from the slow logic.

The REx 5xx terminal contains 3 MOF function blocks of 16 signals each,and 3 MOL function blocks of 16 signals each. This means that a maxi-mum of 48 signals into and 48 signals out from the slow logic can be syn-chronised. The MOF and MOL function blocks are only a temporarystorage for the signals and do not change any value between input andoutput.

Each block of 16 signals is protected from being interrupted by other logicapplication tasks. This guarantees the consistency of the signals to eachother within each MOVE function block.

Synchronisation of signals with MOF should be used when a signal whichis produced outside the slow logic is used in several places in the logicand there might be a malfunction if the signal changes its value betweenthese places.

Synchronisation with MOL should be used if a signal produced in theslow logic is used in several places outside this logic, or if several signalsproduced in the slow logic are used together outside this logic, and there isa similar need for synchronisation.

Figure 15: shows an example of logic, which can result in malfunctions onthe output signal from the AND gate to the right in the figure.

Figure 15: Example of logic, which can result in malfunctions

&

&

Function 1 Function 2

Function 3

Fast logic Slow logic Fast logic

Configurable logic

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 298-XENPage 5 – 36

Figure 16: shows the same logic as in Figure 15:, but with the signals syn-chronised by the MOVE function blocks MOFn and MOLn. With thissolution the consistency of the signals can be guaranteed.

Figure 16: Example of logic with synchronised signals

MOFn and MOLn, n=1-3, have 16 inputs and 16 outputs. Each INPUTmis copied to the corresponding OUTPUTm, where m presents the serialnumber of the input and the output in the block. The MOFn are the firstblocks and the MOLn are the last blocks in the execution order in the slowlogic.

The appendix, attached to this document of the configurable logic, con-tains:

• Simplified terminal diagrams• Description of the connection and production signals• Description of the setting parameters

& &

Function 1 Function 2

Function 3

Fast logic Slow logic Fast logicMOFn

MOLn

MOVE

MOVE


Version 2.2-00

3 SettingThe time delays and pulse lengths are set from the CAP 531 configurationtool.

Both timers in the same logic block (the one delayed on pick-up and theone delayed on drop-out) always have a common setting value. Settingvalues of the pulse length are independent on one another for all pulse cir-cuits.

Configurable logic

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 298-XENPage 5 – 38

4 ReportsAll functional outputs in the logic blocks can be viewed on the local HMIat:

ServiceReportFunctions

AND (OR/etc.)


Version 2.2-00

5 ConfigurationThe configuration of the logics is performed from the CAP 531 configura-tion tool.

Execution of functions as defined by the configurable logic blocks runs ina fixed sequence in two different cycle times, typical 6 ms and 200 ms.

For each cycle time, the function block is given an execution serial num-ber. This is shown when using the CAP 531 configuration tool with thedesignation of the function block and the cycle time, for example, TMnn-(1044, 6). TMnn is the designation of the function block, 1044 is the exe-cution serial number and 6 is the cycle time.

Execution of different function blocks within the same cycle time shouldfollow the same order as their execution serial numbers to get an optimalsolution. Always remember this when connecting in series two or morelogical function blocks. When connecting function blocks with differentcycle times, see the use of MOVE function blocks in the section “MOVE”on page 34.

Note: Be always careful when connecting function blocks with a fastcycle time to function blocks with a slow cycle time.

So design the logic circuits carefully and check always the executionsequence for different functions. In the opposite cases, additional timedelays must be introduced into the logic schemes to prevent errors, forexample, race between functions.

Configurable logic

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 298-XENPage 5 – 40

6 TestingThe user can separately test configuration logic circuits for each functiongroup or for each function block. First, for each block, configure all:

• Input signals within the function group to the corresponding binary inputs.

• Output signals within the function group to the corresponding binary outputs.

Then check the operation of each separate function group by applying therated DC voltage to the corresponding binary inputs and observing thelogic status of the corresponding binary outputs.

Function blocks included in the operation of different built-in functionsshould be tested at the same time as their corresponding functions.


Version 2.2-00

7 Appendix

7.1 Function blocks

Figure 17: Function block of the Inverter function

Figure 18: Function block of the OR function

Figure 19: Function block of the AND function

Figure 20: Function block of the Timer function

INPUT OUT

IVnn

INV

INPUT1INPUT2INPUT3INPUT4

OUTNOUT

INPUT5INPUT6

Onnn

OR

INPUT1INPUT2INPUT3INPUT4N

OUTNOUT

Annn

AND

INPUTT

OFFON

TMnn

Timer

Configurable logic

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 298-XENPage 5 – 42

Figure 21: Function block of the Timer function with extended maximum time delay

Figure 22: Function block of the Pulse function

Figure 23: Function block of the Pulse function with extended maximum pulse length

Figure 24: Function block of the Exclusive OR function

Figure 25: Function block of the Set-Reset function

INPUTT

OFFON

TLnnTimerLong

INPUTT

OUT

TPnn

Pulse

INPUTT

OUT

TQnn

PulseLong

INPUT1INPUT2

OUTNOUT

XOnn

XOR

SETRESET

OUTNOUT

SRnn

SR


Version 2.2-00

Figure 26: Function block of the MOVE First (MOF) function

Figure 27: Function block of the MOVE Last (MOL) function

OUTPUT2OUTPUT3OUTPUT4OUTPUT5OUTPUT6

OUTPUT1

OUTPUT7OUTPUT8OUTPUT9

OUTPUT10OUTPUT11OUTPUT12OUTPUT13

OUTPUT15OUTPUT16

OUTPUT14

INPUT1INPUT2INPUT3INPUT4INPUT5INPUT6INPUT7INPUT8INPUT9INPUT10INPUT11INPUT12INPUT13INPUT14INPUT15INPUT16

MOFnMOVE

OUTPUT2OUTPUT3OUTPUT4OUTPUT5OUTPUT6

OUTPUT1

OUTPUT7OUTPUT8OUTPUT9

OUTPUT10OUTPUT11OUTPUT12OUTPUT13

OUTPUT15OUTPUT16

OUTPUT14


MOLnMOVE

Configurable logic

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 298-XENPage 5 – 44

7.2 Signal lists


IVxx- INPUT IN Logic INV-Input to INV gate number xx

IVxx- OUT OUT Logic INV-Output from INV gate number xx


Oxxx- INPUT1 IN Logic OR-Input 1 to OR gate number xxx






Oxxx- NOUT OUT Inverted output from OR gate number xxx

Oxxx- OUT OUT Output from OR gate number xxx


Axxx- INPUT1 IN Logic AND-Input 1 to AND gate number xxx



Axxx- INPUT4N IN Logic AND-Input 4 (inverted) to AND gate number xxx

Axxx- NOUT OUT Inverted output from AND gate number xxx

Axxx- OUT OUT Output from AND gate number xxx


TMxx- INPUT IN Logic Timer-Input to timer xx

TMxx- OFF OUT Output from timer number xx, Off delay

TMxx- ON OUT Output from timer number xx, On delay


TLxx- INPUT IN Logic Timer-Input to long timer xx

TLxx- OFF OUT Output from long timer number xx, Off delay

TLxx- ON OUT Output from long timer number xx, On delay


Version 2.2-00

7.3 Setting tables


TPxx- INPUT IN Logic pulse timer, Pulse-Input to pulse timer xx

TPxx- OUT OUT Output from pulse timer number xx


TQxx- INPUT IN Logic pulse timer, Pulse-Input to pulse long timer xx

TQxx- OUT OUT Output from pulse long timer number xx


XOxx- INPUT1 IN Logic XOR-Input 1 to XOR gate number xx

XOxx- INPUT2 IN Logic XOR-Input 2 to XOR gate number xx

XOxx- NOUT OUT Inverted output from XOR gate number xx

XOxx- OUT OUT Output from XOR gate number xx


SRxx- RESET IN RESET-Input to SET/RESET gate number xx

SRxx- SET IN SET-Input to SET/RESET gate number xx

SRxx- NOUT OUT Inverted output from SET/RESET gate number xx

SRxx- OUT OUT Output from SET/RESET gate number xx


MOFx- INPUTn IN Logic MOVE-Input n (n=1-16) to MOFx

MOFx- OUTPUTn OUT Output n (n=1-16) from MOFx


MOLx- INPUTn IN Logic MOVE-Input n (n=1-16) to MOLx

MOL1- OUTPUTn OUT Output n (n=1-16) from MOLn

Configurable logic

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 298-XENPage 5 – 46


T 0.000-60.000 s 0.000 Delay for timer xx


T 0.000-90000.000

s 0.000 Delay for long timer xx


T 0.000-60.000 s 0.010 Pulse length of pulse timer xx


T 0.000-90000.000

s 0.100 Pulse length of pulse long timer xx

47Self-supervision

1 ApplicationThe REx 5xx protection and control terminals have a complex design withmany included functions. The included self-supervision function and theINTernal signals function block provide good supervision of the terminal.The different safety measures and fault signals makes it easier to analyseand locate a fault.

Both hardware and software supervision is included and it is also possibleto indicate eventual faults through a hardware contact and/or through thesoftware communication.

2 DesignThe self-supervision can indicate a failure in two ways. First, by means ofthe potential free alarm contact located on the power supply module. SeeFigure 3:. All different self-supervision functions (outputs) are connectedto this contact so any fault within the hardware modules will activate thecontact. The second way is through the software function block INT--, seeFigure 1: and 4. By this, any fault signal is available through the generalcommunication and at the local HMI. The signals from the function blockcan be used to block other protection functions if required/desired.The failure signals will be activated by the same faults in both the cases.It is also possible to exactly identify a faulty I/O through an error signalfrom each I/O module. An example is IOxx-Error, see Figure 2:.

Figure 1: Function block INTernal signals.

Figure 2: Error signal from an I/O module.

INT--

FAILWARNING

CPUFAILCPUWARN

ADCSETCHGD

IOxx-

ERROR

BI1BI2BI3BI4

POSITION

BINAME01BINAME02BINAME03BINAME04

I/O-module

1MRK 580 299-XEN


Self-supervision

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 299-XENPage 5 – 48

Figure 3: Hardware self-supervision, potential-free alarm contact.

Power supply fault

&INTERNAL

TX overflowMaster resp.Supply faultReBoot I/O

Watchdog I/O nodes

Power supplymodule

Checksum faultSending reports

A/D conv.module

Supply faultParameter check

DSP fault Main CPU

NOFAIL

DSP = Digital Signal Processorxxxx = Inverted signal

Fault

Fault

Fault

Fault

I/O nodes = BIM, BOM, IOMPSM, MIM or DCM

Self-supervision 1MRK 580 299-XENPage 5 – 49

Version 2.2-00

Figure 4: Software self-supervision, function block INTernal signals.

1V

INT--ADC

1V

X

Checksum

INT--CPUFAIL

INT--CPUWARN

INT--WARNINGRTC-WARNING

X

Node reports

Watchdog

Check CRC

RAM check

Synch error

NO_RX_Data

NO_TX_Clock

Check RemError

1V

INT--CPUWARN

DSP Modules, 1-12

Parameter check

Watchdog

Flow control

&

&

&

INT--CPUFAIL

INT--ADC

I/O node FAIL

Start-up self-test

INT--FAIL

Send Rem Error

RTC-WARNING

A/D ConverterModule

Remote

communication

MainCPU

1V

1V

OK

OK

OK

OK OK

OK

OK

OK

OK

Fault

&

terminal

1V

RTC-WARNING = DIFL-COMFAIL orRTC1-COMFAIL +RTC2-COMFAIL

I/O node = BIM, BOM, IOM, PSM, MIM, DCM(described in the hardware design)

TIME-RTCERR

TIME-SYNCERR

Self-supervision

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 299-XENPage 5 – 50

51Blocking of functions during test

1 ApplicationThe protection and control terminals have a complex configuration withmany included functions. To do the testing procedure at commissioningeasier, the terminals include the feature to individually block a single, sev-eral or all functions.

This means that a service engineer exactly can see when a function is acti-vated or trips. It also enables to activate a sequence of functions to checkcorrect functionality and to check parts of the configuration etc.

2 DesignThis blocking function is only active during operation in the test mode,see example in Figure 1:. When exiting the test mode, entering normalmode, this blocking is disabled and everything is set to normal operation.All testing will be done with actually set and configured values within theterminal. No settings etc. will be changed. Thus no mistakes are possible.

The blocked functions will still be blocked next time entering the testmode, if the blockings were not reset.

The blocking of a function concerns all output signals from the actualfunction, so no outputs will be activated.

Each of the terminal related functions is described in detail in the docu-mentation for the actual unit. The description of each function follows thesame structure (where applicable).

Figure 1: Example of blocking the Time delayed Under-Voltage func-tion.

TUV--BLKTRTUV--BLOCKTUV--VTSU

STUL1

STUL2

&

&

&STUL3

Operation = On

>1 & t

tt

15 msTUV--TRIP

TUV--START

TUV--STL1

TUV--STL2

TUV--STL3

t15 ms

t15 ms

t15 ms

t15 ms

TRIP - cont.

TEST-ACTIVETUV--TESTBLK

&

>1

Visf_244.vsd

1MRK 580 300-XEN


Blocking of functions during test

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 300-XENPage 5 – 52

53Time synchronisation

1 ApplicationTime-tagging of internal events and disturbances is an excellent helpwhen evaluating faults. Without time synchronisation, only the eventswithin the terminal can be compared to one and another. With time syn-chronisation, events and disturbances within the entire station, and evenbetween line ends, can be compared during an evaluation.

If external time synchronisation is applied, there are two main alterna-tives. Either the synchronisation message is applied via any of the com-munication ports of the terminal as a telegram message including date andtime, or as a minute pulse, connected to a binary input. The minute pulseis used to fine tune already existing time in the terminals.

1MRK 580 302-XEN


Time synchronisation

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 302-XENPage 5 – 54

2 Theory of operationThe REx 5xx terminal has its own internal clock with date, hour, minute,second and millisecond. It has a resolution of 1 ms.

The clock has a built-in calendar for 30 years that handles leap years. Anychange between summer and winter time must be handled manually orthrough external time synchronisation. The clock is powered by a capaci-tor, to bridge interruptions in power supply without malfunction.

The internal clock is used for time-tagging disturbances, events in SMSand SCS, and internal events.

Time synchronisation 1MRK 580 302-XENPage 5 – 55

Version 2.2-00

3 SettingThe internal time can be set on the local human-machine interface (HMI)at:

SettingsTime

The time is set with year, date and time. See the document “Local human-machine interface”, for more information.

The source of the time synchronisation is set on the local HMI at:

ConfigurationTime

When the setting is performed on the local HMI, the parameter is calledTimeSyncSource. The time synchronisation source can also be set fromthe CAP 531 tool. The setting parameter is then called SYNCSCR. Thesetting alternatives are:

• None (no synchronisation)

• LON, SPA or IEC

• Minute pulse, positive or negative flank

LON is set when the time synchronisation is performed via SCS, SPA isset when the time synchronisation is performed via SMS, and IEC whenthe communication protocol IEC 870-5-103 is used including time syn-chronisation. Minute positive flank or Minute negative flank is set when abinary input is used for minute pulse synchronisation.

The function input to be used for minute-pulse synchronisation is calledTIME-MINSYNC.

The internal time can be set manually down to the minute level, either viathe local HMI or via any of the communication ports. The time synchroni-sation fine tunes the clock (seconds and milliseconds). If no clock syn-chronisation is active, the time can be set down to milliseconds.

Time synchronisation

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 302-XENPage 5 – 56

4 Appendix

4.1 Function block

4.2 Signal list

4.3 Setting table

MINSYNCSYNCSRC

Time

RTCERRSYNCERR

TIME


TIME- MINSYNC IN Input for ext synch of real time clock by minute pulses

TIME- RTCERR OUT Real-time clock error

TIME- SYNCERR OUT Time synchronisation error


SYNCSRC No, LO, SP, IEC, Po, Ne

No Source: 0=none, 1=LON, 2=SPA, 3=IEC, 4=BI pos flank, 5=BI neg flank

57

1 ApplicationInternal events are generated by the built-in supervisory functions. Thesupervisory functions supervise the status of the various modules in theterminal and, in case of failure, a corresponding event is generated. Simi-larly, when the failure is corrected, a corresponding event is generated.

Apart from the built-in supervision of the various modules, events are alsogenerated when the status changes for the:

• built-in real time clock (in operation/out of order)• external time synchronization (in operation/out of order).

Events are also generated:

• whenever any setting in the terminal is changed• when the content of the Disturbance report is erased.

The internal events are time tagged with a resolution of 1 ms and stored ina list. The list can store up to 40 events. The list is based on the FIFO prin-ciple, that is, when it is full, the oldest event is overwritten. The list cannotbe cleared and its content cannot be erased.

The list of internal events provides valuable information, which can beused during commissioning and fault tracing.

The information can only be retrieved with the aid of the SM/REx 5xxsoftware package. The PC can be connected either to the port at the frontor at the rear of the terminal.

The event list is displayed by selecting the menu branch:

TermRepSelfSup

Please refer to the section “Installation and commissioning” in the user’smanual for the SM/REx 5xx software package, which contains a detailedlist of the signals that can be generated.

Internal events 1MRK 580 303-XEN


Internal events

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 303-XENPage 5 – 58

1

Contents Page

Introduction to functions .........................................................................6–29Introduction................................................................................................... 6–29

Design .......................................................................................................... 6–30

Line impedance.........................................................................................6–33

Distance protection ..................................................................................6–33Application.................................................................................................... 6–33

General .............................................................................................. 6–33Distance protection function in different line terminals............. 6–33

Basic characteristics .......................................................................... 6–34

Measuring principle ...................................................................................... 6–38Measured impedance......................................................................... 6–40

Phase-to-earth measurement .................................................. 6–40Phase-to-phase measurement................................................. 6–41Directional lines........................................................................ 6–42

Design .......................................................................................................... 6–43Full-scheme measurement................................................................. 6–43Distance protection zone one............................................................. 6–44Remaining distance protection zones ................................................ 6–47

Setting Instructions....................................................................................... 6–47Reach setting recommendations........................................................ 6–47Conversion to secondary impedances ............................................... 6–48Basic zone setting recommendations ................................................ 6–48Earth return compensation................................................................. 6–51Fault resistance.................................................................................. 6–52Zero-sequence mutual coupling on multicircuit lines ......................... 6–52

The parallel circuit disconnected and earthed at both ends..... 6–53The parallel circuit out of service and not earthed ................... 6–54Parallel circuit in service .......................................................... 6–55Setting of the overreaching zones ........................................... 6–56Use of different setting groups on double circuit lines ............. 6–56The parallel circuit out of operation with both ends earthed .... 6–56Double-circuit parallel line in normal operation ........................ 6–57

Overreaching distance protection zones.......................... 6–57Setting of the reach in resistive direction ........................................... 6–57

Load impedance limitation ....................................................... 6–58Setting of minimum operating current ................................................ 6–59Setting of timers for the distance protection zones ............................ 6–59

Basic configuration ....................................................................................... 6–60ZMn--BLOCK functional input ............................................................ 6–60ZMn--VTSZ functional input ............................................................... 6–60ZMn--BLKTR functional input............................................................. 6–60ZMn--STCND functional input ............................................................ 6–60ZMn--START functional output .......................................................... 6–61ZMn--TRIP functional output .............................................................. 6–61ZMn--STND functional output ............................................................ 6–61

Testing.......................................................................................................... 6–61

Functions

FunctionsPage 6 – 2

Testing with type RTS 21 (FREJA) testing equipment....................... 6–63Measurement of the operating time of distance protection zones...... 6–64Directional test of the distance measuring function............................ 6–65

Appendix ...................................................................................................... 6–67Function blocks .................................................................................. 6–67Signal lists .......................................................................................... 6–68

Distance protection zone 1 ...................................................... 6–68Distance protection zone 2 ...................................................... 6–68Distance protection zone 3 ...................................................... 6–69Distance protection zone 4 ...................................................... 6–69Distance protection zone 5 ...................................................... 6–70

Setting table ....................................................................................... 6–70General setting parameters ..................................................... 6–70Distance protection zone 1 ...................................................... 6–70Distance protection zone 2 ...................................................... 6–71Distance protection zone 3 ...................................................... 6–72Distance protection zone 4 ...................................................... 6–73Distance protection zone 5 ...................................................... 6–74

Phase selection for distance protection.................................................6–77Application.................................................................................................... 6–77

Theory of operation ...................................................................................... 6–77Measurement at phase-to-earth faults ............................................... 6–77Measurement at phase-to-phase and three-phase faults .................. 6–78

Design .......................................................................................................... 6–79

Setting instructions ....................................................................................... 6–83Phase selection at single-phase-to-earth faults ................................. 6–83Phase selection at ph-ph faults .......................................................... 6–85Phase selection at three-phase faults ................................................ 6–86

Testing.......................................................................................................... 6–88Measuring the operating characteristics, phase-to-earth faults ......... 6–89Measuring the operate characteristic, phase-to-phase faults ............ 6–89Measuring the operating characteristics, three-phase faults.............. 6–89

Appendix ...................................................................................................... 6–90Function block .................................................................................... 6–90Signal list............................................................................................ 6–90Setting table ....................................................................................... 6–91

Power-swing detection.............................................................................6–93Application.................................................................................................... 6–93

General .............................................................................................. 6–93Basic characteristics .......................................................................... 6–93

Theory of operation ...................................................................................... 6–94

Design .......................................................................................................... 6–95Basic detection logic .......................................................................... 6–95Operating and inhibit conditions......................................................... 6–97

Setting instructions ....................................................................................... 6–98Setting the reach of the inner characteristic....................................... 6–98Setting the reach of the outer characteristic....................................... 6–98

Limitation of the resistive reach ............................................... 6–98Determination of the impedance difference and speed ........... 6–99


Reactive reach ................................................................................... 6–99tH hold timer..................................................................................... 6–100tR1 inhibit timer ................................................................................ 6–100tR2 inhibit timer ................................................................................ 6–100tEF timer for reclosing on persistent single-phase faults ................. 6–100

Configuration .............................................................................................. 6–100Blocking of the distance protection zones........................................ 6–100Selection of the operating mode ...................................................... 6–100Blocking of the PSD function at earth faults..................................... 6–101Compatibility with older distance relays ........................................... 6–101

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–101Connection ....................................................................................... 6–101Measurement of the operate characteristic...................................... 6–101Functionality ..................................................................................... 6–103

Basic functionality .................................................................. 6–103One-of-three phase operation................................................ 6–103Two-of-three-phase operation................................................ 6–104Testing the tEF timer and functionality................................... 6–104Testing the tR1 timer.............................................................. 6–104Testing the tR2 timer.............................................................. 6–105Testing the BLOCK input ....................................................... 6–105

Appendix .................................................................................................... 6–106Function block.................................................................................. 6–106Function block diagram.................................................................... 6–107Signal list.......................................................................................... 6–108Setting table ..................................................................................... 6–108

Power-swing logic ..................................................................................6–109Application.................................................................................................. 6–109

Theory of operation .................................................................................... 6–110

Design ........................................................................................................ 6–111

Setting ........................................................................................................ 6–113Time delay for the underreaching zone............................................ 6–113Power-swing zones.......................................................................... 6–113

Ph-E measurement ................................................................ 6–113Ph-Ph measurement .............................................................. 6–114

Time-delay for the overreaching zone.............................................. 6–114Timers within the power-swing logic ................................................ 6–114

Carrier-send timer tCS........................................................... 6–114Trip timer tTrip........................................................................ 6–114Blocking timer tBlkTr .............................................................. 6–114Differentiating timer tDZ......................................................... 6–115Release timer tZL................................................................... 6–115

Configuration .............................................................................................. 6–115Use of power-swing zones ............................................................... 6–115

Activation of the PSL function ................................................ 6–116Power-swing zones in PUTT scheme.................................... 6–116Carrier receive signal ............................................................. 6–116Carrier send signal................................................................. 6–116Blocking of power-swing zones.............................................. 6–117

Trip output ........................................................................................ 6–117


Control of the underreaching zone................................................... 6–117

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–117Operating characteristics of the power-swing zones........................ 6–117Testing of the carrier send and trip signals ...................................... 6–118Influence of the O/CE/F protection................................................................................... 6–118Control of the underreaching zone................................................... 6–119

Appendix .................................................................................................... 6–120Function block .................................................................................. 6–120Function block diagram.................................................................... 6–121Signal list.......................................................................................... 6–122Setting table ..................................................................................... 6–122

Pole Slip Protection................................................................................ 6-123Application................................................................................................... 6-123

Oscillations of mechanical masses in power system ........................ 6-123Oscillations during abnormal system conditions ..................... 6-125Speed of oscillations ............................................................... 6-127

Requirements on protection systems during pole slip conditions in network......................................................................... 6-128

Oscillations and faults in power system.................................. 6-129

Theory of operation ..................................................................................... 6-130Detection of the oscillations and transitions ...................................... 6-131Tripping on way in and on way out.................................................... 6-134Close-in and remote end tripping areas ............................................ 6-135

Design ......................................................................................................... 6-137Detection of oscillations .................................................................... 6-138Logic for cooperation with the line distance protection ..................... 6-139Tripping criteria ................................................................................. 6-141

Setting instructions ...................................................................................... 6-144Necessary technical data .................................................................. 6-144Impedance transformation factor ...................................................... 6-145Minimum load impedance ................................................................. 6-146System impedance and center of oscillations ................................... 6-146Resistive reach of the external boundary in forward direction .......... 6-146Resistive reach of the internal boundary in forward direction ........... 6-146Setting of the tP2 timer...................................................................... 6-147Settings of the reverse oscillation detection resistive boundaries..... 6-147Setting of the right and left tripping characteristics ........................... 6-148Setting of the reactive tripping characteristics................................... 6-148Setting of the reactive reach of the oscillation detection characteristics ................................................................................... 6-149Setting of the tW waiting timer .......................................................... 6-150Setting of the tripping modes and the transition counters ................. 6-150Additional timers in the oscillation detection circuits ......................... 6-151

tHZ hold timer ......................................................................... 6-151tR1 inhibit timer ....................................................................... 6-151tR2 inhibit timer ....................................................................... 6-151tEF timer ................................................................................. 6-151

Configuration possibilities............................................................................ 6-152PSP--BLOCK input............................................................................ 6-152PSP--BLK1 input ............................................................................... 6-152


PSP--BLK2 input ............................................................................... 6-152PSP--TR1P input............................................................................... 6-153PSP--I0CHECK input ........................................................................ 6-153PSP--REL1P ..................................................................................... 6-153PSP--BLK1P ..................................................................................... 6-153PSP--REL2P ..................................................................................... 6-153PSP--BLK2P ..................................................................................... 6-153PSP--VTSZ input............................................................................... 6-154PSP--TRIP output ............................................................................. 6-154PSP--START output.......................................................................... 6-154Remaining functional outputs............................................................ 6-154

Testing......................................................................................................... 6-155Connection ........................................................................................ 6-155Measurement of the operating characteristics .................................. 6-155

Measurement of the impedance boundaries........................... 6-156Testing the pole slip functionality ...................................................... 6-158Testing of the additional functionality ................................................ 6-159

Appendix ..................................................................................................... 6-160Simplified connection diagram .......................................................... 6-160Signal list........................................................................................... 6-160

Setting table ............................................................................ 6-161

Scheme communication logic for distance protection .......................6–163Application.................................................................................................. 6–163

Theory of operation .................................................................................... 6–163Blocking communication scheme..................................................... 6–163Permissive communication scheme................................................. 6–164Direct inter-trip scheme.................................................................... 6–165

Setting ........................................................................................................ 6–166

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–166Testing with FREJA.......................................................................... 6–166

Permissive underreach .......................................................... 6–166Permissive overreach ............................................................ 6–167Blocking scheme.................................................................... 6–167Check of unblocking logic ...................................................... 6–168

Appendix .................................................................................................... 6–169Function block.................................................................................. 6–169Function block diagram.................................................................... 6–170Signal list.......................................................................................... 6–171Setting .............................................................................................. 6–171

Current reversal and WEI logic for distance protection......................6–173Application.................................................................................................. 6–173

Current reversal logic ....................................................................... 6–173Weak end infeed (WEI) logic............................................................ 6–173

Theory of operation .................................................................................... 6–174Current reversal logic ....................................................................... 6–174Weak end infeed logic...................................................................... 6–174

Design ........................................................................................................ 6–175Current reversal logic ....................................................................... 6–175Weak end infeed logic...................................................................... 6–176


Setting ........................................................................................................ 6–177Current reversal logic ....................................................................... 6–177Weak-end-infeed logic ..................................................................... 6–177

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–177Current reversal logic ....................................................................... 6–177

Testing with FREJA ............................................................... 6–178Check of current reversal....................................................... 6–178

Weak end infeed logic...................................................................... 6–179WEI logic at permissive schemes .......................................... 6–179

Testing with FREJA........................................................ 6–179

Appendix .................................................................................................... 6–181Function blocks ................................................................................ 6–181Function block diagrams .................................................................. 6–182Signal list.......................................................................................... 6–185Setting table ..................................................................................... 6–187

Automatic switch-onto-fault function for distance protection ...........6–189Application.................................................................................................. 6–189

Theory of operation and design.................................................................. 6–189

Setting ........................................................................................................ 6–190

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–190Testing with FREJA.......................................................................... 6–191

External activation of SOTF function ..................................... 6–191Automatic initiation of SOTF .................................................. 6–191


Local acceleration logic .........................................................................6–193Application.................................................................................................. 6–193

Theory of operation and design.................................................................. 6–193Zone extension................................................................................. 6–193Loss-of-load acceleration ................................................................. 6–193

Setting ........................................................................................................ 6–194

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–194


Dead-line detection.................................................................................6–197Application.................................................................................................. 6–197

Theory of operation and design.................................................................. 6–197

Setting ........................................................................................................ 6–198

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–198

Appendix .................................................................................................... 6–200Function block .................................................................................. 6–200


Function block diagram.................................................................... 6–200Signal list.......................................................................................... 6–201Setting table ..................................................................................... 6–201

Current, phase wise................................................................................6–203

Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection.......................................6–203Application.................................................................................................. 6–203


Design ........................................................................................................ 6–203

Setting instructions..................................................................................... 6–205Meshed network without parallel line ............................................... 6–205Meshed network with parallel line .................................................... 6–207

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–209


Time delayed phase overcurrent protection ........................................6–213Application.................................................................................................. 6–213


Design ........................................................................................................ 6–213

Setting instructions..................................................................................... 6–215Setting of operating current IP> ....................................................... 6–215Setting of time delay tP .................................................................... 6–216

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–216

Appendix .................................................................................................... 6–218Function block.................................................................................. 6–218Function block diagram.................................................................... 6–218

Signal list................................................................................ 6–219Setting table ........................................................................... 6–219

Directional definite and inverse time delayed phase overcurrent

function (TOC3)...........................................................................................221Application...................................................................................................... 221

Theory of operation and design...................................................................... 222Current measuring element.................................................................. 222Directional measuring element............................................................. 223Directional overcurrent function ........................................................... 224

Directional phase selection ........................................................ 224General overcurrent operating principles................................... 225

Setting instructions......................................................................................... 229Line protection in a radial network ....................................................... 229Line protection in a meshed network ................................................... 231Setting characteristics .......................................................................... 231

Testing............................................................................................................ 233

Appendix ........................................................................................................ 236Function block...................................................................................... 236


Signal list.............................................................................................. 236Setting table ......................................................................................... 236

Stub protection .......................................................................................6–239Application.................................................................................................. 6–239


Design ........................................................................................................ 6–240

Setting instructions ..................................................................................... 6–241

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–241


Breaker-failure protection ......................................................................6–247Application.................................................................................................. 6–247

Theory of operation .................................................................................... 6–249Input and output signals ................................................................... 6–250Start functions .................................................................................. 6–250Measuring principles ........................................................................ 6–251Retrip functions ................................................................................ 6–252Back-up trip ...................................................................................... 6–253

Setting ........................................................................................................ 6–253Human-machine interface (HMI) ...................................................... 6–253

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–254

Test of the breaker-failure protection ......................................................... 6–254Preparations..................................................................................... 6–254Check that the protection does not trip when set passive................ 6–255Check that the protection can be started from all start inputs .......... 6–255Check that the retrip function works................................................. 6–255Check that the back-up trip function works ...................................... 6–256Terminate the test and restore the equipment to normal state ........ 6–256

Appendix .................................................................................................... 6–257Function block .................................................................................. 6–257Signal list.......................................................................................... 6–258Setting table ..................................................................................... 6–258

Current, residual (earth fault) ................................................................6–259

Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (nondir).....................6–259Application.................................................................................................. 6–259


Design ........................................................................................................ 6–260

Setting ........................................................................................................ 6–261Meshed network without parallel line ............................................... 6–261Meshed network with parallel line .................................................... 6–263

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–264

Appendix .................................................................................................... 6–267Function block .................................................................................. 6–267Function block diagram.................................................................... 6–267


Signal list.......................................................................................... 6–267Setting table ..................................................................................... 6–267

Time delayed residual overcurrent protection (nondir) ......................6–269Application.................................................................................................. 6–269


Design ........................................................................................................ 6–269

Settings ...................................................................................................... 6–271Setting of operating current IN> ....................................................... 6–271Setting of time delay tN .................................................................... 6–272

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–272


Residual overcurrent protection (dir and nondir) ................................6–277Application.................................................................................................. 6–277

Earth-fault overcurrent protection..................................................... 6–277Directional comparison logic function............................................... 6–278

Theory of operation .................................................................................... 6–279Directional earth-fault overcurrent protection ................................... 6–279

Setting ........................................................................................................ 6–282

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–285Preparations..................................................................................... 6–285Tests ................................................................................................ 6–286Directional comparison logic function............................................... 6–288

Appendix .................................................................................................... 6–289Function block.................................................................................. 6–289Signal list.......................................................................................... 6–289Setting table ..................................................................................... 6–289

Communication logic for residual overcurrent protection .................6–291Application.................................................................................................. 6–291

Theory of operation .................................................................................... 6–291Directional comparison logic function............................................... 6–291

Blocking scheme.................................................................... 6–292Permissive overreach scheme............................................... 6–293

Setting ........................................................................................................ 6–294Blocking scheme.............................................................................. 6–294Permissive communication scheme................................................. 6–294

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–294Directional earth-fault overcurrent protection ................................... 6–294Directional comparison logic function............................................... 6–295

Blocking scheme.................................................................... 6–295Permissive scheme................................................................ 6–295



Current rev. and WEI logic for residual overcurrent protection.........6–297Application.................................................................................................. 6–297

Current reversal logic ....................................................................... 6–297Weak end infeed logic...................................................................... 6–297

Theory of operation .................................................................................... 6–298Directional comparison logic function............................................... 6–298

Fault current reversal logic..................................................... 6–298Weak end infeed logic............................................................ 6–299

Setting ........................................................................................................ 6–301Reversal current............................................................................... 6–301Weak-end-infeed.............................................................................. 6–301

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–302Directional comparison logic function............................................... 6–302

Blocking scheme.................................................................... 6–302Permissive scheme................................................................ 6–302


4 step residual overcurrent protection .................................................6–305Application.................................................................................................. 6–305

Earth-fault overcurrent protection..................................................... 6–305Directional comparison..................................................................... 6–306

Theory of operation .................................................................................... 6–307Function logic ................................................................................... 6–307The directional measuring function .................................................. 6–309Definite time overcurrent step 1 ....................................................... 6–310Definite time overcurrent step 2 and 3 ............................................. 6–310Overcurrent step 4 ........................................................................... 6–310

Setting ........................................................................................................ 6–313General ............................................................................................ 6–313Step 1............................................................................................... 6–313

Meshed network without parallel line ..................................... 6–313Meshed network with parallel line .......................................... 6–314Meshed network non-directional ............................................ 6–315

Step 2 and 3..................................................................................... 6–316Step 4, non-directional ..................................................................... 6–317Inverse time delay ............................................................................ 6–317Directional current function .............................................................. 6–318

Polarising voltage................................................................... 6–318Directional current setting ...................................................... 6–319

Example of protection scheme......................................................... 6–319

Secondary testing....................................................................................... 6–321Earth-fault overcurrent protection..................................................... 6–322

Check of the direction measuring element............................. 6–322Check of current steps I1, I2 and I3 ....................................... 6–322Directional steps with setting “forward release” ..................... 6–322Current steps with setting “reverse blocking”......................... 6–322Non-directional current steps ................................................. 6–322Current step I4 ....................................................................... 6–322


Directional comparison logic ............................................................ 6–323

Directional test............................................................................................ 6–324


Voltage .....................................................................................................6–329

Time delayed undervoltage protection .................................................6–329Application.................................................................................................. 6–329

Measuring principle .................................................................................... 6–329

Design ........................................................................................................ 6–330Undervoltage protection ................................................................... 6–330

Setting ........................................................................................................ 6–330

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–331


Time delayed overvoltage and residual overvoltage protection ........6–335Application.................................................................................................. 6–335

Measuring principles .................................................................................. 6–336Design .............................................................................................. 6–336

Setting ........................................................................................................ 6–337Time delayed overvoltage protection ............................................... 6–337Time delayed residual overvoltage protection.................................. 6–337

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–338Time delayed overvoltage protection ............................................... 6–338Time delayed residual overvoltage protection.................................. 6–339


Power system supervision.....................................................................6–343

Broken conductor check........................................................................6–343Application.................................................................................................. 6–343


Design ........................................................................................................ 6–343

Setting instructions..................................................................................... 6–344Setting of minimum operating current IP>........................................ 6–344Setting of time delay t....................................................................... 6–345

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–346



Loss of voltage check ............................................................................6–349Application.................................................................................................. 6–349


Design ........................................................................................................ 6–349

Setting instructions ..................................................................................... 6–351

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–351


Overload supervision .............................................................................6–357Application.................................................................................................. 6–357


Design ........................................................................................................ 6–357

Setting instructions ..................................................................................... 6–358Setting of operating current IP> ....................................................... 6–358Setting of time delay t....................................................................... 6–359

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–359


Secondary system supervision .............................................................6–363

Current circuit supervision ....................................................................6–363Application.................................................................................................. 6–363


Setting ........................................................................................................ 6–366

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–367


Fuse failure supervision (zero sequence) ............................................6–369Application.................................................................................................. 6–369


Design ........................................................................................................ 6–370

Setting instructions ..................................................................................... 6–372Setting of zero sequence voltage 3U0> ........................................... 6–373Setting of zero sequence current 3I0< ............................................. 6–373

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–374

Appendix .................................................................................................... 6–376Function block .................................................................................. 6–376Function block diagram.................................................................... 6–377Signal list.......................................................................................... 6–378


Setting table ..................................................................................... 6–378

Control, multiple bays ............................................................................6–379

Command control ...................................................................................6–379Application.................................................................................................. 6–379

Design ........................................................................................................ 6–379

Configuration .............................................................................................. 6–381

Commands ................................................................................................. 6–381

Setting ........................................................................................................ 6–382

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–382


Synchro- and energising check for single circuit breaker..................6–385Application.................................................................................................. 6–385

Synchrocheck................................................................................... 6–385Energising check.............................................................................. 6–387Voltage selection.............................................................................. 6–388

Voltage selection for a single busbar ..................................... 6–389Fuse failure and Voltage OK signals.............................. 6–390

Voltage selection for a double bus......................................... 6–392Fuse failure and Voltage OK signals.............................. 6–392

Theory of operation .................................................................................... 6–393Synchrocheck................................................................................... 6–393Voltage selection.............................................................................. 6–395

Setting ........................................................................................................ 6–398Operation ......................................................................................... 6–398Input phase ...................................................................................... 6–398UMeasure......................................................................................... 6–398PhaseShift........................................................................................ 6–398URatio .............................................................................................. 6–398USelection........................................................................................ 6–398AutoEnerg and ManEnerg................................................................ 6–399ManDBDL......................................................................................... 6–399

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–400Test equipment ................................................................................ 6–400Synchro-check tests......................................................................... 6–400

Test of voltage difference....................................................... 6–400Test of phase difference ........................................................ 6–402Test of frequency difference .................................................. 6–403Test of reference voltage ....................................................... 6–404

Test of energising check .................................................................. 6–404Test of dead line live bus (DLLB)........................................... 6–404Dead bus live line (DBLL) ...................................................... 6–405Energising in both directions (DLLB or DBLL) ....................... 6–406Dead bus Dead line (DBDL) .................................................. 6–406

Test of voltage selection .................................................................. 6–406

Appendix .................................................................................................... 6–409Function block.................................................................................. 6–409


Signal list.......................................................................................... 6–409Setting table ..................................................................................... 6–410

Synchro- and energising check for double circuit breakers ..............6–411Application.................................................................................................. 6–411

Synchrocheck................................................................................... 6–411Energising check.............................................................................. 6–413Voltage connection........................................................................... 6–414

Fuse failure and Voltage OK signals...................................... 6–415

Theory of operation .................................................................................... 6–416Synchro-check ................................................................................. 6–416

Setting ........................................................................................................ 6–419Operation ......................................................................................... 6–419Input phase ...................................................................................... 6–419UMeasure......................................................................................... 6–419PhaseShift........................................................................................ 6–419URatio .............................................................................................. 6–419AutoEnerg and ManEnerg................................................................ 6–420ManDBDL......................................................................................... 6–420

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–421Test equipment ................................................................................ 6–421Synchrocheck tests .......................................................................... 6–422




Phasing, synchro- and energising check, single CB ..........................6–429Application.................................................................................................. 6–429

Phasing ............................................................................................ 6–429Synchrocheck................................................................................... 6–430Energising check.............................................................................. 6–432Voltage selection.............................................................................. 6–433

Voltage selection for a single busbar ..................................... 6–433Voltage selection for a double bus......................................... 6–435

Fuse failure and Voltage OK signals.............................. 6–435

Theory of operation .................................................................................... 6–436In- and output signals....................................................................... 6–436

Setting ........................................................................................................ 6–443Operation ......................................................................................... 6–443Input phase ...................................................................................... 6–443PhaseShift........................................................................................ 6–443URatio .............................................................................................. 6–443


USelection........................................................................................ 6–443AutoEnerg and ManEnerg................................................................ 6–443ManDBDL......................................................................................... 6–444OperationSynch ............................................................................... 6–444ShortPulse........................................................................................ 6–444

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–445Test equipment ................................................................................ 6–445Phasing tests.................................................................................... 6–446

Test of frequency difference .................................................. 6–447Synchrocheck tests .......................................................................... 6–447


Test of energising check .................................................................. 6–451Test of dead line live bus (DLLB)........................................... 6–451Dead bus live line (DBLL) ...................................................... 6–453Energising in both directions (DLLB or DBLL) ....................... 6–453Dead bus Dead line (DBDL) .................................................. 6–453Test of voltage selection ........................................................ 6–454


Phasing, synchro- and energising check, double CBs .......................6–459Application.................................................................................................. 6–459

Phasing ............................................................................................ 6–459Synchrocheck................................................................................... 6–460Energising check.............................................................................. 6–463Voltage connection........................................................................... 6–464

Fuse failure and Voltage OK signals...................................... 6–465

Theory of operation .................................................................................... 6–466Input and output signals ................................................................... 6–466

Setting ........................................................................................................ 6–471Operation ......................................................................................... 6–471Input phase ...................................................................................... 6–471PhaseShift........................................................................................ 6–471URatio .............................................................................................. 6–471AutoEnerg and ManEnerg................................................................ 6–471ManDBDL......................................................................................... 6–472OperationSynch ............................................................................... 6–472ShortPulse........................................................................................ 6–472

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–473Test equipment ................................................................................ 6–473Phasing tests.................................................................................... 6–474

Test of frequency difference .................................................. 6–475Synchrocheck tests .......................................................................... 6–475





Autorecloser, single, two and/or three phase......................................6–485Application.................................................................................................. 6–485

Theory of operation .................................................................................... 6–487Input and output signals, single breaker arrangement ..................... 6–487Multi-breaker arrangement............................................................... 6–489AR Operation ................................................................................... 6–490

Design ........................................................................................................ 6–491Start and control of the auto-reclosing ............................................. 6–491Extended AR open time, shot 1 ....................................................... 6–491Long trip signal................................................................................. 6–491Reclosing programs ......................................................................... 6–491

1/2/3ph reclosing.................................................................... 6–492Evolving fault.................................................................................... 6–493AR01-P3P, Prepare three-phase trip ............................................... 6–493Blocking of a new reclosing cycle .................................................... 6–493Reclosing checks and Reclaim timer ............................................... 6–493Pulsing of CB closing command ...................................................... 6–494Transient fault .................................................................................. 6–494Unsuccessful signal ......................................................................... 6–494Permanent fault................................................................................ 6–494Automatic confirmation of programmed reclosing attempts ............. 6–495More about reclosing programs ....................................................... 6–495

Configuration and setting ........................................................................... 6–498Recommendations for input signals ................................................. 6–498Recommendations for output signals............................................... 6–499Recommendations for multi-breaker arrangement........................... 6–500

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–501Suggested testing procedure ........................................................... 6–502

Preparations........................................................................... 6–502Check the AR functionality..................................................... 6–502Check the reclosing requirements ......................................... 6–503Test of Master-Slave.............................................................. 6–503Termination of the test ........................................................... 6–504

Appendix .................................................................................................... 6–505Function block .................................................................................. 6–505Function block diagrams .................................................................. 6–506Sequence examples......................................................................... 6–510Signal list.......................................................................................... 6–512Setting table ..................................................................................... 6–513

Autorecloser, three phase......................................................................6–515Application.................................................................................................. 6–515


Theory of operation .................................................................................... 6–517Input and output signals,single breaker arrangement ............................................................. 6–517Multi-breaker arrangement............................................................... 6–519AR Operation ................................................................................... 6–520

Design ........................................................................................................ 6–521Start and control of the auto-reclosing ............................................. 6–521Extended AR open time, shot 1 ....................................................... 6–521Long trip signal................................................................................. 6–521Reclosing program........................................................................... 6–521Blocking of a new reclosing cycle .................................................... 6–522Reclosing checks and Reclaim timer ............................................... 6–522Pulsing of CB closing command ...................................................... 6–522Transient fault .................................................................................. 6–523Unsuccessful signal ......................................................................... 6–523Permanent fault................................................................................ 6–523Automatic confirmation of programmed reclosing attempts ............. 6–523

Configuration and setting ........................................................................... 6–524Recommendations for input signals ................................................. 6–524Recommendations for output signals............................................... 6–525Recommendations for multi-breaker arrangement........................... 6–525

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–526Suggested testing procedure ........................................................... 6–527

Preparations........................................................................... 6–527Check the AR functionality..................................................... 6–527Check the reclosing requirements ......................................... 6–528Test of Master-Slave.............................................................. 6–528Termination of the test ........................................................... 6–529

Appendix .................................................................................................... 6–530Function block.................................................................................. 6–530Function block diagrams .................................................................. 6–531Sequence examples......................................................................... 6–535Signal list.......................................................................................... 6–536Setting table ..................................................................................... 6–537

Logic ........................................................................................................6–539

Three pole trip logic................................................................................6–539Application.................................................................................................. 6–539

Design ........................................................................................................ 6–539

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–539


Single or two pole trip logic...................................................................6–541Application.................................................................................................. 6–541

Design ........................................................................................................ 6–541Three-phase front logic .................................................................... 6–541Phase segregated front logic ........................................................... 6–542


Additional logic for 1ph/3ph operating mode.................................... 6–543Additional logic for 1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode............................. 6–544Final tripping circuits ........................................................................ 6–545

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–5463ph operating mode ......................................................................... 6–5461ph/3ph operating mode .................................................................. 6–5461ph/2ph/3ph operating mode ........................................................... 6–547


Pole discordance logic...........................................................................6–551Application.................................................................................................. 6–551


Design ........................................................................................................ 6–552

Setting instruction....................................................................................... 6–553

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–553General ............................................................................................ 6–553Testing of the pole discordance logic............................................... 6–554


Binary signal transfer to remote end ....................................................6–557Application.................................................................................................. 6–557

Design ........................................................................................................ 6–558General ............................................................................................ 6–558Function block .................................................................................. 6–558Human-machine interface (HMI) ...................................................... 6–559Communication alternatives............................................................. 6–560

General .................................................................................. 6–560Fibre optical modem .............................................................. 6–561Short range fiber optical modem............................................ 6–561Short range galvanic modem................................................. 6–562Galvanic interfaces ................................................................ 6–563

Configuration .............................................................................................. 6–566

Setting ........................................................................................................ 6–566Selection of communication parameters .......................................... 6–566Fibre optical...................................................................................... 6–567Short range fibre optical modem...................................................... 6–568

Indications.............................................................................. 6–569Jumper settings...................................................................... 6–569Operation on dedicated fibres................................................ 6–570Operation with transceivers of type 21-15XX or 21-16XX ..... 6–571

Short range galvanic modem ........................................................... 6–571Indications.............................................................................. 6–572

Optical/electric converter for short range optical modem ........................... 6–573Transceiver 21-15x for interface standard V.35/V.36....................... 6–573


Interfaces ............................................................................... 6–573Transmission rates................................................................. 6–574Timing .................................................................................... 6–574Indications.............................................................................. 6–574Dissembling/Assembling ............................................................................ 6–575Setting description ................................................................. 6–576Specification........................................................................... 6–577Recommendations on settings and connections ................... 6–577

Co-directional operation ................................................. 6–578Contra-directional operation........................................... 6–579

Transceiver 21-16x for interface standard X.21/G.703 .................... 6–579Interfaces ............................................................................... 6–579Transmission rates................................................................. 6–580Timing .................................................................................... 6–581Indications.............................................................................. 6–581Setting possibility for G.703 ................................................... 6–582Dissembling/Assembling ............................................................................ 6–582Configuring type of interface .................................................. 6–582Configuring transmission rate, timing and synchronisation.... 6–583Configuring X.21 .................................................................... 6–584Configuring G.703 co- and contra-directional ........................ 6–585Selection of protective earthing.............................................. 6–586Specification........................................................................... 6–586Recommendations on settings and connections ................... 6–587

X.21 operation................................................................ 6–587G.703 co-directional operation ....................................... 6–588

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–589


Serial communication.............................................................................6–595Application.................................................................................................. 6–595

Theory of operation .................................................................................... 6–596SPA operation .................................................................................. 6–596LON operation.................................................................................. 6–596IEC 870-5-103 operation.................................................................. 6–596

Design ........................................................................................................ 6–597SPA design ...................................................................................... 6–597LON design ...................................................................................... 6–597IEC 870-5-103 design ...................................................................... 6–598

General .................................................................................. 6–598Hardware ............................................................................... 6–598Events .................................................................................... 6–598Measurands ........................................................................... 6–598Fault location.......................................................................... 6–599Commands............................................................................. 6–599File transfer ............................................................................ 6–599

Setting ........................................................................................................ 6–600


SPA setting ...................................................................................... 6–600LON setting ...................................................................................... 6–601IEC 870-5-103 setting ...................................................................... 6–602

Settings from the local HMI.................................................... 6–602Settings from the CAP 531 tool.............................................. 6–604

Event .............................................................................. 6–604Commands..................................................................... 6–604File transfer .................................................................... 6–605


Command function .................................................................................6–609Application.................................................................................................. 6–609

Design ........................................................................................................ 6–610General ............................................................................................ 6–610Binary signal interbay communication.............................................. 6–610

Configuration .............................................................................................. 6–611

Setting ........................................................................................................ 6–611

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–611


Communication channel test logic .......................................................6–613Application.................................................................................................. 6–613

Design ........................................................................................................ 6–614Selection of an operating mode ....................................................... 6–614Operation at sending end................................................................. 6–614Operation at receiving end ............................................................... 6–615

Setting instructions ..................................................................................... 6–616tInh timer .......................................................................................... 6–616tCh timer........................................................................................... 6–616tCS timer .......................................................................................... 6–616tWait timer ........................................................................................ 6–616tChOK timer ..................................................................................... 6–616tStart timer........................................................................................ 6–616

Basic configuration possibilities.................................................................. 6–617

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–618


Event function .........................................................................................6–621Application.................................................................................................. 6–621


Design ........................................................................................................ 6–621


General ............................................................................................ 6–621Double indication.............................................................................. 6–622Communication between terminals .................................................. 6–622

Setting ........................................................................................................ 6–623

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–624

Appendix .................................................................................................... 6–625Function blocks ................................................................................ 6–625Signal list.......................................................................................... 6–627Setting table ..................................................................................... 6–628

Monitoring ...............................................................................................6–633

Disturbance report - Introduction..........................................................6–633General overview ....................................................................................... 6–633

General disturbance information ...................................................... 6–634Indications........................................................................................ 6–634Event recorder.................................................................................. 6–634Fault locator ..................................................................................... 6–634Trip values........................................................................................ 6–634Disturbance recorder........................................................................ 6–635

Recording times ......................................................................................... 6–636

Analogue signals ........................................................................................ 6–637

Binary signals ............................................................................................. 6–637Trig signals....................................................................................... 6–638

Manual trig ............................................................................. 6–638Binary trig............................................................................... 6–638Analogue trig.......................................................................... 6–638

Disturbance report - Settings ................................................................6–639Introduction................................................................................................. 6–639

Settings during normal conditions .................................................... 6–640

Operation.................................................................................................... 6–640Sequence number............................................................................ 6–641Recording times ............................................................................... 6–641Binary signals................................................................................... 6–641Analogue signals.............................................................................. 6–642

Settings during test..................................................................................... 6–643Test mode ........................................................................................ 6–643Activation of manual triggering......................................................... 6–643


Disturbance report - Indications............................................................6–649Application.................................................................................................. 6–649


Setting ........................................................................................................ 6–650

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–650

Disturbance report - Disturbance recorder ..........................................6–651Application.................................................................................................. 6–651


Recording capacity........................................................................... 6–651Memory capacity .............................................................................. 6–651Recording times ............................................................................... 6–651Triggers ............................................................................................ 6–651Time tagging .................................................................................... 6–652


Design ........................................................................................................ 6–654

Setting ........................................................................................................ 6–656

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–656

Disturbance report - Event recorder .....................................................6–659Application.................................................................................................. 6–659


Setting ........................................................................................................ 6–659

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–660

Disturbance report - Fault locator .........................................................6–661Application.................................................................................................. 6–661

Distance-to-fault locator ............................................................................. 6–661

Measuring principle .................................................................................... 6–662Accurate algorithm for measurement of distance to fault................. 6–662The non-compensated impedance model........................................ 6–665

Design, distance-to-fault calculation........................................................... 6–667

Configuration .............................................................................................. 6–668

Setting ........................................................................................................ 6–668

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–669

Recalculation of a distance to fault............................................................. 6–672


Disturbance Report - Trip value recorder.............................................6–677Application.................................................................................................. 6–677

Design ........................................................................................................ 6–677

Displaying pre-fault and fault phasors of the currents and voltages........... 6–678Setting of the user-defined names for phasors ................................ 6–678

Appendix .................................................................................................... 6–679

Monitoring of AC analogue measurements..........................................6–681Application.................................................................................................. 6–681

User-defined measuring ranges....................................................... 6–682Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity............................. 6–682Continuous supervision of the measured quantity ........................... 6–683

Amplitude dead-band supervision.......................................... 6–683Integrating dead-band supervision......................................... 6–684Periodic reporting................................................................... 6–684Periodic reporting with parallel dead-band supervision ......... 6–685Periodic reporting with serial dead-band supervision ............ 6–685Combination of periodic reportings ........................................ 6–686


Theory of operation and Design ................................................................. 6–687

Setting instructions..................................................................................... 6–688

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–692


Monitoring of DC analogue measurements..........................................6–699Application.................................................................................................. 6–699

User-defined measuring ranges....................................................... 6–699Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity............................. 6–700Continuous supervision of the measured quantity ........................... 6–701

Amplitude dead-band supervision.......................................... 6–701Integrating dead-band supervision......................................... 6–702Periodic reporting................................................................... 6–703Periodic reporting with parallel dead-band supervision ......... 6–703Periodic reporting with serial dead-band supervision ............ 6–704Combination of periodic reportings ........................................ 6–705

Theory of operation and Design ................................................................. 6–706

Setting instructions..................................................................................... 6–707

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–710

Appendix .................................................................................................... 6–711Function blocks ................................................................................ 6–711Signal list.......................................................................................... 6–712Setting table ..................................................................................... 6–713

Pulse counter ..........................................................................................6–719Application.................................................................................................. 6–719


Design ........................................................................................................ 6–720

Setting ........................................................................................................ 6–721

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–722


25Introduction to functions

1 IntroductionThe protection and control terminals employ a multiprocessor design toensure the best possible operational security and dependability. Theincluded main protection and control functions are to a great extent inde-pendent of one another and each terminal can be ordered with individualoptions to satisfy the user’s needs in different applications in the best pos-sible way. To achieve this, different binary inputs of a terminal can beconfigured to different functions. Various functional output signals areprogrammable to one or several binary outputs, as well as to the differentinputs of other protection and control functions.

Each terminal has a few main functions as standard. These functionsdetermine the basic application for a terminal, for example the distanceprotection function or the phase segregated line differential protectionfunction. Additional functions, such as directional or non-directionalearth-fault overcurrent protection, auto-reclosing function etc. are avail-able as options.

The possible functional structure of each type of terminal within theREx 5xx family is described in the Buyer's Guides and also presented foreach delivered unit separately in the corresponding documentation.

Each of the terminal related functions is described in detail in the docu-mentation for the actual unit. The description of each function follows thesame structure (where applicable):

• The application part states the most important reasons for the imple-mentation of a particular protection function.

• The measuring principle gives a brief presentation of the measuring algorithm used for a particular function.

• The design part presents the general concept of a function, together with a list of the setting parameters and different signals.

• The setting instructions refer mostly to different application areas and give directions for setting of the particular parameters.

• The testing instructions describes primarily the necessary testing procedures and the requirements for the testing equipment. The expected results of some functions are also presented.

1MRK 580 313-XEN


Introduction to functions

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 313-XENPage 6 – 26

2 DesignThe description of the design is chiefly based on simplified logic dia-grams, which use IEC symbols, for the presentation of different functions,conditions etc. The functions are presented as a closed block with themost important internal logic circuits and configurable functional inputsand outputs.

Completely configurable binary inputs/outputs and functional inputs/out-puts enable the user to prepare the REx 5xx with his own configuration ofdifferent functions, according to application needs and standard practice.

Figure 1: Example of a simplified logic diagram for a function block.

The names of the configurable logic signals consist of two parts dividedby dashes. The first part consists of up to four letters and presents theabbreviated name for the corresponding function. The second part pre-sents the functionality of the particular signal. According to this explana-tion, the meaning of the signal TUV--BLKTR in Figure 1: is as follows:

• The first part of the signal, TUV- represents the adherence to the Time delayed Under-Voltage function.

• The second part of the signal name, BLKTR informs the user that the signal will BLocK the TRip from the under-voltage function, when its value is a logical one (1).

Different binary signals have special symbols with the following signifi-cance:

• Signals drawn to the box frame to the left present functional input signals. It is possible to configure them to functional output signals of other functions as well as to binary input terminals of the REx 5xx terminal. Examples in Figure 1: are TUV--BLKTR, TUV--BLOCK

TUV--BLKTR

TUV--BLOCK

TUV--VTSU >1

STUL1

STUL2

&

&

&STUL3

Operation = On

>1 & t

tt

15 msTUV--TRIP

TUV--START

TUV--STL1

TUV--STL2

TUV--STL3

t15 ms

t15 ms

t15 ms

t15 ms

Visf_069.vsd

TRIP - cont.

Introduction to functions 1MRK 580 313-XENPage 6 – 27

Version 2.2-00

and TUV--VTSU.

• Signals in frames with a shaded area on their right side present the logical setting signals. Their values are high (1) only when the corre-sponding setting parameter is set to the symbolic value specified within the frame. Example in Figure 1: is the signal Operation = On.These signals are not configurable. Their logical values correspond automatically to the selected setting value.

• The internal signals are usually dedicated to a certain function. They are normally not available for configuration purposes. Examples in Figure 1: are signals STUL1, STUL2 and STUL3.

• The functional output signals, drawn to the box frame to the right, present the logical outputs of functions and are available for configu-ration purposes. The user can configure them to binary outputs from the terminal or to inputs of different functions. Typical examples in Figure 1: are signals TUV--TRIP, TUV--START etc.

• Other internal signals configurated to other function blocks are writ-ten on a line with an identity and a cont. reference. An example is the signal TRIP - cont. The signal can be found in the corresponding function with the same identity.

Introduction to functions

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 313-XENPage 6 – 28

29Distance protection

1 Application

1.1 General The distance protection function is the most widely spread protectionfunction in transmission and subtransmission networks. It is also becom-ing increasingly important in distribution networks. The main reasons forthis are:

• Its independence on communication links between the line ends, because for its operation, it uses information about the locally avail-able currents and voltages

• The distance protection forms a relatively selective protection sys-tem (non-unit protection system) in the power network. This means that it can also operate as a remote back-up protection for other pri-mary elements in the network

The basic requirements for modern line protection, such as speed, sensi-tivity and selectivity, with their strict requirements for dependability andsecurity (availability), are getting more stringent. In addition, modern dis-tance protections must be able to operate in networks with existing dis-tance relays, which are mostly designed in a different technology (static oreven electromechanical relays).

Older distance relays protect in many cases power lines only at phase-to-phase and three-phase faults. Some other protection is used for phase-to-earth faults.

So the flexibility of modern distance protection is very important. Thisespecially applies when it is used in a complex network configuration, forexample, on parallel operating multicircuit lines and on multiterminallines.

The selective operation of the distance protection does not depend oncommunication facilities between two line ends. At the same time, thedistance protection can detect faults beyond the current transformers atthe remote terminal. This functionality makes it an ideal complement tothe line differential protection function that cannot detect faults beyondthe current transformer at the opposite terminal.

1.1.1 Distance protection function in different line terminals

The distance protection function in REx 5xx line protection, control, andmonitoring terminals consists of three to five independent distance protec-tion zones, each of them comprising three measuring elements for phase-to-earth (Ph-E) faults and/or three measuring elements for phase-to-phase(Ph-PH) faults. Different terminals suit different requirements in differentnetworks on various voltage levels. For this reason, some characteristicparameters of the distance protection function differs from terminal to ter-minal. Please, refer for detailed information to ordering particulars foreach line protection terminal REx 5xx separately.

1MRK 580 321-XEN


Distance protection

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 321-XENPage 6 – 30

Distance protection zone five differs from other zones with respect to itsspeed of operation. It starts faster than other distance protection zones andmight have for this reason higher overreaching for different system tran-sients. It is for this reason suggested to use it only for the applications,which permit higher overreaching, (i.e. switch-onto-fault function) or as atime delayed distance protection zone with time delay longer than 100 ms.

1.2 Basic characteristics The distance protection function, as built into the REx 5xx line protectionterminals, is full-scheme distance protection. This means that it has indi-vidual measuring elements for different types of faults within differentzones.

Depending on the type of terminal, it consists of up to five (for details seethe corresponding ordering details) independent, impedance-measuringzones, each has a quadrilateral characteristic, as symbolically illustratedin Figure 1:. RL and XL represent line resistance and reactance and RFrepresents the resistive reach of a protective zone.

Figure 1: Characteristic of an impedance measuring zone

The characteristic in reactive direction is a straight line, parallel with theR-axis. The measuring algorithm used for the reactance part of the charac-teristic for phase-to-earth faults compensates for the influence of the loadcurrent on the impedance measurement for distance zone 1. So the staticcharacteristic has no declination against the R-axis. Setting of the reach ina reactive direction is independent for each separate zone. It can also dif-fers for ph-ph and for ph-E measuring elements.

A straight line limits the reach of the distance protection zone in resistivedirection. It is parallel with ZL, the line-impedance characteristic. Thismeans that it forms, with the R-axis, a ϕL line-characteristic angle. Settingof the reach in resistive direction is independent for each separate zone.Different setting values are also possible for phase-to-earth faults (RFPE)and for phase-to-phase faults (RFPP).

R

jX

visf037.vsd

ZL=R L+ jXL

R F

15 O

25 O

lineangle

Distance protection 1MRK 580 321-XENPage 6 – 31

Version 2.2-00

With the X-axis, the directional characteristic in the second quadrantforms a 25° angle. With the R-axis, the corresponding part forms a 15°angle in the fourth quadrant, as in figure 1.

The characteristics of the distance zones are independent on one anotheras far as their directionality and reach in different directions are con-cerned. One can program the directionality of each distance zone. Figure2 shows a typical example of the characteristics of an impedance-measur-ing zone when directed into forward or reverse directions. A polygon,completed with dashed lines, represents the characteristic of a non-direc-tional zone.

Figure 2: Nondirectional and directional (forward and reverse) operat-ing characteristic

The set value of a reach in resistive direction determines whether thedirectional line in the second quadrant meets, as first, the reactive or theresistive characteristic. Compare the characteristics in figure 1 and 2.

The values of the reaches in reactive and resistive direction for a particu-lar zone are the same for forward and reverse impedance-measuring ele-ments and for the non-directional mode of operation.

The terminal automatically adapts the line characteristic angle accordingto the line parameters. Thus, the measurement of different faults followsthe real conditions in a power system. Figure 3 shows an example of an

R

jX

visf038.vsd

R F

Forward

Reverse

RF RF

25 o

XL

XL

15 o

RL

Distance protection

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 321-XENPage 6 – 32

operating characteristic for the ph-E fault, which faces the forward direc-tion. Here, a Zloop, phase-to-earth loop measuring impedance, consists ofa Z1 line operational impedance, ZN earth return impedance, and theRFPE fault resistance. The characteristic angle of the complete measuringloop automatically follows the real system conditions and the completeline characteristic.

Figure 3: Characteristic of the phase-to-earth measuring loop

The earth return impedance follows for each particular zone the expres-sion:

(Equation 1)

with:

(Equation 2)

and

(Equation 3)

Where and are the reach setting parameters.

R

jX

visf039.vsd

Z1=R1PE+jX1PE

Zloop

RFPE

Z N=R N

+jX N Zline

ZN13--- Z0 Z1–( )⋅=

Z1 R1PE j X1PE⋅+=

Z0 R0PE j X0PE⋅+=

R1PE X1PE R0PE,, X0PE


Version 2.2-00

The possibility to cover a sufficient fault resistance is a major consider-ation in short-line applications. Load encroachment problems are not socommon. The independent setting option of the reach in reactive andresistive direction is a function that greatly improves the flexibility of dis-tance protection. For these short line applications, an optional overreach-ing scheme communication logic, also improves, the resistive coverage.The optimum solution in some applications is to add the optional, direc-tional-comparison, earth-fault, overcurrent protection to the distance pro-tection scheme.

In long line applications, the margin to the load impedance (to avoid loadencroachment) is usually a major consideration. Quadrilateral characteris-tics with independent settings of the reach in reactive (to cover sufficientlength of a line) and resistive (to avoid load encroachment) directiongreatly diminish the conflict that is very characteristic for circular charac-teristics.

A wide setting range of the reach in a reactive direction, which one setindependently for each zone with good current sensitivity — down to10% of the rated current — is an important factor that improves the per-formances of the distance protection when used on long transmissionlines.

High-voltage power cables have two main characteristics that make them,from the distance protection perspective, different from overhead lines:

• They are relatively short, compared to overhead lines.

• The value of their zero-sequence reactance is very low, in many cases even lower than the positive-sequence reactance. This results in a negative value of the characteristic angle for the earth-return impedance.

Without approximation, the value of the earth-return compensation auto-matically follows the parameters of a power cable for positive and zerosequence reactance and resistance. This makes the impedance measuringfunction, as built into the REx 5xx line-protection terminals, suitable forthe protection of short, EHV power cables. The independent setting of thereach (in reactive and resistive direction, separately and independently foreach distance zone) improves these basic performances.

Zero-sequence, mutual impedance between different circuits of the multi-circuit parallel operating lines is a factor that particularly influences theperformance of distance protection during single-phase-to-earth fault con-ditions. Distance protection must also operate selectively for intersystemfaults and simultaneous faults to the greatest possible extent.

The separate and independent setting of the parameters that determine thevalue of earth-return compensation for different distance-protectionzones, enables the compensation of the influence of the zero-sequence,mutual impedance on the measurement of the impedance-measuring ele-ments for single-phase-to-earth faults.

Distance protection

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 321-XENPage 6 – 34

Separate, optional, phase selectors usage, with their reach setting indepen-dent of the reach of the zone measuring elements, greatly improve the per-formance of distance protection on the multicircuit parallel operatinglines. At the same time and to the lowest possible level, these selectorsreduce the influence of the heavy load current, that is present during afault, on the phase selection function within the terminals.

Additional phase-segregated, scheme communication logic (refer to theordering information for its availability within the different types of termi-nals) enables absolute phase selectivity of the distance protection ofmulti-circuit, parallel operating lines.

For the selective operation of distance protection on tied and multitermi-nal lines, flexibility in scheme communication logic associated with thedistance protection function is a great advantage. Scheme communicationlogic built into the REx 5xx line protection terminals enables the adapta-tion of any communication scheme to the existing system conditions. Thefree selection of overreaching and underreaching zones, with the freeselection of a conditional zone, and independent settings of the reach fordifferent zones, makes the REx 5xx line protection terminals extremelyflexible for such applications.

2 Measuring principleFault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, andchanges in the current. Apparent impedances are calculated and checkedwith the set limits. The calculation of the apparent impedances at ph-phfaults follows the equation (example for a phase L1 to phase L2 fault):

(Equation 4)

Variables and represent the current and voltage phasorsin corresponding phases.

The earth return compensation applies in a conventional manner forph-E faults (example for a phase L1 to earth fault):

(Equation 5)

Here is a phasor of the residual current in relay point. This results inthe same reach along the line for all types of faults.

The apparent impedance is considered as an impedance loop with resis-tance and reactance , as presented in figure 4.

The measuring elements receive information about currents and voltagesfrom the A/D converter. The check sums are calculated and compared,and the information is distributed into memory locations. For each of the

Zap

UL1 UL2–

IL1 IL2–-------------------------=

UL1 UL2 IL1, , IL2

KN

Zap

UL1

IL1 KN IN⋅+-----------------------------=

IN

R X


Version 2.2-00

six supervised fault loops, sampled values of voltage ( ), current ( ), andchanges in current between samples ( ) are brought from the input mem-ory and fed to a recursive Fourier filter.

Figure 4: Apparent impedance with resistance and reactance con-nected in series

The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values arerelated to the loop impedance according to the formula:

(Equation 6)

in complex notation, or:

(Equation 7)

(Equation 8)

with

(Equation 9)

where designates the real component, designates the imaginarycomponent of current and voltage and . designates the rated system fre-quency.

The algorithm calculates resistance from the equation for the real valueof the voltage and substitute it in the equation for the imaginary part. Theequation for the X reactance can then be solved. The final result is equalto:

(Equation 10)

(Equation 11)

U I∆I

R X

U

I

visf_040.vsd

U R IXω0------ ∆I

∆t-----⋅+⋅=

Re U( ) R Re I( )Xω0------ ∆Re I( )

∆t--------------------⋅+⋅=

Im U( ) R Im I( ) Xω0------ ∆Im I( )

∆t-------------------⋅+⋅=

ω0 2 π f0⋅ ⋅=

Re Imf0

R

RmIm U( ) ∆Re I( ) Re U( ) ∆Im I( )⋅–⋅∆Re I( ) Im I( ) ∆Im I( ) Re I( )⋅–⋅-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------=

Xm ω0 ∆tRe U( ) Im I( ) Im U( ) Re I( )⋅–⋅

∆Re I( ) Im I( ) ∆Im I( ) Re I( )⋅–⋅--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------⋅ ⋅=

Distance protection

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 321-XENPage 6 – 36

The calculated and values are updated each millisecond andcompared with the set zone reach. The adaptive tripping counter countsthe number of permissive tripping results. This effectively removes anyinfluence of errors introduced by the capacitive voltage transformers or byother causes. The algorithm is insensitive to changes in frequency, tran-sient dc components, and harmonics because a true replica of the pro-tected line is implemented in the algorithm.

The directional evaluations are simultaneously performed in forward andreverse directions, and in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage anda phase locked positive sequence memory voltage are used as a reference.This ensures unlimited directional sensitivity for faults close to the relaypoint. The directional indication for both forward and reverse faults pro-vides with all necessary information, the optional carrier blockingschemes, current reversal logic, and weak-infeed logic.

2.1 Measured impedance

2.1.1 Phase-to-earth measurement

The impedance measurement for the phase-to-earth faults is performed onthe loop basis by comparing the calculated resistance and reac-tance with the set values of the reach in the resistive and reactive direc-tion:

(Equation 12)

(Equation 13)

(Equation 14)

(Equation 15)

The factor represents the relative fault position ( ) withinthe reactive operating limits in forward and reverse direction.

Equations for resistive measurement represent in the impedance plane anon-directional operating limits in restive direction (see Figure 5:). Forthe faults on radial lines represents the first equation a straight line (leftside operating characteristic in loop domain), which passes the R axis atpoint and forms with it an angle of:

(Equation 16)

The second equation represents for the same conditions a straight line(right side operating limit) passing the R axis in set point and is parallel to the left side operating characteristic.

Rm Xm

Rm Xm

Rm R1PE13--- R0PE R1PE–( )⋅+ p⋅ R– FPE≥

Rm R1PE13--- R0PE R1PE–( )⋅+ p⋅ RFPE+≤

Xm X– 1PE13--- X0PE X1PE–( )⋅–≥

Xm X1PE13--- X0PE X1PE–( )⋅+≤

p 0 1– p 1≤ ≤

D RFPE– j0+=

αX1PE

13--- X0PE X1PE–( )⋅+

R1PE13--- R0PE R1PE–( )⋅+

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

atan=

B R= FPE j0+


Version 2.2-00

The third and the fourth equations represent in the impedance plane theoperating limits in reactive direction (see Figure 5:). For the faults onradial lines represents the third equation in impedance plane (loopdomain) a straight line, which is parallel with the R axis and passes thepoint

(Equation 17)

Similarly represents the fourth equation a straight line, which is also par-allel with the R axis and passes the point

(Equation 18)

Figure 5: General operating characteristic of impedance measuring elements

2.1.2 Phase-to-phase measurement

The impedance measurement for the phase-to-phase faults is performedon a phase basis by comparing the calculated resistance and reactance with the set values of the reach in the resistive and reactivedirection:

(Equation 19)

C 0 j X1PE13--- X0PE X1PE–( )⋅+–=

A 0 j X1PE13--- X0PE X1PE–( )⋅++=

15 oR

jX

Forward

Reverse

25 o

A

B

C

Dα

Visf_260.vsd

Rm Xm

Rm R1PP p⋅ 12--- RFPP⋅–≥

Distance protection

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 321-XENPage 6 – 38

(Equation 20)

(Equation 21)

(Equation 22)

Here represents factor the relative fault position ( ) within thereactive zone reach. Parameters , and are the reachsetting parameters for the ph-ph and three-phase faults.

The first two equations represent the left and right side operating bound-aries, see figure 5. For the faults on radial feeders represent these twoequations straight lines in impedance plain, which cross the R axis inpoints:

(Equation 23)

and

(Equation 24)

respectively.

Both operating limits are parallel and form with the R axis an angle of:

(Equation 25)

The third and the fourth equations represent the reactive operating bound-aries in forward and reverse direction, see Figure 5:. They cross in imped-ance plain the X axis in operating points:

and respectively. For the faults onradial feeders are this two boundaries straight lines, parallel with the Raxis.

2.1.3 Directional lines The results of impedance measurement are combined in “and” combina-tion with the directional measurement, to obtain the desired directionalityfor each distance protection zone separately, see Figure 5:.

The directional measurement is based on the use of a positive-sequencevoltage for the respective fault loop. For the L1-N element, the equationfor forward direction is:

(Equation 26)

For the L1-L2 element, the equation in forward direction is:

(Equation 27)

Rm R1PP p⋅ 12--- RFPP⋅+≤

Xm X– 1PP≥

Xm X1PP≤

p 1– p 1≤ ≤R1PP X1PP, RFPP

D12--- RFPP⋅– j0+=

B12--- RFPP⋅ j0+=

α X1PPR1PP----------------

atan=

A X1PP= C X1PP–=

15– °0 8, U1L1⋅ 0 2, U1L1M⋅+

IL1--------------------------------------------------------------- 115°<arg<

15– °0 8, U1L1L2⋅ 0 2, U1L1L2M⋅+

IL1L2------------------------------------------------------------------------- 115°<arg<


Version 2.2-00

The polarising voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence volt-age exceeds 4% of the Ur rated voltage. So the directional element can useit for all unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults.

For close-in three-phase faults, the memory voltage, based onthe same positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimi-nation.

The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequencevoltage is restored. After 100 ms, the following occurs:

• If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current (between 10 and 30% of the Ir terminal rated current), the condition seals in. If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures. If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring ele-ment in the reverse direction remains in operation.

• If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory resets until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.

3 Design

3.1 Full-scheme measurement

Up to three digital signal processors execute algorithms for up to five,full-scheme distance protection zones, depending on the type of theREx 5xx line protection terminal. Figure 6 presents an outline of the dif-ferent measuring loops for the basic five, impedance-measuring zoneswhen both, ph-E and ph-ph fault measuring loops are included into theterminal.

The first digital-signal processor (DSP) measures different fault loops fordifferent single-phase-to-earth faults and for different zones (not includedinto the REL 501 line-protection terminal). This way, it forms the resistiveand reactive part of a characteristic for single-phase-to-earth faults. Thesecond DSP performs the same task for the phase-to-phase fault loops.The third DSP separately performs the directional measurement for alltypes of faults in forward and reverse directions. The presence of the firstor the second DSP within the terminal depends on its type and the faulttype, for which the distance protection is ordered (see ordering particularsfor each REx 5xx terminal separately).

U1L1M

Distance protection

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 321-XENPage 6 – 40

Figure 6: Location of different measuring loops within the three digital signal processors

The parallel execution of measurements in up to three different DSPs per-mits the separate evaluation of each impedance measuring loop for eachzone within each millisecond. This gives the distance-protection functionthe same features as those known for the full-scheme design of conven-tional distance relays (REZ 1, RAZFE). So each distance protection zoneperforms like one independent distance protection relay with six measur-ing elements.

3.2 Distance protection zone one

The design of distance protection zone 1 is presented for all measuringloops: phase-to-earth as well as phase-to-phase. Different terminals REx5xx have built-in different measuring circuits, dependent on orderingdetails. In the following description consider only the phase-to-earthrelated signals, if only phase-to-earth measurement is included in termi-nal. Similarly consider only the phase-to-phase related signals, if onlyphase-to-phase measurement is included in terminal.

The phase-to-earth related signals are designated by LnE, where repre-sents n the corresponding phase number (L1E, L2E, and L3E). The phase-to-phase signals are designated by LnLm, where n and m represent thecorresponding phase numbers (L1L2, L2L3, and L3L1).

Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtainthe logical one signal for each separate measuring loop:

• Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described above

• Group functional input signal (ZM1--STCND), as presented in fig-ure 7

L1-N L2-N L3-N

L1-N L2-N L3-N

L1-N L2-N L3-N

L1-N L2-N L3-N

L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1

L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1

L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1

L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1

Zone 1

Zone 2

Zone 3

Zone 4

Zone 5

Forward

Reverse

visf_041.vsd


Version 2.2-00

The ZM1--STCND input signal represents a connection of six differentinteger values from other measuring functions within the terminal, whichare converted within the zone measuring function into correspondingboolean expressions for each condition separately (see section 5.4).

Figure 7: Conditioning by a group functional input signal ZM1--STCND

Composition of the phase starting signals for a case, when the zone oper-ates in a non-directional mode, is presented in figure 8.

ZM1L1L2

ZM1L2L3

ZM1L3L1

&

&

&

&

&

&

ZM1L1N

ZM1L2N

ZM1L3N

ZM1--STCND

STNDL1L2-cont.

STNDL2L3-cont.

STNDL3L1-cont.

STNDL1N-cont.

STNDL2N-cont.

STNDL3N-cont.

STZMPP-cont.

STNDPE-cont.

&ZM1--BLOCK

ZM1--VTSZ ZM1--STND

BLK-cont.

Visf_265.vsd

>1

>1

>1

>1

Distance protection

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 321-XENPage 6 – 42

Figure 8: Composition of starting signals at non-directional operating mode

Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when thezone operates in directional (forward or reverse) mode, see figure 9.

Figure 9: Composition of starting signals at directional operating mode

Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolicallypresented on Figure 10:.

STNDL1N-cont.

STNDL2N-cont.

STNDL3N-cont.

STNDL1L2-cont.

STNDL2L3-cont.

STNDL3L1-cont.

>1

>1

>1

>1

&

&

&

&

BLK-cont.

t

15 ms

t

15 ms

t

15 ms

t

15 msZM1--START

ZM1--STL3

ZM1--STL2

ZM1--STL1

visf_044.vsd

STNDL1N-cont.

DIRL1N&

&STNDL2N-cont.

DIRL2N

&STNDL3N-cont.

DIRL3N

&STNDL1L2-cont.

DIRL1L2

&STNDL2L3-cont.

DIRL2L3

&STNDL3L1-cont.

DIRL3L1

>1

>1

>1

>1

>1

>1

&

&

&

&

&

&

BLK-cont.

t

15 ms

t

15 ms

t

15 ms

t

15 ms

STZMPE-cont.

ZM1--STL1

ZM1--STL2

ZM1--STL3

ZM1--START

STZMPP-cont.

visf_045.vsd


Version 2.2-00

Figure 10: Tripping logic for the distance protection zone one

Phase related starting and tripping signals are available only in case, whenthe 1/3 phase tripping unit is ordered within the terminal. Please, refer toordering particulars for each REx 5xx terminal separately.

3.3 Remaining distance protection zones

Distance protection zones two and three have the same composition asdistance protection zone 1. All description for the distance protection zone1 is for this reason actual also for the distance protection zones two andthree. It is only necessary to replace the ZM1- designation with corre-sponding designations ZM2- for zone two and ZM3- for zone threerespectively.

Distance protection zones four (ZM4-) and five (ZM5-) are based on thesame principles as remaining distance protection zones. The only differ-ence is in the presentation of phase selective signals, belonging to thesetwo zones. The phase selective signals are not available with distance pro-tection zones four and five.

4 Setting InstructionsThe setting values of all parameters that belong to distance protectionwithin the REx 5xx line-protection terminals, must correspond to theparameters of the protected line, and to the selectivity plan for the net-work.

4.1 Reach setting recommendations

Before starting the setting activities for the distance protection function,check that the setting values of the secondary rated current within the ter-minal correspond to the current transformers used for the same purposesas a specific REx 5xx terminal.

Timer t1PP=On

STZMPP-cont.&

Timer t1PE=On

STZMPE-cont.&

t

t1PP

t

t1PE>1

ZM1-BLKTR t15ms

&

&

&

ZM1--STL1-cont.

ZM1--STL2-cont.

ZM1--STL3-cont.

ZM1--TRIP

ZM1--TRL1

ZM1--TRL2

ZM1--TRL3

Visf_046.vsd

&

Distance protection

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 321-XENPage 6 – 44

4.2 Conversion to secondary impedances

Convert the primary line impedances to the secondary sides of the currentand voltage instrument transformers. The following relations apply tothese purposes:

(Equation 28)

and

(Equation 29)

(Equation 30)

(Equation 31)

where:

4.3 Basic zone setting recommendations

An impedance seen by the distance protection might differ from the calcu-lated values due to:

• Errors introduced by current and voltage instrument transformers, particularly under transient conditions.

• Inaccuracies in the line zero-sequence impedance data, and their effect on the calculated value of the earth-return compensation fac-tor.

• The effect of infeed between the relay and the fault location, includ-ing the influence of different ratios of the various sources.

• The phase impedance of untransposed lines is not identical for all fault loops. The difference between the impedances for different phase-to-earth loops can be as large as 5-10% of the total line impedance.

• The effect of a load transfer between the terminals of the protected line. When the fault resistance is considerable, the effect must be rec-ognized.

• Zero-sequence mutual coupling from parallel lines.

Abbreviation: Is a set value of:

Iprim Rated primary current of the used current instrument transformers

Isec Rated secondary current of the used current instrument transformers

Uprim Rated primary voltage of the used voltage instrument transformers

Usec Rated secondary voltage of the used volt-age instrument transformers

Zprim Primary impedance

Zsec Calculated secondary impedance

CTratio

Iprim

Isec-----------=

VTratio

Uprim

Usec-------------=

Zsec

CTratio

VTratio------------------ Zprim⋅=

Zsec

Usec

Uprim-------------

Iprim

Isec----------- Zprim⋅ ⋅=

Z0 Z1⁄


Version 2.2-00

Usually, these errors require a limitation of the underreaching zone (nor-mally zone 1) to 85-90% of the protected line. For the same reason, it isnecessary to increase the reach of the overreaching zone (normallyzone 2) to at least 120% of the protected line — to ensure that the over-reaching zone always covers a complete line. The zone 2 reach can beeven higher, but in general it should never exceed 80% of the followingimpedances:

• The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the first zone reach of the shortest adjacent line.

• The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the imped-ance of the maximum number of transformers operating in parallel on the bus at the remote end of the protected line.

The back-up overreaching zone (normally zone 3) must never exceed90% of the shortest zone 2 reach of any of the lines connected to theremote end bus. It must be at least 2 times the zone 1 reach.

The reverse zone is applicable for purposes of scheme communicationlogic, current reversal logic, weak-end-infeed logic, and so on. The sameapplies to the back-up protection of the busbar or power transformers. It isnecessary to secure, that it always covers the overreaching zone, used atthe remote line terminal for the telecommunication purposes.

In the case of a long line followed by a short line, or by a large bank oflow impedance transformers, the mandatory 120% setting might over-reach zone 1 of the adjacent line, or reach through the transformer bank atthe other line end. In such cases, one must increase the zone 2 time delayand thus ensure the selectivity. The zone 2 reach must not be reducedbelow 120% of the protected line section. It must be covered under allconditions.

In networks with lines tied at an intermediate location, consider anincrease in the measured impedance due to the fault current fed into thesystem at the teed point.

If a fault occurs at point F (see Figure 11:), the relay at point A senses theimpedance:

(Equation 32)

and are fault currents from stations A and B respectively.

Abbreviation: is the impedance of:

First line section

Second line section

Second line section up to the fault location

Zm ZAC

IA IB+

IA

--------------- ZCF⋅+ ZAC 1IB

IA

----+

ZCF⋅+= =

IA IB

ZAC

ZCD

ZCF

Distance protection

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 321-XENPage 6 – 46

Assume that the reach of zone 1 of the relay in C covers 85% of , andthe reach of zone 2 of the relay in A covers 80% of ( + 85% of ).

The impedance from station A up to the reach limit of the first zone at Ccorresponds to:

(Equation 33)

The reach of zone 2 can not be longer than 80% of the apparent imped-ance at the limit of the first zone at C, which means that:

(Equation 34)

Figure 11: Network with line tied at an intermediate location

Also consider the apparent increase of measured impedance due to thepower fed into the system for the zone 3 setting.

When calculating the setting, consider the lowest value of that canoccur when only one group of setting parameters is used for all operatingconditions.

The distance protection function performs the best in the power systemwith its setting values optimized to specific system conditions. So use dif-ferent pre-set and pre-test groups of setting parameters for differentexpected system operating conditions.

REx 5xx terminals have a built-in memory capacity for four groups of set-ting parameters, all completely independent of one another. It is possibleto set and pre-test all of them during the commissioning. Their activationis possible:

• Locally — with the local HMI or a PC

• Remotely — with the SMS or/and SCS (depending on whether the optional remote communication is built into the terminal or not).

ZCD

ZAC ZCD

ZAC 0 85 1IB

IA

----+

ZCD⋅ ⋅,+

Z2 0 8 ZAC 0 85 1IB

IA

----+

ZCD⋅ ⋅,+⋅,=

ZCF

A F DC

B

IA

IB

IA+IB

ZAC ZCD

IB IA⁄


Version 2.2-00

4.4 Earth return compensation

A simplified measuring loop at the single-phase-to-earth faults consists ofthree impedances, as shown in Figure 12:.

• The positive sequence impedance of the phase conductor

• fault resistance

• earth-return impedance

The earth return impedance is equal to:

(Equation 35)

Where represents the line zero-sequence impedance.

Figure 12: Equivalent circuits for measurement at single-phase-to-earth faults

The complete measuring impedance, according to Figure 12:b, is equal to:

(Equation 36)

The reach of distance protection zone is related to the positivesequence line impedance. So a earth-return, compensation factor hasbeen introduced into the measuring algorithm. Its value is equal to:

(Equation 37)

(Equation 38)

The impedance measuring algorithm within the REL 5xx terminals calcu-lates automatically the complex value of the earth-return compensationfactor on the basis of the set values for the:

• Positive sequence reactance of protected line section

• Positive sequence resistance of protected line section

• Zero-sequence reactance of protected line section

• Zero-sequence resistance of protected line section

Z1RfZN

ZN13--- Z0 Z1–( )⋅=

Z0

Z1

U

I

F

L1L2L3

ZNU Rf

a) b)

I

Irsd

Zloop Z1 ZN Rf+ +13--- 2 Z1⋅ Z0+( ) Rf+⋅= =

Z1KN

Zloop Z1 1 KN+( ) RF+⋅13--- 2Z1 Z0+( ) Rf ⇒+⋅= =

KN⇒ZN

Z1

------ 13---

Z0 Z1–

Z1

------------------⋅= =

KN

X1PE

R1PE

X0PE

R0PE

Distance protection

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 321-XENPage 6 – 48

4.5 Fault resistance The performance of distance protection for single-phase-to-earth faults isvery important, because normally more than 70% of the faults on trans-mission lines are single-phase-to-earth faults.

At these faults, the fault resistance is composed of three parts: arc resis-tance, resistance of a tower construction, and tower-footing resistance.

The arc resistance can be calculated according to Warrington’s formula:

(Equation 39)

Where:

is the actual fault current in A

represents the length of the arc (in meters). This equation applies forthe distance protection zone 1. Consider approximately three-timesarc foot spacing for the zone 2 with time delay of 0.7 seconds andwind speed of approximately 50 km/h.

Calculate or measure the tower-footing resistance for the specific case,because the variation of this parameter is very large.

The distance protection cannot detect very high-resistive, earth faults,because the load impedance and load transfer limit its reach. For faultswith resistance higher than those that can be detected by the impedancemeasurement, an optional earth-fault overcurrent protection can beincluded in the REx 5xx terminals.

4.6 Zero-sequence mutual coupling on multicircuit lines

When calculating the settings for distance-protection ph-E fault measur-ing elements, one must consider zero-sequence mutual coupling betweenthe circuits of the multicircuit lines. The positive and the negative-sequence mutual coupling generally have no significant influence on theoperation of the impedance-measuring protection schemes.

The distance protection within the REx 5xx terminals can compensate forthe influence of a zero-sequence mutual coupling on the measurement atsingle-phase-to-earth faults in the following ways, by using:

• The possibility of different values that influence the earth-return compensation for different distance zones within the same group of setting parameters.

• Different groups of setting parameters for different operating condi-tions of a protected multicircuit line.

Most multicircuit lines have two parallel operating circuits, as shown inFigure 13:. The application guide mentioned below recommends in moredetail the setting practice for this particular type of line. The basic princi-ples also apply to other multicircuit lines. The Application Guide on Pro-tection of Complex Transmission Network Configurations describes theproblems in more detail. The CIGRE Working Group 04 of Study Com-mittee 34 (Protection), published the guide in November 1991.

Rarc28707 l⋅

I1,4----------------------=

Il


Version 2.2-00

in Figure 13: represents the zero-sequence, mutual-couplingimpedance between circuits of a double-circuit, parallel operating line.

Figure 13: Double-circuit parallel operating line

4.6.1 The parallel circuit disconnected and earthed at both ends

Figure 14: represents an equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit forthe double-circuit parallel operating line. Input terminals A and B arerelated to the input terminals of each circuit close to the busbar A in Fig-ure 13:. Terminal C is related to the F fault point, moved towards the Bbusbar.

Figure 14: Equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit of the double-cir-cuit, parallel, operating line with a single phase-to-earth fault at the remote busbar

The distance protection overreaches for single-phase-to-earth faults on theprotected line when the parallel circuit is disconnected and earthed onboth ends. The equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit gets the con-figuration as in Figure 15:.

Zm0

ZS

BA

REL 5xx

IA

IBZm0

F

Z0-Zm0A

Z0-Zm0B

Zm0C

Distance protection

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 321-XENPage 6 – 50

Figure 15: Equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for the double-circuit line that operates with one circuit disconnected and earthed at both ends

Here the equivalent zero-sequence impedance is equal to:

(Equation 40)

This influences the value of the total loop impedance as measured by thedistance-protection function, thus causing it to overreach. It is necessaryto compensate for this overreaching by setting the compensated zero-sequence impedance for the particular underreaching zone.

All expressions below are proposed for practical use. They assume thevalue of zero-sequence, mutual resistance equal to zero. They con-sider only the zero-sequence, mutual reactance.

Calculate the equivalent and zero-sequence parameters accord-ing to the equations below for each particular line section and set them forthe particular underreaching zone of distance protection function.

(Equation 41)

(Equation 42)

4.6.2 The parallel circuit out of service and not earthed

When the parallel circuit is out of service and not earthed, it has the equiv-alent zero-sequence impedance circuit for faults at the remote busbar asshown in Figure 16:. The line zero-sequence mutual impedance does notinfluence the measurement of the distance protection in a faulty circuit.This means that the reach of the underreaching distance-protection zone isreduced if, due to operating conditions, the equivalent zero-sequenceimpedance is set according to the conditions when the parallel system isout of operation, and earthed at both ends.

Z0-Zm0

Z0-Zm0B

Zm0C

I0

AI0

Z0EZ0

2Zm0

2–

Z0

----------------------=

Rm0

Xm0

X0E R0E

R0E R0 1Xm0

2

R02 X0

2+------------------------+

⋅=

X0E X0 1Xm0

2

R02 X0

2+------------------------–

⋅=


Version 2.2-00

Figure 16: Equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for a double-cir-cuit line with one circuit disconnected and not earthed

The reduction of the reach is equal to:

(Equation 43)

This means that the reach is reduced in reactive and resistive directions.The real and imaginary components of the constant are equal to:

(Equation 44)

(Equation 45)

The real component of the factor is equal to:

(Equation 46)

The imaginary component of the factor is equal to:

(Equation 47)

Ensure that the underreaching zones from both line ends will overlap asufficient amount (at least 10%) in the middle of the protected circuit.

4.6.3 Parallel circuit in service

The zero-sequence mutual coupling can reduce the reach of distance pro-tection on the protected circuit when the parallel circuit is in normal oper-ation. The reduction of the reach is most pronounced with no infeed in theline terminal closest to the fault. This reach reduction is normally less than15%. But when the reach is reduced at one line end, it is proportionallyincreased at the opposite line end. So this 15% reach reduction does notsignificantly affect the operation of a permissive underreach scheme.

Z0-Zm0

Z0-Zm0B

Zm0C

I0

AI0

KU

13--- 2 Z1 Z0E+⋅( ) Rf+⋅

13--- 2 Z1 Z0+⋅( ) Rf+⋅

------------------------------------------------------ 1Zm0

2

Z0 2 Z1 Z0 3Rf+ +⋅( )⋅----------------------------------------------------------–= =

A

Re A( ) R0 2 R1 R0 3 Rf⋅+ +⋅( ) X0 2 X1 X0+⋅( )⋅–⋅=

Im A( ) X0 2 R1 R0 3 Rf⋅+ +⋅( ) R0 2 X1 X0+⋅( )⋅+⋅=

KU

Re KU( ) 1Re A( ) Xm0

2⋅

Re A( )[ ]2Im A( )[ ]2

+------------------------------------------------------+=

KU

Im KU( )Im A( ) Xm0

2⋅

Re A( )[ ]2Im A( )[ ]2

+------------------------------------------------------=

Distance protection

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 321-XENPage 6 – 52

4.6.4 Setting of the overreaching zones

Overreaching zones (in general, zones 2 and 3) must overreach the pro-tected circuit in all cases. The greatest reduction of a reach occurs in caseswhen both parallel circuits are in service with a single-phase-to-earth faultlocated at the end of a protected line. The equivalent zero-sequenceimpedance circuit for this case is equal to the one in Figure 14:.

The components of the zero-sequence impedance for the overreachingzones must be equal to at least:

(Equation 48)

(Equation 49)

Check the reduction of a reach for the overreaching zones due to the effectof the zero-sequence mutual coupling. The reach is reduced for a factor:

If the real and imaginary components of the constant are equal to:

(Equation 50)

(Equation 51)

then the real and the imaginary value of the reach reduction factor for theoverreaching zones are equal to:

(Equation 52)

(Equation 53)

4.6.5 Use of different setting groups on double circuit lines

Each of the REx 5xx line-protection terminals has a built-in option for set-ting and activating four different groups of setting parameters accordingto the system conditions. Different setting groups can also suit differentoperating conditions of a multicircuit, parallel, operating line.

The advantage of such an approach is a better coverage of the line duringnormal and abnormal operating conditions.

4.6.6 The parallel circuit out of operation with both ends earthed

Apply the same measures as in the case with a single set of setting param-eters. This means that an underreaching zone must not overreach the endof a protected circuit for the single-phase-to-earth faults. Set the values ofthe corresponding zone (zero-sequence resistance and reactance) equal to:

R0E R0 Rm0+=

X0E X0 Xm0+=

K0 1Zm0

2 Z1 Z0 Zm0 3Rf+ + +⋅----------------------------------------------------------–=

B

Re B( ) 2 R1 R0 Rm0 3 Rf⋅+ + +⋅=

Im B( ) 2 X1 X0 Xm0+ +⋅=

Re K0( ) 1Xm0 Im B( )⋅

Re B( )[ ]2Im B( )[ ]2

+------------------------------------------------------–=

Im K0( )X– m0 Re B( )⋅

Re B( )[ ]2Im B( )[ ]2

+------------------------------------------------------=


Version 2.2-00

(Equation 54)

(Equation 55)

4.6.7 Double-circuit parallel line in normal operation

Normally, the underreaching zone of distance protection underreaches forthe single-phase-to-earth faults located closer to the opposite end of thecircuit. To overcome this underreaching and trip without a sequential trip-ping for the faults along the greatest possible percentage of a line, increasethe value of the equivalent zero-sequence impedance to the one also rec-ommended for the overreaching zones. This means that the values of theequivalent zero-sequence resistance and reactance are equal to:

(Equation 56)

(Equation 57)

4.6.7.1 Overreaching dis-tance protection zones

The same rules apply to the overreaching zones as in cases with a singleset of setting parameters. Ensure that they will always overreach. Soincrease the setting of the zero-sequence resistance and reactance to thevalues that correspond to at least:

(Equation 58)

(Equation 59)

In many cases, it is sufficient if the influence of the zero-sequence mutualimpedance is compensated only in the first overreaching zone (generally,zone 2). The setting of the back-up overreaching zones (zone 3 andhigher) is usually so high that no such compensation is necessary.

Instructions for overreaching zones are applicable for normal networkconfigurations. Always reconsider their settings if any special lines orother elements (cables, power transformers, etc.) follow the double-cir-cuit, parallel, operating line.

Pay special attention to the distance protection of double-circuit, parallel,operating multiterminal or tapped lines.

4.7 Setting of the reach in resistive direction

Set the resistive reach independently for each zone, and separately forphase-to-phase, and phase-to-earth loop measurement.

Set separately the expected fault resistance for phase-to-phase faults and for phase-to-earth faults for each zone. Set all

remaining reach setting parameters independently of each other for eachdistance zone.

R0E R0 1Xm0

2

R02 X0

2+-------------------+

⋅=

X0E X0 1Xm0

2

R02 X0

2+-------------------–

⋅=

R0E R0 Rm0+=

X0E X0 Xm0+=

R0E R0 Rm0+=

X0E X0 Xm0+=

RFPP( ) RFPE( )

Distance protection

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 321-XENPage 6 – 54

The final reach in resistive direction for phase-to-earth fault loop mea-surement automatically follows the values of the line-positive and zero-sequence resistance, and at the end of the protected zone is equal to:

(Equation 60)

The blinder in the resistive direction forms an angle with the R-axis equalto:

(Equation 61)

Setting of the resistive reach for the underreaching zone 1 should followthe condition:

(Equation 62)

The fault resistance for phase-to-phase faults is normally quite low, com-pared to the fault resistance for phase-to-earth faults. Limit the setting ofthe zone 1 reach in resistive direction for phase-to-phase loop measure-ment to:

(Equation 63)

4.7.1 Load impedance limitation

Check the maximum permissible resistive reach for any zone to ensurethat there is a sufficient setting margin between the relay boundary and theminimum load impedance.

The minimum load impedance [Ω/phase] is calculated as:

(Equation 64)

where:

is the minimum phase-to-phase voltage in kV

is the maximum apparent power in MVA

The load impedance [Ω/phase] is a function of the minimum operationvoltage and the maximum load current:

(Equation 65)

Minimum voltage and maximum current are related to thesame operating conditions. Minimum load impedance occurs normallyunder emergency conditions.

Note: Because the safety margin is required to avoid load encroachmentunder three-phase conditions and to guarantee correct healthy phase relayoperation under combined heavy three-phase load and earth faults, con-sider both: phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth fault operating characteris-tics.

R13--- 2 R1Zn R0Zn+⋅( ) RFNZn+=

ϕloop arc2 X1 X0+⋅2 R1 R0+⋅----------------------------tan=

RFPE 4,5 X1PE⋅≤

RFZ1 3 X1Z1⋅≤

ZloadminU2

S------=

U

S

Zload

Umin

3 I⋅ max

----------------------=

Umin( ) Imax( )


Version 2.2-00

To avoid load encroachment for the phase-to-earth measuring elements,the set resistive reach of any distance protection zone must be less than80% of the minimum load impedance.

(Equation 66)

This equation is applicable only when the loop characteristic angle for thesingle-phase-to-earth faults is more than three times as large as the maxi-mum expected load-impedance angle. More accurate calculations are nec-essary according to the equation below:

(Equation 67)

where ϑ is a maximum load-impedance angle, related to the minimumload impedance conditions.

To avoid load encroachment for the phase-to-phase measuring elements,the set resistive reach of any distance protection zone must be less than160% of the minimum load impedance.

(Equation 68)

This equation is applicable only when the loop characteristic angle for thephase-to-phase faults is more than three times as large as the maximumexpected load-impedance angle. More accurate calculations are necessaryaccording to the equation below:

(Equation 69)

All this is applicable for all measuring zones when no power swingdetection element is in the protection scheme. Use an additional safetymargin in cases when a power-swing detection element is in the protec-tion scheme; see document “Power swing detection”.

4.8 Setting of minimum operating current

Minimum operating fault current IMinOp defines the sensitivity of thedistance protection as built in REx 5xx terminals. Default setting value,which is 20% of basic terminal current, proved in practice as the optimumvalue for the most of applications.

Sometimes it is necessary to increase the sensitivity by reducing the mini-mum operating current down to 10% of terminal basic current. This hap-pens especially in cases, when the terminal serves as a remote back-upprotection on series of very long transmission lines.

The minimum operating fault current is automatically reduced to 75% ofits set value, if the distance protection zone has been set for the operationin reverse direction.

4.9 Setting of timers for the distance protection zones

The required time delays for different distance-protection zones are inde-pendent of each other. Distance protection zone 1 can also have a timedelay, if so required for selectivity reasons. One can set the time delays for

RFPE 0 8, Zloadmin⋅≤

RFPE 0 8 Zloadmin⋅, ϑcos2 R1PE R0PE+⋅2 X1PE X0PE+⋅----------------------------------------------- ϑsin⋅–⋅≤

RFPP 1 6, Zloadmin⋅≤

RFPP 1 6, Zloadmin ϑcosR1PPX1PP---------------- ϑsin⋅–⋅ ⋅≤

Distance protection

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 321-XENPage 6 – 56

all zones (basic and optional) in a range of 0 to 60 seconds. The trippingfunction of each particular zone can be inhibited by setting the corre-sponding Operation parameter to Off. Different time delays are possiblefor the ph-E (tnPE, n = 1...5) and for the ph-ph (tnPP, n = 1...5) measuringloops in each distance protection zone separately, to further increase thetotal flexibility of a distance protection.

5 Basic configurationEach distance protection zone comprises different functional inputs,which influence its operation in different ways.

5.1 ZMn--BLOCK functional input

Logical one on ZMn--BLOCK functional input blocks completely theoperation of the distance protection zone. The input should be connectedto the functional outputs of those protection and logic functions, which aresupposed to block instantaneously and completely the operation of thezone. Functional output PSD--START of the power swing detection func-tion is a typical example.

5.2 ZMn--VTSZ functional input

The operation of the distance protection function must be blocked in casesof different faults within the secondary voltage measuring circuits. TheZMn-VTSZ functional input should be configured to the functional outputFUSE-VTSZ of the fuse-failure supervision function or to the binaryinputs of a terminal, connected to the output contacts of external fuse-fail-ure relays and MCBs.

5.3 ZMn--BLKTR functional input

The ZMn--BLKTR functional input blocks only the tripping function ofeach particular distance protection zone, but it does not block its measure-ment and starting output signals. It is possible to use it in different casestogether with eternal logic circuits for different application purposes.

5.4 ZMn--STCND functional input

The ZMn--STCND functional input brings into each distance protectionzone information on external measuring conditions, which influence thezone operation. It is necessary to configure it to one of the following func-tional outputs within the terminal:

• PHS--STCNDI functional output of the phase selection function. The operation of the distance protection zone depends in this case only on the fault current conditions, as used for the operation of the phase selection elements (see the document “Phase selection for dis-tance protection”).

• PHS--STCNDZ functional output of the phase selection function. The operation of the distance protection depends in this case on the operation of different phase selection elements for a particular fault. The fault must be seen by the phase selection impedance measuring elements, to release the operation of the distance protection zone (see document “Phase selection for distance protection”).


Version 2.2-00

• GFC--STCND functional output of the general fault criteria (GFC). The operation of a particular distance protection zone is released only, if the fault has been detected also within the operating charac-teristic of a GFC element (see document “General fault criterion”).

• FIXD-INTONE functional integer output signal. The operation of a particular distance protection function does not depend in this case on any external current or impedance measuring condition. All mea-suring loops are permitted to operate only on the basis of the mea-sured impedance for a particular fault conditions.

5.5 ZMn--START functional output

The ZMn--START functional output becomes logical one at any detectionof the measured impedance within a particular distance protection zone. Itis not time delayed. It is possible to configure it as an input signal to thescheme communication logic (as a carrier send signal) or for a signallingpurposes.

Phase selective starting signals (ZMn--STL1, ZMn--STL2, and ZMn--STL3) are available in units with built-in single pole tripping function.They have the same functionality as the general starting signal ZMn--START with the addition, that they always relate to a specific faultyphase.

5.6 ZMn--TRIP functional output

The ZMn--TRIP functional output represents a time delayed operation ofa particular distance protection zone. It is generally used for tripping pur-poses. It is also possible to configure the trip output signals of time-delayed distance protection zones to the inhibit conditions of the autore-closing function, when used within the terminal.

Phase selective tripping signals (ZMn--TRL1, ZMn--TRL2, and ZMn--TRL3) are available in units with built-in single pole tripping function.They have the same functionality as the general tripping signal ZMn--TRIP with the addition, that they always relate to a specific faulty phase.

5.7 ZMn--STND functional output

Informs about the non-directional start of the distance protection zone(see Figure 2:). It is possible, between others, to configure it to the func-tional input SOTF-NDACC functional input of the switch-onto-faultfunction.

6 TestingOne can disable each distance protection zone during the operational test-ing mode under these conditions:

• When the function is selected to be blocked under the testing condi-tions. Select the zone, which should be blocked under the submenu:

TestTestMode

BlockFunctions

Distance protection

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 321-XENPage 6 – 58

• Set the terminal into operational testing mode by setting the value of parameter Operation = On. Select the operating mode under the sub-menu:

TestTestMode

Operation

• The terminal is switched to testing mode when the logical 1 is speci-fied for the TEST-INPUT functional input.

Note: The function is blocked if the corresponding setting under theBlockFunctions submenu remains on, and the TEST-INPUT signalremains active.

Check the operating values of the impedance-measuring elements andcorresponding functions during the commissioning and during regularmaintenance tests. ABB Network Partner recommends, although it doesnot absolutely request, the use of a RTS 21 (FREJA) testing equipment.

The test equipment should provide an independent three-phase supply ofvoltages and currents to the tested terminal. Furthermore, it must be possi-ble to separately change the values of voltages, currents, and phase anglesamong the measuring quantities — independent of each other for eachphase. The test voltages and currents must have a common source, with avery small content of higher harmonics. A separate phase-angle meter isnecessary if the test equipment cannot indicate the phase angles betweenthe measured quantities.

The corresponding ZMn--START binary signals (n depends on number ofbuilt-in distance protection zones and can changes from 1 to 5 - see orderingparticulars for each terminal separately), which detect the operation of aparticular distance-measuring zone, are available on the HMI under themenu:

Service ReportLogical Signals

Zone n (n = 1,2,..., 5)

One can configure these signals to the corresponding binary outputs (relaycontacts) by using the CAP 531 configuration tool. So it is possible to con-nect the ZMn--START signals to the corresponding inputs of testing equip-ment for automatic testing procedures, where available.

Connect the testing equipment according to the valid terminal diagram ofthe particular REx 5xx terminal. Pay special attention to the correct con-nection of the input and output current terminals and to the connection ofthe residual current.

The terminal diagram described under Diagrams in this User's Guide is ageneral one for the terminal. The same diagram is not necessarily applica-ble for each delivery, especially regarding the configuration of all binaryinputs and outputs. Check before testing that the available terminal dia-


Version 2.2-00

gram really corresponds to the terminal. The best way to do this is tocheck the serial number of the terminal on its front plate, and compare itwith the valid serial number on the terminal diagram.

Measure operating characteristics during constant current conditions. Keepthe measured current as close as possible to its rated value or lower. Butensure that it is higher than 30% of the rated current.

Ensure that the maximum continuous current of a terminal does not exceedfour times its rated value, if the measurement of the operating characteris-tics runs under constant voltage conditions.

Keep the resistance (R) of the measured impedance constant, when mea-suring the operating values in reactive (X) direction, and vice versa. Forthe same reason, keep the absolute value of impedance (Z) constant, andchange the phase angle when measuring the directional parts of the operat-ing characteristics.

Measure two operating points on each line of the operating characteristicfor the zone 1 measuring element for one single-phase -to-earth and for onephase-to-phase fault. It is sufficient to measure one operating point atR1PP, X1PP (ph-ph measurement) and R1PE, X1PE (ph-E measurement)and one operating point at X=0 for all remaining faults in zone 1.

Measurement of one operating point in each zone at zone reach and linecharacteristic angle is sufficient for all remaining zones. Check two operat-ing points:

• One for a phase-to-earth fault (when the Ph-E measurement included in terminal)

• One for a phase-to-phase-fault (when the Ph-Ph measurement included in terminal)

Measure only the characteristic in the direction that corresponds to the cur-rent direction set for future use.

6.1 Testing with type RTS 21 (FREJA) testing equipment

The testing procedure for the manual testing of the operating characteris-tics of different impedance measuring zones and different faults is:

1.1 Configure the zone starting signals (ZMn--START, where n = 1 to 5,depending on the number of optional zones in the terminal) to theselected binary outputs.

1.2 Set up FREJA for three-phase impedance configuration and 3PZ RXdisplay.

1.3 Connect the corresponding ZMn--START signal to the FREJAbinary input No. 1.

Distance protection

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 321-XENPage 6 – 60

1.4 Set FREJA to these parameters in the 3PZ display:

1.5 Set Z fault impedance and ZΦ impedance angle for the zone undertest at +10% of the zone setting for one of the suggested testingpoints.

1.6 Supply the terminal with healthy conditions (press the W key) for atleast two seconds.

1.7 Apply fault conditions (press the S key).

1.8 Slowly decrease the measured Z impedance until the tested zoneoperates. Check that the correct signal (ZMn--START) appears onthe HMI. Compare the result of the measurement with the settingvalues.

1.9 Repeat steps 1.5 to 1.8 for other measuring points of the sameimpedance measuring zone.

1.10 Repeat steps 1.1 to 1.9 for other measuring zones in the terminal (3or 5).

6.2 Measurement of the operating time of distance protection zones

Prepare the same configuration of FREJA test equipment and of the testedterminal, as for the measurement of the distance protection characteristics.The ZMn--TRIP signals must be connected to the corresponding binaryinputs of the testing equipment instead of the measuring signals ZMn--START zone.

Set the simulated fault impedance within 80% of the zone reach, whenmeasuring the operating time or time delay of the different impedancemeasuring zones.

Supply the terminal with healthy conditions (press the W key) for at leasttwo seconds. Apply the fault by pressing the S key. Observe the operatingtime for a particular distance zone on a FREJA monitor.

Table 1:

Parameter Condition

I Greater than 30% Ir

DIgoal 1XXXX XXXXX

Healthy conditions U = 63,5 V, I = 0 A, ZΦ = 0o

R, X scale and position of Origin

Suitable for the relay settings

Impedance Z Test point

Impedance angle ZΦ Test angle

Digital outputs Not used


Version 2.2-00

6.3 Directional test of the distance measuring function

Always perform a directional test of the distance protection functionwithin the REx 5xx line-protection terminal before it is taken into service.Perform the directional test under the menu:

Service ReportFunction

ImpedanceGeneral

Imp Direction

To perform the directional test, the protected line must be in service andcarry at least so much load current that the phase current in the terminalwill be higher than the minimum operating current as set for the distanceprotection function.

When the directional test is activated, the local HMI displays if the currentdirection in each phase-to-phase measuring loop is forward or reverse, rel-ative to the direction of zone 1. The display indicates:

• L1-L2 = Forward• L2-L3 = Forward• L3-L1 = Forward

if the current flow in the three measuring loops is in forward direction, and

• L1-L2 = Reverse• L2-L3 = Reverse• L3-L1 = Reverse

if the current flow in the three measuring loops is in reverse direction.

If one of the loops is in the opposite direction than the other two, this indi-cates that the phase sequence of the incoming voltage or current circuits isincorrect.

To perform the directional test, the load impedance must have an anglethat is in the range of -15° and +115°, or +165° and 295°, because theseare the sectors supervised by the directional elements.

The actual values of the current and voltage phasors, as seen by the dis-tance protection function, are available when the optional fault locationfunction is included in the REx 5xx terminal. Phasors are available on theHMI under the menu:

Service ReportPhasors

Primary (Secondary)

They can also be used for the directional test.

Distance protection

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 321-XENPage 6 – 62

The current values of measured impedance are available under the menu:

Service ReportFunction

ImpedanceGeneral

Impedance


Version 2.2-00

7 Appendix

7.1 Function blocks Distance protection zones one, two and three

Additional distance protection zones four and five

visf_047.vsd

ZM1--BLOCK

ZM1--BLKTR

ZM1--VTSZ

ZM1--TRIP

ZM1--TRL1*

ZM1--TRL2*

DISTANCE PROTECTION ZONE 1

ZM1--STCND

ZM1--TRL3*

ZM1--START

ZM1--STL1*

ZM1--STL2*

ZM1--STL3*

ZM1--STND

*) AVAILABLE ONLY WITH SINGLE POLETRIPPING FUNCTION

ZM2--BLOCK

ZM2--BLKTR

ZM2--VTSZ

ZM2--TRIP

ZM2--TRL1*

ZM2--TRL2*


ZM2--STCND

ZM2--TRL3*

ZM2--START

ZM2--STL1*

ZM2--STL2*

ZM2--STL3*

ZM2--STND


ZM3--BLOCK

ZM3--BLKTR

ZM3--VTSZ

ZM3--TRIP

ZM3--TRL1*

ZM3--TRL2*


ZM3--STCND

ZM3--TRL3*

ZM3--START

ZM3--STL1*

ZM3--STL2*

ZM3--STL3*

ZM3--STND


ZM4--BLOCK

ZM4--BLKTR

ZM4--VTSZ

ZM4--TRIP


ZM4--STCND

ZM4--START

ZM4--STND

ZM5--BLOCK

ZM5--BLKTR

ZM5--VTSZ

ZM5--TRIP


ZM5--STCND

ZM5--START

ZM5--STND

Distance protection

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 321-XENPage 6 – 64

7.2 Signal lists

7.2.1 Distance protection zone 1


Block: Signal: Type Description:

ZM1-- TRIP OUT Trip by distance protection zone 1

ZM1-- TRL1 OUT Trip by distance protection zone 1 in phase L1 (available only with single pole tripping unit)



ZM1-- START OUT Start of directional distance protection zone 1

ZM1-- STL1 OUT Start of directional distance protection zone 1 in phase L1 (available only with single pole tripping unit)



ZM1-- STND OUT Start of non-directional distance protection zone 1

ZM1-- BLOCK IN Blocks the operation of distance protection zone 1

ZM1-- BLKTR IN Blcoks tripping ouptuts of distance protection zone 1

ZM1-- VTSZ IN Blocks the operation of distance protection zone 1 - connected to fuse failure signal FUSE-VTSZ

ZM1-- STCND IN External starting condition for the operation of the distance protection zone 1











Version 2.2-00






























Distance protection

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 321-XENPage 6 – 66


7.3 Setting table

7.3.1 General setting parameters

Setting parameters for the resistive and the reactive reach are presentedfor the terminals with rated current Ir = 1A. All values should be dividedby 5 for the terminals with rated current Ir = 5A.


General zone setting parameters:

Settings for the phase-to-phase measurement:











Parameter: Range: Unit: Default: Parameter description:

IMinOp 10 - 30 % of I1b 20 Minimum operating current for forward directed distance pro-tection zones


Operation Off, NoneDir, Forward, Reverse

Off Operating mode and directionality of distance protection zone 1


Operation PP

Off, On Off Operating mode of distance protection zone 1 for Ph-Ph faults


Version 2.2-00

Settings for the phase-to-earth measurement:




X1PP 0.01 - 400.00 ohm/ph 10.00 Positive sequence reactive reach of distance protection zone 1 for Ph-Ph faults

R1PP 0.01 - 400.00 ohm/ph 10.00 Positive sequence line resistance included in distance protec-tion zone 1 for Ph-Ph faults

RFPP 0.01 - 400.00 ohm/loop 10.00 Resistive reach of distance protection zone 1 for Ph-Ph faults

Timer t1PP Off, On On Operating mode of time delayed trip for the distance protec-tion zone 1 for Ph-Ph faults

t1PP 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.000 Time delayed trip operation of the distance protection zone 1 for Ph-Ph faults



Operation PE

Off, On Off Operating mode of distance protection zone 1 for Ph-E faults

X1PE 0.01 - 400.00 ohm/ph 10.00 Positive sequence reactive reach of distance protection zone 1 for Ph-E faults

R1PE 0.01 - 400.00 ohm/ph 10.00 Positive sequence line resistance included in distance protec-tion zone 1 for Ph-E faults

X0PE 0.01 - 1200.00 ohm/ph 10.00 Zero sequence line reactance included in distance protection zone 1 for Ph-E faults

R0PE 0.01 - 1200.00 ohm/ph 10.00 Zero sequence line resistance included in distance protection zone 1 for Ph-E faults

RFPE 0.01 - 400.00 ohm/loop 10.00 Resistive reach of distance protection zone 1 for Ph-E faults

Timer t1PE Off, On On Operating mode of time delayed trip for the distance protec-tion zone 1 for Ph-E faults

t1PE 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.000 Time delayed trip operation of the distance protection zone 1 for Ph-E faults





Operation PP



Distance protection

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 321-XENPage 6 – 68











Operation PE













Operation PP





Version 2.2-00










Operation PE













Operation PP





Distance protection

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 321-XENPage 6 – 70









Operation PE













Operation PP







Version 2.2-00





Operation PE









Distance protection

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 321-XENPage 6 – 72

73Phase selection for distance protection

1 ApplicationThe main tasks of all protection systems are to quickly isolate the faultypart from the rest of the power system to maintain its stability. A total dis-connection of the transmission or subtransmission line always endangersthe stability of one or more power systems. This is because transmissionlines transport the electric energy between the production and consump-tion parts of the power systems, and because their disconnection alwayscauses imbalance in the produced and consumed energy in the discon-nected parts.

A large majority of line faults on the overhead lines are single-phase-to-earth transient faults, which disappear considerably after a short interrup-tion of the power supply. For this reason, the single-pole automatic reclos-ing is introduced into the power systems, and if the faulty phase isdisconnected for only a short time, the risk of losing the stability of apower system is minimized to the lowest possible level.

A reliable phase selection function, associated with the distance protec-tion function, plays for this reason a very important role. An independentphase selection function, as available optionally into some REx 5xx line-protection terminals (for details refer to the ordering particulars), operatesas a complement to the impedance-measuring elements. This secures acorrect phase selection in cases of single-phase-to-earth faults on heavilyloaded, long, transmission lines.

The settings of the phase selection function are independent of the settingsof different distance-measuring zones. They have nothing in commonwith the starting elements of other distance relays, also used for phase-selection purposes. It is possible to set the reach of the phase-selectionelements to cover with sufficient margin only the protected line andsecure tripping of a correct phase for the faults on the protected line only.A much shorter reach, compared to the reach of starting elements in trans-mission networks with long lines, thus prevents the load current to influ-ence the operation of the phase-selection elements on heavily loadedhealthy phases.

The operation of the phase selection elements also depends on the direc-tion of the fault in the network. This enables correct phase selection on themulticircuit parallel operating lines and on multiterminal lines within thecomplex network configurations.

2 Theory of operationThe basic algorithm for the operation of the phase-selection measuringelements is the same as for the distance-measuring function (Distanceprotection). The difference, compared to the zone measuring elements, isin the combination of the measuring quantities (currents and voltages) fordifferent types of faults.

2.1 Measurement at phase-to-earth faults

The measurement ignores the residual current at single-phase-to-earthfaults. Fault loop equations for different phase-to-earth (ph-E) faults areas follows:

1MRK 580 323-XEN


Phase selection for distance protection

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 323-XENPage 6 – 74

(Equation 1)

for phase L1 to earth fault loop

(Equation 2)


(Equation 3)


Operation in each fault loop depends on the following conditions:

(Equation 4)

and

(Equation 5)

Here represents n the number of the corresponding phase. RFPE, X1PE,and X0PE are the reach setting parameters for the ph-E measuring phaseselection elements.

Besides this, the residual current must fulfil the following condi-tions:

(Equation 6)

and

(Equation 7)

where:

is the minimum operation current for forward zones

is the maximum phase current in any of three phases.

2.2 Measurement at phase-to-phase and three-phase faults

Fault loop equations for ph-ph faults are as follows:

(Equation 8)

and

(Equation 9)

where:

is the reactance measured in a corresponding phase-to-phasemeasuring loop.

ZL1 N–

UL1

IL1

---------=

ZL2 N–

UL2

IL2

---------=

ZL3 N–

UL3

IL3

---------=

RFPE– R≤ e ZLn N–( ) RFPE≤

13---

– 2 X1PE⋅ X0PE+( )⋅ I≤ m ZLn N–( ) 13--- 2 X1PE⋅ X0PE+( )⋅≤

3 I0⋅

3 I0⋅ 0,5 IMinOp⋅≥

3 I0⋅ 0,2 Iphmax⋅≥

IMinOp

Iphmax

XLm Ln– ImULm ULn–

ILn

--------------------------

=

RLm Ln– ReULm ULn–

ILn

--------------------------

=

XLm Ln–


1MRK 580 323-XENPage 6 – 75

Version 2.2-00

is the resistance measured in a corresponding phase-to-phasemeasuring loop.

The following conditions apply for the operation of ph-ph measuringloops in reactive direction:

(Equation 10)

The following conditions apply for the operation of ph-ph measuringloops in resistive direction:

(Equation 11)

where:

and .

And where:

is the relative position of a fault within the reactive reachX1PP

X1PP and RFPP are the reach setting parameters for the ph-ph measuring

loops.

Besides this, the residual current must fulfil these conditions:

(Equation 12)

or

(Equation 13)

is a rated current of a terminal. When the current conditions for bothsingle-phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase measurement are fulfilled, bothmeasuring elements operate. Note that the ph-ph measuring loops operatealso at three-phase faults.

3 DesignFigure 1: presents schematically a creation of the ph-ph and ph-E operat-ing conditions. Consider only the corresponding part of measuring andlogic circuits, when only a ph-E or ph-ph measurement is available withinthe terminal.

RLm Ln–

2– X1PP⋅ XLm Ln– 2 X1PP⋅≤ ≤

a RLm Ln– b≤ ≤

a RFPP– p X1PP 20°tan⋅ ⋅+= b RFPP p X1PP 20°tan⋅ ⋅+=

1– p 1≤ ≤

3 I0⋅ 0,2 Ir⋅<

3 I0⋅ 0,4 Iphmax⋅<

Ir


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 323-XENPage 6 – 76

Figure 1: Ph-Ph and Ph-E operating conditions

A special attention is paid to correct phase selection at evolving faults. APHS--STCNDI output signal is created on the basis of current measuringconditions. This signal can be configured to ZMn--STCNDI functionalinput signals of the distance protection zone n (n = 1 to 5, dependent onthe ordering particulars) and this way influence the operation of the ph-phand ph-E zone measuring elements and their phase related starting andtripping signals.

Figure 2: presents schematically the composition of non-directional phaseselective signals PHS--STNDLn, where n presents the correspondingphase number. Signals ZMLnN and ZMLmLn (m and n change betweenone and three according to the phase number) represent the fulfilled oper-ating criteria for each separate loop measuring element.

3 05

3 0 2

0

0

⋅ ≥ ⋅

⋅ ≥ ⋅

I IMinOp

I I ph

.

&

. max

3 0 2

3 0 4

0

0

⋅ ≤ ⋅

⋅ ≤ ⋅

I I

or

I I

r

ph

.

. max

PHS--BLOCK

&

& t

10 mst

20 ms & t15 ms

t15 ms

Bool tointeger

PHS--STCNDI

PHS--STPE

PHS--STPP

IRELPE - cont.

IRELPP - cont.

Visf_049.vsd


1MRK 580 323-XENPage 6 – 77

Version 2.2-00

Figure 2: Composition of non-directional phase-selective signals

Composition of the directional (forward and reverse) phase selective sig-nals is presented schematically on Figure 4: and Figure 3:. The directionalcriteria appears as a condition for the correct phase selection in order tosecure a high phase selectivity for simultaneous and evolving faults onlines within the complex network configurations.

Signals DFWLn and DFWLnLm present the corresponding directionalsignals for measuring loops with phases Ln and Lm (m and n are runningbetwen 1 and 3). Designation FW (Figure 4:)represents the forward direc-tion as well as the designation RV (Figure 3:) represents the reverse direc-tion. All directional signals are derived within the corresponding digitalsignal processor.

Figure 3: presents additionaly a composition of a PHS--STCNDZ outputsignal, which is created on the basis of impedance measuring conditions.This signal can be configured to ZMn--STCNDZ functional input signalsof the distance protection zone n (n = 1 to 5, dependent on the orderingparticulars) and this way influence the operation of the ph-ph and ph-Ezone measuring elements and their phase related starting and tripping sig-nals.

ZML1N

ZML2N

&

&

&ZML3N

IRELPE - cont.

&

&

&

ZML1L2

ZML2L3

ZML3L1

IRELPP - cont.

INDL1N - cont.

INDL2N - cont.

INDL3N - cont.

>1

>1

>1

>1

INDL3L1 - cont.

INDL2L3 - cont

INDL1L2 - cont.

t

15 ms

t

15 ms

t

15 ms

t

15 ms

PHS--STNDPE

PHS--STNDL1

PHS--STNDL2

PHS--STNDL3

visf_050.vsd


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 323-XENPage 6 – 78

Figure 3: Composition of reverse directed phase selection signals

INDL1N - cont.

DRVL1N&

&

INDL1L2 - cont.

DRVL1L2

&

INDL3L1 - cont.

DRVL3L1

&

INDL2N - cont.

DRVL2N

&INDL1L2 - cont.

DRVL2L3&

INDL2L3 - cont.

&

INDL3N - cont.

DRVL3N

&INDL2L3 - cont.

&

INDL3L1 - cont.

>1

>1

>1

>1

t

15 ms

t

15 ms

t

15 ms

t

15 ms

PHS--STRVL1

PHS--STRVPE

PHS--STRVL2

PHS--STRVL3

visf_052.vsd

INDL1N -cont.

INDL2N - cont.

INDL3N - cont.

INDL1L2 - cont.

INDL2L3 - cont.

INDL3L1 - cont.

Bool tointeger

PHS--STCNDZ


1MRK 580 323-XENPage 6 – 79

Version 2.2-00

Figure 4: Composition of forward directed phase selection signals

4 Setting instructionsGenerally, the phase selection elements need not cover all distance-pro-tection zones within the terminal. The main goal should be a correct andreliable phase selection for faults on the entire protected line. This way, asingle-phase and two-phase auto-reclosing function has the best possibleeffect. So the phase selection measuring elements must always cover thefirst corresponding overreaching zone (in most application cases: zone 2)for different fault loops. A safety margin between 10% and 15% is recom-mended.

4.1 Phase selection at single-phase-to-earth faults

Figure 5: presents together the operate characteristics for the zone mea-suring elements and for the phase selection element at ph-E fault. Thecharacteristic is presented in per loop domain.

INDL1N - cont.

DFWL1N&

&INDL1L2 - cont.

DFWL1L2

&

INDL3L1 - cont.

DFWL3L1

&

INDL2N - cont.

DFWL2N

&INDL1L2 - cont.

DFWL2L3&

INDL2L3 - cont.

&

INDL3N - cont.

DFWL3N

&INDL2L3 - cont.

&INDL3L1 - cont.

>1

>1

>1

>1

t

15 ms

t

15 ms

t

15 ms

t

15 ms

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

>1

>1

t

15 ms

t

15 ms

t

15 ms

t

15 ms

t

15 ms

PHS--STFW1PH

PHS--STFWL1

PHS--STFWPE

PHS--STFWL2

PHS--STFW2PH

PHS--STFWL3

PHS--STFW3PH

visf_051.vsd


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 323-XENPage 6 – 80

The phase selection characteristic should cover with sufficient margin thecomplete distance protection zone. Parameters X1PE, R1PE, X0PE,R0PE and RFPE are the zone setting parameters. Please, refer to docu-ment No.4 (Distance protection) for more information. The following def-initions apply according to Figure 5::

(Equation 14)

(Equation 15)

with

(Equation 16)

Figure 5: Operate characteristics for the zone and phase selection ele-ments - forward direction

Designation RFPEZM on Figure 5: corresponds to the zone setting param-eter RFPE. Similarly corresponds RFPEPHS to the resistive reach settingparameter for the phase selection element for ph-E faults. Necessary set-ting conditions for the phase selector with respect to ph-E faults are as fol-lows:

(Equation 17)

ZL R1PE j X1PE⋅+=

ZN13--- Z0 ZL–( )⋅=

Z0 R0PE j X0PE⋅+=

ZL

ZN

RFPEZM RFPEPHS R

jX

visf_053.vsd

13--- 2 X1PEPHS⋅ X0PEPHS+( )⋅

RFPEPHS13--- 2 R1PEZM⋅ R0PEZM+( ) RFPEZM+⋅>


1MRK 580 323-XENPage 6 – 81

Version 2.2-00

(Equation 18)

(Equation 19)

The same conditions apply also for the measurement in reverse directionas well as for the non-directional measurement.

Index PHS designates the parameters related to the phase selection ele-ments. Index ZM designates the parameters related to the distance protec-tion zone measuring elements.

4.2 Phase selection at ph-ph faults

Phase selection elements for ph-ph faults have the operate characteristic,as presented together with the characteristic of the zone measuring ele-ments in Figure 6:.

Figure 6: Phase selection characteristic for ph-ph faults together with zone operate characteristic

In this case it is necessary to set the reactive reach of the phase selectionelement for the ph-ph faults according to the condition:

(Equation 20)

Setting condition for the reach in the resistive direction depends on theline angle, as set by zone setting elements:

(Equation 21)

X1PEPHS X1PEZM>

X0PEPHS X0PEZM>

R

jX

visf_054.vsd

lineangle

70O

ZL

ZL

RFPPZM

RFPPPHS

2.X1PPPHS

X1PPPHS X1PPZM>

ϕ l ine

X1PPZM

R1PPZM-----------------------

atan=


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 323-XENPage 6 – 82

The following condition apply, if the line angle is greater than 70 degrees:

(Equation 22)

The following condition apply, when the line angle is less than 70degrees:

(Equation 23)

4.3 Phase selection at three-phase faults

Figure 7: presents an operate characteristic of phase selector for a threephase fault. The characteristic is presented together with the zone operatecharacteristic in loop domain.

Phase selection elements for ph-ph faults operate also at three-phasefaults. Their operating characteristic is in this case rotated anti-clockwisefor 30 degrees and expanded for the factor . This applies for theoperate characteristic of the phase selection element, but not to the direc-tional characteristics.

RFPPPHS RFPPZM>

RFPPPHS 2 R1PP⋅ RFPPZM 0,72 X1PPZM⋅–+>

2 3⁄( )


1MRK 580 323-XENPage 6 – 83

Version 2.2-00

Figure 7: Phase selection operate characteristic at three-phase faults

It is also necessary to check the limit operate conditions at three-phasefaults, when setting the reach of the phase selection elements for the ph-phfaults. It is necessary to secure the following relation:

(Equation 24)

Index PHS designates the parameters related to the phase selection ele-ments. Index ZM designates the parameters related to the distance protec-tion zone measuring elements.

It is also necessary to secure sufficient margin towards the minimum loadresistance RLmin (see the document “Distance protection” for moredetailed definition of the load impedance). The following conditionapplies in this case:

R

jX

visf_055.vsd

lineangle

ZL

ZL

RFPPZM

100 O

30O

30O

R3PH

X3PH

30O

RFPPPHS 1,82 R1PPZM⋅ 0,32 X1PPZM⋅ 0,91 RFPPZM⋅+ +>


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 323-XENPage 6 – 84

(Equation 25)

5 TestingIt is possible to disable the phase-selection function during the operationaltesting mode under these conditions:

• First, select the function, which should be blocked, under the sub-menu:

TestTestMode

BlockFunctions

Then, there are two ways of setting the terminal into test mode, both oper-ative separately or together (compare with logical ‘OR’ condition):

• Set the terminal into operational testing mode by setting the value of the Operation = On parameter. Select the operating mode under the submenu:

TestTestMode

Operation


Note: The function is blocked if the corresponding setting under theBlockFunctions submenu remains on, and the TEST-INPUT signalremains active.

The phase selectors operate on the same measuring principles as theimpedance measuring zones. So it is necessary to follow the same princi-ples when performing the secondary injection tests. For further instruc-tions, refer to the “Distance protection” document under the “Testing”heading, and note the following differences:

• The corresponding binary signals that inform about the operation of the phase-selection measuring elements are available on the HMI under the menu:

Service ReportFunctionsPhaseSelection

• The corresponding signals for the directional and non-directional operation of the phase-selection measuring elements are described in the appendix of this document.

RFPPPHS 1,35 RLmin⋅<


1MRK 580 323-XENPage 6 – 85

Version 2.2-00

5.1 Measuring the operating characteristics, phase-to-earth faults

Measure the operating loop impedance as a reach in reactive and resistivedirection. Compare the measured reactance in per loop domain with theexpected value:

(Equation 26)

Compare also the measured resistance in per loop domain with theexpected value:

(Equation 27)

Consider the declared measuring accuracy and the accuracy of the testingequipment.

The directional lines form an angle of 15 degrees with the R axis and anangle of 25 degrees with the X axis (see Figure 5:).

5.2 Measuring the operate characteristic, phase-to-phase faults

Measure the operating loop impedance as a reach in reactive and resistivedirection. Compare the measured reactance in per loop domain with theexpected value:

(Equation 28)

Compare also the measured resistance in per loop domain with theexpected value:

(Equation 29)

if measured on the R axis. The resistive reach characteristic forms withthe R axis an angle of 70 degrees (see Figure 6:)

Consider the declared measuring accuracy and the accuracy of the testingequipment.

The directional lines form an angle of 15 degrees with the R axis and anangle of 25 degrees with the X axis (see Figure 5:).

5.3 Measuring the operating characteristics, three-phase faults

Compare the operating values of the measured loop impedance to theexpected operating value. Consider the declared measuring accuracy andthe accuracy of the testing equipment (see Figure 7:). Measure two operat-ing points on the directional characteristic of a phase-selection element,with the phase angles between the measured voltage and current equal to0° and 90°. The expected operating values are:

(Equation 30)

at and

(Equation 31)

at .

Xex13--- 2 X1PE⋅ X0PE+( )⋅=

Rex RFPE=

Xex 2 X1PP⋅=

Rex RFPE=

Zm 1,1 RFPP⋅=

ϕm 0°=

Zm 2,67 X1PP⋅=

ϕm 90°=


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 323-XENPage 6 – 86

6 Appendix

6.1 Function block

Figure 8: Function block for the phase selection for distance protection

6.2 Signal list

visf_056.vsd

PHS--BLOCK

PHS--STFWL1

PHASE SELECTION

PHS--STFWL2

PHS--STFWL3

PHS--STFWPE

PHS--STRVL1

PHS--STRVL2

PHS--STRVL3

PHS--STRVPE

PHS--STNDL1

PHS--STNDL2

PHS--STNDL3

PHS--STNDPE

PHS--STFW1PH

PHS--STFW2PH

PHS--STFW3PH

PHS--STPE

PHS--STPP

PHS--STCNDI

PHS--STCNDZ

Block: Signal: Type: Description:

PHS-- STFWL1 OUT Fault detected in phase L1 - forward direction



PHS-- STFWPE OUT Earth fault detected in forward direction

PHS-- STRVL1 OUT Fault detected in phase L1 - reverse direction



PHS-- STRVPE OUT Earth fault detected in reverse direction

PHS-- STNDL1 OUT Fault detected in phase L1



PHS-- STNDPE OUT Earth fault detected

PHS-- STFW1PH OUT Single-phase fault detected in forward direction


1MRK 580 323-XENPage 6 – 87

Version 2.2-00

6.3 Setting table

Setting parameters for the resistive and the reactive reach are presentedfor the terminals with rated current Ir = 1A. All values should be dividedby 5 for the terminals with rated current Ir = 5A.

PHS-- STFW2PH OUT Two-phase fault detected in forward direction

PHS-- STFW3PH OUT Three-phase fault detected in forward direction

PHS-- STPE OUT Start the operation of the phase-to-earth measuring elements

PHS-- STPP OUT Start the operation of the phase-to-phase measuring elements

PHS-- STCNDI OUT Information on current based starting conditions for the operation of zone measuring elements

PHS-- STCNDZ OUT Information on impedance based starting conditions for the operation of zone measuring elements

PHS-- BLOCK IN Extarnal block of phase selection function



Operation Off/ On - 0 Operating mode of PHS function

X1PP 0.10 - 400.00 ohm/phase

40.00 Positive sequence reactive reach for ph-ph loop measurement

RFPP 0.10 - 400.00 ohm/loop 40.00 Resisitive reach for ph-ph loop measurement

X1PE 0.10 - 400.00 ohm/phase

40.00 Positive sequence reactive reach for ph-E loop measurement

X0PE 0.10 - 1200.00 ohm/phase

40.00 Zero sequence reactance for ph-E loop measurement

RFPE 0.10 - 400.000 ohm/loop 40.00 Resistive reach for ph-E loop measurement


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 323-XENPage 6 – 88

89Power-swing detection

1 Application

1.1 General Different changes in power system may cause oscillations of rotatingunits. The most typical reasons for these oscillations are big changes inload or changes in power system configuration caused by different faultsand their clearance. As the rotating masses strive to find a stable operatecondition, they oscillate with damped oscillations until they reach thefinal stability.

The extent of the oscillations depends on the extent of the disturbancesand on the natural stability of the system. The oscillation rate depends alsoon the inertia of the system and on the impedance between different gen-erating units.

These oscillations cause changes in phase and amplitude of the voltagedifference between the oscillating parts of the power system. This causeschanges in power flow between two oscillating parts of a system - thepower swings from one to another part - and vice-versa.

Figure 1: Impedance plane with the locus of the measured impedance and operate characteristics of the zone measuring elements

Distance relays see these power swings as the swinging of the measuredimpedance in relay points. The measured impedance varies with timealong a locus in an impedance plane (see Figure 1:.). This locus can enterthe operate characteristic of a distance protection and causes, if no preven-tive measures have been considered, its unwanted operation.

1.2 Basic characteristics The power swing detection function (PSD) is optionally available in mostof the REx 5xx terminals, which include also the line distance protectionfunction. Please, refer to the ordering information for each terminal sepa-rately.

R

jX

Impedance locus at power swing

visf004.vsd

1MRK 580 324-XEN


Power-swing detection

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 324-XENPage 6 – 90

The PSD function detects reliably power swings with periodic time ofswinging as low as 200 ms (i.e. slip frequency as high as 10% of the ratedfrequency on the 50 Hz basis). It detects the swings under normal systemoperate conditions as well as during dead-time of a single-pole reclosingcycle.

The function is able to secure selective operation for internal faults duringpower swings, when used together with optional power swing logic (PSL)and some additional functions, available within the REx 5xx terminals.The operation of the distance protection function remains stable for exter-nal faults during the power swing condition, even with the swing (electri-cal) centre on the protected line.

2 Theory of operationThe operation of the PSD function is based on the measurement of thetransition time. The power swing transient impedance needs to pass theimpedance area between the outer and the inner impedance characteristicof the PSD function, see Figure 2:.

Figure 2: Operating principle and characteristic of the PSD function

The impedance measuring principle is based on the same impedance mea-suring algorithm as used by the distance protection zone measuring ele-ments (see the document “Distance protection”). The impedancemeasurement within the PSD function is performed by solving the follow-ing equations:

jX

R

∆t

Impedance locus at power swing

visf_005.vsd

− ⋅KX X IN1

− X IN1

X IN1

KX X IN⋅ 1

− ⋅KR R IN1

KR R IN⋅ 1

− R IN1

− R IN1

Power-swing detection 1MRK 580 324-XENPage 6 – 91

Version 2.2-00

- for phase L1 measuring loop:

(Equation 1)

and

(Equation 2)


(Equation 3)

and

(Equation 4)


(Equation 5)

and

(Equation 6)

corresponds to the reactive reach setting values X1IN for the internaland ( ) for the external operate characteristic of the PSD func-tion. Similarly corresponds to the resistive reach setting values R1INfor the internal and ( ) for the external operate characteristic.

3 Design

3.1 Basic detection logic The PSD function can operate in two operate modes:

• The “1-of-3” operating mode is based on detection of power swing in any of three phases. Figure 3: presents a composition of a detec-tion signal DET1of3 in this particular case.

• The “2-of-3” operating mode is based on detection of power swing in at least two out of three phases. Figure 4: presents a composition of a detection signal DET2of3 in this particular case.

Signals ZOUTPSLn (external boundary) and ZINPSLn (internal bound-ary) are related to the operation of the impedance measuring elements ineach phase separately (Ln represents the corresponding phase L1, L2, andL3) They are internal signals, produced by the corresponding digital sig-nal processors (DSPs).

ReUL1

IL1

---------

Rset≤

ImUL1

IL1

---------

Xset≤

ReUL2

IL2

---------

Rset≤

ImUL2

IL2

---------

Xset≤

ReUL3

IL3

---------

Rset≤

ImUL3

IL3

---------

Xset≤

Xset

KX X1IN⋅Rset

KR R1IN⋅


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 324-XENPage 6 – 92

All tP1 timers on Figure 3: and Figure 4: have the same settings. Theyserve the detection of initial power swings, which are usually not as fast asthe later swings are. The tP2 timers become actual for the detection of theconsecutive swings if the measured impedance exits the operate area andreturns within the time delay, set on the tW waiting timers. All tP2 timerson Figure 3: and Figure 4: have the same setting. This applies also to thetW timers.

Figure 3: Detection of power-swing in 1-of-3 operating mode

Figure 4: Detection of power-swing in 2-of-3 operating mode

ZOUTPSL1

ZINPSL1&

ZOUTPSL2

ZINPSL2

ZOUTPSL3

ZINPSL3

&

&

t

tP1

t

tP1

t

tP1

>1

>1

>1 >1

&

t

tW& t

tP2

DET1of3 - int.

visf_024.vsd

ZOUTPSL1

ZINPSL1&

&

&

&

ZOUTPSL2

ZINPSL2

ZOUTPSL3

ZINPSL3

&

&

t

tP1

t

tP1

t

tP1

>1

&

&

&

>1

&

&

&

>1 >1

&

t

tW& t

tP2

DET2of3 - int.

visf_008.vsd


Version 2.2-00

3.2 Operating and inhibit conditions

Figure 5: presents a simplified logic diagram for a PSD function. Theinternal signals DET1of3 and DET2of3 relate to the detailed logic dia-grams in Figure 3: and Figure 4: respectively.

Selection of the operating mode is possible by the proper configuration ofthe functional input signals PSD--REL1PH, PSD--BLK1PH, PSD--REL2PH, and PSD--BLK2PH (see the signal list in the appendix to thisdocument).

Figure 5: PSD function - simplified block diagram

There are four different ways to form the internal INHIBIT signal:

• Logical 1 on functional input PSD--BLOCK inhibits the output PSD--START signal instantaneously.

• The INHIBIT internal signal becomes logical 1, if the power swing has been detected and the measured impedance remains within its operate characteristic for the time, which is longer than the time delay set on tR2 timer. It is possible to disable this condition by con-necting the logical 1 signal to the PSD--BLKI01 functional input.

• The INHIBIT internal signal becomes logical 1 after the time delay, set on tR1 timer, if the power swing appears before the functional

PSD--TRSPt

tEF

&

PSD--I0CHECK

&DET-int.

PSD--BLKI02

&

t

10 ms

>1

t

tR1

>1

&PSD--BLKI01 t

tR2

PSD--BLOCK

INHIBIT

visf_007.vsd

ZOUTPSL3

ZOUTPSL2

ZOUTPSL1

&

DET1of3 - int.

PSD--REL1PH

PSD--BLK1PH&

DET2of3 - int.

PSD--REL2PH

PSD--BLK2PH&

>1 t

tH

PSD--EXTERNAL

>1& PSD--START

>1 PSD--ZOUT

ZINPSL1

ZINPSL2

ZINPSL3

>1 PSD--ZIN


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 324-XENPage 6 – 94

PSD--I0CHECK becomes logical 1. It is possible to disable this con-dition by connecting the logical 1 signal to the BLKI02 functional input.

• The INHIBIT logical signals becomes logical 1, if the functional input PSD--I0CHECK appears within the time delay, set on tEF timer and the impedance has been seen within the outer characteris-tic of the PSD operate characteristic in all three phases. This function prevents the operation of the PSD function in cases, when one pole of the circuit breaker closes on persistent single-phase fault after sin-gle-pole auto-reclosing dead time, if the initial single-phase fault and single-pole opening of the circuit breaker causes the power swing in the remaining two phases.

4 Setting instructionsThe operation and the reach of the PSD function can locally be set underthe menu:

SettingsFunctions

Group nImpedance

PowerSwingDet

4.1 Setting the reach of the inner characteristic

Set the reach of the inner characteristic R1IN in the resistive direction (seeFigure 2:) as well as X1IN in the reactive direction, so that the inner oper-ate characteristic completely covers all distance protection zones, whichare supposed to be blocked by the PSD function. It is recommended toconsider at least 10% of additional safety margin.

4.2 Setting the reach of the outer characteristic

Set the reach of the outer characteristic as a multiple of a reach for theinner characteristic. KR and KX are the setting parameters, expressed inpercentages of the set reaches in resistive (R1IN) and reactive (X1IN)direction for the inner operate characteristic.

(Equation 7)

and

(Equation 8)

R1OUT and X1OUT are the calculated values of the reach for the outercharacteristic. Also observe the fact, that the minimum values for KR andKX are equal to 120%.

4.2.1 Limitation of the resistive reach

The reach in the resistive direction should not exceed more than 80% ofthe minimum load resistance . This stands for both the reach of theinner as well as for the reach of the outer characteristic.

KR 100R1OUT

R1IN---------------------⋅=

KX 100X1OUT

X1IN---------------------⋅=

RLmin


Version 2.2-00

(Equation 9)

and

(Equation 10)

4.2.2 Determination of the impedance difference and speed

The resistive transition area, which is equal to:

(Equation 11)

should be set as wide as possible, considering the limitations for coveringthe desired distance protection zones and not entering the load impedancearea. In the same time, it depends on the maximum required initial speedof the impedance, which should still be recognised as a power swing andnot as a fault. The initial speed of impedance must be determined by thesystem studies. It is recommended to try the first iteration with the defaulttime delay for the tP1 timer equal to:

(Equation 12)

and calculate, if the set speed of the transition impedance corresponds tothe condition:

(Equation 13)

The expression represents the maximum required speed ofimpedance, which should still be recognised as an initial power swing.Reduce the setting of the tP1 time delay only, if the upper condition cannot be satisfied with the resistance settings on their specified minimumand maximum possible values.

System studies also determine the maximum possible speed of the transi-tion impedance. Set the tP2 timer so, that the maximum detectable speedof the transition impedance satisfies the condition:

(Equation 14)

The expression represents the maximum required speed ofimpedance, which should still be recognised as a power swing within thedeveloped stage.

4.3 Reactive reach The reactive transition area should generally be equal to the resistive tran-sition area. If supposed, that the reactive reach of the inner characteristicis determined by the distance protection zone reach and equal to X1IN,then the reactive multiplication factor must be equal to:

(Equation 15)

Set the KX to 120%, if the calculation requires a value less than 120%.

R1IN 0,8 R⋅ Lmin≤

KR 80RLmin

R1IN--------------⋅≤

∆R R1OUT R1IN–=

tP1 45ms=

R1OUT R1IN–tP1

------------------------------------------ ∆Z∆t-------

req

>

∆Z ∆t⁄( )req

R1OUT R1IN–tP2

------------------------------------------ ∆Z∆t-------

max

>

∆Z ∆t⁄( )max

KX 100R1INX1IN-------------- KR

100---------- 1–

⋅ 1+⋅=


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 324-XENPage 6 – 96

4.4 tH hold timer System studies should determine the settings for the hold timer tH (seeFigure 5:). The purpose of this timer is, to secure continuous output signalfrom the PSD function during the power swing, even after the transientimpedance leaves the PSD operate characteristic and is expected to returnwithin a certain time due to continuous swinging. Consider the minimumpossible speed of power swinging in a particular system.

4.5 tR1 inhibit timer The tR1 inhibit timer delays the influence of the detected residual currenton the inhibit criteria for the PSD function. It prevents operation of thefunction for short transients in the residual current measured by the termi-nal.

4.6 tR2 inhibit timer The tR2 inhibit timer disables the output PSD--START signal from thePSD function, if the measured impedance remains within the PSD operatearea for a time, longer than the set tR2 value. This time delay was usuallyset to approximately two seconds in older power-swing devices.

4.7 tEF timer for reclosing on persistent single-phase faults

The setting of the tEF timer must cover, with sufficient margin, the open-ing time of a circuit breaker and the dead-time of a single-phase auto-reclosing together with the breaker closing time.

5 Configuration

5.1 Blocking of the distance protection zones

The user must determine by the configuration for each distance protectionzone and measuring function separately, whether it should be blocked ornot during the power swings in network. Configure a PSD--START outputsignal from the PSD function for this purpose to the functional inputsZMn--BLOCK of those distance protection zones, which operation shouldbe blocked during the detected power swings. ZMn--BLOCK represents ablock input for the operation of a distance protection zone number nwithin the REx 5xx terminal.

5.2 Selection of the operating mode

PSD function can operate on one-of-three-phase or two-of-three-phasebasis. We suggest to use the first operating mode under the normal, three-phase operating conditions, when it is sufficient to detect the swinging inonly one phase. The two-out-of-three operating mode should be activeduring the dead-time of a single-pole auto-reclosing. The active operatingmode depends on the presence of a logical one signal on the functionalinputs PSD--REL1PH (for one-of-three-phase operating mode) or PSD--REL2PH (for two-of-three-phase operating mode). Logical one on thefunctional inputs BLK1PH or BLK2PH blocks the operation of either ofthe operating modes.


Version 2.2-00

5.3 Blocking of the PSD function at earth faults

Older practice in some power systems was, to block the power-swingdetection unit and permit operation of the distance protection zones dur-ing power swinging, if the residual current 3I0 was present on the pro-tected line. This possibility exists also with the PSD function in REx 5xxterminals. It is necessary to configure for this purpose the PSD--I0CHECK input to one of the functional outputs PHS--STPE (phaseselection function) or GFC--STPE (general fault criteria), whicheverincluded in the terminal.

5.4 Compatibility with older distance relays

It is possible to use the PSD function with the same functionality as builtin older distance protection relays, like REZ 1, REL 100, RAZFE,RAZOA, etc. In such case, it is necessary to use only one operating mode,as the characteristic for the relay under consideration.

Example:

REL 100 distance protection has the power-swing detection unit, whichoperates all the time on two-of-three basis. Configure the PSD--BLK1PHinput to the FIXD-ON functional output, PSD--REL1PH to FIXD-OFF,PSD--BLK2PH to FIXD-OFF, and the PSD--REL2PH input to the FIXD-ON functional output.

6 TestingConsider all general conditions for testing the REx 5xx terminals.

The PSD function can operate in two different modes: one-of-three-phaseand two-of-three-phase mode. Only the three-phase testing equipment issuitable for testing the function, when it operates in two-of-three phasemode. In this case the testing equipment with three, independent voltagesources and one current source, which connects current into differentmeasuring loops for different fault types, is not applicable. ABB NetworkPartner AB recommends, but not requested, the use of the RTS 21(FREJA) testing equipment for the purposes of secondary injection test-ing.

6.1 Connection Connect the testing equipment and the terminal on the same way as pre-sented for the testing of the distance protection function (see the docu-ment “Distance protection”).

6.2 Measurement of the operate characteristic

It is sufficient to measure four operate points (see Figure 6:) at their set-ting values: R1IN, (KR. R1IN), X1IN, (KX. X1IN). Configure an empty,voltage-less binary output to the PSD--ZIN functional output and connectthe buzzer or Ω-meter to the corresponding output terminals.

Prepare the testing equipment for the simulation of a three-phase fault,with currents in phase with the corresponding voltages in all three phases.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 324-XENPage 6 – 98

Set the currents equal to the rated current Ir of the terminal and the phasevoltages equal to the rated voltage Ur. Decrease the measured voltages inall three phases slowly until the PSD--ZIN functional output becomes log-ical 1 and the Ω-meter shows the closed output contact. Record the valueof the operate resistance, which must be within the following limits:

(Equation 16)

and are the values of phase currents and voltages, measured in theoperate point for each phase separately. Consider additionally also theaccuracy of the testing equipment. Increase the measured currents andvoltages to their rated values.

Change the phase angle between voltages and currents in all three phasesto 90 deg, voltage leading the current. Decrease the measured voltages inall three phases slowly until the PSD--ZIN functional output becomes log-ical 1 and the Ω- meter shows the closed output contact. Record the valueof the operate reactance, which must be within the following limits:

(Equation 17)

Consider additionally also the accuracy of the testing equipment. Increasethe measured voltages to their rated values.

Figure 6: Measuring points on the PSD operate characteristic

Re-configure the binary output from PSD--ZIN functional output to PSD--ZOUT functional output. Decrease the measured voltages in all threephases slowly until the PSD--ZOUT functional output becomes logical 1and the Ω- meter shows the closed output contact. Record the value of theoperate reactance, which must be within the following limits:

0,95 R1IN⋅ R≤ op

Um

Im-------- 1,05 R1IN⋅≤=

Um Im

0,95 X1IN⋅ X≤ op

Um

Im-------- 1,05 X1IN⋅≤=

R

jX

R1IN

KR . R1IN

KX . X1IN

X1IN


Version 2.2-00

(Equation 18)

Consider additionally also the accuracy of the testing equipment. Increasethe measured voltages to their rated values.

Set the phase angles between voltages and corresponding currents in allthree phases again to 0 deg. Decrease the measured voltages in all threephases slowly until the PSD--ZOUT functional output becomes logical 1and the Ω-meter shows the closed output contact. Record the value of theoperate resistance, which must be within the following limits:

(Equation 19)

Consider additionally also the accuracy of the testing equipment.Increasethe measured voltages to their rated values.

6.3 Functionality

6.3.1 Basic functionality Re-configure the binary output from the PSD--ZOUT signal to the PSD--START signal of the PSD function. It is also possible to observe the PSD--START signal on the regular output terminals, if provided during theengineering stage. Check the corresponding terminal documentation.

Decrease slowly the measured voltages in all three phases until the Ω-meter detects the appearance of the PSD--START signal. Increase themeasured voltages to their rated values.

Decrease instantaneously voltages in all three phases to the values, whichare for approximately 20% lower than the values, recorded during mea-surement of the R1IN operate point. The START signal must not appear.Increase the measured voltages to their rated values.

6.3.2 One-of-three phase operation

Check the existing (default) configuration of the following function inputsignals: PSD--REL1PH, PSD--BLK1PH, PSD--REL2PH, PSD--BLK2PH and record the connections.

Reconfigure the terminal according to the following list:

• PSD--REL1PH to FIXD-ON

• PSD--BLK1PH to FIXD-OFF

• PSD--REL2PH to FIXD-OFF

• PSD--BLK2PH to FIXD-ON

Disconnect the L2 and L3 currents from the terminal and check that theyare short-circuited on the output terminal of the testing equipment.Decrease slowly the measured voltages until the PSD--START signalappears. Increase the measured voltages to their rated values.

0,95KX100---------- X1IN⋅ ⋅ X≤

op

Um

Im-------- 1,05

KX100---------- X1IN⋅⋅≤=

0,95KR100---------- R1IN⋅⋅ R≤

op

Um

Im-------- 1,05

KR100---------- R1IN⋅ ⋅≤=


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 324-XENPage 6 – 100

6.3.3 Two-of-three-phase operation

Reconfigure the terminal according to the following list:

• PSD--REL1PH to FIXD-OFF

• PSD--BLK1PH to FIXD-ON

• PSD--REL2PH to FIXD-ON

• PSD--BLK2PH to FIXD-OFF

Decrease slowly the measured voltages to the value, which is for approxi-mately 20% lower than the operate value for the R1IN measuring point.No PSD--START signal must appear. Increase the measured voltages totheir rated values.

Connect the phase L2 current to the terminal again. Decrease the mea-sured voltages until the PSD--START signal appears. Increase the mea-sured voltages to their rated values. Connect the phase L3 current to theterminal. Return the original configuration for the functional inputs PSD--REL1PH, PSD--BLK1PH, PSD--REL2PH, and PSD--BLK2PH.

6.3.4 Testing the tEF timer and functionality

Check and record the default configuration for the PSD--TRSP, PSD--I0CHECK, PSD--BLKI01, PSD--BLKI02, and PSD--BLOCK functionalinputs. Re-configure the functional inputs PSD--TRSP and PSD--I0CHECK to two empty binary inputs of a terminal. Configure functionalinputs PSD--BLKI01, and PSD--BLKI02 to the FIXD-ON functional out-put and the PSD--BLOCK functional input to the FIXD-OFF functionalinput. Connect the binary input towards the PSD--I0CHECK functionalinput via an open switch to the constant positive dc voltage. Connect thebinary input towards the PSD--TRSP functional input via a closed switchto the constant positive dc voltage.

Decrease the measured voltages slowly until the START signal appears.Close the switch towards the binary input with PSD--I0CHECK connec-tion and observe the PSD--START signal. It must reset instantaneously.Open the switch towards the PSD--I0CHECK functional input. Open theswitch towards the PSD--TRSP functional input and close with some timedelay the switch towards the PSD--I0CHECK functional input. The PSD--START signal resets, if the time difference between opening the first andclosing the second switch is shorter than the time delay set on the tEFtimer. The PSD--START signal does not reset in the opposite case.Increase the measured voltages to their rated values.

6.3.5 Testing the tR1 timer

Disconnect the dc voltage from the binary inputs connected to the PSD--TRSP and PSD--I0CHECK functional inputs. Connect the binary inputtowards the PSD--I0CHECK functional input via an open switch to theconstant positive dc voltage. Re-configure the PSD--BLKI02 functionalinput to the FIXD-OFF functional output.

Decrease the measured voltages slowly until the PSD--START signalappears. Close the switch towards the PSD--I0CHECK binary input andobserve the PSD--START signal. It must reset with the time delay set onthe tR1 timer. It is also possible to measure this time delay with timer,


Version 2.2-00

which starts with closing of a switch and stops with the reset of a PSD--START signal on the corresponding binary output. Increase the measuredvoltages to their rated values.

6.3.6 Testing the tR2 timer

Disconnect the dc voltage from the binary input connected to the PSD--I0CHECK functional input. Re-configure the functional input PSD--BLKI02 to the FIXD-ON functional input and PSD--BLKI01 to theFIXD-OFF functional output. Decrease slowly the measured voltagesuntil the PSD--START signal appears. It should reset after the time delay,set on tR2 timer. It is also possible to measure the time delay tR2. Connectfor this purpose the timer to the binary output with the PSD--START sig-nal. Start the timer with change of the signal from 0 to 1 and stop it withthe change from 1 to 0.

Increase the measured voltages to their rated values.

6.3.7 Testing the BLOCK input

Re-configure the functional input PSD--BLOCK to the binary input, towhich the PSD--I0CHECK has been configured so far. Re-configure thefunctional input PSD--BLKI01 to the FIXD-ON functional input.Decrease slowly the measured voltages in all three phases until the PSD--START signal appears. Close the switch towards the PSD--BLOCKbinary input and observe the PSD--START signal. It must reset instanta-neously.

Increase the measured voltages to their rated values. Re-configure thefunctional inputs PSD--TRSP, PSD--I0CHECK, PSD--BLKI01, PSD--BLKI02, and PSD--BLOCK to their original configuration.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 324-XENPage 6 – 102

7 Appendix

7.1 Function block

PSD--BLOCK

PSD--BLKI01

PSD--BLKI02

PSD--I0CHECK PSD--START

PSD--ZIN

PSD--ZOUT

POWER-SWING DETECTION

PSD--TRSP

PSD--EXTERNAL

PSD--BLK1PH

PSD--REL1PH

PSD--BLK2PH

PSD--REL2PH

visf_025.vsd


Version 2.2-00

7.2 Function block diagram

PSD--TRSPt

tEF

&

PSD--I0CHECK

&DET-int.

PSD--BLKI02

&

t

10 ms

>1

t

tR1

>1

&PSD--BLKI01 t

tR2

PSD--BLOCK

INHIBIT

visf_007.vsd

ZOUTPSL3

ZOUTPSL2

ZOUTPSL1

&

DET1of3 - int.

PSD--REL1PH

PSD--BLK1PH&

DET2of3 - int.

PSD--REL2PH

PSD--BLK2PH&

>1 t

tH

PSD--EXTERNAL

>1& PSD--START

>1 PSD--ZOUT

ZINPSL1

ZINPSL2

ZINPSL3

>1PSD--ZIN

ZOUTPSL1

ZINPSL1&

&

&

&

ZOUTPSL2

ZINPSL2

ZOUTPSL3

ZINPSL3

&

&

t

tP1

t

tP1

t

tP1

>1

&

&

&

>1

&

&

&

>1 >1

&

t

tW& t

tP2

DET2of3 - int.

visf_026.vsd

>1

>1 &

>1

t

tW

& t

tP2

>1

DET1of3 - int.

PSD - POWER SWING DETECTION FUNCTION


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 324-XENPage 6 – 104

7.3 Signal list

7.4 Setting table

Note! Setting values impedance parameters are related to the rated currentIr = 1A. Divide the stated values by 5, when the rated current is Ir = 5A.


PSD-- START Out Power swinging detected

PSD-- ZIN Out Operation of inner impedance boundary

PSD-- ZOUT Out Operation of outer impedance boundary

PSD-- BLOCK In Block of Power Swing Detection

PSD-- BLKI01 In Block of slow swing criteria operation

PSD-- BLKI02 In Block of slow swing criteria operation

PSD-- BLK1PH In Block one-out-of-three-phase detection element

PSD-- REL1PH In Release one-out-of-three-phase detection element

PSD-- BLK2PH In Block two-out-of-three-phase detection element

PSD-- REL2PH In Release two-out-of-three-phase detection element

PSD-- I0CHECK In Presence of earth fault, 3I0 detection

PSD-- TRSP In Command for single-pole tripping

PSD-- EXTERNAL In Input for external power swing detection


Operation Off, On On Power swing function Off/On

Detection Off, On On Operating mode of the internal Power swing detection (PSD) function: Off/On

X1IN 0.10 - 400.00 ohm/ph 30.00 Positive sequence reactive reach of the inner boundary

R1IN 0.10 - 400.00 ohm/ph 30.00 Positive sequence resistive reach of the inner boundary

KX 120 - 200 % 125 Reach multiplication factor for the outer reactive boundary

KR 120 - 200 % 125 Reach multiplication factor for the outer resistive boundary

tP1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.045 Initial PSD timer

tP2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.015 Fast PSD timer

tW 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.250 Hold timer for activation of fast PSD timer

tH 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.500 Hold timer for PSD Detected

tEF 0.000 - 60.000 s 3.000 Timer overcoming 1-ph reclosing dead time

tR1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.300 Timer to time delay block by the residual current

tR2 0.000 - 60.000 s 2.000 On-delay timer for blocking of output signal at very slow swings

105Power-swing logic

1 ApplicationPower-swing logic (PSL) is a complementary function to the power-swing detection (PSD) function, see the “Power-swing detection” docu-ment. It enables a reliable fault clearing for different faults on protectedlines during power swinging in power systems.

It is a general goal, to secure fast and selective operation of protectionscheme for the faults, which occur on power lines during power swinging.It is possible to distinguish between the following main cases:

• A fault occurs on a so far healthy power line, over which the power-swing has been detected and the fast distance protection zone has been blocked by the PSD element.

• The power-swing occurs over two phases of a protected line during the dead time of a single-pole auto-reclosing after the Ph-E fault has been correctly cleared by the distance protection. The second fault can, but does not need to, occur within this time interval.

• Fault on an adjacent line (behind the B substation, see Figure 1:) causes the measured impedance to enter the operate area of the PSD function and, for example, the zone 2 operating characteristic. Cor-rect fault clearance initiates the power-swing so that the locus of the measured impedance continues through the zone 1 operating charac-teristic and causes its unwanted operation, if no preventive measures have been taken, see Figure 1:.

Figure 1: Initial power-swing after clearance of an external fault

PSD--STDEF

PSD--AR1P1 &

PSL--STPSD

PSL--BLOCK & t

tCS

&

PSL--CSUR

&PSL--CSOR

>1

t

tBlkTr

&

t

tTrip

PSL--CR

PSL--CACC >1

&

PSL--CS

PSL--BLKZMPP

PSL--TRIP

visf_028.vsd

1MRK 580 325-XEN


Power-swing logic

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 325-XENPage 6 – 106

The power-swing logic and the basic operating principle of the power-swing detection (PSD) function operates reliable at different parallelfaults on power lines with detected power-swings. It is, however, pre-ferred to keep the distance protection function blocked in cases of single-phase-to-earth faults on so far healthy lines with detected power swinging.In these cases, it is recommended to use an optionally available direc-tional overcurrent earth-fault protection with scheme communicationlogic. It is also possible to use a time delayed directional O/C EF protec-tion without communication or even a time delayed non-directional O/CEF protection.

2 Theory of operationREx 5xx series line distance protection terminals comprise generally up tofive distance protection zones. It is possible to use one or two of them forselective fault clearing during power swinging. Following are the basicconditions for the operation of so called (underreaching and overreaching)power-swing zones:

• They must not be blocked during power swinging.

• Their operation must be time delayed but shorter (with sufficient margin) than the set time delay of normal distance protection zone 2, which is generally blocked by the power-swing.

• Their resistive reach setting must secure, together with the set time delay for their operation, that the slowest expected swings pass the impedance operate area without initiating their operation.

Their operation is conditioned by the operation of the PSD function. Theyoperate in PUTT or POTT communication scheme with correspondingdistance protection zones at the remote line end. It is preferred to use thecommunication channels over the optionally available “remote end datacommunication module” and the “binary signal transfer to remote end”function. It is also possible to include, in an easy way (by means of con-figuration possibilities), the complete functionality into a regular schemecommunication logic for the distance protection function. The communi-cation scheme for the regular distance protection does not operate duringthe power-swing conditions, because the distance protection zonesincluded in the scheme are normally blocked. The power-swing zones canfor this reason use the same communication facilities during the power-swing conditions.

Only one power-swing zone is necessary in distance protection at eachline terminal, if the POTT communication is applied. One underreachingpower-swing zone, which sends the time delayed carrier signal, and oneoverreaching power-swing zone, which performs the local tripping condi-tion, are necessary with PUTT schemes.

The operation of the distance protection zones with long time delay (zone3, for example) is in many cases not blocked by the power-swing detec-tion elements. This allows the distance protection zone 3 (together with

Power-swing logic 1MRK 580 325-XENPage 6 – 107

Version 2.2-00

the full-scheme design of the distance protection function in REx 5xx ter-minals) to be used at the same time as the overreaching power-swingzone.

A special part of the PSL is provided to control the operation of the under-reaching zone (zone 1) for the power-swings developed by the faults onremote lines and their fast clearance by the corresponding relays, see Fig-ure 1:. The logic prevents the zone 1 for a certain period, to issue a trip-ping command, if the fault impedance has been initially detected onlywithin the reach of a higher distance protection zone and afterwardsentered the zone 1 without being detected outside the external operatingboundary of the PSD element.

3 DesignCommunication and tripping logic as used by the power-swing distanceprotection zones is schematically presented on Figure 2:

Figure 2: Power-swing communication logic - simplified logic diagram

The complete logic remains blocked as long as there is a logical one onthe PSL--BLOCK functional input signal. Presence of the logical one onthe PSD--STDEF functional input signal also blocks the logic as long asthis block is not released by the logical one on the PSD--AR1P1 func-tional input signal. The functional output signal PSL--BLKZMPP remainslogical one as long as the function is not blocked externally (PSL--BLOCK is logical zero) and the earth-fault is detected on protected line(PSD--STDEF is logical one), which is connected in three-phase mode(PSD--AR1P1 is logical zero). Timer tBlkTr prolongs the duration of thisblocking condition, if the measured impedance remains within the operatearea of the PSD function (PSL--STPSD input active). The PSL--BLKZMPP could be used to block the operation of the power-swingzones.

PSD--STDEF

PSD--AR1P1 &

PSL--STPSD

PSL--BLOCK & t

tCS

&

PSL--CSUR

PSL--CS

t

tBlkTr

&

t

tTrip

PSL--CR

PSL--CACC >1

& PSL--BLKZMPP

PSL--TRIP

visf_029.vsd

Power-swing logic

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 325-XENPage 6 – 108

Logical one on functional input PSL--CSUR, which is normally con-nected to the ZMn--TRIP functional output of an power-swing underreachzone, activates functional output PSL--CS, if the function is not blockedby one of the above conditions. It also activates the PSL--TRIP functionaloutput.

Initiation of the PSL--CS functional output is possible only, if the PSL--STPSD input has been active longer than the time delay set on the securitytimer tCS.

Simultaneous presence of the functional input signals PSD--CACC andPSD--CR (local trip condition) also activates the PSL--TRIP functionaloutput, if the function is not blocked by one of the above conditions andthe PSL--STPSD signal has been present longer then the time delay set onthe trip timer tTrip.

Figure 3: presents the logical circuits, which control the operation of theunderreaching zone (zone 1) at power swings, caused by the faults andtheir clearance on the remote power lines.

Figure 3: Control of the underreaching distance protection zone (zone 1) at power-swings caused by the faults on remote lines

The logic is disabled by a logical zero on functional input PSL--BLOCK.It can start only if the following conditions are simultaneously fulfilled:

• PSL--STPSD functional input signal must be a logical zero. This means, that the PSD function must not detect power swinging over the protected power line.

• PSL--STZMPSD functional input must be a logical one. This means that the impedance must be detected within the external boundary of the PSD function.

• PSL--STZMH functional input must be a logical one. This means that the fault must be detected by the higher distance protection zone, for example zone 2.

PSL--STZML

PSL--BLOCK

&PSL--STMZH

PSL--STZMPSD

PSL--STPSD

t

tDZ

t

tZL

&

>1

&

&

&

-loop

>1 PSL--STZMLL

PSL--BLKZMH

visf_030.vsd

&


Version 2.2-00

The PSL--STZMLL functional output, which can be used in complete ter-minal logic instead of a normal distance protection zone 1, becomes activeunder the following conditions:

• If the PSL--STZML signal appears at the same time as the PSL--STZMH or if it appears with a time delay, which is shorter than the time delay set on timer tDZ.

• If the PSL--STZML signal appears after the PSD--STZMH signal with a time delay longer than the delay set on the tDZ timer, and remains active longer than the time delay set on the tZL timer.

The PSL--BLKZMH functional output signal can be used to block theoperation of the higher distance protection zone, if the fault has movedinto the zone 1 operate area after tDZ time delay.

4 Setting

4.1 Time delay for the underreaching zone

Time delay for the underreaching power-swing zone should be set shorter(with sufficient margin) than the time delay of normal distance protectionzone 2, to obtain selective time grading also in cases of faults duringpower-swings. The necessary time difference depends mostly on thespeed of the communication channel used, speed of the circuit breakerused, etc. Time difference between 150 ms to 200 ms is generally suffi-cient.

4.2 Power-swing zones Set the reactive reach for the power-swing zones according to the systemselectivity planing. The reach of the underreaching zone should notexceed 85% of the protected line length. The reach of the overreachingzone should be at least 120% of the protected line length.

Determine the minimum possible speed of the power swing-ing in secondary ohm/s. Calculate the maximum permissible resistivereach for each power-swing zone separately according to the followingconditions.

Consider in all cases also the usual setting limits, as specified for the nor-mal distance protection zones. See the document “Distance protection”.

4.2.1 Ph-E measurement Setting of the resistive reach should follow the expression:

(Equation 1)

where:

(Equation 2)

and

(Equation 3)

∆Z ∆t⁄( )min

RFPE min RFPE1 RFPE2≤

RFPE1∆Z∆t-------

min

tnPE⋅ R1PE 0,5 X1PE⋅+( )–=

RFPE2∆Z∆t-------

min

tnPE2

--------------⋅=

Power-swing logic

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 325-XENPage 6 – 110

Parameters RFPE, R1PE, X1PE and tnPE are the zone n setting parame-ters, see the document “Distance protection”.

4.2.2 Ph-Ph measurement

Setting of the resistive reach should follow the expression:

(Equation 4)

where:

(Equation 5)

and

(Equation 6)

Parameters RFPP, R1PP, X1PP and t1PP are the zone n setting parame-ters, see the document “Distance protection”.

4.3 Time-delay for the overreaching zone

Time delay for the overreaching power-swing zone is not an importantparameter, if the zone is used only for the protection purposes at power-swings.

Consider the normal time grading, if the overreaching zone serves as atime delayed back-up zone, which is not blocked by the operation of thePSD function.

4.4 Timers within the power-swing logic

Settings of the timers within the PSL depend in great extent on the set-tings of other time delayed elements within the complete protection sys-tem. These settings differ within different power systems. Therecommended settings consider only the general system conditions andthe most used practice at different utilities. It is always necessary to checkthe local system conditions.

4.4.1 Carrier-send timer tCS

The tCS timer is used for safety reasons within the logic. It requires con-tinuous presence of the PSL--STPSD signal, before it can issue a carriersend signal. A time delay between 50 and 100 ms is generally sufficient.

4.4.2 Trip timer tTrip The timer is used for safety reasons within the logic. It requires continu-ous presence of the PSL--STPSD signal, before it can issue a trippingcommand during the power-swings. A time delay between 50 and 100 msis generally sufficient.

4.4.3 Blocking timer tBlkTr

The tBlkTr timer prolongs the presence of the PSL--BLKZMPP outputsignal, which can be used to block the operation of the power-swing zonesafter the detected single-phase-to-earth faults during the power-swings. Itis necessary to permit the O/C EF protection to eliminate the initial fault

RFPP min RFPP1 RFPP2≤

RFPP1 2∆Z∆t-------

min

tnPP⋅ R1PP 0,5 X1PP⋅+( )–⋅=

RFPP2∆Z∆t-------

min

tnPP⋅=


Version 2.2-00

and still make possible for the power-swing zones to operate for possibleconsecutive faults. A time delay between 150 and 300 ms is generally suf-ficient.

4.4.4 Differentiating timer tDZ

Setting of the tDZ timer influences in great extent the performance of theprotection during the power swinging, which develops by occurrence andclearance of the faults on remote power lines. It is necessary to considerthe possibility for the faults to occur close to the set reach of the under-reaching distance protection zone, which might result in longer operatetimes of zone 1 (underreaching zone) compared to zone 2 starting time(overreaching zone). A setting between 80 and 150 ms is generally suffi-cient.

4.4.5 Release timer tZL The tZL timer permits unconditional operation of the underreaching zone,if the measured impedance remains within its operate characteristic longerthan the set time tZL. Its setting depends on the expected speed of the ini-tial swings and on the setting of the time delay for the overreaching zone2. The release timer must still permit selective tripping of the distanceprotection within the complete network. A setting between 200 and 300ms is generally sufficient.

5 ConfigurationMany different ways are possible to handle the operation of the power-swing zones and power-swing logic in different networks and REx 5xxterminals. The necessary configuration depends on the philosophy used ineach power utility as well as on different protection functions available atboth the line ends.

The REx 5xx terminals permit the use of different protection functions,like: five independent distance protection zones, scheme communicationlogic for the distance protection, PSD and PSL function, directional over-current earth-fault protection with scheme communication logic, etc.

It is supposed, that the optimal amount of functions is available to copewith faults during power swinging.

5.1 Use of power-swing zones

It is recommended, to use only the directional overcurrent earth-fault pro-tection for the single-phase-to-earth faults in cases when the power-swings have been detected before the faults. It is for this reason recom-mended to connect the PSL--STDEF functional input signal to the TEF--START signal of the time delayed directional O/C EF protection function.The directional O/C EF protection must be blocked during the dead timeof single- and/or two-pole auto-reclosing cycle. In this case, it is neces-sary to release the operation of the power-swing zones and logic by an ORcombination of the functional outputs AR01-1PT1 and AR01-2PT1.Direct connection to AR01--1PT1 is sufficient, if separate 2-pole trippingis not used within the terminal.

Power-swing logic

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 325-XENPage 6 – 112

5.1.1 Activation of the PSL function

Operation of the logic with power-swing zones should only be permitted,when the PSD function detects the power-swing over the protected line.For this reason, configure the PSL--STPSD functional input to the PSD--START functional output of the PSD function.

The functional input signal PSL--BLOCK, which disables the power-swing logic, can be connected to the OR combination of the fuse failurefunction, switch-onto-fault function and similar.

5.1.2 Power-swing zones in PUTT scheme

Two distance protection zones, which are not blocked during power-swings, are required in this case. The first one is an underreaching zone.Connect its functional output ZMn--TRIP (n corresponds to the serialnumber of a zone used) to the functional input PSL--CSUR.

The second zone is an overreaching zone. Connect its functional outputZMn--START to the functional input PSL--CACC. It is not always abso-lutely necessary to use a separate zone for the overreaching power-swingzone. It is possible to use one of the time delayed distance protectionzones with longer time delay (zone 3, for example), if it is not blocked bythe operation of the power-swing detection function.

5.1.3 Carrier receive signal

The best way to arrange the communication for the power-swing logic isto use the independent communication facilities, which are availablewithin the line distance protection terminals together with an optionalremote terminal communication function and remote terminal communi-cation module. In this case, connect the carrier receive functional inputPSL--CR to one of the RTCn-RECm (n is equal to 1 or 2 and m goes from1 to 16) functional outputs.

An independent communication link is also available within the commu-nication telegram for the line differential protection function. Configurethe PSL--CR to one of the functional outputs DIFL-RTCREC1 or DIFL-RTCREC2.

It is possible to combine the communication scheme for the normal dis-tance protection function and for the power-swing zones. In this case, con-nect the PSL--CR input to the ZCOM-CRL output signal of the schemecommunication logic for the distance protection.

5.1.4 Carrier send signal Connect the PSL--CS output signal to the RTCn-SENDm functional inputof the remote terminal communication function, when used. Be sure thatthe running numbers of m and n are the same as for the carrier receive sig-nal at the remote line end.

If the communication for the power-swing zones uses the same communi-cation channel as the line differential protection, then configure the PSL--CS to the corresponding functional inputs DIFL-RTCSEND1 or DIFL-RTCSEND2 respectively.


Version 2.2-00

Connect the PSL--CS functional output in an OR combination togetherwith the carrier sending starting signal of the normal distance protectionzone ZMn--START and configure the output from the OR gate to the cor-responding functional input ZCOM-CSOR or ZCOM-CSUR. It is pre-ferred, but not absolutely necessary, if the normal distance protection andthe power-swing zones use the same communication principle.

5.1.5 Blocking of power-swing zones

Power-swing zones are generally supposed to operate only when thepower-swing has been detected on the protected power line and no otherprotection functions are able to operate for line faults. But it is possible toblock them by connecting the PSL--BLKZMPP functional output to thefunctional inputs ZMn--BLOCK of the corresponding power-swing zone.

5.2 Trip output The PSL--TRIP functional output is supposed to trip the circuit breaker.Configure it together with all remaining functional outputs in such a com-bination so it will issue a required trip output of the used tripping function.

5.3 Control of the underreaching zone

Logical circuits, as presented in Figure 3:, are used to control the opera-tion of the underreaching zone (usually zone 1) at swings, generated bythe occurrence and clearance of the external faults. It is supposed, that theunderreaching zone 1 is to be controlled and the overreaching zone 2detects the initial faults. Disconnect, within the terminal, all connectionstowards ZM1--START functional output and replace them with the con-nections to PSL--STZMLL. Also connect, to the same output, a TMn-INPUT (n is changing between 1 and 10) input to a timer delayed on pick-up. Replace all connections in basic configuration towards the ZMn--TRIP functional output with connections to the output TMn--ON and setthe time delay to the value, corresponding to the original time delay of thedistance protection zone 1. No intermediate timer is necessary, if the timedelay of the distance protection zone 1 is originally set to zero.

6 TestingMost of the testing equipments available on the market does not permitsimulation of the power-swing conditions and simultaneous occurrence ofdifferent faults with controlled fault impedance. For this reason it is nec-essary to enable the logic by connecting the PSL--STPSD input signal tosome other functional signal, which is used for the testing purposes.Detailed instructions are given in the following text.

Make sure, that the existing configuration permits monitoring of the PSL--CS, PSL--TRIP signals on the binary outputs of the terminal. If not, con-figure it for testing purposes to some, not used, binary outputs.

6.1 Operating characteristics of the power-swing zones

Measure the operate characteristics of the power-swing zones accordingto the instructions for testing the distance protection zones. See the docu-ment “Distance protection”. Keep the connection of the terminal to thetesting equipment as prepared for testing the distance protection function.

Power-swing logic

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 325-XENPage 6 – 114

6.2 Testing of the carrier send and trip signals

Set Off the operation of all distance protection zones, which are supposedto be blocked by the operation of the PSD function. Configure the PSL--STPSD functional inputs to the ZMn--TRIP of the underreaching power-swing zone, if the underreaching communication scheme is used. Startinstantaneously any kind of fault within the underreaching power-swingzone and check, that:

• The PSL--CS signal appears after the time delay, which is equal to the sum of set time delays for the underreaching zone tnPP or tnPE (dependent on the type of fault) and for the carrier send security timer tCS. Also add the usual operate time for the underreaching zone (approx. 30ms).

• The PSL--TRIP signal appears after the time delay, which is equal to the sum of set time delays for the underreaching zone tnPP or tnPE (dependent on the type of fault) and for the trip security timer tTrip. Also add the usual operate time for the underreaching zone (approx. 30ms).

Simulate the receiving of the carrier signal so that the functional input sig-nal PSL--CR becomes a logical one. Configure the PSL--STPSD input tothe output ZMn--START of the carrier accelerating zone (Power-swingoverreaching zone). Initiate any kind of fault within the carrier accelerat-ing zone and check that the PSL--TRIP signal appears after the time,which is equal to the time delay set on the trip timer tTrip. Also considerthe (average) operate time of the carrier acceleration zone (approx. 30ms).

6.3 Influence of the O/CE/F protection

Additionally connect the REx 5xx terminal according to the test instruc-tions for the directional O/C EF protection (see the document “Residualovercurrent protection (dir and non-dir)”), if the PSL is configured in away, to be controlled by this protection. Initiate a single-phase-to-earthfault within both power-swing zones and make sure that none of PSL--CSand PSL--TRIP output signals appear after the time delays as measured insection 6.2. The PSL--BLKZMPP must appear together with the fault andmust remain active until the fault has been switched off plus the timedelay, as set on the tBlkTr timer.

Initiate a Ph-Ph fault within the operating area of both power-swing zonesand make sure, that the performance of the logic is the same as in section6.2.

Switch On the operation of the zone 1 distance protection function andfulfill all the conditions for single-pole auto-reclosing. Simulate a single-phase-to-earth fault within the reach of zone 1 and both power-swingzones. The fault should cause a single-pole tripping and should beswitched off with the normal operating time of zone 1. Repeat the faultwithin the dead-time of single-pole auto-reclosing and make sure, that thePSL function perform as described in section 6.2.


Version 2.2-00

6.4 Control of the underreaching zone

Set the operation of all normal distance protection zones to On. Simulate afault without fault resistance in the middle of the distance protection zone1. Make sure that the trip appears within the operate time for the distanceprotection zone 1 and no PSL--BLKZMH output signal appears. SwitchOff the fault and prepare a new fault without fault resistance within thenormal distance protection zone 2 operate area, but outside the zone 1operate area.

Switch On the fault and move it into the zone 1 operate area with timedelay longer than the time set on tDZ timer and faster than the time set ontimer tZL. Observe the operate time, which must be equal to the operatetime of zone 1, after the measured impedance enters its operate area. Nodelayed operation of zone 1 must be observed.

Configure the PSL--STPSD functional input to the PSD--START func-tional output and repeat the previous fault. Fast trip, caused by the opera-tion of zone 1 must appear with a time delay, which is equal to the set timedelay on the timer tZL plus zone 1 normal operate time. Also observe thePSL--BLKZMH functional output signal, which must appear for a shorttime.

Be sure to establish the original configuration of the terminal and the orig-inal settings of all setting parameters.

Power-swing logic

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 325-XENPage 6 – 116

7 Appendix

7.1 Function block

PSL--BLOCK

PSL--STDEF

PSL--AR1P1

PSL--STPSD PSL--CS

PSL--BLKZMPP

PSL--TRIP

POWER-SWING LOGIC

PSL--CSUR

PSL--CACC

PSL--CR

PSL--STZML

PSL--STZMH

visf_031.vsdPSL--STZMPSD

PSL--BLKZMH

PSL--STZMLL


Version 2.2-00


PSD--STDEF

PSD--AR1P1

PSL--STPSD

PSL--BLOCKt

tCS

&

PSL--CSUR

PSL--CS

t

tBlkTr

&

t

tTrip

PSL--CR

PSL--CACC >1

& PSL--BLKZMPP

PSL--TRIP

&

&

Operation = On

PSL--STZML

PSL--STMZH

PSL--STZMPSD

PSL--STPSD

t

tDZ

t

tZL

&

>1

&

&

&

-loop

>1 PSL--STZMLL

PSL--BLKZMH

visf_032.vsd

&

&

Power-swing logic

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 325-XENPage 6 – 118

7.3 Signal list

7.4 Setting table


PSL-- TRIP OUT Tripping caused by the Power Swing Logic

PSL-- STZMLL OUT Replaces the underreaching zone (ZM1) in tripping, starting, and configura-tion facilities

PSL-- BLKZMPP OUT Blocks the tripping action of low set, non-controlled impedance zone

PSL-- BLKZMH OUT Blocks tripping of higher distance protection zones

PSL-- CS OUT Carrier send signal under the power swing

PSL-- BLOCK IN Block of Power Swing Logic

PSL-- CACC IN Overreaching power-swing zone

PSL-- STPSD IN Power swing detected

PSL-- STZMH IN Start of the overreaching (ZM2)

PSL-- STZML IN Start of the underreaching zone (ZM1)

PSL-- STDEF IN Start from E/F protection, forward or reverse direction

PSL-- STZMPSD IN Operation of PSD external boundary

PSL-- AR1P1 IN Dead time of first single-pole autoreclosing

PSL-- CSUR IN Carrier send by the underreaching power-swing zone

PSL-- CR IN Carrier receive signal during PSD operation


Operation Off, On Off Power swing logic Off/On

tDZ 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.100 Permitted operating time difference between higher and lower zone

tZL 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.250 Time delayed operation of lower zone with detected difference in operating time

tCS 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.100 Conditional timer for sending the carrier signal at power swings

tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.100 Conditional timer for tripping at power swings

tBlkTr 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.300 Timer for blocking the non-controlled zone trip

119Pole Slip Protection

1 ApplicationSudden events in an electrical power system such as large changes in load,fault occurrence or fault clearance, which disturbs the balance of energyin the system, can cause oscillations of mechanical masses referred to aspower swings. In a recoverable situation the oscillations will decay andstable operation will be resumed; in a non-recoverable situation the powerswings become so severe that the synchronism is lost between the genera-tors of the system, a condition referred to as pole slipping. In the case ofpole slipping, the excitation of the machines is generally intact, but thereare strong oscillations of real and imaginary power.

Even if the modern power systems are designed and operate with highdegree of security against power swings and even more against pole slip-ping, these two phenomena may occur especially during abnormal systemconditions.

If the pole slipping condition is allowed to persists in smaller parts of apower system, other machines may follow and the stability of a system asa whole is in danger. Apart from the electrical phenomena, oscillations ofmechanical masses also subject the generators and other equipment toconsiderable pulsating mechanical stresses.

Available technology and the costs of the corresponding protectiondevices dictated in the past the use of the pole slip protection relays onlyclose to the power generators. They were for this reason treated as a partof a generator protection scheme. Their use deeper in the network was notso common. Such approach resulted often in unselective splits of alreadytroubled power systems, which had lost some valuable generating capaci-ties.

Modern, functional library oriented approach within the microprocessorbased protection terminals makes possible to utilize the pole slip protec-tion function more often and deeper in the power network. This way itenables better selectivity of the pole slip protection and intact power gen-eration in different islands. A separate pole slip protection function stillremains as a dedicated generator protection in the vicinity of synchronousmachines, to protect them against the oscillations which could harm ingreat extent their functionality.

The pole slip protection (PSP) function as built in REx 5xx protection,control and monitoring terminals, and described in this document com-prises all functionality necessary for the detection, evaluation and corre-sponding reaction on the pole slipping phenomena in power systems. It isapplicable together with different line protection functions (distance pro-tection, line differential protection) deeper in the power network as wellas a part of a generator protection system in power plants.

1.1 Oscillations of mechanical masses in power system

Figure 1 presents a two machine system with a power line between bus-bars A and B. The electromotive forces and can differ in theirmagnitude. It is important, that their relative phase angle

(Equation 1)

E·A E·B

δ δA δB–=

1MRK 580 677-XEN

Version 02October 1999

Pole Slip Protection

Version 02

1MRK 580 677-XENPage 5 – 120

changes with time. The voltage difference

(Equation 2)

changes in its magnitude and direction and causes this way the currentbetween both generators to change accordingly.

Figure 1: Two machine system

Figure 2 presents an example of the voltage and current measured in onephase of a line between two generators during the oscillations caused bythe changing of the relative phase angle . The minimum value of currentcorresponds to the minimum angle between the electromotive forces. Themaximum value of the current corresponds to the condition when the volt-ages and have the opposite direction.

Figure 2: Current (solid line) and voltage (dashed line) in relay point during the pole slip condition

Oscillations in measured voltage and current reflect naturally also inimpedance, measured by the impedance (distance) relays.

U· D E·A E·B–=

99001019.vsd

~~

EA

δA= const δB= f(t)

EB

A BZSA ZSBZL

R

δ

E·A E·B

0.9 0.95 1 1.05 1.1 1.15 1.2 1.25 1.3 1.35 1.4 1.45 1.5 1.55 1.6 1.65 1.7

100

50

50

1000

0

)

Pole Slip Protection 1MRK 580 677-XENPage 5 – 121

Version 02

Figures 3a) and b) present two examples of the impedance trajectories inimpedance plane during the system oscillations. Both figures include alsothe example of an operating characteristics of a modern distance protec-tion. The measured impedance can enter the operating area of the distanceprotection and causes its unwanted operation. It is for this reason neces-sary to detect the oscillations and prevent such unwanted operationsbefore the measured impedance enters the distance protection operatingcharacteristics.

Figure 3: Impedance trajectories in relay point during the pole slip (fig-ure a) and power swing (figure b) phenomena

The recoverable oscillations are understood under the expression "power-swing". The generators in a two machine system remain during the distur-bance in synchronism. They only change their relative angle from oneto another value over a transient period. The impedance locus might enterthe operating characteristic of the distance relay (see Figure 3b), but gen-erally does not cross the complete R-X plane.

In a non-recoverable situation the oscillations are so severe, that the syn-chronism is lost between the generators of a system. The condition isreferred to as a pole-slip. At least one generator starts to change its fre-quency and the resulting slip frequency may increase up to 10Hz (in 50Hz system).

The measured impedance usually enters the distance relay’s operatingcharacteristic and crosses the complete impedance plane, as presentedschematically on Figure 3a.

1.1.1 Oscillations during abnormal system conditions

Modern power systems operate very close to their technical limits but arealso built with higher security against the mechanical oscillations thanever before. Today it is nearly impossible to start the oscillations only byvery big difference in produced and consumed power. At the same timesome short oscillations are much more frequent than before. They are ini-tiated by some bigger events (faults) in power systems and disappear rela-tively fast after the normal operating conditions have been restored (e.g.single-pole autoreclosing).

R

jX

EA = EB

EA < EB

EA > EB

R

jX

99001021.vsd

a) b)

δ


Version 02

1MRK 580 677-XENPage 5 – 122

Figure 4 presents an impedance trajectory as seen on protected power lineby a distance protection function in phase L2 during the dead time of asingle pole autoreclosing, after the single phase-to-earth fault L1-N hasbeen cleared. The circuit breaker has been successfully closed after thedead time of the single pole autoreclosing has expired.

Figure 4: Impedance trajectory as seen by a L2-N impedance measur-ing element

The remarks on Figure 4 have the following meaning:

1. Load impedance in phase L2 during normal operating conditions2. Impedance measured during the L1-N fault3. Impedance trajectory and its direction during the dead time of a

single pole autoreclosing in phase L14. Operating characteristic of the line distance protection

The impedance as measured by a healthy phase measuring elements(phase L2 in case on Figure 4) might enter the operating area of the dis-tance protection in impedance plane and initiates an unwanted trip. Mod-ern distance protection devices must incorporate a correspondingfunctionality, which detects the oscillations in each phase separately andprevents the unnecessary operation of the main protection function.

The oscillation in power system should be recognized preferably by themeasuring elements, if detected simultaneously in more than one phase.The operating logic, which requires the detection in two out of threephases increases in great extent the security and dependability of anapplied protection scheme in special operating conditions, like:

• Oscillations during dead time of single pole auto-reclosing.

• Slow increase of initial fault currents at different kinds of high resis-

0

30

60

90

120

150

180

210

240

270

300

330

100500

112.829

25.451ZPS L2t

arg ZPS L2t

1

2

3

4

99001022.vsd


Version 02

tive earth faults.

A special logic circuit, as applied in the pole slip protection used by theREx 5xx terminals makes possible adaptive use of the so called "one ofthree" or "two of three" phase detection criteria. This possibility becomesimportant for the correct detection of the oscillations in power systemswith multipole tripping and reclosing function applied on double-circuitparallel operating EHV transmission lines.

1.1.2 Speed of oscillations

Figure 5 presents informatively the phase currents as recorded at one endof the protected 500 kV transmission line during the pole-slip situation ina power system. The oscillations have been initiated by a single-phase-to-earth fault in phase L1 (increased magnitude of the phase current).

Figure 5: Phase currents in relay point during the pole slip conditions caused by a L1-N fault

The pole-slip frequency is in most cases not constant. The initial oscilla-tion speed is generally low and increases with time if the system starts thenon recoverable oscillation.

The described dependency might influence the dependability of the dis-tance protection scheme at slowly developing single-phase-to-earth faults.It can at the same time jeopardize the security of the same protectionscheme when the oscillations obtain higher speed. The pole slip protectionin REx 5xx terminals uses the adaptive criteria for the impedance speed todistinguish between the slow initial faults and increased speed of the mea-sured impedance at consecutive oscillations.

1.2 Requirements on protection systems during pole slip conditions in network

Two, generally contradictory requirements apply today on the protectionsystems when mechanical masses in power systems start to oscillate. Therequirements depend on the general role, which the protected elementplays within the power system.

0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900

4

2

2

4

6

8

94010 t

99001023.vsd


Version 02

1MRK 580 677-XENPage 5 – 124

Figure 6 presents a transmission line connecting a big production (powerplants) with the rest of the power system, which depends very much onthe delivered electric energy from the external resources.

The goal in such case is to keep the protected element (power line) of apower system in operation under all system conditions as long as possible.This requirement is extended even to emergency conditions, i.e. twophase operation of power line during dead time of a single-pole autore-closing. It is at the same time expected from the line protection system tooperate selectively for all line faults, which may occur during the oscilla-tions. In such case it is recommended to use within the REx 5xx terminalsthe so called power swing detection (PSD) function together with powerswing logic (PSL).

Figure 6: Power line delivering the electrical power to the consuming area

Generator protection must prevent damages to the generators in the powerplant independent of all other system conditions. The pole slip protectionis in such case used closed to the generators.

The second typical network configuration is presented on Figure 7. Aninter-connection transmission line connects two big and generally inde-pendent power systems. Mechanical oscillations appear in this casebetween two different systems and are dangerous for the stability of eachsystem separately.

Figure 7: Transmission line interconnecting two big power systems

99001024.vsd

~

~

~

POWERSYSTEM

GE

NE

RA

TIO

N

TRANSMISSION LINES

99001025.vsd

SYSTEM A SYSTEM BTRANSMISSION

LINE


Version 02

The goal in this particular case of a pole slip situation is to trip selectively(from the power system point-of-view) the connecting element(s) betweentwo different systems. The disconnection of a healthy power line is notselective in a classical way of understanding, but prevents the total col-lapse of at least one independent system. The pole slip protection is insuch case installed on the interconnection lines and sometimes evendeeper in each power system.

1.2.1 Oscillations and faults in power system

It has been already mentioned that the oscillations in modern power sys-tems appear as the consequences of sudden changes, caused either by bigchanges of a load or by different faults. Faults on different elements mayappear also during the mechanical oscillations. Very high demands are puttoday in such cases on modern protection equipment. The modern powerutilities permit no more any decrease of either dependability or security ofthe protection systems for the faults in primary system when theirmechanical masses oscillate due to one or another reason. The protectionsystem must remain stable for all kinds of external faults and must operatereliable for all internal faults. Some longer operating times are acceptablebut should not jeopardize the complete system selectivity.

Integration of different protection functions within the same modernnumerical protection terminals makes it possible to combine their opera-tion and program their interdependence under different system operatingconditions. Fast development of modern digital communication systemsincreases additionally the application of such adaptive functionality.


Version 02

1MRK 580 677-XENPage 5 – 126

2 Theory of operationMeasured impedance in relay point R (see Figure 1) on a protected powerline may follow different trajectories when the generators of a twomachine system start to oscillate. Some of the most characteristic trajecto-ries are presented on Figure 8.

Figure 8: Impedance trajectories during oscillations in power system and basic operating characteristics of the pole slip protection

The impedance measuring device is located in the origin of the R-X plane.The source impedance is located behind the relay. The sourceimpedance presents the continuation of the line impedance . The com-plete impedance between the ends of vectors and is called a sys-tem impedance . The magnitude and the position of the systemimpedance within the impedance plane determines the electrical centre ofthe possible oscillation. The electrical center is located in the middleof the system impedance, when both EMFs have the same magnitude.

(Equation 3)

(Equation 4)

R

jX ZSB

ZL

ZSA

1

2

3

45

6

7

11

10

9

8

99001026.vsd

12

Z·SA Z·SB

Z·L

Z·SA Z·SB

Z·S

Z·CO

Z·S Z·SA Z·L Z·SB+ + RS jXS+= =

Z·CO12--- Z·S Z·SA–⋅ RCO jXCO+= =


Version 02

The following equation apply in general conditions, when the EMFs atboth generators are not equal:

(Equation 5)

The oscillation detection characteristics 1 and 2 on Figure 8 are in theirresistive part parallel to the system impedance as long as its characteristicangle exceeds 75o. The same applies also to the resistive tripping char-acteristics 3 and 4.

(Equation 6)

The reactive tripping characteristics 5 and 6 (see Figure 8) are perpendic-ular to the system impedance characteristic and form with the R axis anangle of as long as .

Impedance trajectory 7 on Figure 8 presents a typical trajectory during a(probably) recoverable power swing, when the load current flows from Atowards B (see Figure 1). Similarly presents the impedance trajectory 8 apower swing, which started from the reverse load condition. Characteris-tic for both trajectories is that they do not pass the complete systemimpedance, which means that there is no pole slip condition in power sys-tem. The second trajectory passes the left tripping characteristic (4 on Fig-ure 8), which could be a necessary condition for the nonrecoverableoscillation and might require a tripping action.

Impedance trajectories 9, 10, 11 and 12 on Figure 8 are characteristic forthe pole slip conditions. They pass the system impedance line and com-plete impedance plane. Their shapes depend on particular system condi-tions. The measured impedance would follow the 12 trajectory only incase, when and voltages have exactly the same magnitude. Trajec-tory 9 is characteristic for the case when and trajectory 11 forthe opposite case.

The results of system studies should determine the necessary operatingconditions for the pole slip protection in different situations.

2.1 Detection of the oscillations and transitions

The operating principle used for the detection of the oscillations over theprotected primary element is based on a well proven methodas presented schematically on Figure 9.

An oscillation is recognized by the measuring element if the measuredimpedance needs to change from a ZEXT external impedance boundary toa ZINT internal impedance boundary (se also boundaries 1 and 2 on Fig-ure 8) a time, which is longer than the time set on the correspondingtimer. Faster changes of the measured impedance are recognized as faults.

Z·COZ·S

1E·B

E·A

---------+

------------------- Z·A–=

ϕS

ϕS

XS

RS-------

atan=

ϕS 90O– ϕS 75O≥

E·A E·B

E·A E·B>

∆Z·( ) ∆t( )⁄

∆t


Version 02

1MRK 580 677-XENPage 5 – 128

Power swing and pole slip are not only a three-phase phenomena. It is forthis reason necessary to monitor the impedance in each phase separately.The pole slip protection in REx 5xx terminals has built-in the correspond-ing oscillation detectors in each phase separately.

Impedance may change relatively slow also at developing high resistivefaults, which might influence the unwanted operation of the oscillationdetectors, when set to detect the oscillations with the highest possiblespeed (slip frequency up to 10Hz). The pole slip protection in REx 5xxterminals has built in an adaptive criterion, which operation is based on afact that the initial oscillations are usually slow. They increase their speedafter a certain number of slips. First oscillations are this way detected by atimer (see Figure 9) with longer set time delay. The consecutive oscilla-tions are detected by an additional timer, which has its operating time setshorter to be able to detect also the high speed oscillations.

Figure 9: Detection of the oscillation by the method

The oscillation is recognized as a transition only, if the transition imped-ance enters the impedance operating characteristic (see Figure 8) at oneside of the impedance plane and leaves it on the other side. Two differenttransitions are recognized by the PSP:

• Transition from forward to reverse (FwRv), when the measured impedance first enters the right side (R) or upper part (X) and leaves at the left (-R) or bottom (-X) part of the oscillation detection charac-teristic.

• Transition from reverse to forward (RvFw), when the measured impedance first enters the left (-R) or bottom (-X) part and leaves at the right (R) or upper (X) part of the oscillation detection character-istic.

It is not always necessary to trip the circuit breaker after the first pole sliphas been detected. This especially applies on recoverable slips, whichoccur during the abnormal system conditions. If one slip occurs during thedead time of a single pole autoreclosing on a power line it is still possiblethat the system will recover after the circuit breaker reconnects the thirdphase (see example on Figure 4). However, if more consecutive slips

R

jX

99001027.vsd

∆Ζ

&

ZEXT

ZINT

t OSCILLATION∆t

Impedance trajectory

∆Z( ) ∆t( )⁄


Version 02

occur, than it is better to disconnect the line and prevent this way the col-lapse of a complete system as well as big electrical and mechanicalstresses of the primary equipment. The PSP in REx 5xx terminals hasbuilt in counters, which count the number of the consecutive slips in thesystem. Separate counters count:

• The slips which enter the impedance area between the reactive trip-ping characteristics 5 and 6 (see Figure 8)

• The slips with remote electrical centers, which enter the inner bound-ary of the oscillation detection characteristic (boundary 2 on Figure 8), but remain outside the first operating area.

Settings of the resistive reach for the external and for the internal bound-ary of the oscillation detection element depend on the minimum loadimpedance of the protected element, which is calculated accordingto the equation:

(Equation 7)

Here represents the minimum possible system phase to phasevoltage (real value) and maximum possible loading of a protectedelement. The resistive reach of the external boundary depends on the linelength as follows.

(Equation 8)

The factor depends on the line length and has the following values:

• for lines longer than 150 km

• for lines longer than 80 km and shorter than 150 km

• for lines shorter than 80 km

The corresponding load angle (all angles presented in the document arespecified in electrical degrees) is this way equal to:

(Equation 9)

Maximum frequency of the initial slips is mostly between 2Hz and3Hz. It should be known from the system stability studies. The suggestedsetting value for the initial timer tP1 is 45ms. The corresponding value ofthe internal load angle is this way equal to:

(Equation 10)

This determines the required setting of the internal resistive boundary:

(Equation 11)

Setting for the tP2 timer, determining the maximum slip frequency for theconsecutive slips, follows the equation:

Z·Lmin

Z·LminUmin( )2

S·max

-------------------=

Umin kV[ ]S·max

R1EXT Z·Lmin KL⋅=

KL

KL 0,9=

KL 0,85=

KL 0,8=

δext 2Z·SA Z·L Z·SB+ +

2 R⋅ 1EXT-----------------------------------------atan⋅=

fsi

δint 360O fsi tP1 δext+⋅ ⋅=

R1INTZ·SA Z·L Z·SB+ +

2δ int

2--------

tan⋅-----------------------------------------=


Version 02

1MRK 580 677-XENPage 5 – 130

(Equation 12)

is a maximum slip frequency of the consecutive slips, which are stillsupposed to be detected by the pole slip protection.

The PSP issues a tripping command after any of counters reaches the setnumber of consecutive slips and the measured impedance passes one ofthe resistive tripping characteristics (3 and 4 on Figure 8).

2.2 Tripping on way in and on way out

The PSP protection in REx 5xx terminals has built-in two resistive trip-ping characteristics (see Figure 10):

• Right tripping characteristic 3, which passes in the impedance plane the first and the fourth quadrant

• Left tripping characteristic 4, which passes in the impedance plane the second and the third quadrant

Figure 10: Left (4) and right (3) tripping characteristics and setting of their resistive reach R1LTR and R1RTR respectively

Both tripping characteristic are parallel with the system impedance aslong as the system characteristic angle . In the opposite case isthe declination angle automatically equal to 75o.

tP2δint δext–

360O fsm⋅-------------------------=

fsm

R

ZL

ZSB

jX

ZS

ZSA

|EA| = |EB|

ZC0ZR

ZL

δL

δR

Z1RTR

Z1LTR

R1LTR R1RTR

3

4

99001028.vsd

Z·S

ϕS 75O≥


Version 02

The resistive tripping characteristics make possible to control the trippingangle between the EMFs of both generators and this way preventextremely high electrical and mechanical stresses of circuit breakers. Twooperating modes are available, dependent on which characteristic isselected for tripping at particular type of the impedance transition. If wesimplify the expressions and equalize the characteristics with their resis-tive reach settings R1LTR and R1RTR respectively, than the followingoperating modes are possible

• Operation “on way in” for the transition from forward to reverse (FwRv). The PSP will issue the tripping command, if the necessary number of FwRv transitions has been detected and the measured impedance enters the area left of the R1RTR operating characteristic (3 on Figures 8 and 10)

• Operation “on way out” for the transition from forward to reverse (FwRv). The PSP will issue the tripping command, if the necessary number of FwRv transitions has been detected and the measured impedance enters the area left of the R1LTR operating characteristic (4 on Figures 8 and 10)

• Operation “on way in” for the transition from reverse to forward (RvFw). The PSP will issue the tripping command, if the necessary number of RvFw transitions has been detected and the measured impedance enters the area right of the R1LTR operating characteris-tic (4 on Figures 8 and (4 on Figures 8 and 10)

• Operation “on way out” for the transition from reverse to forward (RvFw). The PSP will issue the tripping command, if the necessary number of RvFw transitions has been detected and the measured impedance enters the area right of the R1RTR operating characteris-tic (3 on Figures 8 and 10)

It is possible to activate each operating mode separately, to suit the opera-tion the best to the particular system conditions.

Setting of the resistive reach for the left resistive tripping characteristicfollows the equations:

(Equation 13)

(Equation 14)

See Figures 8 and 10 for the explanation of different parameters.

Setting of the resistive reach for the right tripping characteristic followsthe equations:

(Equation 15)

R1LTR Re Z1LTR·( ) Im Z1LTR·( ) 90o ϕS–( )tan⋅+=

Z1LTR· 12--- Z·S 1

j

180O δL

2-----–⟨ ⟩tan

----------------------------------------+ Z·SA–⋅ ⋅=

R1RTR Re Z1RTR·⟨ ⟩ Im Z1RTR·( ) 90O ϕS–( )tan⋅–=


Version 02

1MRK 580 677-XENPage 5 – 132

(Equation 16)

Equations 13 to 16 are derived according to Figure 10, which means when. This calculation satisfies also in great extent the system

requirements, when both EMFs differ in their magnitude.

2.3 Close-in and remote end tripping areas

The number of slips usually permitted by the pole slip protection is lowerfor the slips with electrical center closer to the relay point (within the pro-tected element) and higher for the slips with electrical center deeper in thenetwork (external to the protected element). The PSP in REx 5xx termi-nals has for this reason built-in a possibility to distinguish between theslips with close-in and remote electrical centers as well as to distinguishthe number of slips required for the tripping command in one or anotherregion. Two reactance characteristics (5 and 6 on Figure 8) divide thecomplete operating area into two different parts.

The first area is a so called close-in operating area. This area is limited inthe impedance plane by four operating characteristics (3, 4, 5, and 6 onFigure 8). The number of required slips for tripping within this area isusually lower than the number of slips required for tripping in the remotetripping area.

The second area is a so called remote tripping area. This area is limited inthe impedance plane by the operating characteristics 2, 3, 4 and 5 in for-ward direction as well as 2, 3, 4 and 6 in reverse direction (see Figure 8).

Z1RTR· 12--- Z·S 1

jδR

2------

tan

--------------------– Z·SA–⋅ ⋅=

E·A E·B=


Version 02

3 DesignThe pole slip protection in REx 5xx terminals measures the phase imped-ance

(Equation 17)

separately in each phase. and are measured phase voltage andcurrent phasors respectively, Ln is a corresponding phase designation (L1,L2 and L3). Figure 11 presents the operating characteristic for the poleslip protection in impedance plane with all the corresponding settingparameters. For detailed information on setting parameters see the settingtable under item 7.3.

Figure 11: Operating characteristic of the pole slip protection with corre-sponding settings in the impedance plane

The phase impedances are calculated in a digital signal processor and thefollowing binary signals are used later on within the functional logic:

Z·mLnU· Ln

I·Ln---------=

U· Ln I·Ln

R

jX ZSB

ZL

ZSA

99001029.vsd

SCA

R1REXT

R1RINT

R1RTR

R1LEXT

R1LINT

R1LTR

X1FEXTX1FINT

X1PSLFWR1PSLFW

X1PSLRVR1PSLRV


Version 02

1MRK 580 677-XENPage 5 – 134

• ZOUTPSLn when the measured impedance enters the external impedance detection boundary in phase Ln (n = 1, 2, 3). See bound-ary 1 on Figure 8.

• ZINPSLn when the measured impedance enters the internal imped-ance detection boundary in phase Ln. See boundary 2 on Figure 8.

• FwRvLn when the transition from forward to reverse direction has been detected in phase Ln

• RvFwLn when the transition from reverse to forward direction has been detected in phase Ln

• Additional signals, which determine the position of the measured impedance regarding all specified operating characteristics. The positioning is performed in each phase separately.

3.1 Detection of oscillations

The oscillations are recognized, if detected in one or two out of all threephases. The user can select by the configuration, which of the operatingmodes is active during different system conditions. It is possible to havethe “one of three” mode active during normal three-phase operating con-ditions and switch to “two of three” mode during the dead time of the sin-gle pole autoreclosing on a protected line.

Figure 12: Simplified logic diagram for an “one of three” oscillation detec-tion logic

The oscillation is detected in “one of three” operating mode (see Figure12) if in at least one phase the time difference, when the measured imped-ance enters the external (ZOUTPSLn) and the internal (ZINPSLn) imped-ance boundary, is longer than the time set on the tP1 timer. All three tP1timers on Figure 12 have the same setting. The DET1of3 signal remainslogical one as long as the measured impedance in at least one phaseremains within the external boundary.

The oscillation is recognized as the consecutive one, if the measuredimpedance re-enters in at least one phase the external boundary within thetime interval set on tW waiting timer. In such case the tP2 timer becomes

ZOUTPSL1

ZINPSL1&

ZOUTPSL2

ZINPSL2

ZOUTPSL3

ZINPSL3

&

&

t

tP1

t

tP1

t

tP1

>1

>1

>1 >1

&

ttW & t

tP2

DET1of3 - int.

99001030.vsd


Version 02

the relevant one for the determination of a consecutive oscillation. Thismakes it possible to detect the consecutive slips with higher speed thanthe initial one.

Figure 13 presents a simplified logic diagram for the “two of three” oper-ating mode of the oscillation detection logic. The basic operating principleis the same as for the “one of three” operating mode with the differencethat the initial oscillation must be detected in at least two phases, beforethe DET2of3 signal becomes logical one.

Figure 13: Simplified logic diagram for a “two of three” oscillation detec-tion logic

3.2 Logic for cooperation with the line distance protection

It has already been mentioned that the transition impedance might enterthe operating area of the line distance protection function and causes itsunwanted operation, if the necessary counter measures have not been pro-vided. The pole slip protection detects the transient impedance and can beused as a disabling function for the line distance protection functionwithin the same REx 5xx protection and control terminal.

Figure 14 presents in simplified form the logic diagram used for the coop-eration with the associated line distance protection, when necessary.

The PSP-START output logical signal can be used within the terminalconfiguration, to block the operation of different distance protectionzones. Its appearance depends on the selection of the “one of three” or“two of three” operating mode, which is possible by the correspondingconnection of the following functional input signals:

• PSP--REL1P, which releases the “one of three” operating mode

• PSP--BLK1P, which blocks the “one of three” operating mode

• PSP--REL2P, which releases the “two of three” operating mode

• PSP--BLK2P, which blocks the “two of three” operating mode

ZOUTPSL1

ZINPSL1&

&

&

&

ZOUTPSL2

ZINPSL2

ZOUTPSL3

ZINPSL3

&

&

t

tP1

t

tP1

t

tP1

>1

&

&

&

>1

&

&

&

>1 >1

&

ttW & t

tP2

DET2of3 - int.

99001031.vsd


Version 02

1MRK 580 677-XENPage 5 – 136

The following conditions block the PSP--START output signal and mightthis way release the operation of the distance protection function evenduring the oscillation conditions.

• PSP--BLOCK - input functional signal, which blocks the operation of the complete pole slip protection

• The PSP--START signal is disabled, if the measured impedance remains within the external impedance boundary for the time, which is longer as the time interval set on tR2 timer. It is possible to disable this functionality by the continuous presence of a logical one signal on functional input PSP--BLK1.

Figure 14: Logic for cooperation with distance protection function

• The PSP--START output signal is disabled after the time delay set on the tR1 timer, if the oscillation appears before the functional input signal PSP--I0CHECK becomes logical one. This way it is possible to block the PSP function and release the operation of the line dis-tance protection, if for example, an earth fault appears in the network during the oscillations. This functionality can be disabled by the log-ical one signal on the PSP--BLK2 functional input.

• The PSP--START functional input is disabled, if the measured impedance have been detected within the external operating bound-ary in all three phases and the PSP--I0CHECK functional input sig-nal became logical one within the time interval shorter than the time delay set on timer tEF after the PSD--TRSP logical input changed from logical one to logical zero. This function prevents the appear-ance of the PSP--START output signal in cases, when one pole of the circuit breaker closes on persistent single phase fault after the single pole autoreclosing dead time, if the initial single phase fault and sin-

PSP--TRSPt

tEF&

PSP--I0CHECK

&DET-int.

PSP--BLK2

&

t10 ms

>1

t

tR1

>1

&PSP--BLKI1 t

tR2

PSP--BLOCK

ZOUTPSL3

ZOUTPSL2

ZOUTPSL1

&

DET1of3 - int.

PSP--REL1P

PSP--BLK1P&

DET2of3 - int.

PSP--REL2P

PSP--BLK2P&

>1 ttHZ PSP--STARTZ

>1 PSP--ZOUT

ZINPSL1

ZINPSL2

ZINPSL3

>1 PSP--ZIN

99001032.vsd

INHIBIT

&


Version 02

gle pole opening of the circuit breaker causes the power swinging in the remaining two phases.

3.3 Tripping criteria The complete impedance operating area is divided on six smaller regions,as presented schematically on Figure 15. Impedance trajectories present-ing the forward to reverse (TRFwRv) and the reverse to forward(TRRvFw) transitions are shown as well.

Figure 15: The impedance operating plane is divided on six smaller regions

The operating logic for the pole slip protection is rather complex. It is forthis reason presented by the flow charts and not by the logic diagrams.The flow chart on Figure 16 presents completely the operation of the PSPfor the FwRv transitions. Similarly presents the flow chart on Figure 17the operation of the PSP for the RvFw transitions.

R

jX

ZSA

99001033.vsd

2

3

46

1 5

TrFwRv

TrRvFw


Version 02

1MRK 580 677-XENPage 5 – 138

Figure 16: Flow-chart presenting the operation of the pole slip protection for the forward to reverse transition (FwRv) after the oscilla-tion has been detected

YES

CLEARCOUNTERS FwRv

START

NEWFwRv

OSCILLATIONDETECTED ?

NO

TRFwRv=ON?

NO

TRFastFwRv=ON?

NOTRDelFwRv=ON

?

NO

nFast =nFastFwRv

?

YES

nDel =nDelFwRv

?

YES

YES

TrIncFwRv=ON?

TrOutFwRv=ON?

TrIncFwRv=ON?

TrOutFwRv=ON?

YES YES

NO NO

NO

IMPEDANCEWITHINAREA 1




YES YES YES YES

NO NO NO NO

YES YES YES YES

TRIP

OSC.FwRvCOMPLETED

?

OSC. FwRvCOMPLETED

?

NO

NONO

YES YES

nFast = nFast+1 nDel = nDel+1

Zm OUTSIDEDETECTION

AREA ?

Zm OUTSIDEDETECTION

AREA ?

NO NONO NO

YESYES

99001034.vsd


Version 02

Figure 17: Flow-chart presenting the operation of the pole slip protection for the reverse to forward transition (RvFw) after the oscilla-tion has been detected

YES

CLEARCOUNTERS RvFw

START

NEWRvFw

OSCILLATIONDETECTED ?

NO

TRRvFw=ON?

NO

TRFastRvFw=ON?

NOTRDelRvFw=ON

?

NO

nFast =nFastRvFw

?

YES

nDel =nDelRvFw

?

YES

YES

TrIncRvFw=ON?

TrOutRvFw=ON?

TrIncRvFw=ON?

TrOutRvFw=ON?

YES YES

NO NO

NO





YES YES YES YES

NO NO NO NO

YES YES YES YES

TRIP

OSC.RvFwCOMPLETED

?

OSC. RvFwCOMPLETED

?

NO

NONO

YES YES

nFast = nFast+1 nDel = nDel+1

Zm OUTSIDEDETECTION

AREA ?

Zm OUTSIDEDETECTION

AREA ?

NO NONO NO

YESYES

99001035.vsd


Version 02

1MRK 580 677-XENPage 5 – 140

4 Setting instructionsThe complete operation together with reach setting of the pole slip protec-tion can locally be set under the menu:

SettingsFunctions

Group nImpedance

PoleSlipProt

4.1 Necessary technical data

These setting instructions are prepared as a setting example for the powernetwork reduced to the two machine system as presented on Figure 18.

Figure 18: Power system reduced to a two machine system

Following are the necessary technical data:

Rated system voltage:

Minimum expected system voltage:

Rated system frequency:

Ratio of voltage instrument transformers:

Ratio of current instrument transformers used:

Line length:

Line positive sequence impedance:

Source A positive sequence impedance:

Source B positive sequence impedance:

Maximum expected load in forward direction (at minimum system volt-age :

with power factor

99001019.vsd

~~

EA

δA= const δB= f(t)

EB

A BZSA ZSBZL

R

Ur 400kV=

Umin 380kV=

fr 50Hz=

Up

Us------

4003

---------- kV[ ]

0,11

3----------- kV[ ]------------------------ 3636= =

Ip

Is---- 1200 A[ ]

1 A[ ]---------------------- 1200= =

L 210km=

Z·Lp 10,71 j75,6+( )ohm=

Z·SAp 1,15 j43,5+( )ohm=

Z·SBp 5,3 j35,7+( )ohm=

Umin

S·max 1000MVA= ϕmax( )cos 0,95=


Version 02

Maximum expected slip frequency for consecutive slips:

Expected initial slip frequency:

The required tripping angle at pole slip conditions must be between thefollowing values (determined by the system studies and electrical charac-teristics of the used primary equipment):

(Equation 18)

(Equation 19)

It is supposed that similar pole slip protection device will be used on theremote line end. I such case it is advice to program the operation of thepole slip protection for the slips in forward direction only.

The result of the system studies have shown that:

• It is possible to have one slip over the remaining two phases between both systems during the dead time of the single pole autoreclosing. It is a high probability that the system will remain stable after the suc-cessful single pole autoreclosing.

• The second slip, if detected on the protected line, should be discon-nected as fast as possible. For this reason the trip in incoming mode of operation is suggested.

• The selective operation of the pole slip protections in the complete network is obtained, if the number of the remote slips is less than four, before they system is split by the pole slip protection in the observed point.

4.2 Impedance transformation factor

System data are generally presented by their primary values. This is alsothe case for this setting example. The corresponding impedance transfor-mation factor is equal to:

(Equation 20)

The secondary values of the corresponding impedances are equal to:

(Equation 21)

(Equation 22)

fsmax 8Hz=

fsi 2,5Hz=

δtrL 115O≤

δtrR 245O≥

KIMP

Ip

Is----

Up

Us------

-------

1200 A[ ]1 A[ ]

----------------------

4003

---------- kV[ ]

0,11

3----------- kV[ ]------------------------

------------------------ 0,33= = =

Z·L KIMP Z·Lp 3,53 j24,95+( )ohm=⋅=

Z·SA KIMP Z·SAp⋅ 0,38 j14,36+( )ohm= =


Version 02

1MRK 580 677-XENPage 5 – 142

(Equation 23)

4.3 Minimum load impedance

Minimum load impedance appears in forward direction and is calculatedaccording to equation 7:

(Equation 24)

4.4 System impedance and center of oscillations

The system impedance is (equation 3) equal to:

(Equation 25)

The system characteristic angle is (equation 6) equal to:

(Equation 26)

The corresponding setting of the system characteristic angle is this way:

(Equation 27)

The center of the oscillation has the coordinates (equation 4):

(Equation 28)

4.5 Resistive reach of the external boundary in forward direction

The external boundary for the oscillation detection characteristic in for-ward direction (right side boundary) has its resistive reach equal to (equa-tion 8)

(Equation 29)

We considered in this case , because the line is longer than150km.

The corresponding load angle is (equation 9) equal to:

(Equation 30)

4.6 Resistive reach of the internal boundary in forward direction

We suppose the setting of the first transition timer . Thisbrings the necessary load angle for the right internal boundary of theoscillation detection characteristic (equation 10):

(Equation 31)

Z·SB KIMP Z·SBp⋅ 1,75 j11,78+( )ohm= =

Z·LminUmin( )2

S·max

------------------- KIMP 47,63ohm=⋅=

Z·S Z·SA Z·L Z·SB+ + 5,63 j51,08+( )ohm= =

ϕS

XS

RS-------

83,7O=atan=

SCA 83,7O=

Z·CO12--- Z·S Z·SA–⋅ 2,45 j11,19+( )ohm= =

R1REXT Z·Lmin KL 42,87ohm=⋅=

KL 0,9=

δext 2Z·SA Z·L Z·SB+ +2 R⋅ 1REXT

----------------------------------------- 61,88O=atan⋅=

tP1 45ms=

δint 360O fsi tP1 δext 102,4O=+⋅ ⋅=


Version 02

The corresponding resistive reach setting is this way (equation 11):

(Equation 32)

It is necessary to check that this operating characteristic (boundary 2 onFigure 8) covers completely the distance protection zones, which shouldbe block during the power swings in system, if the pole slip protection isused also for these purposes. In this particular case we check only the pri-mary fault resistance, which could be covered by the corresponding dis-tance protection zones:

(Equation 33)

This resistive reach satisfies in most practical cases for the resistive cover-ing of the distance protection zones one and two. Factor 0.95 in equation33 is considered as a safety factor. This way we can keep the setting of thefirst transition timer to .

4.7 Setting of the tP2 timer

The tP2 timer serves the detection of (generally faster) consecutive slips.Its setting is calculated according to equation 12 and the specified value ofthe maximum expected slip frequency:

(Equation 34)

The required value is well over the minimum suggested value of 10ms.The maximum detectable slip frequency with setting of the tP2 timerequal to and with unchanged settings of the impedanceoscillation detection boundaries is equal to:

(Equation 35)

This is a very high value, which usually does not appear in a real powersystem.

4.8 Settings of the reverse oscillation detection resistive boundaries

It has been mentioned that the similar pole slip protection device isintended to be used at the remote line end. The maximum load in reversedirection is also much smaller than in forward direction. The systemrequirements require this way only the operation for the pole slips withtheir electrical center in forward direction. The reverse (left side) resistivereach of the oscillation detection characteristics can be for this reasonequal to the one in forward direction:

(Equation 36)

R1RINTZ·SA Z·L Z·SB+ +

2δ int

2--------

tan⋅----------------------------------------- 20,69ohm= =

RFp1

KIMP--------------- R1RINT 0,95⋅⋅ 59,5ohm= =

tP1 45ms=

tP2δ int δext–

360O fsm⋅------------------------- 14ms==

tP2min 10ms=

fsmax

δint δext–

360O tP2min⋅----------------------------------- 11,25Hz= =

R1LEXT R1REXT 42,87ohm= =


Version 02

1MRK 580 677-XENPage 5 – 144

(Equation 37)

4.9 Setting of the right and left tripping characteristics

The necessary setting of the resistive reach for the right tripping charac-teristic is calculated according to equations 15 and 16:

(Equation 38)

(Equation 39)

(Equation 40)

The condition is this way fulfilled.

Necessary setting of the resistive reach for the left tripping characteristicis calculated according to the equations 13 and 14:

(Equation 41)

(Equation 42)

The condition is this way fulfilled.

4.10 Setting of the reactive tripping characteristics

The reactive operating characteristics are presented in Figure 8 andmarked by 5 for the operation in forward direction and by 6 for the opera-tion in reverse direction.

Since it is required to operate only for the pole slip situation with centersof slips in forward direction, and because a similar device will be used atthe remote line terminal, only the operation for the transition from for-ward to reverse direction (FwRv) is required. This kind of operation doesnot require any reverse reach. It is advised for this reason to set the corre-sponding setting parameters to their minimum values.

(Equation 43)

(Equation 44)

R1LINT R1RINT 20,69ohm= =

Z1RTR· 12--- Z·S 1

jδtrR

2---------

tan

-----------------------– Z·SA–⋅ ⋅ 18,72 j9,38+( )ohm= =

R1RTR Re Z1RTR·⟨ ⟩ Im Z1RTR·( ) 90O ϕS–( )tan⋅–=

R1RTR 17,68ohm=

R1RTR R1RINT<

Z1LTR· 12--- Z·S 1

j

180O δtrL

2--------–⟨ ⟩tan

-------------------------------------------+ Z·SA–⋅ ⋅=

Z1LTR· 18,72 j9,38+( )ohm=

R1LTR Re Z1LTR·( ) Im Z1LTR·( ) 90o ϕS–( )tan⋅+=

R1LTR 19,76ohm=

R1LTR R1LINT<

R1PSLRv 0,1ohm=

X1PSLRv 0,1ohm=


Version 02

The tripping characteristic in forward direction should cover for the slipswith their electrical center on the protected power line. 10% of safety mar-gin is sufficient in order not to overreach for the slips with their centers onthe adjacent power lines. The necessary settings are this way equal to:

(Equation 45)

(Equation 46)

4.11 Setting of the reactive reach of the oscillation detection characteristics

The reactive reach of the oscillation detection characteristic should coverin forward and in reverse direction with sufficient margin (10 to 15%) thepower lines and other elements, for which the pole slip protection shouldprovide also the back up protection for the slips with remote centers of theoscillations. System studies should determine the necessary reach as wellas the number of permitted remote slips more in details.

We suppose for this example that the pole slip protection should alsoblock the operation of the distance protection zones one and two. Zonetwo must be set to at least 120% of the protected line. The necessary reac-tive reach of the internal boundary in the forward direction is this wayequal to:

(Equation 47)

Reactive reach of the external oscillation detection boundary should per-mit the same speed of detected slips as the one determined in the resistivedirection. We can even provide some additional margin (5%).

(Equation 48)

Setting of the reactive reach in the reverse direction depends on the sys-tem conditions. In our case we do not need to cover any special distanceprotection zone. It is also not necessary to operate for the slips with theircenter in the reverse direction, since the remote end pole slip protectiontakes care of such cases.

It is anyway suggested to set the reactive reach in reverse direction to atleast 10% of the one in forward direction. The impedance differencebetween the external and the internal boundary should also in this casepermit detection of the same slip frequency as in the forward direction.This way the necessary values are:

(Equation 49)

(Equation 50)

R1PSLFw 0,9 Re Z·L( )⋅ 3,18ohm= =

X1PSLFw 0,9 Im Z·L( )⋅ 22,45ohm= =

X1FINT 1,15 1,2 Im Z·L( ) 34,43ohm=⋅ ⋅=

X1FEXT 1,05 R1REXT R1RINT–( ) X1FINT+⋅=

X1FEXT 57,73ohm=

X1RINT 0,1 X1FINT⋅ 3,44ohm= =

X1REXT 1,05 R1REXT R1RINT–( ) X1RINT+⋅=

X1REXT 26,75ohm=


Version 02

1MRK 580 677-XENPage 5 – 146

4.12 Setting of the tW waiting timer

Setting of the waiting timer influences the detection of the consecutiveslips. The tW timer must be set higher than the time the measured imped-ance needs after leaving the impedance detection area (external imped-ance boundary) and entering it again on the other side of the impedanceplane. It is necessary to consider the minimum possible speed of the oscil-lations, which might occur in the system. Assumption of 50% of the initialslip frequency is a good approximation, when more exact data are notknown. The time necessary for the impedance to move from the externalleft impedance boundary (after the FwRv transition has been completed)to the external right impedance boundary (to start the detection of the newoscillation) is calculated according to the equation:

(Equation 51)

and represent the corresponding load angles at the right andthe left external resistive boundary. In our case they are equal to 61.9 and298.1 degrees respectively. Factor 1.3 is a safety factor, which could beconsidered also in most other cases, when the exact technical characteris-tics of the system are not known.

4.13 Setting of the tripping modes and the transition counters

The pole slip protection should according to the system requirementsoperate only for the slips with their electrical center on the protectedpower line and for the transitions from the forward to the reverse direc-tion. It is for this reason necessary to set the parameters related to thereverse to forward (RvFw) transition to the following values:

• TRRvFw = Off

• TRIncRvFw = Off

• TROutRvFw = Off

• TRFastRvFw = Off

• TRDelRvFw = Off

• nFastRvFw = 10

• nDelRvFw = 10

According to the results of the system studies the following settings areapplicable for the transitions detected from forward to the reverse direc-tion:

• TRFwRv = On

• TRIncFwRv = On

• TROutFwRv = Off

• TRFastFwRv = On

• TRDelFwRv = On

• nFastFwRv = 1

• nDelFwRv = 3

tW 1,3δRext 360O δLext–( )+

360O 0,5 fsi⋅( )⋅------------------------------------------------------- 358ms=⋅=

δRext δLext


Version 02

See the setting table for more detailed explanation of the setting parame-ters.

4.14 Additional timers in the oscillation detection circuits

Timers tR1, tR2, tEF, and tHZ are used in the oscillation detection logic(see Figure 14) to suit the oscillation detection to different system condi-tions. Their settings must be coordinated with the time delays set on dif-ferent protection devices, like distance protection, directional or nondirectional residual overcurrent protection, dead time of the single poleautoreclosing, etc.

4.14.1 tHZ hold timer The tHz hold timer prolongs the duration of the PSP--START signal,which could be use for blocking the distance protection zones. Its settingshould be with a certain margin (10 to 15%) longer than the time requiredfor the detection of the consecutive slips with fastest slip frequency in asystem. In our case the required value is equal to:

4.14.2 tR1 inhibit timer The tR1 inhibit timer delays the influence of the detected residual current on the inhibit criteria for the PSP function. It prevents the operation

of the function for short transients in the residual current as measured bythe terminal. The time delay of 50 ms is suggested as default, when theresidual current criteria is used.

4.14.3 tR2 inhibit timer The tR2 inhibit timer disables the output PSP--START signal, if the mea-sured impedance remains within the impedance detection area for morethan the set time is. This time delay is generally set to 2 seconds, whenused in the protection.

4.14.4 tEF timer The setting of the tEF timer must cover with sufficient margin the openingtime of an associated circuit breaker and the dead time of the single poleautoreclosing together with the circuit breaker closing time.

tHZ 1,151

fsm-------⋅ 144ms= =

3 I0⋅


Version 02

1MRK 580 677-XENPage 5 – 148

5 Configuration possibilitiesThe pole slip protection (PSP) is a part of a functional library availablefor the REx 5xx protection, control and monitoring terminals. It can beused as a stand alone function within the terminals, but the best character-istics and operating possibilities will be achieved when used together withother function from the functional library.

The following functions can be used together with the pole slip protectionor as its complementary functions:

• Line distance protection with different numbers of zones: ZMn

• Dead line detection function: DLD

• Phase selection function PHS with its current starting criteria STCNDI

• Power swing logic: PSL

• Fuse failure protection: FUSE

• Tripping logic: TRIP

• Directional or non directional overcurrent earth fault protection: TEF

• Line differential protection DIFL in line differential protection ter-minals

• etc.

The configuration possibilities offer many different possible solutions forthe application of the PSP in different parts of the power systems. Beloware described the most common possibilities.

5.1 PSP--BLOCK input This signal should be configured to any internal or external condition,which must block the operation of the PSP. It can be configured to thetripping outputs of the non impedance based functions, which operateindependent of the system oscillation conditions. Typical examples areline differential protection and overcurrent earth fault protection (direc-tional or non directional) during normal three phase operating conditions.It is also to connect it over the dedicated binary input to some externalblocking conditions.

5.2 PSP--BLK1 input This input should be connected to the FIXD-ON signal, if it is not neces-sary to enable the distance protection function (and this way cause thetripping of an associated circuit breaker) after the measured impedanceremained within the external oscillation detection area for an abnormallylong time. Connect it to FIXD-OFF signal if the condition should beactive. The input can be connected to some external condition over thededicated binary input of the terminal.

5.3 PSP--BLK2 input The condition blocks the operation of the detection function, if the resid-ual current has been detected in the current measuring circuits. The detec-tion of the residual current was in past a criteria that the fault has been


Version 02

detected in the network and sufficient reason to disable the oscillationdetection and enable the distance protection to operate in such cases. Usethis possibility only in cases, when it is necessary to adjust the function tothe existing system conditions. In such cases connect the input to theFIXD-OFF signal.

In all other cases it is recommended to disable this functionality by con-necting the input to FIXD-ON signal. It is recommended to use duringnormal three phase operating conditions the directional or non directionalovercurrent earth fault protection as the protection against the earth faults.

5.4 PSP--TR1P input Configure the input to the information that a single pole tripping com-mend has been issued to the circuit breaker. TRIP-TR1P output signalfrom the tripping function within the terminal is a proper internal signal.Use this possibility only to disable the operation of the function andenable the operation of the distance protection (when blocked by the PSP)after the single pole reclosing of CB on persistent fault. Disable the func-tionality by connecting the input to FIXD-OFF in all other cases.

5.5 PSP--I0CHECK input Connect the functional input to the TEF--START functional output of theresidual overcurrent protection (directional or non-directional) or to thePHS--STN output signal of the phase selection function. Use this connec-tion only when it is necessary to disable the operation of the PSP protec-tion by the detection of the residual current on the protected element.Connect the input to FIXD-OFF signal in all other cases.

5.6 PSP--REL1P Logical one on this functional input releases the “one of three” phaseoscillation detecting mode. Activate this input during normal three phaseoperation of the protected element. Disable this input during the abnormalsystem conditions, for example during the single pole reclosing cycle.

5.7 PSP--BLK1P Activate this input during the abnormal system operating conditions,when only the “one of three” phase operating mode is not a sufficientinformation on oscillation in power system.

5.8 PSP--REL2P Activate this input during the abnormal system operating conditions,when the “two of three” phase operating mode is a required informationon possible oscillation in power system.

5.9 PSP--BLK2P It is possible to activate this input during normal three phase system oper-ating conditions. Disable it in case when the PSP-REL2P input is acti-vated.


Version 02

1MRK 580 677-XENPage 5 – 150

5.10 PSP--VTSZ input Connect this functional input to the FUSE-VTSZ functional output of thefuse failure function in the terminal itself. It is also possible to connect itindirectly via the corresponding binary input to the auxiliary contact ofthe MCB used in the voltage measuring circuits.

5.11 PSP--TRIP output Configure it to the tripping function (TRIP-TRIN) or to some other binaryoutputs of the terminal, to cause the required tripping of an associated cir-cuit breaker.

5.12 PSP--START output Informative signal, which can also be used to block the selected distanceprotection zones. Connect it to the ZMn--BLOCK functional input signalsof the distance protection zones (n is a number of the distance protectionzone).

5.13 Remaining functional outputs

The remaining functional outputs PSP--TRAFWRV, PSP--TRARVFW,PSP--ZIN, and PSP--ZOUT are available mostly for the information pur-poses. Configure them to the disturbance recording function in the termi-nal or via the corresponding binary outputs to the external disturbancerecorder.


Version 02

6 TestingConsider all general conditions for testing the REx 5xx series terminals.

The oscillation detection function in PSP operates in two different operat-ing modes:

• “One of three” phase operating mode

• “Two of three” phase operating mode

Only the complete three phase testing equipment is suitable for testing thefunction, when it operates in “two of three” phase operating mode. In thiscase is not applicable the testing equipment with three independent volt-age circuits and one current source, which connects the measured currentinto different measuring loops for different fault types. ABB AutomationProducts AB recommends, although it does not absolutely request, the useof the RTS 21 (FREJA) testing equipment for the purposes of secondaryinjections testing.

6.1 Connection Connect the testing equipment and the terminal according to the valid ter-minal diagram and the established practice for testing the three phase dis-tance protection devices.

6.2 Measurement of the operating characteristics

Testing instructions for measurement of the operation characteristics arerelated to Figure 19. Apply to the terminal the desired reach setting. Theoperating characteristic should be tested by applying the two phase faultsin different points, to avoid special testing for the one of three and two ofthree operating modes.

6.2.1 Additional settings on the terminal

Apply the following additional settings on the terminal

• TRFwRv = On

• TRIncFwRv = On

• TROutFwRv = Off

• TRFastFwRv = On

• TRDelFwRv = Off

• nFastFwRv = 0

• nDelFwRv = 10

• TRRvFw = On

• TRIncRvFw = On

• TROutRvFw = Off

• TRFastRvFw = On

• TRDelRvFw = Off

• nFastRvFw = 0

• nDelRvFw = 10


Version 02

1MRK 580 677-XENPage 5 – 152

6.2.2 Measurement of the impedance boundaries

Set the measured impedance in the first quadrant to XM = 0 (measuredreactance) and measured resistance

(Equation 52)

Decrease slowly (the transition from R1REXT to R1RINT must takelonger time then the time set on the tP1 timer) the resistance and observeon local HMI the corresponding operating signals as follows:

• PSP--ZOUT appears when

• PSP--ZIN appears when

• PSP--TRIP appears when

Figure 19: Operating characteristics with suggested testing points

Set the measured impedance in the third quadrant to XM = 0 (measuredreactance) and measured resistance (absolute value) to

(Equation 53)

RM 1,2 R1REXT⋅=

0,95 R1REXT⋅ RM 1,05 R1REXT⋅≤ ≤

0,95 R1RINT⋅ RM 1,05 R1RINT⋅≤ ≤

0,95 R1RTR⋅ RM 1,05 R1RTR⋅≤ ≤

R

jX ZSB

ZL

ZSA

99001036.vsd

SCA

R1REXT

R1RINT

R1RTR

R1LEXT

R1LINT

R1LTR

X1FEXTX1FINT

X1PSLFWR1PSLFW

X1PSLRVR1PSLRV

Z1REXT

RM 1,2 R1LEXT⋅=


Version 02

Decrease slowly the resistance and observe on local HMI (or by themeans of front connected personal computer and the CAP 531 configura-tion tool) the corresponding operating signals as follows:



• PSP--TRIP appears when

Set the measured impedance in the first quadrant to RM = 0 (measuredresistance) and measured reactance to:

(Equation 54)

Decrease slowly the reactance and observe on local HMI the correspond-ing operating signals as follows:



Set the measured impedance in the third quadrant to RM = 0 (measuredresistance) and measured reactance (absolute value) to:

(Equation 55)

Decrease slowly the reactance and observe on local HMI the correspond-ing operating signals as follows:



Set the measured impedance in the third quadrant to and . Decrease slowly the measured reactanceuntil the signal PSP--TRIP appears on the local HMI. The recorded oper-ating value should be in the following limits:

(Equation 56)

Set the measured impedance in the first quadrant to and . Decrease slowly the measured absolutevalue of the reactance until the signal PSP--TRIP appears on the localHMI. The recorded operating value should be in the following limits:

(Equation 57)

Set the measured impedance in the first quadrant to and . Decrease slowly the measured resistance untilthe signal PSP--ZOUT appears on the local HMI. Check that the mea-sured value and the calculated angle correspond to the condition:

(Equation 58)

0,95 R1LEXT⋅ RM 1,05 R1LEXT⋅≤ ≤

0,95 R1LINT⋅ RM 1,05 R1LINT⋅≤ ≤

0,95 R1LTR⋅ RM 1,05 R1LTR⋅≤ ≤

XM 1,2 X1FEXT⋅=

0,95 X1FEXT⋅ XM 1,05 X1FEXT⋅≤ ≤

0,95 X1FINT⋅ XM 1,05 X1FINT⋅≤ ≤

XM 1,2 X1FEXT⋅=

0,95 X1REXT⋅ XM 1,05 X1REXT⋅≤ ≤

0,95 X1RINT⋅ XM 1,05 X1RINT⋅≤ ≤

RM R1PSLRV–=XM 1,2 X1PSLRV–( )⋅=

0,95 X1PSLRV⋅ XM 1,05 X1PSLRV⋅≤ ≤

RM R1PSLRV=XM 1,2 X1PSLRV⋅=

0,95 X1PSLFW⋅ XM 1,05 X1PSLFW⋅≤ ≤

RM 1,2 R1REXT⋅=XM 0,5 X1FEXT⋅=

SCA 5O–0,5 X1FEXT⋅

RM R1REXTM–--------------------------------------------

atan SCA 5O+≤ ≤


Version 02

1MRK 580 677-XENPage 5 – 154

Parameter is a recorded value of the measured resistancewhen measuring the operating resistance for the R1REXT operating char-acteristic.

Check the correct operation of the “two of three” phase operating mode.Apply the single phase fault and repeat the measurement of the operatingvalue for the R1RTR. The PSP--TRIP signal must not appear when themeasured resistance is decreased under the previous measured operatingvalue.

Observe on local HMI also the PSP--START functional output signal. Itshould be active always when the slowly decrease impedance enters theinner oscillation detection boundary.

Apply the required settings for the operating parameters, which have beenchanged for the purposes of the measurement (item 6.2.1).

6.3 Testing the pole slip functionality

Programmable testing equipment is required for testing of the completefunctionality. Two possible ways of testing are applicable:

• It is possible to replay by the testing equipment some of the most characteristic transients, which have been recorded by digital distur-bance recorders during the system study stage. This way it is neces-sary to observe the responses of the function on particular recorded transients and compare them with the required response.

• It is possible to program the sequence of the measuring points in the testing equipment and their repetition rate. The programs should be prepared according to the settings applied and the required function-ality of the PSP function. Figure 20 presents two typical examples of the required operating points to be programmed.

The first programmed sequence includes two operating points (3 and 4) inthe fast tripping area. The sequence is applicable for testing of the func-tionality, when the FwRv oscillations should cause the tripping action.The following special requirements should be observed:

• The measured impedance should remain for the first sequence in the operating point 2 longer than the time set on the initial timer tP1. For the consecutive sequences the time should be longer than the one set on the tP2 timer.

• The PSP protection should issued the PSP--TRIP signal, if it is set for the incoming trip in the fast tripping region, when the measured impedance reaches the operating point 3. It is necessary to observe that the sequence must be completed for nFastFwRv times.

• The PSP protection should issued the PSP--TRIP signal, if it is set for the outgoing trip in the fast tripping region, when the measured impedance reaches the operating point 4. It is necessary to observe that the sequence must be completed for nFastFwRv times.

• The programmed sequence must reach also the measuring points 5 and 6, if the oscillation is supposed to be completed and a higher number of oscillations is required for the final trip command. Observe also, that the time required to move from point 5 over the

R1REXTM


Version 02

points 6, 7, 8, and 1 to point 2 again must be shorter then the time set on the tW timer.

Figure 20: Two examples of programmed impedance measuring points for functional testing of the pole slip protection

The second programmed sequence on Figure 20 presents a RvFw transi-tion with operating points 3 and 4 in delayed tripping area. The sequenceis applicable for testing of the functionality, when the RvFw oscillationsshould cause the tripping action. The following special requirementsshould be observed as for the first operating sequence.

6.4 Testing of the additional functionality

All additional functionality, as described in this document, should betested only, when used in actual application. The functionality should betested by the so called "go - no go” tests according to the expected opera-tion under the certain system conditions. No special instructions can begiven for such tests. The instructions should be prepared according to therequirements of the actual application.

R

jX

ZL

ZSA

99001037.vsd

1234

56

7 8

ZSB

1 2 3

45

6

87


Version 02

1MRK 580 677-XENPage 5 – 156

7 Appendix

7.1 Simplified connection diagram

7.2 Signal list

Table 1: Signal list

Vfj_0081.vsd

PSP--BLOCK

POLE SLIP PROTECTION

PSP--TRIPPSP--STARTPSP--TRAFWRVPSP--TRARVFWPSP--ZINPSP--ZOUT

PSP--BLK1PSP--BLK2PSP--TR1PPSP--I0CHECKPSP--REL1PPSP--BLK1PPSP--REL2PPSP--BLK2PPSP--VTSZ


PSP-- BLOCK IN Blocks the operation of the pole slip protection.

PSP-- BLK1 IN Blocks the operation of the inhibit condition controlled by the tR2 timer.

PSP-- BLK2 IN Inhibits the influence of the residual current detection criterion on the pole slip protection.

PSP-- TR1P IN Starts the tEF timer. Usually connected to the TRIP-TRSP output of the trip function within the terminal.

PSP-- I0CHECK IN Detection of the residual current. Usually connected to the TEF--START out-put signal of the residual current protection.

PSP-- REL1P IN Releases the “one of three” phase detection of the oscillation.

PSP-- BLK1P IN Inhibits the “one of three” phase detection of the oscillation.

PSP-- REL2P IN Releases the “two of three” phase detection of the oscillation.

PSP-- BLK2P IN Inhibits the “two of three” phase detection of the oscillation.

PSP-- VTSZ IN Blocks the operation of the PSP. Usually connected to the FUSE-VTSZ out-put of the fuse failure detection function.

PSP-- TRIP OUT The PSP has issued a trip command.

PSP-- START OUT The PSP has detected an oscillation. Can be used to block the operation of different distance protection zones.

PSP-- TRAFWRV OUT Transition from forward to reverse direction has been detected.

PSP-- TRARVFW OUT Transition from reverse to forward direction has been detected.

PSP-- ZIN OUT Measured impedance has been detected inside the internal boundary.

PSP-- ZOUT OUT Measured impedance has been detected inside the external boundary.


Version 02

7.3 Setting tableOff, On

Parameter Range Unit Default Description

Operation Off, On - Off Operation of the pole slip protection set On or Off.

R1LEXT 0.100-400.000 ohm/ph 60.00 Resistive reach of the left side external oscillation detection boundary.

R1LINT 0.100-400.000 ohm/ph 45.00 Resistive reach of the left side internal oscillation detection boundary.

R1RINT 0.100-400.000 ohm/ph 45.00 Resistive reach of the right side internal oscillation detection boundary.

R1REXT 0.100-400.000 ohm/ph 60.00 Resistive reach of the right side external oscillation detection boundary.

R1LTR 0.100-400.000 ohm/ph 35.00 Resistive reach setting of the left side tripping characteristic.

R1RTR 0.100-400.000 ohm/ph 35.00 Resistive reach setting of the right side tripping characteristic.

X1REXT 0.100-400.000 ohm/ph 60.00 Reactive reach of the external oscillation detection boundary in reverse direction.

X1RINT 0.100-400.000 ohm/ph 45.00 Reactive reach of the internal oscillation detection boundary in reverse direction.

X1FINT 0.100-400.000 ohm/ph 45.00 Reactive reach of the internal oscillation detection boundary in forward direction.

X1FEXT 0.100-400.000 ohm/ph 60.00 Reactive reach of the external oscillation detection boundary in forward direction.

SCA 75.0-90.0 deg 90.0 System characteristic angle.

X1PSLFw 0.100-400.000 ohm/ph 40.00 Positive sequence reactance determining the forward reactive reach of the fast tripping zone.

R1PSLFw 0.100-400.000 ohm/ph 2.000 Positive sequence resistance determining the forward reactive reach of the fast tripping zone.

X1PSLRv 0.100-400.000 ohm/ph 0.100 Positive sequence reactance determining the reverse reactive reach of the fast tripping zone.

R1PSLRv 0.100-400.000 ohm/ph ´0.100 Positive sequence resistance determining the reverse reactive reach of the fast tripping zone.

tP1 0.000-60.000 s 0.045 Transition time used for the detection of the initial oscillations

tP2 0.000-60.000 s 0.015 Transition time used for the detection of the consecutive oscil-lations.

tW 0.000-60.000 s 0.350 Waiting time to distinguish between new and consecutive oscillations.

tEF 0.000-60.000 s 3.000 Time to inhibit blocking of the distance protection after the sin-gle pole reclosing.

tR1 0.000-60.000 s 0.040 Delay of the detection of the residual current.

tR2 0.000-60.000 s 2.000 time delay required for the measured impedance to remain within the oscillation detection area and cause direct trip of the PSP protection.

tHZ 0.000-60.000 s 0.500 Prolongation of the detection criteria for the purposes of the distance protection function.

TRFwRv Off, On - Off Trip for the FwRv transitions enabled or disabled.

TRIncFwRv Off, On - Off Trip for the FwRv transitions in incoming mode enabled or dis-abled.


Version 02

1MRK 580 677-XENPage 5 – 158

TROutF-wRv

Off, On - Off Trip for the FwRv transitions in outgoing mode enabled or dis-abled.

TRFastF-wRv

Off, On - Off Tripping for the FwRv transition in fast tripping area enabled or disabled.

TRDelFwRv Off, On - Off Tripping for the FwRv transition in delayed tripping area enabled or disabled.

TRRvFw Off, On - Off Trip for the RvFw transitions enabled or disabled.

TRIncRvFw Off, On - Off Trip for the RvFw transitions in incoming mode enabled or dis-abled.

TROutRvFw

Off, On - Off Trip for the RvFw transitions in outgoing mode enabled or dis-abled.

TRFas-tRvFw

Off, On - Off Tripping for the RvFw transition in fast tripping area enabled or disabled.

TRDelRvFw Off, On - Off Tripping for the RvFw transition in delayed tripping area enabled or disabled.

nFastFwRv 0-10 slip 0 Number of slips from forward to reverse direction required to be detected in the fast tripping area to cause the tripping com-mand.

nDelFwRv 0-10 slip 0 Number of slips from forward to reverse direction required to be detected in the delayed tripping area to cause the tripping command.

nFastRvFw 0-10 slip 0 Number of slips from reverse to forward direction required to be detected in the fast tripping area to cause the tripping com-mand.

nDelRvFw 0-10 slip 0 Number of slips from reverse to forward direction required to be detected in the delayed tripping area to cause the tripping command.


159Scheme communication logic for distance protection

1 ApplicationTo achieve fast fault clearing for a fault on the part of the line not coveredby the instantaneous zone 1, the stepped distance protection function canbe supported with logic, that uses communication channels.

One communication channel in each direction, which can transmit anon/off signal is required. The performance and security of this function isdirectly related to the transmission channel speed, and security againstfalse or lost signals. So special channels are used for this purpose. Whenpower line carrier is used for communication, these special channels arestrongly recommended due to the communication disturbance caused bythe primary fault.

2 Theory of operationDepending on whether a reverse or forward directed impedance zone isused to issue the send signal (ZCOM-CS), the communication schemesare divided into Blocking and Permissive schemes, respectively.

2.1 Blocking communication scheme

In a blocking scheme, the received signal (ZCOM-CR) carries informa-tion about the fault position, which specifies that it is outside the protectedline on the bus or on adjacent lines. Do not prolong the sent signal, so settSendMin to zero. The sending might be interrupted by operation of a for-ward zone if it is connected to ZCOM-CSNBLK.

An overreaching zone is allowed to trip after a co-ordination time (tCo-ord), when no signal is received from the remote terminal. The tCoordtime must allow for the transmission of the blocking signal with a certainmargin.

In case of external faults, the blocking signal (ZCOM-CR) must bereceived before the tCoord elapses, to prevent a false trip.

Figure 1: Basic logic for trip carrier in blocking scheme

Table 1:

ZCOM-CACC Forward overreaching zone used for the communica-tion scheme

ZCOM-CR Carrier receive signal

ZCOM-TRIP Trip from the communication scheme

ZCOM-CACCZCOM-CR & t

tCoordZCOM-TRIP

Visf_066.vsd

1MRK 580 326-XEN


Scheme communication logic for distance protection

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 326-XENPage 6 – 160

2.2 Permissive communication scheme

In a permissive scheme, the received signal (ZCOM-CR) carries informa-tion from the protection terminal at the opposite end of the line. It indi-cates detected faults in the forward direction out on the line. The receivedinformation is used to allow an overreaching zone to trip almost instanta-neously for faults on the protected line.

Figure 2: Logic for trip carrier in permissive scheme

The permissive scheme principle is further subdivided into two types,underreaching and overreaching, where the names indicate that the sendsignal (ZCOM-CS) is issued by an underreaching or an overreachingzone, respectively.

The signal (ZCOM-CR) must be received when the overreaching zone isstill activated to achieve an instantaneous trip. In some cases, due to thefault current distribution, the overreaching zone can operate only after thefault has been cleared at the terminal nearest to the fault. There is a certainrisk that in case of a trip from an independent tripping zone, the zone issu-ing the carrier send signal (ZCOM-CS) resets before the overreachingzone has operated at the remote terminal. To assure a sufficient durationof the received signal (ZCOM-CR), the send signal (ZCOM-CS), can beprolonged by a tSendMin reset timer. The recommended setting of tSend-Min is 100 ms. A ZCOM-CS signal from an underreaching zone can beprolonged during all circumstances, without drawbacks. But a ZCOM-CS signal from an overreaching zone must never be prolonged in caseof parallel lines, to secure correct operation of current reversal logic,when applied.

At the permissive overreaching scheme, the carrier send signal (ZCOM-CS) might be issued in parallel both from an overreaching zone and anunderreaching, independently tripping zone. The ZCOM--CS signalfrom the overreaching zone must not be prolonged, while the ZCOM-CS signal from zone 1 can be prolonged.

There is no race between the ZCOM-CR signal and the operation of thezone in a permissive scheme. So set the tCoord to zero. A permissivescheme is inherently faster and has better security against false trippingthan a blocking scheme. On the other hand, a permissive scheme dependson a received ZCOM-CR signal for a fast trip, so its dependability islower than that of a blocking scheme.

To overcome this lower dependability in permissive schemes, anUnblocking function can be used. Use this function at power-line carrierPLC communication, where the signal has to be sent through the primaryfault. The unblocking function uses a carrier guard signal (ZCOM-CRG),which must always be present, even when no ZCOM-CR signal isreceived. The absence of the ZCOM-CRG signal during the security time

ZCOM-CACCZCOM-CR t

tCoordZCOM-TRIP

Visf_067.vsd

&


1MRK 580 326-XENPage 6 – 161

Version 2.2-00

is used as a CR signal. See Figure 3:. This also enables a permissivescheme to operate when the line fault blocks the signal transmission. Setthe tSecurity at 35 ms.

Figure 3: Carrier guard logic with unblock logic

The ZCOM-CR signals are always transferred directly to ZCOM-CRLwithout any delay.

2.3 Direct inter-trip scheme

In the direct inter-trip scheme, the carrier send signal (ZCOM-CS) is sentfrom an underreaching zone that is tripping the line.

The received signal (ZCOM-CR) is directly transferred to a ZCOM-TRIPfor tripping without local criteria. The signal is further processed in thetripping logic. In case of single-pole tripping, a phase selection is per-formed.

ZCOM-CRG

t

200 ms

&

1 t

tSecurity

>1 t

150 ms &

>1

ZCOM-CR

ZCOM-CRL

ZCOM-LCGVisf_068.vsd

Table 2:

ZCOM-CR Received signal from the communication equipment

ZCOM-CRG Carrier guard signal from the communication equipment

ZCOM-CRL Signal to the communication scheme

ZCOM-LCG Alarm signal line-check guard


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 326-XENPage 6 – 162

3 SettingThe scheme type and the timers are set under:

SettingsFunctions

Group n (n=1-4)Impedance

ZCommunicationSchemeType

Configure the zones used for the ZCOM-CS carrier send and for schemecommunication tripping under:

ConfigurationFunctions

ImpedanceZCOM

4 Testing The scheme logic is checked during the secondary injection testing of theimpedance-measuring zones and the high-speed complementary zones.For details see the ordering sheets for each particular REx 5xx terminal.

Activating the different zones verifies that the ZCOM-CS signal is issuedfrom the intended zones. The ZCOM-CS signal from the independent trip-ping zone must have a tSendMin minimum time.

Check the tripping function by activating the ZCOM-CR and ZCOM-CRG inputs with the overreaching zone used to achieve the ZCOM-CACC signal.

It is sufficient to activate the zones with only one type of fault with thesecondary injection.

4.1 Testing with FREJA

4.1.1 Permissive underreach

1.1 Set the |Z| fault impedance within the permissive zone (that is,place the impedance marker within the permissive zone).

1.2 Activate the DO1 digital output on FREJA. This gives the protec-tion terminal a carrier receive (ZCOM-CR) signal.

1.3 Supply the relay with healthy conditions (press and hold the <W>Healthy key for at least two seconds).

1.4 Apply the fault condition (press the <S> Faulty/Auto open key).

1.5 Check that correct trip outputs, external signals, and indication areobtained for the actual type of fault generated.


1MRK 580 326-XENPage 6 – 163

Version 2.2-00

1.6 Check that other zones operate according to their zone timer andthat the carrier send (ZCOM-CS) signal is obtained only for thezone configured to give the actual signal.

1.7 Deactivate the DO1 digital output on FREJA, so that no carrierreceive (ZCOM-CR) signal is received by the protection terminal.

1.8 Check that the trip time complies with the zone timers and that cor-rect trip outputs, external signals, and indication are obtained forthe actual type of fault generated.

4.1.2 Permissive overreach

2.1 Set FREJA in the SELECT INSTRUMENT menu, with3PZSTD2A the network model.

2.2 Set the |Z| fault impedance within the permissive zone (that is,place the impedance marker within the permissive zone).

2.3 Activate the DO1 digital output on FREJA. This gives the protec-tion terminal a carrier receive (ZCOM-CR) signal.

2.4 Supply the relay with healthy conditions (press and hold the <W>Healthy key for at least two seconds).

2.5 Apply a fault condition (press the <S> Faulty/Auto open key).

2.6 Check that correct trip outputs, external signals, and indication areobtained for the actual type of fault generated.

2.7 Check that the other zones operate according to their zone timerand that the carrier send (ZCOM-CS) signal is obtained only for thezones that are configured to give the actual signal.

2.8 Deactivate the digital output on FREJA, so that no carrier receive(ZCOM-CR) signal is received by the protection terminal.

2.9 Apply a fault condition in the permissive zone.

2.10 Check that trip time complies with the zone timers and that correcttrip outputs, external signals, and indication are obtained for theactual type of fault generated.

4.1.3 Blocking scheme 3.1 Set the |Z| fault impedance within the forward directed zone usedfor scheme communication tripping (that is, place the impedancemarker within the zone used for communication tripping).

3.2 Deactivate the DO1 digital output so that no carrier receive(ZCOM-CR) signal is received.

3.3 Supply the relay with healthy conditions (press and hold the <W>Healthy key) for at least two seconds.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 326-XENPage 6 – 164

3.4 Apply the fault condition (press the <S> Faulty/Auto open key).

3.5 Check that correct trip outputs and external signals are obtained forthe type of fault generated and that the operate time complies withthe tCoord timer (plus relay-measuring time).

3.6 Check that the other zones operate according to their zone timesand that a carrier send (ZCOM-CS) signal is only obtained for thereverse zone.

3.7 Activate the digital output on FREJA, so that the carrier receiver(ZCOM-CR) signal is received by the protection terminal.

3.8 Apply a fault condition in the forward directed zone used forscheme communication tripping.

3.9 Check that the no trip from scheme communication occurs.

3.10 Check that trip time from the forward directed zone used forscheme communication tripping complies with the zone timer andthat correct trip outputs, external signals, and indication areobtained for the actual type of fault generated.

4.1.4 Check of unblocking logic

Check the unblocking function (if the function is required) when youcheck the communication scheme.

Command function with continuous unblocking (Unblock = 1)

• Connect DO2 digital output on FREJA to the carrier guard input (ZCOM-CRG).

• Activate the DO2 digital output on FREJA. This gives REL a carrier guard signal.

• Using the scheme selected, check that a carrier accelerated trip (ZCOM-TRIP) is obtained when the carrier guard signal is deacti-vated.


1MRK 580 326-XENPage 6 – 165

Version 2.2-00

5 Appendix

5.1 Function block

Visf_065.vsd

ZCOM-BLOCK

ZCOM-TRIP

SCHEME COMMUNICATION LOGIC -ZCOM

ZCOM-CS

ZCOM-CRL

ZCOM-LCG

ZCOM-CACC

ZCOM-CSUR

ZCOM-CSOR

ZCOM-CSBLK

ZCOM-CSNBLK

ZCOM-CR

ZCOM-CRG


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 326-XENPage 6 – 166


ZCOM-CRG

ZCOM-CR

ZCOM-CSUR

ZCOM-BLOCK

ZCOM-CSBLK

CRL-cont.

ZCOM-CSNBLK

ZCOM-CSOR

ZCOM-CACC

ZCOM-CRL

CRL-cont.

ZCOM-CS

ZCOM-TRIP

Scheme communication logic-ZCOM

Visf_069.vsd

t

25 ms

t

tCoord

>1

>1

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

>1

tSendMin

>1

>1

>1tSendMin

&

&

>1

1 t

tSecurity

&t

200 ms

t

150 ms

>1

& ZCOM-LCG

SchemeType =Blocking

Schemetype =Permissive OR

Schemetype =Permissive UR

SchemeType =Intertrip

Unblock =Restart

Unblock =NoRestart

Unblock = Off


1MRK 580 326-XENPage 6 – 167

Version 2.2-00

5.3 Signal list

5.4 Setting


ZCOM- TRIP OUT Trip by the communication scheme logic

ZCOM- CS OUT Carrier send by the communication scheme logic

ZCOM- CRL OUT Carrier receive signal reported by the from communication scheme logic

ZCOM- LCG OUT Communication failure - no ZCOM-CR and no ZCOM-CRG

ZCOM- BLOCK IN Block of communication scheme logic

ZCOM- CACC IN Permissive distance protection zone signal to be used for tripping by the communication scheme logic

ZCOM- CSUR IN Underreaching distance protection zone signal to be used by the ZCOM logic for sending a CS carrier signal

ZCOM- CSOR IN Overreaching distance protection zone signal to be used by the ZCOM logic for sending a CS carrier signal

ZCOM- CSBLK IN Reverse directed distance protection zone signal to be used by the ZCOM logic for sending a CS carrier signal

ZCOM- CSNBLK IN Forward directed distance protection zone signal for inhibiting sending of a carrier signal in blocking scheme

ZCOM- CR IN Carrier receive signal from the communication equipment for the purposes of ZCOM logic

ZCOM- CRG IN Communication channel guard signal received from the communication equipment.


Operation Off /On - Off Operation of a ZCOM scheme communication logic

Scheme-Type

Intertrip / Per-missiveUR / PermissiveOR / Blocking

- Intertrip Operation mode

tCoord 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.05 Coordination timer

tSendmin 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.1 Minimum duration of a carrier send signal

Unblock Off / NoRestart / Restart

- Off Operation mode for an unblocking logic

tSecurity 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.035 Security timer


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 326-XENPage 6 – 168

169Current reversal and WEI logic for distance protection

1 ApplicationTo achieve fast fault clearing for a fault on the part of the line not coveredby the instantaneous zone 1, the stepped distance protection function canbe supported with logic, that uses communication channels. REx 5xx linedistance protection terminals have for this reason available a scheme com-munication logic (ZCOM - see the document “Scheme communicationlogic for distance protection”) and a phase segregated scheme communi-cation logic (ZC1P - see the document “Phase segregated communicationlogic for distance protection”).

Different system conditions, in many cases, require additional speciallogic circuits, like current reversal logic and WEI, weak end infeed logic.Both functions are available within the additional communication logicfor the distance protection function (ZCAL).

The contents of the additional communication logic is always adjusted tothe needs of each communication logic, ZCOM or ZC1P respectively,whichever included in REx 5xx terminal. The names of all functionalinput and output signals have the same root, for instance ZCAL-IRVL.The signals associated with ZCOM three-phase logic have no additionsdesignating the corresponding phase, while the signals associated withphase segregated logic obtain this addition. For example ZCAL-IRVLLn.Ln determines here the corresponding phase (L1, L2, or L3).

1.1 Current reversal logic If parallel lines are connected to common buses at both terminals, over-reaching permissive communication schemes can trip unselectively due tocurrent reversal fault. This unwanted tripping affects the healthy linewhen a fault is cleared on the other line. This lack of security results in atotal loss of inter-connection between the two buses.

To avoid this kind of disturbance, a fault current reversal logic (transientblocking logic) can be used.

1.2 Weak end infeed (WEI) logic

Permissive communication schemes can basically operate only when theprotection in the remote terminal can detect the fault. The detectionrequires a sufficient minimum fault current, normally >20% of Ir . Thefault current can be too low due to an open breaker or low short-circuitpower of the source. To overcome these conditions, weak end infeed echologic is used.

The fault current can also be initially too low due to the fault current dis-tribution. Here, the fault current increases when the breaker opens in thestrong terminal, and a sequential tripping is achieved. This requires adetection of the fault by an independent-tripping zone 1. To avoid sequen-tial tripping as described, and when zone 1 is not available, weak endinfeed tripping logic is used.

1MRK 580 327-XEN


Current reversal and WEI logic for distance protection

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 327-XENPage 6 – 170

2 Theory of operation

2.1 Current reversal logic Figure 1: and Figure 2: show a typical system condition, which can resultin a fault current reversal. Note that the fault current is reversed in line L2after the breaker opening.

In terminal A:2, where the forward zone was initially activated, this zonemust reset before the carrier signal ZCOM-CRLn, initiated from B:2,arrives. The carrier send ZCOM-CS or ZC1P-CSLn from B:2 is thereforeheld back until the reverse zone ZCAL-IRVLn has reset and the tDelaytime has elapsed; see Figure 3:.

Figure 1: Initial system condition

Figure 2: Current distribution after the breaker B:1 is opened

2.2 Weak end infeed logic The WEI function sends back (echoes) the received carrier signal underthe condition that no fault has been detected on the weak end by differentfault detection elements (distance protection in forward and reverse direc-tion).

The weak end infeed logic function can be extended to trip also thebreaker in the weak terminal. The trip is achieved when one or more phasevoltages are low during an echo function. In case of single-pole tripping,the phase voltages are used as phase selectors.

L1A B

Weaksource

Strongsource A:1 B:1

L2

A:2 B:2

L1A B

Weaksource


L2

A:2 B:2


1MRK 580 327-XENPage 6 – 171

Version 2.2-00

Weak end infeed logic is generally used in permissive schemes only. It isalso possible to use it together with the blocking teleprotection scheme.Some limitations apply in this case:

• Only the trip part of the function can be used together with the block-ing scheme. It is not possible to use the echo function to send the echo carrier signal to the remote line terminal. The echo signal would block the operation of the distance protection at the remote line end and in this way prevent the correct operation of a complete protection scheme.

• It is not possible to use the carrier receive signal from the remote end to start the WEI function. Start the operation of the WEI function by connecting the TUV--START output signal of the time delayed und-ervoltage function to the ZCAL-CRL functional input. In this way, the operation of the undervoltage protection will start the WEI logic.

• Configure the carrier receive signal from the remote end to the ZCAL-WEIBLK functional input together with an OR combination of all fault detection signals, used within the terminal to detect the fault in forward or reverse direction. Do not use the undervoltage protection signals for this purpose.

3 Design

3.1 Current reversal logic The current reversal logic (IREV) uses a reverse zone (connected to theZCAL-IRVLn input signal), which in terminal B:2 recognises the fault onthe L1 line (see Figure 1:). When the reverse zone is activated during thetPickUp time (see Figure 3:), the logic is ready to issue a ZCAL-IRVLLnoutput signal. This signal prevents sending of a ZCOM-CS (or ZC1P-CSLn) signal and activation of the ZCOM-TRIP (or ZC1P-TRLn) signalfor a time as set on a tDelay timer, when connected to the ZCOM-BLOCK(or ZC1P-BLOCK) functional input of the ZCOM (or ZC1P) function.

Figure 3: Current reversal logic

The tDelay timer makes it possible for the carrier receive signal, con-nected to the ZCOM-CR (or ZC1P-CRLn) functional input, to resetbefore the ZCOM-TRIP (or the ZC1P-TRLn) signal is activated due to thecurrent reversal by the forward directed zone, connected to the ZCOM-CACC (or the ZC1P-CACCLn) functional input.

Visf_071.vsd

ZCAL-IRVLn

ZCAL-IRVBLKLnZCAL-IRVLLn

t

tDelay

&

t

tPickUp

t

10 ms

t

tPickUp


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 327-XENPage 6 – 172

3.2 Weak end infeed logic The WEI function returns the received carrier signal (see Figure 4:),when:

• The functional input ZCAL-CRLLn is active. This input is usually connected to the ZCOM-CRL or to the ZC1P-CRLLn functional out-put.

• The WEI function is not blocked by the active signal connected to the ZCAL-BLOCK functional input or to the ZCAL-VTSZ func-tional input. The latest is usually configured to the FUSE-VTSZ functional output of the fuse-failure function.

• No active signal has been present for at least 200 ms on the ZCAL-WEIBLKLn functional input. An OR combination of all fault detec-tion functions (not undervoltage) as present within the terminal is usually used for this purpose.

Figure 4: Echo of a received carrier signal by the WEI function

Figure 5: Tripping part of the WEI logic - simplified logic diagram

ZCAL-BLOCK

ZCAL-CRLLn

ZCAL-WEIBLKLn

ZCAL-ECHOLn

ECHOLn - cont.

Visf_073.vsd

ZCAL-VTSZ

>1

t

tWEI

t

200 ms

& t

50 ms

t

200 ms

&

WEI = Trip

ZCAL-CBOPEN

STUL1N

STUL2N

STUL3N

& t

100 ms >1

&

&

&

ECHOLn - cont.

t15 ms

t15 ms

t15 ms

>1 ZCAL-TRWEI

ZCAL-TRWEIL1

ZCAL-TRWEIL2

ZCAL-TRWEIL3Visf_072.vsd


1MRK 580 327-XENPage 6 – 173

Version 2.2-00

When an echo function is used in both terminals, a spurious signal can belooped round by the echo logics. To avoid a continuous lock-up of the sys-tem, the duration of the echoed signal is limited to 200 ms.

An undervoltage criteria is used as an additional tripping criteria, whenthe tripping of the local breaker is selected together with the WEI functionand ECHO signal has been issued by the echo logic, see Figure 5:.

4 SettingThe current reversal logic and the WEI function are set in the menu under:

SettingFunctions


ComIRevWei

4.1 Current reversal logic Set the tDelay time in relation to the reset time in the communicationequipment for the ZCOM-CR (ZC1P-CRLn) signal. Set the tDelay at themaximum carrier reset time plus 30 ms. A minimum tDelay setting of40 ms is recommended. A long tDelay setting increases security againstunwanted tripping, but delay the fault clearing in case of a fault develop-ing from one line to involve the other one. The probability of this type offault is small. So set the tDelay with a good margin.

Set the pick-up delay tPickUp to <80% of the breaker operate time, butwith a minimum of 20 ms.

4.2 Weak-end-infeed logic Set WEI = Echo to activate the weak-end-infeed function. Set WEI = Tripto obtain echo with trip.

Set the voltage criterion for the weak-end trip to 90% of the minimumoperation voltage and consider also the emergency conditions.

5 TestingThe testing instructions are related to each separate phase, when phasesegregated scheme communication logic ZC1P is used. Only one type offault is necessary, when three-phase scheme communication logic ZCOMis used.

5.1 Current reversal logic The current reversal logic is tested during the secondary injection test ofthe impedance measuring zones together with the scheme communicationlogic for the distance protection function (ZCOM or ZC1P).

It is possible to check the delay of the ZCOM-CS (ZC1P-CSLn) carriersend signal with tDelay by changing from a reverse to a forward fault.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 327-XENPage 6 – 174

By continuously activating the ZCOM-CR (ZC1P-CRLn) input andchanging from a reverse to a forward fault, the delay tDelay can bechecked.

5.1.1 Testing with FREJA In the 3PZ RX display menu, set FREJA with these parameters:

5.1.2 Check of current reversal

• Activate the digital output DO1 on FREJA. This gives the protection terminal a carrier receive (ZCOM-CRLn) signal.

• The healthy condition state is set up to give an impedance at 50% of the reach of the reverse zone connected to ZCAL-IRVLn (press the <W> Healthy key).

• After the start condition is obtained for reverse zone, apply a fault at 50% of the reach of the forward zone connected to ZCAL-WEIBLKLn. (press the <S> Faulty/Auto open key).

Note! The reverse zone timer must not operate before the forward zonefault is applied. The user might need to block the reverse zone timer dur-ing testing of current reversal.

• Check that correct trip outputs and external signals are obtained for the type of fault generated. The operation time should be about the tDelay setting longer than the carrier accelerated trip (ZCOM-TRIP or ZC1P-TRLn) previously recorded for permissive scheme commu-nication.

Note! The forward zone timer must be longer than 90 ms.

• Repeat the procedure for other phases.

• Restore the reverse zone timer to its original state.

Table 1:

Parameter: Condition:

I Greater than 30% Ir

DIgoal 111XX XXXXX, if three-phase tripping is selected. If single-phase tripping is pro-grammed, set DIgoal configuration to the type of fault selected.

Healthy conditions 50% of the reach of the reverse zone con-nected to ZCAL-IRVLn.

R,X scale and Origo pos Suitable for relay settings.

Impedance |Z| 50% of the reach of the forward zone con-nected to ZCAL-WEIBLKLn.

Impedance angle ZΦ 0° to 90°

Digital outputs DO1 Connect to carrier receive (ZCOM-CRLn) input on the protection terminal for each phase separately.


1MRK 580 327-XENPage 6 – 175

Version 2.2-00

5.2 Weak end infeed logic Check the weak end infeed logic functions during the secondary injectiontest of the measuring zones and the complete scheme communicationfunction (ZCOM or ZC1P).

5.2.1 WEI logic at permissive schemes

Check the blocking of the echo with the injection of a ZCOM-CR orZC1P-CRLn signal >40 ms after a reverse fault is applied.

Measure the duration of the echoed signal by applying a ZCOM-CR orZC1P-CRLn carrier receive signal.

Check the trip functions and the voltage level for trip by reducing a phasevoltage and applying a ZCOM-CR or ZC1P-CRLn carrier receive signal.

It is sufficient to test the logic with only one type of faults, when theZCOM function is used within the REx 5xx terminal.

5.2.1.1 Testing with FREJA Set up FREJA in a general instrument configuration.

Only one type of fault is sufficient, with ZCOM function. Apply threefaults (one in each phase), when ZC1P function is used. For phase L1-Nfault set in the GENERAL display FREJA with these parameters:

Change all settings cyclically for other faults (L2-N and L3-N).

Table 2:

Generators I (Amps)Phase-angle(Deg)

V (Volts)Phase-angle(Deg)

L1I 0 0 N/A N/A

L2I 0 240 N/A N/A

L31 0 120 N/A N/A

L1U N/A N/A 63 0

L2U N/A N/A 63 240

L3U N/A N/A Set less than UPN<

120

Table 3:

Parameters: Condition:

Digital outputs DO1 Connect to carrier receive (ZCOM-CR or ZC1P-CRLn) input on the protection termi-nal

Digital input DI4 Connect to carrier send (ZCOM-CSL or ZC1P-CSLLn) output on the protection terminal


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 327-XENPage 6 – 176

Weak end infeed set for trip

• Turn on generators (press the <W> key - Gen on).

• Activate digital output DO1 on FREJA, so that a carrier receive (ZCOM-CR or ZC1P-CRLn) signal is received by the protection ter-minal.

• After the relay has operated, turn off generators(press the <Q> key - Gen off).

• Check that trip, carrier-send signal, and indication are obtained.

Weak end infeed set for echo

• Turn on generators (press the <W> key - Gen on).

• Activate the carrier receive (ZCOM-CR or ZC1P-CRLn) input using FREJA.

• After the relay has operated turn off the generators (press the <Q> key - Gen off).

• Check that the carrier send signal is obtained from the protection ter-minal.


1MRK 580 327-XENPage 6 – 177

Version 2.2-00

6 Appendix

6.1 Function blocks

*) Available only if the single- and/or three-pole tripping logic is included in the terminal

Figure 6: Function block of the function when used together with the three-phase scheme communication logic ZCOM

Figure 7: Function block of the function when used together with phase segregated scheme communication logic ZC1P

Visf_074.vsd

ZCAL-BLOCK

ZCAL-TRWEI

SCHEME COMMUNICATIONADDITIONAL LOGIC - ZCAL

ZCAL-TRWEIL1*

ZCAL-TRWEIL2*

ZCAL-TRWEIL3*

ZCAL-IRV

ZCAL-IRVBLK

ZCAL-CBOPEN

ZCAL-VTSZ

ZCAL-CRL

ZCAL-ECHO

ZCAL-IRVL

ZCAL-WEIBLK

Visf_087.vsd

ZCAL-BLOCK

ZCAL-TRWEIL2

SCHEME COMMUNICATIONADDITIONAL LOGIC - ZCAL

ZCAL-TRWEIL3

ZCAL-IRVL

ZCAL-IRVLL1

ZCAL-IRV

ZCAL-IRVL1

ZCAL-IRVL2

ZCAL-IRVL3

ZCAL-IRVBLK

ZCAL-TRWEIL1

ZCAL-TRWEI

ZCAL-IRVBLKL1

ZCAL-IRVBLKL2

ZCAL-IRVBLKL3

ZCAL-CBOPEN

ZCAL-VTSZ

ZCAL-WEIBLK

ZCAL-WEIBLKL1

ZCAL-WEIBLKL2

ZCAL-WEIBLKL3

ZCAL-CRL

ZCAL-CRLL1

ZCAL-CRLL2

ZCAL-CRLL3

ZCAL-ECHO

ZCAL-ECHOL1

ZCAL-ECHOL2

ZCAL-ECHOL3

ZCAL-IRVLL3

ZCAL-IRVLL2


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 327-XENPage 6 – 178

6.2 Function block diagrams

Figure 8: Function block diagram of the function when used together with the three-phase scheme communication logic ZCOM.

ZCAL-IRVt

tPickUp

t

10 ms

t

tPickUp

ZCAL-IRVBLKt

tDelayZCAL-IRVL&

CurrRev = On

ZCAL-BLOCK

ZCAL-CRLt

tWEI

t

200 msZCAL-WEIBLK

& t

50 ms

t

200 ms

ZCAL-VTSZ

>1

WEI = Trip

ZCAL-CBOPEN

STUL1N

STUL2N

STUL3N

& t

100 ms >1

&

&

&

ECHO - cont.

t

15 ms

t

15 ms

t

15 ms

>1 ZCAL-TRWEI

ZCAL-TRWEIL1

ZCAL-TRWEIL2

ZCAL-TRWEIL3

Visf_075.vsd

WEI = Echo>1

& ZCAL-ECHO

ECHO - cont.


1MRK 580 327-XENPage 6 – 179

Version 2.2-00

Figure 9: Function block diagram for the current reversal logic when used together with the phase segregated scheme communi-cation logic ZC1P.

ZCAL-IRVt

tPickUp

t

10ms

t

tPickUp

ZCAL-IRVBLKt

tDelayZCAL-IRVL&

CurrRev = On

ZCAL-IRVL1t

tPickUp

t

10ms

t

tPickUp

ZCAL-IRVBLKL1t

tDelayZCAL-IRVLL1&

ZCAL-IRVL2t

tPickUp

t

10ms

t

tPickUp

ZCAL-IRVBLKL2t

tDelayZCAL-IRVLL2&

Visf_084.vsd

ZCAL-IRVL3t

tPickUp

t

10ms

t

tPickUp

ZCAL-IRVBLKL3t

tDelayZCAL-IRVLL3&


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 327-XENPage 6 – 180

Figure 10: Function block diagram for the weak end infeed logic (ECHO part) when used together with the phase segregated scheme communication logic ZC1P

WEI = Trip

WEI = Echo >1

ZCAL-BLOCK

ZCAL-CRLt

tWEI

t

200 msZCAL-WEIBLK

& t

50 ms

t

200 ms

ZCAL-VTSZ

>1

& ZCAL-ECHO

ECHO - cont.

ZCAL-CRLL1t

tWEI

t

200 msZCAL-WEIBLKL1

& t

50 ms

t

200 ms

& ZCAL-ECHOL1

ECHOL1 - cont.

ZCAL-CRLL2t

tWEI

t

200 msZCAL-WEIBLKL2

& t

50 ms

t

200 ms

& ZCAL-ECHOL2

ECHOL2 - cont.

ZCAL-CRLL3t

tWEI

t

200 msZCAL-WEIBLKL3

& t

50 ms

t

200 ms

Visf_085.vsd

& ZCAL-ECHOL3

ECHOL3 - cont.


1MRK 580 327-XENPage 6 – 181

Version 2.2-00

Figure 11: Function block diagram for the weak-end-infeed logic (TRIP part) when used together with the phase segregated scheme communication logic ZC1P

6.3 Signal list Signal list for the additional communication logic ZCAL when usedtogether with the three-phase scheme communication logic ZCOM.

WEI = Trip

ZCAL-CBOPEN

STUL1N

STUL2N

STUL3N

& t

100 ms>1

Visf_086.vsd

&

&

&

t15 ms

t15 ms

t15 ms

>1 ZCAL-TRWEI

ZCAL-TRWEIL1

ZCAL-TRWEIL2

ZCAL-TRWEIL3

>1

>1

>1

ECHO - cont.

ECHOL1 - cont.

ECHOL2 - cont.

ECHOL3 - cont.


ZCAL- TRWEI OUT Operation of weak-end-infeed logic

ZCAL- TRWEIL1 OUT Operation of weak-end-infeed logic in phase L1 (available only with single-pole trip logic)



ZCAL- IRVL OUT Operation of current-reversal logic

ZCAL- ECHO OUT Carrier send (echo) by weak-end-infeed logic

ZCAL- BLOCK IN Block of weak-end-infeed logic

ZCAL- IRV IN Activation of current reversal logic

ZCAL- IRVBLK IN Block of current-reversal logic

ZCAL- CBOPEN IN Block of trip from weak-end infeed logic by an open breaker

ZCAL- VTSZ IN Block of weak-end infeed logic by the fuse-failure function

ZCAL- WEIBLK IN Block of weak-end infeed logic

ZCAL- CRL IN Carrier received for weak-end infeed logic


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 327-XENPage 6 – 182

Signal list for the additional communication logic ZCAL when usedtogether with the phase segregated scheme communication logic ZC1P.


ZCAL- TRWEI OUT Operation of weak-end-infeed logic

ZCAL- TRWEIL1 OUT Operation of weak-end-infeed logic in phase L1



ZCAL- IRVL OUT Operation of current-reversal logic

ZCAL- IRVLL1 OUT Operation of current-reversal logic in phase L1



ZCAL- ECHO OUT Carrier send (echo) by weak-end-infeed logic

ZCAL- ECHOL1 OUT Carrier send (echo) by weak-end-infeed logic in phase L1



ZCAL- BLOCK IN Block of weak-end-infeed logic

ZCAL- IRV IN Activation of current reversal logic

ZCAL- IRVL1 IN Activation of current reversal logic in phase L1



ZCAL- IRVBLK IN Block of current-reversal logic

ZCAL- IRVBLKL1 IN Block of current-reversal logic in phase L1



ZCAL- CBOPEN IN Block of trip from weak-end infeed logic by an open breaker

ZCAL- VTSZ IN Block of weak-end infeed logic by the fuse-failure function

ZCAL- WEIBLK IN Block of weak-end infeed logic

ZCAL- WEIBLK1 IN Block of weak-end infeed logic in phase L1



ZCAL- CRL IN Carrier received for weak-end infeed logic

ZCAL- CRLL1 IN Carrier received for weak-end infeed logic in phase L1




1MRK 580 327-XENPage 6 – 183

Version 2.2-00

6.4 Setting table


CurrRev Off / On - 0 Operating mode of the current-reversal function

tPickUp 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.000 Pickup time for current reversal function

tDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.100 Time delay for the current reversal

WEI Off / Trip / Echo

- 0 Operating mode of the WEI function

tWEI 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.010 Coordination time for the WEI function

UPN< 10 - 100 % of U1b 70 Voltage detection of the fault conditions - ph-N measurement

UPP< 20 - 170 % of U1b 70 Voltage detection of the fault conditions - ph-ph measurement


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 327-XENPage 6 – 184

185Automatic switch-onto-fault function for distance protection

1 ApplicationThe switch-onto-fault function is a complementary function to the dis-tance protection function (ZMn--) and to the high-speed protection func-tion (HS---).

With the switch-onto-fault (SOTF-) function, a fast trip is achieved for afault on the whole line, when the line is being energised. The SOTF trip-ping is generally non-directional in order to secure a trip at a nearby three-phase fault when a line potential transformer is used. The non-directionaltrip will also give a fast fault clearing when the bus is energised from theline, with a fault on the bus.

2 Theory of operation and designThe switch-onto-fault function can be activated either externally or auto-matically, internally, by using the information from dead-line-detection(DLD) function (see Figure 1:).

Figure 1: SOTF function - simplified logic diagram

After activation, a distance protection zone (usually its non-directionalstarting signal) is allowed to give an instantaneous trip. The functionaloutput signal ZMn--STND (n represents the corresponding zone number)should be connected to the SOTF-NDACC functional input of the SOTFfunction, see Figure 1:. The distance protection zone used together withthe switch-onto-fault function shall be set to cover the entire protectedline. Always use distance protection zone 5 as a criteria for the SOTFfunction, if the high-speed protection function is installed in the REx 5xxline protection terminal. It is also suggested to use the distance protectionzone 5, when faster operation of SOTF function is required. The non-directional instantaneous condition is maintained for 1 s after closing theline circuit breaker.

The external activation is achieved by an input (SOTF-BC), which shouldbe set high for activation, and low when the breaker has closed. This iscarried out by the closing order to the breaker.

The internal automatic activation is controlled by the DLD function andits functional output DLD--START. The DLD--START functional outputis activated when all three phase voltages have been low and the corre-sponding phase currents have been below the set operate value. The DLD--START functional output is usually configured to the SOTF-DLCND

SOTF-BC

SOTF-DLCND&

SOTF-NDACCt

200 ms >1

&SOTF-BLOCK

t1000 ms

& t15 ms

SOTF-TRIP

Visf_089.vsd

1MRK 580 329-XEN


Automatic switch-onto-fault function for distance protection

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 329-XENPage 6 – 186

functional input. It activates the operation of the SOTF function, if presentfor more than 200 ms without the presence of a non-directional imped-ance starting signal SOTF-NDACC.

Automatic activation can be used only when the potential transformer issituated on the line side of a circuit breaker.

Operation of a SOTF function can be blocked by the activation of aSOTF-BLOCK functional input.

3 SettingThe operation of a switch-onto-fault function is set in the menu tree:

SettingsFunctions


SwitchOntoFlt

The low voltage and low current criteria for automatic activation is setta-ble under the DLD-- function under the menu tree:

SettingsFunctions

Group n (n=1-4)DeadLineDet

This setting is not critical as long as it is lower then the lowest operationvoltage during normal and emergency conditions.

The distance protection zone used for a switch-onto-fault criterion (SOTFzone) have to be set to cover the entire uncompensated protected line witha margin of minimum 20%.

4 TestingThe switch-onto-fault function is checked by secondary injection teststogether with the distance protection function and with the DLD function.The switch-onto-fault function is activated either by the external inputSOTF-BC, or by the internal DLD function. The latter is done by a pre-fault condition with the phase voltages and currents at zero.

A reverse three-phase fault with zero impedance and a three-phase faultwith an impedance corresponding to the whole line is applied. At thisfault an instantaneous trip shall be achieved together with the indicationSOTF-TRIP.


1MRK 580 329-XENPage 6 – 187

Version 2.2-00

4.1 Testing with FREJA 1.1 Setup FREJA in a three-phase impedance configuration with athree-phase fault (L1-L2-L3) condition.

1.2 In the “3PZ RX” display menu, set FREJA with the followingparameters:

4.1.1 External activation of SOTF function

• Activate the digital output DO1, on FREJA so that, the switch-onto-fault (SOTF) function is activated (under normal operating condi-tions, the SOTF-BC input is de-energised).

• Apply a fault condition (press key <S> Faulty/Auto open).

• Check that the correct trip outputs, external signals and indication are obtained.

4.1.2 Automatic initiation of SOTF

• Deactivate the digital output DO1 on FREJA

• Apply a fault condition (press key <S> Faulty/Auto open).

• Check that the correct trip outputs, external signals and indication are obtained.

Table 1:


I Greater than 30% of Ir

DIgoal 111XX XXXXX

Healthy conditions U = 63.5 V, I = 0 A & ZΦ = 0°

R,X scale and Origo pos Suitable for relay settings

Impedance |Z| Set at 50% of used zone setting

Impedance angle ZΦ Between -15° and 120°

Digital outputs DO1 Connect to Switch-onto-fault input on the protection terminal


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 329-XENPage 6 – 188

5 Appendix

5.1 Function block


5.3 Signal list

5.4 Setting table

Visf_088.vsd

SOTF-BLOCK

SWITCH-ONTO-FAULTSOTF

SOTF-NDACC

SOTF-DLCND

SOTF-BC

SOTF-TRIP

SOTF-BC

SOTF-DLCND&

SOTF-NDACCt

200 ms >1

&SOTF-BLOCK

t1000 ms

& t15 ms

SOTF-TRIP

Visf_089.vsd


SOTF- TRIP OUT Operation of the switch-onto-fault function

SOTF- BLOCK IN Blocks the operation of the SOTF function

SOTF- NDACC IN Connected to a non-directional output of an impedance zone used for the detection of a SOTF condition

SOTF- DLCND IN Connected to the dead-line-detection function (determines automatically the SOTF condition)

SOTF- BC IN Closing command to the circuit breaker also enabling the SOTF function


Operation Off / On - Off Operation of the switch-onto-fault function

189Local acceleration logic

1 ApplicationTo achieve fast clearing of faults on the whole line, also in cases where nocommunication channel is available, local acceleration logic is used. Thislogic enables fast clearing during certain conditions, but naturally, it cannot fully replace a communication channel.

The logic can be controlled either by the auto-recloser (zone extension) orby the loss of load current (loss-of-load acceleration).

2 Theory of operation and design

2.1 Zone extension When the auto-recloser controls the function, a signal “auto-recloserready” (ZCLC-ARREADY) allows an overreaching zone (ZCLC-EXACC) to trip instantaneously (see Figure 1:). For this reason, configurethe ZCLC-ARREADY functional input to a AR0n-READY functionaloutput of a used auto-reclosing function.

Figure 1: Simplified logic diagram for the local acceleration logic

When the auto-recloser initiates the close order, there will be no ZCLC-ARREADY signal, and the protection will trip normally with step dis-tance time functions. In case of a fault on the adjacent line within theoverreaching zone range, an unwanted auto-reclosing cycle will occur.The step distance function at the reclosing attempt will prevent anunwanted retrip when the breaker is reclosed. On the other hand, at a per-sistent line fault on line section not covered by instantaneous zone (nor-mally zone 1) or on adjacent line, only the first trip will be“instantaneous”.

2.2 Loss-of-load acceleration

When the “acceleration” is controlled by a loss of load, the overreachingzone used for “acceleration” (ZCLC-LLACC) is not allowed to trip“instantaneously” during normal non-fault system conditions. When allthree-phase currents have been >10% of Ir for more than 35 ms, an over-reaching zone will be allowed to trip “instantaneously” during a fault con-dition when one or two of the phase currents will become low due to athree-phase trip at the opposite terminal, see Figure 2:. The current mea-surement is performed internally in one of the built-in digital signal pro-cessors and the STILL signal becomes logical one under the described

Visf_092.vsd

ZCLC-BLOCK

ZCLC-ARREADY1

>1

ZCLC-NDST &

&TRIP1 - cont.

ZCLC-EXACC

1MRK 580 330-XEN


Local acceleration logic

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 330-XENPage 6 – 190

conditions. The load current in a healthy phase is in this way used to indi-cate the tripping at the opposite terminal. Note that this function will notoperate in case of three-phase faults - none of the phase currents will below when the opposite terminal is tripped.

Figure 2: Loss-of-load acceleration - simplified logic diagram

3 SettingThe operation of the local acceleration functions is set in the menu under:

SettingFunctions


ComLocal

To allow the “overreaching” trip controlled by the auto-recloser at earth-faults only, the zone used for this function can be set with a normal reachof 85% for phase-to-phase faults, but with an increased X1PE and X0PEsetting that gives an overreach for earth-faults. This setting generallyexcludes the use of this zone for any purpose other than local accelerationlogic.

4 TestingThe logic is checked during the secondary injection test of the measuringzones with a fault applied at 100%.

When the conditions for the acceleration are not fulfilled, the fault will betripped with the second zone time delay. When the conditions for theaccelerated function are fulfilled either by the auto-recloser or by the lossof load, the fault will be tripped “instantaneously”.

This test is performed with single line to earth fault only.

ZCLC-BLOCK

ZCLC-BC

ZCLC-LLACC

>1

STILL t

15 ms

&TRIP2 - cont.

Visf_093.vsd

Local acceleration logic 1MRK 580 330-XENPage 6 – 191

Version 2.2-00

5 Appendix

5.1 Function block


Visf_094.vsd

ZCLC-BLOCK

ZCLC-TRIP

LOCAL COMMUNICATION LOGICZCLC-

ZCLC-BC

ZCLC-LLACC

ZCLC-ARREADY

ZCLC-NDST

ZCLC-EXACC

Visf_095.vsd

ZCLC-BLOCK

ZCLC-ARREADY1

>1

ZCLC-NDST &

&

ZCLC-EXACC

ZCLC-BC

ZCLC-LLACC

>1

STILL t

15 ms

&

ZoneExtension = On

LossOfLoad = On

&

&

>1 ZCLC-TRIP

Local acceleration logic

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 330-XENPage 6 – 192

5.3 Signal list

5.4 Setting table


ZCLC- TRIP OUT Trip by local communication logic

ZCLC- BLOCK IN Block of local communication logic

ZCLC- BC IN Circuit breaker open

ZCLC- LLACC IN Function input signal connected to a distance protection zone used for trip-ping at loss of load acceleration

ZCLC- ARREADY IN Function input signal connected to an autoreclosing function (AR0n-ARREADY) autorecloser ready for operation)

ZCLC- EXACC IN Function input signal connected to a distance protection zone used for trip-ping at zone extension

ZCLC- NDST IN Non-directional start from impedance measurement


ZoneExten-sion

Off / On - Off Operation of zone extension logic

LossOfLoad Off / On - Off Operation of loss of load acceleration logic

193Dead-line detection

1 ApplicationThe dead-line detection function (DLD) detects the disconnected phase(s)of a protected object. The output information serves as an input conditionfor some other measuring functions within the REx 5xx terminals. Typicalexamples of such functions are:

• Fuse failure supervision function (FUSE)

• Switch-onto-fault function (SOTF)

• etc.

For this reason, always configure the DLD--START functional output tothe corresponding inputs of the above functions.

2 Theory of operation and designFigure 1: presents a simplified logic diagram of a function. Phase L1, L2and L3 currents and voltages are measured by one of the built-in digitalsignal processors. Logical signals STMILn become logical one, if themeasured currents in corresponding phases (n = 1..3) decrease under theset operating level.

Figure 1: DLD - simplified logic diagram of a function

Logical signals STULnN become logical one, if the measured voltages incorresponding phases (n = 1..3) decrease under the set operating level.

t15 ms

&

t15 ms

&

t15 ms

&

t15 ms

&

t15 ms

&

t15 ms

&

t15 ms

&

t15 ms

&

>1

&

&

&

&

STUL3N

STUL1N

STMIL3

STUL2N

STMIL2

STMIL1 DLD--STIL1

DLD--STIL2

DLD--STIL3

DLD--STUL1

DLD--STUL2

DLD--STUL3

DLD--STPH

DLD--START

Visf_090.vsd

DLD--BLOCK

1MRK 580 331-XEN


Dead-line detection

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 331-XENPage 6 – 194

Corresponding phase starting output signals DLD--STILn and DLD--STULn become in this case logical one, if the function is not blocked bythe logical one on DLD--BLOCK functional input.

Simultaneous operation of current and voltage measuring elements in onephase is a necessary condition for the determination of a “dead-phase”condition. This condition is presented by the activation of a DLD--STPHoutput signal.

A complete line is determined as a “dead-line”, when the voltages and thecurrents in all three phases decrease under the set operate values. A DLD--START output informs about this operating condition.

3 SettingSettings of the operate currents and voltages takes place under the menu:

SettingsFunctions

Group n (n=1-4)DeadLineDet

Set the minimum operate voltage UP< (phase value) with a sufficient mar-gin (at least 15%) under the minimum expected system operate voltage.

Set the minimum operate current with sufficient margin (15 - 20%) underthe minimum expected fault current at expected at minimum voltage con-ditions.

4 TestingConsider all general conditions for testing the REx 5xx terminals.

Connect the terminal and the testing equipment in the same way as fortesting the line distance protection function (see the document “Distanceprotection”). Set the currents and voltages in phases L1, L2, and L3 t totheir rated values.

Observe the functional output signal DLD--STIL1 under the menu:


DeadLineDetFuncOutputs

It is also possible to configure it for testing purposes to one of the binaryoutputs.

Decrease the current in phase L1 slowly, until the DLD--STIL1 signalchanges to a logical 1. Record the value and compare it with the set valueIP<. Increase the current to its original value.

Dead-line detection 1MRK 580 331-XENPage 6 – 195

Version 2.2-00

Repeat the procedure in phases L2 (signal DLD--STIL2) and L3 (signalDLD--STIL3).

Observe the functional output signal DLD--STUL1 under the menu:


DeadLineDetFuncOutputs

It is also possible to configure it for testing purposes to one of the binaryoutputs.

Decrease the voltage in phase L1 slowly, until the DLD--STUL1 signalchanges to a logical 1. Record the value and compare it with the set valueUP<. Increase the voltage to its original value.

Repeat the procedure in phases L2 (signal DLD--STUL2) and L3 (signalDLD--STUL3).

Decrease simultaneously to approximately 80% of the recorded operatevalues current and voltage in phase L1. Check that the functional signalDLD--STPH becomes a logical 1. The information about the signal isavailable under the same menu. Increase voltage and current to their ini-tial values.

Repeat the same procedure in phases L2 and L3.

Decrease simultaneously to approximately 80% of the recorded operatevalues currents and voltages in all three phases. Check that the functionalsignal DLD--START becomes a logical 1. The information about the sig-nal is available under the same menu. Switch off the testing equipment.

Make sure that all signals are reconfigured to their initial state.

Dead-line detection

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 331-XENPage 6 – 196

5 Appendix

5.1 Function block


Visf_091.vsd

DLD--BLOCK

DLD--STIL3

DEAD-LINE DETECTIONDLD--

DLD--STUL1

DLD--STUL2

DLD--STUL3

DLD--STIL2

DLD--STIL1

DLD--START

DLD--STPH

t15 ms

&

t15 ms

&

t15 ms

&

t15 ms

&

t15 ms

&

t15 ms

&

t15 ms

&

t15 ms

&

>1

&

&

&

&

STUL3N

STUL1N

STMIL3

STUL2N

STMIL2

STMIL1 DLD--STIL1

DLD--STIL2

DLD--STIL3

DLD--STUL1

DLD--STUL2

DLD--STUL3

DLD--STPH

DLD--START

Visf_090.vsd

DLD--BLOCK

Dead-line detection 1MRK 580 331-XENPage 6 – 197

Version 2.2-00

5.3 Signal list

5.4 Setting table


DLD-- START OUT Dead line condition detected in all three phases

DLD-- STIL1 OUT Current below set value phase L1



DLD-- STUL1 OUT Voltage below set value phase L1



DLD-- STPH OUT Dead phase condition detected

DLD-- BLOCK IN Block of dead line detection function


Operation Off / On - 0 Dead line detection On/Off

U< 10 - 100 % of U1b 70 Operating phase voltage (undervoltage function)

IP< 5 - 100 % of I1b 20 Operating phase current (undercurrent function)

Dead-line detection

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 331-XENPage 6 – 198

199Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection

1 ApplicationLong transmission lines often transfer great quantities of electrical powerfrom production to consumption areas. The imbalance of the producedand consumed electrical power at each end of the transmission line is verylarge. This means that a fault on the line can easily endanger the stabilityof a complete system.

The dynamic stability of a power system depends mostly on three param-eters (at constant amount of transmitted electrical power):

• The type of the fault. Three-phase faults are the most dangerous, because no power can be transmitted through the fault point during fault conditions.

• The magnitude of the fault current. A high fault current indicates that the decrease of transmitted power is high.

• The total fault clearing time. The phase angles between the EMFs of the generators on both sides of the transmission line increase over the permitted stability limits if the total fault clearing time, which consists of the protection operating time and the breaker opening time, is too long.

The fault current on the long transmission lines depends mostly on thefault position and decreases with the distance from the generation point.So the protection must operate very quickly for faults very close to thegeneration (and relay) point, for which very high fault currents are charac-teristic.

So instantaneous, non-directional, phase-segregated, overcurrent protec-tion (IOC), which can operate in 15 ms (50 Hz nominal system frequency)for faults characterized by very high currents, is included in some of theREx 5xx terminals. Refer to the ordering information for more details.

2 Theory of operationThe current-measuring elements within one of the built-in digital signalprocessors continuously measure the currents in all three phases, andcompare them with the IP>> set value. A recursive Fouriers filter filtersthe current signals, and a separate trip counter prevents high overreachingof the measuring elements. The logical value of each phase current signalon the output of the digital signal processor (STIL1, STIL2 and STIL3respectively) is equal to 1 if the measured phase current exceeds the pre-set value.

3 DesignThe simplified logic diagram of the instantaneous phase overcurrent func-tion is shown in figure 1.

The overcurrent function is disabled if:

• The terminal is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been blocked from the HMI (BlockIOC=Yes)

• The input signal IOC--BLOCK is high.

1MRK 580 335-XEN


Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 335-XENPage 6 – 200

The IOC--BLOCK signal is a blocking signal of the instantaneous phaseovercurrent function. It can be connected to a binary input of the terminalin order to receive a block command from external devices or can be soft-ware connected to other internal functions of the terminal itself in order toreceive a block command from internal functions. Through OR gate it canbe connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs. TheIOC--BLOCK signal blocks also the instantaneous residual overcurrentfunction, if this is installed in the terminal.

When the instantaneous phase overcurrent function is enabled, the outputtripping signals IOC--TRL1, IOC--TRL2, IOC--TRL3, IOC--TRP andIOC--TRIP can operate. The duration of each output signal is at least 15ms. This enables continuous output signals for currents, which go just alittle above the set operating value.

The single phase trip signals IOC--TRL1, IOC--TRL2, and IOC--TRL3are related to L1, L2, and L3 phases and therefore also suitable for the sin-gle phase tripping with single-phase auto-reclosing.

Figure 1: Simplified logic diagram of instantaneous overcurrent protec-tion

The signal IOC--TRP is the logic OR of the three single phase trips. It canbe used to trip the circuit breaker if it only has a three phase operation.

The IOC--TRIP output signal behaves as general instantaneous overcur-rent trip when in the REx 5xx terminal also the instantaneous residualovercurrent function is implemented; i.e. this signal will be activated in

IOC--BLOCK

IOC--TRL1

visf_105.vsd

&

STIN

Residual Overcurrent Detectionfrom Instant. Residual O/C Function, if present.

Function Enable

IOC - INSTANTANEOUS PHASE OVERCURRENT FUNCTION

TEST-ACTIVE

&

TEST

BlockIOC = Yes

>1

STIL1

&

&

&

&

STIL2

STIL3

>1

>1

IOC--TRL2

IOC--TRL3

IOC--TRP

IOC--TRIP

Blocking of Residual O/CFunction, if present.


1MRK 580 335-XENPage 6 – 201

Version 2.2-00

case of any single phase overcurrent or residual overcurrent detection(STIN). If only the instantaneous phase overcurrent function is installed inthe terminal, then this signal behaves exactly as the signal IOC--TRP andcan be used for signalizing.

4 Setting instructionsThis protection function must operate only in a selective way. So check allsystem and transient conditions that could cause its unwanted operation.

Only detailed network studies can determine the operating conditionsunder which the highest possible fault current is expected on the line. Inmost cases, this current appears during three-phase fault conditions. Butalso examine single-phase-to-earth and two-phase-to-earth conditions.

Also study transients that could cause a high increase of the line currentfor short times. A typical example is a transmission line with a powertransformer at the remote end, which can cause high inrush current whenconnected to the network and can thus also cause the operation of thebuilt-in, instantaneous, overcurrent protection.

4.1 Meshed network without parallel line

The following fault calculations have to be done for three-phase, single-phase-to-earth and two-phase-to-earth faults. With reference to figure 2,apply a fault in B and then calculate the relay through fault phase currentIfB. The calculation should be done using the minimum source impedancevalues for ZA and the maximum source impedance values for ZB in orderto get the maximum through fault current from A to B.

Figure 2: Through fault current from A to B: IfB

Then a fault in A has to be applied and the through fault current IfA has to becalculated (Figure 3). In order to get the maximum through fault current,the minimum value for ZB and the maximum value for ZA have to be con-sidered.

visf_125.vsd

~ ~ZA ZBZ L

A B

Relay

I fB

Fault


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 335-XENPage 6 – 202

Figure 3: Through fault current from B to A: IfA

The relay must not trip for any of the two trough fault currents. Hence theminimum theoretical current setting (Imin) will be:

(Equation 1)

A safety margin of 5% for the maximum protection static inaccuracy anda safety margin of 5% for the maximum possible transient overreach haveto be introduced. An additional 20% is suggested due to the inaccuracy ofthe instrument transformers under transient conditions and inaccuracy inthe system data.

The minimum primary setting (Is) for the instantaneous phase overcurrentprotection is then:

(Equation 2)

The protection function can be used for the specific application only ifthis setting value is equal or less than the maximum fault current that therelay has to clear (IF in figure 4).

Figure 4: Fault current: IF

visf_126.vsd

~ ~ZA ZBZ L

A B

Relay

I fA

Fault

Imin MAX IfA IfB,( )≥

Is 1 3, Imin⋅≥

visf_127.vsd

~ ~Z A Z BZ L

A B

Relay

I F

Fault


1MRK 580 335-XENPage 6 – 203

Version 2.2-00

The current transformer secondary setting current (IsSEC) is:

(Equation 3)

where is the secondary rated current of the main CT and is theprimary rated current of the main CT.

The relay setting value IP>> is given in percentage of the secondary basecurrent value, , associated to the current transformer input I1. Thevalue for IP>> is given from this formula:

(Equation 4)

and this is the value that has to be set in the relay.

Set this value under the setting menu:

SettingsFunctions

Group nInstantOC

4.2 Meshed network with parallel line

In case of parallel lines, the influence of the induced current from the par-allel line to the protected line has to be considered. One example is givenin fig.5. where the two lines are connected to the same busbars. In thiscase the influence of the induced fault current from the faulty line (line 1)to the healthy line (line 2) is considered together with the two throughfault currents IfA and IfB mentioned previously. The maximal influencefrom the parallel line for the relay in fig.5 will be with a fault at the Cpoint with the C breaker open.

A fault in C has to be applied, and then the maximum current seen fromthe relay (IM ) on the healthy line (this applies for single-phase-to-earthand two-phase-to-earth faults) is calculated. The through fault current IMis the sum of the induced fault current from line 1 and the fault currentthat would occur in line 2 with a zero mutual inductance M.

IsSEC

ISEC

IPRIM------------- Is⋅=

ISEC IPRIM

I1b

IP>>IsSEC

I1b-------------- 100⋅=


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 335-XENPage 6 – 204

Figure 5: Two parallel lines. Influence from parallel line to the through fault current: IM

The minimum theoretical current setting for the overcurrent protectionfunction (Imin) will be:

(Equation 5)

where IfA and IfB have been described in the previous paragraph. Consid-ering the safety margins mentioned previously, the minimum setting (Is)for the instantaneous phase overcurrent protection is then:

(Equation 6)

The protection function can be used for the specific application only ifthis setting value is equal or less than the maximum phase fault currentthat the relay has to clear.


(Equation 7)

where is the secondary rated current of the main CT and is theprimary secondary rated current of the main CT.

The relay setting value IP>> is given in percentage of the secondary basecurrent value, , associated to the current transformer input I1. Thevalue for IP>> is given from this formula:

(Equation 8)



SettingsFunctions

Group nInstantOC

visf_128.vsd

~ ~Z A Z B

ZL1A B

I M

Fault

Relay

ZL2

M

CLine 1

Line 2

Imin MAX IfA IfB IM, ,( )≥

Is 1 3, Imin⋅≥

IsSEC

ISEC

IPRIM------------- Is⋅=

ISEC IPRIM

I1b

IP>>IsSEC

I1b-------------- 100⋅=


1MRK 580 335-XENPage 6 – 205

Version 2.2-00

5 TestingThe function can be disabled during the test mode during these condi-tions:

• When the function should be blocked under the testing conditions, select the functions that should be blocked under the menu:

TestTestMode

BlockFunctions

• The terminal is set to test mode by setting the Operation=On, which appears under the menu:

TestTestMode

Operation

• The terminal is automatically set to test mode by applying the logical 1 to the TEST-INPUT functional input.

Important note: The function is blocked if the corresponding settingunder the BlockFunctions menu remains on and the TEST-INPUT signalremains active.

The instantaneous phase overcurrent function does not have to be blockedin order to be tested.

Check the operating values of the current measuring elements and corre-sponding functions during the commissioning and during regular mainte-nance tests. ABB Network Partner recommends, although it is not anabsolute requirement, the use of the RTS 21 (FREJA) testing equipmentfor secondary injection-testing purposes.

Before testing, connect the testing equipment according to the valid termi-nal diagram of the specific REx 5xx terminal. Pay special attention to thecorrect connection of the input and output current terminals, and to theconnection of the residual current.

Follow these steps:

1.1 Check if the input and output logical signals in figure 1 are config-ured to the corresponding binary inputs and outputs of the testedterminal. If not, configure them for testing purposes. Set the opera-tion of the IOC protection to On mode.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 335-XENPage 6 – 206

1.2 Set the input logical signals to the logical zero and note on the localHMI that the IOC--TRP logical signal is equal to the logical 0. Val-ues of the logical signals belonging to the instantaneous overcurrentprotection are available under menu tree:

Service ReportFunctions

InstantOCFuncOutput

1.3 Quickly increase the injected current (measured current) in the L1phase until the IOC--TRL1 signal appears. Record the operatingvalue. Decrease the measured current to zero (observe the maxi-mum permitted overloading of the current circuits in the terminal).Compare the measured operating current with the set value. Theresult should be within the 5% accuracy limits with the addition ofthe accuracy class of the testing equipment.

1.4 Measure the operating current in the remaining two phases in a sim-ilar way.

1.5 Quickly set the measured current (fault current) in one phase toabout 1.5 times the measured operating current, and disconnect thecurrent with the switch.

1.6 Switch on the fault current and measure the operating time of theIOC protection. Use the IOC--TRP signal from the configuredbinary output to stop the timer.

1.7 Connect the rated dc voltage to the IOC--BLOCK configured binary input,and switch on the fault current. No IOC--TRP signal should appear.Switch off the fault current. Disconnect the dc voltage from the IOC--BLOCK binary input.

1.8 Set the operation of the protection at Off mode and switch on thefault current. Note that no corresponding binary signals shouldappear on the terminal.

1.9 Configure (if necessary) the terminal to its normal operating con-figuration.


1MRK 580 335-XENPage 6 – 207

Version 2.2-00

6 Appendix

6.1 Function block


IOC--BLOCK IOC--TRL1

INSTANTANEOUS PHASEOVERCURRENT

visf_106.vsd

IOC--TRL2IOC--TRL3IOC--TRP

IOC--TRIP

IOC--BLOCK

IOC--TRL1

visf_107.vsd

&

STIN

Residual Overcurrent Detectionfrom Instant. Residual O/C Function if present

IOC - INSTANTANEOUS PHASE OVERCURRENT FUNCTION

TEST-ACTIVE

&

TEST

BlockIOC = Yes

>1

STIL1

&

&

&

&

STIL2

STIL3

>1

>1

IOC--TRL2

IOC--TRL3

IOC--TRP

IOC--TRIP


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 335-XENPage 6 – 208

6.3 Signal list

1. blocks also the instantaneous residual overcurrent function, if it is installed in the terminal.2. trip also by instantaneous residual overcurrent function, if it is installed in the terminal

6.4 Setting table

1. it affects also the instantaneous residual overcurrent function, if it is installed in the terminal.


IOC-- BLOCK IN Block of instantaneous overcurrent function1

IOC-- TRL1 OUT Trip by instantaneous overcurrent phase L1



IOC-- TRP OUT Trip by instantaneous phase overcurrent

IOC-- TRIP OUT Trip by instantaneous overcurrent2


Operation Off, On Off Instantaneous overcurrent function Off/On1

IP>> 50-2000 % 100 Operating phase current, as a percentage of I1b

209Time delayed phase overcurrent protection

1 ApplicationThe time delayed phase overcurrent protection can be used as independentovercurrent protection, particularly for radially fed systems, or as back-upprotection to the main distance or line differential protection functions. Inthe first case the protected zone of the time delayed overcurrent protectionreaches upto the next overcurrent protection and works in its zone asback-up protection. The programmable time delay (definite time) of thefunction allows the time selectivity through an appropriate time gradingamong the overcurrent relays protecting the system.

Where the function acts as back-up for the main line protection, the tripfrom the overcurrent protection can be activated when the main protectionfunction is blocked (i.e. by the fuse failure protection) or it can be activeall the time.

In some cases, where it could be difficult to achieve a selective trip, thefunction can be used as a helpful overcurrent signallization for the post-fault analysis.

2 Theory of operationThe current-measuring elements within one of the built-in digital signalprocessors continuously measure the currents in all three phases, andcompare them with the IP> set value. A recursive Fouriers filter filters thecurrent signals, and a separate trip counter prevents high overreaching ofthe measuring elements. The logical value of each phase current signal onthe output of the digital signal processor (STIL1, STIL2 and STIL3respectively) is equal to 1 if the measured phase current exceeds the setvalue. These signals will instantaneously set their respective output start-ing signals (TOC--STL1, TOC--STL2, TOC--STL3), if not the function isblocked.

If any of the three phase currents exceeds the set value for a period longerthan the set time tP, then a three phase trip is generated from the outputsignal TOC--TRP.

3 DesignThe simplified logic diagram of the time delayed phase overcurrent func-tion is shown in figure 1.

The function is disabled (blocked) if:

• The terminal is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been blocked from the HMI (BlockTOC=Yes)

• The input signal TOC--BLOCK is high

The TOC--BLOCK signal is a blocking signal of the time delayed phaseovercurrent function. It prevents the changing of any trip or starting out-put signals. It can be connected to a binary input of the terminal in order toreceive a block command from external devices or can be software con-nected to other internal functions of the terminal itself in order to receive ablock command from internal functions. Through OR gate it can be con-

1MRK 580 336-XEN


Time delayed phase overcurrent protection

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 336-XENPage 6 – 210

nected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs. The TOC--BLOCK signal blocks also the time delayed residual overcurrent protec-tion, if this is installed in the same REx 5xx terminal.

When the function is enabled, there is still the possibility to block the out-put trips only, without affecting the start signals, that will always beactive. This can be obtained with the function input TOC--BLKTR. Simi-larly to the TOC--BLOCK signal, also the time delayed residual overcur-rent protection, if present in the terminal, is blocked from TOC-BLKTR.

The duration of each output signal is at least 15 ms. This enables continu-ous output signals for currents, which go just a little above the set operat-ing value.

The output trip signal TOC--TRP is a three phase trip. Single phase infor-mation are available from the starting signals, that are phase segregated.

The TOC--TRIP output signal behaves as general time delayed instanta-neous overcurrent trip when in the REx 5xx terminal also the time delayedresidual overcurrent function is implemented; i.e. this signal will be acti-vated in case of any time delayed overcurrent or time delayed residualovercurrent trip (TRN). If only the time delayed phase overcurrent func-tion is installed in the terminal, then this signal behaves exactly as the sig-nal TOC--TRP and can be used for signallization.

Figure 1: Simplified logic diagram of time delayed overcurrent protec-tion

TOC--BLOCK

TRN

Residual Overcurrent Tripfrom Time Delayed Residual O/CFunction. If present.

TOC - TIME DELAYED PHASE OVERCURRENT FUNCTION

TEST-ACTIVE

&

TEST

BlockTOC = Yes

>1

STIL1

STIL2

STIL3

&

&

TOC--BLKTR

>1

&

t

tP&

>1

Function Enable

Trip Blocking

Trip Blocking to Time DelayedResidual O/C Function. If present.

Blocking of TimeDelayed ResidualO/C Function. Ifpresent.


1MRK 580 336-XENPage 6 – 211

Version 2.2-00

4 Setting instructionsThe current setting value must be selected in order to permit the detectionof the lowest short circuit current without having any unwanted trippingor starting of the function under normal load conditions. The followingrelation has to be considered for the setting of the operating current (Is) ofthe function:

(Equation 1)

where is the maximum permissible load current of the protectedunit, is the minimum fault current that the relay has to clear. Thevalues 1.2 and 0.7 are safety factors. is the reset ratio of the overcurrentfunction: 0.95.

The settable time delay tP allows the time selectivity of the overcurrentfunction, according to the time grading plan of all the other overcurrentprotections in the system. The time setting value should also considertransients that could cause a high increase of the line current for shorttimes. A typical example is a transmission line with a power transformerat the remote end, which can cause high inrush current when energized.

Where the time delayed overcurrent function is used as back-up of imped-ance protection, normally the time delay is set higher than the time delayof distance zone 2 (or 3) in order to avoid interferences with the imped-ance measuring system.

4.1 Setting of operating current IP>

If Is is the primary setting operating value of the function, than the sec-ondary setting current (IsSEC) is:

(Equation 2)


The relay setting value IP> is given in percentage of the secondary basecurrent value, , associated to the current transformer input I1. Thevalue for IP> is given from this formula:

(Equation 3)



SettingsFunctions

Group nTimeDelayOC

on the value IP>.

1,2ILmax

K-----------------⋅ Is 0,7 IFmin⋅< <

ILmaxIFmin

K

IsSEC

ISEC

IPRIM------------- Is⋅=

ISEC IPRIM

I1b

IP>IsSEC

I1b-------------- 100⋅=


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 336-XENPage 6 – 212

4.2 Setting of time delay tP

Set the time delay of the function, tP, under the setting menu:

SettingsFunctions

Group nTimeDelayOC

on the value tP.



TestTestMode

BlockFunctions


TestTestMode

Operation



The delayed phase overcurrent function must not be blocked in order to betested.


Before testing, connect the testing equipment according to the valid termi-nal diagram of the specific REx 5xx terminal. Pay special attention to thecorrect connection of the input and output current terminals.


1MRK 580 336-XENPage 6 – 213

Version 2.2-00

Follow these steps:

1.1 Check if the input and output logical signals in figure 1 are config-ured to the corresponding binary inputs and outputs of the testedterminal. If not, configure them for testing purposes. Set the opera-tion of the TOC protection to On mode.

1.2 Set the input logical signals to the logical zero and note on the localHMI that the TOC--TRP logical signal is equal to the logical 0. Val-ues of the logical signals belonging to the time delayed overcurrentprotection are available under menu tree:


TimeDelayOCFuncOutput

1.3 Set the time delay tP to 300 ms.

1.4 Quickly increase the injected current (measured current) in the L1phase until the starting signal TOC--STL1 appears. Record theoperating value. Decrease the measured current to zero (observe themaximum permitted overloading of the current circuits in the termi-nal). Compare the measured operating current with the set value.The result should be within the 5% accuracy limits with the addi-tion of the accuracy class of the testing equipment.



1.7 Switch on the fault current and measure the operating time of theTOC protection. Use the TOC--TRP signal from the configuredbinary output to stop the timer. Compare the measured time withthe set value tP.

1.8 Connect the rated dc voltage to the TOC--BLOCK configured binaryinput, and switch on the fault current. No output signals should appear.Switch off the fault current. Disconnect the dc voltage from the TOC--BLOCK binary input.

1.9 Connect the rated dc voltage to the TOC--BLKTR configured binaryinput, and switch on the fault current. No trip signals (TOC--TRP, TOC--TRIP) should appear, but starting signals (TOC--STL_, TOC-STP) willtrigger instead. Switch off the fault current. Disconnect the dc voltage fromthe TOC--BLKTR binary input.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 336-XENPage 6 – 214

2.0 Set the operation of the protection at Off mode and switch on thefault current. Note that no corresponding binary signals shouldappear on the terminal. Switch off the fault current.


6 Appendix

6.1 Function block


TOC--BLOCKTOC--STL2

TIME DELAYED PHASE OVERCURRENT

visf_130.vsd

TOC--STL3

TOC--STP

TOC--TRPTOC--TRIP

TOC--BLKTR

TOC--STL1

TOC--BLOCK

visf_131.vsd

TRN

Residual Overcurrent Tripfrom Delayed. Residual O/C Function.If present

TOC - TIME DELAYED PHASE OVERCURRENT FUNCTION

TEST-ACTIVE

&

TEST

BlockTOC = Yes

>1

STIL1

STIL2

STIL3

TOC--TRP

TOC--TRIP

&

&

TOC--BLKTR

>1

&

t

tP&

TOC--STP

TOC--STL1

TOC--STL2

TOC--STL3

>1


1MRK 580 336-XENPage 6 – 215

Version 2.2-00

6.2.1 Signal list

1. affects also the time delayed residual overcurrent function if it is installed in the terminal.2. trip also by time delayed residual overcurrent function if it is installed in the terminal.

6.2.2 Setting table

1. affects also the time delayed residual overcurrent function if it is installed in the terminal.


TOC-- BLOCK IN Block of time delayed overcurrent function1

TOC-- BLKTR IN Block of trip from time delayed overcurrent function1

TOC-- STL1 OUT Start phase overcurrent phase L1



TOC-- STP OUT Start phase overcurrent

TOC-- TRP OUT Trip by time delayed phase overcurrent function

TOC-- TRIP OUT Trip by time delayed phase overcurrent function2


Operation Off, On Off Time delayed overcurrent function On/Off1 (*)

IP> 10-400 % 100 Operating phase current, as a percentage of I1b

tP 0.000-60.000 s 10.000 Time delay phase current function


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 336-XENPage 6 – 216

217Directional definite and inverse time delayed phase overcurrent function (TOC3)

7 ApplicationThe time delayed phase overcurrent function is to be used as short-circuitprotection in three phase networks operating at 50 or 60 Hz. It is supposedto be used either as primary protection or back-up protection for differen-tial functions or impedance measuring functions.

In radial networks it is often sufficient to use phase overcurrent relays asshort circuit protection for lines, transformers and other equipment. Thecurrent time characteristic should be chosen according to common prac-tice in the network. It is strongly recommended to use the same currenttime characteristic for all overcurrent relays in the network. This includesovercurrent protection for transformers and other equipment.

There is a possibility to use phase overcurrent protection in meshed sys-tems, as short circuit protection. It must however be realized that the set-ting of a phase overcurrent protection system in meshed networks, can bevery complicated and a large number of fault current calculations areneeded. There are situations where there is no possibility to have selectiv-ity with a protection system based on overcurrent relays, in a meshed sys-tem.

The measuring function contains one current measuring element for eachphase, each of them with a low set and a high set measuring step. The lowset step can have either definite time or inverse time characteristic. Thecharacteristics available are extremely inverse, very inverse, normalinverse or RI. The high set step has definite time delay.

The settings are common for all phases but both the low and high set stepcan be set On/Off individually and also got individual inputs for blocking.

1MRK 580 678-XEN


Directional definite and inverse time delayed phase overcurrent function (TOC3) Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 678-XENPage 6 – 218

8 Theory of operation and design

8.1 Current measuring element

The current measuring element continuously measures the current in allphases and compares it to the set operating values for the two steps. If thecurrent is above set value the corresponding output signal will be set. Ifthe current is above both the setting I>Low and I>Inv the inverse timeevaluation according to choosen characteristic starts and the INV signalsets after corresponding time. A filter ensures immunity to disturbancesand DC-components and minimizes the transient overreach. A simplifiedblock diagram is found in Figure 1. The function is true phase segregated.This means that there are identical measuring elements in each phase.

Figure 2: Simplified block diagram for definite and inverse time delayed phase overcurrent function

The inverse time delay can be set for different characteristics by the set-ting Characteristic = x, the x is choosen from following settings:

Def (Definite time)

NI (Normal inverse)

VI (Very inverse)

EI (Extremely inverse)

RI (Inverse time corresponding to relays of type RI)

With setting Characteristic = Def the signal INV will be set to zero.

The different inverse time characteristics are defined in Table 1.

I>Inv

NI, VI, EI, RI

IL1 (IL2, IL3)I>Low

Characteristic= Def/NI/VI/EI/RI

I>High

k, I>Inv

STLSL1-int (L2,L3)

STINVL1-int (L2,L3)

STHSL1-int (L2,L3)

Directional definite and inverse time delayed phase overcurrent function (TOC3)

1MRK 580 678-XENPage 6 – 219

Version 2.2-00

8.2 Directional measuring element

Directional information is calculated for all phase to ground and phase tophase loops from polarization voltages and the three phase currents.The polarization voltage is composed from a positive sequence voltagepart and a memory voltage part. The positive sequence voltage is createdby proper phase adjustment and summation of the phase voltages. So thedirectional element can use it for all unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults. At three phase close-up faults all voltages will be zero and there-for a memory voltage is required for polarization.

The polarization voltage, U1pol, will be composed by 85% of the positivesequence voltage, U1, and 15% of the memory voltage U1mem:

U1pol = 0,85*U1 + 0,15*U1mem

The polarization voltage for the fault loop (one of the phase to phase orphase to earth loop) is compared to the corresponding currents to createthe directionality, provided that the measuring loop current exceeds theminimum operating current for the directional function. Directional infor-mation will be calculated for all phase to ground and phase to phase loops.The phase angle of an equivalent impedance, which is the ratio betweenthe loop polarizing voltage and the loop fault current, is used for the direc-tional measurement.

A measuring loop is said to have a forward direction if the phase angle βof the equivalent impedance is:−15ο < β < +115ο,

and reverse direction if:+165ο < β < −65ο.

If the argument β of the impedance is:−65ο < β < −15ο or +115ο < β < +165ο,

then the fault loop has no defined direction. See also Figure 2.

Figure 3: Definitions for Forward and Reverse directions

A block diagram for the directional function is found in Figure 3.

R

X

−15ο

+115ο

Forward

R

X

−65ο

+165ο

Reverse


1MRK 580 678-XENPage 6 – 220

Figure 4: Block diagram for directional function

8.3 Directional overcurrent function

The directional overcurrent function uses the information from the currentmeasuring elements as described in 2.1 “Current measuring element” andthe directional impedance measuring element as described in 2.2 “Direc-tional measuring element”, to create the directional overcurrent function.

8.3.1 Directional phase selection

In order to use correct directional information during all types of faults thefunction is provided with a simple phase selection. The phase selection is assigned to distinguish between phase to earthfaults and phase to phase faults.

The criteria for the two indications that are regarded in the function are:Phase to earth fault:

Phase to phase fault:

If the criteria for PE FAULT are fulfilled the phase to earth directionalindications are used and if the criteria for PP FAULT are fulfilled thephase to phase directional indications are used. If all criteria are met, thenonly the directional indications for phase to phase are released. The aim isto preserve the phase to phase measurement also during two-phase toground faults with high residual current (at least as long as the criteriaallows, see equations above).However, the directional indications will appear also for healthy phasesand in the phase to phase case the indications will overlap in an unwantedmanner because the overcurrent evaluation is performed per phase only(both forward and reverse can be indicated for one phase, simulta-neously). So in order to establish a complete directional phase selectionthe one and only faulty ‘loop’ must be singled out. This is done by means

ZDIR DIRFWL1N-intDIRFWL2N-intDIRFWL3N-int

UL1N

UL2N

UL3N

IL1

IL2

IL3

DIRFWL1L2-intDIRFWL2L3-intDIRFWL3L1-int

DIRRVL1N-intDIRRVL2N-intDIRRVL3N-int

DIRRVL1L2-intDIRRVL2L3-intDIRRVL3L1-int

PE FAULT 3 I0⋅ 0,5 IMinOp⋅≥( ) AND 3 I0⋅ 0,2 max Iph( )⋅≥( )=

PP FAULT 3 I0⋅ 0,2 Irated⋅≤( ) OR 3 I0⋅ 0,4 max Iph( )⋅≤( )=


1MRK 580 678-XENPage 6 – 221

Version 2.2-00

of releasing the directional indication with the corresponding overcurrentindications (overcurrent in two phases is required, see Figure 4).

Figure 5: Excerpt from directional phase selection

Consider the case where a reverse fault is cleared and the prefault forwardload conditions are retrieved. So, in order not to issue a false trip if thereversal indication is deactivated (or the forward indication gets active)before the overcurrent indication drops, the reversal of direction is actu-ally held back during 50ms according to the logic of Figure 5. Each phaseand each set stage is provided with an individual logic circuit (six circuitsin all) to allow operation during simultaneous ground faults (one forward,one reverse).

Figure 6: Current reversal logic for one phase and one set step

8.3.2 General overcurrent operating principles

The low and high set steps can individually be set directional or non-directional. If set in non-directional mode the overcurrent function onlyuses the signals from the current measuring elements as seen fromFigure 1.In directional mode there are two modes of operation, forward release andreverse block denoted ForwRelease and RevBlock respectively. The prin-ciples of these three modes of operation are illustrated in Figure 6, below.

PE FAULT

PP FAULT &

>1

>1

&

>1

>1

DFWL1 - int.

DFWL1 - int.

DFWL2 - int.

L1L2

L1

L3L1

L1L2

L2

L2L3STLSL1 - intSTHSL1 - int

STLSL2 - intSTHSL2 - int

DIRFWL1L2 - int

DIRFWL1N - int

&

DFWL1 - int

&

DRVL1 - int &

&FWL1 - int.

t50 ms

t50 ms

>1RVL1 - int.

STLSL1 - int


1MRK 580 678-XENPage 6 – 222

Figure 7: Directional operation modes of TOC3

In forward release operation mode a criteria that indicates that the fault isin forward direction is needed for tripping. Since the directional functionneeds voltage for the directional check it will not be able to operate whenswitching in a line against a persistent close-up three phase fault if voltageis measured on the line side of the breaker. A solution to this might be touse the SOTF function for the distance protection, with output TOC3-STND as acceleration signal.

In reverse block operation mode a criteria that indicates that the fault is inreverse direction is used for blocking the function. In this case there is noproblem switching in a line against a persistent close-up three phase faulteven if voltage is measured on the line side of the breaker since the direc-tional function will not issue any reverse signal.

The general principles of time delay for the two steps of the overcurrentfunction is displayed in the following Figure 7.

Figure 8: Delayed time operation for low set step and general time delay

STARTLSL1-int.STLSL1-intFWL1-int &

Operation (Low) = ForwRelease

STARTLSL1-int.STLSL1-intRVL1-int

Operation (Low) = RevBlock

&

STARTLSL1-int.STLSL1-int

Operation (Low) = NonDir

STARTLSL1-int

Characteristic = Def&

&

>1t

tMinInv ttLow TRLSL1-int.

STINVL1-int

STARTHSL1-intt

tHigh TRHSL1-int.

High set step

Low set step


1MRK 580 678-XENPage 6 – 223

Version 2.2-00

General trip signals are derived from the phase segregated starts accord-ing to Figure 11:

Figure 9: General trip

With setting Characteristic = Def (Figure 7) the signal TOC3-TRLS willbe active if, at least, one of the phase currents exceeds the set value I>Lowfor the low set step, and if the directional criterion is fulfilled, for a longertime than the set delay tLow.

With setting Characteristic = NI/VI/EI or RI (Figure 7) we have the fol-lowing: If, at least, one of the phase currents exceeds the set value I>Lowthe timer circuit tMinInv is activated together with the inverse time mea-suring circuit (Figure 1) in order to calculate the operating time. The oper-ating time is determined by the magnitude of the current, characteristicchoosen, set characteristic current I>Inv and time multiplier k. When boththe inverse time and tMinInv have elapsed the timer tLow will be acti-vated and after its time is elapsed the signal TOC3-TRLS is activated. Itmust be observed that the time delay of operation, if inverse time charac-teristics is used, will be the sum of the inverse time delay and the tLowsetting.

The timer circuit tMinInv (Figure 7) can be used to achieve a defined min-imum operating time at high fault currents. The timer circuit tLow can beused for adding an additional time delay to the inverse time characteristic.

The signal TOC3-TRHS will be active if one of the phase currentsexceeds the set value I>High for a longer time than the set delay tHigh atthe same time as TOC--BLKTRSH and TOC--BLOCK are not present.

An external signal connected to TOC3_BLKTRLS will block trippingfrom low set step. The step can also be blocked with the setting OperationLow= Off.

An external signal connected to TOC3_BLKTRHS will block trippingfrom high set step. The step can also be blocked with the setting OperationHigh= Off.

TOC3--BLKTRLS

TOC3--TRLSTRLSL1-int

TOC3--BLOCK

TOC3--BLKTRHS

TRLSL3-intTRLSL2-int >1

&

TOC3--TRHSTRHSL1-int

TRHSL3-intTRHSL2-int >1

&

t50 ms


1MRK 580 678-XENPage 6 – 224

An external signal connected to TOC3_BLOCK will block both low andhigh set steps.

The Figure below (Figure 9) illustrates how the start signals are formed.

Figure 10: Start signals

As the phase segregated start signals are non directional, and used forindication only, there is no possibility to use a phase segregated transfertrip scheme. A three-phase transfer trip scheme will be applicable usingthe output TOC3-STFW or TOC3-STRV, keeping in mind the perfor-mance expected during simultaneous faults on parallel lines.

STLSL1-intTOC3--STNDL1STHSL1-int

STLSL2-intSTHSL2-int

STLSL3-intSTHSL3-int >1

>1

>1

>1

>1

&

TOC3--STNDL2&

TOC3--STNDL3&

TOC3--STNDLS&

TOC3--STND&

&

&>1

>1

TOC3--STFW&

TOC3--STRV&

FWL1-int

RVL1-int

TOC3--BLOCK

FWL2-int

RVL2-int

FWL3-int

RVL3-int

L3L2

L3L2L1

L1

t50 ms


1MRK 580 678-XENPage 6 – 225

Version 2.2-00

9 Setting instructionsThe directional phase overcurrent protection can be used in differentapplications. In most applications it is required that all short circuitswithin a protected zone shall be detected and cleared and the fault clear-ance shall be selective. As the protection can be used in several applica-tions only some examples are discussed.

9.1 Line protection in a radial network

The directional phase overcurrent protection is suitable to use in radialsystems with generation connected out in the system. In such a networkthe fault current can be fed both in the forward and reverse direction. Nor-mally the protection will detect and trip faults in the forward direction.

The pick up current setting (inverse time relays) or the lowest current step(constant time relays) must be given a current setting so that the highestpossible load current does not cause relay operation. Here considerationalso has to be taken to the relay reset current, so that a short peak of over-current does not cause operation of the relay even when the overcurrenthas ceased.

The lowest setting value can be written:

Here:

1.2 = a safety factor due to load estimation uncertainty etc.,

k = the resetting ratio of the relay (about 0.95), and

Imax =the maximum load current.

The maximum load current on the line has to be estimated. From opera-tion statistics the load current up to the present situation can be found.Also emergency situations must be considered. The current setting mustbe valid also for some years ahead.

There is also a demand that all faults, within the zone that the protectionshall cover, must be detected by the phase overcurrent relay. The mini-mum fault current Iscmin, to be detected by the relay, must be calculated.Taking this value as a base, the highest pick up current setting can be writ-ten:

Ipu 1,2Imax

k----------⋅≥

min7.0 scpu II ⋅≤


1MRK 580 678-XENPage 6 – 226

Here

0.7= a safety factor, due to calculation unsertainty and

Iscmin = the smallest fault current to be detected by the overcurrent protec-tion.

As a summary the pick up current shall be chosen within the interval:

The high current function of the overcurrent relay, which only has a shortor no delay of the operation, must be given a current setting so that therelay is selective to other relays in the power system. It is desirable tohave a rapid tripping of faults within as large portion as possible of thepart of the power system to be protected by the relay (primary protectedzone). A fault current calculation gives the largest current of faults, Isc-max, at the most remote part of the primary protected zone. Consider-ations have to be made to the risk of transient overreach, due to a possibleDC component of the short circuit current. The lowest current setting ofthe most rapid stage, of the phase overcurrent relay, can be written:

Here:

1.2 = is a safety factor, due to calculation unsertainty,

kt = is a factor that takes care of the transient overreach due to the DCcomponent of the fault current. kt is less than 1.05 if the power systemtime constant is less than 100 ms.

Iscmax = is the largest fault current at a fault at the most remote point of theprimary protection zone.

The operate times of the phase-overcurrent relay have to be chosen so thatthe fault time is so short that equipment will not be destroyed due to ther-mal overload, at the same time selectivity is assured. For overcurrent pro-tection, in a radial fed network, the time setting can be chosen in agraphical way. This is mostly used in the case of inverse time overcurrentrelays.

minmax 7.02.1 scpu IIk

I ⋅≤≤⋅

max2.1 scthigh IkI ⋅⋅≥


1MRK 580 678-XENPage 6 – 227

Version 2.2-00

9.2 Line protection in a meshed network

The current setting can be made in the same way as for radial networks.

If inverse time characteristics are used with equal current and time settingfor all phase current protections in the system the selectivity is assured aslong as there are more than two bays carrying fault current to each substa-tion. Sometimes this is however impossible due to the fault current distri-bution between the different lines.

If definite time characteristics is used the coordination between the differ-ent phase overcurrent line protections are done by means of current set-ting.

As the phase overcurrent protection often is used as a back-up protectionof lines, where a distance protection is the main protection, relatively longoperation times are acceptable for the phase overcurrent protection.

9.3 Setting characteristics The setting parameters and ranges are shown in the setting table.

Following formulas are valid for the inverse time characteristic:

Table 1: Formulas for the inverse time characteristic

I denotes (measured current)/ I>Inv

k is a time multiplier with setting range 0,05 - 1,10.

The decisive factors for the setting of inverse time characteristic are theallowable time for disconnection of fault at minimum fault current that thefunction shall operate for together with selectivity at maximum fault cur-rent.

Characteristic: Time delay(s):

Normal inverse (Equation 4)

Very inverse (Equation 5)

Extremely inverse (Equation 6)

RI inverse (Equation 7)

t0 14,

I0 02, 1–

------------------- k⋅=

t13 5,I 1–------------- k⋅=

t80

I2 1–------------- k⋅=

t1

0 339 0 236 I⁄,( )–,------------------------------------------------- k⋅=


1MRK 580 678-XENPage 6 – 228

The settings are given in Setting table. Setting of parameters are found inthe menu under:

Settings

Functions

Group n (n=1-4)

DirInvTDelay


1MRK 580 678-XENPage 6 – 229

Version 2.2-00

10 TestingThe function can be disabled during the testing mode under the followingconditions:

• Functions that can disturb during the testing of the directional phase overcurrent function shall be blocked. Select the functions that should be blocked under the menu:

TestTest Mode

Block functions

and set Block (functionname) =Yes for the functions to be blocked.


TestTest Mode

Operation


General information can be found under thumb index 4: “ Functionaltest”.

During the test the function TOC3 shall be active. Set BlockTOC3=No

Check the operating values of the current measuring elements and corre-sponding functions during commissioning and during regular mainte-nance tests. ABB Automation Products recommends, but not request, theuse of RTS 21 FREJA testing equipment for secondary injection-testingpurposes.

Before testing, connect the testing equipment according to the valid termi-nal diagram of the specific REx 5xx terminal. Pay special attention to thecorrect input and output current terminals, and to the connection of theresidual current.

First the undirectional overcurrent function with selected settings aretested.

Follow these steps:

1. Check that the logical in- and output signals are configured to the cor-responding in- and outputs of REx 5xx. If not, configured these to beused during the testing.

2. Set the parameters according to the setting table.


1MRK 580 678-XENPage 6 – 230

3. Set the test equipment to inject a current slightly smaller than thefunctional value I>Low. Increase the current slowly and check thefunction value by observing when the signal TOC3-STLS switches toa logic 1. The logical signals can be observed under the menu:

Service reportFunctions

InvTimeDelayOC Func. Output

4. Decrease the current and check the reset current.

5. Check the time delay of the low set stage.

5.1 Definite time delay: 5.1.1 Connect the time measurement of the test to the output TOC3-

TRLS. Set a current 1,5 times I>Low on the injection test equip-ment. Switch the current on and compare the operation time withthe set value tLow. The operate time shall be tRelay + tLow.

5.2 Inverse time delay:5.2.1 Set temporarily tLow = 0,000 s. If I>Low is set higher than I>Inv,

check that there is no trip signal TOC3-TRLS when the current isless than I>Low.

5.2.2 Check the time delay at two points of the inverse time curve: withthe current I>Low or 2 x I>Inv (the highest value of these two) andthe current that according to the inverse time curve corresponds totMin. Increase the current 10% and check that the operation time isequal to tMin.

5.2.3 Set tLow to the correct value and check with a high current that theoperation time is equal to tMin + tLow

6. Check by injection of a functional current that the outsignals of thelow set stage TOC3-STLS and TOC3-TRLS are blocked when a DC-voltage is applied to the binary input TOC3-BLOCK and that the out-put signal TOC3-TRLS is blocked when a DC-voltage is applied tothe binary input TOC3-BLKTRLS

7. Check by injection of functional current that the low set stage isblocked when the function is turned off (Operation = Off) and whenthe low set stage is turned off (Operation Low = Off).

8. Set the test equipment to inject a current slightly smaller than theoperation value I>High. Increase the current slowly and check theoperation value by observing when the signal TOC3-STHS switchesto a logic 1. Do not use a time delayed trip during the test. Decreasethe current and check the reset current.

9. Set a current 1,5 times I>High on the injection test equipment. Switchthe current on and compare the operation time with the set valuetHigh.


1MRK 580 678-XENPage 6 – 231

Version 2.2-00

10. Check by injection of functional current that the output signal of thehigh set stage TOC3-TRHS is blocked when a DC-voltage is appliedto the binary input TOC2-BLOCK or TOC2-BLKTRHS.

11. Check by injection of functional current that the high set stage isblocked when the function is turned off (Operation = Off) and whenthe high set stage is turned off (Operation High = Off).

12. The measurement loops for the other phases are tested according topoints 1 - 9 above.

13. Reset the configuration if changed temporarily for the testing.

The directional function is tested with the line taken into service carryingat least so much load current so that the phase current will be larger thanthe minimum operation current, as set for the protection. Set the operationvalue I>Low to a setting lower than the actual load current.

If the active power (P) has a direction out on the line and the reactivepower (Q) either has a direction out on the line or if the reactive powerfrom the line is less than about 20% of the active power, the signals TOC--STNDL1, TOC--STNDL2, TOC--STNDL3 and TOC3--STFW shall beset to a logical 1.

If the active power (P) has a direction from the line and the reactive power(Q) either has a direction from the line or if the reactive power out on theline is less than about 20% of the active power, the signals TOC--STNDL1, TOC--STNDL2, TOC--STNDL3 and TOC3--STRV shall be setto a logical 1.


1MRK 580 678-XENPage 6 – 232

11Appendix

11.1 Function block

Figure 11: Block diagram for directional time delay phase overcurrent function.

11.2 Signal list

11.3 Setting table

TOC3TOC3-BLOCK

TOC3-BLKTRHS

TOC3-TRLS

TOC3-TRHS

TOC3-BLKTRLS TOC3-STND

TOC3-STNDL3

TOC3-STFW

TOC3-STNDLS

TOC3-STNDL1

TOC3-STNDL2

TOC3-STRV

Param. name Type Parameter description

TRLS OUT Trip of the low step

TRHS OUT Trip of the high step

STND OUT General non directional start

STNDLS OUT Non directional start for low set step

STNDL1 OUT General non directional start in phase L1



STFW OUT Start of the forward directional element

STRV OUT Start of the reverse directional element

BLOCK IN Block of function

BLKTRLS IN Block of trip for the low step

BLKTRHS IN Block of trip for the high step


Operation On/Off Off Directional time delayed over current function On/Off


1MRK 580 678-XENPage 6 – 233

Version 2.2-00

Operation Low

0 - 3 0=Off, 1=Non-eDir, 2=ForwRe-lease, 3=RevBlock

0 Operation mode of low set step

Characteris-tic

0 - 4 0= Def, 1 = NI, 2= VI, 3= EI, 4= RI

0 Time characteristic for low set step

I>Inv (20 - 300) % of I1b 10 Inverse time base current for low set step

k 0,05 - 1,10 0,05 Inverse time multiplier for low set step

tMinInv (0,000 - 60,000)

seconds 0,050 Inverse time minimum operating time for low set step

I>Low (20 - 2000) % of I1b 100 Operating current/inverse time min. current low set step

tLow (0,000 - 60,000)

seconds 1,000 Independent time delay for lowset

Operation High

0 - 3 0=Off, 1=Non-eDir, 2=ForwRe-lease, 3=RevBlock

0 Operation mode of high set step

I>High (20 - 2000) % of I1b 100 Operating current for high set step

tHigh (0,000 - 60,000)

seconds 1,000 Time delay for high set step



1MRK 580 678-XENPage 6 – 234

235Stub protection

1 ApplicationLine protection also includes the area between the two current transform-ers (CTs), when the line is supplied via two circuit breakers in a 1½breaker or a ring-bus arrangement. However, when the line disconnectoris open, the line voltage transformers for the distance protection can notprovide the correct voltage for the stub end (the area between the line dis-connector and the CTs), if connected to the line side of a disconnector.

Some REx 5xx terminals are equipped with the optional stub protectionfunction, to provide protection from a fault in this area. The protectiongives an overcurrent trip if the line disconnector is open and the currentexceeds the set value in any phase. Configure a separate binary input forthe connection of a line disconnector auxiliary contact (NC contact).

Figure 1 shows the application of the stub protection in 1½ breakerarrangement.

Figure 1: Typical connection for stub protection in 1½ breaker arrange-ment.

2 Theory of operationThe current-measuring elements continuously measure the three-phasecurrents , and compare them with the set values. Fourier’s recursive filterfilters the current signals, and a separate trip counter prevents overreach-ing of the measuring elements.

The logical values of signals STIL1, STIL2 and STIL3 become equal to 1,if the measured current in the respective phase exceeds the pre-set value.If the function is enabled, the line disconnector is opened and the currentexceeds the set value in any phase, than after a short delay a three phaseoutput trip signal is emitted from the function.

visf_150.vsd

+

BUS I

BUS II

Z<

STUB

VT

STUB END

LINE

C.B. 1

C.B. 3

C.B. 2

1MRK 580 337-XEN


Stub protection

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 337-XENPage 6 – 236

3 DesignThe simplified logic diagram of the stub protection function is shown infigure 2.


• The terminal is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been blocked from the HMI (BlockSTUB=Yes)

• The input signal STUB-BLOCK is high

The STUB-BLOCK signal is a blocking signal of the stub protectionfunction. It can be connected to a binary input of the terminal in order toreceive a block command from external devices or can be software con-nected to other internal functions of the terminal itself in order to receive ablock command from internal functions. Through OR gate it can be con-nected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs.

The duration of the trip signal STUB-TRIP is at least 25 ms. This enablescontinuous output signals for currents, which go just a little beyond the setoperating value.

The STUB-RELEASE signal input has to be connected to the N.C. auxil-iary contact of the line disconnector. It will be high when the disconnectoris open and it allow the overcurrent trip.

Figure 2: Simplified logic diagram of stub protection

STUB-BLOCK

STUB-TRIP

visf_151.vsd

Function Enable

STUB - STUB PROTECTION FUNCTION

TEST-ACTIVE

&

TEST

BlockSTUB = Yes

>1

STIL1

STIL2

STIL3

>1

STUB-RELEASE

&

Stub protection 1MRK 580 337-XENPage 6 – 237

Version 2.2-00

4 Setting instructionsThe setting parameters are accessible through the HMI. The parametersfor the stub protection function are found in the HMI-tree under:

SettingsFunctions

GroupnStub

Note: n=1,2,3 or 4, depending on which group to set.

The parameter list and their setting ranges are shown in the appendix.

It is common practice to set the overcurrent primary setting to 130% ofthe rated protected line current . The primary set value will be:

(Equation 1)

The secondary setting value is:

(Equation 2)



(Equation 3)




TestTestMode

BlockFunctions

• The terminal is set to test mode by setting the Operation=On, which occurs under the menu:

TestTestMode

Operation


IL IsPRIM

IsPRIM 1,3 IL⋅=

IsSEC

IsSEC

ISEC

IPRIM------------- IsPRIM⋅=

ISEC IPRIM

I1b

IP>IsSEC

I1b-------------- 100⋅=

Stub protection

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 337-XENPage 6 – 238


The stub protection function must not be blocked in order to be tested.



Follow these steps:

1.1 Check if the input and output logical signals in figure 1 are config-ured to the corresponding binary inputs and outputs of the testedterminal. If not, configure them for testing purposes. Set the opera-tion of the STUB protection to On mode.

1.2 Set the input logical signals STUB-BLOCK and STUB-RELEASEto the logical zero and note on the local HMI that the STUB-TRIPlogical signal is equal to the logical 0. Values of the logical signalsbelonging to the stub protection are available under menu tree:


StubFunctOutputs

1.3 Connect the rated dc voltage to the STUB-RELEASE configured binaryinput.

1.4 Increase the injected current (measured current) in the L1 phaseuntil the STUB-TRIP signal appears on the local HMI. Record themeasured operating value. Decrease current to zero (observe themaximum permitted overloading of the current circuits in the termi-nal). Compare the measured operating current with the set value.The result should be within the 5% accuracy limits with the addi-tion of the accuracy class of the testing equipment.



Version 2.2-00


1.7 Switch on the fault current and measure the operating time of theSTUB protection. Use the STUB-TRIP signal from the configuredbinary output to stop the timer.

1.8 Disconnect the rated dc voltage from the STUB-RELEASE configuredbinary input, and switch on the fault current. No STUB-TRIP signalshould appear. Switch off the fault current. Connect again the dc voltage tothe STUB-RELEASE binary input.

1.9 Connect the rated dc voltage to the STUB-BLOCK configured binaryinput, and switch on the fault current. No STUB-TRIP signal shouldappear. Switch off the fault current. Disconnect the dc voltage from theSTUB-BLOCK binary input.

2.0 Set the operation of the protection at Off mode and switch on thefault current. Note that no corresponding binary signals shouldappear on the terminal.

2.1 Disconnect the rated dc voltage from STUB-RELEASE digitalinput.


Stub protection

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 337-XENPage 6 – 240

6 Appendix

6.1 Function block


STUB-BLOCK STUB-TRIP

STUB PROTECTION

visf_152.vsd

STUB-RELEASE

STUB-BLOCK

STUB-TRIP

visf_153.vsd

STUB - STUB PROTECTION FUNCTION

TEST-ACTIVE

&

TEST

BlockSTUB = Yes

>1

STIL1

STIL2

STIL3

>1

STUB-RELEASE

&


Version 2.2-00

6.3 Signal list

6.4 Setting table


STUB- BLOCK IN Block of stub protection

STUB- RELEASE IN Release of stub protection

STUB- TRIP OUT Trip by stub protection


Operation Off, On Off Stub function On/Off

IP> 20 - 300 % 100 Operating phase current, as a percentage of I1b

Stub protection

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 337-XENPage 6 – 242

243Breaker-failure protection

1 ApplicationThis function issues a back-up to trip adjacent circuit breakers in case of atripping failure of the circuit breaker (CB), and clears the fault asrequested by the object protection.

The breaker-failure function is started by a protection trip command, fromthe line and busbar protection through the breaker-related trip relays. Thestart can be single-phase or three-phase. Correct fault current clearing orfailure is detected by a current check in each phase. The current level canbe set at 0,05 to 2 times the rated current.

Retrip of the faulty CB can be done with or without current check. Adelay, 0-60 s, can be set for the retrip.

The use of retrip, limits the impact on the power system if the breaker-failure protection function (BFP) is started by mistake during testing orother maintenance work.

A second time step is used for the back-up trip command. It should beconnected to trip the adjacent breakers, to clear the busbar section andintertrip the remote end, if so required. The time setting range is 0-60 s.

By using separate timers for each phase, correct operation at evolvingfaults is ensured.

The timer setting should be selected with a certain margin to allow varia-tion in the normal fault clearing time. The properties of the BFP functionallow the use of a small margin.

Figure 1: Start and trip functions

tp

STARTL1 BUTL1

RTL1

L1

TRRETL1

tp

STARTL2 BUTL2

RTL2TRRETL2

tp

STARTL3 BUTL3

RTL3TRRETL3

IL1

STL1

IL2

STL2

STL3

IL3

START

L2

L3

1V

TTRIP

TRBU

1V

1V

1V

&

&

&

BLOCK

1V

TRRET

1MRK 580 339-XEN


Breaker-failure protection

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 339-XENPage 6 – 244

The application functions of the protection are:

• Individual phase-current detection

• Two time steps, one for retrip of the related circuit breaker and one for the back-up trip of the adjacent circuit breakers

• Selection of current controlled or unconditional retrip

• Phase separated timers gives correct operation at an evolving fault

• Accurate timers and current elements reset in 10 ms, allowing the use of short back-up trip time

Figure 2: Time sequence

40ms 20ms

<10ms 40ms

20ms

<10ms

30ms

Relaytime

Start BFPNormalCB opening

CB opening time Marginal

BFPtime CB opening time

Marginal

BFPtime

110ms

Retriporiginal CB

150ms

General tripadjacent CB

Breaker-failure protection 1MRK 580 339-XENPage 6 – 245

Version 2.2-00

2 Theory of operationThe breaker-failure protection starts on a single-phase or three-phase con-dition, either from an external protection, or internally from a protectiontrip signal in the terminal.

The breaker receiving the original protection trip command can beretripped from the BFP. The retrip can be controlled by a current check, orcarried out as a direct retrip without any current check. The direct retripcan be used, because the breaker-to-trip has already received a trippingcommand, and the direct retrip does not cause any unselective tripping

The use of retrip, limits the extent of unwanted power disconnection incase of an accidental start of the BFP at work in the initiating circuits,with the primary circuit in service and the load above the set current level.

The back-up trip is sent to the adjacent circuit breakers in order to clearthe fault and disconnect the failing circuit breaker.

Figure 3: Logic diagram of breaker-failure protection, phase L1

t

t1

&

t

t

t1

t

t2

&

IL1

STL1

L1

ASDRMS

RET1

RET0

RET2

BUTL1

RTL1

RET0: No retripRET1: Retrip with current checkRET2: Unconditional retrip


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 339-XENPage 6 – 246

2.1 Input and output signals

Figure 4: Input and output signals

The connectable inputs are connectable by configuration to the binaryinputs of the terminal or to other internal functions’ outputs. The outputsare connectable by configuration to the binary output relays. “Connecta-bles” and “outputs” can be connected to the free-logic functions of theunit, OR gates, and in that way add connection links

2.2 Start functions The breaker-failure protection can be started either internally or exter-nally. The start pulse is sealed-in as long as the current exceeds the presetcurrent level, to prevent a restart of the BFP timers in case of a chatteringstarting contact. The preset current level may be set to (0,05 - 2,0) . Irwhere Ir is 1 or 5 A.

1V

Trip Logic

TRIPL1TRIPL2TRIPL3TPTRIP

STL1STL2STL3START

TRRETL1TRRETL2TRRETL3

TRRET

Breaker-failureprotection

1V

1V

1V

External start

BLOCK

TRBU

Table 1:

Input signals: Start of breaker-failure protection:

BFP--STL1 Phase L1

BFP--STL2 Phase L2

BFP--STL3 Phase L3

BFP--START Three-phase start

BFP--BLOCK Block of BFP

Output signals: Trip:

BFP--TRBU Back-up trip

BFP--TRRETL1 Trip breaker-failure phase L1



BFP--TRRET Three-phase trip


Version 2.2-00

2.3 Measuring principles The current is filtered through a specially designed high-pass filter toobtain the required suppression of the dc components.

High-pass filtering is performed basically for two reasons i.e to removethe:

• dc component caused by saturated current transformers with a decaying current due to de-energizing of the secondary circuit. This is done to achieve a more correct representation of the real current in the line.

• dc component that is a part of the fault current. This is done to achieve a correct base for both ASD and RMS calculations.

The frequency limit of the filter is very close to the service frequency, toobtain a maximum suppression of the above dc components.

The intention of the adaptive signal detection (ASD) concept is to achieveindependence from the absolute filtering requirement, when dealing withextremely high fault currents in combination with low preset values. Thisis obtained by creating a new stabilizing signal to compare the currentwith.

The ASD works continuously, regardless of if the BFP was started. Itsresult is however considered only when the BFP has started and the pre-set time has elapsed.

As the current exceeds the previously stabilized sample, it adapts thevalue of the current and when it does not, it decays. This adaptive behav-iour makes it possible to rapidly and securely detect a breaker failure situ-ation after the pre-set time has elapsed.

Continuously and in parallel, the RMS value of the post-filtered signal iscalculated and compared with a preset current level. As the RMS valuedecreases below the preset current level, the breaker-failure function ismomentarily reset.

At normal operation of the circuit breaker, the stabilizing signal exceedsthe post-filtered signal for a consecutive period of maximum 10 ms beforeit is reset. Resetting occurs before the back-up trip timer t2 has timed out.

At a breaker failure situation, the post-filtered current exceeds the stabi-lizing signal, resulting in a trip of the breaker-failure function within 10ms after the trip timer t2 has elapsed.

The breaker-failure protection works with all three phases totally sepa-rated. But a possibility exists to start all three phases simultaneously. The back-up trip is always three-phase


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 339-XENPage 6 – 248

Figure 5: Breaker-failure protection

Figure 6: Current detector, ASD and RMS measurement

2.4 Retrip functions The retrip function of the original circuit breaker is set at one of threeoptions:

Setting: The retrip...

Off function is not executed.

I> check occurs with a current check.

No I> check occurs without a current check.

The retrip timer t1 can be set from 0 to 60 s.

A trip pulse, tp, is generated with a length of 150 ms.

t

t1

&

t &

ASDRMS Back-up

trip

Currentdetector

Current

Start

High-passfiltering

Recti-fying

Creation ofstabilizingsignal

Decisionthroughcomparison

Decisionthroughcomparison

RMScalculation

Currentsamples ASD

RMS


Version 2.2-00

2.5 Back-up trip The back-up trip delay timer t2 can be set between 0 and 60 s.

A trip pulse, tp, is generated with a length of 150 ms.

Figure 7: Breaker-failure protection

3 Setting

3.1 Human-machine interface (HMI)

The configuration of alternatives or settings to the functions is made onthe built-in HMI:

SettingsFunctions

Group nBreaker Failure

The breaker-failure protection can be controlled from the human-machineinterface (HMI) by an “Operation” parameter, to be set between alterna-tives Off/On.

When “Operation” is set to Off, the function becomes inoperative.

The configuration of input and output signals to the function is made onthe built-in HMI:

ConfigurationFunction Inputs

Breaker Failure

tp

STARTL1 BUTL1

RTL1

L1

TRRETL1

tp

STARTL2 BUTL2

RTL2TRRETL2

tp

STARTL3 BUTL3

RTL3TRRETL3

IL1

STL1

IL2

STL2

STL3

IL3

L2

L3

1V

tp

TRBU

1V

1V

1V

&

&

&

BLOCK

1V

TRRET

START

IL1

IL2

IL3


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 339-XENPage 6 – 250

The inputs and the outputs to and from the breaker-failure protection arepresented in the signal list.

Fixed valuesTrip pulse, tp 150 ms, fixed

4 Testing The function can be disabled during the testing mode under these condi-tions:

• When the function is selected to be blocked under the testing condi-tions, select the functions, which should be blocked under the sub-menu:

TestTestMode

BlockFunctions

• Set the Operation parameter to On (Operation = On) to set the termi-nal in to testing mode. Select the operating mode under this sub-menu:

TestTestMode

Operation


Note: The function is blocked if the corresponding setting under theBlockFunctions submenu remains On and the TEST-INPUT signalremains active.

5 Test of the breaker-failure protectionThe breaker-failure protection can be tested, for example at commissioningor after a changed configuration, in co-operation with some other func-tions, and in particular with the protection and trip functions.

The trip circuits to the breakers are opened at a test switch or at connec-tion terminals with links. A secondary injection relay test is used to oper-ate the protection function.

Suggested testing procedure:

5.1 Preparations 1.1 Check the settings and the alternatives of the breaker-failure protec-tion (BFP).

The operation can be set to Stand-by (Off)


Version 2.2-00

HMI submenu:

SettingsFunctions

Group nBreaker Failure

If the settings are changed to speed up times during the tests, theymust later be reset and verified.

5.2 Check that the protection does not trip when set passive

2.1 Set operation = Off.

2.2 Apply a stationary current over the set value.

2.3 Apply a start pulse to BFP--STL1.

2.4 Verify that neither retrip nor back-up trip is achieved.

5.3 Check that the protection can be started from all start inputs

3.1 Set RetripType = No I>check, I> = 100% Ir and t1 = 50 ms.

3.2 Apply a stationary three-phase current over the set value.


3.4 Verify that retrip in phase L1 is achieved.

3.5 Apply a stationary current over the set value.

3.6 Apply a start pulse to BFP--START

3.7 Verify that all three retrips are achieved.

5.4 Check that the retrip function works

4.1 No retrip function

4.1.1 Set RetripType = Retrip Off and I> = 100% Ir.

4.1.2 Apply a stationary three-phase current over the set value.

4.1.3 Apply a start pulse to BFP--STL1.

4.1.4 Verify that retrip in phase L1 is not achieved.

4.2 Retrip function with current check

4.2.1 Set RetripType = I> check, t1 = 100 ms and I> = 100% Ir.



4.2.4 Verify that retrip is achieved.

4.3 Retrip function without current check

4.3.1 Set RetripType = No I> check, t1 = 100 ms and I> = 100% Ir.



4.3.4 Verify that retrip is achieved.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 339-XENPage 6 – 252

5.5 Check that the back-up trip function works

5.1 Set RetripType = Retrip Off, t2 = 200 ms and I> = 100% Ir.

5.2 Apply a stationary three-phase current over the set value.


5.4 Verify that back-up trip is achieved.

5.6 Terminate the test and restore the equipment to normal state

After the tests, restore the equipment to the normal or desired alternativesand settings!

Check especially that the:

• Setting parameters reset as required and that a verification test is made.

• Test switches or disconnected links of the connection terminals.

• Normal indications. (If preferred, the disturbance report can be cleared.)


Version 2.2-00

6 Appendix

6.1 Function block

Figure 8: Simplified terminal diagram of the function

Figure 9: Terminal diagrams for the function

BFP

STL1STL2STL3START

TRRETL1TRRETL2TRRETL3

TRRETBLOCK TRBU

t

t1

&

t

t

t1

t

t2

&

IL1

BFP--STL1

ASDRMS

RET1

RET0

RET2

IL3BFP--STL3

IL2BFP--STL2

BFP--START

BFP FUNCTION

1V

1V

1V

&

&

&

BFP--BLOCK

BFP--

BFP--TRRETL1

BFP--TRRET

BFP--TRRETL2

BFP--TRRETL3

tp

tp

tp

1V

tp

1V

TRBU


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 339-XENPage 6 – 254

6.2 Signal list

6.3 Setting table


BFP-- BLOCK IN Block of breaker-failure function

BFP-- START IN Start of breaker-failure function

BFP-- STL1 IN Start of breaker-failure function phase L1



BFP-- TRBU OUT Backup trip by breaker-failure function

BFP-- TRRET OUT Retrip by breaker-failure function

BFP-- TRRETL1 OUT Retrip by breaker-failure function phase L1




Operation Off, On Off Breaker failure function On/Off

IPgr 5-200 % 100 Operating phase current, as a percentage of I1b

t2 0.000-60.000 s 0.200 Delay timer for backup trip

RetripType Retrip Off, I> Check, No I> Check

Retrip Off

Select type of retrip logic

t1 0.000-60.000 s 0.050 Delay timer for retrip

255Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (nondir)

1 ApplicationThe conventional distance protection can manage the fault clearance ofearth-fault in most of the cases. But in some applications, especially appli-cations with long lines, the clearance can be improved by use of an instan-taneous earth-fault protection. Those are for instance:

• In the case of high infeed of fault current from the opposite end of the line, this might increase the fault resistance seen by the distance relay to such a value that the instantaneous step will not operate.

• In applications with series compensated lines, where the capacitor is located at the end of the line and very strong infeed of fault current from that end, will result in a difficult problem for the distance pro-tection to perform a selective fault clearance. This due to the voltage reversal that might occur.

The use of instantaneous overcurrent earth-fault protection is most suit-able for long lines in meshed transmission systems. It can also be used forradial lines with low fault current infeed from the opposite end of the line.

The instantaneous, non-directional, earth-fault overcurrent protection(IOC), which can operate in 15 ms (50 Hz nominal system frequency) forfaults characterized by very high currents, is included in some of the REx5xx terminals. Refer to the ordering information for more details.

2 Theory of operationThe measuring technics is based on measuring of the incoming residualcurrent to the terminal.

The current-measuring elements within one of the built-in digital signalprocessors continuously measure the zero sequence current, and comparethem with the IN>> set value. A recursive Fourier filter filters the currentsignals, and a separate trip counter prevents high overreaching of the mea-suring elements. The logical value of the signal on the output of the digitalsignal processor (IOC--STIN) is equal to 1 if the measured zero sequencecurrent exceeds the pre-set value.

1MRK 580 340-XEN


Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (nondir)

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 340-XENPage 6 – 256

3 DesignThe simplified logic diagram of the instantaneous phase overcurrent func-tion is shown in Figure 1:.

The overcurrent function is disabled if:

• The terminal is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been blocked from the HMI (BlockIOC=Yes)

• The input signal IOC--BLOCK is high.

The IOC--BLOCK signal is a blocking signal of the overcurrent function.It can be connected to a binary input in order to receive a block commandfrom external devices or it can be configured (software connection) toother internal functions within the terminal itself, in order to receive ablock command from internal functions. Through OR gates it can be con-nected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs.

When the overcurrent function is enabled, the output tripping signalsIOC--TRN and IOC--TRIP can operate. The duration of each output sig-nal is at least 15 ms. This enables continuous output signals for currents,which go just beyond the set operating value.

The IOC--TRN signal is related to the residual overcurrent trip.

The IOC--TRIP output signal behaves as general instantaneous overcur-rent trip when in the REx 5xx terminal also the instantaneous phase over-current function is implemented. I.e. this signal will be activated in case ofresidual overcurrent detection or in case of any single-phase overcurrentdetection (IOC--STIL_: IOC--STIL1 or IOC--STIL2 or IOC--STIL3). Ifonly the residual overcurrent function is implemented in the terminal, thenthis signal behaves exactly as the signal IOC--TRN and can be used forsignalising.

Figure 1: Simplified logic diagram of instantaneous residual overcurrent protection.

IOC--BLOCK

visf_120.vsdIOC--STIL_

General Phase O/C Trip fromInstant.Phase O/C Function if present

IOC - INSTANTANEOUS RESIDUAL OVERCURRENT FUNCTION

TEST-ACTIVE

&

TEST

BlockIOC = Yes

>1

&

&

IOC--STIN

>1IOC--TRIP

IOC--TRN


1MRK 580 340-XENPage 6 – 257

Version 2.2-00

4 SettingThe residual overcurrent protection is very sensitive to the change of zerosource impedance. Since it must operate only in a selective way, it is nec-essary to check all system and transient conditions that can causeunwanted operation.

Only detailed network studies can determine the operating conditionsunder which the highest possible fault current is expected on the line. Inmost cases, this current appears during single-phase fault conditions. Butalso examine two-phase-to-earth conditions, since this type of fault can behigher than single-phase to earth fault in some cases.

Also study transients that can cause a high increase of the line current forshort times. A typical example is a transmission line with a power trans-former at the remote end, which can cause high inrush current when con-nected to the network and can thus also cause the operation of the built-in,instantaneous, earth-fault protection.

4.1 Meshed network without parallel line

The following fault calculations have to be done for single-phase-to-earthand two-phase-to-earth faults. With reference to Figure 2:, apply a fault inB and then calculate the relay through fault residual current IfB. The cal-culation should be done using the minimum source impedance values forZA and the maximum source impedance values for ZB in order to get themaximum through fault current from A to B.

Figure 2: Through fault current from A to B: IfB.

Then a fault in A has to be applied and the through fault IfA has to be calcu-lated (Figure 3:). In order to get the maximum through fault current, theminimum value for ZB and the maximum value for ZA have to be consid-ered.

visf_125.vsd

~ ~ZA ZBZ L

A B

Relay

I fB

Fault


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 340-XENPage 6 – 258

Figure 3: Through fault current from B to A: IfA.

The relay must not trip for any of the two trough fault currents. Hence theminimum theoretical current setting (Imin) will be:

(Equation 1)

A safety margin of 5% for the maximum protection static inaccuracy anda safety margin of 5% for the maximum possible transient overreach haveto be introduced. An additional 15% is suggested due to the inaccuracy ofthe instrument transformers under transient conditions and inaccuracy inthe system data.

The minimum setting (Is) for the instantaneous phase overcurrent protec-tion is then:

(Equation 2)

The protection function can be used for the specific application only ifthis setting value is equal or less than the maximum fault current that therelay has to clear (IF in Figure 4:).

Figure 4: Fault current: IF.


(Equation 3)

visf_126.vsd

~ ~ZA ZBZ L

A B

Relay

I fA

Fault

Imin MAX IfA IfA,( )≥

Is 1 3, Imin⋅≥

visf_127.vsd

~ ~ZA ZBZ L

A B

Relay

I F

Fault

IsSEC

ISEC

IPRIM------------- Is⋅=


1MRK 580 340-XENPage 6 – 259

Version 2.2-00


SettingsFunctions

GroupnInstantOC


4.2 Meshed network with parallel line

In case of parallel lines, the influence of the induced current from the par-allel line to the protected line has to be considered. One example is givenin Figure 5:, where the two lines are connected to the same busbar. In thiscase the influence of the induced fault current from the faulty line (line 1)to the healthy line (line 2) is considered together with the two throughfault currents IfA and IfB mentioned previously. The maximal influencefrom the parallel line for the relay in Figure 5: will be with a fault at the Cpoint with the C breaker open.

A fault in C has to be applied, and then the maximum current seen fromthe relay (IM) on the healthy line (this applies for single-phase-to-earthand two-phase-to-earth faults) is calculated. The through fault current IMis the sum of the induced fault current from line 1 and the fault currentthat would occur in line 2 if the mutual impedance M would be zero.

Figure 5: Two parallel lines. Influence from parallel line to the through fault current: IM.

The minimum theoretical current setting for the overcurrent protectionfunction (Imin) will be:

(Equation 4)

where IfA and IfB have been described in the previous paragraph. Consid-ering the safety margins mentioned previously, the minimum setting (Is)for the instantaneous phase overcurrent protection is then:

(Equation 5)

The protection function can be used for the specific application only ifthis setting value is equal or less than the maximum residual fault currentthat the relay has to clear.

visf_128.vsd

~ ~ZA ZB

ZL1A B

I M

Fault

Relay

ZL2

M

CLine 1

Line 2


Is 1 3, Imin⋅≥


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 340-XENPage 6 – 260


(Equation 6)


SettingsFunctions

GroupnInstantOC


5 TestingThe function can be disabled during the test at these conditions:


TestTestMode

BlockFunctions


TestTestMode

Operation

• The terminal is automatically set to test mode by applying a logical 1 to the TEST-INPUT functional input.

Important!! The function is blocked if the corresponding setting underthe BlockFunctions menu remains on and the TEST-INPUT signalremains active.

The instantaneous residual overcurrent function must not be blocked inorder to be tested.

Check the operating values of the current measuring elements and corre-sponding functions during the commissioning and during regular mainte-nance tests. ABB Network Partner recommends, but not requested, theuse of the RTS 21 FREJA testing equipment for secondary injection-test-ing purposes.


IsSEC

ISEC

IPRIM------------- Is⋅=


1MRK 580 340-XENPage 6 – 261

Version 2.2-00

Follow these steps:

1. Configure input and output logical signals for testing

Signals are shown in figure 1 on page 256.

2. Set the residual overcurrent trip value IN>>

3. Set the IOC--BLOCK signal to logical zero

4. Set the operation of the IOC protection to On mode

Check that the IOC--TRN signal is zero.

The signal is checked from the local HMI. Values of the logical sig-nals belonging to the instantaneous overcurrent protection are avail-able under the menu tree at:


InstantOCFuncOutput

5. Connect one current input of the terminal to the testing equipment.

6. Inject a phase current in the terminal

The value of the phase current should be below the setting value.

7. Slowly increase the amplitude of the injected current

Continue to slowly increase the current until the IOC--TRN signal appears. Record the current value at which the signal operates (mea-sured operate current).

Note! During this phase, do not exceed the maximum permitted overloading of the current circuits in the terminal.

8. Switch off the injected current

Compare the measured operate current with the set value.

The result should be within a 5% accuracy limit, with the addition of the accuracy class of the testing equipment.

9. Set the injected fault current

The value of the injected fault current should be set to about 1.5 times the measured operate current.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 340-XENPage 6 – 262

10. Inject the fault current

By injecting the fault current, the timer for measuring the operate time must be started. Measure the operate time of the IOC protec-tion. Use the IOC--TRN signal from the configured binary output to stop the timer.

11. Switch off the injected current

12. Block the IOC function

Blocking is achieved by connecting a (rated) dc voltage to the IOC--BLOCK configured binary input.


No IOC--TRN signal should appear.

14. Switch off the injected fault current

15. Unblock the IOC function

16. Disconnect the dc voltage from the IOC--BLOCK binary input.

17. Set the operation of the protection at Off mode


No corresponding binary signals should appear on the terminal.

19. Configure the terminal for normal operation.


1MRK 580 340-XENPage 6 – 263

Version 2.2-00

6 Appendix

6.1 Function block


6.3 Signal list

6.4 Setting table

IOC--BLOCK

INSTANTANEOUS RESIDUALOVERCURRENT

visf_121.vsd

IOC--TRNIOC--TRIP

IOC--BLOCK

visf_122.vsdIOC--STIL_

General Phase O/C Trip fromInstant.Phase O/C Function if present

IOC - INSTANTANEOUS RESIDUAL OVERCURRENT FUNCTION

TEST-ACTIVE

&

TEST

BlockIOC = Yes

>1

&

&

IOC--STIN

>1IOC--TRIP

IOC--TRN

Protection Enable


IOC-- BLOCK IN Block of the instantaneous overcurrent protection function

IOC-- TRN OUT Trip by the instantaneous residual overcurrent protection

IOC-- TRIP OUT Trip by instantaneous overcurrent protection


Operation Off, On Off Instantaneous overcurrent function Off/On

IN>> 50-2000 % 100 Operating neutral current, as percentage of I1b


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 340-XENPage 6 – 264

265Time delayed residual overcurrent protection (nondir)

1 ApplicationThe time delayed residual overcurrent protection (TOC) which is an earth-fault protection, serves as a built-in local back-up function to the mainprotection function. In most cases, it is used as a back-up for the earth-fault measuring in distance protection.

The function is intended to be used in solidly earthed systems.

The time delay makes it possible to set the relay to detect high resistancefaults and still perform selective trip.

The protection, which is non-directional, is included in some of the REx5xx terminals. Refer to the ordering information for more details.

2 Theory of operationThe current-measuring elements within one of the built-in digital signalprocessors continuously measure the residual current (3I0), and compareit with the IN> set value. A recursive Fourier filter filters the current sig-nals, and a separate trip counter prevents high overreaching of the measur-ing elements. The logical value of the signal on the output of the digitalsignal processor (TOC--STIN) is equal to 1 if the measured residual cur-rent exceeds the pre-set value. This signal will instantaneously set the out-put start signal (TOC--STN), unless the function is blocked (look furtherunder “Design” on page 265).

The function trip signal (TOC--TRN) can be delayed from 0-60 s.

If the residual current exceeds the set value for a period longer than the setvalue, then a three phase trip is generated from the output signal TOC--TRN.

3 DesignThe simplified logic diagram of the time delayed earth-fault protection isshown in Figure 1:.

The time delayed residual function is disabled if:

• The terminal is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been blocked from the HMI (BlockTOC=Yes).

• The input signal TOC--BLOCK is high.

The TOC--BLOCK signal is a blocking signal of the earth-fault function.It blocks the whole function and prevents the changing of the activation ofany trip or starting output signals.

It can be connected to a binary input in order to receive a block commandfrom external devices or it can be configured (software connection) toother internal functions within the terminal itself, in order to receive ablock command from internal functions. Through OR gates it can be con-nected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs.

1MRK 580 318-XEN


Time delayed residual overcurrent protection (nondir)

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 318-XENPage 6 – 266

When the E/F protection is enabled, there is still a possibility to block thetrip output only, without affecting the start signals, which always will beactive. The input which provides this function is TOC--BLKTR. Theduration of each output signal is at least 15 ms. This enables continuousoutput signals for currents, which go just a little beyond the set operatingvalue.

The TOC--TRN signal is related to the residual overcurrent trip.

The TOC--TRIP output signal behaves as general time delayed overcur-rent trip when in the REx 5xx terminal also the time delayed phase over-current function is implemented. I.e. this signal will be activated in case ofdelayed residual overcurrent trip or in case of time delayed phase overcur-rent trip (TOC-TRP). If only the residual overcurrent function is imple-mented in the terminal, then this signal behaves exactly as the signalTOC--TRN and can be used for signalising.

Figure 1: Simplified logic diagram of the TOC-- protection function.

TOC--BLOCK

visf_142.vsd

TOC--TRP

Phase Overcurrent Tripfrom Delayed Phase O/C Function.If present.

TOC - TIME DELAYED RESIDUAL OVERCURRENT FUNCTION

TEST-ACTIVE

&

TEST

BlockTOC = Yes

>1

TOC--STIN

TOC--TRN

TOC--TRIP

&

TOC--BLKTR

t

tN&

TOC--STN

>1

Function Enable

Trip Blocking


1MRK 580 318-XENPage 6 – 267

Version 2.2-00

4 SettingsThe residual overcurrent protection is very sensitive to the change of zerosource impedance. Since it must operate only in a selective way, it is nec-essary to check all system and transient conditions that can causeunwanted operation.

The settings should be chosen in such a way that it can detect high resis-tance faults on the protected line and still be selective to other residualtime delayed protections in both forward and reverse directions. The timesetting value should also consider transients that can cause a high increaseof the residual line current for short times.

A typical example is a transmission line with a power transformer at theremote end, which can cause high inrush current when being energised.

In well transposed system, the false earth-fault current is normally lowerthan 5% of the line current, except for extremely short parallel lines (lessthan 5 km), where a higher false residual current may be found.

In case of extremely short or not fully transposed parallel lines, the falseresidual current must be measured or calculated when maximum sensitiv-ity is desired. Generally, 80 A is recommended as a minimum primaryoperation value for the residual overcurrent protection.

General criteria for the primary current setting value of the time delayedresidual overcurrent protection is given in the formula below:

(Equation 1)

where is the maximum permissive residual current flowing in theprotection unit during normal service conditions, is the minimumresidual fault current that the relay has to clear. The values 1.3 and 0.7 aresafety factors.

4.1 Setting of operating current IN>

If Is is the primary setting operating value of the function, then the sec-ondary setting current (IsSEC) is:

(Equation 2)


The relay setting value IN> is given in percentage of the secondary basecurrent value, , associated to the current transformer on input I4. Thevalue for IN> is given from the formula:

(Equation 3)


1,3 IRmax⋅ Is 0,7 IFmin⋅< <

IRmaxIFmin

IsSEC

ISEC

IPRIM------------- Is⋅=

ISEC IPRIM

I4b

IN>IsSEC

I4b-------------- 100⋅=


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 318-XENPage 6 – 268

Set the value under the setting menu:

SettingsFunctions

Group n (n=1-4)TimeDelayOC

for the parameter IN>.

4.2 Setting of time delay tN

Set the time delay of the function, tN, under the setting menu:

SettingsFunctions

Group n (n=1-4)TimeDelayOC

5 TestingThe function can be disabled during the test at these conditions:

• First, select the function which should be blocked, under the submenu:

TestTestMode

BlockFunctions

Then, there are two ways of setting the terminal into test mode, both oper-ative separately or together:

• Set the terminal into operational test mode by setting the value of the parameter Operation=On. Select the operating mode under the sub-menu:

TestTestMode

Operation


Note! The function is blocked if the corresponding setting under theBlockFunctions menu remains on and the TEST-INPUT signal remainsactive.

The residual overcurrent function must not have to be blocked in order tobe tested.

Check the operating values of the current measuring elements and corre-sponding functions during the commissioning and during regular mainte-nance tests. ABB Network Partner recommends, but not requested, theuse of the RTS 21 FREJA testing equipment for secondary injection-test-ing purposes.


1MRK 580 318-XENPage 6 – 269

Version 2.2-00


Follow these steps:

1.1 Check if the input and output logical signals in Figure 1: are config-ured to the corresponding binary inputs and outputs of the testedterminal. If not, configure them for testing purposes. Set the opera-tion of the TOC protection to On mode.

1.2 Set the input logical signals to logical zero and note on the localHMI that the TOC--TRN logical signal is equal to logical 0. Valuesof the logical signals belonging to the time delayed residual over-current protection are available under menu tree:


TimeDelayOCFuncOutput

1.3 Set the time delay tN to 300 ms.

1.4 Quickly increase the injected residual current (measured current) atterminal IN until the TOC--TRN signal appears. Record the operat-ing value. Decrease the measured current to zero (observe the max-imum permitted overloading of the current circuits in the terminal).Compare the measured operating current with the set value. Theresult should be within the 5% accuracy limits with the addition ofthe accuracy class of the testing equipment.

1.5 Quickly set the measured current to about 1.5 times the measuredoperating current, and disconnect the current with the switch.

1.6 Switch on the fault current and measure the operating time of theTOC protection. Use the TOC--TRN signal from the configuredbinary output to stop the timer. The operating time should be300 ms +/-11.5 ms (for the 50 Hz nominal frequency).

1.7 Connect the rated D.C voltage to the TOC--BLKTR configuredbinary input, and switch on the fault current. No TOC--TRN shouldappear, but TOC--STN signal will be triggered. Switch off the faultcurrent and disconnect the dc voltage from the TOC--BLKTRbinary input.

1.8 Set the operation of the protection at Off mode and switch on the fault cur-rent. Note that no corresponding binary signals should appear on the termi-nal. Switch off the fault current.

1.9 Configure the terminal to its normal operating configuration.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 318-XENPage 6 – 270

6 Appendix

6.1 Function block


TOC--BLOCK

TIME DELAYED RESIDUALOVERCURRENT

visf_140.vsd

TOC--TRNTOC--TRIP

TOC--BLKTRTOC--STN

TOC--BLOCK

visf_141.vsd

TOC--TRP

Phase Overcurrent Tripfrom Delayed Phase O/C Function.If present.

TOC - TIME DELAYED RESIDUAL OVERCURRENT FUNCTION

TEST-ACTIVE

&

TEST

BlockTOC = Yes

>1

TOC--STIN

TOC--TRN

TOC--TRIP

&

TOC--BLKTR

t

tN&

TOC--STN

>1


1MRK 580 318-XENPage 6 – 271

Version 2.2-00

6.3 Signal list

6.4 Setting table


TOC-- BLOCK IN Block of time delayed residual overcurrent function

TOC-- BLKTR IN Block of trip from time delayed residual overcurrent function

TOC-- TRIP OUT Trip output from the time delayed residual overcurrent protection

TOC-- TRN OUT Trip by the time delayed residual overcurrent protection

TOC-- STN OUT Start of the time delayed residual overcurrent protection


Operation Off, On Off Time delayed residual overcurrent protection function On/Off

IN> 10-150 % 100 Operating neutral current, as percentage of Ib

tN 0.000-60.000 s 10.000 Time delay of neutral current function


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 318-XENPage 6 – 272

273Residual overcurrent protection (dir and nondir)

1 ApplicationThis earth-fault overcurrent protection is intended for solidly earthed net-works.

1.1 Earth-fault overcurrent protection

In case of single-phase earth-faults, the primary fault resistance varieswith the network conditions and location of the fault. In many cases, thefault resistance is much higher than the resistance that can be covered byan impedance-measuring distance relay.

Earth-faults with high fault resistances can be detected by measuring theresidual current (3I0). Directional earth-fault protection is obtained bymeasuring the residual current and the angle between this current and thezero-sequence voltage (3U0).

The 3I0 current lags the polarising voltage (3U0) by a phase angle equal tothe angle of the zero-sequence source impedance. In solidly earthed net-works, this angle is in the range of 40° to nearly 90°. The high value refersto stations with direct earthed transformers with delta winding. To obtainmaximum sensitivity at all conditions, the forward measuring elementmust have a characteristic angle of 65°.

As a general rule, it is easier to obtain selectivity by using directionalinstead of non-directional earth-fault overcurrent protection, but sufficientpolarising voltage must be available.

It is not possible to measure the distance to the fault by using the zero-sequence components of the current and voltage, because the zero-sequence voltage is a product of the zero-sequence components of currentand source impedance. So it is necessary to obtain selectivity by direc-tional comparison which uses communication between the line ends.

The best selectivity is generally obtained by using inverse time delay. Allrelays must have the same type of inverse characteristic. An earth-fault ina line is selectively tripped if the difference between the residual in theline and the residual current (3I0) in the other lines give a time differenceof 0.3-0.4 seconds. A logarithmic characteristic is generally the most suit-able for this purpose, because the time difference is constant for a givenratio between the currents. See Figure 2:.

1MRK 580 345-XEN


Residual overcurrent protection (dir and nondir)

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 345-XENPage 6 – 274

The earth-fault overcurrent protection module for the REx 5xx terminalhas four different inverse time characteristics.

The inrush current can cause unwanted tripping of the earth-fault over-current relay when energising a directly earthed power transformer. Theearth-fault overcurrent protection is therefore provided with second har-monic restraint, which blocks the operation if the residual current (3I0)contains 20% or more of the second harmonic component.

In some cases, it is possible to improve the selectivity by adding a settableminimum operate current (IMin) and a minimum operate time (tMin) tothe inverse characteristic. These functions are included in the earth-faultprotection modules.

Due to its sensitivity, the residual overcurrent protection can detect serialfaults. A serial fault can be caused by broken phase conductor(s) with nocontact to earth, or pole discrepancy in a circuit breaker or a disconnector.The most common type of serial fault is pole discrepancy at breakermaneuvers. To minimise the operate time, the residual overcurrent protec-tion module is provided with a switch-onto-fault logic, which can be acti-vated at breaker closure. The tripping time will temporarily be reduced to300 ms.

1.2 Directional comparison logic function

In the directional comparison scheme, information of the fault currentdirection must be transmitted to the other line end. A short operate timeenables auto-reclosing after the fault. During a single-phase reclosingcycle, the auto-reclosing device must block the directional comparisonearth-fault scheme.

A communication logic block for residual overcurrent protection can beincluded in the REx 5xx terminal to provide this feature. The functioncontains circuits for blocking overreach and permissive overreachschemes. See the section “Communication logic for residual overcurrentprotection”.

Also an additional communication logic block for the communication canbe included. It contains logic for the weak-end-infeed and current-reversalfunctions, which are used only in the permissive overreach scheme. Seethe section “Current reversal and weak end infeed logic for residual over-current protection.

Table 1: Inverse time characteristics

Normal inverse (NI) according to IEC 255-3

Very inverse (VI) according to IEC 255-3

Extremely inverse (EI) according to IEC 255-3

Logarithmic inverse (IDG) according to the formula: t = 5,8-1,35⋅ln I / Ia (s) where Ia is the set characteristic value (3I0>)


1MRK 580 345-XENPage 6 – 275

Version 2.2-00


2.1 Directional earth-fault overcurrent protection

This protection measures the residual current (3I0) and the residual volt-age (3U0). Figure 1: shows the current measuring, time delay and logiccircuits (both with and without directional check) of this protection func-tion.

Figure 1: Simplified logic diagram for the residual overcurrent protec-tion.

t1000ms

&

ttMin

TEF--BC

Operation = ON

t300ms

Characteristic =

&

&

EFCh

3Io>

IMin

Σ+-

20%

2fn

3Io

TEF--BLKTR

t50ms

&

tt1

& 1V

TEF--START

TEF--TRIP

TEF--TRSOTF&

TEF--BLOCK

TEF--STRV

TEF--STFW&

&

1

Direction

100% FORWARD

60% REVERSE

3Ioxcos(ϕ-65)

EF3IoSTD

0.01 Un

2fn3Uo

&

&

&

Def/NI/VI/EI/LOG

= Directional

k

IN>

Option: Directional check

&


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 345-XENPage 6 – 276

The 3I0 current lags the polarising voltage (3U0) by a phase angle equal tothe angle of the zero-sequence source impedance. The forward measuringelement operates when:

(Equation 1)

where

ϕ is the angle between 3I0 and 3U0 (positive if 3I0 lags 3U0)

3I0D is the set operate value

The change in operate value is small when the phase angle deviates mod-erately from 65°. A deviation of 20° increases the operate value by only6.5%.

The polarising voltage, normally obtained from the broken delta windingsof the VTs, can have a high content of harmonics relative to the funda-mental frequency when the output voltage is low, particularly whencapacitive VTs are used. To secure a correct measurement, the directionalfunction must have an effective bandpass filtering of the voltage. In themodule, the filtering secures a correct function for fundamental frequencypolarising voltages down to 1% of the rated voltage.

In case of an external fault, the capacitive current generated on the linedecreases the current to the earth-fault relay situated at the line end towardsthe fault. So the reverse direction comparator must have an increased sensi-tivity to secure reliable blocking in case of external faults when a direc-tional comparison or a blocking communication scheme is used. Theoperate current of the reverse direction measuring element in the moduleis, as a fixed ratio, set at 0.6 ⋅ IN> Dir.

Activate the independent time-delay function by setting Characteristic= Def(or inverse time delay according to the setting table). The t1 timer startswhen both the definite/inverse time characteristic and the tMin timeroperate. The tMin timer starts when the 3I0 current to the relay is equal toor higher than the set operate value for IMin and the content of the secondharmonic in 3I0 is less than 20%.

The inverse time calculation starts when 3I0 is equal to or higher than theset operate value for IMin and the content of the second harmonic in 3I0 isless than 20%. The inverse time delay is determined by the selection ofthe characteristic (NI, VI etc.) in the Characteristic setting and the settingof the characteristic IN> current.

The t1 timer is normally set to zero. Use it to add a constant time to theinverse time delay.

3I0 ϕ 65°–( ) 3I0D≥cos⋅


1MRK 580 345-XENPage 6 – 277

Version 2.2-00

Figure 2: shows the effect of the IMin and tMin settings on the inversecharacteristic.

Figure 2: Normal inverse and logarithmic inverse time characteristics.

The switch-onto-fault function is used to minimise the operate time incase of pole discrepancy at breaker closing. The function is released byactivating the TEF--BC binary input. The function is activated for 1 sec-ond after the reset of the TEF--BC binary input.

The function is blocked by activating the TEF--BLOCK binary input.

Activating the TEF--BLKTR blocks the definite/inverse delay trip outputsTEF--TRIP and the switch-on-to-fault trip TEF-TRSOTF.

1

2

3

4

5

t(s)

t min

1 2 3 5 7 10 20 30 50

I min

xIN>

Logarithmic Inverse

Normal Inverse(k=0.4)


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 345-XENPage 6 – 278

3 SettingTo detect high resistive earth-faults, a low operate current is required. Onthe other hand, a low setting increases the risk for unwanted operation dueto imbalance in the network and the current transformer circuits. Set theminimum operate current (IN> Dir) of the earth-fault overcurrent protec-tion higher than the maximum false earth-fault current.

The imbalance in the network that causes false earth-fault currents iscaused mainly by untransposed or not fully transposed parallel lines withstrong zero-sequence mutual coupling. This false earth-fault current isdirectly proportional to the load current.

In a well-transposed system, the false earth-fault current is normally lowerthan 5% of the line current, except for extremely short parallel lines (lessthan 5 kilometres), where a higher false earth-fault current may be found.

In case of extremely short or not fully transposed parallel lines, measureor calculate the false earth-fault current at maximum sensitivity.

The choice of time delay characteristics - definite time, normal inverse,very inverse, extremely inverse or logarithmic inverse - depends on thenetwork.

To achieve optimum selectivity, use the same type of characteristic for allearth-fault overcurrent protections in the network. So in networks alreadyequipped with earth-fault overcurrent relays, the best selectivity is nor-mally achieved by using the same type of characteristic as in the existingrelays.

The following formulas for the operate time (in seconds) apply to thecharacteristic used within the REx 5xx terminal with line protection, seetable 1.

where:

I is a multiple of set current 3I0>

k is a time multiplying factor, settable in the range of 0.05 to 1.10

Table 2: Operate time formulas

Characteristic: Operate time (s):




Logarithmic inverse (Equation 5)

t0,14

I0,02 1–------------------- k⋅=

t13,5I 1–----------- k⋅=

t80

I2 1–------------- k⋅=

t 5,8 1,35 Iln⋅( )–=


1MRK 580 345-XENPage 6 – 279

Version 2.2-00

All inverse time characteristic settings are a compromise between shortfault clearing time and selective operation in a large current range. Themain determining factors are the maximum allowed fault-clearing time atthe maximum fault resistance to be covered and the selectivity at maxi-mum fault current.

Set the minimum operate current (IMin), of the earth-fault overcurrentprotection, to one to four times the set characteristic quantity (IN>) of theinverse time delay. So an inverse characteristic with a low set IN> set toget a short operate time at minimum fault current can be combined with ahigher set IMin minimum operate current, to avoid unwanted operationdue to false earth-fault currents.

Set the minimum operate time independent of the inverse time character-istic. Normally, set this time longer than the time delay of distance zone 2in REx 5xx to avoid interference with the impedance measuring system incase of earth-faults with moderate fault resistance within zone 2.

When a solidly earthed, power transformer is energised, an inrush currentnormally flows in the neutral-to-earth connection of the transformer. Thiscurrent is divided among other earthed transformers and lines connectedto the same bus, inversely proportional to their zero-sequence impedance.The amplitude and time duration of this current can be sufficiently large tocause the unwanted operation of a sensitive earth-fault overcurrent protec-tion.

The earth-fault overcurrent protection has a built-in second harmonic cur-rent stabilisation, which prevents unwanted operation if the inrush currenthas a second harmonic content of 20% or more. This is normally the case.On rare occasions, it may be necessary to increase the setting of the oper-ate value for the residual earth-fault overcurrent protection to avoidunwanted operation due to transformer inrush current.

When single-phase auto-reclosing is used, the minimum time of theinverse time delayed residual overcurrent protection (tMin) should be setto be longer than the time from the occurrence of the fault to the reclosingof the breaker at both line terminals. This avoids unwanted three-phasetripping during a single-phase auto-reclosing cycle controlled by the dis-tance protection.

The polarising voltage for directional earth-fault overcurrent protection isnormally obtained from the broken delta windings of instrument voltagetransformers or by addition of the three-phase voltages in a restive net-work (a unit for this purpose is available). The voltage contains a certainamount of harmonics, especially when the protection is connected toCVTs.

Due to the bandpass filtering a polarising voltage down to 1 percent of therated voltage will provide correct directional functionality. This is alsovalid when the protection is connected to CVTs.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 345-XENPage 6 – 280

The minimum polarising voltage to the protection (Umin) is calculatedfrom the formula:

(Equation 6)

where:

IFmin is the minimum primary operate fault current

Z0min is the minimum zero-sequence impedance seen from therelay

Usec, Uprim are the rated phase voltages of the broken delta connectedCVTs

Observe that when a blocking scheme or a permissive scheme with cur-rent reversal or weak-end-infeed logic is used, IFmin represents the pri-mary operate current of the reverse-looking directional element which is60% of the forward element.

To even secure operation in unfavourable cases, Umin must be equal to atleast 1 volt plus the maximum network frequency false voltage, due tomeasuring errors in the VT circuits.

If not blocked, the directional comparator operates during the dead time incase of a single-phase auto-reclosure. So the TEF--BLOCK blockinginput must be activated during the single-phase auto-reclosing cycle.

Umin IF min Z0 min

Usec

Uprim-------------⋅ ⋅=


1MRK 580 345-XENPage 6 – 281

Version 2.2-00

4 Testing

4.1 Preparations For testing the residual overcurrent protection a test-set with variable cur-rent, variable voltage and variable phase angle between the current andvoltage is needed. Normally, test the earth-fault overcurrent protection inconjunction with the testing of the distance protection functions, using thesame multiphase test-set. Figure 3: shows the connection of a three-phasetest-set during the test of a directional relay.

Observe that the polarising voltage is equal to 3Uo.

Figure 3: Connection of the test-set to the REx 5xx terminal.

Set the appropriate parameters. Include the connections to the binaryinputs and outputs. Consider the logic diagram of the tested protectionfunction when performing the test.

If the communication logic and additional communication logic blocksfor residual overcurrent protection are included, those functions should betested as well. See respectively documents.

Check the operate values of the current measuring elements and corre-sponding functions during the commissioning and during regular mainte-nance tests. ABB Network Partner recommends, but not requested, theuse of the RTS 21 (FREJA) testing equipment for secondary injection-testing purposes.


L1IL2IL3INI

IL1IL2IL3IN (I4 alt. I5)

L1UL2UL3UNU

TRIP L1TRIP L2TRIP L3

RE

LA

Y T

ES

T-S

ET

RE

x 5x

xU4


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 345-XENPage 6 – 282

It might be necessary to block the impedance measuring zones, dependingon the zone settings, to prevent operation of the impedance function whenchecking the earth-fault protection.

Select the functions that should be blocked under the menu:

TestTestMode

BlockFunctions

The terminal can be set into test mode by either of the following:

• By setting the test mode Operation = On, which occurs under the menu:

TestTestMode

Operation


Important!! The function is blocked if the corresponding setting underthe BlockFunctions menu remains on and the TEST-INPUT signalremains active.

4.2 Tests 1.1 Check if the input and output logical signals in Figure 1: are config-ured to the corresponding binary inputs and outputs of the testedterminal. If not, configure them for testing purposes. Set the opera-tion of the TEF protection to mode On.

1.2 Set the logical input signals to logical 0 and note on the local HMIthat the TEF--TRIP and the TEF--TRSOTF signal is not activated(= logical 0). Values of the logical signals belonging to the timedelayed residual overcurrent protection are available under menutree:


EarthFaultTimeDelayEF

1.3 Set the polarising voltage to 2% of Ub and the phase angle betweenvoltage and current to 65°, the current lagging the voltage. Check thatthe operate current of the forward directional element is equal to theIN> Dir setting. The IN> Dir function activates the TEF--STFW out-put.

Check with angles ϕ = 20° and 110° that the measuring elementoperates when 3I0 ⋅ cos (65° - ϕ) ≥ IN> Dir.


1MRK 580 345-XENPage 6 – 283

Version 2.2-00

1.4 Reverse the polarising voltage (ϕ = 180° + 65° = 245°) and check thatthe operate current of the reverse directional element is0.6 ⋅ IN> Dir.

The function activates the TEF--STRV output.

Figure 4: Measuring characteristic of the directional element.

1.5 To activate the directional function, set Direction = Directional.

Set the polarising voltage to 2% of Ub and the phase angle betweenvoltage and current to 65°.

Check the operate current of the IMin function. The function acti-vates the TEF--START output.

1.6 When independent time delay (definite) is selected, check the operatetime of the t1 timer by injecting a current two times the set IMin oper-ate value.

When inverse time delay is selected, check the operate time at threepoints of the inverse characteristic. The formulas for operate time fordifferent types of inverse time delay curves are shown in Table 2 onpage 278.

Also check the tMin (minimum operate time) and IMin (minimumoperate current) functions.

1.7 Activate the TEF--BC input to check the function of the switch-onto-fault logic.

65o

Iset

IN Operation

Upol = 3Uoϕ


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 345-XENPage 6 – 284

Check that the TEF--TRSOTF output is activated with a 300 ms timedelay when injecting a current two times the set IMin operate value inforward direction.

1.8 Set the phase angle of the polarising voltage to ϕ=245° and check thatthe directional current function and the switch-onto-fault logic givesno operation when the current is in the reverse direction.

1.9 Connect the rated DC voltage to the TEF--BLOCK configured binaryinput and switch on the fault current. No TEF--TRIP nor TEF--START signal should appear. Switch off the fault current.

1.10 Connect the rated DC voltage to the TEF--BLKTR configured binaryinput and switch on the fault current. No TEF--TRIP nor TEF--TRSOTF should appear. But the output TEF--START shall be acti-vated.


If communication logic for residual overcurrent protection is included, seethat document for further testing of the blocking and permissive schemes.If additional communication logic is included as well, see that documentfor testing of reversal current and weak-end-infeed (Trip/Echo).


1MRK 580 345-XENPage 6 – 285

Version 2.2-00

5 Appendix

5.1 Function block

5.2 Signal list

5.3 Setting table

BC

BLOCK TRIPTRSOTFBLKTR

STARTSTFWSTRV

TEF--


TEF-- BLOCK IN Block of Time delayed earth-fault function

TEF-- BLKTR IN Block of Time delayed earth-fault trip

TEF-- BC IN Breaker closing command

TEF-- TRIP OUT Trip by Time delayed earth-fault function

TEF-- TRSOTF OUT Trip by earth-fault switch-onto-fault function

TEF-- START OUT Start (non-directional) earth-fault function

TEF-- STFW OUT Start forward directional earth-fault function

TEF-- STRV OUT Start reverse directional earth-fault function


Operation Off, On Off Time delayed earth-fault function On/Off

IMeasured I4, I5 I4 Current signal used for earth-fault function

Characteris-tic

Def, NI, VI, EI, LOG

Def Select time characteristic for earth-fault protection

IN> 5-300 % 5 Start current of earth-fault protection, as a percentage of Ib. Ib is the same as selected for IMeasured above (I4b or I5b)

IMin 100-400 % 100 Minimum operate current, as a percentage of IN

t1 0.000-60.000 s 0.000 Independent (definite) time delay

k 0.05-1.10 0.05 Time multiplier for inverse time function

tMin 0.000-60.000 s 0.050 Min. operate time for inverse time delay function

Direction NonDir, Direc-tional

NonDir Selection of directional or non-directional earth-fault protection

UMeasured U4, U1+U2+U3

U4 Voltage signal used for directional earth-fault function

IN> Dir 5-35 % 5 Start level of DirE/F, if DirE/F is selected, as a percentage of Ib. Ib is the same as selected for IMeasured above (I4b or I5b)


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 345-XENPage 6 – 286

287Communication logic for residual overcurrent protection

1 ApplicationThis communication logic is intended for residual overcurrent protections.

To achieve fast fault clearing for a fault on the part of the line not coveredby the instantaneous zone 1, the stepped distance protection function canbe supported with logic, that uses communication channels.

One communication channel in each direction, which can transmit anon/off signal is required. The performance and security of this function isdirectly related to the transmission channel speed and security againstfalse or lost signals. So special channels are used for this purpose. Whenpower line carrier is used for communication, these special channels arestrongly recommended due to the communication disturbance caused bythe primary fault.

In the directional comparison scheme, information of the fault currentdirection must be transmitted to the other line end.

With directional comparison, an operate time of 50-60 ms, including achannel transmission time of 20 ms, can be achieved. This short operatetime enables auto-reclosing after the fault.

During a single-phase reclosing cycle, the auto-reclosing device mustblock the directional comparison earth-fault scheme.

The communication logic module for the REx 5xx terminal contains cir-cuits for blocking overreach and permissive overreach schemes. The mod-ule also contains logic for the weak-end-infeed and current-reversalfunctions, which are used only in the permissive overreach scheme.



The directional comparison function contains logic for blocking overreachand permissive overreach schemes.

The circuits for the permissive overreach scheme contain logic for currentreversal and weak-end-infeed functions. These functions are not requiredfor the blocking overreach scheme.

Use the independent or inverse time functions in the directional earth-fault protection module to get back-up tripping in case the communicationequipment malfunctions and prevents operation of the directional compar-ison logic.

Connect the necessary signal from the auto-recloser for blocking of thedirectional comparison scheme, during a single-phase auto-reclosingcycle, to the EFC--BLOCK input of the directional comparison module.

1MRK 580 346-XEN


Communication logic for residual overcurrent protection

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 346-XENPage 6 – 288

2.1.1 Blocking scheme In the blocking overreach scheme, a signal is sent to the other line end ifthe directional element detects a fault in the reverse direction. When theforward directional element operates, it trips the line after a short timedelay if no blocking signal is received from the other line end. The timedelay, normally 30-40 ms, depends on the communication transmissiontime and the chosen safety margin.

One advantage of the blocking scheme is that only one channel (carrierfrequency) is needed and the channel can be shared with the impedance-measuring system, if that also works in the blocking mode. The communi-cation signal is also transmitted on a healthy line and no signal attenuationwill occur due to the fault.

Blocking schemes are particularly favourable for three-terminal applica-tions if there is no zero-sequence current outfeed from the tapping. Theblocking scheme is immune to current reversals because the received car-rier signal is maintained long enough to avoid unwanted operation due tocurrent reversal. There is neither any need for weak-end-infeed logic,because the strong end trips for an internal fault when no blocking signalis received from the weak end. But the fault clearing time, is generallylonger for a blocking scheme than for a permissive one.To release theblocking scheme, set the SchemeType = Blocking under the menu:

Settings Functions

GroupnEarthFault

EFCom


If the fault is on the line, the forward direction measuring element oper-ates. If no blocking signal comes from the other line end via the EFC--CRbinary input (carrier receive) the EFC--TRIP output is activated after thetCoord set time delay.

Figure 1: Simplified logic diagram, Scheme type = blocking.

t0-60s

&EFC--TRIP

EFC--CACCt

25ms

&

tCoord

t50ms

EFC--CR

EFC--BLOCK

EFC--CSBLK & EFC--CS

EFC--CRL


1MRK 580 346-XENPage 6 – 289

Version 2.2-00

2.1.2 Permissive overreach scheme

In the permissive scheme, the forward direction measuring element sendsa permissive signal to the other line end if a fault is detected in the for-ward direction. The direction element at the other line end must wait for apermissive signal before giving a trip signal. Independent channels (fre-quencies) must be available for the communication in each direction.

An impedance-measuring relay which works in an underreach permis-sive mode with one channel in each direction can share the channelswith the earth-fault overcurrent protection. If the impedance measuringrelay works in the permissive overreach mode, common channels can beused in single-line applications. In case of double lines connected to acommon bus at both ends, use common channels only if the ratio Z1S /Z0S (positive through zero-sequence source impedance) is about equal atboth line ends. If the ratio is different, the impedance measuring and thedirectional earth-fault current system of the healthy line may detect a faultin different directions, which could result in unwanted tripping.

Common channels can not be used when the weak-end-infeed function isused in the distance or earth-fault protection. To release the permissiveoverreach scheme, set SchemeType = Permissive under the menu:

SettingsFunctions

GroupnEarthFault

EFCom


In case of an internal fault, the forward direction measuring element operatesand sends a permissive signal to the remote end via the EFC--CS output (car-rier send). Local tripping is permitted when the forward direction measur-ing element operates and a permissive signal is received via the EFC--CRbinary input (carrier receive).

The total operate-time for the system is the sum of the Pick-up time (ofthe measuring element) and the Transmission time (of the permissive sig-nal).

Figure 2: Simplified logic diagram, Scheme type = permissive.

t25ms

1V EFC--CS

EFC--TRIP

EFC--BLOCK

EFC--CACC

EFC--CSPRMEFC--CSBLK

&t

0-60s

tCoord&

t50ms

EFC--CR & EFC--CRL

& &


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 346-XENPage 6 – 290

3 SettingThe settings are done from the local HMI under the menu:

SettingsFunctions

Group n (n = 1..4)EarthFault

EFCom

3.1 Blocking scheme In the blocking scheme, set the tCoord timer to the channel trans-mission time during disturbance conditions. Add a margin of 20-30 ms.Two times the nominal value of the channel transmission time is recom-mended when a power line carrier is used.

3.2 Permissive communication scheme

In the permissive communication scheme, the security against unwantedoperation caused by spurious carrier receive signals can be increased bydelaying the tripping output with the tCoord timer. Set the timer in therange of 0.000 to 60.000 s. In most cases, a time delay of 30 ms is suffi-cient.

To avoid unwanted trip from the weak-end-infeed logic (if spurious car-rier signals should occur), set the operate value of the broken delta voltagelevel detector (3U0) higher than the maximum false network frequencyresidual voltage that can occur during normal service conditions. Therecommended minimum setting is two times the false zero-sequence volt-age during normal service conditions.

4 TestingThe testing of this function should be performed together with the timedelayed residual overcurrent protection. See that document for necessarytest equipment and the general testing performance.

If the current reversal and weak-end-infeed logic for the time delayedresidual overcurrent protection is included, that function should be testedas well.


4.1 Directional earth-fault overcurrent protection

First, test this function according to the document “Time delayed residualovercurrent protection”. Then continue with the next section.


1MRK 580 346-XENPage 6 – 291

Version 2.2-00


4.2.1 Blocking scheme 2.1 Use an injection current two times the set operate value of the for-ward directional element to check that the EFC--TRIP output is acti-vated after the delay set on the tCoord timer.

2.2 Activate the forward directional element and then the EFC--CRblocking input before the set tCoord time elapses. Check that theEFC--TRIP output is not activated. Check that the EFC--CRL outputis activated when EFC--CR input is activated.

2.3 Activate the EFC--BLOCK digital input and check the blocking ofthe EFC--TRIP output signal.

4.2.2 Permissive scheme 3.1 Use an injection current two times the set operate value of the for-ward directional element to check that the EFC--CS output is acti-vated.

3.2 Activate the EFC--CR input. Use an injection current two times theset operate value of the forward directional element to check that theEFC--TRIP output is activated after the delay, set on tCoord timer.Deactivate the EFC--CR input and check that no output is obtainedon EFC--TRIP.

If the current reversal and weak-end-infeed logic for earth-fault protectionis included, proceed with the testing according to the corresponding docu-ment. The reversal current and weak-end-infeed functions shall be testedtogether with the permissive scheme.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 346-XENPage 6 – 292

5 Appendix

5.1 Function block

5.2 Signal list

5.3 Setting table

BLOCKCACC

TRIPCS

CRLCSPRMCSBLK

EFC--

CR


EFC-- BLOCK IN Block of Communication Scheme Logic

EFC-- CACC IN Signal to be used for tripping by Communication Scheme Logic

EFC-- CSPRM IN Signal for Carrier Send in permissive scheme

EFC-- CSBLK IN Signal for Carrier Send in blocking scheme

EFC-- CR IN Carrier Received for Communication Scheme Logic

EFC-- TRIP OUT Trip by Communication Scheme Logic

EFC-- CS OUT Carrier Send by Communication Scheme Logic

EFC-- CRL OUT Carrier Receive from Communication Scheme Logic


Operation Off, On Off Earth fault communication function On/Off

Scheme-Type

Permissive, Blocking

Permis-sive

Scheme type, mode of operation

tCoord 0.000-60.000 s 0.050 Communication scheme coordination time

293Current rev. and WEI logic for residual overcurrent protection

1 ApplicationThis additional communication logic is intended for the Communicationlogic for residual overcurrent protections.

To achieve fast fault clearing for a fault on the part of the line not coveredby the instantaneous zone 1, the earth-fault protection functions can besupported with logic, that uses communication channels. REx 5xx termi-nals have for this reason available a scheme communication logic. Differ-ent system conditions require in many cases additional special logiccircuits, like current reversal logic and weak-end-infeed logic. Both func-tions are available within the additional communication logic for earth-fault protection.

1.1 Current reversal logic If parallel lines are connected to common buses at both terminals, over-reaching permissive communication schemes can trip unselectively due tofault current reversal. This unwanted tripping affects the healthy linewhen a fault is cleared on the other line. This lack of security results in atotal loss of interconnection between the two buses.

To avoid this type of disturbance, a fault current-reversal logic (transientblocking logic) can be used.

1.2 Weak end infeed logic Permissive communication schemes can basically operate only when theprotection in the remote terminal can detect the fault. The detectionrequires a sufficient minimum fault current. The fault current can be toolow due to an opened breaker or low short-circuit power of the source. Toovercome these conditions, weak end infeed (WEI) echo logic is used.

The fault current can also be initially too low due to the fault current dis-tribution. Here, the fault current increases when the breaker opens in thestrong terminal and a sequential tripping is achieved. This requires adetection of the fault by an independent-tripping zone 1. To avoid sequen-tial tripping as described and when zone 1 is not available, weak endinfeed tripping logic is used.

1MRK 580 421-XEN



Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 421-XENPage 6 – 294



The directional comparison function contains logic for blocking overreachand permissive overreach schemes.

The circuits for the permissive overreach scheme contain logic for currentreversal and weak end infeed functions. These functions are not requiredfor the blocking overreach scheme.

Use the independent or inverse time functions in the directional earth-fault protection module to get back-up tripping in case the communicationequipment malfunctions and prevents operation of the directional compar-ison logic.

Figures 3, 4 and 5 shows the logic circuits.

Connect the necessary signal from the auto-recloser for blocking of thedirectional comparison scheme, during a single-phase auto-reclosingcycle, to the EFCA-BLOCK input of the directional comparison module.

2.1.1 Fault current reversal logic

Figures 1 and 2 show a typical system condition, which can result in afault current reversal; note that the fault current is reversed in line L2 afterthe breaker opening. This can cause an unselectiv trip on line L2 if thecurrent reversal logic does not block the permissive overreach scheme inthe terminal at B:2.

Figure 1: Initial condition

Figure 2: Current distribution after the breaker at B:1 is opened

L1A B

Weaksource


L2

A:2 B:2

L1A B

Weaksource


L2

A:2 B:2


1MRK 580 421-XENPage 6 – 295

Version 2.2-00

The fault current reversal logic uses a reverse direction element, con-nected to EFCA-IRV, which in terminal at B:2 recognises the fault on theL1 line. See Figure 1. When the reverse direction element is activated dur-ing the tPickUp time, the EFCA-IRVL signal is activated, see Figure 3.The logic is now ready to handle a current reversal without tripping.EFCA-IRVL will be connected to the block input on the permissive over-reach scheme.

When breaker in B:1 operate, the fault current is reversed in line L2. Theterminal at B:2 recognises now the fault in forward direction. Togetherwith the remaining carrier received signal it will trip the breaker in B:2.To ensure that this does not occur, the permissive overreach function needto be blocked by EFCA-IRVL, until the carrier receive signal is reset.

When the fault current is reversed in line L2, EFCA-IRV is deactived andEFCA-IRVBLK is actived. The reset of EFCA-IRVL is delayed by thetDelay time, see Figure 3. This ensures the reset of the carrier receiveEFCA-CR signal in terminal B:2.

In terminal A:2, where the forward direction element was initially acti-vated. This direction element must reset before the carrier send signal isinitiated from B:2. The delayed reset of EFCA-IRVL also ensures the car-rier send signal from terminal B:2 is held back until the forward directionelement is reset in terminal A:2.

Figure 3: Simplified logic diagram, Reversal current.

To release the logic, set CurrRev = On under the menu:

SettingsFunctions

GroupnEarthFault

ComIRevWeiEF


2.1.2 Weak end infeed logic

Figure 4 shows a typical system condition, which can result in a missingoperation; note that there is no fault current from node B. This cause thatterminal at B cannot detect the fault and trip the breaker in B. To copewith this situation, a selectable weak end infeed logic is provided for thepermissive overreach scheme.

t0-60s

EFCA-BLOCK

tPickUp

t0-60s

tDelay

EFCA-IRV EFCA-IRVL

EFCA-IRVBLK

&t10ms

t0-60s

tPickUp


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 421-XENPage 6 – 296

The weak end infeed function can be set to send only an echo signal(WEI=Echo) or an echo signal and a trip signal (WEI=Trip). SeeFigures 5 and 6. The function is released with either of the WEI=Echo orWEI=Trip settings in the menu:

SettingsFunctions

GroupnEarthFault

ComIRevWeiEF


Figure 4: Initial condition

The weak end infeed logic uses normally a reverse and a forward direc-tion element, connected to EFCA-WEIBLK via an OR-gate. See Figure 5.If neither the forward nor the reverse directional measuring element isactivated during the last 200 ms. The weak-end-infeed logic echoes backthe received permissive signal. See figure 5.

If the forward or the reverse directional measuring element is activatedduring the last 200 ms. The fault current is sufficient for the terminal in Bto detect the fault with the earth-fault function that is in operation.

Figure 5: Simplified logic diagram, weak-end-infeed - Echo.

With the Trip setting, the logic sends an echo according to above. Further,it activates the EFCA-TRWEI signal to trip the breaker if the echo condi-tions are fulfilled and the neutral point voltage is above the set operatevalue for 3U0.

The voltage signal that is used to calculate the zero sequence voltage is setin the earth-fault function that is in operation.

L1

A B Weaksource

Strongsource

WEI = Echo/Off

EFCA-ECHOEFCA-WEIBLK

EFCA-CRL

EFCA-BLOCK

t200ms

& t50ms

t200ms

&


1MRK 580 421-XENPage 6 – 297

Version 2.2-00

Figure 6: Simplified logic diagram, weak-end-infeed - Trip.

The weak end infeed echo sent to the strong line end has a maximumduration of 200 ms. When this time period has elapsed, the conditions thatenable the echo signal to be sent are set to zero for a time period of 50 ms.This avoids ringing action if the weak end echo is selected for both lineends.

3 SettingThe settings are done from the local HMI under the menu:

SettingsFunctions

Group n (n = 1..4)EarthFault

ComIRevWeiEF

3.1 Reversal current The Current-reversal function is set on and off by setting the parameterCurrRev = On/Off. Time delays shall be set for the timers tPickUp= andtDelay =.

3.2 Weak-end-infeed The weak end infeed can either be set off or to echo or trip by settingthe parameter WEI = Off/Echo/Trip. (Echo = Echo, Trip = Echo + Trip).Operate zero sequence voltage for WEI trip is set with Ugr = xx % of Ub.

WEI = Trip/OffEFCA-TRWEI

EFCA-ST3U0

EFCA-ECHOEFCA-WEIBLK

EFCA-CRL

EFCA-BLOCK

t200ms

& t50ms

t200ms

&

&


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 421-XENPage 6 – 298

4 TestingThe testing of this function should be performed together with the Com-munication logic for earth-fault protection and further with the timedelayed residual overcurrent protection. See those documents for neces-sary test equipment and the general testing performance.


The testings of the mentioned functions shall be performed before doingthese tests.


First, test this function according to the document “Time delayed residualovercurrent protection”. Then continue with the next section.

4.1.1 Blocking scheme Perform the tests according to “Communication logic for residual over-current protection”.

4.1.2 Permissive scheme Continue with the tests according to “Communication logic for residualovercurrent protection” for the permissive scheme before testing thereversal current and weak-end-infeed functions as below.

3.3 Check the current reversal logic by activating the reverse directionalelement and then abruptly reversing the polarising voltage to operatethe forward directional element. Check that the EFCA-IRVL output isactivated after the reversal with a time delay, that complies with thetDelay setting.

3.4 Check the weak end infeed logic:

Setting: WEI=EchoActivate the reverse directional element and then the EFCA-CRLinput.

Check that the EFCA-ECHO and EFC--CS outputs are not activated.Deactivate the directional element and check that the EFCA-ECHOand EFC--CS outputs are obtained about 200 ms after resetting thedirectional element.

Setting: WEI=TripCheck the operate value of the EFCA-ST3U0 voltage check element.Activate the 3U0 element and the EFCA-CRL input and check that theEFCA-ECHO, EFC--CS and EFCA-TRWEI outputs are activated.

Activate the reverse directional and the 3U0 measuring elementsand then the EFCA-CRL input. Check that the EFCA-ECHO, EFC--CS and EFCA-TRWEI outputs are not activated. Deactivate the


1MRK 580 421-XENPage 6 – 299

Version 2.2-00

directional element and check that the EFCA-ECHO, EFC--CS andEFCA-TRWEI outputs are activated about 200 ms after resettingthe directional element.

Setting: WEI=OffCheck that no outputs, as above, are activated.

3.5 Check the blocking functions from the EFCA-BLOCK and EFCA-WEIBLK digital inputs.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 421-XENPage 6 – 300

5 Appendix

5.1 Function block

5.2 Signal list

5.3 Setting table

BLOCKIRV

TRWEIIRVL

ECHOIRVBLKWEIBLK

EFCA-

CRL


EFCA- BLOCK IN Blocking of weak end infeed logic

EFCA- IRV IN Activation of current reversal logic

EFCA- IRVBLK IN Blocking of current reversal logic

EFCA- WEIBLK IN Blocking of weak end infeed logic

EFCA- CRL IN Carrier received for weak end infeed logic

EFCA- TRWEI OUT Trip by weak end infeed logic

EFCA- IRVL OUT Operation of current reversal logic

EFCA- ECHO OUT Carrier send by weak end infeed logic


CurrRev Off, On Off Current reversal logic Off/On

tPickUp 0.000-60.000 s 0.000 Current reversal pickup timer

tDelay 0.000-60.000 s 0.100 Current reversal delay timer

WEI Off, Trip, Echo Off Weak end infeed logic, Echo=Echo, Trip=Echo+Trip

Ugr 5 - 70 % 25 Operate phase voltage for WEI trip, as a percentage of Ub

3014 step residual overcurrent protection

1 Application


In case of single-phase earth-faults, the primary fault resistance will varywith the network conditions and location of the fault. In many cases, thefault resistance is much higher than the resistance that can be covered byan impedance measuring distance relay.

Earth-faults with high fault resistances can be detected by measuring theresidual current (3Io). This type of protection provides maximum sensitiv-ity to earth-faults with additional resistance.

Directional earth-fault protection is obtained by using the polarising volt-age 3Uo. As a general rule, selectivity is more easily obtained by usingdirectional instead of non-directional earth-fault overcurrent protection.High resistive earth-faults can also be detected by a sensitive directionalprotection, the limiting condition being that sufficient polarising voltagemust be available.

At the relay site, the residual current lags the residual voltage by a phaseangle that is equal to the angle of the zero-sequence source impedance. Insolidly earthed networks, this angle will be in the range of 40° to nearly90°, where the high value refers to stations with direct earthed transform-ers with delta winding. To obtain maximum sensitivity for all conditions,the forward measuring element should have a characteristic angle of 65°.

When energising a directly earthed power transformer, the residual inrushcurrent can cause unwanted operation of the earth-fault overcurrent pro-tection. In order to avoid restrictions on the settings, the earth-fault pro-tection should be provided with second harmonic restraint, which blocksthe operation if the residual current contains a second harmonic compo-nent which exceeds the set value. If more than one transformer is con-nected to the same bus, the inrush current from the line to the switched-intransformer may after some hundreds of milliseconds have a stronglyreduced content of second harmonic. A special logic should be providedto secure harmonic blocking even in this case.

A serial fault can be caused by broken phase conductor(s) with no contactto earth, or pole discrepancy in a circuit-breaker or a disconnector. Themost common type of serial fault is pole discrepancy at breaker maneu-vering. A switch-onto-fault logic, which is activated at breaker closure,can be used to minimise the operate time for this type of fault.

Serial faults can be correctly detected also by the directional earth-faultprotection if the voltage transformers are situated on the bus side of theline breaker.

Measurement of the distance to the fault cannot be done by using the zero-sequence components of current and voltage. Hence, the necessary selec-tivity must be obtained by directional comparison communicationbetween the line ends.

1MRK 580 350-XEN



Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 350-XENPage 6 – 302

1.2 Directional comparison

The feature directional check provides possibilities with independent set-tings (sensitivity) of the forward and reverse measuring elements, to com-pensate line capacitance etc. Information about direction of the faultcurrent makes it easier to locate the fault.

An optional communication logic block for earth-fault protection can beincluded in the REx 5xx terminal. The function contains circuits forblocking overreach and permissive overreach schemes. See the section“Communication logic for residual overcurrent protection”.

Also an additional communication logic block for the communication canbe included as option. It contains logic for the weak-end-infeed and cur-rent-reversal functions, which are used only in the permissive overreachscheme. See the section “Current reversal and weak-end-infeed logic forresidual overcurrent protection”.

In the permissive directional comparison scheme, the forward directionmeasuring element will send a permissive signal to the other line end if afault is seen in the forward direction. The direction element at the otherline end must wait for a permissive signal before it can trip.

The total operate time for the system will be the sum of the pick-up timeof the measuring element and the transmission time of the permissive sig-nal. An operate time of 50-60 ms, including a channel transmission timeof 20 ms, can be achieved. This short operate time allows auto-reclosingafter the fault.

During a single-phase reclosing cycle, the directional comparison earth-fault scheme must be blocked by the auto-reclosing device.

These options also enables measurement of the distance to the fault andcan provide increased selectivity.


1MRK 580 350-XENPage 6 – 303

Version 2.2-00


2.1 Function logic The 4 step earth-fault overcurrent protection has three current steps withindependent time delay and a fourth current step with independent timedelay or inverse time characteristics (Normal inverse (NI), Very inverse(VI), Extremely inverse (EI) and one logarithmic inverse characteristic(LOG)).

The time/current function of the different inverse time characteristics isdefined on page 314.

The simplified logic diagrams in Figure 1: to 4 show the circuits for thefour overcurrent steps and the directional function. The diagrams alsoinclude the logic of the switch-onto-fault function.

Figure 1: Simplified logic diagram of internal function Step 1. Step 2 and 3 are the same.

Figure 2: Simplified logic diagram of internal functionSwitch-onto-fault.

EF4--BLKTR

t50ms

Oper.mode= 0-6

EF4--STRVEF4--STFW

& tt1

EF4--TRIN1

EF4--BLOCK

e

Step 1

&

IN1>3I0

EF4--STIN1

trip to Step 4

start to Step 4

Step 2 and 3 same as Step 1.

Check of operationmode and conditions

fromfig. 3

EF4--BC

SOTF Oper.= 0-2t

300ms

EF4--BLKTR

EF4--TRSOTF&t

t4U

eSTIN2STIN4

0= Off1= IN2>2= IN4>Res

block

Switch-onto-fault

fromfig. 3

trip to Step 4


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 350-XENPage 6 – 304

Figure 3: Simplified logic diagram of internal function Step 4.

Figure 4: Simplified logic diagram of internal function Directional check.

Characteristic = 0-4

&

EFCh

IN>Inv

IN4>

Σ+-

20/32%

2fn

3I0

EF4--BLKTR

t50ms

Def/NI/VI/EI/LOG

k

IN>

Oper.mode= 0-6

EF4--STRVEF4--STFW t

t4Min

&

&

Characteristic= 0 Def.

tt4 EF4--TRIP1V

EF4--TRIN4

trip from Step 1-3

EF4--BLOCK

EF4--START1V

&

e

EF4--STIN4

block to

start from Step 1-3

e

Step 4

Check of operationmode and conditions

conditionfor above

frombelow

trip from Switch-onto-faultSwitch-onto-fault

start from Directional check

EF4--STRV

EF4--STFW&

&

100% FORWARD

60% REVERSE

3I0xcos(ϕ-65)

EF3I0STD

0.01 Un

3Uo

&

&2fn

Directional check

t50ms

EF4--BLOCK

3Io

start toStep 4


1MRK 580 350-XENPage 6 – 305

Version 2.2-00

For all four current steps, one of the following operate modes can beselected, independently of the other steps:

• Non-directional overcurrent function without second harmonic restraint, NonDirNonRestr.

• Forward directional overcurrent function without second harmonic restraint, ForwRelease.

• Non-directional overcurrent function with second harmonic restraint, Restrained.

• Forward directional overcurrent function with second harmonic restraint, ForwRelRestr.

• Overcurrent function without second harmonic restraint, with block-ing from the reverse direction measuring element, RevBlock.

• Overcurrent function with second harmonic restraint, with blocking from the reverse direction measuring element, RevBlRestr.

2.2 The directional measuring function

The forward direction measuring element (STFW) operates when:

(Equation 1)

where:

set operate current

phase angel between the current and the voltage (positive if the currentlags the voltage)

The operate current can be set between 5 and 40% of the base current (Ib)of the REx 5xx terminal.

The operate current is very little influenced by moderate phase angle dif-ferences. A deviation of 20° from the characteristic angle 65° onlyincreases the operate value by 6.5%.

The operate value is practically independent of the magnitude of the pola-rising voltage in the interval from 0.5 to 100% of nominal value. Whenthe voltage is less than 0.5%, the measuring circuit is blocked.

In special cases when the polarising voltage is too low, current polarisingcan be used by inserting an external unit which converts the zero sequencecurrent into a voltage.

The polarising voltage is normally obtained from the broken delta wind-ing of the VT’s. When the voltage is low, it can have a high content of har-monics - especially third harmonic - relative the basic frequencycomponent. This is specially the case when capacitive VT’s are used. Tosecure correct directional function down to a polarising voltage of 0.5% ofrated voltage, the measuring circuit is provided with a filter which has adamping factor of >20 for the third harmonic component of the voltage.

3I0 ϕ 65°–( )cos⋅ IN Dir>≥

IN Dir>

ϕ


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 350-XENPage 6 – 306

The directional function has two comparators, one operates in the forwarddirection (STFW) and one operates in the reverse direction (STRV).The operate current of the reverse directional comparator is 0.6⋅IN>Dir,i.e. 40% lower than that of the forward directional. The increased sensitiv-ity is used to compensate for the influence of the capacitive current gener-ated by the faulty line, which in case of an external fault decreases thecurrent fed to the earth-fault protection situated at the line end towards thefault. By increasing the sensitivity, reliable blocking from the reversedirectional measuring element is obtained for the directional comparisonsystem.

Figure 5: Operate characteristic of the direction measuring element.

2.3 Definite time overcurrent step 1

When the current exceeds the set operate value for IN1> and no blockingis applied to input EF4-BLOCK, the &-gate operates and the start flagEF4-STIN1 is activated.

When the setting “ForwRelease” is selected, the forward directional ele-ment must also operate in order to start the timer t1.

When the setting “RevBlock” is selected, the timer t1 is not activated if thereverse directional element is activated.

When the setting “Restrained” is selected, the timer t1 is not activated ifthe second harmonic content in 3I0 is higher than the set blocking value(20 or 32%).

2.4 Definite time overcurrent step 2 and 3

The overcurrent steps 2 and 3 have the same functionality as step 1. Butthey differs in the methodic of the setting calculations, as described in“Step 2 and 3” on page 312.

2.5 Overcurrent step 4 With setting “Characteristic = Definite”, the function of step 4 with cur-rent detector IN4> and timer t4 is the same as for overcurrent steps 1 – 3.

ϕ

65°

Upol = 3U0

Iset


1MRK 580 350-XENPage 6 – 307

Version 2.2-00

When Characteristic is selected to logarithmic inverse time, LOG, theinverse time calculation starts when the current exceeds the set operatevalue of current detector IN4> (see Figure 3:). For the NI, VI and EI char-acteristics the inverse time calculation starts when the current exceeds theset characteristic current (IN>Inv). The inverse time delay is determinedby the selection of the characteristic (NI,VI etc.), the setting of the timemultiplier (k) and the characteristic current (IN>Inv). The timer t4 startswhen both the inverse timer and the timer t4Min operate. Hence, the set-ting IN4> determines the minimum operate current and the setting t4Mindetermines the minimum operate time.

The influence of the setting of minimum operate time and minimum oper-ate time on the inverse time function is shown in Figure 6:.

Observe that when inverse characteristic NI, VI or EI is selected, the sec-ond harmonic restrain is a fixed value=20 %, independent of the setting.

Figure 6: Normal inverse and logarithmic inverse time characteristics.

Timer t4 is normally set to zero. It can be used to add a constant time tothe inverse time delay.

The functions ForwRel, RevBlock and Restrain are applicable also wheninverse time is selected.

To release the switch-onto-fault function, the input EF4--BC is activatedwhen the breaker is closed. The function remains released 5 seconds afterreset of the input signal.

1 2 3 75 10 20 30 50

1

2

3

4

5

t4min

t (s)

x IN>Inv

Imin (IN4>)

Logarithmic inverse

Normal inverse(k=0.4)


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 350-XENPage 6 – 308

When the operation mode SOTF is set to IN2>, the current stage IN2>activates the output EF4--TRSOTF with a fixed time delay of 300 ms.With the setting SOTF = IN4>Res, the current stage IN2> activates theoutput with a fixed time delay of 300 ms and the current stage IN4>Resactivates the output EF4--TRSOTF with a time delay t4U. Nevertheless, acondition is that the second harmonic content in 3I0 is less than the setblocking value. Both time steps are blocked when input EF4--BLOCK isactivated.

When the setting BlkParTransf = On is selected and the second harmoniccontent in the current 3I0 is higher than the set restrain value 70 ms afterthe operation of current detector IN4>Res, the &-gate after the timer sealsin and gives second harmonic blocking until the current detector resets.The function is used for parallel connected transformers, for which thesecond harmonic content of the inrush current may become substantiallyreduced within fractions of a second after breaker closure.


1MRK 580 350-XENPage 6 – 309

Version 2.2-00

3 Setting

3.1 General Only detailed network studies can determine the operate conditions underwhich the highest possible fault current is expected on the line. In mostcases, this current appears during single-phase fault conditions. But toexamine two-phase-to-earth conditions is also needed, since this type offault can be higher than single-phase to earth fault in some cases.

Also study transients that could cause a high increase of the line currentfor short times. A typical example is a transmission line with a powertransformer at the remote end, which can cause high inrush current whenconnected to the network and can thus also cause operation of the residualovercurrent protection.

3.2 Step 1 The settings for step 1 is described in the following sections. Section 3.2.1and Section 3.2.2 below are valid for both directional and non-directionaloperation. For non-directional operation, also Section 3.2.3 must be con-sidered.

3.2.1 Meshed network without parallel line

This section describes the settings of Step 1 for both directional and non-directional operation. But when non-directional operation is selected, anadditional fault calculation, with a fault applied in A, has to be done. See“Meshed network non-directional” on page 311.

The following fault calculations have to be done for single-phase-to-earthand two-phase-to-earth faults. With reference to Figure 7:, apply a fault inB and then calculate the relay through fault residual current IfB. The cal-culation should be done using the minimum source impedance values forZA and the maximum source impedance values for ZB in order to get themaximum through fault current from A to B.

Figure 7: Through fault current from A to B: IfB

The minimum theoretical current setting (Imin) will be:

(Equation 2)

visf_125.vsd

~ ~ZA ZBZ L

A B

Relay

IfB

Fault

Imin MAX IfB( )≥


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 350-XENPage 6 – 310

A safety margin of 5% for the maximum protection static inaccuracy anda safety margin of 5% for the maximum possible transient overreach haveto be introduced. An additional 10% is suggested due to the inaccuracy ofthe instrument transformers during transient conditions and inaccuracy inthe system data.

The minimum setting (Is) for the residual overcurrent protection is then:

(Equation 3)

3.2.2 Meshed network with parallel line

In case of parallel lines, the influence of the induced current from the par-allel line to the protected line has to be considered. One example is givenin Figure 8:, where the two lines are connected to the same busbar. In thiscase the influence of the induced fault current from the faulty line (line 1)to the healthy line (line 2) is considered together with the through faultcurrent IfB mentioned previously. The maximal influence from the parallelline for the relay in Figure 8: will be with a fault at the C point with thebreaker C open.

A fault in C has to be applied, and then the maximum current seen fromthe relay (IM) on the healthy line (this applies for single-phase-to-earthand two-phase-to-earth faults) is calculated. The through fault current IMis the sum of the induced fault current from line 1 and the fault currentthat would occur in line 2 if the mutual impedance M would be zero.

Figure 8: Two parallel lines. Influence from parallel line to the through fault current: IM

The minimum theoretical current setting for the residual overcurrent pro-tection function (Imin) will be:

(Equation 4)

where IfB has been described in the previous paragraph.

Is 1 2, IfB⋅≥

visf_128.vsd

~ ~ZA ZB

ZL1A B

I M

Fault

Relay

ZL2

M

CLine 1

Line 2

Imin MAX IfB IM,( )≥


1MRK 580 350-XENPage 6 – 311

Version 2.2-00

Considering the safety margins mentioned previously, the minimum set-ting (Is) for the protection is then:

(Equation 5)

The protection function can be used for the specific application only ifthis setting value is equal or less than the maximum residual fault currentthat the relay has to clear.

3.2.3 Meshed network non-directional

First do the calculation according to “Meshed network without parallelline” on page 309.

Then apply a fault in A and calculate the through fault residual current IfA(Figure 9:). In order to get the maximum through fault current, the mini-mum value for ZB and the maximum value for ZA have to be considered.

Figure 9: Through fault current from B to A: IfA

The minimum theoretical current setting (Imin) will then be:

(Equation 6)

A safety margin of 5% for the maximum protection static inaccuracy anda safety margin of 5% for the maximum possible transient overreach haveto be introduced. An additional 10% is suggested due to the inaccuracy ofthe instrument transformers during transient conditions and inaccuracy inthe system data.

The minimum setting (Is) for the residual overcurrent protection is then:

(Equation 7)

Is 1 2, Imin⋅≥

visf_126.vsd

~ ~ZA ZBZ L

A B

Relay

IfA

Fault

Imin MAX IfA IfB,( )≥

Is 1 2, Imin⋅≥


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 350-XENPage 6 – 312

The protection function can be used for the specific application only ifthis setting value is equal or less than the maximum fault current that therelay has to clear (IF in Figure 10:).

Figure 10: Fault current: IF

For parallel lines, the minimum theoretical current setting for the residualovercurrent protection function (Imin) will be:

(Equation 8)

where IfA an IfB have been described in the previous paragraphs.

3.3 Step 2 and 3 The calculation of the settings for step 2 and 3 differs from step 1. How-ever, the method to calculate the values are the same for step 2 and 3. Firstit is necessary to apply the faults as in Figure 11:, one at a time, and mea-sure the residual currents and calculate the settings for step 2.

Figure 11: Example of fault cases between stations. Calculation of 3I0min for step 2 (and step 3).

Use the values for step 1 to calculate minimum residual current setting forstep 2. Similarly, use the values from step 2 to calculate the settings forstep 3.

visf_127.vsd

~ ~ZA ZBZ L

A B

Relay

I F

Fault


1.

2.

3I0B-A

3I0B-C

3I0B-D

A

B C

D


1MRK 580 350-XENPage 6 – 313

Version 2.2-00

The minimum current for step 2 is calculated from:

(Equation 9)

(Equation 10)

which then gives 3I0min as:

(Equation 11)

where:

is the safety factor

(Equation 12)

(Equation 13)

The currents to be found in figure 11

Note! The safety factor, , may be increased if there exist mutual cou-pling for the lines from B to C or D.

3.4 Step 4, non-directional To detect high resistive earth-faults, a low operate current is required. Onthe other hand, a low setting will increase the risk for unwanted operationdue to unbalance in the network and the current transformer circuits. Theminimum operate current of the earth-fault overcurrent protection must beset higher than the maximum false earth-fault current.

The unbalance in the network that causes false earth-fault currents iscaused mainly by untransposed or not fully transposed parallel lines withstrong zero-sequence mutual coupling. This false earth-fault current isdirectly proportional to the load current.

In well transposed systems, the false earth-fault current is normally lowerthan 5% of the line current, except for extremely short parallel lines (lessthan 5 km), where a higher false earth-fault current may occur.

In case of extremely short or not fully transposed parallel lines, the falseearth-fault current must be measured or calculated when maximum sensi-tivity is desired. Generally, 80 A is recommended as a minimum primaryoperate value for the earth-fault overcurrent protection.

3.5 Inverse time delay To achieve optimum selectivity, the same type of inverse characteristicshould be used for all earth-fault overcurrent protections in the network.Therefore, in networks already equipped with earth-fault overcurrentrelays, the best selectivity will normally be achieved by using the sametype of inverse characteristic as in the existing relays.

3I021 s a1 3I01B C–⋅ ⋅=

3I022 s a2 3I01B D–⋅ ⋅=

3I02min max 3I021 3I022( , )=

s 1,2=( )

a1

3I0B A–

3I0B A– 3I0B D–+--------------------------------------------=

az

3I0B A–

3I0B A– 3I0B C–+--------------------------------------------=

s


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 350-XENPage 6 – 314

The following formulas are valid for the inverse characteristics in thefour-step earth-fault protection in REx 5xx:

where:I is a multiple of set current 3I0>InvIB is the set base current of the terminalk is a time multiplying factor, setting range 0.05 - 1.10.

The determining factors for the inverse characteristic settings are theallowed fault clearing time at the maximum fault resistance to be covered,and the selectivity at maximum fault current.

The minimum operate current IN4> of the inverse current step can be setin the range of one to four times the set characteristic current IN>Inv.Hence, an inverse characteristic with a low set IN> to get short operatetime at minimum fault current can be combined with a higher set mini-mum operate current in order to avoid unwanted operation due to falseresidual currents.

The minimum operate time t4Min is set independent of the inverse timecharacteristic. This time is normally set longer than the time delay ofimpedance zone 2 in the line protections, in order to avoid interferencewith the impedance measuring system in case of earth-faults with moder-ate fault resistance within zone 2.

3.6 Directional current function

3.6.1 Polarising voltage The polarising voltage for directional earth-fault protection is normallyobtained from the broken delta connected secondary windings of instru-ment voltage transformers or interposing voltage transformers. The volt-age contains a certain amount of harmonics, especially when theprotection is connected to CVT’s.

Table 1: Inverse characteristic formulas

Characteristic: Operate time (s):




Logarithmic inverse (Equation 17)

t0 14,

I IB⁄( )0 02, 1–-------------------------------- k⋅=

t13 5,

I IB⁄( ) 1–------------------------ k⋅=

t80

I IB⁄( )2 1–-------------------------- k⋅=

t 5,8 1,35 I IB⁄( )ln⋅( )–=


1MRK 580 350-XENPage 6 – 315

Version 2.2-00

Due to the efficient band-pass filtering within REx 5xx, a polarising volt-age down to 0.5% of the rated voltage will provide correct directionalfunctioning. This is also valid when the protection is connected to CVT’s.

The minimum voltage to the protection (Umin) is calculated from the for-mula:

(Equation 18)

where:

is the minimum primary operate current

is the minimum zero-sequence sources impedance at the relay site

are the rated phase voltages of the broken delta connected volt-age transformers

3.6.2 Directional current setting

The operate value of the forward direction function (IN>Dir) should withsome margin be set lower than both:

• the operate current of the most sensitive directional step

• the lowest set current step which is used as input to the directional comparison logic.

Check according to the formula above that the necessary polarising volt-age is obtained for the directional function.

Observe that when the current reversal or weak-end-infeed logic is used,Ifmin represents the primary operate current of the reverse directional ele-ment.

To secure operation in unfavorable cases as well, Umin should be equal toat least 0.5 volts plus the maximum network frequency false voltage, dueto measuring errors in the VT circuits.

If not blocked, the directional comparator will operate during the deadtime in case of a single-phase auto-reclosure. Therefore, the blockinginput EF4-BLOCK should be activated during the single-phase auto-reclosing cycle.

3.7 Example of protection scheme

Due to the flexibility of the 4 step earth-fault protection, different protec-tion schemes according to the customers preference can be realised. Oneestablished scheme is to use I1 - I3 as directional steps and the inversetime delayed step I4 as a low set, non-directional back-up step.

A selectivity plan for the different current steps is presented in Figure 12:.

Umin IF min Z0 min

Usec

Uprim-------------⋅ ⋅=

IF min

U0min

Usec Uprim,


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 350-XENPage 6 – 316

Figure 12: Example of selectivity plan for the directional current steps.

In systems with 3-phase tripping from the distance relays in case of earth-faults, no time delay is normally used for step I1.

Step I2 is set to operate for all earth-faults on the entire line and at theremote end station, even with a certain additional fault resistance. The cal-culated minimum earth-fault current is multiplied with a safety factor of0.9 to get the current setting of step I2. The time delay of step I2 is nor-mally set to 0.4 s.

Step I2 shall also be selective to step I2 in the adjacent station, see Figure12:. It may, therefore, be necessary to compromise and accept a highercurrent setting than according to the above for the protection in station A.

Directional current step I3 is set to operate for earth-faults with additionalresistance or for the minimum current at which sufficient polarising volt-age is obtained. The time delay of step I3 is normally set to 0.8-1.5 s.

The inverse time delayed, non-directional step I4 is in this scheme used asa back-up function which shall trip the line in case of earth-faults with sohigh additional resistance that the directional steps cannot operate. Step I4is normally given the same setting for all lines in the network with atime/current characteristic that normally gives selectivity towards thedirectional steps.

Desirable values of the fault resistances for the different current steps are– ~ 15 Ω for RI2 , ~ 25 Ω for RI3 and ~ 50 Ω for RI4. If these values cannotbe fulfilled, another protection function should be considered.

Station B Station CStation A

time

I1I2

I3


1MRK 580 350-XENPage 6 – 317

Version 2.2-00

4 Secondary testingTo test the 4 step residual overcurrent protection including the directionalcheck logic, a test set with a variable current and a variable voltage out-put, as well as a variable phase angle between the current and voltage isrequired. Normally, the earth-fault protection functions are tested in con-junction with the testing of the distance protection functions, using thesame multiphase set. Figure 13: below shows the connection of a 3-phasetest set for testing of the directional earth-fault current steps.

The impedance measuring zones may need to be blocked, depending onthe zone settings, to prevent operation of the impedance function whenchecking the earth-fault protection.

Figure 13: Connection of the test set to the REx 5xx terminal.


If the communication logic and additional communication logic blocksfor earth-fault protections are included, those functions should be tested aswell. See respective document.

RE

x 5x

x

RE

LAY

TE

ST

SE

TL1I

L2I

L3I

NI

L1U

NU

IL1

IL2

IL3

IN (I4 alt. I5)

U4

TRIP L1

TRIP L2

TRIP L3

L2U

L3U


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 350-XENPage 6 – 318


4.1.1 Check of the direction measuring element

1. Set the polarising voltage to 0.5% of Ub and the phase angle betweenvoltage and current to 65°, the current lagging the voltage. Check thatthe operate current of the forward direction measuring element isequal to the setting IN>Dir. The function activates digital output EF4--STFW. Check with angles ϕ = 20° and ϕ = 110° that the measuringelement operates when 3I0 ⋅ cos (65° - ϕ) ≥ IN> Dir.

2. Reverse the polarising voltage (ϕ = 245°) and check that the operatecurrent of the reverse direction element is 0.6 ⋅ IN> Dir. The functionactivates digital output EF4--STRV.

4.1.2 Check of current steps I1, I2 and I3

Set the start current and the time delay of steps I1 – I3 according to thesetting plan.

4.1.3 Directional steps with setting “forward release”

1. Connect a polarising voltage 3U0 = 1% of Ub to the relay input. Thephase angle between voltage 3U0 and the current to the relay shall be65°. Check the start current of the directional current steps. The func-tion activates the corresponding digital output EF4--STINx (x = 1..3).When testing one step, the timers of the other steps are suitablyblocked by setting the Operation = Off.

2. For each current step, inject a current twice the set operate value andcheck the operate value of timers t1 – t3.

3. Reverse the polarising voltage and check that the directional currentsteps do not operate. Also check that the current steps are blockedwhen the EF4--BLOCK input is activated.

4.1.4 Current steps with setting “reverse blocking”

Check the operate value of the current steps and the timers with the for-ward direction element operated as described above. Check that trip isobtained without polarising voltage to the directional element and checkthat the steps are blocked when the reverse direction element is activated.

4.1.5 Non-directional current steps

Check non-directional steps in the same way as described above but with-out applying polarising voltage.

4.1.6 Current step I4 When definite time delay is selected (Characteristic = 0), step I4 is testedin the same way as steps I1 – I3 according to above. The definite timedelay is set on timer t4.

When inverse time delay is applied, make the appropriate setting of:


1MRK 580 350-XENPage 6 – 319

Version 2.2-00

• type of inverse characteristic• minimum operate current (IN4>)• minimum operate time (t4Min)• characteristic current for the inverse time delay (IN>Inv).

Set the timer t4 to zero. Check the minimum current function by increas-ing the current from a value slightly below the setting of IN4> until theEF4--STIN4 output operates. Check that with the same injection current,the time delay corresponds to the point where the line Imin intercepts theinverse characteristic, see Figure 6:.

Check that the operate time is equal to tmin when injecting the appropriatecurrent according to the inverse characteristic. Increase the current andcheck that the operate time remains unchanged.

Adjust the timer t4 if a constant time should be added to the inverse timeand check that the operate time is equal to the sum of tmin + t4 wheninjecting the increased current according to above.

4.2 Directional comparison logic

If communication logic for earth-fault protections is included, see thatdocument for further testing of the blocking and permissive schemes.If additional communication logic is included as well, see that documentfor testing of reversal current and weak-end-infeed (Trip/Echo).


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 350-XENPage 6 – 320

5 Directional testA directional test of the earth-fault protection function should always becarried out before the relay is taken into service. To carry out the test, theprotected line must be in service and carry some active current.

Simulation of an earth-fault is made as follows:Disconnect the phase L1 voltage from the VT broken delta. Short-circuitthe secondary winding of the CT in phase L3 and disconnect it from theterminal, see Figure 14:. An active load out in the direction of the line willgive a current to the earth-fault protection which lags the polarising volt-age by 60°. Since the characteristic angle of the protection is 65° degrees,a symmetrical load current will give operation of the forward directionmeasuring element when:

(Equation 19)

where:

(Equation 20)

(Equation 21)

P and Q are defined positive when the active and reactive power respec-tively is flowing out into the line and U is the primary phase voltage.

Iact 5°cos Ireact 5°sin IN Dir>≥+

Iact P 3U⁄=

Ireact Q 3U⁄=


1MRK 580 350-XENPage 6 – 321

Version 2.2-00

The reverse direction measuring element operates when:

Iact cos5° + Ireact sin5° ≥ IN>Dir is negative and the numerical value is≥ 0.6⋅IN>Dir.

Figure 14: Directional test of the 4-step residual protection function.

Note!! The current transformer in phase L3 must be short-circuited beforeit is disconnected from the terminal. The disconnected secondary windingof the VT should not be short-circuited. Reconnect the circuits when thedirectional test is completed.

UL1-IL3

Powerdirection

L1L2L3


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 350-XENPage 6 – 322

6 Appendix

6.1 Function blockEF4--

BLOCKBLKTRBC

TRIPTRIN1TRIN2TRIN3TRIN4

TRSOTFSTART

STIN1STIN2STIN3STIN4

STFWSTRV

2NDHARM


1MRK 580 350-XENPage 6 – 323

Version 2.2-00

6.2 Signal list


EF4-- BLOCK IN Block of earth-fault function

EF4-- BLKTR IN Block of trip from earth-fault function

EF4-- BC IN Breaker close command

EF4-- TRIP OUT Trip by 4-step earth-fault function

EF4-- TRIN1 OUT Trip by 4-step earth-fault function, step 1




EF4-- TRSOTF OUT Trip by earth-fault switch-onto-fault function

EF4-- START OUT Start earth-fault function

EF4-- STIN1 OUT Start earth-fault function step 1




EF4-- STFW OUT Start forward directional earth-fault element

EF4-- STRV OUT Start reverse directional earth-fault element

EF4-- 2NDHARM OUT Operation of 2nd harmonic detection


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 350-XENPage 6 – 324

6.3 Setting table


Operation 0-1 0 4-step earth-fault function, 0 = Off, 1 = On

IMeasured 0-1 0 Current signal used for earth-fault function, 0 = I4, 1 = I5

UMeasured 0-1 0 Voltage signal used for directional earth-fault function0 = U4, 1 = U1+U2+U3

Step1 0-6 0 Operation mode of step 1, 0 = Off1 = NonDirNonRestr2 = ForwRelease3 = Restrained4 = ForwRelRestr5 = RevBlock6 = RevBIRestr

IN1> 50-2500 % 30 Current operate level step 1, as a percentage of Ib. Ib is the same as selected for IMeasured above (I4b or I5b)

t1 0.000-60.000 s 0.000 Definite time delay step 1

Step2 0-6 0 Operation mode of step 2, see Step 1







Characteris-tic

0-4 0 Time delay operation step 40 = Def, 1 = NI, 2 = VI, 3 = EI, 4 = LOG

IN>Inv 4.0-110.0 % 50.0 Inverse time base current, as a percentage of Ib. Ib is the same as selected for IMeasured above (I4b or I5b)

k 0.05-1.10 0.05 Inverse time multiplier

IN4> 4.0-440.0 % 100.0 Operate current/inverse time min current step 4, as a percent-age of Ib. Ib is the same as selected for IMeasured above (I4b or I5b)

t4 0.000-60.000 s 0.000 Definite (inverse additional) time delay step 4

t4Min 0.000-60.000 s 0.000 Inverse time minimum delay step 4

IN> Dir 5-40 % 30 Forward direction base current, as a percentage of Ib. Ib is the same as selected for IMeasured above (I4b or I5b)

2ndHarmStab

0-1 0 Second harmonic restrain operation level0 = 20%, 1 = 32%

BlkPar-Transf

0-1 0 Blocking at parallel transformers0 = Off, 1 = On

SOTF 0-2 0 Switch-onto-fault operation0 = Off, 1 = IN2>, 2 = IN4>Res

t4U 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.000 Switch-onto-fault under-time

325Time delayed undervoltage protection

1 ApplicationUndervoltage protection prevents the sensitive elements, in many casesthe consumers of the electric energy, from running under conditions thatcould cause their overheating and thus shorten their life expectancy belowthe economical limits. In many cases, it is a useful tool in circuits for localor remote automation processes in the power system.

The time delayed undervoltage protection is an optional function in theREx 5xx terminals.

The use of the optional, built-in, fuse-failure supervision function can pre-vent unnecessary operation of the undervoltage protection during fuse-failure and during open line disconnector conditions.

2 Measuring principleThe voltage measuring elements within one of the built-in digital signalprocessors continuously measures the phase-to-earth voltages in all threephases. Recursive Fourier filter, filters the input voltage signals, and aseparate trip counter prevents high overreaching or underreaching of themeasuring elements.

1MRK 580 351-XEN


Time delayed undervoltage protection

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 351-XENPage 6 – 326

3 Design

3.1 Undervoltage protection

Figure 1: shows a simplified logic diagram of the undervoltage protectionfunction.

The trip output signal TUV--TRIP changes from logical 0 to logical 1 if atleast one of the signals TUV--STUL1N, TUV--STUL2N or TUV--STUL3N remains equal to logical 1 for a time longer than the set value onthe corresponding timer. The TUV--VTSU signal, that is normally con-nected to the fuse failure supervision function, can inhibit the operation ofthe undervoltage protection. Any external signal, connected to the TUV--BLOCK input also blocks the operation of the undervoltage protection.Trip output signal TUV--TRIP is blocked by any signal connected toTUV--BLKTR input.

Figure 1: Undervoltage protection — simplified logic diagram

4 SettingThe parameters for the undervoltage protection are set on the local HMIunder the menu:

SettingsFunctions

Group n (n = 1...4)TimeDelayUV

TUV--BLKTR

TUV--BLOCK

TUV--TEST

Block TUV=Yes

TUV--STUL1N

TUV--STUL2N

TUV--STUL3N

&

>1 & t TUV--TRIP

TUV--START

TUV--STL1

TUV--STL2

TUV--STL3

TEST

TUV--VTSU

>1

&

&

&

058.vsd


1MRK 580 351-XENPage 6 – 327

Version 2.2-00

All the voltage conditions in the system where the undervoltage protec-tion performs its functions should be considered.. The same also appliesto the associated equipment, its voltage and time characteristic.

5 TestingThe function can be disabled during testing mode under the followingconditions:


TestTestMode

BlockFunctions


• Set the terminal into operational testing mode by setting the value of the Operation = On parameter. Select the operate mode under the submenu:

TestTestMode

Operation


Important!! The function is blocked if the corresponding setting underthe BlockFunctions menu remains on, and the TEST-INPUT signalremains active.

The operation of the undervoltage protection should be checked duringcommissioning and during regular maintenance tests. ABB Network Part-ner recommends, although it does not absolutely request, the use ofRTS 21 (FREJA) testing equipment for secondary injection testing.

The corresponding binary signals that indicate the operation of the under-voltage protection function can be found on the local HMI under themenu:


TimeDelayUV

The signals can also be observed using the SM/REX 500 module in SMSand the configuration tool CAP/REx 500.

The appendix describes the corresponding signals that display informa-tion about the operation of the voltage protections.

The following steps should be followed when testing the undervoltageprotection:


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 351-XENPage 6 – 328

1 Connect the three-phase testing equipment to the tested terminalaccording to the valid connection diagram. Check if the TUV--TRIPoutput signal (see Figure 1:) is configured to the correspondingbinary output of the tested terminal. If not, configure it for the testingpurposes. Set the corresponding time delay at 0.Make sure that noblocking signal (TUV--BLOCK; TUV--BLKTR; TUV--VTSU) isactive.

2 Set the three-phase voltages to their rated values. Slowly decreasethe voltage in one of the phases, until the TUV--TRIP signal changesto logical 1. Note the operate value and compare it with the set value.The result should be within the +5% of the expected operate valueplus the accuracy class of the testing equipment. Check that thephase indication is correct. Increase the measured voltage to ratedoperate conditions.

3 Repeat the measurement for the other two phases.

4 Instantaneously decrease the voltage in one-phase to a value about20% lower than the measured operate value. Measure the operatetime of the voltage measuring element. For timer stop, use theTRUV--TRIP signal. Increase the measured voltage to rated operateconditions.

5 Set the time delay on the corresponding timer to the actual settingvalue. Instantaneously decrease the voltage to about 20% lowervalue than the measured operate value in one-phase. Measure thetime delay for the TUV--TRIP signal, and compare it with the setvalue (consider the measured operate time from the previous item).Increase the measured voltage to rated operate conditions.

6 Connect the rated auxiliary voltage to the TUV--BLOCK binary input(if not configured, configure it for the testing purposes), and disconnectone phase voltage from the terminal. No operation of the undervoltageprotection must occur, i.e. not even the start signals should operate. Dis-connect the voltage from the binary input, which is configured to theTUV--BLOCK function input.

7 Repeat the procedure also for the TUV--BLKTR function. In thiscase the trip signal TUV--TRIP must not operate, while the appro-priate start signals should operate.

8 Check that the connection to TUV--VTSU is properly configured, ifthe fuse-failure function is installed in the terminal. Activate thefuse-failure supervision function and disconnect one of the phasevoltages from the terminal. The undervoltage protection must notoperate.

9 Disconnect the voltages from the tested terminal. Do not forget to re-configure the terminal to its normal operate configuration, if neces-sary.


1MRK 580 351-XENPage 6 – 329

Version 2.2-00

6 Appendix

6.1 Function block

6.2 Signal list

6.3 Setting table

TIME DELAYED UNDERVOLTAGE PROTECTION

UPE <, tTUV--BLOCKTUV--BLKTRTUV--VTSU

TUV--TRIPTUV--STARTTUV--STL1TUV--STL2TUV--STL3


TUV-- BLOCK IN Block undervoltage function

TUV-- BLKTR IN Block of trip from time delayed undervoltage function

TUV-- VTSU IN Block from voltage transformer circuit supervision

TUV-- TRIP OUT Trip by time delayed undervoltage function

TUV-- START OUT Start phase undervoltage

TUV-- STL1 OUT Start phase undervoltage phase L1




Operation Off, On Off Undervoltage function On/Off.

UPE< 10-100 % 70 Operate phase voltage, as a percentage of U1b

t 0.000-60.000 s 0.000 Time delay


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 351-XENPage 6 – 330

331Time delayed overvoltage and residual overvoltage protection

1 ApplicationThe application areas of the overvoltage protection functions are differentin distribution and transmission networks.

The overvoltage protection is used to protect the equipment and its insula-tion against overvoltage. In this way it prevents damage to the equipmentin the power system and shortening of their life time.

The residual overvoltage protection function is mainly used in distributionnetworks, primarily as a back-up protection for the residual overcurrentprotection in the line feeders. This to secure disconnection of earth-faults.

The time delayed overvoltage protection and the time delayed residualovervoltage protection are both optional functions in the REx 5xx termi-nals, and can be combined or separately ordered.

1MRK 580 352-XEN



Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 352-XENPage 6 – 332

2 Measuring principlesThe voltage measuring elements within one of the built-in digital signalprocessors (DSPs) continuously measure the phase-to-earth voltages in allthree phases and the residual voltage (ST3U0) from the three phases.Recursive Fourier filter filters the input voltage signals and a separate tripcounter prevents high overreaching or underreaching of the measuringelements.

2.1 Design Figure 1: shows a simplified logic diagram of the overvoltage protectionfunction. The time delayed residual overvoltage protection and the timedelayed overvoltage protection share some input signals and logical ele-ments. For this reason and for the sake of better overview both the protec-tions are shown in the figure.

Figure 1: Time delayed overvoltage protection — simplified logic dia-gram.

The TOV--TRIP (and TOV--TRPE and/or TOV--TRN) output signalchanges from logical 0 to logical 1 if at least one of the logical signalsTOV--STUL1N, TOV--STUL2N, TOV--STUL3N or TOV--ST3U0remains equal to logical 1 for a time longer than the set value on the corre-sponding timer. Also the signals TOV--TRPE or TOV--TRN will be high,to indicate which protection that caused the trip.

TOV--ST3UO

TOV--BLKTR

TOV--BLOCK

TOV--TEST

Block TOV=Yes

TOV--STUL1N

TOV--STUL2N

TOV--STUL3N

&

& &

>1

>1

>1

& t

t

TOV--TRIP

TOV--STN

TOV--TRN

TOV--TRPE

TOV--STPE

TOV--STL1

TOV--STL2

TOV--STL3

TEST

Residual overvoltage protection

&

&

&

visf_266.vsd


1MRK 580 352-XENPage 6 – 333

Version 2.2-00

Any signal connected to the TOV--BLOCK input blocks the operation ofthe time delayed overvoltage protection. Similarly any signal connected toTOV--BLKTR will block the trip output from the time delayed overvolt-age protection.

3 Setting

3.1 Time delayed overvoltage protection

The time delayed overvoltage protection parameters can be set on thelocal HMI under the menu:

SettingsFunctions

Group n (n = 1...4)TimeDelayOV

All the voltage conditions in the system where the overvoltage protectionperforms its functions must be considered. The same also applies to theassociated equipment, its voltage-time characteristic.

The overvoltage protection should be set higher than the expected maxi-mum system operate voltage that is in a particular part of a network. Asafety margin of at least 10% should also be considered due to the inaccu-racies in the instrument transformers, calculation methods, and the inac-curacy of the measuring elements in the terminal.

3.2 Time delayed residual overvoltage protection

The time delayed residual overvoltage protection parameters can be set onthe local HMI under the menu:

SettingsFunctions

Group n (n = 1...4)TimeDelayOV

All the voltage conditions in the system where the residual overvoltageprotection performs its functions must be considered. The same alsoapplies to the associated equipment, its voltage-time characteristic.

The residual overvoltage protection should be set higher than the expectedmaximum system operate voltage that is in a particular part of a network.A safety margin of at least 10% should also be considered due to the inac-curacies in the instrument transformers, calculation methods, and theinaccuracy of the measuring elements in the terminal.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 352-XENPage 6 – 334

4 Testing

4.1 Time delayed overvoltage protection

The function can be disabled during testing mode under the followingconditions:


TestTestMode

BlockFunctions


• Set the terminal into operational testing mode by setting the value of the Operation = On parameter. Select the operate mode under the submenu:

TestTestMode

Operation


Important!! The function is blocked if the corresponding setting underthe BlockFunctions menu remains on, and the TEST--INPUT signalremains active.

The operation of the overvoltage protection should be checked duringcommissioning and during regular maintenance tests. ABB Network Part-ner recommends, although it does not absolutely request, the use ofRTS 21 (FREJA) testing equipment for secondary injection testing.

The corresponding binary signals that indicate the operation of the over-voltage protection function can be found on the local HMI under themenu:


TimeDelayOV

The status of the signals can also be checked using the SM/REx 500 mod-ule in SMS and with the CAP/REx 500 configuration tool.

The appendix describes the corresponding signals that display informa-tion about the operation of the overvoltage protection.

The following steps should be followed when testing the overvoltage pro-tection:


1MRK 580 352-XENPage 6 – 335

Version 2.2-00

1 Connect the three-phase testing equipment to the tested terminalaccording to its valid connection diagram. Check that the TOV--TRIP and TOV--TRPE logical signals (see Figure 1:) are configuredto the corresponding binary output of the terminal. If not, configureit for the testing purposes. The signals will be used for time mea-surement. Make sure that no blocking signal (TOV--BLKTR, TOV--BLOCK) is active.Set the operation time delay of the function to 0.

2 Slowly increase the voltage in one of the phases, until the TOV--TRIP and/or TOV--TRPE signal changes to logical 1. Note theoperate value and compare it with the set value. The result should bewithin +5% of the expected value with the addition of the accuracyclass of the testing equipment. Check that correct phase is indicatedby observing TOV--STL1, TOV--STL2 and TOV--STL3 sig-nals.Reduce the measured voltage to zero.

3 Repeat the measurement for the other two phases phase by phase.

4 Set the time delay on the corresponding timer at the actual settingvalue. Apply about 20% higher voltage than the measured operatevalue for one-phase. Measure the time delay for the TOV--TRIP orTOV--TRPE signal and compare it with the set value (consider themeasured operate time from the previous item).

5 Check that no instantaneous or delayed function (start or trip signal)occurs when the TOV--BLOCK signal is activated.

6 Check that no delayed function (trip signal!) occurs when the TOV--BLKTR logical signal is active.

4.2 Time delayed residual overvoltage protection

When the function should be blocked during testing, select the functionand set BlockTOV to Yes under the menu:

TestTestMode

BlockFunctions

The function can be disabled during testing mode under either of the fol-lowing conditions:

• The terminal is set into test mode by setting the Operation=On under the menu:

TestTestMode

Operation

• The terminal is switched into test mode by applying a logical 1 to the TEST-INPUT functional input.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 352-XENPage 6 – 336

Important!! The function is blocked if the corresponding setting underthe BlockFunctions menu remains on, and the TEST-INPUT signalremains active.

The operation of the residual overvoltage protection should be checkedduring commissioning and during regular maintenance tests.ABB Network Partner recommends, although it does not absolutelyrequest, the use of RTS 21 (FREJA) testing equipment for secondaryinjection testing.

The corresponding binary signals that indicate the operation of the resid-ual overvoltage protection function can be found on the local HMI underthe menu:


TimeDelayOV

The status of the signals can also checked using the SM/REx 500 modulein SMS and with the CAP/REx 500 configuration tool.

The appendix describes the corresponding signals that display informa-tion about the operation of the residual overvoltage protection.

The following steps should be followed when testing the residual over-voltage protection:

1 Connect the testing equipment to the tested terminal according to itsvalid connection diagram. Check that the TOV--TRIP and TOV--TRN logical signals (see Figure 1:) are configured to the corre-sponding binary output of the terminal. If not, configure them forthe testing purposes. The signals will be used for time measurement.Make sure that no blocking signal (TOV--BLKTR, TOV--BLOCK)is active. Set the operation time delay of the function to 0.

2 Slowly increase the voltage, until the TOV--TRIP and TOV--TRNsignal changes to logical 1. Note the operate value and compare itwith the set value. The result should be within +5% of the expectedvalue with the addition of the accuracy class of the testing equip-ment. Check that the TOV--STN signal is indicated. Reduce thevoltage to zero.

3 Set the time delay on the corresponding timer at the actual settingvalue. Apply about 20% higher voltage than the measured operatevalue. Measure the time delay for the TOV--TRIP or TOV--TRNsignal and compare it with the set value (consider the measuredoperate time from the previous item).

4 Check that no output (no instantaneous or delayed function) occurswhen the TOV--BLOCK signal is activated.

5 Check that no trip output (no delayed function) occurs when theTOV--BLKTR logical signal is active.


1MRK 580 352-XENPage 6 – 337

Version 2.2-00

5 Appendix

5.1 Function block

COMMON FUNCTIONS AND SIGNALS

TOV--BLOCKTOV--BLKTR

TOV--TRIP

TIME DELAYED RESIDUAL OVERVOLTAGE PROT:

TOV--TRNTOV--STN

3U0>, t

TIME DELAYED OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION

TOV--TRPETOV--STPETOV--STL1TOV--STL2TOV--STL3

UPE>, t


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 352-XENPage 6 – 338

5.2 Signal list

5.3 Setting table

Table 1:


TOV-- BLOCK IN Block of time delayed overvoltage function

TOV-- BLKTR IN Block of tri from time delayed overvoltage function

TOV-- TRIP OUT

TOV-- TRN OUT Trip by residual overvoltage

TOV-- TRPE OUT Trip by phase overvoltage function

TOV-- STN OUT Start residual overvoltage

TOV-- STPE OUT Start phase overvoltage

TOV-- STL1 OUT Start phase overvoltage phase L1



Table 2:


Operation Off, On Off Overvoltage function On/Off.

UPE> 50-200 % 120 Operate phase voltage, as a percentage of U1b

t 0.000-60.000 s 0.000 Time delay phase voltage function

3U0> 5-100 % 30 Operate neutral voltage, as a percentage of U1b

t 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.000 Time delay neutral voltage function

339Broken conductor check

1 ApplicationConventional protections today can not detect the broken conductor con-dition. In REx 5xx terminals this detection is achieved through the brokenconductor check function (BRC), consisting in a continuous currentunsymmetry check on the line where the terminal is connected. The detec-tion might also concern possible interruptions in the connecting circuitsbetween the instrument current transformers and the terminal.

2 Theory of operationThe current-measuring elements continuously measure the three-phasecurrents. The current unsymmetry signal STI is set to 1 if :

• Any phase current is lower than 80% of the highest current in the remaining two phases

• The highest phase current is greater than the minimum setting value IP>

If the unsymmetrical detection lasts for a period longer than the set time t,a three phase trip signal BRC--TRIP is emitted.

3 DesignThe simplified logic diagram of the broken conductor check function isshown in figure 1.


• The terminal is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been blocked from the HMI (BlockBRC=Yes)

• The input signal BRC--BLOCK is high

The BRC--BLOCK signal is a blocking signal of the broken conductorcheck function. It can be connected to a binary input of the terminal inorder to receive a block command from external devices or can be soft-ware connected to other internal functions of the terminal itself in order toreceive a block command from internal functions. Through OR gate it canbe connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs.

The output trip signal BRC--TRIP is a three phase trip. It can be used tocommand a trip to the circuit breaker or for a signallization.

1MRK 580 354-XEN


Broken conductor check

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 354-XENPage 6 – 340

Figure 1: Simplified logic diagram of broken conductor check function

4 Setting instructionsThe setting of the operating values for the broken conductor check func-tion occurs under the menu:

SettingsFunctions

Group n (n = 1...4)BrokenConduct

The minimum operating current is usually set to about 15% of the ratedprotected line current.

The time delay must comply with the selectivity planning of the protec-tion in the whole network if the function is used for tripping the circuitbreaker. The time delay might be longer if the function is intended foralarming purposes.


4.1 Setting of minimum operating current IP>

If the rated current of the protected line is , then the primary set value will be:

(Equation 1)


(Equation 2)


BRC--BLOCKBRC--TRIP

visf_180.vsd

Function Enable

BRC - BROKEN CONDUCTOR CHECK FUNCTION

TEST-ACTIVE

&

TEST

BlockBRC = Yes

>1

STI

&

UnsymmetricalCurrent Detection

t

t

IL

IsPRIM

IsPRIM 0 15, IL⋅=

IsSEC

IsSEC

ISEC

IPRIM------------- IsPRIM⋅=

ISEC IPRIM

Broken conductor check 1MRK 580 354-XENPage 6 – 341

Version 2.2-00


(Equation 3)



SettingsFunctions

Group nBrokenConduct

on the value IP>.

Note: Usually is chosen to be 1.4 times the rated line current( ) and is set to the relay rated current, equal to the sec-ondary rated current of the main CT ( ). So it is obtained:

(Equation 4)

(Equation 5)

This is why the default setting for IP> is 10%.

4.2 Setting of time delay t Set the time delay of the function, t, under the setting menu:

SettingsFunctions

Group nBrokenConduct

on the value t.

I1b

IP>IsSEC

I1b-------------- 100⋅=

IPRIM

IPRIM 1,4 I⋅ L= I1b

I1b ISEC=

IP>

ISEC

IPRIM------------- IsPRIM⋅

I1b---------------------------------- 100⋅=

IP>

ISEC

1,4 I⋅ L----------------- 0 15, IL⋅ ⋅

ISEC------------------------------------------- 100⋅

10,7 %==


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 354-XENPage 6 – 342



TestTestMode

BlockFunctions• The terminal is set to test mode by setting the Operation=On, which

occurs under the menu:

TestTestMode

Operation• The terminal is automatically set to test mode by applying the logical

1 to the TEST-INPUT functional input.


The broken conductor check function must not be blocked in order to betested.



Follow these steps:

1.1 Check if the input and output logical signals in figure 1 are config-ured to the corresponding binary inputs and outputs of the testedterminal. If not, configure them for testing purposes. Set the opera-tion of the BRC protection to On mode.

1.2 Set the input logical signals to the logical zero and note on the localHMI that the BRC--TRIP logical signal is equal to the logical 0.Values of the logical signals belonging to the broken conductorcheck function are available under menu tree:


BrokenConductFuncOutputs

Broken conductor check 1MRK 580 354-XENPage 6 – 343

Version 2.2-00

1.3 Set the time delay t to 0.0 ms and the minimum operating currentIP> to 10% of the relay rated current.

1.4 Apply one phase current at a time to the current inputs of the REx5xx terminal until the signal BRC--TRIP appears on the corre-sponding binary output or on the local HMI unit.

1.5 Measure the smallest operating value among the three phases andcompare it with the expected value IP>.

1.6 Apply a symmetrical three phase current (Itest) of 40% of the relayrated current to the current inputs of the REx 5xx terminal.Decrease one current phase at a time until the signal BRC--TRIPappears on the corresponding binary output or on the local HMIunit.

1.7 Measure the three operating values and compare the highest onewith the expected value. The expected value is 80% of the appliedcurrent Itest. Switch off the current

1.8 Set the time delay time t to 500 ms.

1.9 Apply a symmetrical three phase current (Itest) of 40% of the relayrated current to the current inputs of the REx 5xx terminal. Turn offthe current injection in phase L1 (IL1=0, IL2=Itest, IL3=Itest).Measure the operation time as from current surge until the signalBRC--TRIP appears on the corresponding binary output or on thelocal HMI unit. Compare the measured value with the set value t.Switch off the current.

2.0 Connect the rated dc voltage to the BRC--BLOCK configured binary inputand apply a symmetrical three phase current (Itest) of 40% of therelay rated current to the current inputs of the REx 5xx terminal.Turn off the current injection in phase L1 (IL1=0, IL2=Itest,IL3=Itest). No BRC--TRIP signal should appear. Switch off the current.Disconnect the dc voltage from the BRC--BLOCK binary input.

2.1 Set the operation of the protection at Off mode and apply a sym-metrical three phase current (Itest) of 40% of the relay rated currentto the current inputs of the REx 5xx terminal. Note that nocorresponding binary signals should appear on the terminal. Switchoff the current.



Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 354-XENPage 6 – 344

6 Appendix

6.1 Function block


6.3 Signal list

6.4 Setting table

BRC--BLOCK BRC--TRIP

BROKEN CONDUCTOR CHECK

visf_181.vsd

BRC--BLOCKBRC--TRIP

visf_182.vsd

BRC - BROKEN CONDUCTOR CHECK FUNCTION

TEST-ACTIVE

&

TEST

BlockBRC = Yes

>1

STI

& t

t


BRC-- BLOCK IN Block of broken conductor function

BRC-- TRIP OUT Trip by broken conductor function


Operation Off, On Off Broken conductor function On/Off


t 0.000-60.000 s 20.000 Time delay

345Loss of voltage check

1 ApplicationThe trip of the circuit breaker at a prolonged loss of voltage at all the threephases is normally used in automatic restoration systems to facilitate thesystem restoration after a major blackout. The loss of voltage check func-tion gives a trip signal only if the voltage in all the three phases is low formore then 7 seconds. If the trip to the circuit breaker is not required, thanthe function can be used for signallization through an output contact orthrough the event recording function.

2 Theory of operationThe voltage-measuring elements continuously measure the three-phase-to-phase voltages and three-phase-to-earth voltages, and compare themwith the set values. Fourier’s recursive filter filters the voltage signals, anda separate trip counter prevents overreaching of the measuring elements.

The logical values of the following signals become equal to 1, if therelated phase measured voltage decrease under the pre-set value:

• STUL1N for UL1N voltage



The 150 ms output trip pulse is emitted if all the three phase voltages arebelow the setting value for more than 7 s. The function can be blockedfrom the fuse failure supervision function intervention and when the maincircuit breaker is opened.

3 DesignThe simplified logic diagram of the stub protection function is shown infigure 1.


• The terminal is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been blocked from the HMI (BlockLOV=Yes)

• The input signal LOV--BLOCK is high

The LOV--BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the lossof voltage check function. It can be connected to a binary input of the ter-minal in order to receive a block command from external devices or canbe software connected to other internal functions of the terminal itself inorder to receive a block command from internal functions. Through ORgate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal function out-puts.

The function has a particular internal latched enable logic that:

• enables the function (signal latched enable in figure 1 is set to 1) when the line is restored; i.e. at least one of the three voltages is high for more then 3 seconds (signal set enable in figure 1).

1MRK 580 355-XEN


Loss of voltage check

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 355-XENPage 6 – 346

• disables the function (signal latched enable in figure 1 is set to 0) if the signal reset enable in figure 1 is set to 1 (reset of latced enable signal).

The latched enable signal is reset (i.e. the function is blocked) if:

• the main circuit breaker is opened. This is achieved by connecting a N.C. contact of the main circuit breaker to a terminal binary input connected to the function input LOV--BC

• the fuse failure supervision function has tripped. This is achieved by connecting the output signal of the fuse failure supervision, FUSE-VTSU, to the function input LOV--VTSU

• not all the three phase voltages are low for more then 10 s (only one or two phase voltages are low).

The output trip signal of the voltage check function is LOV--TRIP.

Figure 1: Simplified logic diagram of loss of voltage check protection function

LOV--BLOCK

LOV--TRIPFunction Enable

LOV - LOSS OF VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION

TEST-ACTIVE

&

TEST

BlockLOV = Yes

>1

STUL1N

STUL2N

STUL3N

LOV--VTSU

t

7 s 150 ms

&

LOV--BC

&

>1 t

10 s

&

only 1 or 2 phases are low forat least 10 s (not three)

>1 &

>1 t

3 s

Reset Enable

Set Enable>1

Line restored forat least 3 s

-loop

LatchedEnable

visf_160.vsd

Loss of voltage check 1MRK 580 355-XENPage 6 – 347

Version 2.2-00

4 Setting instructionsThe setting parameters are accessible through the HMI. The parametersfor the loss of voltage function are found in the HMI-tree under:

SettingsFunctions

Group 1,2,3 and 4LossOfVoltage


The low voltage primary setting should be lower than the minimum sys-tem operating voltage, Umin. Consider an additional 10% for safety mar-gin.

The primary set value will be:

(Equation 1)


(Equation 2)

where is the secondary rated voltage of the main VT and isthe primary rated voltage of the main VT.

The relay setting value UPE< is given in percentage of the secondary basevoltage value, , associated to the voltage transformer input U1. Thevalue for UPE< is given from this formula:

(Equation 3)




TestTestMode

BlockFunctions


TestTestMode

Operation

• The terminal is automatically set to test mode by applying the logical

UsPRIM

UsPRIM 0,9 Umin⋅=

UsSEC

UsSEC

USEC

UPRIM---------------- UsPRIM⋅=

USEC UPRIM

U1b

UPE<UsSEC

U1b----------------- 100⋅=


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 355-XENPage 6 – 348

1 to the TEST-INPUT functional input.


The loss of voltage check protection function must not be blocked in orderto be tested.

Check the operating values of the voltage measuring elements and corre-sponding functions during the commissioning and during regular mainte-nance tests. ABB Network Partner recommends, although it is not anabsolute requirement, the use of the RTS 21 (FREJA) testing equipmentfor secondary injection-testing purposes.

Before testing, connect the testing equipment according to the valid termi-nal diagram of the specific REx 5xx terminal. Pay special attention to thecorrect connection of the input and output voltage terminals.

Follow these steps:

1.1 Check if the input and output logical signals in figure 1 are config-ured to the corresponding binary inputs and outputs of the testedterminal. If not, configure them for testing purposes. Set the opera-tion of the LOV protection to On mode.

1.2 Set the input logical signals LOV--BLOCK, LOV--BC, LOV--VTSU to the logical zero. Supply a three phase rated voltage in allthree phases and note on the local HMI that the LOV--TRIP logicalsignal is equal to the logical 0. Values of the logical signals belong-ing to the loss of voltage protection are available under menu tree:


LossOfVoltageFuncOutputs

1.3 Suddenly disconnect the voltage in all three phases and observe theLOV--TRIP pulse signal: after 7 seconds it should appear to theHMI. Its duration should be about 150 ms.

1.4 Increase the measured voltages to their rated values and decreasethem again to zero within an interval shorter than 3 seconds. NoLOV--TRIP signal should appear.

1.5 Increase the measured voltages to their rated values for at least 10seconds. Instantaneously disconnect one phase and after an intervallonger than 10 seconds, also disconnect the remaining two phases.No LOV--TRIP signal should appear.


Version 2.2-00

1.6 Increase the measured voltages to their rated values for at least tenseconds. Apply the rated dc voltage to the binary input connected tothe function input LOV--BC. Simultaneously disconnect all thethree phase voltages from the terminal. No LOV--TRIP signalshould appear. Disconnect the dc voltage from the LOV--BC input.

1.8 Increase the measured voltages to their rated values for at least tenseconds. Apply the rated dc voltage to the binary input connected tothe function input LOV--VTSU. Simultaneously disconnect all thethree phase voltages from the terminal. No LOV--TRIP signalshould appear. Disconnect the dc voltage from the LOV--VTSUinput.

1.9 Increase the measured voltages to their rated values for at least tenseconds. Apply the rated dc voltage to the binary input connected tothe function input LOV--BLOCK. Simultaneously disconnect allthe three phase voltages from the terminal. No LOV--TRIP signalshould appear. Disconnect the dc voltage from the LOV--BLOCKinput


6 Appendix

6.1 Function block

LOV--BLOCK

LOSS OF VOLTAGE CHECK

visf_161.vsd

LOV--VTSU

LOV--TRIP

LOV--BC


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 355-XENPage 6 – 350


LOV--BLOCK

LOV--TRIP

LOV - LOSS OF VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION

TEST-ACTIVE

&

TEST

BlockLOV = Yes

>1

STUL1N

STUL2N

STUL3N

LOV--VTSU

t

7 s 150 ms

&

LOV--BC

&

>1 t

10 s

&

>1 &

>1 t

3 s

Reset Enable

Set Enable>1

-loop

visf_162.vsd


Version 2.2-00

6.3 Signal list

6.4 Setting table


LOV-- BLOCK IN Block of loss of voltage function

LOV-- VTSU IN Block from voltage circuit supervision

LOV-- BC IN Breaker closing command

LOV-- TRIP OUT Trip by loss of voltage function


Operation Off, On Off Loss of voltage function On/Off

UPE< 10-100 % 70 Operating phase voltage, as a percentage of U1b


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 355-XENPage 6 – 352

353Overload supervision

1 ApplicationThe overload supervision function sends an alarm signal when the currentexceeds the set level for longer than a pre-set time. The operating level ofthe current measuring element can be set to the maximum, accepted, con-tinuous current. So operators are alerted if the primary system operates ina dangerous overload mode. A typical application is the signalling of theoverload of the current transformers connected to the terminal, as theyusually can withstand a small current beyond their rated current.

2 Theory of operationThe current-measuring elements continuously measure the three-phasecurrents, and compare them with the set values. Fourier’s recursive filterfilters the current signals, and a separate trip counter prevents overreach-ing of the measuring elements.

The logical values of the following signals become equal to 1, if the mea-sured current in any phase exceeds the pre-set value:

• STIL1• STIL2• STIL3

If any of the three phase currents exceeds the set value IP> for a periodlonger than the set time t, than the three phase trip signal OVLD-TRIP isemitted.

3 DesignThe simplified logic diagram of the time delayed phase overcurrent func-tion is shown in figure 1.


• The terminal is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been blocked from the HMI (BlockOVLD=Yes)

• The input signal OVLD-BLOCK is high

The OVLD-BLOCK signal is a blocking signal of the overload supervi-sion function. It can be connected to a binary input of the terminal in orderto receive a block command from external devices or can be software con-nected to other internal functions of the terminal itself in order to receive ablock command from internal functions. Through OR gate it can be con-nected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs.

The output trip signal OVLD-TRIP is a three phase trip. It can be used tocommand a trip to the circuit breaker or for a signallization.

1MRK 580 356-XEN


Overload supervision

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 356-XENPage 6 – 354

Figure 1: Simplified logic diagram of overload supervision function

4 Setting instructionsThe setting of the operating values for the overload supervision function-occurs under the menu:

SettingsFunctions

Group n (n = 1...4)OverLoad

The current level set should be above the maximum permissible load cur-rent. Consider the accuracy class of the used instrument current trans-formers and the specified accuracy of the current measuring elements inthe REx 5xx terminals.

The corresponding time delay must comply with the selectivity planningof the protection in the whole network, and with the permissible overload-ing of the conductors, if the function is used for tripping the circuitbreaker. The above settings might change to a lower current value andhigher time delay if the function serves only for alarming and not for trip-ping purposes.

4.1 Setting of operating current IP>

The relay setting value IP> is given in percentage of the secondary basecurrent value, , associated to the current transformer input I1.

OVLD-BLOCK

visf_170.vsd

OVLD - OVERLOAD SUPERVISION FUNCTION

TEST-ACTIVE

&

TEST

BlockOVLD = Yes

>1

STIL1

STIL2

STIL3

OVLD-TRIP>1 t

t

Function Enable

&

I1b

Overload supervision 1MRK 580 356-XENPage 6 – 355

Version 2.2-00

If is the secondary current setting operating value of the function,then the relay setting value IP> is given from this formula:

(Equation 1)



SettingsFunctions

Group nOverLoad

on the value IP>.

4.2 Setting of time delay t Set the time delay of the function, t, under the setting menu:

SettingsFunctions

Group nOverLoad

on the value t.



TestTestMode

BlockFunctions


TestTestMode

Operation



IsSEC

IP>IsSEC

I1b-------------- 100⋅=


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 356-XENPage 6 – 356

The overload supervision function must not be blocked in order to betested.



Follow these steps:

1.1 Check if the input and output logical signals in figure 1 are config-ured to the corresponding binary inputs and outputs of the testedterminal. If not, configure them for testing purposes. Set the opera-tion of the OVLD protection to On mode.

1.2 Set the input logical signals to the logical zero and note on the localHMI that the OVLD-TRIP logical signal is equal to the logical 0.Values of the logical signals belonging to the time delayed overcur-rent protection are available under menu tree:


OverLoadFuncOutputs

1.3 Set the time delay t to 0.0 ms.

1.4 Slowly increase the injected current (measured current) in all threephases simultaneously until the OVLD-TRIP signal appears on thecorresponding binary output or on the local HMI. Record the oper-ating value. Compare the measured operating current with the setvalue. The result should be within the 5% accuracy limits with theaddition of the accuracy class of the testing equipment.

1.5 Set the time delay t to 500 ms.

1.6 Quickly set the measured current (fault current) in all three phasesto about 1.5 times the measured operating current, and disconnectthe current with the switch.

1.7 Switch on the fault current and measure the operating time of theOVLD protection. Use the OVLD-TRIP signal from the configuredbinary output to stop the timer. Compare the measured time withthe set value t.

Overload supervision 1MRK 580 356-XENPage 6 – 357

Version 2.2-00

1.8 Connect the rated dc voltage to the OVLD-BLOCK configured binaryinput, and switch on the fault current. No OVLD-TRIP signal shouldappear. Switch off the fault current. Disconnect the dc voltage from theOVLD-BLOCK binary input.

1.9 Set the operation of the protection at Off mode and switch on thefault current. Note that no corresponding binary signals shouldappear on the terminal. Switch off the fault current.


6 Appendix

6.1 Function block


OVLD-BLOCK

OVERLOAD SUPERVISION

visf_171.vsd

OVLD-TRIP

OVLD-BLOCK

visf_172.vsd

OVLD - OVERLOAD SUPERVISION FUNCTION

TEST-ACTIVE

&

TEST

BlockOVLD = Yes

>1

STIL1

STIL2

STIL3

OVLD-TRIP

>1t

t&


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 356-XENPage 6 – 358

6.3 Signal list

6.4 Setting table


OVLD- BLOCK IN Block of overload function

OVLD- TRIP OUT Trip by overload function


Operation Off, On Off Overload function On/Off


t 0.000-9000.000

s 20.000 Time delay

359Current circuit supervision

1 ApplicationThe correct operation of a protection depends on correct informationabout the primary value of currents and voltages. When currents from twoindependent 3-phase sets of CT’s, or CT cores, measuring the same pri-mary currents are available, a reliable current circuit supervision can bearranged by comparing the currents from the two sets. If an error in theCT circuits is detected, the protection functions concerned are to beblocked and an alarm given.

In case of large currents, unequal transient saturation of CT cores with dif-ferent remanence or different saturation factor may result in differences inthe secondary currents from the two CT sets. Unwanted blocking of pro-tection functions during the transient period must be avoided.

The supervision function must be sensitive and have short operate time toprevent unwanted tripping from fast-acting, sensitive numerical protec-tions in case of errors in the current circuits.

Note that the same current input transformer (I5) in REx 5xx is used forthe reference current Iref of the CT supervision, the residual current fromthe parallel line for the fault locator and, dependent on setting I4 or I5,maybe for the earth-fault protection function. Hence, when the CT super-vision function is used, the settings Xm0 = 0 and Rm0 = 0 must be usedfor the fault locator.

1MRK 580 357-XEN


Current circuit supervision

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 357-XENPage 6 – 360

2 Theory of operationThe supervision function compares the numerical value of the sum of thethree phase currents ΣIphase (current inputs I1, I2 and I3) and thenumerical value of the residual current ΣIref (current input I5) fromanother current transformer set, see figure 1.

The CTSU-FAIL output will be set to a logical one when following crite-rias are fulfilled:

• the numerical value of the difference ΣIphase – ΣIref is higher then 80% of the numerical value of the sum ΣIphase + ΣIref

• the numerical value of the current ΣIphase – ΣIref is equal to or higher than the set operate value IMinOp (5 - 100% of I1b)

• no phase current has exceeded 1.5 times rated relay current I1b dur-ing the last 10 ms

• the current circuit supervision is released by setting Operation = On.

The CTSU-FAIL output remains activated 100 ms after the And-gateresets when being activated for more than 20 ms. If the CTSU-FAIL lastsfor more than 150 ms an CTSU-ALARM will be issued. In this case theCTSU-FAIL and CTSU-ALARM will remain activated 1 s after the and-gate resets. This prevents unwanted resetting of the blocking functionwhen phase current supervision element(s) operate, e.g. during a fault.

Figure 1: Simplified logic diagram for the current circuit supervision

OPERATION

Σ

IL1

IL3

IL2

1,5 x Ir

>1&

Σ+–

Σ+

+Iref

Σ+–x 0,8

>1

100 ms20 ms

1 s150 ms

10 ms CTSU-FAIL

CTSU-ALARM

I>CTSU-BLOCK

Current circuit supervision 1MRK 580 357-XENPage 6 – 361

Version 2.2-00

The operate characteristic is percentage restrained, see figure 2.

Figure 2: Operate characteristics

Note that due to the formulas for the axis compared, ΣIphase - ΣIrefand ΣIphase + ΣIref respectively, the slope can not be above 1.

IminOp

Slope = 0,8

CTCFSignal

ΣIphase – ΣIref

ΣIphase + ΣIref

Slope = 1


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 357-XENPage 6 – 362

3 SettingThe function is activated by setting Operation = On.

The minimum operate current (IMinOp) should as a minimum be set twicethe residual current in the supervised CT circuits under normal serviceconditions and rated primary current. The setting range is 5 – 100% of I1b

The CTSU-FAIL and CTSU-ALARM outputs are connected to the block-ing input of the actual protection function and output alarm relay respec-tively via the internal logic programming of the REx 5xx relay.

Current circuit supervision 1MRK 580 357-XENPage 6 – 363

Version 2.2-00

4 TestingThe current circuit supervision function is conveniently tested with thesame 3-phase test set as used when testing the measuring functions in theREx 5xx.

1.Check the input circuits and the operate value of the IMinOp current leveldetector by injecting current, one phase at a time.

2.Check the phase current blocking for all three phases by injecting cur-rent, one phase at a time. The output blocking signal shall reset with adelay of 1 s when the current exceeds 1.5 x I1b.

3.Inject a current 0.90 x I1b to phase L1 and a current 0.15 x I1b to thereference current input. Decrease slowly the current to the reference cur-rent input and check that blocking is obtained when the current is about0.10 x I1b.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 357-XENPage 6 – 364

5 Appendix

5.1 Function block

5.2 Signal list

5.3 Setting table

CT SUPERVISION

CTSU-FAIL

CTSU-ALARM

CTSU-BLOCK


CTSU- ALARM OUT Alarm for current circuit failure

CTSU- BLOCK IN Block of current circuit supervision function

CTSU- FAIL OUT Detection of current circuit failure


Operation Off, On Off Activation of CT-Supervision

IMinOp 5-100 % 20 Minimum operate phase current, as a percentage of I1b

365Fuse failure supervision (zero sequence)

1 ApplicationDifferent protection functions within the REx 5xx protection, control andmonitoring terminals operate on the basis of the measured voltage in therelay point. Examples are: distance protection function, undervoltagemeasuring function, and voltage check for the weak infeed logic.

These functions can operate unnecessarily if a fault occurs in the second-ary circuits between the voltage instrument transformers and the terminal.

It is possible to use different measures to prevent such unwanted opera-tions. Miniature circuit breakers in the voltage measuring circuits, locatedas close as possible to the voltage instrument transformers, are one ofthem. Separate fuse-failure measuring relays or elements within the pro-tection and monitoring devices are another possibility. These solutions arecombined to get the best possible effect in the fuse failure supervisionfunction (FUSE) of REx 5xx terminals.

The fuse-failure supervision function as built into the REx 5xx terminalshas these possibilities; it can operate:

• On the basis of external binary signals from the miniature circuit breaker or from the line disconnector. The first case influences the operation of all voltage-dependent functions while the second one does not affect the impedance measuring functions.

• On the basis of the zero-sequence measuring quantities: a high value of voltage 3.U0 without the presence of the residual current 3.I0 .

2 Theory of operationThe current and voltage measuring elements within one of the built-indigital signal processors continuously measure the currents and voltagesin all three phases and calculate:

• The zero-sequence current 3.I0

• The zero-sequence voltage 3.U0

comparing them with their respective set values 3I0< and 3U0> .

Fourier’s recursive filter filters the current and voltage signals, and a sep-arate trip counter prevents high overreaching of the measuring elements.The signal STZERO is set to 1, if the zero sequence measured voltageexceeds its set value 3U0> and if the zero sequence measured current doesnot exceed its pre-set value 3I0<.

Signals STUL1N, STUL2N and STUL3N are related to phase to earthvoltages and become 1 when the respective phase voltage is lower thenthe set value. The set value (U<) is chosen in the dead line detection func-tion, that is always present in the terminal when the fuse failure supervi-sion is present.

1MRK 580 359-XEN


Fuse failure supervision (zero sequence)

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 359-XENPage 6 – 366

3 DesignThe simplified logic diagram of the fuse failure supervision function isshown in figure 1.


• The terminal is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been blocked from the HMI (BlockFUSE=Yes)

• The input signal FUSE-BLOCK is high

The FUSE-BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the fusefailure supervision function. It can be connected to a binary input of theterminal in order to receive a block command from external devices orcan be software connected to other internal functions of the terminal itselfin order to receive a block command from internal functions. Through ORgate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal function out-puts.

The function input signal FUSE-MCB is supposed to be connected via aterminal binary input to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit-breaker protecting the VT secondary circuit.

The function input signal FUSE-DISC is supposed to be connected via aterminal binary input to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the line disconnec-tor.

The function output FUSE-VTSU can be used for blocking the voltagerelated measuring functions (undervoltage protection, synchrocheck etc.)except for the impedance protection.

The function output FUSE-VTSZ can be used for blocking the impedanceprotection function.

The FUSE-MCB signal sets the output signals FUSE-VTSU and FUSE-VTSZ in order to block all the voltage related functions when the MCB isopen. The additional drop-off timer of 150 ms prolongs the presence ofFUSE-MCB signal to prevent the unwanted operation of voltage depen-dent function due to non simultaneous closing of the main contacts of theminiature circuit breaker.

The FUSE-DISC signal sets the output signal FUSE-VTSU in order toblock the voltage related functions when the line disconnector is open.The impedance protection function is not affected by the position of theline disconnector.

The function input signal FUSE-DLCND is related to the dead line condi-tion detection. It has to be connected to the output signal of the dead linecondition function DLD-STPH (dead phase condition detected). This sig-nal is activated from the dead line condition function when the voltageand the current in at least one phase are below their respective setting val-ues. It prevents the blocking of the impedance protection by a fuse failuredetection during dead line condition (that occurs also during single pole


1MRK 580 359-XENPage 6 – 367

Version 2.2-00

auto-reclosing). The 200 ms drop-off timer prolongs the dead line condi-tion after the line-energization in order to prevent the blocking of theimpedance protection for unequal pole closing.

If the fuse failure condition is detected for more then five seconds and atleast one of the phases has a low phase to earth voltage, then the fuse fail-ure condition is latched: signal FUSE-VTSU is turned high, if there is nodead line condition also FUSE-VTSZ is high; if all the three phases haveno voltage (STUL1N = STUL2N = STUL3N = 1) then the output signalFUSE-VTF3PH is turned high.

The output signal FUSE-VTF3PH is high if the fuse failure condition isdetected for 5 seconds and all the three measured voltages are low.

The fuse failure condition is unlatched when the normal voltage condi-tions are restored (STUL1N = STUL2N = STUL3N = 0).

The fuse failure condition is stored in the non volatile memory of the ter-minal. In the new start-up procedure the terminal checks the VTF3PH(STORE3PH) value in its non volatile memory and establishes the corre-sponding starting conditions.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 359-XENPage 6 – 368

Figure 1: Simplified logic diagram for fuse failure supervision function

4 Setting instructionsThe operating value for the voltage check function (signals STUL1N,STUL2N, STUL3N) is the same as the operating value of the dead linedetection function. The setting of the voltage minimum operating valueU< occurs under the submenu:

SettingsFunctions

Group n DeadLineDet

FUSE-BLOCK

FUSE-VTSU

visf_195.vsd

FUSE - FUSE FAILURE SUPERVISION FUNCTION

TEST-ACTIVE

&

TEST

BlockFUSE= Yes

STZERO

&

FUSE-VTSZ

FUSE-VTF3PH

FUSE-MCB

FUSE-DISC

&

&

t150 ms

>1

>1FUSE-DLCNDt

200 ms&

>1 t5 s

-loop

&

STUL3N

STUL2N

STUL1N

>1

&& >1

>1

-loop

STORE3PH

20 ms

>1

1:FunctionEnable

Dead-LineBlock

1:FuseFailure

Detection

1:Fuse failure formore than 5 s

0: All voltagesare high (ResetLatch)

1:All voltagesare low

Store in non volatilememory(FUSE-STORE3PH)From non volatile

memory

(Set Latch)


1MRK 580 359-XENPage 6 – 369

Version 2.2-00

Some values of the zero-sequence voltages and currents always exist dueto different non-symmetries in the primary system and differences in thecurrent and voltage instrument transformers. The minimum value for theoperation of the current and voltage measuring elements must always beset with a safety margin of 10 to 15%, depending on the system operatingconditions.

Pay special attention to the dissymmetry of the measuring quantities whenthe function is used on longer untransposed lines, on multicircuit lines,and so on.


4.1 Setting of zero sequence voltage 3U0>

The relay setting value 3U0> is given in percentage of the secondary basevoltage value, , associated to the voltage transformer input U1. If

is the secondary setting value of the relay, then the value for 3U0>is given from this formula:

(Equation 1)



SettingsFunctions

Group nFuseFailure

on the value 3U0>.

4.2 Setting of zero sequence current 3I0<

The relay setting value 3I0< is given in percentage of the secondary basecurrent value, , associated to the current transformer input I1. If is the secondary setting value of the relay, then the value for 3I0< is givenfrom this formula:

(Equation 2)



SettingsFunctions

Group nFuseFailure

on the value 3I0<.

U1b

UsSEC

3U0>UsSEC

U1b----------------- 100⋅=

I1b IsSEC

3I0<IsSEC

I1b-------------- 100⋅=


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 359-XENPage 6 – 370

5 TestingIt is possible to disable the function during the test mode under the follow-ing conditions:

• When the function should be blocked under the testing conditions. The selection of functions, which should be blocked is possible under the menu:

TestTestMode

BlockFunctions

• The terminal has been set into the test mode by setting the Opera-tion=On. This selection takes place under the menu:

TestTestMode

Operation

• The terminal has been set automatically into test mode by applying the logical 1 to the TEST-INPUT functional input

Important note: The function will be blocked if the corresponding set-ting under the BlockFunctions menu remains on and the TEST-INPUTsignal remains active.

The fuse failure supervision function must not be blocked in order to betested.

Check the operation of the FUSE function during the commissioning andduring regular maintenance tests. ABB Network Partner recommends,although it is not an absolute requirement, the use of the RTS 21 (FREJA)testing equipment for secondary injection testing purposes.

The test equipment used should be able to provide an independent three-phase supply of voltages and currents to the tested terminal. It must bepossible to separately change the values of voltages, currents, and phaseangles among them independent of each other, for each phase. The testvoltages and currents should have a common source, with very small con-tent of higher harmonics. If the test equipment cannot indicate the phaseangles between the measured quantities, a separate phase angle meter isneeded.

The corresponding binary signals that inform the operator about the oper-ation of the FUSE function are available on the local human-machineinterface (HMI) unit under the menu:


FuseFailureFuncOutputs


1MRK 580 359-XENPage 6 – 371

Version 2.2-00

The appendix reports the corresponding signals that display informationon the operation of the FUSE function.

These steps are necessary for testing the FUSE function:

1.1 Check if the input and output logical signals as shown in figure 1 onpage 368 are configured to the corresponding binary inputs and out-puts of the tested terminal. If not, configure them for testing pur-poses. Set the operation of FUSE protection to On mode under thesubmenu:

Settings Functions

Group nFuseFailure

ZeroSeq

1.2 Connect the three-phase testing equipment to the tested terminal,and simulate normal operating conditions with the three-phase cur-rents in phase with their corresponding phase voltages and with allof them equal to their rated values.

1.3 Connect the nominal dc voltage to the FUSE-DISC binary input,and check that the signal FUSE-VTSU appears with almost no timedelay. No signals FUSE-VTSZ and FUSE-VTF3PH should appearon the terminal. Only the distance protection function operates. Noother voltage-dependent functions must operate. Disconnect the dcvoltage from the FUSE-DISC binary input terminal.

1.4 Connect the nominal dc voltage to the FUSE-MCB binary inputand check that the FUSE-VTSU and FUSE-VTSZ signals appearwithout any time delay. No voltage-dependent functions mustoperate. Disconnect the dc voltage from the FUSE-MCB binaryinput terminal.

1.5 Disconnect one of the phase voltages and observe the logical outputsignals on the terminal binary outputs. FUSE-VTSU and FUSE-VTSZ signals should simultaneously appear.

1.6 After more than 5 seconds disconnect the remaining two phasevoltages and all three currents. There should be no change in thehigh statuses of the output signals FUSE-VTSU and FUSE-VTSZ.The signal FUSE-VTF3PH will instead appear.

1.7 Simultaneously establish normal voltage and current operating con-ditions and observe the corresponding output signals. They shouldchange to the logical 0 as follows:

•Signal FUSE-VTF3PH after about 25 ms

•Signal FUSE-VTSU after about 50 ms

•Signal FUSE-VTSZ after about 200 ms


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 359-XENPage 6 – 372

1.8 Slowly decrease the measured voltage in one phase until the FUSE-VTSU signal appears. Record the measured voltage and calculatethe corresponding zero-sequence voltage according to the equation(observe that the voltages in the equation are phasors):

(Equation 3)

where:

, and are the measured phase voltages

Compare the result with the set value (consider that the set value3U0> is in percentage of the base voltage U1b) of the zero-sequence operating voltage. The result should be within the +5%limits of accuracy with the addition of declared accuracy for testingequipment.

1.9 Disconnect the testing equipment. Don’t forget to configure the ter-minal, if necessary, to its normal operating configuration.

6 Appendix

6.1 Function block

3 U0⋅ UL1 UL2 UL3+ +=

UL1 UL2 UL3

FUSE-BLOCK

FUSE-VTF3PH

FUSE FAILURE SUPERVISION

visf_191.vsd

FUSE-VTSUFUSE-VTSZ

FUSE-DISC

FUSE-MCB

FUSE-DLCND


1MRK 580 359-XENPage 6 – 373

Version 2.2-00


FUSE-BLOCK

FUSE-VTSU

visf_196.vsd

FUSE - FUSE FAILURE SUPERVISION FUNCTION

TEST-ACTIVE

&

TEST

BlockFUSE= Yes

STZERO

&

FUSE-VTSZ

FUSE-VTF3PH

FUSE-MCB

FUSE-DISC

&

&

t150 ms

>1

>1FUSE-DLCNDt

200 ms&

>1 t5 s

-loop

&

STUL3N

STUL2N

STUL1N

>1

&&

>1

>1

-loop

STORE3PH

20 ms

>1


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 359-XENPage 6 – 374

6.3 Signal list

6.4 Setting table


FUSE- DLCND IN Dead line condition

FUSE- MCB IN Operation of MCB

FUSE- DISC IN Line disconnector position

FUSE- BLOCK IN Block of fuse failure function

FUSE- VTF3PH OUT Detection of 3-phase fuse failure

FUSE- VTSU OUT Block for voltage measuring functions

FUSE- VTSZ OUT Block for impedance measuring functions


ZeroSeq Off, On Off Fuse failure zero sequence function On/Off

3U0> 10-50 % 10 Operating zero sequence voltage, as a percentage of U1b

3I0< 10-50 % 10 Operating zero sequence current, as a percentage of I1b

375Command control

1 ApplicationThe REx 5xx terminals may be provided with output functions that can becontrolled either from a Substation Control System or from the local HMI.The output functions can be used, for example, to control high-voltageapparatuses in switchyards. For local control functions, the local HMI canbe used. Together with the configuration logic circuits, the user can gov-ern pulses or steady output signals for control purposes within the termi-nal or via binary outputs.

2 DesignThe command control function consists of one single command functionblock, CD01 for 16 binary output signals.

The output signals can be of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. The setting isdone on the MODE input, common for the whole block, from theCAP 531 configuration tool.

0=Off sets all outputs to 0, independent of the values sent from the stationlevel, that is, the operator station or remote-control gateway.

1=Steady sets the outputs to a steady signal 0 or 1, depending on the val-ues sent from the station level.

2=Pulse gives a pulse with one execution cycle duration, if a value sentfrom the station level is changed from 0 to 1. That means that the config-ured logic connected to the command function block may not have a cycletime longer than the execution cycle time for the command functionblock.

The outputs can be individually controlled from the operator station,remote-control gateway, or from the local HMI. Each output signal can begiven a name with a maximum of 13 characters from the CAP 531 config-uration tool.

The output signals, here CD01-OUT1 to CD01-OUT16, are then availablefor configuration to built-in functions or via the configuration logic cir-cuits to the binary outputs of the terminal.

The command function can be connected according to the applicationexamples in Fig. 1 to Fig. 3. Note that the execution cyclicity of the con-figured logic connected to the command function block cannot have acycle time longer than the command function block.

Fig. 1 shows an example of how the user can, in an easy way, connect thecommand function via the configuration logic circuit to control a high-voltage apparatus. This type of command control is normally performed

1MRK 580 382-XEN


Command control

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 382-XENPage 6 – 376

by a pulse via the binary outputs of the terminal. Fig. 1 shows a closeoperation, but an open operation is performed in a corresponding waywithout the synchro-check condition.

Figure 1: Application example showing a logic diagram for control of a circuit breaker via configuration logic circuits

Fig. 2 and Fig. 3 show other ways to control functions, which requiresteady signals On and Off. The output can be used to control built-in func-tions or external equipment.

Figure 2: Application example showing a logic diagram for control of built-in functions

&User-definedconditions

Configuration logic circuits

200 ms

Synchro-check

SingleCmdFunc

OUTy

MODE

CmdOuty

2

Close CB1

SinglecommandfunctionCD01

SingleCmdFunc

OUTy

MODE

CmdOuty

1

Function n

Function n


Command control 1MRK 580 382-XENPage 6 – 377

Version 2.2-00

Figure 3: Application example showing a logic diagram for control of external equipment via configuration logic circuits

3 ConfigurationThe configuration of the signal outputs from the single command functionin is made by the CAP 531 configuration tool.

4 CommandsThe outputs of the single command function block can be activated fromthe local HMI. This can be performed under the menu:

CommandCD01

Fig. 4 shows the dialogue box for the local HMI after the selection of thecommand menu above. The display shows the name of the output to con-trol (CmdOut1) and the present status (Old) and proposes a new value(New).

Figure 4: Command dialogue to control an output from the single com-mand function block

&User-definedconditions

Configuration logic circuitsSingleCmdFunc

OUTy

MODE

CmdOuty

1

Device 1


Old:1 New: 0 ^CD01 - CmdOut1

NOYES

Command control

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 382-XENPage 6 – 378

The dialogue to operate an output from the single command functionblock is performed from different states as follows:

1. Selection active; select the:

• C button, and then the No box activates.• Up arrow, and then New: 0 changes to New: 1. The up arrow

changes to the down arrow.• E button, and then the Yes box activates.

2. Yes box active; select the:

• C button to cancel the action and return to the CMD/CD01 menu window.

• E button to confirm the action and return to the CMD/CD01 menu window.

• Right arrow to activate the No box.

3. No box active; select the:

• C button to cancel the action and return to the CMD/CD01 menu window.

• E button to confirm the action and return to the CMD/CD01 menu window.

• Left arrow to activate the Yes box.

5 SettingThe setting parameters for the single command function are set from theCAP 531 configuration tool.

Parameters to be set are MODE, common for the whole block, and Cmd-Outy - including the name for each output signal. The MODE input setsthe outputs to be one of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse.

The appendix shows the parameters and their setting ranges.

6 TestingFor the single command function block, it is necessary to configure theoutput signal to corresponding binary output of the terminal. The opera-tion of the function is then checked from the local HMI by applying thecommands with the MODE Off, Steady, or Pulse and by observing thelogic statuses of the corresponding binary output.

Command control functions included in the operation of different built-infunctions must be tested at the same time as their corresponding functions.

Command control 1MRK 580 382-XENPage 6 – 379

Version 2.2-00

7 Appendix

7.1 Function block

Figure 5: Function block for the single command function

7.2 Signal list In the signal list, xx=01

7.3 Setting table In the setting table, xx=01

OUT1OUT2OUT3OUT4OUT5OUT6OUT7OUT8OUT9

OUT10OUT11OUT12OUT13OUT14OUT15OUT16

SingleCmdFunc

CMDOUT1CMDOUT2CMDOUT3CMDOUT4CMDOUT5CMDOUT6CMDOUT7CMDOUT8CMDOUT9CMDOUT10CMDOUT11CMDOUT12CMDOUT13CMDOUT14CMDOUT15CMDOUT16MODE

CD01


CDxx- OUTy OUT Command output y (y=1-16)

CDxx- CMDOUTy See settings table

CDxx- MODE See settings table


CMDOUTy User def. string

String CDxx-CMD-OUTy

User defined name for output y (y=1-16) of function block CDxx. String length up to 13 characters,all characters avail-able on the HMI can be used

MODE 0, 1, 2 0 Operation mode, 0: Off, 1: Not pulsed (steady). 2: Pulsed. Can only be set from the CAP 531 configuration tool

Command control

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 382-XENPage 6 – 380

381Synchro- and energising check for single circuit breaker

1 Application

1.1 Synchrocheck The synchrocheck function is used for controlled closing of a circuit in aninterconnected network. When used, the function gives an enable signal atsatisfied voltage conditions across the breaker to be closed. When there is aparallel circuit established, the frequency is normally the same at the twosides of the open breaker. At power swings, e.g. after a line fault, an oscillat-ing difference can appear. Across the open breaker, there can be a phaseangle and a voltage amplitude difference due to voltage drop across the par-allel circuit or circuits. The synchro-check function measures the differencebetween the U-line and the U-bus, regarding voltage (UDiff), phase angle(PhaseDiff), and frequency (FreqDiff). It operates and permits closing of thecircuit breaker when these conditions are simultaneously fulfilled.

• The voltages U-line and U-bus are higher than the set value for UHigh of the base voltage U1b.

• The differences in the voltage and phase angles are smaller than the set values of UDiff and PhaseDiff.

• The difference in frequency is less than the set value of FreqDiff. The bus frequency must also be within a range of ±5 Hz from the rated frequency.

The function can be used as a condition to be fulfilled before the breakeris closed at manual closing and/or together with the auto-recloser func-tion.

Figure 1: Synchrocheck

SYN 1

UHigh>70-100% UrUDiff<5-60% UrPhaseDiff<5-75o

FreqDiff<50-300mHz

Fuse fail

Fuse fail

U-Line Line referencevoltage

U-LineU-Bus

1MRK 580 363-XEN



Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 382

The voltage circuits are arranged differently depending on the number ofsynchrocheck functions that are included in the terminal.

In terminals intended for one bay the U-line voltage reference phase isselected on the human-machine interface (HMI). The reference voltagecan be single-phase L1, L2, L3 or phase-phase L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1. TheU-bus voltage must then be connected to the same phase or phases as arechosen on the HMI. Figure 2: shows the voltage connection.

In terminals intended for several bays, all voltage inputs are single phasecircuits. The voltage can be selected for single phase or phase-to-phasemeasurement on the HMI. All voltage inputs must be connected to thesame phase or phases.

The circuit breaker can be closed when the conditions for FreqDiff, PhaseDiff, and UDiff are fulfilled with the UHigh condition.

Figure 2: Connection of the synchrocheck function for one bay.

U-Line

U-Bus

UL1

UL2

UL3

UN

U

UN

AD

L1,L2,L3

L12,L23

L31

ϕ

U

f

SYN1AUTOOK

SYN1MANOK

HMISetting


1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 383

Version 2.2-00

1.2 Energising check The energising check is made when a disconnected line is to be connectedto an energised section of a network, see Figure 3:. The check can also beset to allow energisation of the busbar or in both directions.

Figure 3: Principle for energising check.

The voltage level considered to be a non-energised bus or line is set on theHMI. An energising can occur — depending on the set direction of theenergising function. There are separate settable limits for energised (live)condition, UHigh, and non-energised (dead) ULow conditions. The equip-ment is considered energised if the voltage is above the set value UHigh(e.g. 80% of base voltage), and non-energised if it is below the set value,ULow (e.g. 30% of the base voltage). The user can set the UHigh condi-tion between 70-100% U1b and the ULow condition between 10-80%U1b.

A disconnected line can have a considerable potential due to, for instance,induction from a line running in parallel, or by being fed via the extin-guishing capacitors in the circuit breakers. This voltage can be as high as30% or more of the rated voltage of the line.

The energising operation can be set to operate in either direction over thecircuit breaker, or it can be permitted to operate in both directions. Use theAutoEnerg and ManEnerg HMI setting to select the energising operationin:

• Both directions (Both)

• Dead line live bus (DLLB)

• Dead bus live line (DBLL)

The voltage check can also be set Off. A closing impulse is issued to thecircuit breaker if one of the U-line or U-bus voltages is High and the otheris Low, that is, when only one side is energised. The user can set AutoEn-erg and ManEnerg to enable different conditions during automatic andmanual closing of the circuit breaker.

UHigh>70-100%UrULow<10-80%Ur

U-Bus U-Line


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 384

In the manual mode it is also possible to allow closing when both sides ofthe breaker are dead. This is done by setting the parameter ManDBDL =“On” and ManEnerg to “DLLB”, “DBLL” or “Both”.

1.3 Voltage selection The voltage selection function is used for the synchronisation and syn-chronism (SYNx) and energising check functions. When the terminal isused in a double bus, the voltage that should be selected depends on thepositions of the breakers and/or disconnectors. By checking the positionof the disconnectors and/or breakers auxiliary contacts, the terminal canselect the right voltage for the synchronism and energising function.Select the type of voltage selection from the synchrocheck, Uselection,SingleBus or DbleBus on the HMI. When using voltage selection, anextra I/O-module is required.

The configuration of internal signal inputs and outputs may be differentfor different busbar systems, and the actual configuration for the substa-tion must be done during engineering of the terminal.


1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 385

Version 2.2-00

Figure 4: Voltage connection in a single busbar arrangement. Alterna-tively, it can be extended up to three bays in one terminal.

1.3.1 Voltage selection for a single busbar

Single bus is selected on the HMI. Figure 4: shows the principle for theconnection arrangement. One terminal unit is used for each bay, or it canalternatively be common for three bays. For the synchrocheck (SYNx)and energising check function, there is one voltage transformer at eachside of the circuit breaker. The voltage transformer circuit connections arestraight forward, no special voltage selection is needed.

For the synchrocheck and energising check, the voltage from Bus 1(SYNx-U-Bus) is connected to the single phase analogue input (U5) onthe terminal unit.

Bus 1 Bay 1

U-Bus 1

U-Line 1

SYNCH.CHECK VOLT SELECTION I/O BI AISYN1

U5

ULx(1)

U-Bus

U-Line

FUSEUB1FUSEF1

FUSEUB1FUSEF1 F1

SYN1_UB1OK/FFSYN1_VTSU

SYN2

U5

UL2

U-Bus

U-Line

FUSEUB1FUSEF2


SYN3

U5

UL3

U-Bus

U-Line

FUSEUB1FUSEF3


U-Line 2

FUSEF2

U-Line 3

FUSEF3

U5

ULx(1)

UL2

UL3

From Bay 2

From Bay 3


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 386

For the terminal intended for one bay, the line voltage (SYN1-U-line 1) isconnected as a three-phase voltage to the analogue inputs UL1, UL2, UL3(ULx). For the version intended for three bays, the line voltages are con-nected as three single-phase inputs, UL1 for Bay 1, UL2 for Bay 2, andUL3 for Bay 3.

1.3.1.1 Fuse failure and Volt-age OK signals

The external fuse-failure signals or signals from a tripped fuseswitch/MCB are connected to binary inputs configured to inputs of thesynchrocheck functions in the terminal. There are two alternative connec-tion possibilities. Inputs named OK must be supplied if the voltage circuitis healthy. Inputs named FF must be supplied if the voltage circuit isfaulty.

The SYNx-UB1OK and SYNx-UB1FF inputs are related to the busbarvoltage. Configure them to the binary inputs that indicate the status of theexternal fuse failure of the busbar voltage. The SYNx-VTSU input isrelated to the line voltage from each line.

For the terminal that is intended for one bay, the user can use the FUSE-VTSU signal from the built-in optional selectable fuse-failure function asan alternative to the external fuse-failure signals.

In case of a fuse failure, the energising check (dead line-check) is blockedvia the inputs (SYN1-UB1OK/FF or SYN1-VTSU).


1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 387

Version 2.2-00

Figure 5: Voltage selection in a double bus arrangement. Alternatively it can be extended up to three bays in one terminal

Bus 1 Bay 1

U-Bus 1

U-Line 1

SYNCH-CHECK VOLT SELECTION I/O BI AISYN1

U5

ULx(1)

U-Bus

U-Line

1CB11CB2

1CB1

FUSEF1

SYN1_CB1OPEN/CLDSYN1_CB2OPEN/CLD

SYN2

SYN3

U5

ULx(1)

From Bay 2

Bus 2

U-Bus 2U4

1CB2

U4

VOLT. SEL1

FUSEUB1FUSEUB2

FUSEUB1SYN1_UB1OK/FF


FUSEF1SYN1_VTSU

VOLT. SEL2

VOLT. SEL3

UL2

U-Bus

U-Line

2CB12CB2

2CB1SYN2_CB1OPEN/CLDSYN2_CB2OPEN/CLD

UL2

2CB2

U4

FUSEF2



FUSEF2SYN2_VTSU

U5

U-Line 2

From Bay 3

UL3

U-Bus

U-Line

3CB13CB2

3CB1SYN3_CB1OPEN/CLDSYN3_CB2OPEN/CLD

UL3

3CB2

U4

FUSEF3



FUSEF3SYN3_VTSU

U5

U-Line 3


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 388

1.3.2 Voltage selection for a double bus

Select DbleBus on the HMI. Figure 5: shows the principle for theconnection arrangement. One terminal unit is used for each bay or it canalternatively be common for three bays. For the synchrocheck (SYNx)and energising check function, the voltages on the two busbars areselected by voltage selection (VOLT.SELx) in the terminal unit. The busvoltage from Bus 1 is fed to the U5 analogue single-phase input, and thebus voltage from Bus 2 is fed to the U4 analogue single-phase input. Theline voltage transformers are connected as a three-phase voltage UL1,UL2, UL3 (ULx) to the input U-line. For the version intended for threebays, the line voltages are connected as three, single-phase inputs, UL1for Bay1, UL2 for Bay2 and UL3 for Bay3.

The selection of the bus voltage is made by checking the position of thedisconnectors’ auxiliary contacts connected via binary inputs of the voltageselection logic inputs, SYNx-CB1OPEN (Disconnector section 1 open),SYNx-CB1CLD (Disconnector section 1 closed) and SYNx-CB2OPEN(Disconnector section 2 open), SYNx-CB2CLD (Disconnector section 2closed).


The external fuse-failure signals or signals from a tripped fuseswitch/MCB are connected to binary inputs configured to inputs of thesynchro-check functions in the terminal. There are two alternative con-nection possibilities. Inputs named OK must be supplied if the voltage cir-cuit is healthy. Inputs named FF must be supplied if the voltage circuit isfaulty.

The SYNx-UB1(2)OK and SYNx-UB1(2)FF inputs are related to eachbusbar voltage. The SYNx-VTSU input is related to each line voltage.Configure them to the binary inputs that indicate the status of the externalfuse failure of the busbar respectively the line voltage. Only the fuse fail-ure of a selected voltage causes a blocking of the relevant energisingcheck unit.

For the terminal that is intended for one bay, you can use the FUSE-VTSUsignal from the built-in optional selectable fuse-failure function as analternative to the external fuse-failure signals.

In case of a fuse failure, the energising check (dead line-check) is blockedvia the inputs (SYNx-UB1OK/FF, SYNx-UB2OK/FF or SYNx-VTSU).


1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 389

Version 2.2-00


Figure 6: Input and output signals.

2.1 Synchrocheck Description of input and output signals for the synchro-check function.

Input signals Description

SYNx-BLOCK General block input from any external condi-tion, that should block the synchrocheck.

SYNx-VTSU The SYNC function cooperates with the FUSE-VTSU connected signal, which is the built-inoptional fuse failure detection. It can also beconnected to external condition for fuse failure.This is a blocking condition for the energisingfunction.

SYNx-UB1FF External fuse failure input from busbar voltage Bus 1 (U5). This signal can come from a tripped fuse switch (MCB) on the secondary side of the voltage transformer. In case of a fuse failure the energising check is blocked.

SYNx-UB1OK No external voltage fuse failure (U5). Invertedsignal.

FreqDiffPhaseDiffUDiffUHighULow

<<<><

50-300 mHz5-75 deg5-60 %70-100 %10-80 %

SYNx-VTSU

SYNx-BLOCK

SYNx x=1,2 or 3

SYNx-AUTO

SYNx-MANOK

Connectable inputs

From fuse failuredetection, line side(external or internal)

Connectableoutputs

General Block

SYNx-UB1/2OK

SYNx-UB1/2FFFrom fuse failuredetection bus side


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 390



Output signals Description

SYNx-AUTOOK Synchrocheck/energising OK. The output signal is high when the synchrocheck conditions set on the HMI are fulfilled. It can also include the energising condition, if selected. The signal can be used to release the auto-recloser before clos-ing attempt of the circuit breaker. It can also be used as a free signal.

SYNx-MANOK Same as above but with alternative settings of the direction for energising to be used during manual closing of the circuit breaker.


1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 391

Version 2.2-00

Figure 7: Voltage selection logic in a double bus, single breaker arrangement. In case of three bay arrangement the 1 in SYN1 and UENERG1OK are replaced by 2 and 3 in the logic.

2.2 Voltage selection Description of the input and output signals shown in the above simplifiedlogic diagrams for voltage selection:

Input signal Description

SYNx-CB1OPEN Disconnector section of Bay x open. Connectedto the auxiliary contacts of a disconnector sec-tion in a double-bus, singlebreaker arrange-ment, to inform the voltage selection about thepositions.

SYNx-CB1CLD Disconnector section of Bay x closed. Con-nected to the auxiliary contacts of a disconnectorsection in a double-bus, single-breaker arrange-ment to inform the voltage selection about thepositions.

SYNx-CB2OPEN Same as above but for disconnector section 2.

SYNx-CB2CLD Same as above but for disconnector section 2.

SYNx-UB1FF External fuse failure input from busbar voltageBus 1 (U5). This signal can come from a trippedfuse switch (MCB) on the secondary side of thevoltage transformer. In case of a fuse failure,the energising check is blocked.


SYNx-UB2FF External fuse failure input from busbar voltageBus 2 (U4). This signal can come from a trippedfuse switch (MCB) on the secondary side of thevoltage transformer. In case of fuse failure, theenergising check is blocked.

1V

SYN1-CB1OPENSYN1-CB1CLD

SYN1-CB2OPEN

1V

SYN1-CB2CLD

SYN-UB1FF

SYN1-VTSU

1V UENERG1OKSYN-UB1OK

SYN-UB2FFSYN-UB2OK

&

&

&

&

&

SYN1-VSUB1

SYN1-VSUB2

U5

U4

SYN1-U-BUS

To energisingcheck Figure 9:


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 392


SYNx-VTSU Internal fuse failure detection or configured to abinary input indicating external fuse failure ofthe UL1, UL2, UL3 line-side voltage. Blocksthe energising function.


SYNx-VSUB1 Signal for indication of voltage selection fromBus 1 voltage.

SYNx-VSUB2 Signal for indication of voltage selection fromBus 1 voltage.

Figure 8: Simplified logic diagram - Synchrocheck.

t& 1V

UDiff

OPERATIONOFF

RELEASEON

SYN1-BLOCK

UBusHigh

ULineHigh

FreqDiff

PhaseDiff

AUTOENERG1

MANENERG1

50ms

&

&

&

1V

SYN1

SYN1-AUTOOK

SYN1-MANOK

From energisingcheck figure 9.


1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 393

Version 2.2-00

Figure 9: Simplified logic diagram - energising check.

t

&1V

OFFBothDLLBDBLL

UL HighUL LowUB High

50ms

&& AUTOENERG 1

UB Low

UENERG1OK

OFFBothDLLBDBLL

ManEnerg.

AutoEnerg.

1V 1V t0.00-60.0s

&1V

&& MANENERG 11V

1V

t0.00-60.0s

&OFFON

1V

ManDBDL

t50ms

To synchro-checkfigure 8.

From voltage selection


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 394

3 SettingThe setting parameters are accessible through the HMI. The parametersfor the synchrocheck function are found in the HMI tree under:

SettingsFunctions

Group nSynchroCheck

SynchroCheck n (n=1-3)(The number of SynchroCheck functions is dependent of the version)

Comments regarding settings.

3.1 Operation Off/Release/On

Off The synchrocheck function is off and theoutput is low.

Release There are fixed, high output signals SYN1-AUTOOK = 1 and SYN1-MANOK = 1.

On The function is in service and the output sig-nal depends on the input conditions.

3.2 Input phase The measuring phase of the UL1, UL2, UL3 line voltage, which can be ofa single-phase (phase-neutral) or two-phases (phase-phase). (Only avail-able in terminals intended for one bay).

3.3 UMeasure Selection of single-phase (phase-neutral) or two-phase (phase-phase)measurement.(Only available in terminals intended for several bays).

3.4 PhaseShift This setting is used to compensate for a phase shift caused by a line trans-former between the two measurement points for UBus and ULine. The setvalue is added to the measured phase difference. The bus voltage is refer-ence voltage.

3.5 URatio The URatio is defined as URatio=UBus/ULine. A typical use of the set-ting is to compensate for the voltage difference caused if one wishes toconnect the UBus phase-phase and ULine phase-neutral. The “Inputphase”-setting should then be set to phase-phase and the “URatio”-settingto sqr3=1.732. This setting scales up the line voltage to equal level withthe bus voltage.

3.6 USelection Selection of single or double bus voltage-selection logic.


1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 395

Version 2.2-00

3.7 AutoEnerg and ManEnerg

Two different settings can be used for automatic and manual closing of thecircuit breaker.

Off The energising function is Off

DLLB The line voltage U-line is low, below (10-80% U1b) andthe bus voltage U-bus is high, above (70-100% U1b).

DBLL The bus voltage U-bus is low, below (10-80% U1b) andthe line voltage U-line is high, above (70-100% U1b).

Both Energising can be done in both directions, DLLB orDBLL.

tAutoEnerg The required consecutive time of fulfillment of the ener-gising condition to achieve SYN1-AUTOOK.

tManEnerg The required consecutive time of fulfillment of the ener-gising condition to achieve SYN1-MANOK.

3.8 ManDBDL If the parameter is set to “On”, closing is enabled when Both U-Line andU-bus are below ULow and ManEnerg is set to “DLLB”, “DBLL” or“Both”.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 396

4 TestingAt periodical checks, the functions should preferably be tested with theused settings. To test a specific function, it might be necessary to changesome setting parameters, for example:

• AutoEnerg = On/Off/DLLB/DBLL/Both

• ManEnerg = Off

• Operation = Off, On

The tests explained in section “Synchro-check tests” on page 396 describethe settings, which can be used as references during testing, are presentedbefore the final settings are specified. After testing, restore the equipmentto the normal or desired settings.

4.1 Test equipment A secondary injection test set with the possibility to alter the phase angleby regulation of the resistive and reactive components is needed. Here, thephase angle meter is also needed. To perform an accurate test of the fre-quency difference, a frequency generator at one of the input voltages isneeded. The tests can also be performed with the computer-aided test sys-tem FREJA which has a specially designed program for evaluating thesynchro-check function.Figure 10: shows the general test connection principle, which can be usedduring testing.

This description describes the test of the version intended for one bay.

Figure 10: General test connection for synchro-check with three-phase voltage connected to the line side.

4.2 Synchro-check tests

4.2.1 Test of voltage difference

Set the voltage difference at 30% U1b on the HMI, and the test should verifythat operation is achieved when the voltage difference UDiff is lower than30% U1b.

Testequipment

U-Bus

U-Line

N

U-Bus

N

UL1UL2UL3N

Input PhaseL1,L2,L3L12,L23,L31

UMeasurePh/NPh/Ph

REx 5xx


1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 397

Version 2.2-00

These voltage inputs are used:

U-line UL1, UL2 or UL3 voltage input on the terminal.

U-bus U5 voltage input on the terminal

These HMI settings can be used during the test if the final setting is notdetermined:

1 Set these HMI settings, which are found under:

SettingsFunctions

Group nSynchroCheck

SynchroCheck1

2 Test with UDiff = 0%• Apply voltages U-line (UL1) = 80% U1b and U-Bus (U5) = 80% U1b

with no frequency or phase difference.

• Check that the SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs are activated.

• The test can be repeated with different voltage values to verify that the function operates within UDiff <30%.

3 Test with UDiff = 40%• Increase the U-bus (U5) to 120% U1b, and the U-line (UL1) = 80%

U1b.

Table 1:

Parameter: Setting:

Operation On

InputPhase UL1

USelection SingleBus

PhaseShift 0 deg

URatio 1.00

AutoEnerg Off

ManEnerg Off

ManDBDL Off

UHigh 70% U1b

ULow 40% U1b

FreqDiff 0.05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 30% U1b

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 398

• Check that the two outputs are NOT activated.

4 Test with UDiff = 20%, Uline < UHigh• Decrease the U-line (UL1) to 60% U1b and the U-bus (U5) to be

equal to 80% U1b.


5 Test with URatio=0.20• Run the test under section 2 to 4 but with U-bus voltages 5 times

lower.

6 Test with URatio=5.00• Run the test under section 2 to 4 but with U-line voltages 5 times

lower.

4.2.2 Test of phase difference

The phase difference is set at 45° on the HMI, and the test should verifythat operation is achieved when the PhaseDiff (phase difference) is lowerthan 45°.

1 Set these HMI settings:

2 Test with PhaseDiff = 0° Apply voltages U-line (UL1) = 100% U1b and U-bus (U5) = 100% U1b,with no frequency or phase difference.Check that the SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs areactivated.

Table 2: Test settings for phase difference

Parameter: Setting:

Operation On

InputPhase UL1


PhaseShift 0 deg

URatio 1.00

AutoEnerg Off

ManEnerg Off

ManDBDL Off

UHigh 70% U1b

ULow 40% U1b

FreqDiff 0.05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 15% U1b

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s


1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 399

Version 2.2-00

By changing the phase angle on U1 connected to U-bus, between +/-45° you can check that the two outputs are activated for a PhaseDifflower than 45°. It should not operate for other values. See Figure 11:.

Figure 11: Test of phase difference.

4 Apply a PhaseShift setting of 10 deg. Change the phase anglebetween +55 and -35 and verify that the two outputs are activated forphase differences between these values but not for phase differencesoutside. See Figure 12:.

Change the PhaseShift setting to 350 deg. Change the phase anglebetween +35 and -55 and verify as above.


4.2.3 Test of frequency difference

The frequency difference is set at 50 mHz on the HMI, and the testshould verify that operation is achieved when the FreqDiff frequency dif-ference is lower than 50 mHz.

1 Use the same HMI setting as in section “Test of phase difference” onpage 398.

+45o

-45o

No operation

U-Bus

U-Line operation

U-Bus

+55o

-35o

No operation

U-bus

U-line operation

U-bus

PhaseShift=10 degPhaseShift=350 deg


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 400

2 Test with FreqDiff = 0 mHzApply voltages U-Line (UL1) equal to 100% U1b and U-Bus (U5)equal to 100% U1b, with a frequency difference equal to 0 mHz and aphase difference lower than 45°. Check that the SYN1-AUTOOK andSYN1-MANOK outputs are activated.

3 Test with FreqDiff = 1HzApply voltage to the U-line (UL1) equal to 100% U1b with a fre-quency equal to 50 Hz and voltage U-bus (U5) equal to 100% U1b,with a frequency equal to 49 Hz. Check that the two outputs are NOT activated.

4 The test can be repeated with different frequency values to verify thatthe function operates for values lower than the set ones. If the FREJAprogram, Test of synchronising relay, is used the frequency can bechanged continuously.

Note that a frequency difference also implies a floating mutual-phasedifference. So the SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputsmight NOT be stable, even though the frequency difference is within setlimits, because the phase difference is not stable!

4.2.4 Test of reference voltage

1 Use the same basic test connection as in Figure 10:. The UDiffbetween the voltage connected to U-bus and U-line should be 0%, sothat the SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs are activatedfirst.Change the U-Line voltage connection to UL2 without changing thesetting on the HMICheck that the two outputs are NOT activated.

2 The test can also be repeated by moving the U-line to the UL3 input.

4.3 Test of energising check

Use these voltage inputs:

U-line = UL1, UL2 or UL3 voltage input on the terminal.

U-bus = U5 voltage input on the terminal.

4.3.1 Test of dead line live bus (DLLB)

The test should verify that the energising function operates for a low volt-age on the U-Line and for a high voltage on the U-bus. This correspondsto an energising of a dead line to a live bus.

Use these HMI settings during the test if the final setting is not deter-mined.


1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 401

Version 2.2-00


2 Apply a single-phase voltage 100% U1b to the U-bus (U5), and a sin-gle-phase voltage 30% U1b to the U-line (UL1).

3 Check that the SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs areactivated.

4 Increase the U-Line (UL1) to 60% U1b and U-Bus(U5) to be equal to100% U1b. The outputs should NOT be activated.

5 The test can be repeated with different values on the U-Bus and theU-Line.

4.3.2 Dead bus live line (DBLL)

The test should verify that the energising function operates for a low volt-age on the U-bus and for a high one on the U-line. This corresponds to anenergising of a dead bus from a live line.

1 Change the HMI settings AutoEnerg and ManEnerg to DBLL.

2 Apply a single-phase voltage of 30% U1b to the U-bus (U5) and asingle-phase voltage of 100% U1b to the U-line (UL1).


4 Decrease the U-line to 60% U1b and keep the U-bus equal to 30%U1b. The outputs shall NOT be activated.

Table 3: Test settings for DLLB

Parameter: Setting:

Operation On

InputPhase UL1


PhaseShift 0 deg

URatio 1.00

AutoEnerg DLLB

ManEnerg DLLB

ManDBDL Off

UHigh 80% U1b

ULow 40% U1b

FreqDiff 0.05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 15% U1b

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 402

5 The test can be repeated with different values on the U-bus and the U-line.

4.3.3 Energising in both directions (DLLB or DBLL)

1 Change the HMI settings AutoEnerg and ManEnerg to Both.

2 Apply a single-phase voltage of 30% U1b to the U-line (UL1) and asingle-phase voltage of 100% U1b to the U-bus (U5).

3 Check that the “SYN1-AUTOOK” and “SYN1-MANOK” outputsare activated.

4 Change the connection so that the U-line (UL1) is equal to 100% U1band the U-bus (U5) is equal to 30% U1b.

5 The outputs should still be activated.


7 Restore the equipment to normal or desired settings.

4.3.4 Dead bus Dead line (DBDL)

The test should verify that the energising function operates for a low volt-age on both the U-bus the U-line, i.e closing of the breaker in a non ener-gised system.

1 Set AutoEnerg to Off and ManEnerg to DBLL.

Set ManDBDL to On.


3 Check that the SYN1-MANOK output is activated.

4 Increase the U-bus to 80% U1b and keep the U-lineequal to 30% U1b.

The outputs shall NOT be activated.

5 Repeat the test with ManEnerg set to DLLB and Both, and differentvalues on the U-bus and the U-line.

4.4 Test of voltage selection

This test should verify that the correct voltage is selected for the measure-ment in the energising function used in a double-bus arrangement. Applya single-phase voltage of 30% U1b to the U-line (UL1) and a single-phasevoltage of 100% U1b to the U-bus (U5).


1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 403

Version 2.2-00

If the SYN1-UB1/2OK inputs for the fuse failure are used, normally theymust be activated, thus activated and deactivated must be inverted in thedescription of tests below.


Table 4: Test settings for voltage selection

Parameter Setting

Operation On

InputPhase UL1

USelection DbleB

PhaseShift 0 deg

URatio 1.00

AutoEnerg Both

ManEnerg Both

ManDBDL Off

UHigh 80% U1b

ULow 40% U1b

FreqDiff 0,05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 15% U1b

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 404

2 Connect the signals below to binary inputs and binary outputs. Applysignals according to the table and verify that correct output signals aregenerated.

Table 5: Signals

VO

LT

AG

E F

RO

M

BU

S1

U5

VO

LT

AG

E F

RO

M

BU

S2

U4

BIN

AR

Y IN

PU

TS

CB

1OP

EN

CB

1CL

D

CB

2OP

EN

CB

2CL

D

UB

1FF

UB

2FF

VT

SU

BIN

AR

Y O

UT

PU

TS

AU

TO

OK

MA

NO

K

VS

UB

1

VS

UB

2

1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 01 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 01 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 01 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 01 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 01 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0

1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 00 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 10 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 10 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 10 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 10 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0


1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 405

Version 2.2-00

5 Appendix

5.1 Function block

5.2 Signal list

SYN1

SYN

BLOCKFD1OPENFD1CLDCB1OPEN

AUTOOKMANOK

CB1CLDCB2OPENCB2CLDUB1FFUB1OKUB2FFUB2OKVTSU

VSUB1VSUB2


SYNx- BLOCK IN Block of synchrocheck function x (x=1-3)

SYNx- FD1OPEN IN Feeder disconnector 1 open

SYNx- FD1CLD IN Feeder disconnector 1 closed

SYNx- CB1OPEN IN Breaker section 1 open

SYNx- CB1CLD IN Breaker section 1 closed



SYNx- UB1FF IN External voltage fuse failure, bus 1

SYNx- UB1OK IN External voltage fuse healthy, bus 1



SYNx- VTSU IN Block from internal fuse failure supervision or from external fuse failure of the line voltage.

SYNx- AUTOOK OUT Automatic synchronism/energising check OK

SYNx- MANOK OUT Manual synchronism/energising check OK

SYNx- VSUB1 OUT Voltage selection from bus 1



Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 406

5.3 Setting table


Operation Off, Release, On

Off Synchrocheck function Off/Release/On

InputPhase L1, L2, L3, L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1

L1 Select input voltage

UMeasure Ph/N, Ph/Ph Ph/N Select input voltage Ph/N or Ph/Ph

PhaseShift 0-360 degrees 0 Phase shift between U-bus and U-line

URatio 0.20-5.00 1.00 Voltage ratio between U-bus and U-line

USelection SingleBus, DbleBus

Single-Bus

Bus arrangement for voltage selection

AutoEnerg Off, DLLB, DBLL, Both

Off Auto energising/synchronising method

ManEnerg Off, DLLB, DBLL, Both

Off Manual energising/synchronising method

ManDBDL Off, On Off Manual dead bus and dead line energising

UHigh 50-120 % 80 High voltage limit, as a percentage of Ub

ULow 10-100 % 40 Low voltage limit, as a percentage of Ub

FreqDiff 0.05-0.30 Hz 0.20 Frequency difference limit

PhaseDiff 5-75 degrees 20 Phase difference limit

UDiff 5-50 % 20 Voltage difference limit, as a percentage of Ub

tAutoEnerg 0.000-60.000 s 0.100 Auto energising time delay period

tManEnerg 0.000-60.000 s 0.100 Manual energising time delay period

407Synchro- and energising check for double circuit breakers

1 Application

1.1 Synchrocheck The synchrocheck function is used for controlled closing of a circuit in aninterconnected network. When used, the function gives an enable signal atsatisfied voltage conditions across the breaker to be closed. When there is aparallel circuit established, the frequency is normally the same at the twosides of the open breaker. At power swings, e.g. after a line fault, an oscillat-ing difference can appear. Across the open breaker, there can be a phaseangle and a voltage amplitude difference due to voltage drop across the par-allel circuit or circuits. The synchrocheck function measures the differencebetween the U-line and the U-bus, regarding voltage (UDiff), phase angle(PhaseDiff), and frequency (FreqDiff). It operates and permits closing of thecircuit breaker when these conditions are simultaneously fulfilled.







SYN 1


FreqDiff<50-300mHz

Fuse fail

Fuse fail


U-LineU-Bus

1MRK 580 362-XEN


Synchro- and energising check for double circuit breakers

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 362-XENPage 6 – 408

In terminals intended for one bay the U-line voltage reference phase isselected on the human-machine interface (HMI). The reference voltagecan be single-phase L1, L2, L3 or phase-phase L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1. TheU-bus voltage must then be connected to the same phase or phases as arechosen on the HMI. Figure 2: shows the voltage connection.

In terminals intended for several bays, all voltage inputs are single phasecircuits. The voltage can be selected for single phase or phase-to-phasemeasurement on the HMI. All voltage inputs must be connected to thesame phase or phases.

The circuit breaker can be closed when the conditions for FreqDiff, PhaseDiff, and UDiff are fulfilled with the UHigh condition.

Figure 2: Connection of the synchrocheck function for one bay

U-Line

U-Bus 1

UL1

UL2

UL3

UN

U

UN

AD

L1,L2,L3L12,L23L31

ϕ

U

f

SYN1AUTOOK

SYN1MANOK

HMISetting

U-Bus 2U

UNL1,L2,L3L12,L23L31

ϕ

U

f

SYN2AUTOOK

SYN2MANOK

HMISetting

SYN1

SYN2

U5

U4


1MRK 580 362-XENPage 6 – 409

Version 2.2-00



The voltage level considered to be a non-energised bus or line is set on theHMI. An energising can occur — depending on the set direction of theenergising function. There are separate settable limits for energised (live)condition, UHigh, and non-energised (dead) ULow conditions. The equip-ment is considered energised if the voltage is above the set value UHigh(e.g. 80% of the base voltage), and non-energised if it is below the setvalue, ULow (e.g. 30% of the base voltage) The user can set the UHighcondition between 70-100% U1b and the ULow condition between 10-80% U1b.







UHigh>70-100%U1bULow<10-80%U1b

U-Bus U-Line


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 362-XENPage 6 – 410


Figure 4: Voltage connection in a double busbar double breaker arrangement. Alternatively, it can be extended up to two bays in one terminal

1.3 Voltage connection The principle for the connection arrangement is shown in Figure 4:. Oneterminal is used for the two circuit breakers in one or two bays dependentof selected option. There is one voltage transformer at each side of the cir-cuit breaker, and the voltage transformer circuit connections are straight-forward, without any special voltage selection.

Bus 1 Bay 1

U-Bus 1

U-Line 1

SYNCH.CHECK VOLT SELECTION I/O BI AISYN1

U5

ULx(1)

U-Bus

U-Line

FUSEUB1FUSEF1

FUSEUB1

FUSEF1 F1


SYN3

U5

UL2

U-Bus

U-Line

FUSEUB1FUSEF2


SYN4

U4

UL2

U-Bus

U-Line

FUSEUB2FUSEF2


U-Line 2

FUSEF2

U5

ULx(1)

UL2

From Bay 2

Bus 2

U-Bus 2U4

SYN2

U4

ULx(1)

U-Bus

U-Line

FUSEUB2FUSEF1


FUSEUB2


1MRK 580 362-XENPage 6 – 411

Version 2.2-00

For the synchrocheck and energising check, the voltage from Bus 1(SYN1(3)-U-bus) is connected to the single-phase analogue input (U5) onthe terminal and the voltage from Bus 2 (SYN2(4)-U-bus) is connected tothe single-phase analogue input (U4).

For the terminal intended for one bay the line voltage transformers areconnected as a three-phase voltage to the analogue inputs UL1, UL2, UL3(ULx) (SYN1(2)-U-Line) voltage. For the version intended for two baysthe line voltages are connected as two single phase inputs, UL1 for Bay 1and UL2 for Bay 2

The synchronism condition is set on the HMI of the terminal, and the volt-age is taken from Bus 1 and the Line or from Bus 2 and the Line (U-line).This means that the two synchrocheck units are operating without anyspecial voltage selection, but with the same line (U-line) voltage.

The configuration of internal signals, inputs, and outputs may be differentfor different busbar systems, and the actual configuration for the substa-tion must be done during engineering of the terminal.

1.3.1 Fuse failure and Voltage OK signals



The user can use the FUSE-VTSU signal from the built-in optional select-able fuse-failure function as an alternative to the external fuse-failure sig-nals.

In case of a fuse failure, the energising check (dead line check) is blockedvia the inputs (SYN1-UB1OK/FF orSYN1-VTSU).


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 362-XENPage 6 – 412



2.1 Synchro-check Description of input and output signals for the synchrocheck function.


SYNx-BLOCK General block input from any external condi-tion, that should block the synchrocheck.

SYNx-VTSU The SYNC function cooperates with the FUSE-VTSU connected signal, which is the built-in optional fuse failure detection. It can also be connected to external condition for fuse failure. This is a blocking condition for the energising function.




<<<><

50-300 mHz5-75 deg5-60 %70-100 %10-80 %

SYNx-VTSU

SYNx-BLOCK

SYNx x=1,2,3 or 4

SYNx-AUTO

SYNx-MANOK

Connectable inputs

From fuse failuredetection, line side(external or internal)

Connectableoutputs

General Block

SYNx-UB1OK

SYNx-UB1FFFrom fuse failuredetection bus side


1MRK 580 362-XENPage 6 – 413

Version 2.2-00


SYNx-AUTOOK Synchrocheck/energising OK. The output signal is high when the synchrocheck conditions set on the HMI are fulfilled. It can also include the energising condition, if selected. The signal can be used to release the auto-recloser before clos-ing attempt of the circuit breaker. It can also be used as a free signal.


Figure 6: Simplified logic diagram - Synchrocheck.

t& 1V

UDiff

OPERATIONOFF

RELEASEON

SYN1-BLOCK

UBusHigh

ULineHigh

FreqDiff

PhaseDiff

AUTOENERG1

MANENERG1

50ms

&

&

&

1V

SYN1

SYN1-AUTOOK

SYN1-MANOK

From energising checksee figure 7


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 362-XENPage 6 – 414

Figure 7: Simplified logic diagram - energising check.

t

&1V

OFFBothDLLBDBLL


50ms

&& AUTOENERG 1

UB Low

UENERG1OK

OFFBothDLLBDBLL

ManEnerg.

AutoEnerg.

1V 1V t0.00-60.0s

&1V

&& MANENERG 11V

1V

t0.00-60.0s

From voltage selection fig.

&OFFON

1V

ManDBDL

t50ms

To synchrocheckFigure 6:


1MRK 580 362-XENPage 6 – 415

Version 2.2-00

3 SettingThe setting parameters are accessible through the HMI. The parametersfor the synchrocheck function are found in the HMI tree under:

Settings Functions Group n

SynchroCheckSynchroCheck n (n=1-4)

(The number of SynchroCheck settings is dependent of the version)

Comments regarding settings.

3.1 Operation Off/Release/On

Off The synchrocheck function is off and theoutput is low.



3.2 Input phase The measuring phase of the UL1, UL2, UL3 line voltage, which can be ofa single-phase (phase-neutral) or two-phases (phase-phase). (Only avail-able in terminals intended for one bay).

3.3 UMeasure Selection of single-phase (phase-neutral) or two-phase (phase-phase)measurement. (Only available in terminals intended for several bays).


3.5 URatio The URatio is defined as URatio=UBus/ULine. A typical use of the set-ting is to compensate for the voltage difference caused if one wishes toconnect the UBus phase-phase and ULine phase-neutral. The “Inputphase”-setting should then be set to phase-phase and the “URatio”-settingto sqr3=1.732. This setting scales up the line voltage to equal level withthe bus voltage.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 362-XENPage 6 – 416



Off The energising function is Off.








1MRK 580 362-XENPage 6 – 417

Version 2.2-00



• ManEnerg = Off


The tests explained in the section “Synchrocheck tests” on page 418describe the settings, which can be used as references during testing, arepresented before the final settings are specified. After testing, restore theequipment to the normal or desired settings.

4.1 Test equipment A secondary injection test set with the possibility to alter the phase angleby regulation of the resistive and reactive components is needed. Here, thephase angle meter is also needed. To perform an accurate test of the fre-quency difference, a frequency generator at one of the input voltages isneeded. The tests can also be performed with the computer-aided test sys-tem FREJA which has a specially designed program for evaluating thesynchro-check function.Figure 8: shows the general test connection principle, which can be usedduring testing.

This description describes the test of the version intended for one bay.

Figure 8: General test connection for synchrocheck with three-phase voltage connected to the line side.

Testequipment

U-Bus

U-Line

N

U-Bus

N

UL1UL2UL3N


UMeasurePh/NPh/Ph

REx 5xx


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 362-XENPage 6 – 418

4.2 Synchrocheck tests


Set the voltage difference at 30% U1b on the HMI, and the test should checkthat operation is achieved when the voltage difference UDiff is lower than30% U1b.






SettingsFunctions

Group nSynchrCheck

SynchroCheck1

2 Test with UDiff = 0%• Apply voltages U-line (UL1) = 80% U1b and U-Bus (U5) = 80% U1b

with no frequency or phase difference.


• The test can be repeated with different voltage values to verify that

Table 1: Test settings for voltage difference

Parameter Setting

Operation On

InputPhase UL1


PhaseShift 0 deg

URatio 1.00

AutoEnerg Off

ManEnerg Off

ManDBDL Off

UHigh 70% U1b

ULow 40% U1b

FreqDiff 0.05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 30%U1b

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s


1MRK 580 362-XENPage 6 – 419

Version 2.2-00

the function operates within UDiff <30%.


U1b with no frequency or phase difference.

• Check that the two outputs are not activated.


equal to 80% U1b.

• Check that the two outputs are not activated.


lower.


lower.





Parameter Setting

Operation On

InputPhase UL1


PhaseShift 0 deg

URatio 1.00

AutoEnerg Off

ManEnerg Off

ManDBDL Off

UHigh 70% U1b

ULow 40% U1b

FreqDiff 0,05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 15% U1b

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 362-XENPage 6 – 420

2 Test with PhaseDiff = 0°

Apply voltages U-line (UL1) = 100% U1b and U-bus (U5) = 100% U1b,with no frequency or phase difference.Check that the SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs areactivated.

By changing the phase angle on U1 connected to U-bus, between +/-45° you can check that the two outputs are activated for a PhaseDifflower than 45°. It should not operate for other values. See Figure 9:.




Figure 10: Test of phase difference

+45o

-45o

No operation

U-Bus

U-Line operation

U-Bus

+55o

-35o

No operation

U-bus

U-line operation

U-bus



1MRK 580 362-XENPage 6 – 421

Version 2.2-00


The frequency difference is set at 50 mHz on the HMI, and the testshould verify that operation is achieved when the FreqDiff frequency dif-ference is lower than 50 mHz.



3 Test with FreqDiff = 1HzApply voltage to the U-line (UL1) equal to 100% U1b with a fre-quency equal to 50 Hz and voltage U-bus (U5) equal to 100% U1b,with a frequency equal to 49 Hz. Check that the two outputs are NOT activated.


But note that a frequency difference also implies a floating mutual-phase difference. So the SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK out-puts might not be stable, even though the frequency difference is withinset limits, because the phase difference is not stable!


1 Use the same basic test connection as in Figure 8:. The UDiff betweenthe voltage connected to U-bus and U-line should be 0%, so that theSYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs are activated first.Change the U-Line voltage connection to UL2 without changing thesetting on the HMICheck that the two outputs are not activated.










Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 362-XENPage 6 – 422









2 Apply a single-phase voltage of 30% U1b to the U-bus (U5) and a single-phase voltage of 100% U1b to the U-line (UL1).


Parameter Setting

Operation On

InputPhase UL1


PhaseShift 0 deg

URatio 1.00

AutoEnerg DLLB

ManEnerg DLLB

ManDBDL Off

UHigh 80% U1b

ULow 40% U1b

FreqDiff 0,05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 15% U1b

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s


1MRK 580 362-XENPage 6 – 423

Version 2.2-00


4 Decrease the U-line to 60% U1b and keep the U-bus equal to 30%U1b. The outputs should NOT be activated.






4 Change the connection so that the U-line (UL1) is equal to 100% U1band the U-bus (U5) is equal to 30% U1b.







Set ManDBDL to On




The outputs should NOT be activated.



Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 362-XENPage 6 – 424

5 Appendix

5.1 Function block

5.2 Signal list

5.3 Setting table

SYN1

SYNBLOCKUB1FFUB1OKVTSU

AUTOOKMANOK






SYNx- AUTOOK OUT Automatic synchro-/energising check OK

SYNx- MANOK OUT Manual synchro-/energising check OK













ManDBDL Off, On Off Manual deadbus and deadline energising








425Phasing, synchro- and energising check, single CB

1 Application

1.1 Phasing The phasing function is used to close a circuit breaker when two asyn-chronous systems are going to be connected. The breaker close commandis issued at the optimum time when conditions across the breaker are sat-isfied in order to avoid stress on the network and its components.

The systems are defined to be asynchronous when the frequency differ-ence between bus and line is larger than an adjustable parameter. If thefrequency difference is less than this threshold value the system is definedto have a parallel circuit and the synchro-check function is used.

The phasing function measures the difference between the U-line and theU-bus. It operates and issues a closing command to the circuit breakerwhen the calculated closing angle is equal to the measured phase angleand these conditions are simultaneously fulfilled.


• The difference in the voltage is smaller than the set value of UDiff.

• The difference in frequency is less than the set value of FreqDiff-Synch and larger than the set value of FreqDiff. If the frequency is less than FreqDiff the synchro-check is used. The bus and line fre-quencies must also be within a range of ±5 Hz from the rated fre-quency.

• The frequency rate of change is less than 0.21 Hz/s for both U-bus and U-line.

• The closing angle is less than approx. 60 degrees.

The phasing function compensates for measured slip frequency as well asthe circuit breaker closing delay. The phase advance is calculated continu-ously by the following formula:

(Equation 1)

Closing angle is the change in angle during breaker closing delay.

Closing angle 360° Meas. freq. diff. tBreaker⋅ ⋅=

1MRK 580 365-XEN


Phasing, synchro- and energising check, single CB

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 426

Figure 1: Phasing.

1.2 Synchrocheck The synchrocheck function is used for controlled closing of a circuit in aninterconnected network. When used, the function gives an enable signal atsatisfied voltage conditions across the breaker to be closed. When there isa parallel circuit established, the frequency is normally the same at thetwo sides of the open breaker. At power swings, e.g. after a line fault, anoscillating difference can appear. Across the open breaker, there can be aphase angle and a voltage amplitude difference due to voltage drop acrossthe parallel circuit or circuits. The synchrocheck function measures thedifference between the U-line and the U-bus, regarding voltage (UDiff),phase angle (PhaseDiff), and frequency (FreqDiff). It operates and per-mits closing of the circuit breaker when these conditions are simulta-neously fulfilled.





SYN 1

UHigh>70-100% UrUDiff<5-60% Ur

PhaseDiff<60o

FreqDiffSynch<50-500mHz

Fuse fail

Fuse fail


U-LineU-Bus

|dFbus/dt|,|dFline/dt|<0.21Hz/s

Fbus, Fline = Fr


1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 427

Version 2.2-00

Figure 2: Synchrocheck.

The reference voltage can be single-phase L1, L2, L3 or phase-phase L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1. The U-bus voltage must then be connected to the samephase or phases as are chosen on the HMI. Figure 3: shows the voltageconnection.

Figure 3: Connection of the phasing and synchrocheck function for one bay.

SYN 1


FreqDiff<50-300mHz

Fuse fail

Fuse fail


U-LineU-Bus

U-Line

U-Bus

UL1

UL2

UL3

UN

U

UN

AD

L1,L2,L3

L12,L23

L31

ϕ

U

f

SYN1AUTOOK

SYN1MANOK

HMISetting

dF/dtSYN1CLOSECB


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 428



The voltage level considered to be a non-energised bus or line is set on theHMI. An energising can occur — depending on the set direction of theenergising function. There are separate setable limits for energised (live)condition, UHigh, and non-energised (dead) ULow conditions. The equip-ment is considered energised if the voltage is above the set value UHigh(e.g. 80% of base voltage), and non-energised if it is below the set value,ULow (e.g. 30% of the base voltage). The user can set the UHigh condi-tion between 70-100% U1b and the ULow condition between 10-80%U1b.








U-Bus U-Line


1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 429

Version 2.2-00


1.4 Voltage selection The voltage selection function is used for the phasing and synchronism(SYN1) and energising check functions. When the terminal is used in adouble bus, the voltage that should be selected depends on the positions ofthe breakers and/or disconnectors. By checking the position of the discon-nectors and/or breakers auxiliary contacts, the terminal can select the rightvoltage for the synchronism and energising function. Select the type ofvoltage selection from the Synchro-check, Uselection, SingleBus or Dble-Bus on the HMI.

The configuration of internal signal inputs and outputs may be differentfor different busbar systems, and the actual configuration for the substa-tion must be done during engineering of the terminal.

Figure 5: Voltage connection in a single busbar arrangement.

1.4.1 Voltage selection for a single busbar

Single bus is selected on the HMI. Figure 5: shows the principle for theconnection arrangement. For the phasing, synchrocheck (SYN1) and ener-gising check function, there is one voltage transformer at each side of thecircuit breaker. The voltage transformer circuit connections are straightforward, no special voltage selection is needed.

Bus 1 Bay 1

U-Bus 1

U-Line 1

SYNCH VOLT SELECTION I/O BI AISYN1

U5

ULX(1)

U-Bus

U-Line

FUSEUB1FUSEF1

FUSEUB1FUSEF1 F1


U5

ULX(1)


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 430

For the phasing, synchrocheck and energising check, the voltage fromBus 1 (SYN1-U-Bus) is connected to the single phase analogue input(U5) on the terminal unit.

Fuse failure and Voltage OK signalsThe external fuse-failure signals or signals from a tripped fuseswitch/MCB are connected to binary inputs configured to inputs of thesynchrocheck functions in the terminal. There are two alternative connec-tion possibilities. Inputs named OK must be supplied if the voltage circuitis healthy. Inputs named FF must be supplied if the voltage circuit isfaulty.

The SYN1-UB1OK and SYN1-UB1FF inputs are related to the busbarvoltage. Configure them to the binary inputs that indicate the status of theexternal fuse failure of the busbar voltage. The SYN1-VTSU input isrelated to the line voltage from each line.


In case of a fuse failure, the energising check (dead line check) is blockedvia the inputs (SYN1-UB1OK/FF or SYN1-VTSU).

Figure 6: Voltage selection in a double bus arrangement.

Bus 1 Bay 1

U-Bus 1

U-Line 1


U5

ULX

U-Bus

U-Line

1CB11CB2

1CB1

FUSEF1

SYN1_CB1OPEN/CLDSYN1_CB2OPEN/CLD

U5

ULX

Bus 2

U-Bus 2U4

1CB2

U4

VOLT. SEL1

FUSEUB1FUSEUB2



FUSEF1SYN1_VTSU


1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 431

Version 2.2-00

1.4.2 Voltage selection for a double bus

Select DbleBus on the HMI. Figure 6: shows the principle for theconnection arrangement. For the phasing and synchrocheck (SYN1) andenergising check function, the voltages on the two busbars are selected byvoltage selection (VOLT.SEL1) in the terminal unit. The bus voltage fromBus 1 is fed to the U5 analogue single-phase input, and the bus voltagefrom Bus 2 is fed to the U4 analogue single-phase input. The line voltagetransformers are connected as a three-phase voltage UL1, UL2, UL3(ULx) to the input U-line.

The selection of the bus voltage is made by checking the position of thedisconnectors’ auxiliary contacts connected via binary inputs of the voltageselection logic inputs, SYN1-CB1OPEN (Disconnector section 1 open),SYN1-CB1CLD (Disconnector section 1 closed) and SYN1-CB2OPEN(Disconnector section 2 open), SYN1-CB2CLD (Disconnector section 2closed).



The SYN1-UB1(2)OK and SYN1-UB1(2)FF inputs are related to eachbusbar voltage. The SYN1-VTSU input is related to each line voltage.Configure them to the binary inputs that indicate the status of the externalfuse failure of the busbar respectively the line voltage. Only the fuse fail-ure of a selected voltage causes a blocking of the relevant energisingcheck unit.


In case of a fuse failure, the energising check (dead line check) is blockedvia the inputs (SYN1-UB1OK/FF, SYN1-UB2OK/FF or SYN1-VTSU).


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 432



2.1 In- and output signals Description of input and output signals for the phasing and synchrocheckfunction.


SYN1-BLOCK General block input from any external condition, that should block the phasing and thesynchrocheck.

SYN1-VTSU The SYNC function cooperates with the FUSE-VTSU connected signal, which is the built-inoptional fuse failure detection. It can also be

FreqDiffSynch

PhaseDiff

|dFbus/dt|

UHigh

<

<

<

>

50-500 mHz

60 deg

0.21 Hz/s

70-100 %

SYN1-VTSU

SYN1-BLOCK

SYN1

SYN1-AUTOOK

SYN1-MANOK

Connectable

From fuse failure

inputs

detection, lineside(external or internal)

Connectableoutputs

General Block SYN1-TESTCB

SYN1-CLOSECB

SYN1-INPROGR


<<<><

50-300 mHz5-75 deg5-60 %70-100 %10-80 %

|dFbus/dt| < 0.21 Hz/s

UDiff < 5-60 %

Fbus,Fline = Fr ± 5 Hz

SYN1-START

Phasing

Phasing and synchrocheck

Synchrocheck


Initiate Phasingoperation


1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 433

Version 2.2-00

connected to external condition for fuse failure.This is a blocking condition for the energisingfunction.

SYN1-START The signal initiates the phasing operation. Wheninitiated the function continues until the SYN1-CLOSECB pulse is submitted or it is stopped bythe SYN1-BLOCK signal. In test mode (SYN1-TESTCB) ends the phasing operation.


SYN1-TESTCB Output when the function is in test mode. In test mode a complete phasing sequence is per-formed except for closing of the circuit breaker. The output signal SYN1-TESTCB indicates when the SYN1-CLOSECB signal would have been submitted from the phasing function or when the conditions for paralleling are fulfilled, from the synchro-check function

SYN1-CLOSECB Close breaker command from phasing. Used to the circuit breaker or to be connected to the auto-reclosing function.

SYN1-INPROGR The signal is high when a phasing operation is in progress, i.e from the moment a SYN1-START is received until the operation is termi-nated. The operation is teminated when SYN1-CLOSECB or SYN1-TESTCB has been sub-mitted or if a SYN1-BLOCK is received.

SYN1-AUTOOK Synchrocheck/energising OK. The output signal is high when the synchro-check conditions set on the HMI are fulfilled. It can also include the energising condition, if selected. The signal can be used to release the autorecloser before closing attempt of the circuit breaker. It can also be used as a free signal.

SYN1-MANOK Same as above but with alternative settings of the direction for energising to be used during manual closing of the circuit breaker.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 434

Figure 8: Simplified voltage selection logic in a double bus, single breaker arrangement.

Description of the input and output signals shown in the above simplifiedlogic diagrams for voltage selection:

Input signal Description

SYN1-CB1OPEN Disconnector section 1 of Bay 1 open. Con-nected to the auxiliary contacts of a disconnec-tor section in a double-bus, single breakerarrangement, to inform the voltage selectionabout the positions.

SYN1-CB1CLD Disconnector section 1 of Bay 1 closed. Con-nected to the auxiliary contacts of a disconnectorsection in a double-bus, single breaker arrange-ment to inform the voltage selection about thepositions.

SYN1-CB2OPEN Same as above but for disconnector section 2.

SYN1-CB2CLD Same as above but for disconnector section 2.

SYN1-UB1FF External fuse failure input from busbar voltageBus 1 (U5). This signal can come from atripped fuse switch (MCB) on the secondaryside of the voltage transformer. In case of a fusefailure, the energising check is blocked.

SYN1-UB1OK No external voltage fuse failure (U5). Invertedsignal.

SYN1-UB2FF External fuse failure input from busbar voltageBus 2 (U4). This signal can come from atripped fuse switch (MCB) on the secondaryside of the voltage transformer. In case of fusefailure, the energising check is blocked.

1V

SYN1-CB1OPENSYN1-CB1CLD

SYN1-CB2OPEN

1V

SYN1-CB2CLD

SYN1-UB1FF

SYN1-VTSU

1V

UENERG1OKSYN1-UB1OK

SYN1-UB2FFSYN1-UB2OK

&

&

&

&

&

SYN1-VSUB1

SYN1-VSUB2

U5

U4

SYN1-U-BUS

To energising checkFigure 11:


1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 435

Version 2.2-00

SYN1-UB2OK No external voltage fuse failure (U4). Invertedsignal.

SYN1-VTSU Internal fuse failure detection or configured to abinary input indicating external fuse failure ofthe UL1, UL2, UL3 line-side voltage. Blocksthe energising function.


SYN1-VSUB1 Signal for indication of voltage selection fromBus 1 voltage.

SYN1-VSUB2 Signal for indication of voltage selection fromBus 1 voltage.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 436

Figure 9: Simplified logic diagram - Phasing

t&

UDiff

OPERATION SYNCHOFFON

SYN1-BLOCK

UBusHigh

ULineHigh

PhaseDiff < 60 deg

50ms

&

&

SYN1

SYN1-INPROGR

SYN1-CLOSECB

SYN1-START

SYN1-TESTCB

dF/dt Bus

dF/dt Line

Fbus 5 Hz

FreqDiffSynch

±

Fline 5 Hz±

PhaseDiff=Closing angle

&

TEST MODEOFFON

SYN1-AUTOOK

SYN1-MANOK

FreqDiff

1V

&tPulse

&

1V

&1V

&

1V

& SR

From energising- and synchro-

check (Figure 10:)


1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 437

Version 2.2-00

Figure 10: Simplified logic diagram - Synchrocheck

t& 1V

UDiff

OPERATIONOFF

RELEASEON

SYN1-BLOCK

UBusHigh

ULineHigh

FreqDiff

PhaseDiff

AUTOENERG1

MANENERG1

50ms

&

&

&

1V

SYN1

SYN1-AUTOOK

SYN1-MANOK

From energisingcheck, figure 11.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 438

Figure 11: Simplified logic diagram - Energising check

t

&1V

OFFBothDLLBDBLL


50ms

&& AUTOENERG 1

UB Low

UENERG1OK

OFFBothDLLBDBLL

ManEnerg.

AutoEnerg.

1V 1V t0.00-60.0s

&1V

&& MANENERG 11V

1V

t0.00-60.0s


&OFFON

1V

ManDBDL

t50ms

To synchrocheck,figure 10.


1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 439

Version 2.2-00

3 SettingThe setting parameters are accessible through the HMI. The parametersfor the phasing and synchrocheck function are found in the MMI treeunder:

SettingsFunctions

Group n (n=1-4)SynchroCheck

SynchroCheck1

3.1 Operation Off The synchrocheck function is off and theoutput is low.


On The synchro-check function is in service andthe output signal depends on the input condi-tions.

3.2 Input phase The measuring phase of the UL1, UL2, UL3 line voltage, which can be ofa single-phase (phase-neutral) or two-phases (phase-phase).


3.4 URatio The URatio is defined as URatio=UBus/ULine. A typical use of the set-ting is to compensate for the voltage difference caused if wished to con-nect the UBus phase-phase and ULine phase-neutral. The “Input phase”-setting should then be set to phase-phase and the “URatio”-setting tosqr3=1.732. This setting scales up the line voltage to equal level with thebus voltage.

3.5 USelection Selection of single or double bus voltage-selection logic.



Off The energising condition is not used, only the synchro-check.



Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 440






3.8 OperationSynch Off The phasing function is off and all outputsare low.

On The phasing function is in service and theoutput signals depends on the input condi-tions.

3.9 ShortPulse Off The closing pulse issued to the circuitbreaker will be of length=tPulse.

On The closing pulse issued to the circuitbreaker will be of length=one cycle time inthe internal logic.


1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 441

Version 2.2-00



• ManEnerg = Off


The tests explained in section “Synchrocheck tests” on page 443 describethe settings, which can be used as references during testing, are presentedbefore the final settings are specified. After testing, restore the equipmentto the normal or desired settings.

4.1 Test equipment A secondary injection test set with the possibility to alter the phase angleby regulation of the resistive and reactive components is needed. Here, thephase angle meter is also needed. To perform an accurate test of the fre-quency difference, a frequency generator at one of the input voltages isneeded. The tests can also be performed with the computer-aided test sys-tem FREJA.

FREJA has a specially designed program for evaluating the synchro-check function. Figure 12: shows the general test connection principle,which can be used during testing. This description describes the test of theversion intended for one bay.

Figure 12: General test connection for phasing and synchrocheck with three-phase voltage connected to the line side.

Testequipment

U-Bus

U-Line

N

U-Bus

N

UL1UL2UL3N


UMeasurePh/NPh/Ph

REx 5xx


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 442

4.2 Phasing tests These voltage inputs are used:





SettingsFunctions


SynchroCheck1

Table 1: Test settings for phasing

Parameter: Setting:

Operation Off

InputPhase UL1


PhaseShift 0 deg

URatio 1.00

AutoEnerg Off

ManEnerg Off

ManDBDL Off

UHigh 70% U1b

ULow 40% U1b

FreqDiff 0.05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 30% U1b

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s

OperationSynch On

ShortPulse Off

FreqDiffSynch 0.40 Hz

tPulse 0.20 s

tBreaker 0.20 s


1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 443

Version 2.2-00


The frequency difference is set at 0.40 Hz on the HMI, and the test shouldverify that operation is achieved when the FreqDiffSynch frequency dif-ference is lower than 0.40 Hz.

• Apply voltages U-line (UL1) = 80% U1b, f-line=50.0 Hz and U-Bus (U5) = 80% U1b, f-bus=50.3 Hz

• Check that a closing pulse is submitted with length=0.20 sec. and at closing angle=360 * 0.20 * 0.40=29 deg

• Repeat with U-Bus (U5) = 80% U1b, f-bus=50.5 Hz to verify that the function doesn’t operate when freq.diff is above limit.

• Repeat with different settings on tBreaker and FreqDiffSynch. Make sure that the calculated closing angle is less than 60 deg. Verify that closing command is issued at the correct phase angle when the fre-quency difference is less than the set value.



Set the voltage difference at 30% U1b on the HMI, and the test should checkthat operation is achieved when the voltage difference UDiff is lower than30% U1b.






SettingsFunctions


SynchroCheck1


Parameter: Setting:

Operation On

InputPhase UL1


PhaseShift 0 deg

URatio 1.00

AutoEnerg Off


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 444

2 Test with UDiff = 0%• Apply voltages U-line (UL1) = 80% U1b and U-Bus (U5) = 80%

U1b.




U1b.



equal to 80% U1b.



lower.


lower.



ManEnerg Off

ManDBDL Off

UHigh 70% U1b

ULow 40% U1b

FreqDiff 0.05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 30% U1b

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s

OperationSynch Off

ShortPulse Off


tPulse 0.2 s

tBreaker 0.2 s



1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 445

Version 2.2-00


2 Test with PhaseDiff = 0° Apply voltages U-line (UL1) = 100% U1b and U-bus (U5) = 100% U1b,with a phase difference equal to 0° and a frequency difference that islower than 50 mHz.Check that the SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs areactivated.

3 The test can be repeated with other PhaseDiff values to verify that thefunction operates for values lower than the set ones. By changing thephase angle on U1 connected to U-bus, between +/- 45°. The usercan check that the two outputs are activated for a PhaseDiff lowerthan 45°. It should not operate for other values. See Figure 13:.


PARAMETER: SETTING:

Operation On

InputPhase UL1


PhaseShift 0 deg

URatio 1.00

AutoEnerg Off

ManEnerg Off

UHigh 70% U1b

ULow 40% U1b

FreqDiff 0.05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 15% U1b

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s

ManDBDL Off

OperationSynch Off

ShortPulse Off


tPulse 0.2 s

tBreaker 0.2 s


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 446





+45o

-45o

No operation

U-Bus

U-Line operation

U-Bus

+55o

-35o

No operation

U-bus

U-line operation

U-bus



1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 447

Version 2.2-00


The frequency difference is set at 50 mHz on the HMI, and the test shouldverify that operation is achieved when the FreqDiff frequency differenceis lower than 50 mHz.



3 Test with FreqDiff = 1HzApply voltage to the U-line (UL1) equal to 100% U1b with a fre-quency equal to 50 Hz and voltage U-bus (U5) equal to 100% U1b,with a frequency equal to 49 Hz.Check that the two outputs are NOT activated.


Note! A frequency difference also implies a floating mutual-phase dif-ference. So the SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs mightNOT be stable, even though the frequency difference is within set limits,because the phase difference is not stable!


1 Use the same basic test connection as in Figure 12:. The UDiffbetween the voltage connected to U-bus and U-line should be 0%, sothat the SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs are activatedfirst.Change the U-Line voltage connection to UL2 without changing thesetting on the HMICheck that the two outputs are NOT activated.









Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 448








Parameter: Setting:

Operation On

InputPhase UL1

PhaseShift 0 deg

URatio 1.00


AutoEnerg DLLB

ManEnerg DLLB

ManDBDL Off

UHigh 80% U1b

ULow 40% U1b

FreqDiff 0.05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 15% U1b

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s

OperationSynch Off

ShortPulse Off


tPulse 0.2 s

tBreaker 0.2 s


1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 449

Version 2.2-00












4 Change the connection so that the U-line (UL1) is equal to100% U1band the U-bus (U5) is equal to 30% U1b.







Set ManDBDL to On.




Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 450

4 Increase the U-bus to 80% U1b and keep the U-lineequal to 30% U1b.The outputs should NOT be activated.


4.4.5 Test of voltage selection

This test should verify that the correct voltage is selected for the measure-ment in the energising function used in a double-bus arrangement. Applya single-phase voltage of 30% U1b to the U-line (UL1) and a single-phasevoltage of 100% U1b to the U-bus (U5).

If the SYN1-UB1/2OK inputs for the fuse failure are used, normally theymust be activated, thus activated and deactivated must be inverted in thedescription of tests below.


Table 5: Test settings for voltage selection

Parameter Setting

Operation On

InputPhase UL1

USelection DbleBus

PhaseShift 0 deg

URatio 1.00

AutoEnerg Both

ManEnerg Both

ManDBDL Off

UHigh 80% U1b

ULow 40% U1b

FreqDiff 0,05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 15% U1b

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s

OperationSynch Off

ShortPulse Off


tPulse 0.2 s

tBreaker 0.2 s


1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 451

Version 2.2-00

2 Connect the signals below to binary inputs and binary outputs. Applysignals according to the table and verify that correct output signals aregenerated.

Table 6: Signals

VO

LT

AG

E F

RO

M

BU

S1

U5

VO

LT

AG

E F

RO

M

BIN

AR

Y IN

PU

TS

CB

1OP

EN

CB

1CL

D

CB

2OP

EN

CB

2CL

D

UB

1FF

UB

2FF

VT

SU

BIN

AR

Y O

UT

PU

TS

AU

TO

OK

MA

NO

K

VS

UB

1

VS

UB

2

1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 01 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 01 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 01 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 01 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 01 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0

1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 00 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 10 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 10 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 10 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 10 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 452

5 Appendix

5.1 Function block

5.2 Signal list

SYN1

SYN

BLOCKFD1OPENFD1CLDCB1OPEN

AUTOOKMANOK

CB1CLDCB2OPENCB2CLDUB1FFUB1OKUB2FFUB2OKVTSU

VSUB1VSUB2

START

TESTCBCLOSECBINPROGR



SYNx- FD1OPEN IN Feeder disconnector 1 open

SYNx- FD1CLD IN Feeder disconnector 1 closed










SYNx- START IN Initiate phasing operation

SYNx- AUTOOK OUT Automatic synchronism/energising check OK




SYNx- TESTCB OUT Close circuit breaker test output

SYNx- CLOSECB OUT Close circuit breaker pulse

SYNx- INPROGR OUT Phasing operation in progress


1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 453

Version 2.2-00

5.3 Setting table









USelection SingleBus, DbleBus

Single-Bus

Bus arrangement for voltage selection





ManDBDL Off, On Off Manual dead-bus and dead-line energising








Operation-Synch

Off, On Off Phasing function Off/On

ShortPulse Off, On Off Short pulse Off/On

FreqDiff-Synch

0.05-0.50 Hz 00.30 Frequency diff limit for phasing

tPulse 0.000-60.000 s 0.200 Breaker closing pulse duration

tBreaker 0.02-0.50 s 0.20 Closing time of the breaker


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 454

455Phasing, synchro- and energising check, double CBs

1 Application

1.1 Phasing The phasing function is used to close a circuit breaker when two asyn-chronous systems are going to be connected. The close breaker commandis issued at the optimum time when conditions across the breaker are sat-isfied in order to avoid stress on the network and its components.

The systems are defined to be asynchronous when the frequency differ-ence between bus and line is larger than an adjustable parameter. If thefrequency difference is less than this treshold value the system is definedto have a parallel circuit and the synchro-check function is used.

The phasing function measures the difference between the U-line and theU-bus. It operates and issues a closing command to the circuit breakerwhen the calculated closing angle is equal to the measured phase angleand these conditions are simultaneously fulfilled.


• The difference in the voltage is smaller than the set value of UDiff.

• The difference in frequency is less than the set value of FreqDiff-Synch and larger than the set value of FreqDiff. If the frequency is less than FreqDiff the synchro-check is used. The bus and line fre-quencies must also be within a range of ±5 Hz from the rated fre-quency.

• The frequency rate of change is less than 0.21 Hz/s for both U-bus and U-line.

• The closing angle is less than approx. 60 degrees.

The phasing function compensates for measured slip frequency as well asthe circuit breaker closing delay. The phase advance is calculated continu-ously by the following formula:

(Equation 1)

Closing angle is the change in angle during breaker closing delay.

Closing angle 360° Meas. freq. diff. tBreaker⋅ ⋅=

1MRK 580 366-XEN


Phasing, synchro- and energising check, double CBs

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 456

Figure 1: Phasing.

1.2 Synchrocheck The synchrocheck function is used for controlled closing of a circuit in aninterconnected network. When used, the function gives an enable signal atsatisfied voltage conditions across the breaker to be closed. When there isa parallel circuit established, the frequency is normally the same at thetwo sides of the open breaker. At power swings, e.g. after a line fault, anoscillating difference can appear. Across the open breaker, there can be aphase angle and a voltage amplitude difference due to voltage drop acrossthe parallel circuit or circuits. The synchrocheck function measures thedifference between the U-line and the U-bus, regarding voltage (UDiff),phase angle (PhaseDiff), and frequency (FreqDiff). It operates and per-mits closing of the circuit breaker when these conditions are simulta-neously fulfilled.




The function can be used as a condition to be fulfilled before the breakeris closed at manual closing and/or together with the autorecloser function.

SYN 1

UHigh>70-100% UrUDiff<5-60% Ur

PhaseDiff<60o

FreqDiffSynch<50-500mHz

Fuse fail

Fuse fail


U-LineU-Bus

|dFbus/dt|,|dFline/dt|<0.21 Hz/s

Fbus, Fline = Fr 5 Hz±


1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 457

Version 2.2-00



The reference voltage can be single-phase L1, L2, L3 or phase-phase L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1. The U-bus voltage must then be connected to the samephase or phases as are chosen on the HMI. Figure 3: shows the voltageconnection.

SYN 1


FreqDiff<50-300mHz

Fuse fail

Fuse fail


U-LineU-Bus


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 458

Figure 3: Connection of the phasing and synchrocheck function for one bay.

U-Line

U-Bus 1

UL1

UL2

UL3

UN

U

UN

AD

L1,L2,L3L12,L23L31

SYN1AUTOOK

SYN1MANOK

HMISetting

U-Bus 2U

UNL1,L2,L3L12,L23L31SYN2

AUTOOK

SYN2MANOK

HMISetting

SYN1

SYN2

ϕ

U

f

dF/dt

ϕ

U

f

dF/dt

SYN1CLOSECB

SYN2CLOSECB

U5

U4


1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 459

Version 2.2-00



The voltage level considered to be a non-energised bus or line is set on theHMI. An energising can occur — depending on the set direction of theenergising function. There are separate settable limits for energised (live)condition, UHigh, and non-energised (dead) ULow conditions. The equip-ment is considered energised if the voltage is above the set value UHigh(e.g. 80% of base voltage), and non-energised if it is below the set value,ULow (e.g. 30% of the base voltage) The user can set the UHigh condi-tion between 70-100% U1b and the ULow condition between 10-80%U1b.








U-Bus U-Line


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 460


Figure 5: Voltage connection in a double busbar double breaker arrangement.

1.4 Voltage connection The princip for the connection arrangement is shown in Figure 5:. Oneterminal unit is used for the two circuit breakers in one bay. There is onevoltage transformer at each side of the circuit breaker, and the voltagetransformer circuit connections are straight forward, without any specialvoltage selection.For the synchrocheck and energising check, the voltage from Bus 1(SYN1-U-bus) is connected to the single-phase analogue input (U5) onthe terminal and the voltage from Bus 2 (SYN2-U-bus) is connected to thesingle-phase analogue input (U4).

The line voltage transformers are connected as a three-phase voltage tothe analogue inputs UL1, UL2, UL3 (SYN1(2)-U-Line) voltage.

The synchronism condition is set on the HMI of the terminal unit, and thevoltage is taken from Bus 1 and the Line or from Bus 2 and the Line (U-line). This means that the two synchro-check units are operating withoutany special voltage selection, but with the same line (U-line) voltage.

The configuration of internal signals, inputs, and outputs may be differentfor different busbar systems, and the actual configuration for the substa-tion must be done during engineering of the terminal.

Bus 1 Bay 1

U-Bus 1

U-Line 1


U5

ULX

U-Bus

U-Line

FUSEUB1FUSEF1

FUSEUB1

FUSEF1 F1


U5

ULX

Bus 2

U-Bus 2U4

SYN2

U4

ULX

U-Bus

U-Line

FUSEUB2FUSEF1


FUSEUB2


1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 461

Version 2.2-00

1.4.1 Fuse failure and Voltage OK signals




In case of a fuse failure, the energising check (dead line- check) is blockedvia the input (SYN1-UB1OK/FF or SYN1-VTSU).


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 462



2.1 Input and output signals

Description of input and output signals for the phasing and synchro-checkfunction.


SYNx-BLOCK General block input from any external condition, that should block the phasing and the syn-chrocheck.

SYNx-VTSU The SYNC function cooperates with the FUSE-VTSU connected signal, which is the built-in optional fuse failure detection. It can also be

FreqDiffSynch

PhaseDiff

|dFbus/dt|

UHigh

<

<

<

>

50-500 mHz

60 deg

0.21 Hz/s

70-100 %

SYNx-VTSU

SYNx-BLOCK

SYNx

SYNx-AUTOOK

SYNx-MANOK

Connectable

From fuse failure

inputs

detection, lineside(external or internal)

Connectableoutputs

General block SYNx-TESTCB

SYNx-CLOSECB

SYNx-INPROGR


<<<><

50-300 mHz5-75 deg5-60 %70-100 %10-80 %

|dFbus/dt| < 0.21 Hz/s

UDiff < 5-60 %


Phasing

Phasing and synchrocheck

Synchrocheck


x = 1 or 2

Initiate phasingoperation SYNx-START


1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 463

Version 2.2-00

connected to external condition for fuse failure. This is a blocking condition for the energising function.



SYNx-START The signal initiates the phasing operation. Wheninitiated the function continues until the SYNx-CLOSECB pulse is submitted or it is stopped bythe SYNx-BLOCK signal. In test mode SYNx-TESTCB ends the phasing operation.


SYNx-TESTCB Output when the function is in test mode. In test mode a complete phasing sequence is per-formed except for closing of the circuit breaker. The output signal SYNx-TESTCB indicates when the SYNx-CLOSECB signal would have been submitted from the phasing function or when the conditions for paralleling are fulfilled, from the synchro-check function.

SYNx-CLOSECB Close breaker command from phasing. Used to control the circuit breaker or to be connected to the auto-reclosing function.

SYNx-INPROGR The signal is high when a phasing operation is in progress, i.e from the moment a SYNx-START is received until the operation is termi-nated. The operation is teminated when SYNx-CLOSECB or SYNx-TESTCB has been sub-mitted or if a SYNx-BLOCK is received.

SYNx-AUTOOK Synchrocheck/energising OK. The output signal is high when the synchrocheck conditions set on the HMI are fulfilled. It can also include the energising condition, if selected. The signal can be used to release the autorecloser before closing attempt of the circuit breaker. It can also be used as a free signal.



Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 464

Figure 7: Simplified logic diagram - Phasing

t&

UDiff

OPERATION SYNCHOFFON

SYN1-BLOCK

UBusHigh

ULineHigh

PhaseDiff < 60 deg

50ms

&

&

SYN1

SYN1-INPROGR

SYN1-CLOSECB

SYN1-START

SYN1-TESTCB

dF/dt Bus

dF/dt Line

Fbus 5 Hz

FreqDiffSynch

±

Fline 5 Hz±

PhaseDiff=Closing angle

&

TEST MODEOFFON

SYN1-AUTOOK

SYN1-MANOK

FreqDiff

1V

&tPulse

&

1V

&1V

&

1V

& SR

From energising and synchro-

check (Figure 8:)


1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 465

Version 2.2-00

Figure 8: Simplified logic diagram - Synchrocheck

t& 1V

UDiff

OPERATIONOFF

RELEASEON

SYN1-BLOCK

UBusHigh

ULineHigh

FreqDiff

PhaseDiff

AUTOENERG1

MANENERG1

50ms

&

&

&

1V

SYN1

SYN1-AUTOOK

SYN1-MANOK

From energisingcheck, figure 9


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 466

Figure 9: Simplified logic diagram - Energising check.

t

&1V

OFFBothDLLBDBLL


50ms

&& AUTOENERG 1

UB Low

UENERG1OK

OFFBothDLLBDBLL

ManEnerg.

AutoEnerg.

1V 1V t0.00-60.0s

&1V

&& MANENERG 11V

1V

t0.00-60.0s

&OFFON

1V

ManDBDL

t50ms

To synchrocheck,figure 8



1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 467

Version 2.2-00

3 SettingThe setting parameters are accessible through the HMI. The parametersfor the synchro-check function are found in the MMI tree under:

SettingsFunctions


SynchroCheck1 (and 2)

3.1 Operation Off The function is off and the output is low.



3.2 Input phase The measuring phase of the UL1, UL2, UL3 line voltage, which can be ofa single-phase (phase-neutral) or two-phases (phase-phase).


3.4 URatio The URatio is defined as URatio=UBus/ULine. A typical use of the set-ting is to compensate for the voltage difference caused if wished to con-nect the UBus phase-phase and ULine phase-neutral. The “Input phase”-setting should then be set to phase-phase and the “URatio”-setting tosqr3=1.732. This setting scales up the line voltage to equal level with thebus voltage.



Off The energising condition is not used only the synchro-check.





Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 468

tAutoEnerg The required consecutive time of fulfilment of the ener-gising condition to achieve SYN1-AUTOOK.

tManEnerg The required consecutive time of fulfilment of the ener-gising condition to achieve SYN1-MANOK.


3.7 OperationSynch Off The phasing function is off and all outputsare low.

On The phasing function is in service and theoutput signals depends on the input condi-tions.

3.8 ShortPulse Off The closing pulse issued to the circuitbreaker will be of length=tPulse.

On The closing pulse issued to the circuitbreaker will be of length=one cycle time inthe internal logic.


1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 469

Version 2.2-00



• ManEnerg = Off


The tests explained in section “Synchrocheck tests” on page 471“describe the settings, which can be used as references during testing, arepresented before the final settings are specified. After testing, restore theequipment to the normal or desired settings.

4.1 Test equipment A secondary injection test set with the possibility to alter the phase angleby regulation of the resistive and reactive components is needed. Here, thephase angle meter is also needed. To perform an accurate test of the fre-quency difference, a frequency generator at one of the input voltages isneeded. The tests can also be performed with the computer-aided test sys-tem FREJA.

FREJA has a specially designed program for evaluating the synchrocheckfunction. Figure 10: shows the general test connection principle, whichthe user can use during testing. This description describes the test of theversion intended for one bay.

Figure 10: General test connection for synchrocheck with three-phase voltage connected to the line side.

Testequipment

U-Bus

U-Line

N

U-Bus

N

UL1UL2UL3N


UMeasurePh/NPh/Ph

REx 5xx


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 470

4.2 Phasing tests These voltage inputs are used:





SettingsFunctions



Table 1: Test settings for phasing

PARAMETER: SETTING:

Operation Off

InputPhase UL1


PhaseShift 0 deg

URatio 1.00

AutoEnerg Off

ManEnerg Off

ManDBDL Off

UHigh 70% U1b

ULow 40% U1b

FreqDiff 0.05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 30% U1b

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s

OperationSynch On

ShortPulse Off


tPulse 0.20 s

tBreaker 0.20 s


1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 471

Version 2.2-00


The frequency difference is set at 0.40 Hz on the HMI, and the test shouldverify that operation is achieved when the FreqDiffSynch frequency dif-ference is lower than 0.40 Hz.

• Apply voltages U-line (UL1) = 80% U1b, f-line=50.0 Hz and U-Bus (U5) = 80% U1b, f-bus=50.3 Hz.

• Check that a closing pulse is submitted with length=0.20 sec. and at closing angle=360 * 0.20 * 0.40=29 deg.

• Repeat with U-Bus (U5) = 80% U1b, f-bus=50.5 Hz to verify that the function does not operate when freq.diff is above limit.

• Repeat with different settings on tBreaker and FreqDiffSynch. Make sure that the calculated closing angle is less than 60 deg. Verify that closing command is issued at the correct phase angle when the fre-quency difference is less than the set value.



Set the voltage difference at 30% U1b on the HMI, and the test shouldcheck that operation is achieved when the voltage difference UDiff islower than 30% U1b.






SettingsFunctions




Parameter Setting

Operation On

InputPhase UL1


PhaseShift 0 deg

URatio 1.00

AutoEnerg Off


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 472

2 Test with UDiff = 0%• Apply voltages U-line (UL1) = 80% U1b and U-Bus (U5) = 80%

U1b, with no frequency or phase difference.




U1b.



equal to 80% U1b.



lower.


lower.



ManEnerg Off

ManDBDL Off

UHigh 70% U1b

ULow 40% U1b

FreqDiff 0.05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 30% U1b

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s

OperationSynch Off

ShortPulse Off


tPulse 0.2 s

tBreaker 0.2 s



1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 473

Version 2.2-00


2 Test with PhaseDiff = 0°Apply voltages U-line (UL1) = 100% U1b and U-bus (U5) = 100% U1b,with no frequency or phase difference.Check that the SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs areactivated.


Parameter Setting

Operation On

InputPhase UL1


PhaseShift 0 deg

URatio 1.00

AutoEnerg Off

ManEnerg Off

ManDBDL Off

UHigh 70% U1b

ULow 40% U1b

FreqDiff 0,05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 15% U1b

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s

OperationSynch Off

ShortPulse Off


tPulse 0.2 s

tBreaker 0.2 s


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 474

3 The test can be repeated with other PhaseDiff values to verify that thefunction operates for values lower than the set ones. By changing thephase angle on U1 connected to U-bus, between +/- 45°. The user cancheck that the two outputs are activated for a PhaseDiff lower than45°. It should not operate for other values. See figure 11.





+45o

-45o

No operation

U-Bus

U-Line operation

U-Bus

+55o

-35o

No operation

U-bus

U-line operation

U-bus



1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 475

Version 2.2-00


The frequency difference is set at 50 mHz on the HMI, and the test shouldverify that operation is achieved when the FreqDiff frequency differenceis lower than 50 mHz.



3 Test with FreqDiff = 1HzApply voltage to the U-line (UL1) equal to 100% U1b with a fre-quency equal to 50 Hz and voltage U-bus (U5) equal to 100% U1b,with a frequency equal to 49 Hz.Check that the two outputs are NOT activated.


Note! A frequency difference also implies a floating mutual-phase dif-ference. So the SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs mightNOT be stable, even though the frequency difference is within set limits,because the phase difference is not stable!


1 Use the same basic test connection as in Figure 10:. The UDiffbetween the voltage connected to U-bus and U-line should be 0%, sothat the SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs are activatedfirst.Change the U-Line voltage connection to UL2 without changing thesetting on the HMI.Check that the two outputs are NOT activated.









Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 476








Parameter Setting

Operation On

InputPhase UL1


PhaseShift 0 deg

URatio 1.00

AutoEnerg DLLB

ManEnerg DLLB

ManDBDL Off

UHigh 80% U1b

ULow 40% U1b

FreqDiff 0,05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 15% U1b

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s

OperationSynch Off

ShortPulse Off


tPulse 0.2 s

tBreaker 0.2 s


1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 477

Version 2.2-00




2 Apply a single-phase voltage of 30% U1b to the U-bus (U5) and a single-phase voltage of 100% U1b to the U-line (UL1).








4 Change the connection so that the U-line (UL1) is equal to100% U1band the U-bus (U5) is equal to 30% U1b.







Set ManDBDL to On.




Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 478


The outputs should NOT be activated.



1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 479

Version 2.2-00

5 Appendix

5.1 Function block

5.2 Signal list

SYN1

SYN

BLOCKUB1FFUB1OKVTSU

AUTOOKMANOKTESTCB

CLOSECBINPROGRSTART


SYNx- BLOCK IN Block of synchro- and energising check function x (x=1-2)




SYNx- START IN Initiation of phasing operation

SYNx- AUTOOK OUT Automatic synchro-/energising check OK


SYNx- TESTCB OUT Output from phasing and synchrocheck when SYNx is in test mode

SYNx- CLOSECB OUT Close circuit breaker pulse from phasing

SYNx- INPROGR OUT Phasing operation in progress


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 480

5.3 Setting table












ManDBDL Off, On Off Manual dead-bus and dead-line energising








Operation-Synch

Off, On Off Phasing function Off/On

ShortPulse Off, On Off Short pulse Off/On

FreqDiff-Synch

0.05-0.50 Hz 00.30 Frequency diff limit for phasing

tPulse 0.000-60.000 s 0.200 Breaker closing pulse duration

tBreaker 0.02-0.50 s 0.20 Closing time of the breaker

481Autorecloser, single, two and/or three phase

1 ApplicationAutomatic reclosing (AR) is a well-established method to restore the ser-vice of a power line after a transient line fault. The majority of line faultsare flashover arcs, which are transient by nature. When the power line isswitched off by operation of line protection and line breakers, the arc de-ionises and recovers voltage withstand at a somewhat variable rate. So acertain line dead time is needed. But then line service can resume by theauto-reclosing of the line breakers. Select the length of the dead time toenable good probability of fault arc de-ionisation and successful reclos-ing.

For the individual line breakers and auto-reclosing equipment, the Auto-reclose open time (AR open time) expression is used.At simultaneous tripping and reclosing at the two line ends, Auto-recloseopen time equals the dead time of the line. Otherwise these two times maydiffer.

In case of a permanent fault, the line protection trips again at reclosing toclear the fault. Figure 1: shows the operation sequence and some expres-sions.

The reclosing function can be selected to perform single-phase, two-phaseand/or three-phase reclosing from six single-shot to multiple-shot reclos-ing programs. The three-phase auto-reclose open time can be set to giveeither high-speed auto-reclosing (HSAR) or delayed auto-reclosing(DAR).

Three-phase auto-reclosing can be performed with or without the use ofsynchro-check and energising check.

Single-phase tripping and single-phase reclosing is a way to limit theeffect of a single-phase line fault to system operation. Especially at thehigher voltages, the majority of line faults are of the single-phase type.The method is of particular value to maintain system stability in systemswith limited meshing or parallel routing. It requires individual operationof each phase of the breakers, which is most common at the higher trans-mission voltages.

A somewhat longer dead time may be required at single-phase reclosingcompared to high-speed three-phase reclosing, due to influence on thefault arc of the non-tripped phases.

1MRK 580 367-XEN


Autorecloser, single, two and/or three phase

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 482

Figure 1: Single-shot auto-reclosing at a permanent fault.

Lineprotection

Circuitbreaker

Auto-reclosingfunction

Open

Fault duration AR open time for breaker Fault duration

Closed

Operate time

Break time Break timeClosing time

Res

ets

AR

res

et

Operate time

Set AR open time Reclaim time

Star

t AR

Rec

losi

ngco

mm

and

Clo

se c

omm

and

Ope

rate

s

Fau

lt

Ope

rate

s

Inst

at o

f fa

ult

Res

ets

Con

tact

clo

sed

Arc

ext

ingu

ishe

s

Con

tact

s se

para

ted

Tri

p co

mm

and


1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 483

Version 2.2-00

2 Theory of operationThe auto-reclosing function first co-operates with the line protection func-tions, the trip function, the circuit-breaker and the synchro-check func-tion. It can also be influenced by other protection functions such as shuntreactor protection through binary input signals and AR On/Off manualcontrol. It can provide information to the disturbance and service reportfunctions, event recording, indications, and reclosing operation counters.

The reclosing function outputs and counters can be viewed and reset onthe local HMI at:


AutoRecloserAutoRecloser n

The auto-reclosing is a pure logical function that works with logical orbinary signals, logical operations and timers.

2.1 Input and output signals, single breaker arrangement

Figure 2: Single-, two- and three-phase auto-reclosing; input and out-put signals.

The input signals can be connected to binary inputs or internal functionsof the terminal. The output signals can be connected to binary outputrelays. It is also possible to connect the signals to free logic functions, forexample OR-gates, and in that way add connection links.

SYNCHRO-CHECKPHASING

PRO

TE

CT

ION

AN

D T

RIP

CAN BE CONNECTED TOBINARY INPUTS

AR CONNECTED TO BINARY OUTPUTS

2nd AR**

** ONLY IN SOME TERMINALS

ONOFFBLKONBLOCKOFF

BLOCKEDSETON

INPROGRACTIVE

INHIBITRESET

STARTSTTHOL

TR2PTR3P

CBREADY

UNSUCREADY

P1PP3P

CLOSECB1PT12PT1

T1T2T3T4

WFMASTER

PLCLOSTSYNCWAIT

CBCLOSED

TRSOTF


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 484

The input and output signals which can be interfaced with the auto-recloser 1 are presented in this document. Data is the same for other auto-recloser functions (2 to 6) with signal prefix AR02- to AR06-.

Input signals:AR01-ON Switches the auto-reclosing On

(at Operation = Stand-by).

AR01-OFF Switches the auto-reclosing Off (at Operation =Stand-by).

AR01-BLKON Sets the auto-recloser in blocked state.

AR01-BLOCKOFF Releases the auto-recloser from the blocked state.

AR01-INHIBIT Inhibits an auto-reclosing cycle. Interrupts andblocks auto-reclosing. The input can, for example,be activated by a shunt reactor, delayed back-upprotection or breaker-failure protection. There is atInhibit reset timer to ensure blocking during a fewseconds after the signal is removed.

AR01-RESET Resets the auto-recloser.

AR01-START Auto-reclosing start by a protection trip signal.It also makes the reclosing program continue at arepeated trip, if multi-shot reclosing is selected.

AR01-STTHOL Start of thermal overload protection. Will block theauto-reclosing.

AR01-TRSOTF Protection trip switch-onto-fault. This signal alonedoes not start reclosing. But at a reclosing onto apermanent fault it may appear and let the functionmove on to AR01-UNSUC (unsuccessful) or sec-ond-shot reclosing as programmed.

AR01-TR2P Two-phase trip. Status signal to the auto-reclosingfunction that a two-phase tripping occurred.

AR01-TR3P Three-phase trip. Status signal to the auto-reclosingfunction that a three-phase tripping occurred.

AR01-CBREADY A condition for the start of a reclosing cycle. Thecircuit breaker must have its operating gear ready(manoeuvre spring charged) for a Close-Open(CO) or an Open-Close-Open (OCO) operations toallow the start of an auto-reclosing cycle. Thisinput can also be connected to circuits that monitorthe breaker pressure. If it is not ready at start, it isunlikely that it is ready by the end of the AR opentime.

AR01-CBCLOSED Circuit breaker closed. A condition for the start of areclosing cycle. The circuit breaker (CB) must beclosed at least for five seconds to allow a new ARcycle to start. It prevents start at closing onto afault. It also prevents the reclosing of a breaker thatis open at the protection trip, which is possible in amultiple breaker arrangement.


1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 485

Version 2.2-00

AR01-PLCLOST Power line carrier or other form of permissive sig-nal lost. An optional input signal at loss of a com-munication channel in a permissive line protectionscheme. Can extend the AR open time.

AR01-SYNC Synchro-check fulfilled from the internal synchro-check/phasing function or an external devicerequired for three-phase auto-reclosing.

Output signals:AR01-BLOCKED The auto-recloser is in blocked state.

AR01-SETON Indicates that the AR operation is switched on, oper-ative.

AR01-INPROGR Auto-reclosing attempt in progress. Activated dur-ing the AR open time.

AR01-ACTIVE Auto-reclosing cycle in progress.

AR01-UNSUC Auto-reclosing unsuccessful. Activated at a newtrip after the last programmed shot (selected num-ber of reclosing shots), or at trip while reclosing isblocked. The output resets after the reclaim time.

AR01-READY Indicates that the AR function is ready for a newAR cycle. It is On but not started or blocked. Thisoutput is high when the function is On, at rest, andprepared for operation. The signal can be used by aprotection function to extend the reach beforereclosing, when required.

AR01-P1P Permit single-phase trip. Inverse signal to AR01-P3P.

AR01-P3P Prepare three-phase trip. Control of the next tripoperation.

AR01-CLOSECB Close circuit-breaker command.

AR01-1PT1 Single-phase reclosing in progress.

AR01-2PT1 Two-phase reclosing in progress.

AR01-T1(T2 - T4) Three-phase reclosing, Shot 1(2 - 4) in progress.

2.2 Multi-breaker arrangement

In stations with a 1 1/2-breaker, double breaker or ring bus arrangement,there are two breakers which switch that end of the line. The reclosing ofthe line breakers can be made in a sequential order. One breaker isreclosed first, and if the reclosing is successful, the second breaker isreclosed as well. In the case of a permanent fault, the second breaker neednot to be reclosed. By fitting one REx 5xx terminal for each line breaker,and by a few interconnections between them, sequential reclosing can beachieved. See Figure 3:.

One terminal is selected as Master and given high reclosing priority. Atline protection trip, the two reclosing functions are started, but the masterissues a Wait For Master signal to the Slave (with low reclosing priority).At unsuccessful reclosing by the master, an Inhibit reclosing signal is sentto the slave terminal to interrupt and reset the reclosing function.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 486

AR01-WAIT Signal to the low priority auto-reclosing functionfrom the master in multi-breaker arrangements forsequential reclosing.

AR01-WFMASTER Wait for master. Issued by the high priority unit forsequential reclosing.

Figure 3: Additional input and output signals at multi-breaker arrange-ment.

2.3 AR Operation The user can control the auto-reclosing function from the local HMI. Use theparameter Operation, which can be set to Off, Stand-by or On. See Figure 6:.

Off deactivates the auto-recloser. On activates automatic reclosing. Stand-by enables On and Off Operation via input signal pulses.

AR01ONOFFBLKONBLOCKOFF

BLOCKEDSETON

INPROGRACTIVE

INHIBITRESET

STARTSTTHOL

CBREADY

UNSUCREADY

CLOSECB

T1T2T3T4

WFMASTER

PLCLOSTSYNC

WAIT

CBCLOSED

TRSOTF

Terminal ‘Master’Priority = High

CB1

CB2


BLOCKEDSETON

INPROGRACTIVE

INHIBITRESET

STARTSTTHOL

CBREADY

UNSUCREADY

CLOSECB

T1T2T3T4

WFMASTER

PLCLOSTSYNC

WAIT

CBCLOSED

TRSOTF

Terminal ‘Slave’Priority = Low

*) Other input/output signals as in previous single breaker arrangement.


1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 487

Version 2.2-00

3 Design

3.1 Start and control of the auto-reclosing

The automatic operation of the auto-reclosing function is controlled bythe parameter Operation and the input signals as described above. When itis on, the AR01-SETON output is high (active). See Figure 6:.

The auto-reclosing function is activated at a protection trip by the AR01-START input signal. At repeated trips, this signal is activated again tomake the reclosing program continue.

There are a number of conditions for the start to be accepted and a newcycle started. After these checks, the start signal is latched in and theStarted state signal is activated. It can be interrupted by certain events.

3.2 Extended AR open time, shot 1

The purpose of this function is to adapt the length of the AR Open time tothe possibility of non-simultaneous tripping at the two line ends. If a per-missive communication scheme is used and the permissive communica-tion channel (for example, PLC, power-line carrier) is out of service atthe fault, there is a risk of sequential non-simultaneous tripping. Toensure a sufficient line dead time, the AR open time is extended by0.4 s. The input signal AR01-PLCLOST is checked at tripping. See fig-ure 7. Select this function (or not) by setting the Extended t1 parameter toOn (or Off).

3.3 Long trip signal During normal circumstances, the trip command resets quickly due tofault clearing. The user can set a maximum trip pulse duration by tTrip. Ata longer trip signal, the AR open dead time is extended by Extend_t1. Ifthe Extended t1 = Off, a long trip signal interrupts the reclosing sequencein the same way as AR01-INHIBIT.

3.4 Reclosing programs The reclosing programs can be performed with up to maximum fourreclosing attempts (shots), selectable with the NoOfReclosing parameter.The first program is used at pure 3-phase trips of breakers and the otherprograms are used at 1-, 2- or 3-phase trips of breakers.

The following reclosing programs can be selected through the parameterFirstShot, to fit actual application:

3ph 3-phase reclosing, one to four attempts.

1/2/3ph 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase reclosing (shot 1) fol-lowed by 3-phase reclosing (shot 2 - 4) if selected.

1/2ph 1-phase or 2-phase reclosing (shot 1) followed by 3-phase reclosing (shot 2 - 4) if selected. If the first tripis a 3-phase trip (TR3P high), the AR will be blocked.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 488

1ph + 1*2ph 1-phase or 2-phase reclosing (shot 1). The 1-phasereclosing attempt can be followed by 3-phase reclos-ing (shot 2 - 4) if selected. A failure of a 2-phasereclosing attempt will block the AR. If the first trip is a3-phase trip (TR3P high), the AR will be blocked.

1/2ph + 1*3ph 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase reclosing (shot 1). The 1-phase and 2-phase reclosing attempts can be followedby 3-phase reclosing (shot 2 - 4) if selected. A failureof a 3-phase reclosing attempt (at shot 1) will blockthe AR.

1ph + 1*2/3ph 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase reclosing (shot 1). The 1-phase reclosing attempt can be followed by 3-phasereclosing (shot 2 - 4) if selected. A failure of the 2-phase and 3-phase reclosing attempts will block theAR.

Below is a description of a one-shot reclosing for single-phase, two-phaseor three-phase. The other programs are thereafter described more briefly.

3.4.1 1/2/3ph reclosing For the example, one-shot reclosing for 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase, seeFigures 6 and 12. Here, the AR function is assumed to be On and Ready.The breaker is closed and the operation gear ready (manoeuvre springcharged etc.). Only the 1-phase and 3-phase cases are described.

AR01-START is received and sealed-in at operation of the line protection.The AR01-READY output is reset (Ready for a new AR cycle).

If AR01-TR2P (2-phase trip) is low and AR01-TR3P (3-phase trip)is...

Immediately after the start-up of the reclosing and tripping of thebreaker, the input (in Figure 6:) AR01-CBCLOSED is low (possibly alsoAR01-CBREADY at type OCO). The AR Open-time timer, t1 1Ph or t1,keeps on running.At the end of the set AR open time, t1 1Ph or t1, the respective SPTO orTPTO (single-phase or three-phase AR time-out, Figure 9:) is activatedand goes on to the output module for further checks and to give a closingcommand to the circuit breaker.

low, the timer for 1-phase reclosing open time t1 1Ph is started and the AR01-1PT1 output (auto-reclosing 1-phase, shot 1, in progress) is activated.It can be used to suppress Pole disagreement and Earth-fault pro-tection during the 1-phase open interval.

high, the timer for 3-phase AR open time, t1, is started (instead of t1 1Ph) and AR01-T1 is set (auto-reclosing 3-phase, shot 1, in progress). While either t1 1Ph or t1 is running, the output AR01-INPROGR is activated.


1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 489

Version 2.2-00

3.5 Evolving fault A single-phase fault can result in a single-phase trip and start of t1 1Ph.The fault may evolve into another phase. At such an evolving fault, theprotection must issue a three-phase trip at the second trip.

When the AR01-P3P appears, the t1 1Ph-timer is stopped and the timerfor t1, the three-phase AR open time, starts.

3.6 AR01-P3P, Prepare three-phase trip

This output signal ensures that a possible coming trip operation is a three-phase operation. This is, for example, the case if the AR is set off, orblocked, or if it has performed the first reclosing shot.

Usually, the signal is reset when the reclaim time after a reclosing hasexpired and the function is once more ready for a single-phase reclosing, Permit single-phase trip (P1P). It is the inverse of P3P and should be con-nected to a binary output relay. Should the unit with the auto-reclosing beinoperative, single-phase trip is thus not released. The external circuit canbe connected to a make or break contact of an output relay depending onwhat is required: Permit single-phase or Prepare three-phase trip.

3.7 Blocking of a new reclosing cycle

A new start of a reclosing cycle is blocked for the reclaim time after theselected number of reclosing attempts are performed.

3.8 Reclosing checks and Reclaim timer

An AR open-time time-out signal is received from a program module. At three-phase reclosing, a synchro-check and/or energising check orvoltage check can be used. It is possible to use an internal or an externalsynchro-check function, configured to AR01-SYNC.If a reclosing without check is preferred, configure the input AR01-SYNCto FIXD-ON (set to 1).

Another possibility is to set the output from the internal synchro-checkfunction to a permanently active signal. Set Operation = Release in thesynchro-check function. Then AR01-SYNC is configured to SYNx-AUTOOK.

At confirmation from the synchro-check or if the reclosing is of single-phase type, the signal passes on.

At AR01-CBREADY signal of the Close-Open (CO) type, it is checkedthat this signal is present to allow a reclosing.

The synchronising and energising check must be fulfilled within a certainperiod of time, tSync. If it does not, or if the other conditions are not ful-filled, the reclosing is interrupted and blocked.

The Reclaim-timer defines a period from the issue of a reclosing com-mand, after which the reclosing function is reset. Should a new trip occurwithin this time, it is treated as a continuation of the first fault.When a closing command is given (Pulse AR), the reclaim timer isstarted.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 490

There is an AR State Control, Figure 9:, to track the actual state in thereclosing sequence.

3.9 Pulsing of CB closing command

The circuit breaker closing command, AR01-CLOSECB, is made as apulse with a duration, set by the tPulse parameter. For circuit breakerswithout an anti-pumping function, the closing-pulse-cutting describedbelow can be used. It is selected by means of the CutPulse parameter (setto On). In case of a new trip pulse, the closing pulse will be cut (inter-rupted). But the minimum length of the closing pulse is always 50 ms.

At the issue of a reclosing command, the associated reclosing operationcounter is also incremented.There is a counter for each type of reclosing and one for the total numberof reclosings. See Figure 10:.

3.10 Transient fault After the reclosing command, the reclaim timer keeps running for the settime. If no tripping occurs within this time, tReclaim, the auto-reclosingfunction will be reset. The circuit breaker remains closed and the operat-ing gear ready (manoeuvre spring is recharged). AR01-CBCLOSED = 1and AR01-CBREADY = 1.

After the reclaim time, the AR state control resets to original rest state,with AR01-SETON = 1, AR01-READY = 1 and AR01-P1P = 1 (depend-ing on the selected program). The other AR01 outputs = 0.

3.11 Unsuccessful signal Normally the signal AR01-UNSUC appears when a new start is receivedafter the last reclosing attempt has been made. See Figure 11:. It can beprogrammed to appear at any stage of a reclosing sequence by setting theparameter UnsucMode = On. The UNSUC signal is attained after the timetUnsuc.

3.12 Permanent fault If a new trip takes place after a reclosing attempt and a new AR01-START or AR01-TRSOTF signal appears, the AR01-UNSUC (Reclos-ing unsuccessful) is activated. The timers for the first reclosing attempt(t1 1Ph, t1 2Ph and t1) cannot be started (Figure 9:).

Depending on the PulseCut parameter setting, the closing command maybe shortened at the second trip command.

After time-out of the reclaim timer, the auto reclosing function resets, butthe circuit breaker remains open (AR01-CBCLOSED = 0, AR01-CBREADY = 1). Thus the reclosing function is not ready for a newreclosing cycle. See Figure 6: and Figure 12:.


1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 491

Version 2.2-00

3.13 Automatic confirmation of programmed reclosing attempts

The auto-recloser can be programmed to continue with reclosing attemptstwo to four (if selected) even if the start signals are not received from theprotection functions, but the breaker is still not closed. See figure 8. Thisis done by setting the parameter AutoCont = On and the wait time tAu-toWait to desired length.

3.14 More about reclosing programs

The reclosing programs are briefly described below concerning type ofreclosing and number of attempts for different trips. Also see Table 1 inthe end of this section.

3ph3-phase reclosing, one to four attempts (NoOfReclosing parameter).The output AR01-P3P is always high (=1).

A trip operation is made as a three-phase trip at all types of fault.The reclosing is as a three-phase reclosing in program 1/2/3ph, describedabove.

All signals, blockings, inhibits, timers, requirements etc. are the same asfor the above described example.

1/2/3ph1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase reclosing in the first shot.

At any kind of trip, the operation is as already described, program1/2/3ph. If the first reclosing attempt fails, a 3-phase trip will be issuedand 3-phase reclosings can follow, if selected. Maximum three additionalattempts can be done (according to the NoOfReclosing parameter).


1/2ph1-phase or 2-phase reclosing in the first shot.

At 1-phase or 2-phase trip, the operation is as in above described example,program 1/2/3ph. If the first reclosing attempt fails, a 3-phase trip will beissued and 3-phase reclosings can follow, if selected. Maximum threeadditional attempts can be done (according to the NoOfReclosing parame-ter).

At 3-phase trip, TR2P low and TR3P high, the AR will be blocked and noreclosing takes place.


1ph + 1*2ph1-phase or 2-phase reclosing in the first shot.

At 1-phase trip (TR2P low and TR3P low), the operation is as in above


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 492

described example, program 1/2/3ph. If the first reclosing attempt fails, a3-phase trip will be issued and 3-phase reclosings can follow, if selected.Maximum three additional attempts can be done (according to the NoOf-Reclosing parameter).

At 2-phase trip (TR2P high and TR3P low), the operation is similar asabove. But, if the first reclosing attempt fails, a 3-phase trip will be issuedand the AR will be blocked. No more attempts take place!

At 3-phase trip, TR2P low and TR3P high, the AR will be blocked and noreclosing takes place.


1/2ph + 1*3ph1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase reclosing in the first shot.

At 1-phase or 2-phase trip, the operation is as described above. If the firstreclosing attempt fails, a 3-phase trip will be issued and 3-phase reclos-ings can follow, if selected. Maximum three additional attempts can bedone (according to the NoOfReclosing parameter).

At 3-phase trip, the operation is similar as above. But, if the first reclosingattempt fails, a 3-phase trip will be issued and the AR will be blocked. Nomore attempts take place!


1ph + 1*2/3ph1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase reclosing in the first shot.

At 1-phase trip, the operation is as described above. If the first reclosingattempt fails, a 3-phase trip will be issued and 3-phase reclosings can fol-low, if selected. Maximum three additional attempts can be done (accord-ing to the NoOfReclosing parameter).

At 2-phase or 3-phase trip, the operation is similar as above. But, if thefirst reclosing attempt fails, a 3-phase trip will be issued and the AR willbe blocked. No more attempts take place!



1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 493

Version 2.2-00

Table 1: Type of reclosing for different programs

Program 1st attempt 2-4th attempt

3ph 3ph 3ph

1/2/3ph 1ph 3ph

2ph 3ph

3ph 3ph

1/2ph 1ph 3ph

2ph 3ph

No 3ph reclosing No 3ph reclosing

1ph + 1*2ph 1ph 3ph

2ph No

No 3ph reclosing No 3ph reclosing

1/2ph + 1*3ph 1ph 3ph

2ph 3ph

3ph No

1ph + 1*2/3ph 1ph 3ph

2ph No

3ph No


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 494

4 Configuration and settingThe signals are configured in the CAP 531 configuration tool.

The parameters for the auto-reclosing function are set through the localHMI at:

SettingsFunctions

Group nAutoRecloser

AutoRecloser n

4.1 Recommendations for input signals

See Figure 4: and the default configuration for examples.

AR01-ON and AR01-OFFmay be connected to binary inputs for external control.

AR01-STARTshould be connected to the protection function trip output which shall startthe auto-recloser. It can also be connected to a binary input for start froman external contact. A logical OR gate can be used to multiply the numberof start sources.

AR01-INHIBITcan be connected to binary inputs, to block the AR from a certain protec-tion, such as a line connected shunt reactor, transfer trip receive or back-up protection or breaker-failure protection.

AR01-CBCLOSED and AR01-CBREADYmust be connected to binary inputs, for pick-up of the breaker signals. Ifthe external signals are of Breaker-not-ready type, uncharged etc., aninverter can be configured before CBREADY.

AR01-SYNCis connected to the internal synchro-check function if required. It can alsobe connected to a binary input. If neither internal nor external synchronis-ing or energising check (dead line check) is required, it can be connected toa permanent 1 (high), by connection to FIXD-ON.

AR01-PLCLOSTcan be connected to a binary input, when required.

AR01-TRSOTFcan be connected to the internal line protection, distance protection, tripswitch-onto-fault.

AR01-STTHOLStart of thermal overload protection signal. Can be connected to OVLD-TRIP to block the AR at overload.


1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 495

Version 2.2-00

AR01-TR2P and AR01-TR3Pare connected to the function block TRIP or to binary inputs. The protectionfunctions that give two-phase or three-phase trips are supposed to be routedvia that function.

OtherThe other input signals can be connected as required.

4.2 Recommendations for output signals


AR01-READYcan be connected to the Zone extension of a line protection. It can also beused for indication, if required.

AR01-1PT1 and 2PT11-phase and 2-phase reclosing in progress is used to temporarily block anEarth-fault protection and/or a Pole disagreement function during the 1-phase or 2-phase open intervals.

AR01-CLOSECBconnect to a binary output relay for circuit breaker closing command.

AR01-P3Pprepare 3-phase trip: Connect to TRIP-P3PTR.

AR01-P1Ppermit 1-phase trip: Can be connected to a binary output for connection toexternal protection or trip relays. In case of total loss of auxiliary voltage,the output relay drops and does not allow 1-phase trip. If needed to invertthe signal, it can be made by a breaking contact of the output relay.

OtherThe other output signals can be connected for indication, disturbancerecording etc., as required.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 496

Figure 4: Recommendations for I/O-signal connections.

4.3 Recommendations for multi-breaker arrangement

Sequential reclosing at multi-breaker arrangement is achieved by givingthe two line breakers different priorities. Refer to Figure 3:. At singlebreaker application, Priority is set to No, and this has no influence on thefunction. The signal Started is sent to the next function module. At doublebreaker and similar applications, Priority is set High for the Master termi-nal and Priority = Low for the Slave.

While reclosing is in progress in the master, it issues the signal -WFMAS-TER. A reset delay ensures that the -WAIT signal is kept high for thebreaker closing time. After an unsuccessful reclosing, it is also maintainedby the signal -UNSUC. For the slave terminal, the input signal -WAITholds back a reclosing operation. A time tWait sets a maximum waitingtime for the reset of the Wait signal. At time-out, it interrupts the reclosingcycle by a WM-INH, wait for master inhibit, signal.

AR01-

ONOFFBLKONBLOCKOFF

BLOCKEDSETON

INPROGRACTIVE

INHIBIT

RESET

START

STTHOL

TR2P

TR3P

CBREADY

UNSUC

READY

P1P

P3P

CLOSECB

1PT12PT1

T1T2T3T4

WFMASTER

PLCLOST

SYNCWAIT

CBCLOSED

TRSOTF

IOM

INPUTxxxxxx

xxxxxxxx

xx

xxxx

1Vxxxx-TRIPPROTECTION

OVLD-TRIP

SOTF-TRIPZM1--TRIP

TRIP-TR2P

TRIP-TR3P

FIXD-ON

1V

IOM

OUTPUTxx

xx

xx

xx

xx

xx

xx

xx

xx

xx

1V

TRIP-P3PTR

EF4--BLOCK

xxxx-??????


1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 497

Version 2.2-00

5 TestingThe user can test the auto-reclosing function, for example, during com-missioning or after a reconfiguration. The test can be performed with pro-tection and trip functions, as the synchro-check function (with energisingcheck), applied.

Figure 5: illustrates a recommended testing scenario, where the circuitbreaker is simulated by an external bistable relay (BR), e.g. an RXMVB2or an RXMVE1. These manual switches are available:

• Switch close (SC)

• Switch trip (ST)

• Switch ready (SRY).

SC and ST can be push-buttons with spring return. If no bistable relay isavailable, replace it with two self-reset auxiliary relays as in Figure 5:.

Use a secondary injection relay test set to operate the protection function.It is possible to use the BR to control the injected analogue quantities sothat the fault only appears when the BR is picked up—simulating a closedbreaker position.

To make the arrangement more elaborate, include the simulation of theoperation gear condition, AR01-CBREADY, for the sequences Close-Open (CO) and Open-Close-Open (OCO).

The AR01-CBREADY condition at the CO sequence type is usually lowfor a recharging time of 5-10 s after a closing operation. Then it is high.The example shows that it is simulated with SRY, a manual switch.

Figure 5: Simulating breaker operation with two auxiliary relays.

Trip

Close

ST

OR

SC

SRY

+ -

To Test Set

AR01-CLOSECB

AR01-CBCLOSED

AR01-CBREADY

Trip

CR


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 498

5.1 Suggested testing procedure

5.1.1 Preparations 1.1 Check the settings of the auto-reclosing (AR) function. The operationcan be set at Stand-by (Off).

HMI tree:

SettingsFunctions

Group nAutoRecloser

AutoRecloser n

If any timer setting is changed so as to speed-up or facilitate the test-ing, they must be set to normal after the testing. A verification testhas to be done afterwards.

1.2 Read and note the reclosing operate counters from the HMI tree:



Counters

1.3 Do the testing arrangements outlined above, for example, as in Figure5:.

1.4 The AR01-CBCLOSED breaker position, the commands Trip andClosing, AR01-CLOSECB, and other signals should preferably bearranged for event recording provided with time measurements. Oth-erwise, a separate timer or recorder can be used to check the AR opentime and other timers.

5.1.2 Check the AR functionality

2.1 Ensure that the voltage inputs to Synchro-check gives accepted con-ditions at open breaker (BR). They can, for example, be Live busbarand Dead line.

2.2 Set the operation at On.

2.3 Make a BR pickup by a closing pulse, the SC-pulse.

2.4 Close SRY, Breaker ready and leave it closed.

2.5 Inject AC quantities to give a trip and start AR.Observe or record the BR operation. The BR relay should trip andreclose. After the closing operation, the SRY switch could be openedfor about 5 s and then closed.The AR open time and the operating sequence should be checked, forexample, in the event recording.Check the operate indications and the operate counters.


1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 499

Version 2.2-00

Should the operation not be as expected, the reason must be investi-gated. It could be due to an AR Off state or wrong program selection,or not accepted synchro-check conditions.

2.6 A few fault cases may be checked, for example, single-phase, two-phase and three-phase trips, transient, and permanent fault. The sig-nal sequence diagrams in Figure 12: and 13 can be of guidance for thechecking.

5.1.3 Check the reclosing requirements

The number of cases can be varied according to the application. Examplesof selection cases are:

3.1 Inhibit input signal: Check that the function is operative and that thebreaker conditions are okay. Apply an AR01-INHIBIT input signaland start the reclosing function. No reclosing!

3.2 Breaker open, closing onto a fault: Set the breaker simulating relay,BR, in position open. Then close it with the SC switch and start theAR within one second. No reclosing!

3.3 Breaker not ready: Close the BR breaker relay and see that everythingexcept for AR01-CBREADY is in normal condition (SRY is open).Start the AR function. No reclosing!

3.4 Lack of verification from synchro-check: Check the function at non-acceptable voltage conditions. Wait for the time out, >5 s. No reclos-ing!

3.5 Operation Stand-by and Off: Check that no reclosing can occur withthe function in Off state.

3.6 Depending on the program selection and the selected fault types thatstart and inhibit reclosing, a check of no unwanted reclosing can bemade. For example, if only single-phase reclosing is selected, a testcan verify that there is no reclosing after two-phase and three-phasetrips.

5.1.4 Test of Master-Slave

If a multi-breaker arrangement is used for the application and prioritiesare given for the master (high) and slave (low) terminals, test that correctoperation takes place and that correct signals are issued. The signalsWFMASTER, UNSUC, WAIT and INHIBIT should be involved.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 500

5.1.5 Termination of the test

After the test, restore the equipment to normal or desired state.

Especially check these items:

4.1 Reclosing operate counters: Check and record the counter contents.(Reset if it is the user’s preference.)

HMI tree:



CountersClear Counters

4.2 Setting parameters and the Operation parameter as required.

4.3 Test switch or disconnected links of connection terminals.

4.4 Normal indications.

(If so preferred, the disturbance report may be cleared.)

HMI tree:

DisturbReportClearDistRep


1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 501

Version 2.2-00

6 Appendix

6.1 Function block

AR01

AR

ONOFFBLKONBLOCKOFF

BLOCKEDSETON

INPROGRACTIVE

INHIBITRESET

STARTSTTHOL

TR2PTR3P

CBREADY

UNSUCREADY

P1PP3P

CLOSECB1PT12PT1

T1T2T3T4

WFMASTER

PLCLOSTSYNCWAIT

CBCLOSED

TRSOTF


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 502


Figure 6: Auto-reclosing on/off control and start

&t5s

AR01-UNSUC

&

Operation:Off

& 1V

Operation:On

Operation:Standby

AR01-ON

AR01-OFF

AR01-START

AR01-TRSOTF

AR01-CBCLOSED

AR01-CBREADY

COUNT-0

INITIATE

AR01-READY

STARTAR

INITIATE

AR01-SETON

&

SR

& SR

Reclosing function reset

& 1V

&1V

1V

&Blocked state

1Blocking andinhibit conditions

&

Additional condition

Figure 9

(below and fig-ure 7 and 9)

1V

XY

Figure 7


1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 503

Version 2.2-00

Figure 7: Control of extended AR open time, shot 1

Figure 8: Automatic proceeding of shot 2 to 4

LONGDURA

&

AR01-PLCLOST& 1V &

ttTRIP

INITIATE

INITIATE

STARTAR

STARTAR

Extend_t1

&t

tTRIP

Figure 6

Figure 6

Figure 6

Figure 6

INITIATE

&

AR01-CLOSECBS

1V

ttAutoWait

AR01-CBCLOSED

1V

R&

AR01-START

&


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 504

Figure 9: Reclosing checks and “Reclaim” and “Inhibit” timers.

t

AR01-SYNC

&1V

ttSync

&

AR01-INHIBIT

Blocking

Pulse AR (above)

TPTOT2TOT3TOT4TO

1V

SPTO

“AR Open time” timers

&

& & 1V

Blocking

Pulse AR

AR StateControl

1V

ttReclaim

&AR01-TR2P

1V

Inhibit

Figure 6

below and figure 6

Figure 6:

(below)

reclosingLOGIC

programsAR01-TR3P

STARTAR

INITIATE

CL

R

01234

COUNTER01234

0

2

4

1

3

tInhibit

2PT1

1PT1

1V

T1

T2

T3

T4

AR01-INPROGR

1

AR01-P1P

AR01-P3P

INITIATEAR01-CBREADY

X

X Y

1V

tt1 1Ph

tt1

tt1 2Ph

SPTO

TPTO

From logic forreclosingprograms

etc.


1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 505

Version 2.2-00

Figure 10: Pulsing of close command and driving of operation counters

Figure 11: Issuing of the AR01-UNSUC signal

tPulse

&

&

1V

AR01-CLOSECB

1-ph Shot 1AR01-1PT1

tPulse

& 3-ph Shot 1AR01-T1




No of Reclosings

Pulse-AR

INITIATE

**)

**) Only if “PulseCut” = On

& 2-ph Shot 1AR01-2PT1

Figure 6

AR01-UNSUC

&

Pulse - AR

S1V

ttUnsuc

AR already started

COUNT-0

AR01-CBCLOSED

1V

R&

AR01-START

&


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 506

6.3 Sequence examples

Figure 12: Permanent single-phase fault. Program 1/2/3ph, single-phase single-shot reclosing.

Figure 13: Permanent single-phase fault. Program 1ph + 3ph or 1/2ph + 3ph, two-shot reclosing.

t1s

tReclaim

FaultAR01-CBCLOSEDAR01-CBREADY(CO)AR01-STARTAR01-TR3PAR01-SYNCAR01-READYAR01-INPROGRAR01-1PT1AR01-T1AR01-T2AR01-CLOSECBAR01-P3PAR01-UNSUC

t1s

FaultAR01-CBCLOSED

AR01-CBREADY(CO)

AR01-START

AR01-TR3P

AR01-SYNC

AR01-READY

AR01-INPROGR

AR01-1PT1

AR01-T1

AR01-T2

AR01-CLOSECB

AR01-P3P

AR01-UNSUC tReclaim

t2


1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 507

Version 2.2-00

Figure 14: Sequential reclosing of two line breakers with priority.

Fault

AR01-CBCLOSED

AR01-CBREADY(CO)

AR01-START

AR01-WFMASTER

CB1:

AR01-CLOSECB

AR01-CBCLOSED

AR01-CBREADY(CO)

AR01-START

AR01-WAIT

CB2:

AR01-CLOSECB


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 508

6.4 Signal list The signal list shows the input and output signals which can be interfacedwith the auto-recloser 1. Data is same for other auto-recloser functions (2to 6) with signal prefix AR02- to AR06-.

Table 2:


AR01- ON IN Enable auto-recloser operation

AR01- OFF IN Disable auto-recloser operation

AR01- BLKON IN Set auto-recloser in blocked state

AR01- BLOCKOFF IN Release of auto-recloser in blocked state

AR01- INHIBIT IN Inhibit auto-reclosing cycle

AR01- RESET IN Resets auto-recloser

AR01- START IN Start of auto-reclosing cycle

AR01- STTHOL IN Start of thermal overload protection

AR01- TRSOTF IN Start of auto-reclosing cycle from switch-onto-fault

AR01- TR2P IN Two-phase trip

AR01- TR3P IN Three-phase trip

AR01- CBREADY IN Circuit breaker ready for operation

AR01- CBCLOSED IN Circuit breaker closed

AR01- PLCLOST IN Permissive communication channel out of service

AR01- SYNC IN OK from external synchronising/energising unit

AR01- WAIT IN Wait from master for sequential tripping

AR01- BLOCKED OUT Auto-recloser in blocked state

AR01- SETON OUT Auto-recloser switched on

AR01- INPROGR OUT Auto-reclosing attempt in progress

AR01- ACTIVE OUT Auto-reclosing cycle in progress

AR01- UNSUC OUT Unsuccessful auto-reclosing

AR01- READY OUT Auto-recloser prepared for reclose cycle

AR01- P1P OUT Permit single-phase trip

AR01- P3P OUT Prepare three-phase trip

AR01- CLOSECB OUT Closing command for circuit breaker

AR01- 1PT1 OUT Single-phase reclosing in progress

AR01- 2PT1 OUT Two-phase reclosing in progress

AR01- T1 OUT Three-phase reclosing, shot 1 in progress




AR01- WFMASTER OUT Wait from master for sequential tripping


1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 509

Version 2.2-00

6.5 Setting table


Operation Off, Stand-by, On

Off Auto-recloser Off/Stand-by/On

NoOfRe-closing

1-4 1 Maximum number of reclosing attempts

FirstShot 3 ph, 1/2/3 ph, 1/2 ph, 1 ph+1*2 ph, 1/2+1*3 ph, 1 ph+1*2/3 ph

3 ph Restriction of fault type for first reclosing attempt

Extended t1 Off, On Off Extended dead time for loss of permissive channel

t1 1Ph 0.000-60.000 s 1.000 Open time for first auto-reclosing at single-phase

t1 2Ph 0.000-60.000 s 1.000 Open time for first auto-reclosing at two-phase

t1 0.000-60.000 s 1.000 Open time for first auto-reclosing at three-phase

t2 0.0-9000.0 s 30.0 Open time for second auto-reclosing

t3 0.0-9000.0 s 30.0 Open time for third auto-reclosing

t4 0.0-9000.0 s 30.0 Open time for fourth auto-reclosing

tSync 0.0-9000.0 s 2.0 Auto-recloser maximum wait time for sync

tPulse 0.000-60.000 s 0.200 Circuit breaker closing pulse length

CutPulse Off, On Off Shorten closing pulse at a new trip

tReclaim 0.0-9000.0 s 60.0 Auto-recloser reclaim time

tInhibit 0.000-60.000 a 5.000 Inhibit reset time

CB Ready CO, OCO CO Select type of circuit breaker ready signal

tTrip 0.000-60.000 s 1.000 Block auto-reclosing for long trip duration

Priority None, Low, High

None Priority selection between adjacent terminals

tWaitFor-Master

0.0-9000.0 s 60.0 Maximum wait time for Master

AutoCont Off, On Off Continue with next reclosing attempt if breaker not closes

BlockUnsuc Off, On Off Block auto-recloser at unsuccessful auto-reclosing

tAutoWait 0.000-60.000 s 2.000 Maximum wait time between shots

UnsucMode NoCBCheck, CBCheck

NOCB-Check

Unsuccessful-signal mode

tUnsuc 0.0-9000.0 s 30 CB Check time before unsuc


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 510

511Autorecloser, three phase

1 ApplicationAutomatic reclosing (AR) is a well-established method to restore the ser-vice of a power line after a transient line fault. The majority of line faultsare flashover arcs, which are transient by nature. When the power line isswitched off by operation of line protection and line breakers, the arc de-ionises and recovers voltage withstand at a somewhat variable rate. So acertain line dead time is needed. But then line service can resume by theauto-reclosing of the line breakers. Select the length of the dead time toenable good probability of fault arc de-ionisation and successful reclos-ing.

For the individual line breakers and auto-reclosing equipment, the Auto-reclose open time (AR open time) expression is used.At simultaneous tripping and reclosing at the two line ends, Auto-recloseopen time equals the dead time of the line. Otherwise these two times maydiffer.

In case of a permanent fault, the line protection trips again at reclosing toclear the fault. Figure 1: shows the operation sequence and some expres-sions.

The reclosing function can be selected to perform three-phase reclosingfrom single-shot to multiple-shot reclosing program. The three-phaseauto-reclose open time can be set to give either high-speed auto-reclosing(HSAR) or delayed auto-reclosing (DAR).

Three-phase auto-reclosing can be performed with or without the use ofsynchro-check and energising check.

1MRK 580 368-XEN


Autorecloser, three phase

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 368-XENPage 6 – 512

Figure 1: Single-shot auto-reclosing at a permanent fault.

Lineprotection

Circuitbreaker

Auto-reclosingfunction

Open

Fault duration AR open time for breaker Fault duration

Closed

Operate time

Break time Break timeClosing time

Res

ets

AR

res

et

Operate time

Set AR open time Reclaim time

Star

t AR

Rec

losi

ngco

mm

and

Clo

se c

omm

and

Ope

rate

s

Fau

lt

Ope

rate

s

Inst

at o

f fa

ult

Res

ets

Con

tact

clo

sed

Arc

ext

ingu

ishe

s

Con

tact

s se

para

ted

Tri

p co

mm

and

Autorecloser, three phase 1MRK 580 368-XENPage 6 – 513

Version 2.2-00

2 Theory of operationThe auto-reclosing function first co-operates with the line protection func-tions, the trip function, the circuit-breaker and the synchro-check func-tion. It can also be influenced by other protection functions such as shuntreactor protection through binary input signals and AR On/Off manualcontrol. It can provide information to the disturbance and service reportfunctions, event recording, indications, and reclosing operation counters.

The reclosing function outputs and counters can be viewed and reset onthe local HMI at:



The auto-reclosing is a pure logical function that works with logical orbinary signals, logical operations and timers.

2.1 Input and output signals,single breaker arrangement

Figure 2: Three-phase auto-reclosing; input and output signals.

The input signals can be connected to binary inputs or internal functionsof the terminal. The output signals can be connected to binary outputrelays. It is also possible to connect the signals to free logic functions, forexample OR-gates, and in that way add connection links.

SYNCHRO-CHECKPHASING

PRO

TE

CT

ION

AN

D T

RIP

CAN BE CONNECTED TOBINARY INPUTS

AR CONNECTED TO BINARY OUTPUTS

2nd AR**

** ONLY IN SOME TERMINALS

ONOFFBLKONBLOCKOFF

BLOCKEDSETON

INPROGRACTIVE

INHIBITRESET

STARTSTTHOL

CBREADY

UNSUCREADY

CLOSECB

T1T2T3T4

WFMASTER

PLCLOSTSYNCWAIT

CBCLOSED

TRSOTF


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 368-XENPage 6 – 514

The input and output signals which can be interfaced with the auto-recloser 1 are presented in this document. Data is the same for other auto-recloser functions (2 to 6) with signal prefix AR02- to AR06-.

Input signals:AR01-ON Switches the auto-reclosing On

(at Operation = Stand-by).

AR01-OFF Switches the auto-reclosing Off (at Operation =Stand-by).

AR01-BLKON Sets the auto-recloser in blocked state.

AR01-BLOCKOFF Releases the auto-recloser from the blocked state.

AR01-INHIBIT Inhibits an auto-reclosing cycle. Interrupts andblocks auto-reclosing. The input can, for example,be activated by a shunt reactor, delayed back-upprotection or breaker-failure protection. There is atInhibit reset timer to ensure blocking during a fewseconds after the signal is removed.

AR01-RESET Resets the auto-recloser.

AR01-START Auto-reclosing start by a protection trip signal.It also makes the reclosing program continue at arepeated trip, if multi-shot reclosing is selected.

AR01-STTHOL Start of thermal overload protection. Will block theauto-reclosing.

AR01-TRSOTF Protection trip switch-onto-fault. This signal alonedoes not start reclosing. But at a reclosing onto apermanent fault it may appear and let the functionmove on to AR01-UNSUC (unsuccessful) or sec-ond-shot reclosing as programmed.

AR01-CBREADY A condition for the start of a reclosing cycle. Thecircuit breaker must have its operating gear ready(manoeuvre spring charged) for a Close-Open(CO) or an Open-Close-Open (OCO) operations toallow the start of an auto-reclosing cycle. Thisinput can also be connected to circuits that monitorthe breaker pressure. If it is not ready at start, it isunlikely that it is ready by the end of the AR opentime.

AR01-CBCLOSED Circuit breaker closed. A condition for the start of areclosing cycle. The circuit breaker (CB) must beclosed at least for five seconds to allow a new ARcycle to start. It prevents start at closing onto afault. It also prevents the reclosing of a breaker thatis open at the protection trip, which is possible in amultiple breaker arrangement.

AR01-PLCLOST Power line carrier or other form of permissive sig-nal lost. An optional input signal at loss of a com-munication channel in a permissive line protectionscheme. Can extend the AR open time.


Version 2.2-00

AR01-SYNC Synchro-check fulfilled from the internal synchro-check/phasing function or an external devicerequired for three-phase auto-reclosing.

Output signals:AR01-BLOCKED The auto-recloser is in blocked state.

AR01-SETON Indicates that the AR operation is switched on, oper-ative.

AR01-INPROGR Auto-reclosing attempt in progress. Activated dur-ing the AR open time.

AR01-ACTIVE Auto-reclosing cycle in progress.

AR01-UNSUC Auto-reclosing unsuccessful. Activated at a newtrip after the last programmed shot (selected num-ber of reclosing shots), or at trip while reclosing isblocked. The output resets after the reclaim time.

AR01-READY Indicates that the AR function is ready for a newAR cycle. It is On but not started or blocked. Thisoutput is high when the function is On, at rest, andprepared for operation. The signal can be used by aprotection function to extend the reach beforereclosing, when required.

AR01-CLOSECB Close circuit-breaker command.

AR01-T1(T2 - T4) Three-phase reclosing, Shot 1(2 - 4) in progress.

2.2 Multi-breaker arrangement

In stations with a 1 1/2-breaker, double breaker or ring bus arrangement,there are two breakers which switch that end of the line. The reclosing ofthe line breakers can be made in a sequential order. One breaker isreclosed first, and if the reclosing is successful, the second breaker isreclosed as well. In the case of a permanent fault, the second breaker neednot to be reclosed. By fitting one REx 5xx terminal for each line breaker,and by a few interconnections between them, sequential reclosing can beachieved. See Figure 3:.

One terminal is selected as Master and given high reclosing priority. Atline protection trip, the two reclosing functions are started, but the masterissues a Wait For Master signal to the Slave (with low reclosing priority).At unsuccessful reclosing by the master, an Inhibit reclosing signal is sentto the slave terminal to interrupt and reset the reclosing function.

AR01-WAIT Signal to the low priority auto-reclosing functionfrom the master in multi-breaker arrangements forsequential reclosing.

AR01-WFMASTER Wait for master. Issued by the high priority unit forsequential reclosing.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 368-XENPage 6 – 516

Figure 3: Additional input and output signals at multi-breaker arrange-ment.

2.3 AR Operation The user can control the auto-reclosing function from the local HMI. Use theparameter Operation, which can be set to Off, Stand-by or On. See Figure 6:.

Off deactivates the auto-recloser. On activates automatic reclosing. Stand-by enables On and Off Operation via input signal pulses.


BLOCKEDSETON

INPROGRACTIVE

INHIBITRESET

STARTSTTHOL

CBREADY

UNSUCREADY

CLOSECB

T1T2T3T4

WFMASTER

PLCLOSTSYNC

WAIT

CBCLOSED

TRSOTF

Terminal ‘Master’Priority = High

CB1

CB2


BLOCKEDSETON

INPROGRACTIVE

INHIBITRESET

STARTSTTHOL

CBREADY

UNSUCREADY

CLOSECB

T1T2T3T4

WFMASTER

PLCLOSTSYNC

WAIT

CBCLOSED

TRSOTF

Terminal ‘Slave’Priority = Low

*) Other input/output signals as in previous single breaker arrangement.


Version 2.2-00

3 Design

3.1 Start and control of the auto-reclosing

The automatic operation of the auto-reclosing function is controlled bythe parameter Operation and the input signals as described above. When itis on, the AR01-SETON output is high (active). See Figure 6:.

The auto-reclosing function is activated at a protection trip by the AR01-START input signal. At repeated trips, this signal is activated again tomake the reclosing program continue.

There are a number of conditions for the start to be accepted and a newcycle started. After these checks, the start signal is latched in and theStarted state signal is activated. It can be interrupted by certain events.

3.2 Extended AR open time, shot 1

The purpose of this function is to adapt the length of the AR Open time tothe possibility of non-simultaneous tripping at the two line ends. If a per-missive communication scheme is used and the permissive communica-tion channel (for example, PLC, power-line carrier) is out of service atthe fault, there is a risk of sequential non-simultaneous tripping. Toensure a sufficient line dead time, the AR open time is extended by 0.4s. The input signal AR01-PLCLOST is checked at tripping. See Figure7:. Select this function (or not) by setting the Extended t1 parameter toOn (or Off).

3.3 Long trip signal During normal circumstances, the trip command resets quickly due tofault clearing. The user can set a maximum trip pulse duration by tTrip. Ata longer trip signal, the AR open dead time is extended by Extend_t1. Ifthe Extended t1 = Off, a long trip signal interrupts the reclosing sequencein the same way as AR01-INHIBIT.

3.4 Reclosing program The three-phase reclosing program can be performed with up to maxi-mum four reclosing attempts (shots), selectable with the NoOfReclosingparameter.

For the example (see Figures 6 and 12), the AR function is assumed to beOn and Ready. The breaker is closed and the operation gear ready,manoeuvre spring charged etc.

AR01-START is received and sealed-in at operation of the line protection.The AR01-READY output is reset (Ready for a new AR cycle).

Immediately after the start-up of the reclosing and tripping of thebreaker, the input (in Figure 6:) AR01-CBCLOSED is low (possibly alsoAR01-CBREADY at type OCO). The AR Open-time timer, t1, keeps onrunning.At the end of the set AR open-time, the three-phase AR time-out (Figure9:) is activated and goes on to the output module for further checks and togive a closing command to the circuit breaker.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 368-XENPage 6 – 518

3.5 Blocking of a new reclosing cycle

A new start of a reclosing cycle is blocked for the reclaim time after theselected number of reclosing attempts are performed.

3.6 Reclosing checks and Reclaim timer

An AR open-time time-out signal is received from a program module. At three-phase reclosing, a synchro-check and/or energising check orvoltage check can be used. It is possible to use an internal or an externalsynchro-check function, configured to AR01-SYNC.If a reclosing without check is preferred, configure the input AR01-SYNCto FIXD-ON (set to 1).

Another possibility is to set the output from the internal synchro-checkfunction to a permanently active signal. Set Operation = Release in thesynchro-check function. Then AR01-SYNC is configured to SYNx-AUTOOK.

At confirmation from the synchro-check or if the reclosing is of single-phase type, the signal passes on.

At AR01-CBREADY signal of the Close-Open (CO) type, it is checkedthat this signal is present to allow a reclosing.

The synchronising and energising check must be fulfilled within a certainperiod of time, tSync. If it does not, or if the other conditions are not ful-filled, the reclosing is interrupted and blocked.

The Reclaim-timer defines a period from the issue of a reclosing com-mand, after which the reclosing function is reset. Should a new trip occurwithin this time, it is treated as a continuation of the first fault.When a closing command is given (Pulse AR), the reclaim timer isstarted.

There is an AR State Control, Figure 9:, to track the actual state in thereclosing sequence.

3.7 Pulsing of CB closing command

The circuit breaker closing command, AR01-CLOSECB, is made as apulse with a duration, set by the tPulse parameter. For circuit breakerswithout an anti-pumping function, the closing-pulse-cutting describedbelow can be used. It is selected by means of the CutPulse parameter (setto On). In case of a new trip pulse, the closing pulse will be cut (inter-rupted). But the minimum length of the closing pulse is always 50 ms.

At the issue of a reclosing command, the associated reclosing operationcounter is also incremented.There is a counter for each type of reclosing and one for the total numberof reclosings. See Figure 10:.


Version 2.2-00

3.8 Transient fault After the reclosing command, the reclaim timer keeps running for the settime. If no tripping occurs within this time, tReclaim, the auto-reclosingfunction will be reset. The circuit breaker remains closed and the operat-ing gear ready (manoeuvre spring is recharged). AR01-CBCLOSED = 1and AR01-CBREADY = 1.

After the reclaim time, the AR state control resets to original rest state,with AR01-SETON = 1 and AR01-READY = 1. The other AR01 outputs= 0.

3.9 Unsuccessful signal Normally the signal AR01-UNSUC appears when a new start is receivedafter the last reclosing attempt has been made. See Figure 11:. It can beprogrammed to appear at any stage of a reclosing sequence by setting theparameter UnsucMode = On. The UNSUC signal is attained after the timetUnsuc.

3.10 Permanent fault If a new trip takes place after a reclosing attempt and a new AR01-START or AR01-TRSOTF signal appears, the AR01-UNSUC (Reclos-ing unsuccessful) is activated. The timer for the first reclosing attempt, t1,cannot be started (Figure 9:).

Depending on the PulseCut parameter setting, the closing command maybe shortened at the second trip command.

After time-out of the reclaim timer, the auto reclosing function resets, butthe circuit breaker remains open (AR01-CBCLOSED = 0, AR01-CBREADY = 1). Thus the reclosing function is not ready for a newreclosing cycle. See Figure 6: and Figure 12:.

3.11 Automatic confirmation of programmed reclosing attempts

The auto-recloser can be programmed to continue with reclosing attemptstwo to four (if selected) even if the start signals are not received from theprotection functions, but the breaker is still not closed. See Figure 8:. Thisis done by setting the parameter AutoCont = On and the wait time tAu-toWait to desired length.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 368-XENPage 6 – 520

4 Configuration and settingThe signals are configured in the CAP 531 configuration tool.

The parameters for the auto-reclosing function are set through the localHMI at:

SettingsFunctions

Group nAutoRecloser

AutoRecloser n

4.1 Recommendations for input signals


AR01-ON and AR01-OFFmay be connected to binary inputs for external control.

AR01-STARTshould be connected to the protection function trip output which shall startthe auto-recloser. It can also be connected to a binary input for start froman external contact. A logical OR gate can be used to multiply the numberof start sources.

AR01-INHIBITcan be connected to binary inputs, to block the AR from a certain protec-tion, such as a line connected shunt reactor, transfer trip receive or back-up protection or breaker-failure protection.

AR01-CBCLOSED and AR01-CBREADYmust be connected to binary inputs, for pick-up of the breaker signals. Ifthe external signals are of Breaker-not-ready type, uncharged etc., aninverter can be configured before CBREADY.

AR01-SYNCis connected to the internal synchro-check function if required. It can alsobe connected to a binary input. If neither internal nor external synchronis-ing or energising check (dead line check) is required, it can be connected toa permanent 1 (high), by connection to FIXD-ON.

AR01-PLCLOSTcan be connected to a binary input, when required.

AR01-TRSOTFcan be connected to the internal line protection, distance protection, tripswitch-onto-fault.

AR01-STTHOLStart of thermal overload protection signal. Can be connected to OVLD-TRIP to block the AR at overload.

OtherThe other input signals can be connected as required.


Version 2.2-00

4.2 Recommendations for output signals


AR01-READYcan be connected to the Zone extension of a line protection. It can also beused for indication, if required.

AR01-CLOSECBconnect to a binary output relay for circuit breaker closing command.

OtherThe other output signals can be connected for indication, disturbancerecording etc., as required.

Figure 4: Recommendations for I/O-signal connections.

4.3 Recommendations for multi-breaker arrangement

Sequential reclosing at multi-breaker arrangement is achieved by givingthe two line breakers different priorities. Refer to Figure 3:. At singlebreaker application, Priority is set to No, and this has no influence on thefunction. The signal Started is sent to the next function module. At doublebreaker and similar applications, Priority is set High for the Master termi-nal and Priority = Low for the Slave.

While reclosing is in progress in the master, it issues the signal -WFMAS-TER. A reset delay ensures that the -WAIT signal is kept high for thebreaker closing time. After an unsuccessful reclosing, it is also maintainedby the signal -UNSUC. For the slave terminal, the input signal -WAITholds back a reclosing operation. A time tWait sets a maximum waitingtime for the reset of the Wait signal. At time-out, it interrupts the reclosingcycle by a WM-INH, wait for master inhibit, signal.

AR01-

ONOFFBLKONBLOCKOFF

BLOCKEDSETON

INPROGRACTIVE

INHIBIT

RESET

START

STTHOL

CBREADY

UNSUC

READY

CLOSECB

T1T2T3T4

WFMASTER

PLCLOST

SYNCWAIT

CBCLOSED

TRSOTF

IOM

INPUTxxxxxx

xxxxxxxx

xx

xxxx

1Vxxxx-TRIPPROTECTION

OVLD-TRIP

SOTF-TRIPZM1--TRIP

FIXD-ON

1V

IOM

OUTPUTxx

xx

xx

xx

xx

xx

xx

xx

xx

xx

xxxx-??????


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 368-XENPage 6 – 522

5 TestingThe user can test the auto-reclosing function, for example, during com-missioning or after a reconfiguration. The test can be performed with pro-tection and trip functions, as the synchro-check function (with energisingcheck), applied.

Figure 5: illustrates a recommended testing scenario, where the circuitbreaker is simulated by an external bistable relay (BR), e.g. an RXMVB2or an RXMVE1. These manual switches are available:

• Switch close (SC)

• Switch trip (ST)

• Switch ready (SRY).

SC and ST can be push-buttons with spring return. If no bistable relay isavailable, replace it with two self-reset auxiliary relays as in Figure 5:.

Use a secondary injection relay test set to operate the protection function.It is possible to use the BR to control the injected analogue quantities sothat the fault only appears when the BR is picked up—simulating a closedbreaker position.

To make the arrangement more elaborate, include the simulation of theoperation gear condition, AR01-CBREADY, for the sequences Close-Open (CO) and Open-Close-Open (OCO).

The AR01-CBREADY condition at the CO sequence type is usually lowfor a recharging time of 5-10 s after a closing operation. Then it is high.The example shows that it is simulated with SRY, a manual switch.

Figure 5: Simulating breaker operation with two auxiliary relays.

Trip

Close

ST

OR

SC

SRY

+ -

To Test Set

AR01-CLOSECB

AR01-CBCLOSED

AR01-CBREADY

Trip

CR


Version 2.2-00

5.1 Suggested testing procedure

5.1.1 Preparations 1.1 Check the settings of the auto-reclosing (AR) function. The operationcan be set at Stand-by (Off).

HMI tree:

SettingsFunctions

Group nAutoRecloser

AutoRecloser n

If any timer setting is changed so as to speed-up or facilitate the test-ing, they must be set to normal after the testing. A verification testhas to be done afterwards.

1.2 Read and note the reclosing operate counters from the HMI tree:



Counters

1.3 Do the testing arrangements outlined above, for example, as in Figure5:.

1.4 The AR01-CBCLOSED breaker position, the commands Trip andClosing, AR01-CLOSECB, and other signals should preferably bearranged for event recording provided with time measurements. Oth-erwise, a separate timer or recorder can be used to check the AR opentime and other timers.

5.1.2 Check the AR functionality

2.1 Ensure that the voltage inputs to Synchro-check gives accepted con-ditions at open breaker (BR). They can, for example, be Live busbarand Dead line.

2.2 Set the operation at On.

2.3 Make a BR pickup by a closing pulse, the SC-pulse.

2.4 Close SRY, Breaker ready and leave it closed.

2.5 Inject AC quantities to give a trip and start AR.Observe or record the BR operation. The BR relay should trip andreclose. After the closing operation, the SRY switch could be openedfor about 5 s and then closed.The AR open time and the operating sequence should be checked, forexample, in the event recording.Check the operate indications and the operate counters.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 368-XENPage 6 – 524

Should the operation not be as expected, the reason must be investi-gated. It could be due to an AR Off state or wrong program selection,or not accepted synchro-check conditions.

2.6 A few fault cases may be checked, for example, single-phase, two-phase and three-phase trips, transient, and permanent fault. The sig-nal sequence diagrams in Figure 12: and fig12 can be of guidance forthe checking.

5.1.3 Check the reclosing requirements

The number of cases can be varied according to the application. Examplesof selection cases are:

3.1 Inhibit input signal: Check that the function is operative and that thebreaker conditions are okay. Apply an AR01-INHIBIT input signaland start the reclosing function. No reclosing!

3.2 Breaker open, closing onto a fault: Set the breaker simulating relay,BR, in position open. Then close it with the SC switch and start theAR within one second. No reclosing!

3.3 Breaker not ready: Close the BR breaker relay and see that everythingexcept for AR01-CBREADY is in normal condition (SRY is open).Start the AR function. No reclosing!

3.4 Lack of verification from synchro-check: Check the function at non-acceptable voltage conditions. Wait for the time out, >5 s. No reclos-ing!

3.5 Operation Stand-by and Off: Check that no reclosing can occur withthe function in Off state.

3.6 Depending on the program selection and the selected fault types thatstart and inhibit reclosing, a check of no unwanted reclosing can bemade. For example, if only single-phase reclosing is selected, a testcan verify that there is no reclosing after two-phase and three-phasetrips.

5.1.4 Test of Master-Slave

If a multi-breaker arrangement is used for the application and prioritiesare given for the master (high) and slave (low) terminals, test that correctoperation takes place and that correct signals are issued. The signalsWFMASTER, UNSUC, WAIT and INHIBIT should be involved.


Version 2.2-00

5.1.5 Termination of the test

After the test, restore the equipment to normal or desired state.

Especially check these items:

4.1 Reclosing operate counters: Check and record the counter contents.(Reset if it is the user’s preference.)

HMI tree:



CountersClear Counters

4.2 Setting parameters and the Operation parameter as required.

4.3 Test switch or disconnected links of connection terminals.

4.4 Normal indications.

(If so preferred, the disturbance report may be cleared.)

HMI tree:

DisturbReportClearDistRep


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 368-XENPage 6 – 526

6 Appendix

6.1 Function block

AR01

AR

ONOFFBLKONBLOCKOFF

BLOCKEDSETON

INPROGRACTIVE

INHIBITRESET

STARTSTTHOL

CBREADY

UNSUCREADY

CLOSECB

T1T2T3T4

WFMASTER

PLCLOSTSYNCWAIT

CBCLOSED

TRSOTF


Version 2.2-00


Figure 6: Auto-reclosing On/Off control and start. Simplified logic dia-gram.

&t5s

AR01-UNSUC

&

Operation:Off

& 1V

Operation:On

Operation:Standby

AR01-ON

AR01-OFF

AR01-START

AR01-TRSOTF

AR01-CBCLOSED

AR01-CBREADY

COUNT-0

INITIATE

AR01-READY

STARTAR

INITIATE

AR01-SETON

&

SR

& SR

Reclosing function reset

& 1V

&1V1V

&Blocked state

1Blocking andinhibit conditions

&

Additional condition

Figure 9:

(below and Figure 7: and 9)

1V

XY

Figure 7:


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 368-XENPage 6 – 528

Figure 7: Control of extended “AR Open time, shot 1”.Simplified logic diagram.

Figure 8: Automatic proceeding of shot two to four.Simplified logic diagram.

LONGDURA

&

AR01-PLCLOST& 1V &

ttTRIP

INITIATE

INITIATE

STARTAR

STARTAR

Extend_t1

&t

tTRIP

Figure 6:

Figure 6:

Figure 6:

Figure 6:

INITIATE

&

AR01-CLOSECBS

1V

ttAutoWait

AR01-CBCLOSED

1V

R&

AR01-START

&


Version 2.2-00

Figure 9: Reclosing checks and “Reclaim” and “Inhibit” timers.Simplified logic diagram.

t

AR01-SYNC

&1V

ttSync

&

AR01-INHIBIT

Blocking

Pulse AR (above)

TPTOT2TOT3TOT4TO

“AR Open time” timers

&

& & 1V

Blocking

Pulse AR

AR StateControl

1V

ttReclaim

&

1V

Inhibit

Figure 6:

below and Figure 6:

Figure 6:

(below)

reclosingLOGIC

programs

STARTAR

INITIATE

CL

R

01234

COUNTER01234

0

2

4

1

3

tInhibit

1V

T1

T2

T3

T4

AR01-INPROGR

INITIATEAR01-CBREADY

X

X Y

tt1

TPTOFrom logic forreclosingprograms etc.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 368-XENPage 6 – 530

Figure 10: Pulsing of close command and driving of operation counters.Simplified logic diagram.

Figure 11: Issuing of the AR01-UNSUC signal.Simplified logic diagram.

tPulse

& 1V

AR01-CLOSECB

tPulse





No of Reclosings

Pulse-AR

INITIATE

**)

**) Only if “PulseCut” = On

Figure 6:

AR01-UNSUC

&

Pulse - AR

S1V

ttUnsuc

AR already started

COUNT-0

AR01-CBCLOSED

1V

R&

AR01-START

&


Version 2.2-00

6.3 Sequence examples

Figure 12: Example. Permanent three-phase fault, two-shot reclosing.

Figure 13: Sequential reclosing of two line breakers with priority.

t1s

FaultAR01-CBCLOSED

AR01-CBREADY(CO)

AR01-START

AR01-SYNC

AR01-READY

AR01-INPROGR

AR01-T1

AR01-T2

AR01-CLOSECB

AR01-UNSUC tReclaim

t2

Fault

AR01-CBCLOSED

AR01-CBREADY(CO)

AR01-START

AR01-WFMASTER

CB1:

AR01-CLOSECB

AR01-CBCLOSED

AR01-CBREADY(CO)

AR01-START

AR01-WAIT

CB2:

AR01-CLOSECB


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 368-XENPage 6 – 532

6.4 Signal list The signal list shows the input and output signals which can be interfacedwith the auto-recloser 1. Data is same for other auto-recloser functions (2to 6) with signal prefix AR02- to AR06-.

Table 1:


AR01- ON IN Enable auto-recloser operation

AR01- OFF IN Disable auto-recloser operation

AR01- BLKON IN Set auto-recloser in blocked state

AR01- BLOCKOFF IN Release of auto-recloser in blocked state

AR01- INHIBIT IN Inhibit auto-reclosing cycle

AR01- RESET IN Resets auto-recloser

AR01- START IN Start of auto-reclosing cycle

AR01- STTHOL IN Start of thermal overload protection

AR01- TRSOTF IN Start of auto-reclosing cycle from switch-onto-fault

AR01- CBREADY IN Circuit breaker ready for operation

AR01- CBCLOSED IN Circuit breaker closed

AR01- PLCLOST IN Permissive communication channel out of service

AR01- SYNC IN OK from external synchronising/energising unit

AR01- WAIT IN Wait from master for sequential tripping

AR01- BLOCKED OUT Auto-recloser in blocked state

AR01- SETON OUT Auto-recloser switched on

AR01- INPROGR OUT Auto-reclosing attempt in progress

AR01- ACTIVE OUT Auto-reclosing cycle in progress

AR01- UNSUC OUT Unsuccessful auto-reclosing

AR01- READY OUT Auto-recloser prepared for reclose cycle

AR01- CLOSECB OUT Closing command for circuit breaker





AR01- WFMASTER OUT Wait from master for sequential tripping


Version 2.2-00

6.5 Setting table


Operation Off, Stand-by, On

Off Auto-recloser Off/Stand-by/On

NoOfRe-closing

1-4 1 Maximum number of reclosing attempts

Extended t1 Off, On Off Extended dead time for loss of permissive channel

t1 0.000-60.000 s 1.000 Open time for first auto-reclosing at three-phase

t2 0.0-9000.0 s 30.0 Open time for second auto-reclosing

t3 0.0-9000.0 s 30.0 Open time for third auto-reclosing

t4 0.0-9000.0 s 30.0 Open time for fourth auto-reclosing

tSync 0.0-9000.0 s 2.0 Auto-recloser maximum wait time for sync

tPulse 0.000-60.000 s 0.200 Circuit breaker closing pulse length

CutPulse Off, On Off Shorten closing pulse at a new trip

tReclaim 0.0-9000.0 s 60.0 Auto-recloser reclaim time

tInhibit 0.000-60.000 a 5.000 Inhibit reset time

CB Ready CO, OCO CO Select type of circuit breaker ready signal

tTrip 0.000-60.000 s 1.000 Block auto-reclosing for long trip duration

Priority None, Low, High

None Priority selection between adjacent terminals

tWaitFor-Master

0.0-9000.0 s 60.0 Maximum wait time for Master

AutoCont Off, On Off Continue with next reclosing attempt if breaker not closes

BlockUnsuc Off, On Off Block auto-recloser at unsuccessful auto-reclosing

tAutoWait 0.000-60.000 s 2.000 Maximum wait time between shots

UnsucMode NoCBCheck, CBCheck

NOCB-Check

Unsuccessful-signal mode

tUnsuc 0.0-9000.0 s 30 CB Check time before unsuc


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 368-XENPage 6 – 534

535

Logic

Three pole trip logic

1 ApplicationThe three-phase tripping logic in REx 5xx protection, control and moni-toring terminals serves a complete terminal tripping function.

2 DesignFigure 1: shows a simplified block diagram of a three-phase tripping logic.Descriptions of different signals are available in signal list.

Figure 1: Three-phase tripping logic - simplified logic diagram

Setting “Operation = On” enables operation of a function. Logic one onTRIP-BLOCK functional input disable operation of the function. Pres-ence of logical one on TRIP-TRIN functional input activates the TRIP-TRIP functional output, which has minimum duration of 150 ms.



TestTestMode

BlockFunctions• Set the Operation parameter to On (Operation=On) to set the termi-

nal in to testing mode. Select the operating mode under this sub-menu:

TestTestMode

Operation


Note: The function is blocked if the corresponding setting under theBlockFunctions submenu remains on and the TEST-INPUT signalremains active.

The function is tested functionally together with other protection func-tions (distance protection ZMn--, line differential protection DIFL-, earth-fault overcurrent protection IOC-- or TOC--, etc.) within the REx 5xx ter-

VFJ0005.vsd

TRIP-BLOCK

TRIP-TRIN

Operation = On

&150 ms

t>1 TRIP-TRIP

1MRK 580 378-XEN


Three pole trip logic


1MRK 580 378-XENPage 6 – 536

minals. It is recommended to test the function together with the autore-closing function when built into the terminal or when a separate externalunit is used for the reclosing purposes.

4 Appendix

4.1 Function block


4.3 Signal list

4.4 Setting table

VFJ0006.vsd

TRIP-BLOCK

THREE-PHASE TRIPPING LOGICTRIP-

TRIP-TRIN

TRIP-TRIP

VFJ0005.vsd

TRIP-BLOCK

TRIP-TRIN

Operation = On

&150 ms

t>1 TRIP-TRIP


TRIP- TRIP OUT General trip output signal

TRIP- BLOCK IN Block of trip logic

TRIP- TRIN IN Initiation of trip logic


Operation Off / On - Off Operation of trip logic

537Single or two pole trip logic

1 ApplicationThe tripping logic in REx 5xx protection, control and monitoring termi-nals offers three different operating modes:

• Three-phase tripping for all kinds of faults (3ph operating mode)

• Single-phase tripping for single-phase faults and three-phase trip-ping for multi-phase and evolving faults (1ph/3ph operating mode). The logic also issues a three-phase tripping command when phase selection within the operating protection functions is not possible, or when external conditions request three-phase tripping.

• Single-phase tripping for single-phase faults, two-phase tripping for ph-ph and ph-ph-E faults and three-phase tripping for three-phase faults (1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode). The logic also issues a three-phase tripping command when phase selection within the operating protection functions is not possible or at evolving multi-phase faults.

2 DesignThe function consists of the following basic logic parts:

• A three-phase front logic that is activated when the terminal is set into exclusive three-phase operating mode.

• A phase segregated front logic that is activated when the terminal is in 1ph/3ph or 1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode.

• An additional logic for evolving faults and three-phase tripping when the function operates in 1ph/3ph operating mode

• An additional logic for evolving faults and three-phase tripping when the function operates in 1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode.

• The final tripping circuits.

2.1 Three-phase front logic

Figure 1: shows a simplified block diagram of a three-phase front logic.Descriptions of different signals is available in signal list.

Figure 1: Three-phase front logic - simplified logic diagram

Any of active functional input signals activates the RSTTRIP internal sig-nal, which influences the operation of the final tripping circuits.

Visf_096.vsd

TRIP-TRINL1

TRIP-TRINL2

TRIP-TRINL3

TRIP-1PTRZ

TRIP-1PTREF

TRIP-TRIN

>1

>1

>1

Program = 3ph

& RSTTRIP - cont.

1MRK 580 379-XEN


Single or two pole trip logic

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 379-XENPage 6 – 538

2.2 Phase segregated front logic

The following input signals to the single-phase front logic influence thesingle-phase tripping of the terminal (see Figure 2:):

• Phase related tripping signals from different built-in protection func-tions that can operate on a phase segregated basis and are used in the terminal. The output signals of these functions should be configured to the TRIP-TRINLn (n = 1...3) functional inputs.

• Internal phase-selective tripping signals from different phase selection functions within the terminal, like PHS (phase selection for distance protection) or GFC (general fault criteria). The output signals of these functions should be configured to the TRIP-PSLn (n = 1...3) func-tional inputs. It is also possible to connect to these functional inputs different external phase selection signals.

• Single-phase tripping commands from line distance protection or carrier aided tripping commands from scheme communication logic for distance protection, which initiate single-phase tripping. These signals should be configured to the TRIP-1PTRZ functional input. It is also possible to configure a tripping output from an earth-fault overcurrent protection, to initiate the single-pole trip in connection with some external phase selection function. This signal should be configured to the TRIP-1PTREF functional input.

Figure 2: Phase segregated front logic

Visf_097.vsd

TRIP-TRINL1

TRIP-PSL1

TRIP-TRINL2

TRIP-PSL2

TRIP-TRINL3

TRIP-PSL3

TRIP-1PTREF

TRIP-1PTRZ

-loop-loop

TRIP-TRIN

L1TRIP - cont.

L2TRIP - cont.

L3TRIP - cont.

>1

>1

>1

&

&

&

>1

>1

>1

&

>1

&

>1

&&

t

50 ms

Single or two pole trip logic 1MRK 580 379-XENPage 6 – 539

Version 2.2-00

The TRIP-1PTRZ signal enables tripping corresponding to phase selec-tion signals without any restriction while any phase selective external trip-ping signals prevent such tripping from the TRIP-1PTREF signal.

If any of these signals continues for more than 50 ms without the presenceof any phase selection signals, three-phase tripping command is issued.

It is possible to configure the TRIP-1PTREF signal to the output signal ofthe EF---TRIP overcurrent, earth-fault, protection function (directionaland nondirectional). This enables single-phase tripping when the faultyphase is detected by some other phase-selection element such as the phaseselection in distance protection.

2.3 Additional logic for 1ph/3ph operating mode

Figure 3: presents the additional logic when the trip function is in 1ph/3phoperating mode. A TRIP-P3PTR functional input signal activates a threepole tripping if at least one phase within the front logic initiates a tripcommand.

Figure 3: Additional logic for the 1ph/3ph operating mode

Visf_098.vsd

L1TRIP - cont.

L2TRIP - cont.

L3TRIP - cont.

TRIP-P3PTR

-loop

RTRIP - cont.

STRIP - cont.

TTRIP - cont.

150 ms

t>1

t

2000 ms

>1&

>1

>1

150 ms

t>1

t

2000 ms

>1&

>1

>1

&

>1150 ms

t

t

2000 ms

>1&

>1

>1


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 379-XENPage 6 – 540

If only one of internal signals LnTRIP is present without the presence of aTRIP-P3PTR signal, a single pole tripping information is send to the finaltripping circuits. A three-phase tripping command is initiated in all othercases.

Built-in drop-off delayed (two second) timers secure a three-phase trip-ping for evolving faults if the second fault occurs in different phase thanthe first one within a two second interval after initiation of a first trippingcommand.

2.4 Additional logic for 1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode

Figure 4: presents the additional logic, when the trip function is in1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode. A TRIP-P3PTR functional input signal acti-vates a three pole tripping if at least one phase within the front logic ini-tiates a trip command.

Figure 4: Additional logic for the 1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode

The logic initiates a single-phase tripping information to the final logiccircuits, if only one of internal input signals (LnTRIP) is active. A twophase tripping information is send in case, when two out of three inputsignals LnTRIP are active. A three phase tripping information requires allthree LnTRIP input signals to be active.

Visf_099.vsd

L1TRIP - cont.150 ms

t

t

2000 ms

L2TRIP - cont.

L3TRIP - cont.

TRIP-P3PTR

-loop

RTRIP - cont.

STRIP - cont.

TTRIP - cont.

&

>1

>1

>1

>1

&>1

>1

t

2000 ms

150 ms

t

t

2000 ms

150 ms

t

&

&

&

>1

>1

>1


Version 2.2-00

The built in drop-off delayed (two seconds) timers secure correct three-phase tripping information, when the faults are detected within two sec-onds in all three phases.

2.5 Final tripping circuits Figure 5: present the final tripping circuits for a tripping function withinthe REx 5xx terminals. The TRIP-BLOCK functional input signal canblock the operation of a function, so that no functional output signalsbecome logical one. Detailed explanation of functional output signals isavailable in signal list.

Figure 5: Final tripping circuits

Visf_263.vsd

TRIP-BLOCK

RTRIP -cont.

>1

>1

>1

STRIP - cont.

TTRIP -cont.

RSTTRIP -cont.

&

&

&

>1

&>1

&

-loop

&

&

&>1

&

-loop

& t

10 ms

t

5 msTRIP-TR2P

TRIP-TR1P

TRIP-TR3P

TRIP-TRL1

TRIP-TRL2

TRIP-TRL3

TRIP-TRIP


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 379-XENPage 6 – 542



TestTestMode

BlockFunctions• Set the Operation parameter to On (Operation=On) to set the termi-

nal in to testing mode. Select the operating mode under this sub-menu:

TestTestMode

Operation


Note: The function is blocked if the corresponding setting under theBlockFunctions submenu remains on and the TEST-INPUT signalremains active.

The function is tested functionally together with other protection func-tions (distance protection ZMn--, line differential protection DIFL-, earth-fault overcurrent protection IOC-- or TOC--, etc.) within the REx 5xx ter-minals. It is recommended to test the function together with the autore-closing function, when built into the terminal or when a separate externalunit is used for the reclosing purposes.

3.1 3ph operating mode The function must issue a three-phase tripping in all cases, when trippingis initiated by any protection or some other built-in or external function.The following functional output signals must always appear simulta-neously: TRIP-TRIP, TRIP-TRL1, TRIP-TRL2, TRIP-TRL3 and TRIP-TR3P.

3.2 1ph/3ph operating mode

The following tests should be carried out in addition to some other tests,which depends on the complete configuration of a terminal:

1.) Initiate one-by one different single-phase-to-earth faults. Con-sider sufficient time interval between the faults, to overcome a reclaim time of eventually activated autoreclosing function. Only a single-phase trip should occur for each separate fault and only one of the tripping outputs (TRIP-TRLn) should be activated at a time. Functional outputs TRIP-TRIP and TRIP-TR1P should be active at each fault. No other outputs should be active.


Version 2.2-00

2.) Initiate different phase-to-phase and three-phase faults. Consider sufficient time interval between the faults, to overcome a reclaim time of eventually activated autoreclosing function. Only a three-phase trip should occur for each separate fault and all of the tripping outputs (TRIP-TRLn) should be activated at a time. Functional out-puts TRIP-TRIP and TRIP-TR3P should be active at each fault. No other outputs should be active.

3.) Initiate a single-phase-to-earth fault and switch it off immediately when the tripping signal is issued for the corresponding phase. Ini-tiate the same fault once again within the reclaim time of the used autoreclosing function. A three-phase tripping must be initiated for the second fault. Check that the corresponding tripping signals appear after both faults. If not the autoreclosing function is used the functional outputs TRIP-TRIP, TRIP-TR1P and the corresponding phase signal (TRIP-TRLn) should be active at each fault.

4.) Initiate a single-phase-to-earth fault and switch it off immediately when the tripping signal is issued for the corresponding phase. Ini-tiate the second single-phase-to-earth fault in one of the remaining phases within the time interval, shorter than two seconds and shorter than the dead-time of the autoreclosing function, when included in protection scheme. Check that the second trip is a three-phase trip.

3.3 1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode

The following tests should be carried out in addition to some other tests,which depends on the complete configuration of a terminal:

1.) Initiate one-by one different single-phase-to-earth faults. Con-sider sufficient time interval between the faults, to overcome a reclaim time of eventually activated autoreclosing function. Only a single-phase trip should occur for each separate fault and only one of the tripping outputs (TRIP-TRLn) should be activated at a time. Functional outputs TRIP-TRIP and TRIP-TR1P should be active at each fault. No other outputs should be active.

2.) Initiate one-by one different phase-to-phase faults. Consider suf-ficient time interval between the faults, to overcome a reclaim time of eventually activated autoreclosing function. Only a two-phase trip should occur for each separate fault and only corresponding two trip-ping outputs (TRIP-TRLn) should be activated at a time. Functional outputs TRIP-TRIP and TRIP-TR2P should be active at each fault. No other outputs should be active.

3.) Initiate a three-phase fault. Consider sufficient time interval between the faults, to overcome a reclaim time of eventually acti-vated autoreclosing function. Only a three-phase trip should occur for the fault and all tripping outputs (TRIP-TRLn) should be acti-vated at the same time. Functional outputs TRIP-TRIP and TRIP-TR3P should be active at each fault. No other outputs should be active.

4.) Initiate a single-phase-to-earth fault and switch it off immediately when the tripping signal is issued for the corresponding phase. Ini-tiate the same fault once again within the reclaim time of the used autoreclosing function. A three-phase tripping must be initiated for


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 379-XENPage 6 – 544

the second fault. Check that the corresponding tripping signals appear after both faults. If not the autoreclosing function is used the functional outputs TRIP-TRIP, TRIP-TR1P and the corresponding phase signal (TRIP-TRLn) should be active at each fault.

5.) Initiate a single-phase-to-earth fault and switch it off immediately when the tripping signal is issued for the corresponding phase. Ini-tiate the second single-phase-to-earth fault in one of the remaining phases within the time interval, shorter than two seconds and shorter than the dead-time of the autoreclosing function, when included in protection scheme. Check that the second trip is a single-phase trip in a second initiated phase.

6.) Initiate a phase-to-phase fault and switch it off immediately when the tripping signal is issued for the corresponding two phases. Ini-tiate another phase-to-phase fault (not between the same phases) within the time, shorter than 2 seconds. Check, that the output sig-nals, issued for the first fault, correspond to two-phase tripping for included phases. The output signals for the second fault must corre-spond to the three-phase tripping action.

4 Appendix

4.1 Function block

4.2 Signal list

VFJ0002.vsd

TRIP-BLOCK

TRIP-TRL2

SINGLE-PHASE TRIPPING LOGICTRIP-

TRIP-TRL3

TRIP-TR1P

TRIP-TR2P

TRIP-TRIN

TRIP-TRINL1

TRIP-TRINL2

TRIP-TRINL3

TRIP-PSL1

TRIP-TRL1

TRIP-TRIP

TRIP-PSL2

TRIP-PSL3

TRIP-1PTRZ

TRIP-1PTREF

TRIP-P3PTR

TRIP-TR3P


TRIP- TRIP OUT General trip output signal

TRIP- TRL1 OUT Trip output signal in phase L1




Version 2.2-00

4.3 Setting table

TRIP- TR1P OUT Single pole tripping

TRIP- TR2P OUT Two pole tripping

TRIP- TR3P OUT Three pole tripping

TRIP- BLOCK IN Block of Trip

TRIP- TRIN IN Trip all phases

TRIP- TRINL1 IN Trip phase L1



TRIP- PSL1 IN Functional input for phase selection in phase L1



TRIP- 1PTRZ IN Functional input for impedance single pole trip

TRIP- 1PTREF IN Functional input for earth fault single pole trip

TRIP- P3PTR IN Functional input for preparing for three phase trip



Operation Off / On - Off Operation of trip logic

Program 3ph - 1/3ph - 1/2/3ph

- 3ph Operating mode of trip logic


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 379-XENPage 6 – 546

547Pole discordance logic

1 ApplicationCircuit breaker pole position discordance can occour at the operation of abreaker with independent operating gears for the three poles. The reasonmay be an interruption in the trip coil circuits, or a mechanical failureresulting in a stuck breaker pole. A disagreement caused by one ore twopoles failing to close or to open can be tolerated for just a limited time, forinstance where the circuit breaker is driven by the single phase auto-reclosing.

The pole discordance logic (PD) detects a breaker pole position discrep-ancy not generated by a single pole reclosing and generates a three phasecommand trip to the circuit breaker itself.

2 Theory of operationThe operation of the pole discordance logic is based on checking the posi-tion of the circuit breaker through six of its auxiliary contacts: three paral-lel connected normally open contacts are connected in series with threeparallel connected normally closed contacts. This hard-wired logic is veryoften integrated in the circuit breaker control cabinets and gives a closedsignal in case of pole discordance in the circuit breaker. This signal is con-nected to the PD---POLDISC input of the pole discordance function. Ifthe function is enabled, after a short delay, the activation of this inputcauses a trip command (PD---TRIP).

Figure 1: Typical connection diagram for pole discordance function

Ext

erna

l Blo

ckin

g

1-P

hase

Aut

o R

eclo

se R

unni

ng

visf_115.vsd

Circuit Breaker Trip

++

Pole Discordance Signal from C.B.

+

C.B.

REx 5xx Terminal

PD---BLOCKPD---1POPEN

PD---POLDISC

PD---TRIP

POLE DISCORDANCE

visf_117.vsd

1MRK 580 380-XEN


Pole discordance logic

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 380-XENPage 6 – 548

3 DesignThe simplified logic diagram of the pole discordance logic is shown infigure 2.

Figure 2: Simplified logic diagram of pole discordance logic

The pole discordance logic is disabled if:

• The terminal is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been blocked from the HMI (BlockPD=Yes)

• The input signal PD---BLOCK is high

• The input signal PD---1POPEN is high

The PD---BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the polediscordance logic. It can be connected to a binary input of the terminal inorder to receive a block command from external devices or can be soft-ware connected to other internal functions of the terminal itself in order toreceive a block command from internal functions. Through OR gate it canbe connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs.

The PD---1POPEN signal blocks the pole discordance operation when asingle phase auto-reclosing cycle is in progress. It can be connected to theoutput signal AR01-1PT1 if the autoreclosing function is integrated in theterminal; if the auto-reclosing function is an external device, then PD---1POPEN has to be connected to a binary input of the terminal and thisbinary input is connected to a signallisation “1phase auto-reclosing inprogress” from the external auto-reclosing device.

If one or two poles of the circuit breaker have failed to open or to close(pole discordance status), then the function input PD---POLDISC is acti-vated from the pole discordance signal derived from the circuit breakerauxiliary contacts (one NO contact for each phase connected in parallel,and in series with one NC contact for each phase connected in parallel). If

PD---BLOCK

PD---1POPEN

PD---POLDISCPD---TRIP

visf_116.vsd

t

t 150 ms

&Logic Enable

PD - POLE DISCORDANCE LOGIC

>1

TEST-ACTIVE

&

TEST

BlockPD = Yes

Logic Blocked form Test

Pole discordance logic 1MRK 580 380-XENPage 6 – 549

Version 2.2-00

the function is enabled, after a settable time interval t (0-60 s), a 150 mstrip pulse command (PD---TRIP) is generated by the pole discordancefunction.

4 Setting instructionThe setting parameters are accessible through the HMI. The parametersfor the pole discordance logic are found in the HMI-tree under:

SettingsFunctions

Group 1,2,3 and 4PoleDiscord

The parameters and their setting ranges are shown in the appendix.

Comments regarding settings:

Operation: Pole discordance protection On/Off. Activation or dis-activation of the logic.

Time delay , t: The time delay is not critical because the pole discor-dance logic operates mainly with load conditions. Thetime delay should be chosen between 0.5 and 1 s.

5 Testing

5.1 General The pole discordance logic can be disabled during the test mode duringthese conditions:

• If the logic should be blocked under the testing conditions, select the PD function under the menu:

TestTestMode

BlockFunctions

• The terminal is set to test mode by setting the Operation=On, which occours under the menu:

TestTestMode

Operation

The terminal is automatically set to test mode by applying a logical 1 tothe TEST-INPUT functional input.

Important note: the logic is blocked if the corresponding setting underthe BlockFunctions menu remains on and the TEST-INPUT signalremains active.

The pole discordance function does not have to be blocked in order to betested.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 380-XENPage 6 – 550

ABB Network Partner recommends, although it is not an absolute require-ment, the use of testing equipment of type RTS 21 (FREJA) for secondaryinjection tests.

The used test equipment should be capable of providing an independentthree-phase supply of currents to the tested terminal. Furthermore it mustbe possible to change the values of currents and phase angles between themeasuring quantities, independent of each other, for each phase sepa-rately. The test currents should have a common source, with a very smallcontent of higher harmonics.

5.2 Testing of the pole discordance logic

The settings shown in the following tests can be used as a reference dur-ing testing. After the tests the equipment should be restored to the normalor desiderd settings.

The following steps are necessary for testing the pole discordance logicfunction:

1.1 Check if the input and output logical signals of the function areconfigured to the corresponding binary inputs and outputs of thetested terminal. If not, configure them for testing purposes. .

1.2 Set the operation of the PD logic to On mode from the HMIaccording to below:

PoleDiscordance Operation=Ont = 1.0 s

1.3 Activate the binary input PD---POLDISC and verify that after 1s thetrip signal PD---TRIP appears on the corresponding binary output oron the local HMI unit.

6 Appendix

6.1 Function block

PD---BLOCKPD---1POPEN

PD---POLDISC

PD---TRIP

POLE DISCORDANCE

visf_117.vsd

Pole discordance logic 1MRK 580 380-XENPage 6 – 551

Version 2.2-00


6.3 Signal list

6.4 Setting table

PD---BLOCK

PD---1POPEN

PD---POLDISCPD---TRIP

visf_118.vsd

t

t 150 ms

&

PD - POLE DISCORDANCE LOGIC

>1

TEST-ACTIVE

&

TEST

BlockPD = Yes


PD--- BLOCK IN Block of pole discordance function

PD--- 1POPEN IN One phase open

PD--- POLDISC IN Pole discordance

PD--- TRIP OUT Trip by pole discordance function


Operation Off, On Off Pole discordance protection On/Off

t 0.000-60.000 s 0.500 Delay timer


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 380-XENPage 6 – 552

553Binary signal transfer to remote end

1 ApplicationThe binary signal transfer function is preferably used for sending commu-nication scheme related signals, transfer trip and/or other binary signalsrequired at the remote end. Up to 32 selectable binary send and 32 select-able binary receive signals, internal or external to the terminal can betransmitted.

To ensure compatibility with a wide range of communication equipmentand media, the relay is designed to work within the signalling bandwidthof a standard CCITT PCM channel at 64 kbits/s. To enable the use inNorth American EIA PCM systems working at 56 kbits/s, some of theinterfacing modules can be adapted to this bit rate.

A data message is sent every 5 ms. Each data message is 22 bytes long. Tothis message, start and stop flags are then added, together with a 16 bitCyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) word.

HDLC is a protocol for the flow management of the information on a datacommunication link. The protocol is widely used. The basic informationunit on an HDLC link is a frame. A frame consists of:

• start (or opening) flag

• address and control fields (if included)

• data to be transmitted

• CRC word

• end (or closing) flag.

HDLC is a bit-oriented protocol, which means that the receiver must beable to recognize a flag at any time. For this reason, all flags have thebinary configuration 01111110. To avoid problems with other bytes hav-ing the same pattern, a technique called “zero bit insertion” is used. Thistechniques specifies that after every succession of five consecutive 1’s, abinary 0 is inserted. Thus, no pattern 01111110 is ever transmitted bychance, except for the flags. At the receiving end, when the start flag isrecognized, a 0 is removed after 5 consecutive 1’s.

The address field is used for checking that the received message origi-nates from the correct equipment. There is always a risk of multiplexersoccasionally mixing up the messages. Each terminal is given different ter-minal numbers. The terminal is then programmed to accept messages onlyfrom a specific terminal number.

If the CRC function detects a faulty message, the message is thrown awayand not used in the evaluation. No data restoration or retransmission areimplemented.

1MRK 580 381-XEN


Binary signal transfer to remote end

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 554

2 Design

2.1 General The Remote Terminal Communication module RTC1 can handle 16inputs and 16 outputs. If additional inputs and outputs are required, anadditional Remote Terminal Communication module RTC2 can be added.

The modules can be placed in applicable slots in the terminal. To add,remove or move modules within the REx 5xx terminal, reconfiguration ofthe terminal is done from the graphical configuration tool, CAP 535.

If the user-entered configuration does not match the actual hardware posi-tion of the modules within the terminal, an error output is activated on thefunction block, which can be treated as an event or alarm.

All user defined names for inputs and outputs are input identities on thefunction blocks and are set from the configuration tool CAP 535.

2.2 Function block Each corresponding Remote terminal communication function block has16 inputs to handle information received from the remote end plus 16 out-puts to send information to the remote end. See figure 1.

The function blocks has an input BLOCK, which is available to block thefunction. When the input is energized, all 16 binary signals (SEND01-16)will be sent as zeroes. Incoming signals are not affected.

An output COMFAIL is also available to announce an alarm when there isa failure in the communication via the Remote terminal communicationmodule.

Figure 1: Function block of RTC1- with input and output signals.

RTC1-

BLOCKSEND01SEND02SEND03SEND04SEND05SEND06SEND07SEND08SEND09SEND10SEND11SEND12SEND13SEND14SEND15SEND16

COMFAILREC01REC02REC03REC04REC05REC06REC07REC08REC09REC10REC11REC12REC13REC14REC15REC16


1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 555

Version 2.2-00

2.3 Human-machine interface (HMI)

The service reports of the function provides information of all functionaloutputs as well as function inputs ‘SEND01-16’ and can be viewed on thelocal HMI under:

ServiceReportI/O

RemTermCom1RemTermCom2

Self-supervision is provided for the remote terminal communication andinformation is available on the local HMI under:


RemTermCom


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 556

2.4 Communication alternatives

2.4.1 General Following communication alternatives exists:

Figure 2: Multiplexed link, fibre optical-galvanic connection.

Figure 3: Dedicated link, fibre optical connection.

Figure 4: Multiplexed link, fibre optical connection.

< 30 km

Opticalfibres

REx 5xx

otherusers

FOX 6Plus

MUX

GalvanicG.703

to theother end

X80039-2_1.eps

Opticalfibres

< 30 km

REx 5xx REx 5xx

X80039-2_2.eps

otherusers

REx 5xx

< 30 km MUX

FOX 20

Opticalfibres

to theother end

X80039-2_5.eps


1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 557

Version 2.2-00

Figure 5: Multiplexed link, galvanic connection.

Figure 6: Dedicated link, short range galvanic modem.

Figure 7: Multiplexed link, short range fibre optical connection.

2.4.2 Fibre optical modem

The optical communication module is designed for both 9/125 µm singlemode fibres, and 50/125 or 62.5/125 µm multi mode fibres at a wave-length of 1300 nm. The connectors are of type FC-PC (SM) or FC (MM)respectively. Two different levels of optical output power are used tocover distances from 0 to approximately 30 km.

2.4.3 Short range fiber optical modem

The short range fiber optical modem is used for synchronous 64 kbit/sdata transmission at distances up to 5 km. It can also be used together withfibre optic transceiver type 21-15X/16X from FIBERDATA in order to getan optical link between the protection terminal and a remotely locatedcommunication equipment as in figure 7.

V.35, V.36, X.21, RS53056/64 kbit/s

REx 5xx

< 100 m

otherusers

MUX

Galvanic

to theother end

X80039-2_6.eps

Twistedpair cable

< 4 km

REx 5xx REx 5xx

X80039-2_4.eps

OpticalfibresREx 5xx 21-15X/16X V.35/36 (15X)

X.21 (16X)G.703 (16X)

< 5 km X80039-2_7.eps


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 558

Transmission is performed simultaneously in both directions, full duplex,over two optical fibres. The fibres shall be of multi mode type, preferable50/125 mm or 62.5/125 mm.

The reach of the short range optical modem will depend on the propertiesof the used optical fibre. In the optical budget also has to be accounted forlosses in splices, connectors and also ageing of the cable. The connectionto the protection terminal shall not be accounted for in the optical budget.15 dB optical budget gives up to 5 km reach under normal conditions.

2.4.4 Short range galvanic modem

The short range galvanic modem is used for synchronous data transmis-sion at 64 kbit/s at distances up to 4 km.

Compared to normal data transmission standards, for example V.36, X21etc., the short range modem increase the operational security and allowslonger distances of transmission. This is achieved by a careful choice oftransmission technology, modified M-3 balanced current loop, and gal-vanic isolation between the transmission line and the internal logic of theprotection terminal.

Transmission is performed simultaneously in both directions, full duplex,over four wires in the transmission line.

Table 1: Technical data for the short range fiber optical modem

Data transmission Synchronous; full duplex

Transmission rate 64 kbit/s

Optical fibre 850 nm, multimode fibre

Optical connectors ST

Optical budget 15 dB

Clock source Internal or derived from received signal

LED indications RTS, CTS, DSR, DCD, TXD, RXD, LO, LA, MA, RA

Table 2: Technical data for short range galvanic modem

Data transmission Synchronous; full duplex

Transmission rate 64 kbit/s (256 kBaud; code transparent

Range See figure 8 on page 559. Maximum permitted capacitance within each pair is 140 nF. The modem is not recommended to be used on dis-tance above 4 km.

Line interface Balanced symmetrical three-state current loop. 5-pin divisible connector with screw connection

Clock source Internal or derived from received signal

LED indications Clock, Send and Receive

Isolation Galvanic isolation through opto-couplers and iso-lating DC/DC converter

Test voltage 2 500 Vrms; 1 minute


1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 559

Version 2.2-00

The reach of the short range galvanic modem will depend on the usedcable. Higher capacitance between conductors and higher resistance willreduce the reach. The use of screened cables will increase the capacitanceand thereby shorten the reach but this will most often be compensated forby the reduced noise giving a better operational security. Maximumranges as a function of cable parameters is given in Figure 8:.

Figure 8: Maximum reach.

Note! The reaches in the diagram, figure 8, is given for twisted-pair anddouble-screened cables, one screen for each pair and one common outerscreen. For non twisted-pair cables, the reach has to be reduced by 20%.For non pair-screened cables, the reach also has to be reduced by 20%.For non twisted and single screened cables, one common outer screen, thereach will therefor be reduced by 40%.

2.4.5 Galvanic interfaces If the terminal is in the same building as the multiplexing equipment,within a distance of less than 100 m, and the environment is relatively freeof noise, the terminal may be connected directly to the multiplexer viashielded and properly earthed cables with twisted pairs.

Since the terminal communicates continuously, a permanent communica-tion circuit is required. Consequently, the call control and handshakingfeatures specified for some interfacing recommendations are not pro-vided.

Equipment is available for the following interfacing recommendations,specifying the interconnection of the digital equipment to a PCM multi-plexer:

• V.35/36 co-directional galvanic interface

• V.35/36 contra-directional galvanic interface

• X.21 galvanic interface

• RS530/422 co-directional galvanic interface

• RS530/422 contra-directional galvanic interface

• G.703 co-directional galvanic interface (via additional interface con-verter).


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 560

Note! Due to problems of timing co-directional operation for V.35/36 andRS530 is only recommended to be used at direct back-to-back operation,for example during laboratory testing!

For the signals used by the terminal, the communication module for V.36also fulfils the older recommendation for V.35.

The connection is established by DSUB connectors, 15 pins for X.21 and25 pins for V.35/36 and RS530. The use of the different pins are shown infigure 9. The G.703 converter connection is performed by screw connec-tion.

Figure 9: DSUB connectors.

The following abbreviations are used in figure 9:

Table 3:

A Designations of terminals according to CCITT, EIA etc.

B Designations of terminals according to CCITT, EIA etc.

DCE Data communication equipment (= multiplexer, etc.)

DTE Data terminal equipment (= protection)

DTE READY Data terminal ready (follows auxiliary voltage)

GND Earth (reference for signals)

RCLK Receiver signal timing

REQ SEND Request to send (follows auxiliary voltage)

RXD Received data

SCREEN Connection of cable screen

TCLK DCE Transmitter signal timing from DCE

TCLK DTE Transmitter signal timing from DTE

TXD Transmitter data


1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 561

Version 2.2-00

If the terminal is at a long distance from the multiplexer, or if the cablesrun through a noisy area, optical cables should be used to interconnect therelay and the multiplexer. In this case, the relay contains the module usedfor dedicated optical links.

If the multiplexer is of type FOX20 from ABB Netcom, the terminal canbe connected optically to the multiplexer, provided it is equipped with anOptical Terminal Module of type N3BT.

In other cases, an optical-to-electrical converter, FOX6Plus, 21-15xx or21-16xx has to be used at the multiplexer. The FOX6Plus supports theG.703 co-directional interfacing. 21-15xx supports V.35 and V.36 while21-16xx supports X.21, G.703 and RS530 co-directional and contra-direc-tional. The distance between the optical-to-electrical converter and themultiplexer should be kept less than 100 m, for G.703 less than 10 m.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 562

3 ConfigurationThe configuration of input and output signals to the function block is donefrom the configuration tool CAP 535.

To configure the I/O-module from the graphical tool:

• First, set the function selector for the Remote Terminal Communica-tion units, RTC1 used.

• Then connect the POSITION input of the logical I/O module to a slot output of the RTC function block.

Reconfiguration of the I/O-modules are also possible from the local HMIunder the menus:

ConfigurationI/O-modules

OperationReconfigureOscillation

4 SettingSet the user defined names, parameters, for the binary inputs and outputsfrom the configuration tool CAP 535.

The configuration parameters for the communication are available in themenu tree in the local HMI under:


RemTermCom

4.1 Selection of communication parameters

Note! This section does not apply to short range optical or galvanicmodem.

For the optical module, the optical output power has to be set according tothe attenuation of the fibre optic link.

For multimode fibres:

• If the attenuation is less than 6 dB, use Low setting

• If the attenuation is higher than 10 dB, use High setting

• If the attenuation is between 6 and 10 dB, use either High or Low setting.

For single-mode fibres:

• If the attenuation is higher than 5 dB, use High setting

• If the attenuation is between 0 and 5 dB, use either High or Low set-ting.


1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 563

Version 2.2-00

To achieve the best operation, the optical communication modules at bothterminals must be synchronised. To fulfil this, one terminal acts as a Mas-ter and the other as a Slave. This is set under:


RemTermComCommSync

When communicating with FOX20 or FOX6Plus, the setting should be:

• Slave on the protection at both terminals.

When operating over dedicated fibres the setting shall be:

• Master at one terminal and Slave at the other.

When using the modules for X.21, V.35/36 contra-directional andRS530/422 contra-directional, no setting has to be carried out.

For the modules with V.35/36 co-directional and RS530/422 co-direc-tional communication, the bit rate has to be set. The choice is between56 and 64 kbits/s. This is set under:


RemTermComBitrate

4.2 Fibre optical Note! This section does not apply to short range optical modem.

The optical power is set in the HMI under:


RemTermCom

The optical power for the different possibilities is shown in the tablebelow.

Table 4:

Type of fibre Output powerOptical Transmission Output power

Optical Reception Sensitivity

Maximum attenuation

MultimodeLow -28 dBm -40 dBm 10 dB

High -16 dBm -40 dBm 21 dB

SinglemodeLow -33 dBm -40 dBm 5 dB

High -21 dBm -40 dBm 16 dB


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 564

The attenuation in fibres is normally approximately 0.8 dB/km for multi-mode, and 0.4 dB/km for single-mode fibres. Additional attenuation dueto the installation can be estimated at 0.2 dB/km for multimode and0.1 dB/km for single-mode fibres. For a single-mode fibre with high out-put power, this results in a maximum distance of 32 km.

4.3 Short range fibre optical modem

Normally all setting can be made on a DIP-switch located behind thecover around the fibre optic connectors at the back of the terminal accord-ing to figure 10. After the fibres has been disconnected, if attached, thecover plate can be removed just by pulling at the middle of the coverplate.

Note! If handled carefully the cover plate can be removed also with thefibres attached.

Figure 10: Setting and indications.

Switch 3 and 4 are used to set the source of timing. The function isaccording to setting of timing signal, table 5 on page 564.

When using the modem for optical point-to-point transmission, onemodem should be set for locally created timing and the other for timingrecovered from received signal.

When the modems are communicating with a transceiver 21-15X or 16Xthe modems shall be set for timing recovered from received optical signal,see setting of timing signal:

Table 5: Setting of timing signal

Switch No Function

3 4

OFF OFF Timing created by the modem

OFF ON Timing created by the differential function

ON OFF Timing recovered from received optical signal

ON ON No timing, the data transmission will not work


1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 565

Version 2.2-00

The module can synchronise received data with the send clock. This is notnormally necessary in this application. Synchronisation ON/OFF is con-trolled by switch 2.

When the module is set for synchronisation (switch 2 = ON) switch 1must be set in the position corresponding to the Sync LED that is bright-est. If both have the same brightness the switch can be set in any position.

Note! After any change of settings, the modem has to be reset by theReset button located below the DIP-switch.

4.3.1 Indications There are ten LED’s indicating the status of the transmission link. TheseLED’s are found above DIP-switch described in the Setting section, seealso figure 10 on page 564. The function of the LED’s are explained in thefollowing table.

The memory function is reset with the Reset button below the DIP-switch.The reset command is also transmitted to the other end of the optical link.

The two green LED’s, Sync, at the bottom is used to set the synchronisa-tion function correctly with switch 4 as described in the Setting section.

4.3.2 Jumper settings Note! All jumpers are set in correct location from factory. No change ofjumper settings should be made without contacting the manufacturer.

The jumpers are accessible after the modem has been pulled out. This isdone by first removing all green 18-pin connectors at the back, thenremove all screws holding the back plate. After the back plate has beenremoved the modem can be pulled out.

Table 6: Indications

LED Colour Explanation

RTS Yellow Request to send

CTS Yellow Clear to send

DSR Yellow Data communication correct

DCD Yellow Detection of carrier signal

TXD Yellow Transmitted data

RXD Yellow Recieved data

RA Red Remotely detected problem with link

MA Red Memory function for problem with link

LO Green Link operation correctly

LA Red Locally detected problem with link

Sync Green Used when synchronisation is selected


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 566

Note! Only pull out the modem not the whole double size Euro-card.After the jumper settings has been changed put everything back in reverseorder.

Note! All electronic are sensitive to electrostatic discharge. Proper actionmust be taken at the work place to avoid electrostatic discharge!

There are two locations of jumpers, S3 and S5 according to figure 11.

Figure 11: Jumper locations.

S3 is used for selecting timing function. A jumper is inserted in position 1.

S5 is used for setting the transmission rate at timing created by themodem. Two jumpers are inserted, one in position 1 and the other in posi-tion 4. This gives 64 kbit/s which is the rate used by the differential pro-tection function.

4.3.3 Operation on dedicated fibres

When operating on dedicated fibres one protection is set to generate thetiming and the other will recover timing from received optical signal. Thesetting will then be according to table 7.

Table 7: Settings

Protection 1 Protection 2

Switch Position Switch Position

1 Not used 1 Not used

2 Off 2 Off

3 Off 3 Off

4 Off 4 On


1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 567

Version 2.2-00

4.3.4 Operation with transceivers of type 21-15XX or 21-16XX

When operating with transceivers of type 21-15XX or 21-16XX fromFiberdata, the timing will be recovered from received optical signal. Thesetting will then be according to table 8.

4.4 Short range galvanic modem

There is only one setting to do, if the timing signal (Clock) are to belocally created or recovered from the received signal. This setting is per-formed by a DIP-switch located behind the cover around the line connec-tor at the back of the terminal according to figure 12. After the lineconnector has been pulled out, the cover plate can be removed just bypulling at the middle of the cover plate.

Figure 12: Settings and indications.

Only switch 1 and 2 are used on the DIP-switch. The function is accordingto the setting of timing signal, see table 9.

In normal operation switch 1 is set in ON position at one end and switch 2is set ON at the other end. The rest of the switches is set OFF.

Table 8: Settings

Protection

Switch Position

1 Not used

2 Off

3 Off

4 On

Table 9: Setting of timing signal

Switch No Function

1 2


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 568

4.4.1 Indications There are three LED’s indicating the status of the transmission link. TheseLED’s are found below DIP-switch described in the Setting section, seealso figure 12 on page 567. The LED’s are denoted DCD, RD and TDwith indications according to table 10, Indications, below.


LED Explanation

DCD Data and Carrier Detect. Indicates that a correct timing signal is received. Shall show a steady green light.

RD Receive Data. Indicates that a “one” is received. Shall show a flickering yellow light

TD Transmit Data. Indicates that a “zero” is sent. Shall show a flick-ering yellow light.


1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 569

Version 2.2-00

5 Optical/electric converter for short range optical modem

5.1 Transceiver 21-15x for interface standard V.35/V.36

5.1.1 Interfaces The transceiver 21-15X can be used for interface standards V35, V36 andRS232. The transmission can be synchronous at different transmissionrates (see below in section 2) or asynchronous with a maximum transmis-sion rate of 256 kBaud (12% jitters). Following signals are supported inthe interface:

1)DCE stands for Data Circuit terminating Equipment and DTEfor Data Terminal Equipment. The transceiver is normally a DCE.

2)= 19, 20, 25, 27, 29, 30, 31, 37

Figure 13: Connection between the transceiver and other equipment.

V35, V36 and RS232 are using a common output module and the choosebetween the three interface standards are done by placing a jumper in oneof three possible positions according to figure 14 on page 572. Only oneinterface standard can be chosen simultaneously but different standardscan be chosen at the two ends.

The optical contact is ST for multi mode fibre, 50/120 µm or 62.6/120µm.

Table 11: Interface signals

Signal name V24 V35 V36 RS232 Direction1)

TXD 103 P/S 4/22 2 -> DCE

TXD

TXC

TXCE

RXD

RXC

TXD

TXC

TXCE

RXD

RXC

RTS

DSR

DTR

CTS

DCD

RTS

DSR

DTR

CTS

DCD

SGNDPGND

SGNDPGND


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 570

The electrical contact is a 34-pin connector according to ISO 4902 DCEfor V35, a 37-pin connector according to ISO 2593-1984 DCE for V36and a 25-pin connector according to ISO 2110 DCE for V24 / V28(RS232).

5.1.2 Transmission rates The transceiver can transmit synchronous data with transmission ratesaccording to table 12.

The transmission rate is set by a rotary switch, see figure 14 on page 572.

Asynchronous data transmission can be used with a sampling rate of2048 ksample/s which gives a maximum transmission rate of about256 kBaud.

5.1.3 Timing The timing of the transceiver can be set for three alternatives:

• Internal timing, the transceiver will create the timing.

• External timing, the transceiver is controlled by the DTE via signal 113.

• Loop timing, the timing is derived from the received optical signal.

The choice is done by two jumpers, see figure 14 on page 572.The transceiver can synchronise received data with transmit timing. Thisfunction is controlled by a jumper, see figure 14 on page 572. When thetransceiver is set for synchronisation of data, the jumper for selection ofphase must be correctly set. The jumper has to be placed closest to thebrightest LED, see figure 14 on page 572.

5.1.4 Indications Ten LED’s with following colour code: Alarm = Red, Status = Yellow,Function = Green.

The transceiver is supervising its own receiving function and announce itby indicating and signaling with DCD and DSR. The transceiver is super-vising the receiving function of the remote end and announce this by indi-cating and signaling with DSR. The reading of fault indication isinterrupted by pressing the reset button, the signaling cannot be read. Thereset is also transmitted to the transceiver at the remote end.

The following indications exist:

Table 12: Transmission rates

Transmission rate[kBaud]

Position

2048 0, E, F

Table 13:

RTS status CTS status


1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 571

Version 2.2-00

5.1.5 Dissembling/Assembling

To make the jumpers accessible to perform the above mentioned settings,the unit must be opened.


The unit is dissembled by unscrewing three screws located under the unitat the back, holding the back plate in position. The back plate with con-nection for the auxiliary voltage can now be pulled backwards. The uppercover is now pushed backward about 2 cm and when lifted up from theunit. The printed circuit board will now be visible according to figure 14on page 572.

The unit is reassembled by placing the cover on the unit about 2 cmbehind the front. The cover is gently pushed downwards and then pushedforward. The back plate with connection for the auxiliary voltage is put inposition from behind and the three screws, holding the back plate, are putback.

DSR status DCD status

TXD status RXD status

LO function (Link operational) LA alarm (Link Alarm)

MA status (Memory Alarm) RA alarm (Remote Alarm)

Table 13:


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 572

5.1.6 Setting description

Figure 14: Setting location on printed circuit board.

Selection of interface standard, V35 / V36 / RS232, jumper S1:

• RS232: put the jumper in upper position.

• V35: put the jumper in middle position (factory setting).

• V36: put the jumper in bottom position.

Selection of transmission rate, rotary switch S2:

• Turn S2 in wanted position. For asynchronous transmission put S2 in position 0. (default setting at factory).

Selection of timing function, jumper S3:

• Internal timing: No jumper on the two bottom positions (default set-ting).

• External timing: One jumper in the middle position.

• Timing retrieved from received optical signal: One jumper in the bottom position.

Selection of synchronisation, jumper S3:

• Synchronisation: One jumper in the top position.

• No synchronisation: No jumper in the top position (default setting).

Power

S1 S2 S3 S7

S5 S4

Back side

Front


1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 573

Version 2.2-00

When synchronisation has been selected, jumper S4 is placed closest tothe brightest LED.

Note! After any change in setting the transceiver, it has to be reset bypressing button S7 (Reset).

Selection of protective grounding, jumper S5:

• No connection between protective grounding and signal ground:

• No jumper (default setting).

• Soft connection between protective grounding and signal ground:jumper inserted to the left.

• Hard connection between protective grounding and signal ground: jumper inserted to the right.

5.1.7 Specification Electrical interface:34-pin connector according to ISO 4902 DCE for V35,37-pin connector according to ISO 2593-1984 DCE for V36,25-pin connector according to ISO 2110 DCE for V24/V28 (RS232).

Optical interface:Optical connectors are ST for multi mode fibre.Optical budget is 15 dB for 850 nm multi mode fibre.

Auxiliary voltage:110-230 Volt ± 20%, 50-60 Hz Standard AC line connectoror48-110 Volt DC ± 20%XLR audio connector.

5.1.8 Recommendations on settings and connections

Here follows some recommendations on settings and connections whenoperating together with protections from ABB Network Partner. In thefollowing the transceiver is regarded as a DTE (although it is actuallydesigned as a DCE) and is supposed to be connected to a communicationequipment that acts as a DCE.

For synchronous communication a DCE always have to output timing sig-nals (TC and RC) and one input timing signal (TTC). For the DTE theopposite is valid. All clocks in a synchronous network have the same tim-ing and provided the phase is set correctly they have also the same phase.This means that only one clock signal has to be used between the trans-ceiver and the communication as in the cases below.

Connector for DC-supply

1 = 48-110 V DC2 = 0 V3 = Screen

1 2

3


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 574

5.1.8.1 Co-directional opera-tion

The connection is done according to table 14.

Figure 6 on page 557 shows the connection. If needed for proper opera-tion of the communication equipment a connection can be made betweenthe RC and TC. Both TD and RD are controlled from TTC.

Setting of transceiver is done according to table 15.

Table 14: Connections

Transceiver

Pin No.

V.35 V.36 Comm. eq.

Signal No A B A B Signal No Direction

TD 103 P S 4 22 RD 104 Comm. eq -> Transceiver

RD 104 R T 6 24 TD 103 Transceiver -> Comm. eq.

TTC 113 U W 17 35 RC 115 Comm. eq. -> Transceiver

Table 15: Settings

Switch, jumper Setting Gives

S1 Middle position V.35

S1 Bottom position V.36

S2 9 64 kbit/s

S3 Middle position External clock

S4 Has no influence on operation ---


1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 575

Version 2.2-00

5.1.8.2 Contra-directional operation

The connection is done according to table 16.

1) Either RC - 115 or TC - 114 can be used.

Figure 7 on page 557 shows the connection. In this case the connection toTTC can be done either from RC or TC but not from both. Both TD andRD are controlled from TTC.


5.2 Transceiver 21-16x for interface standard X.21/G.703

5.2.1 Interfaces The transceiver 21-16X can be used for interface standards X.21, RS530and three variants of G.703 (the 2048 kbit/s protocol on coaxial cable, co-directional according to the 64 kbit/s protocol from 64 up to 2048 kbit/sand contra-directional according to the 64 kbit/s protocol from 64 up to2048 kbit/s, the last two on twisted pair cable. The transmission can besynchronous at different transmission rates (see “Transmission rates” onpage 576) or asynchronous with a maximum transmission rate of 256kBaud (12% jitters). Following signals are supported in the interface:


Transceiver

Pin No.

V.35 V.36 Comm. eq.

Signal No A B A B Signal No Direction

TD 103 P S 4 22 RD 104 Comm. eq -> Transceiver

RD 104 R T 6 24 TD 103 Transceiver -> Comm. eq.

TTC 113 U W 17 35 1) 1) Comm. eq. -> Transceiver

Table 17: Settings


S1 Middle position V.35

S1 Bottom position V.36

S2 9 64 kbit/s



Table 18: Interface signals

Signal name X.21 RS530 G.7032) (co) Direction1)

TXD 2, 9 2, 14 3, 4 -> DCE


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 576

1)DCE stands for Data Circuit terminating Equipment and DTE forData Terminal Equipment. The transceiver is normally a DCE.

2)Numbered from left, the connection points will get this number.3)Depending if the transceiver is acting as receiver or transmitter of

reference timing. This is set by jumpers on the PCB.

Figure 15: Connection between the transceiver and other equipment.

Choosing interface standard is done by placing a jumper in one of fourpossible positions according to “Configuring type of interface” onpage 578. Only one interface standard can be chosen simultaneously butdifferent standards can be chosen at the two ends.

Optical connectors are ST for multi mode fibre.

The electrical contact is for:X.2115-pin DSUBRS53025-pin DSUBG.703 co-directional 10 pin divisible screw connector (and/or8-pin modular RJ45 jack).

5.2.2 Transmission rates The transceiver can transmit synchronous data with transmission ratesaccording to table 19.

TXD

TXC

TXCE

RXD

RXC

TXD

TXC

TXCE

RXD

RXC

RTS

DSR

DTR

CTS

DCD

RTS

DSR

DTR

CTS

DCD

SGNDPGND

SGNDPGND

Table 19: Transmission rates

Transmission rate [kBaud] Position

2048 0, E, F


1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 577

Version 2.2-00

Asynchronous data transmission can be used with a sampling rate of2048 ksample/s which gives a maximum transmission rate of about256 kBaud. The transmission rate is set by a rotary switch according to“Configuring transmission rate, timing and synchronisation” on page 579.

5.2.3 Timing The timing of the transceiver can be set for three alternatives:

• Internal timing:the transceiver will create the timing.

• External timing:the transceiver is controlled by the DTE via signal 113.

• Loop timing:the timing is derived from the received optical signal.

The selection is done by two jumpers according to “Configuring transmis-sion rate, timing and synchronisation” on page 579.

The transceiver can synchronise received data with transmit timing. Thisfunction is controlled by a jumper, see “Configuring transmission rate,timing and synchronisation” on page 579. When the transceiver is set forsynchronisation of data, the jumper for selection of phase must be cor-rectly set. The jumper has to be placed closest to the brightest LEDaccording to “Configuring transmission rate, timing and synchronisation”on page 579.

5.2.4 Indications Twelve LED’s with following colour code:

• Alarm = Red

• Status = Yellow

• Function = Green.

The transceiver is supervising its own receiving function and announce itby indicating and signaling with DCD and DSR. The transceiver is super-vising the receiving function of the remote end and announce this byindicating and signaling with DSR. The lock-in of fault indication is inter-rupted by pressing the reset button. Note that signaling is not locked-in.

Following indications exist:


RTS status CTS status

DSR status DCD status

TXD status RXD status

CO status (G.703 co) CONTRA status (G.703 contra)

LO function (Linkoperational)

LA alarm (Linkoperational)

MA status (MemoryAlarm)

RA alarm (MemoryAlarm)


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 578

5.2.5 Setting possibility for G.703

The interface for G.703 for twisted pair cable demands certain jumpers tobe inserted depending on type of transmission. Following possibilitiesexist:

• co- or contra-directional

• sending or receiving of timing signal for contra-directional mode.

Insertion of jumpers are done according to “Configuring G.703 co- andcontra-directional” on page 581.

5.2.6 Dissembling/Assembling

For making the jumpers accessible to perform the above mentioned set-tings, the unit must be opened.


The unit is dissembled by unscrewing three screws located under the unitat the back, holding the back plate in position. The back plate with con-nection for the auxiliary voltage can now be pulled backwards. The uppercover is now pushed backward about 2 cm and then lifted up from theunit. The printed circuit board will now be visible according to figure 14on page 572.

The unit is reassembled by placing the cover on the unit about 2 cmbehind the front. The cover is gently pushed downwards and then pushedforward. The back plate with connection for the auxiliary voltage is put inposition from behind and the three screws, holding the back plate, are putback.

5.2.7 Configuring type of interface

Figure 16: Jumper location for interface standard selection.


1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 579

Version 2.2-00

Jumper field S5 selects the interface type.

Note! Only one interface type can be chosen. From top to bottom accord-ing to figure 16, an inserted jumper will give the following interface type:

• G.703, 64 to 2048 kbit/s, co-directional with twisted pair cable conn.

• X.21

• RS530

5.2.8 Configuring transmission rate, timing and synchronisation

Figure 17: Setting locations for rate, clock and synchronisation.

Selection of transmission rate:

• Turn S11 in wanted position according to “Transmission rates” on page 576.

Selection of timing function, jumper S14.

• Internal timing: No jumper on the two bottom positions.

• External timing: One jumper in the middle position.

• Timing retrieved from received optical signal: One jumper in the bottom position.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 580

Selection of synchronisation, jumper S14:

• Synchronisation: One jumper in the top position.

• No synchronisation: No jumper in the top position.

When synchronisation has been selected, jumper S13 is placed closest tothe brightest LED.Note! After any change in the setting, the transceiver has to be reset bypressing button S12 (Reset).

5.2.9 Configuring X.21

Figure 18: Jumper location for interface standard X.21.

The insertion of jumpers in fields S2, S3 and S4 shall be done consideringif the unit shall act as a DCE or a DTE according to following:

How to choose X.21 see “Configuring type of interface” on page 578.

S2 S3 S4

S2 S3 S4

DTE:

DCE:


1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 581

Version 2.2-00

5.2.10 Configuring G.703 co- and contra-directional

Figure 19: Jumper locations for G.703 co- and contra-directionaloperation.

Jumper field S6:

• G.703 co-directional: One jumper in the top position.

• G.703 contra-directional: One jumper in the bottom position.

Jumper field S7, S8 and S9:

• Jumper at S7 gives transmission of timing at G.703 contra-directional operation.

• No jumper at S7 gives reception of timing at G.703 contra-directional operation.

Note! S7 has no influence at G.703 co-directional operation.

S8 and S9 reconnects the pulse transformer for transmission or receptionof timing signal.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 582

Note! S8 and S9 must be equally configured and in accordance with set-ting of S7.

How to choose G.703 co- and contra-directional operation, see “Configur-ing G.703 co- and contra-directional” on page 581.

5.2.11 Selection of protective earthing

Figure 20: Jumper location for protective earthing.

Jumper field S1:

• No connection between protective earth and signaling earth:No jumper.

• Soft connection between protective earth and signaling earth:Jumper inserted to the left.

• Direct connection between protective earth and signaling earth:Jumper inserted to the right.

5.2.12 Specification Electrical interface:X.2115-pin DSUBRS53025-pin DSUBG.703 10 pin divisible screw connector (and/or 8-pin modular RJ45 jack).

Jumper in upper field givestransmission of timing

Jumper in bottom field givestransmission of timing


1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 583

Version 2.2-00

Optical interface:Optical connectors are ST for multi mode fibre.Optical budget is 15 dB for 850 nm multi mode fibre.

Auxiliary voltage:110-230 Volt ± 20%, 50-60 Hz Standard AC line connectoror48-110 Volt DC ± 20%XLR audio connector.

5.2.13 Recommendations on settings and connections

Here follows some recommendations on settings and connections whenoperating together with protections from ABB Network Partner. In thefollowing the transceiver is regarded as a DTE and is supposed to be con-nected to a communication equipment that acts as a DCE.

5.2.13.1 X.21 operation The connection is done according to table 21, also shown in figure 3 onpage 556.


Connector for DC-supply

1 = 48-110 V DC2 = 0 V3 = Screen

1 2

3


Transceiver Comm. eq.

Pin No.

Signal A B Signal Direction

T R Comm. eq -> Transceiver

R T Transceiver -> Comm. eq.

S S Comm. eq. -> Transceiver

Table 22: Settings


S5 Second position from top G.703

S6 Top position Co-directional

S11 9 64 kbit/s




Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 584

5.2.13.2 G.703 co-directional operation

The connection is done according to table 23, also see figure 3 on page556.

If a screen is available in the cable it is connected to protection earth (pin9, 10 on the transceiver) at one or both ends.



Transceiver Comm. eq.

Signal Pin Signal Direction

TX 3, 4 RX Comm. eq -> Transceiver

RX 1, 2 TX Transceiver -> Comm. eq.

Table 24: Settings


S5 Second position from top G.703

S6 Top position Co-directional

S11 9 64 kbit/s




1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 585

Version 2.2-00

6 TestingThere are two types of internal self-supervision of the RTC.

The I/O-circuitboard is supervised as an I/O module. For example it gives‘FAIL’ if the board is not inserted. I/O-modules not configured are neithersupervised. When an RTC- module is configured as a logical I/O moduleit is also supervised.

Then there is also the communication supervision that gives ‘WARNING’if one of the RTC-modules signals for ‘COMFAIL’. Each RTC-modulehas an error output (‘COMFAIL’) which is set to a logical 1 if anything iswrong with the communication through the actual module. Status forinputs and outputs as well as self-supervision status are available from thelocal HMI.

Test correct functionality by simulating different kind of faults. Alsocheck that sent and received data is correct transmitted and read.

A test connection is showed in figure 21. A binary input ( BI ) is con-nected to a RTC function input in end1, for example RTC1-SEND01, andin the other end a binary output ( BO ) is connected to the received func-tion output, for example RTC1-REC01. The binary signal is transfered tothe remote end ( end2 ) through a HDLC link.

Figure 21: Test of RTC with I/O.

REx 5xx (End 1)

BI

REx 5xx

BO

+

+

HDLClink

(End 2)Test connectionwith I/O

-

-


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 586

7 Appendix

7.1 Function block

Figure 22: Terminal diagram of function block RTC1, parameters shown.

RTC1-

BLOCKSEND01SEND02SEND03SEND04SEND05SEND06SEND07SEND08SEND09SEND10SEND11SEND12SEND13SEND14SEND15SEND16

COMFAILREC01REC02REC03REC04REC05REC06REC07REC08REC09REC10REC11REC12REC13REC14REC15REC16

RC01NAMERC02NAMERC03NAMERC04NAMERC05NAMERC06NAMERC07NAMERC08NAMERC09NAMERC10NAMERC11NAMERC12NAMERC13NAMERC14NAMERC15NAMERC16NAMESD01NAMESD02NAMESD03NAMESD04NAMESD05NAMESD06NAMESD07NAMESD08NAMESD09NAMESD10NAMESD11NAMESD12NAMESD13NAMESD14NAMESD15NAMESD16NAME


1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 587

Version 2.2-00

7.2 Signal list


RTC1- BLOCK IN Block of remote terminal communication function

RTC1- SEND01 IN Signal to remote terminal, input 1
















RTC1- COMFAIL OUT Communication failure

RTC1- REC01 OUT Signal from remote terminal, input 1

















Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 588

7.3 Setting table


RC01NAME 0-13 RTC1-REC01

Remote Terminal Communication 1, Name for Input 1































SD01NAME 0-13 RTC1-SEND01

Remote Terminal Communication 1, Name for Output 1














1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 589

Version 2.2-00





















Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 590

591Serial communication

1 ApplicationThe serial communication can be used for different purposes, whichenable better access to the information stored in the terminals. The serialcommunication is also used for communication directly between termi-nals (bay-to-bay communication).

The serial communication can be used with a station monitoring system(SMS), via a substation automation system (SCS) or a SCADA system.Normally, SPA communication is used for SMS and SCS; LON communi-cation is used for SCS. SPA communication is also applied when usingthe front communication port, but for this purpose, no special serial com-munication function is required in the terminal. Only the software in thePC and a special cable for front connection is needed.

As an alternative to the rear SPA communication port, a port intended forthe IEC 870-5-103 is available. IEC 870-5-103 is a standard protocol forprotection functions.

Figure 1: Example of SPA communication structure for a station moni-toring system

Figure 2: Example of LON communication structure for substation auto-mation

REB 551*2.0

REL 5xx*2.0

Bus connection units

REOR 100

REC 561*2.0

SPA busFibre opticloop

Opto/electricalconverter

(Minute pulsefrom station clock)

Telephone Telephonemodem modem

SMS-BASESM/REx 500SM/REOR 100RECOMREVAL

REB 551

REL 5xx*2.0

REC 561

Micro SCADA

Gateway

LON-bus

LIB 520

1MRK 580 301-XEN


Serial communication

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 301-XENPage 6 – 592

2 Theory of operationAll serial communication to and from the terminal (including the front PCport communication) uses either the SPA-bus V 2.4 protocol, IEC 870-5-103 or the LonTalk protocol.

2.1 SPA operation The SPA protocol is an ASCII-based protocol for serial communication.The communication is based on a master-slave principle, where the termi-nal is a slave, and the PC is the master. Only one master can be applied oneach fibre optic loop. A program is needed in the master computer forinterpretation of the SPA-bus codes, and for translation of the settings sentto the terminal. This program is called SMS-BASE with the SM/REx 500-module.

2.2 LON operation The LON protocol is specified in the LonTalkProtocol Specification Ver-sion 3 from Echelon Corporation. This protocol is designed for communi-cation in control networks and is a peer-to-peer protocol where all thedevices connected to the network can communicate with each otherdirectly. For more information of the bay-to-bay communication, refer tothe documents Event function and Binary signal interbay communication.

2.3 IEC 870-5-103 operation

The IEC 870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bitserial communication exchanging information with a control system. InIEC terminology a primary station is a master and a secondary station is aslave. The communication is based on a point to point principle. The mas-ter must have a program that can interpret the IEC 870-5-103 communica-tion messages. For detailed information about IEC 870-5-103, refer to thepart 5: Transmission protocols, and to the section 103: Companion stan-dard for the informative interface of protection equipment, in the IEC 870standard.

Serial communication 1MRK 580 301-XENPage 6 – 593

Version 2.2-00

3 DesignThe serial communication use optical fibres for transfer of data within astation. For this purpose, a fibre optic bus input can be available on therear of the terminal, one for LON communication, and one for SPA or IECcommunication. The principle of two independent communication ports isused.

3.1 SPA design When communicating locally with a Personal Computer (PC) in the sta-tion, using the rear SPA port, the only hardware needed for a station mon-itoring system is:

• Optical fibres• Opto/electrical converter for the PC• PC

When communicating remotely with a PC using the rear SPA port, thesame hardware is needed plus telephone modems.

The software needed in the PC, either local or remote, is:

• SMS-BASE (Ver. 2.0 or higher)

• SM/REx 500 for terminals ver. 2.0

• RECOM (Ver 1.3 or higher) if disturbance recorder data is trans-ferred to a PC

• REVAL (Ver 1.1 or higher) for evaluation of this disturbance recorder data

When communicating to a front-connected PC, the only hardwarerequired is the special front-connection cable. The software needed in afront connected PC is:

• SMS-BASE (Ver 2.0 or higher)

• SM/REx 500 for terminals ver. 2.0. The SM/REx 500 includes one small part of RECOM, which lets you collect disturbance recorder data via the front port.

• REVAL (Ver 1.1 or higher) is also required if the same PC is used for evaluation of the disturbance recorder data.

3.2 LON design The hardware needed for applying LON communication depends on theapplication, but one very central unit needed is the LON Star Coupler andoptic fibres connecting the star coupler to the terminals. To communicatewith the terminals from MicroSCADA, the application library LIB 520 isneeded.

The HV/Control and the HV/REx 500 software modules are included inthe LIB 520 high-voltage process package, which is a part of the Applica-tion Software Library within MicroSCADA applications.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 301-XENPage 6 – 594

The HV/Control software module is intended to be used for control func-tions in REx 5xx terminals. This module contains the process picture, dia-logues and process database for the control application in theMicroSCADA.

The HV/REx 500 software module is used to present Station Monitoringinformation on the MicroSCADA screen.

3.3 IEC 870-5-103 design

3.3.1 General The protocol implementation in REx 5xx consists of these functions:

• Event handling

• Report of analog service values (measurands)

• Fault location

• Command handling- Autorecloser ON/OFF

- Teleprotection ON/OFF

- Protection ON/OFF

- LED reset

- Characteristics 1 - 4 (Setting groups)

• File transfer (disturbance files)

• Time synchronisation

3.3.2 Hardware When communicating locally with a Personal Computer (PC) or a RemoteTerminal Unit (RTU) in the station, using the IEC port, the only hardwareneeded is:

• Optical fibres, glass/plastic• Opto/electrical converter for the PC/RTU• PC/RTU

3.3.3 Events The events created in the terminal available for the IEC 870-5-103 proto-col are based on the event function EV01 - EV06 available in the terminal.These event function blocks include the function type and the informationnumber for each event input, which can be found in the IEC-document.See also document Event function.

3.3.4 Measurands The measurands can be included as type 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4 and type 9according to the standard.


Version 2.2-00

3.3.5 Fault location The fault location is expressed in reactive ohms. In relation to the linelength in reactive ohms, it gives the fault distance in percent. The data isavailable and reported when the fault locator function is included in theterminal.

3.3.6 Commands The commands defined in the IEC 870-5-103 protocol are represented in adedicated function block. This block has output signals according to theprotocol for all commands. The function block for the IEC commands canbe found in the appendix.

3.3.7 File transfer As for file transfer functionality it is based on the Disturbance recorderfunction. The analog and binary signals recorded will be reported to themaster. The eight last disturbances that is recorded is available for transferto the master. Though a file is transferred and acknowledged by the masterit cannot be transferred again.

The analog channels that are reported are the first four current inputs andthe first four voltage inputs.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 301-XENPage 6 – 596

4 SettingThe SPA and the IEC use the same rear communication port. To define theprotocol to be used, a setting is done on the local HMI under the menu:


SPA-IECPort

When the type of communication protocol is defined, the power to the ter-minal has to be switched off and on.

4.1 SPA setting The most important settings in the terminal for SPA communication arethe slave number and baud rate (communication speed). These settings areabsolutely essential for all communication contact to the terminal.

These settings can only be done on the local HMI for rear channel com-munication at:


SPACommRear

and for front connection at:


SPACommFront

The slave number can be set to any value from 1 to 899, as long as theslave number is unique within the used SPA loop.

The baud rate, which is the communication speed, can be set to between300 and 38400 bits/s. The baud rate should be the same for the whole sta-tion, although different baud rates in a loop are possible. If different baudrates in the same fibre optical loop are used, consider this when makingthe communication setup in the communication master, the PC. The max-imum baud rate of the front connection is limited to 9600 bit/s.

For local communication, 19200 or 38400 bit/s is the normal setting. Iftelephone communication is used, the communication speed depends onthe quality of the connection and on the type of modem used. But remem-ber that the terminal does not adapt its speed to the actual communicationconditions, because the speed is set on the HMI of the terminal.


Version 2.2-00

4.2 LON setting Use the LNT, LON Network Tool to set the LON communication. This isa software tool applied as one node on the LON bus. In order to communi-cate via LON, the terminals need to know which node addresses the otherconnected terminals have, and which network variable selectors should beused. This is organised by the LNT.

The node address is transferred to the LNT via the local HMI at:


LONCommServicePinMsg

By setting YES, the node address is sent to the LNT via the LON bus. Or,the LNT can scan the network for new nodes.

The speed of the LON bus is set to the default of 1.25 MHz. This can bechanged by the LNT.

If the LON communication from the terminal stops, caused by setting ofillegal communication parameters (outside the setting range) or byanother disturbance, it is possible to reset the LON port of the terminal.This is performed at the local HMI at:


LONCommLONDefault

By setting YES, the LON communication is reset in the terminal, and theaddressing procedure can start from the beginning again.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 301-XENPage 6 – 598

There are a number of session timers which can be set via the local HMI.These settings are only for advanced use and should only be changed afterrecommendation from ABB Network Partner AB. The time values beloware the default settings. The settings can be found at:


LONCommSessionTimers

4.3 IEC 870-5-103 setting

4.3.1 Settings from the local HMI

The settings for IEC 870-5-103 communication are the following:

• Individually blocking of commands• Setting of measurand type• Setting of main function type and activation of main function type• Settings for slave number and baud rate (communication speed)• Command for giving Block of information command

The settings for individually blocking of commands can be found on thelocal HMI at:


IECComCommands

Each command has its own blocking setting and the state can be set toOFF or ON. The OFF state corresponds to non-blocked state and ON cor-responds to blocked state.


Version 2.2-00

The settings for type of measurand can be found on the local HMI at:


IECComMeasurands

The type of measurands can be set to report standardised types, Type 3.1,Type 3.2, Type 3.3, Type 3.4 or Type 9.

The use of main function type is to facilitate the engineering work of theterminal. The settings for main function type and the activation of mainfunction type can be found on the local HMI at:


IECComFunctionType

The main function type can be set to values according to the standard, thisis, between 1 and 255. The value zero is used as default and correspondsto not used.

The setting for activation of main function type can be set to OFF or ON.The OFF state corresponds to non-activated state and ON corresponds toactivated state. Upon activated the main function type overrides all othersettings for function type within the terminal, that is, function type set-tings for event function and disturbance recorder function. When set toOFF, function type settings for event function and disturbance recorderfunction use their own function type settings made on the function blocksfor the event function and disturbance recorder respectively. Though forall other functions they use the main function type even when set to OFF.

The settings for communication parameters slave number and baud ratecan be found on the local HMI at:


IECComCommunication

The slave number can be set to any value between 0 to 255.

The baud rate, the communication speed, can be set either to 9600 bits/sor 19200 bits/s.

The settings for issuing a block-of-information command can be found onthe local HMI at:


IECComBlockOfInfo


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 301-XENPage 6 – 600

Issuing the BlockOfInformation command with the value one (1) blocksall information sent to the master and abort any GI procedure or any filetransfer in process. Thus issuing the command with the value set to zero(0) will allow information to be polled by the master.

The dialogue to operate the output from the BlockOfInformation com-mand function is performed from different state as follows:

1. Selection active; select the:

• C button, and then the No box activates.• Up arrow, and then New: 0 changes to New: 1. The up arrow

changes to the down arrow.• E button, and then the Yes box activates.

2. Yes box active; select the:

• C button to cancel the action and return to the BlockOfInfo window.• E button to confirm the action and return to the BlockOfInfo win-

dow.• Right arrow to activate the No box.

3. No box active; select the:

• C button to cancel the action and return to the BlockOfInfo window.• E button to confirm the action and return to the BlockOfInfo win-

dow.• Left arrow to activate the Yes box.

4.3.2 Settings from the CAP 531 tool

4.3.2.1 Event For each input of the Event function there is a setting for the informationnumber of the connected signal. The information number can be set to anyvalue between 0 and 255. In order to get proper operation of the sequenceof events the event masks in the event function shall be set toON_CHANGE. For single-command signals, the event mask shall be setto ON_SET.

In addition there is a setting on each event block for function type. Referto description of the Main Function type set on the local HMI.

4.3.2.2 Commands As for the commands defined in the protocol there is a dedicated functionblock with eight output signals. The configuration of these signals aremade by using the CAP 531 tool.

To realise the BlockOfInformation command, which is operated from thelocal HMI, the output BLKINFO on the IEC command function blockICOM has to be connected to an input on an event function block. Thisinput shall have the information number 20 (monitor direction blocked)according to the standard.


Version 2.2-00

4.3.2.3 File transfer For each input of the Disturbance recorder function there is a setting forthe information number of the connected signal. The information numbercan be set to any value between 0 and 255.

Furthermore there is a setting on each input of the Disturbance recorderfunction for the function type. Refer to description of Main Function typeset on the local HMI.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 301-XENPage 6 – 602

5 Appendix

5.1 Function block

5.2 Signal list

FuncTypeOpFnType

IEC870-5-103

ARBLKZCOMBLK

FNBLKLEDRSSETG1SETG2SETG3SETG4

BLKINFO

ICOM


ICOM- ARBLK OUT Output from ARBLK command, to be used for switching autorecloser on/off.

ICOM- FNBLK OUT Output from FNBLK command, to be used for switching protection on/off.

ICOM- BLKINFO OUT Output from BLKINFO command. Signal to block all information sent to master.

ICOM- LEDRS OUT Output from LEDRS command, to be used for resetting the LEDs.

ICOM- SETG1 OUT Output from SETG1 command, to be used for activation of setting group 1.



ICOM- SETG4K OUT Output from SETG4 command, to be used for activation of setting group 4.

ICOM- ZCOMBLK OUT Output from ZCOMBLK command, to be used for switching teleprotection on/off.


Version 2.2-00

5.3 Setting table

Table 1: Setting table for the IEC 870-5-103 command function block ICOM


FuncType 0-255 0 Main function type for terminal

OpFnType Off, On Off Main function type operation for terminal

Table 2: Setting table for SPA communication

PARAMETER SETTING RANGE DESCRIPTION

Rear comm. port:

SlaveNo (1 - 899) SPA-bus identification number

BaudRate 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 Baud

Communication speed

RemoteChActgrp Open, Block Open=Access right to change between active groups (both rear ports)

RemoteChSet Open, Block Open=Access right to change any parameter (both rear ports)

Front comm. port:

SlaveNo (1 - 899) SPA-bus identification number

BaudRate 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 Baud

Communication speed


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 301-XENPage 6 – 604

605Command function

1 ApplicationThe REx 5xx terminals may be provided with output functions that can becontrolled either from a Substation Control System or from other termi-nals via the LON bus. Together with the configuration logic circuits, theuser can govern pulses or steady output signals for control purposeswithin the terminal or via binary outputs. Command function blocks for16 binary signals are used to receive information over the LON bus fromthe operator station and from other REx 5xx terminals. The other termi-nals must have a corresponding event function block to send the informa-tion.

1MRK 580 310-XEN


Command function

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 310-XENPage 6 – 606

2 Design

2.1 General One multiple command function block with fast execution time and/or 79multiple command function blocks with slower execution time are avail-able in the REx 5xx terminals as options.

The output signals can be of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. The setting isdone on the MODE input, common for the whole block, from the CAP531 configuration tool.

0=Off sets all outputs to 0, independent of the values sent from the stationlevel, that is, the operator station or remote-control gateway.

1=Steady sets the outputs to a steady signal 0 or 1, depending on the val-ues sent from the station level.

2=Pulse gives a pulse with one execution cycle duration, if a value sentfrom the station level is changed from 0 to 1. That means that the config-ured logic connected to the command function blocks may not have acycle time longer than the execution cycle time for the command functionblock.

The multiple command function block has 16 outputs combined in oneblock, which can be controlled from the operator station or from other ter-minals. One common name, with a maximum of 19 characters for theblock, is set from the configuration tool CAP 531.

The output signals, here CMxx-OUT1 to CMxx-OUT16, are then avail-able for configuration to built-in functions or via the configuration logiccircuits to the binary outputs of the terminal.

2.2 Binary signal interbay communication

The multiple command function block can also be used to receive infor-mation over the LON bus from other REx 5xx terminals. The most com-mon use is to transfer interlocking information between different bays.That can be performed by an Event function block as the send block andwith a multiple command function block as the receive block. The config-uration for the communication between terminals is made by the LONNetwork Tool.

The MODE input is set to Steady at communication between terminalsand then the data are mapped between the terminals.

The command function also has a supervision function, which sets theoutput VALID to 0 if the block did not receive data within an INTERVALtime, that could be set. This function is applicable only during communi-cation between terminals over the LON bus. The INTERVAL input time isset a little bit longer than the interval time set on the Event function block(see the document Event function). If INTERVAL=0, then VALID will be1, that is, not applicable.

Command function 1MRK 580 310-XENPage 6 – 607

Version 2.2-00

3 ConfigurationThe configuration of the signal outputs from the multiple command func-tion in REx 5xx is made by the CAP 531 configuration tool.

4 SettingThe setting parameters for the multiple command function are set from theCAP 531 configuration tool.

The multiple command function has a common name setting (CmdOut)for the block. The MODE input sets the outputs to be one of the types Off,Steady, or Pulse. INTERVAL is used for the supervision of the cyclicalreceiving of data.


5 TestingTest of the multiple command function block is recommended to be per-formed in a system, that is, either in a complete delivery system as anacceptance test (FAT/SAT) or as parts of that system, because the com-mand function blocks are connected in a delivery-specific way betweenbays and the station level.

Command function blocks included in the operation of different built-infunctions must be tested at the same time as their corresponding functions.

Command function

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 310-XENPage 6 – 608

6 Appendix

6.1 Function block

6.2 Signal list

6.3 Setting table

OUT1OUT2OUT3OUT4OUT5OUT6OUT7OUT8OUT9

OUT10OUT11OUT12OUT13OUT14OUT15OUT16

MultCmdFunc

CMDOUTMODE

VALID

INTERVAL

CMxx


CMxx- (xx=01-80)

OUTy OUT Command output y (y=1-16)

CMxx- VALID OUT Received data. 0: invalid, 1: valid

CMxx- CMDOUT See settings table

CMxx- INTERVAL See settings table

CMxx- MODE See settings table


CMDOUT User def. string

String CMxx-CMD-OUT

User defined common name for all outputs of function block CMxx (xx=01-80).String length up to 19 characters. Can only be set from CAP 531 configuration tool

INTERVAL 0-60 s 0 Time interval for supervision of recieved data. Can only be set from CAP 531 configuration tool

MODE 0, 1, 2 0 Operation mode. 0: Off, 1: Not pulsed (steady), 2: Pulsed. Can only be set from CAP 531 configuration tool

609Communication channel test logic

1 ApplicationMany applications in secondary systems require testing of different func-tions with confirmed information on successfully completed test. Carrierchannel test (CCHT) function serves primarily testing of communication(power line carrier) channels in applications, where continuous monitor-ing by some other means is not possible due to technical or economicalreasons.

The logic initiates sending of some impulse (carrier send signal), whichstarts the operation of different functions outside the logic, and checks thefeedback from the external function. It reports the successful or non-suc-cessful response on initiated test. It is also possible to abort the test withsome external signal, which overrules all internal process.

It is possible to initiate the logic manually or automatically. Manual startsare possible by means of external push-button, connected to the binaryinput of a terminal. Automatic starts are possible in long time intervalswith their duration dependent on setting of the corresponding timer.

1MRK 580 332-XEN


Communication channel test logic

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 332-XENPage 6 – 610

2 DesignFigure 1: presents a simplified logic diagram for the CCHT function. Log-ical one on CCHT-BLOCK functional input disables completely the oper-ation of the logic.

Figure 1: Simplified logic diagram for the CCHT function

2.1 Selection of an operating mode

Selection of an operating mode, which determines the automatic (internal)or manual (external) start is possible by setting the “Operation = Aut” and“Operation = Man” respectively (see Figure 1:). The automatic startingrequires continuous presence of logical one on CCHT-START functionalinput. Setting of the tStart timer determines the time intervals for the auto-matic starts logic.

Any presence of the logical one signal on the CCHT-START functionalinput starts the function, when in manual operating mode.

2.2 Operation at sending end

Manual or automatic start initiates the pulse, which is for 15 ms longerthan the time set on a tWait timer. This pulse initiates the CCHT-CS func-tional output signal in duration as set on a tCS pulse timer.The same pulsestarts also the time measurement by the tWait timer. The CCHT-ALARMoutput signal appears, if the CCHT-CR input does not become logical onewithin the time interval, as set on the tWait timer. The appearance of theCCHT-CR signal is safeguarded by a 15 ms timer, to prevent influence ofthe disturbances on a communication link.

CCHT-BLOCK

Operation=Man

&CCHT-START

&Operation=Aut t

tStart>1

-loop

t

tCh

t15 ms

&

CCHT-CR t

15 ms

>1

t

tWait

&

&

&CCHT-RESET

>1

&>1

&

CCHT-CHOK

CCHT-ALARM

CCHT-CS

visf_033.vsd

&

&tCS

t

tChOK

t

tWait

t

Communication channel test logic 1MRK 580 332-XENPage 6 – 611

Version 2.2-00

The appearance of the CCHT-CR signal within the tWait time intervalactivates the CCHT-CHOK output signal. It remains active for the periodas set on the timer tChOK or until the CCHT-ALARM appears at newstart of a CCHT function.

The tCh timer, which is delayed on drop-off, prevents ringing of a com-plete system. It is possible to reset the CCHT-ALARM output signal byactivating the CCHT-RESET functional input.

2.3 Operation at receiving end

Activation of a CCHT-CR functional input activates instantaneously theCCHT-CS functional output, if the timer tCh has not been activated or thefunction has not been blocked by the active CCHT-BLOCK functionalinput. Duration of the CCHT-CR input signal must be longer than 15 msto avoid operation at different disturbances on communication link.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 332-XENPage 6 – 612

3 Setting instructionsSettings for the CCHT function relates mostly to time co-ordinationbetween settings of different timers.

3.1 tInh timer The CCHT function remains blocked as long as the CCH-BLOCK func-tional input is active. The time delay set on tInh timer determines the timeinterval, which takes for the logic to start its normal operation after theCCHT-BLOCK functional input has been set to logical zero. It is recom-mended to set it to some longer time delay, 30 seconds for example.

3.2 tCh timer The tCh timer determines the time interval after the activation of theCCHT-START functional input, during which it is not possible to activatethe CCHT-CS functional output by activating the CCHT-CR functionalinput. It prevents ringing of the function. Setting of 60s is recommended.

3.3 tCS timer It determines the duration at which the CCHT-CS functional output isactivated (logical one). The CCHT-CS signal should be active longenough, to reliably activate the operation of the tested function. Too longactivation is not recommended.

3.4 tWait timer The tWait timer determines the maximum time interval, within which theCCHT-CR functional input must become active after the CCHT-CS signalhas been initiated. It must include double transmission time to the testedequipment, the reaction time of the tested equipment, and some additionalmargin of at least 20%.

3.5 tChOK timer The tChOK timer determines the duration of a CCHT-CHOK functionalinput. Its setting depends on the signalling equipment and purposes withinthe secondary system in substation.

3.6 tStart timer The tStart timer determines the duration of regular time intervals, whenthe function starts automatically. Eight hour time intervals are usually rec-ommended, when used for testing the carrier communication channels.


Version 2.2-00

4 Basic configuration possibilitiesLogical one on functional input signal CCHT-BLOCK blocks instanta-neously and completely the operation of a function. The input should beconfigured to the output of some OR gates, which have connected on theirinputs operating (starting) signals from different protection functions,like:

• operation of a line distance protection in forward and reverse direc-tion

• operation of the overvoltage and the undervoltage protection func-tions

• operation of the overcurrent (phase and earth fault) protection func-tions, etc.

The CCHT-START functional input initiates the operation of a CCHTfunction. It is possible to configure it to the binary input of a terminal andstart the function manually by connecting the dc voltage for a short timevia some normally opened contact. It must be connected to a constantlyactive FIXD-ON signal, if the automatic mode of operation is selected.

CCHT-CR functional input brings back to the logic the response of atested object. It is possible to configure it to some terminal binary input.Configure it to the same binary input as a carrier receive signal for thescheme communication logic, used together with the distance protection,if the CCHT function is used for testing the communication channel asso-ciated with the distance protection function.

CCHT-RESET functional input resets the ALARM functional output.Configure it normally to some terminal binary input and connect the laterone to some external reset push-button with normally opened contact.

The signal obtained on CCHT-CS functional output is supposed to startsome external activities. It is possible to configure it to some binary out-put of a terminal, or to the same binary output as the carrier send signal forthe distance protection function (via some OR gates), if the CCHT func-tion is intended for testing the communication channel associated with adistance protection communication logic.

CCHT-ALARM and CCHT-CHOK functional outputs bring informationon successful or non-successful result of an activity, started by the logic.They are supposed to be configured to the binary outputs of a terminal andused for the initiation of some external alarming and signalling facilities.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 332-XENPage 6 – 614

5 TestingCheck that all functional inputs and outputs are connected to the corre-sponding binary inputs and outputs of a terminal. In the opposite case,configure them for the testing purposes.

Check the operation of a logic according to Figure 1: by applying a dcvoltage on the corresponding binary inputs and checking the response onthe binary outputs of a terminal.

Establish the correct configuration of a terminal after the tests have beencompleted.


Version 2.2-00

6 Appendix

6.1 Function block


Figure 2: Function diagram for the CCHT function

CARRIER CHANNEL TEST

CCHT-BLOCK

CCHT-CR

CCHT-START

CCHT-RESET

CCHT-CS

CCHT-ALARM

CCHT-CHOK

visf_034.vsd

CCHT-BLOCK

Operation=Man

&CCHT-START

&Operation=Aut t

tStart>1

-loop

t

tCh

t

15 ms

&

CCHT-CR t

15 ms

>1

t

tWait

&

&

&CCHT-RESET

>1

&

>1

&

CCHT-CHOK

CCHT-ALARM

CCHT-CS

COMMUNICATION CHANNEL TEST

visf_035.vsd

&

& tCS

t

tChOK

t

tWait

t

t

tInh


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 332-XENPage 6 – 616

6.3 Signal list

6.4 Setting table


CCHT- BLOCK IN Blocks the operation of a function and CCHT-CS output

CCHT- START IN Starts the functional cycle at manual operating mode. To be connected to FIXD-ON at automatic operating mode.

CCHT- CR IN Informs on completed operation of an external (tested) function.

CCHT- RESET IN Resets the CCHT-ALARM output signal, when present.

CCHT- CS OUT Initiates the operation of an external (tested) function.

CCHT- ALARM OUT Informs on uncompleted (failed) test of an external function.

CCHT- CHOK OUT Informs on successful (completed) test of an external function.


Operation Off, Manual, Automatic

Off Operating mode of a function

tStart 0 - 90000 s 28800 Time interval for outomatic start of testing cycle

tWait 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.1 Time interval available for successful test of an external func-tion

tCh 0.000 - 60.000 s 30 Minimum time interval for repeated tests of an external func-tion

tCS 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.04 Duration of CCHT-CS functional output signal, which initiates testing of an external function

tChOK 0 - 90000 s 10 Duration of a CCHT-CHOK functional output signal

tInh 0.000 - 60.000 s 30 Diration of an inhibit condition after the CCHT-BLOCK input signal resets

617Event function

1 ApplicationWhen using a Substation Automation system, events can be continu-ously sent or polled from the terminal. These events can come from anyavailable signal in the terminal that is connected to the event functionblock. The event function block can also handle double indication, that isnormally used to indicate positions of high-voltage apparatus. With thisevent function block in the REx 5xx terminal, data can be sent to other ter-minals over the LON bus.

2 Theory of operationThe events can come from both internal logical signals and binary inputchannels. The internal signals are time tagged in the main processingmodule, while the binary input channels are time tagged directly on eachI/O module. The events are produced according to the set-event masks.The event masks are treated commonly for both the LON and SPA chan-nels. All events according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, whichcontains up to 1000 events. If new events appear before the oldest event inthe buffer is read, the oldest event is overwritten and an overflow alarmappears.

The outputs from the event function block are formed by the reading ofstatus and events by the station HMI on either every single input or doubleinput. The user-defined name for each input is intended to be used by thestation HMI.

Twelve of the event function blocks are executed with fast cyclicity. Thatmeans that the time-tagging resolution on the events that are emergingfrom internal logical signals, created from configurable logic, is the sameas the cyclicity of this logic. The time tagging resolution on the events thatare emerging from binary input signals have a resolution of 1 ms.

Two special signals for event registration purposes are available in the ter-minal, Terminal restarted and Event buffer overflow.

3 Design

3.1 General As basic, 12 event function blocks running with a fast cyclicity, 6 ms, areavailable in REx 5xx.

Each event function block has 16 connectables corresponding to 16 inputsEVxx-INPUT1 to EVxx-INPUT16. Every input can be given a name withup to 19 characters from the CAP 531 configuration tool.

The inputs can be used as individual events or can be defined as doubleindication events.

1MRK 580 393-XEN


Event function

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 393-XENPage 6 – 618

The inputs can be set individually from the Station Monitoring System(SMS) under the Mask-Event function as:

• No events

• OnSet, at

• OnReset, at

• OnChange, at

Also an input PrColxx (xx=01-44) is available on the function block todefine on which protocol the events shall be sent.

The event function blocks EV01-EV06 have inputs for information num-bers and function type, which are used to define the events according tothe communication standard IEC 870-5-103. For more information seedocument Remote communication.

3.2 Double indication Double indications are used to handle a combination of two inputs at atime, for example, one input for the open and one for the close position ofa circuit breaker or disconnector. The double indication consists of an oddand an even input number. When the odd input is defined as a double indi-cation, the next even input is considered to be the other input. The oddinputs has a suppression timer to suppress events at 00 states.

To be used as double indications the odd inputs are individually set fromthe SMS under the Mask-Event function as:

• Double indication• Double indication with midposition suppression

Here, the settings of the corresponding even inputs have no meaning.

These states of the inputs generate events. The status is read by the stationHMI on the status indication for the odd input:

• 00 generates an intermediate event with the read status 0• 01 generates an close event with the read status 1• 10 generates an open event with the read status 2• 11 generates an undefined event with the read status 3

3.3 Communication between terminals

The BOUND and INTERVAL inputs are available on the event functionblock in REx 5xx terminal.

The BOUND input set to 1 means that the output value of the event blockis bound to another control terminal on the LON bus. The event functionblock is then used to send data over the LON bus to other REx 5xx termi-nals. The most common use is to transfer interlocking informationbetween different bays. That can be performed by an event function blockused as a send block and with a Multiple Command function block used

Event function 1MRK 580 393-XENPage 6 – 619

Version 2.2-00

as a receive block. In document Apparatus Control describes how totransfer the interlocking information. The configuration of the communi-cation between control terminals is made by the LON Network Tool.

The INTERVAL input is applicable only when the BOUND input is set to1. The INTERVAL is intended to be used for cyclic sending of data toother control terminals via the LON bus with the interval time as set. Thiscyclic sending of data is used as a backup of the event-driven sending,which is always performed. With cyclic sending of data, the communica-tion can be supervised by a corresponding INTERVAL input on the Multi-ple Command function block in another control terminal connected to theLON bus. This INTERVAL input time is set a little bit longer than theinterval time set on the event function block (see document Binary signalinterbay communication. With INTERVAL=0, only event-driven sendingis performed.

4 SettingThe event reporting can be set from the SMS as:

• Use event masks• Report no events• Report all events

Use of event masks is the normal reporting of events, that is, the events arereported as defined in the database.

An event mask can be set individually for each available signal in the ter-minal. The setting of the event mask can only be performed from theSMS.

All event mask settings are treated commonly for all communicationchannels of the terminal.

Report no events means blocking of all events in the terminal.

Report all events means that all events, that are set to OnSet/OnRe-set/OnChange are reported as OnChange, that is, both at set and reset ofthe signal. For double indications when the suppression time is set, theevent ignores the timer and is reported directly. Masked events are stillmasked.

Parameters to be set for the event function block are:

• T_SUPRyy including the suppression time for double indications.• NAMEyy including the name for each input.• PrColxx including the type of protocol for sending the events.• INTERVAL used for the cyclic sending of data.• BOUND telling that the block has connections to other terminals

over the LON bus.• FuncTEVx (for EV01-EV06) including the function type for sending

events via IEC 870-5-103.• InfoNoyy (for EV01-EV06) including the information number for

the events sending via IEC 870-5-103.

Event function

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 393-XENPage 6 – 620

These parameters are set from the CAP 531 configuration tool. When theBOUND parameter is set, the settings of the event masks have no mean-ing. The INTERVAL and BOUND inputs are not available in REL 531.

The appendix describes the parameters and their setting ranges.

5 TestingDuring testing, the terminal can be set in Test Mode from the SMS. Thefunctionality of the event reporting during Test Mode is set from the SMSas follows:

• Use event masks• Report no events• Report all events

See the explanation in section “Setting” on page 619.

In Test Mode, individually event blocks can be blocked from the SMS.

Individually event blocks can also be blocked from the local HMI underthe menu:

TestTestMode

BlockEventFunc


Version 2.2-00

6 Appendix

6.1 Function blocks

Figure 1: Function block EV01 - EV06

EVENT


INTERVALBOUND

T_SUPR01T_SUPR03T_SUPR05T_SUPR07T_SUPR09T_SUPR11T_SUPR13T_SUPR15NAME01NAME02NAME03NAME04NAME05NAME06NAME07NAME08NAME09NAME10NAME11NAME12NAME13NAME14NAME15NAME16

EVxx

PrColxx

FuncTEVxInfoNo01InfoNo02InfoNo03InfoNo04InfoNo05InfoNo06InfoNo07InfoNo08InfoNo09InfoNo10InfoNo11InfoNo12InfoNo13InfoNo14InfoNo15InfoNo16

xx = 01 - 06

Event function

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 393-XENPage 6 – 622

Figure 2: Function block EV07 - EV44

EVENT


INTERVALBOUND

T_SUPR01T_SUPR03T_SUPR05T_SUPR07T_SUPR09T_SUPR11T_SUPR13T_SUPR15NAME01NAME02NAME03NAME04NAME05NAME06NAME07NAME08NAME09NAME10NAME11NAME12NAME13NAME14NAME15NAME16

EVxx xx = 07 - 44

PrColxx


Version 2.2-00

6.2 Signal list


EVxx- (xx=01-44)

INPUT1 IN Event input 1

EVxx- INPUT2 IN Event input 2








EVxx- INPUT10 IN Event input10







EVxx- NAME01 See settings table
















EVxx- T_SUPR01 See settings table






Event function

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 393-XENPage 6 – 624

6.3 Setting table



EVxx- InfoNo01 See settings table (Signal only present in blocks EV01-EV06)
















EVxx- INTERVAL See settings table

EVxx- BOUND See settings table

EVxx- PrColxx See settings table

EVxx- FuncTEVxx See settings table (Signal only present in blocks EV01-EV06)



INTERVAL 0 - 60 s 0 Cyclic sending of data. Can only be set from CAP 531 configu-ration tool

BOUND 0, 1 0 Event connected to other terminals on the network, 0: not con-nected, 1: connected. Can only be set from CAP 531 configu-ration tool

PrColxx 0-7 0 Protocol for event block xx (xx=01-06). 0: Not used, 1: SPA, 2: LON, 3: SPA+LON, 4: IEC, 5: IEC+SPA, 6: IEC+LON, 7: IEC+LON+SPA. Range valid only for blocks EV01-EV06. Can only be set from CAP 531 configuration tool

0-3 0 Protocol for event block xx (xx=07-44). 0: Not used, 1: SPA, 2: LON, 3: SPA+LON Range valid only for blocks EV07-EV44. Can only be set from CAP 531 configuration tool

FuncTEVxx 0-255 0 Function type for event block xx (xx=01-06), used for IEC pro-tocol communication. Only present in blocks EV01-EV06

InfoNo01 0-255 0 Information number for event input 1, used for IEC protocol communication. Only present in blocks EV01-EV06


Version 2.2-00
















T_SUPR03 0.000-60.000 s 0.000 Suppression time for event input 3. Can only be set using the CAP 531 configuration tool








Event function

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 393-XENPage 6 – 626

EventMask1

No events, OnSet, OnRe-set, OnChange, Double Ind., Double Ind. with midpos supr.

No events

Event mask for input 1. Can only be set from SMS

EventMask2


No events


EventMask3


No events


EventMask4


No events


EventMask5


No events


EventMask6


No events




Version 2.2-00

EventMask7


No events


EventMask8


No events


EventMask9


No events


EventMask10


No events


EventMask11


No events


EventMask12


No events



Event function

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 393-XENPage 6 – 628

EventMask13


No events


EventMask14


No events


EventMask15


No events


EventMask16


No events



629Disturbance report - Introduction

1 General overviewThe aim of the disturbance report is to contribute to the highest possiblequality of electrical supply. This is done by a continuous collection of sys-tem data and, upon occurrence of a fault, by storing a certain amount ofpre-fault, fault, and post-fault data.

The stored data can be used for analysis and decision making to find andeliminate possible system and equipment weaknesses.

The disturbance report is a common name for several facilities to supplythe operator with more information about the disturbances and the system.Some of the facilities are basic and some are optional in the differentproducts. For some products not all facilities are available.

The facilities included in the disturbance report are:

• General disturbance information• Indications• Event recorder• Fault locator • Trip values (phase values)• Disturbance recorder

The whole disturbance report can contain information for up to 10 distur-bances, each with the data coming from all the parts mentioned above,depending on the options installed. All information in the disturbancereport is stored in non-volatile flash memories. This implies that no infor-mation is lost in case of loss-of-power supply.

Figure 1: Disturbance report structure.

Up to 10 disturbances can always be stored. If a new disturbance is to berecorded when the memory is full, the oldest disturbance is over-writtenby the new one. The nominal memory capacity for the disturbancerecorder is measured with 10 analogue and 48 binary signals recorded,which means that in the case of long recording times, fewer than 10 dis-turbances are stored. If fewer analogue signals are recorded, a longer totalrecording time is available. This memory limit does not affect the rest ofthe disturbance report.

Disturbance report

Disturbance no.2Disturbance no.1 Disturbance no.10

General dist.information Indication

Faultlocator

Tripvalues

Eventrecorder

Disturbancerecorder

1MRK 580 383-XEN


Disturbance report - Introduction

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 383-XENPage 6 – 630

1.1 General disturbance information

Disturbance overview is a summary of all the stored disturbances. Theoverview is available only on a front-connected PC or via the StationMonitoring System (SMS). The overview contains:

• Disturbance index

• Date and time

• Trip signals

• Trig signal that activated the recording

• Distance to fault (requires Fault locator)

• Fault loop selected by the Fault locator (requires Fault locator)

Disturbance Summary is automatically scrolled on the human-machineinterface (HMI). Here the two latest disturbances (DisturbSummary 1,which is the latest and DisturbSummary 2 which is the second latest) arepresented with:

• Date and time

• Selected indications (set with the Indication mask)

• Distance to fault and fault loop selected by the Fault locator

Disturbance data on the HMI is presented at:

DisturbReportDisturbances

Disturbance n (1 - 10)

The date and time of the disturbance, the trig signal, the indications, thefault locator result and the trip values are available, provided that the cor-responding functions are installed.

1.2 Indications Indications is a list of signals that were activated during the fault time ofthe disturbance. A part (or all) of these signals are automaticallyscrolled on the local HMI after a disturbance.

1.3 Event recorder The event recorder contains an event list with time-tagged events. In theStation Monitoring System, this list is directly connected to a distur-bance.

1.4 Fault locator The fault locator contains information about the distance to the fault andabout the measuring loop that was selected for the calculation. Afterchanging the system parameters in the terminal, a recalculation of the dis-tance to the fault can be made in the protection.

1.5 Trip values Trip values includes phasors of currents and voltages before the fault and duringthe fault.

Disturbance report - Introduction 1MRK 580 383-XENPage 6 – 631

Version 2.2-00

1.6 Disturbance recorder The disturbance recorder records analogue and binary signal data before,during and after the fault.

On the local HMI, the indications, the fault locator result (when applica-ble), and the trip values are available. For a complete disturbance report,front communication with a PC or remote communication with SMS isrequired.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 383-XENPage 6 – 632

2 Recording timesThe recording times are valid for the whole disturbance report. The distur-bance recorder and the event recorder register disturbance data and eventsduring tRecording, the total recording time. However, indications are onlyregistered during the fault time.

The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:

tRecording = tPre + tFault + tPost, or tPre + tLim, depending on whichcriterion stops the current disturbance recording.

Figure 2: Recording times relationship.

The different time periods are described below:

Period Is the ...

tPre Pre-fault recording time. More correctly it should be called pre-triggering time, because it consists of not only a pre-fault timebut also the operating time for the trigger itself.

tFault Fault time of the recording. The fault time cannot be set andcontinues as long as any valid trigger condition, binary or ana-logue, persists (unless limited by tLim the limit time, seebelow).

tPost Post-fault recording time. When all activated triggers during thefault time are reset, the current disturbance recording continuesaccording to the set post-fault time.

tLim Limit time, which is the maximum recording time after the dis-turbance recording was triggered. The limit time is used to elim-inate the consequences of a faulty trigger that does not resetwithin a reasonable time interval. It limits the maximum record-ing time of a recording and prevents subsequent overwriting ofalready stored disturbances.

tLim

tPost

Pre-fault Fault Post-fault

tPre

Disturbance report - Introduction 1MRK 580 383-XENPage 6 – 633

Version 2.2-00

3 Analogue signalsUp to 10 analogue signals (five voltages and five currents from the trans-former module) can be selected for recording and trig if the disturbancerecorder function is installed. If fewer than 10 signals are selected, themaximum storing capacity in the flash memories, regarding total record-ing time are increased.

A user-defined name for each of the signals can be programmed in the ter-minal.

For each of the 10 analogue signals, Operation = On means that it isrecorded by the disturbance recorder. The triggering itself is independentof the setting of Operation, and triggers even if operation is set to Off.Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be used as trig condition. Thesame applies for the current signals.

The check of the trig condition is based on peak-to-peak values. Whenthis is found, the absolute average value of these two peak values is calcu-lated. If the average value is above the threshold level for an overvoltageor overcurrent trig, this trig is indicated with a greater than (>) sign withthe user-defined name.

If the average value is below the set threshold level for an undervoltage orundercurrent trig, this trig is indicated with a less than (<) sign with itsname. The procedure is separately performed for each channel.

This method of checking the analogue start conditions gives a functionwhich is insensitive to DC offset in the signal. The operating time for thisstart is typically in the range of one cycle, 20 ms for a 50 Hz network.

The analogue signals are presented only in the disturbance recording, butthey affect the entire disturbance report when being used for triggering.

4 Binary signalsUp to 48 binary signals can be selected from the signal list, where allavailable signals are grouped under each function. The 48 signals can beselected from among internal logical signals and binary input signals. Foreach of the 48 signals, it is also possible to select if the signal is to be usedas a trigger of the disturbance report, and if the trig should be activated ona 1 or a 0. A binary signal can be selected to activate the red LED on thelocal HMI.

A user-defined name for each of the signals can be programmed in the ter-minal.

The selected 48 signals are presented in the event list and the disturbancerecording. But they affect the whole disturbance report when they areused for triggering.

The indications, that are to be automatically scrolled on the HMI when adisturbance has been recorded are also selected from these 48 signals withthe HMI Indication Mask.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 383-XENPage 6 – 634

4.1 Trig signals The trig conditions affect the entire disturbance report. As soon as a trigcondition is fulfilled, a complete disturbance report is recorded. On theother hand, if no trig condition is fulfilled, there is no disturbance report,no calculation of distance to fault, no indications, and so on. This impliesthe importance of choosing the right signals as trig conditions.

A trig can be of type:

• Manual trig• Binary-signal trig• Analogue-signal trig (over/under function)

4.1.1 Manual trig Manual trig starts from the local HMI or from a front-connected PC (orSMS). This is found on the HMI menu tree at:

DisturbReportManualTrig

4.1.2 Binary trig A trig on a binary signal can be activated on either a logical 1 or alogical 0. When a binary input is used as trig, the signal must stay for atleast 15 ms to be picked up.

Note that when a binary signal is programmed to trig on a logical 0, thissignal is not presented as an indication in the disturbance report.

4.1.3 Analogue trig All analogue signals are available for trigger purposes, no matter if theyare recorded in the disturbance recorder or not. But the disturbancerecorder function must be installed in the terminal.

635Disturbance report - Settings

1 IntroductionThe main part of the settings for the Disturbance Report is found on thelocal human-machine interface (HMI) at:

SettingsDisturbReport

The settings include:

Operation Disturbance Report (On/Off)

Re-trig during post-fault state (On/Off)

SequenceNo Sequence number (0-255) (normally not necessaryto set)

RecordingTimes Recording times for the Disturbance Report and theevent/indication logging, including pre-fault time,post-fault time, and limit time for the entire distur-bance

BinarySignals Selection of binary signals, trig conditions, HMIindication mask and HMI red LED option

AnalogSignals Recording mask and trig conditions

FaultLocator Distance measurement unit (km/miles/%)

User-defined names of analogue signals can be set at:


The user-defined names of binary signals can be set at:

ConfigurationDisturbReport

Input n (n=1-48)

The analogue and binary signals appear with their user-defined names.

1MRK 580 384-XEN


Disturbance report - Settings

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 384-XENPage 6 – 636

1.1 Settings during normal conditions

2 OperationHMI submenu:


Operation

Operation can be set to On or Off. If Off is selected, note that no distur-bance report is registered, including indications, fault locator, eventrecorder, and disturbance recorder.

Operation = Off:• Disturbances are not stored.

• LED information (yellow - start, red - trip) is not stored or changed.

• No disturbance summary is scrolled on the local HMI.

Operation = On:• Disturbances are stored, disturbance data can be read from the local

HMI and from a front-connected PC or Station Monitoring System (SMS).

• LED information (yellow - start, red - trip) is stored.

• The disturbance summary is automatically scrolled on the local HMI for the two latest registered disturbances, until cleared.

Table 1: How the settings affect different functions in the disturbance report

HMISetting menu

Function Disturbance summary (on HMI)

Disturbance recorder

Indica-tions

Event list (SMS)

Trip values

Fault locator

Operation Operation (On/Off)

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Recordingtimes

Recording times (tPre, tPost, tLim)

No Yes No Yes No No

Binarysignals

Trig operation and trig level


Indication mask (for automatic scrolling)

Yes No No No No No

Analogue signals

Operation (On/Off)

No Yes No No Yes Yes

Trig over/under function


Fault Locator

Fault locator set-tings (Distance Unit)

No No No No No Yes

Disturbance report - Settings 1MRK 580 384-XENPage 6 – 637

Version 2.2-00

Post re-trig can be set to On or Off

Postretrig = On:Re-trig during the set post-fault time is enabled.

Postretrig = OffRe-trig during the set post fault time is not accepted.

2.1 Sequence number HMI submenu:


SequenceNo

Normally, this setting option is seldom used. Each disturbance is assigneda number in the disturbance report. The first disturbance each day nor-mally receives SequenceNo = 0. The value of SequenceNo that can beread in the service report is the number that will be assigned to the nextdisturbance registered during that day.

In normal use, the sequence number is increased by one for each new dis-turbance until it is reset to zero each midnight.

2.2 Recording times HMI submenu:


RecordingTimes

Under this submenu, the different recording times for the disturbancereport are set (the pre-fault time, post-fault time, and limit time). Theserecording times affect the disturbance recorder and event recorder func-tions. The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:

tRecording = tPre + tFault + tPost, or tPre + tLim, depending on whichcriterion stops the current disturbance recording.

2.3 Binary signals HMI submenu:

ConfigurationDisturbReport

Input n (n=1-48)

Up to 48 binary signals can be selected from the signal list, where allavailable signals are grouped function by function. The 48 signals can beselected among internal logical signals and binary input signals. Eachselected signal is registered by the disturbance recorder, event recorder,and indication functions during a recording.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 384-XENPage 6 – 638

A user-defined name for each of the signals can be entered. This name cancomprise up to 13 characters.

HMI submenu:


BinarySignals

For each of the 48 signals, it is also possible to select if the signal is to beused as a trigger for the start of the disturbance report (TrigOperation),and if the trig should be activated at a logical 1 or 0 level (TrigLevel).

The indications in the disturbance summary, that are automaticallyscrolled on the HMI when a disturbance is registered, are also selectedfrom these 48 signals using the indication mask.

2.4 Analogue signals HMI-submenu:


AnalogSignals

This HMI submenu is only available when the disturbance recorder optionis installed.For each of the 10 analogue signals (five voltages and five currents),Operation = On means that it is recorded by the disturbance recorder. Iffewer than 10 signals are selected, the maximum storing capacity in theflash memories for total recording time becomes longer.

Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be used as triggering condition.The same applies for the current signals. The triggering is independent ofthe setting of Operation and triggers even if Operation = Off.

A user-defined name for each of the signals can be entered. It can consistof up to 13 characters. It is found at:



Version 2.2-00

3 Settings during test

3.1 Test mode During testing, the operation of the disturbance report is required. The set-ting of this operation is found at the HMI submenu:

TestTest Mode

DisturbReportOperation, DisturbSummary

When TestMode is set to On (Operation = On), the setting of the distur-bance report parameters have the following impact:

Operation = Off DisturbSummary = Off• Disturbances are not stored.

• LED information is not shown on the HMI and not stored.

• No Disturbance Summary is scrolled on the HMI.

Operation = Off DisturbSummary = On• Disturbances are not stored.

• LED information (yellow - start, red - trip) are shown on the local HMI, but not stored in the terminal.

• Disturbance summary is automatically scrolled on the local HMI for the two latest registered disturbances, until cleared. The information is not stored in the terminal.

Operation = On DisturbSummary = Off or On• The disturbance report works as in normal mode.

• Disturbances are stored. Data can be read from the local HMI, a front-connected PC, or SMS.

• LED information (yellow - start, red - trip) is stored.

• Disturbance summary is automatically scrolled on the local HMI for the two latest registered disturbances, until cleared.

• All disturbance data stored during test mode remains in the terminal when returning to normal mode.

3.2 Activation of manual triggering

A disturbance report can be manually triggered from the local HMI, afront-connected PC, or SMS. When the trig is activated, the manual trigsignal is generated. This feature is especially useful for testing.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 384-XENPage 6 – 640

4 Appendix

4.1 Function block

There are three different disturbance function blocks. The diagram aboveshows the first one, DRP1-. The other two (DRP2- and DRP3-) only con-tains the inputs, numbered 17 to 32 and 33 to 48 respectively.

DRP1-

INPUT1CLRLEDS

MEMUSEDRECMADERECSTART

OFF

CLEARED

INPUT2INPUT3INPUT4INPUT5INPUT6INPUT7INPUT8INPUT9INPUT10INPUT11INPUT12INPUT13INPUT14INPUT15INPUT16NAME01NAME02NAME03NAME04NAME05NAME06NAME07NAME08NAME09NAME10NAME11NAME12NAME13NAME14NAME15NAME16FuncT01FuncT02FuncT03FuncT04FuncT05FuncT06FuncT07FuncT08FuncT09FuncT10FuncT11FuncT12FuncT13FuncT14FuncT15FuncT16

InfoNo01InfoNo02InfoNo03InfoNo04InfoNo05InfoNo06InfoNo07InfoNo08InfoNo09InfoNo10InfoNo11InfoNo12InfoNo13InfoNo14InfoNo15InfoNo16


Version 2.2-00

4.2 Signal list


DRP1- CLRLEDS IN Disturbance Report-Clear front panel LEDs

DRP1- INPUT1 IN Select binary signal to be recorded as signal no. 1.
















DRP1- NAME01-16 IN See the setting table

DRP1- FuncT01-16 IN See the setting table

DRP1- InfoNo01-16 IN See the setting table

DRP1- CLEARED OUT All disturbances in Disturbance Report cleared

DRP1- MEMUSED OUT More than 80% of recording memory used

DRP1- OFF OUT Disturbance Report function turned off

DRP1- RECMADE OUT Disturbance recording made

DRP1- RECSTART OUT Disturbance recording started


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 384-XENPage 6 – 642

4.3 Setting table


Disturbance report

Operation Off, On On Disturbance report deactivated/activated (off/on)

PostRetrig Off, On Off Postfault retrig off/on

RecordingTime

tPre 0.05 - 0.30 s 0.10 Prefault recording time

tPost 0.1 - 3.0 s 0.5 Postfault recording time

tLim 0.5 - 4.0 s 1.0 Fault recording time limit

Binary signals (x=1-48)(Settings to be set for each input)

TrigOpera-tion

Off, On Off On/Off: The binary signal is used as recordning trigger (On) or not used (Off)

TrigLevel High-to-low, Low-to-high

High-to-low

Selects the signal transition used for triggering. From-1-to-0 or from-0-to-1

Indication-Mask

Hide, show Hide Show: The signal is displayed (and automatically scrolled) on the local HMI

SetLed Off, On Off On: When trigger conditions is satisfied, the red HMI LED is lit

NAMEx Usr def. string Input x User defined name of binary input. The name can only be set using the CAP 531 configuration tool

Analogue voltage signals (U1b-U5b)(Settings to be set for each input)

Operation Off, On On On: The signal is recorded in the disturbance recorder (if present)

<TrigLevel 0-110 % 90 Undervoltage (U<) trigger level in % of voltage signal (U1b-U5b)

>TrigLevel 0-200 % 110 Overvoltage (U>) trigger level in % of voltage signal (U1b-U5b)

<TrigOpera-tion

Off, On Off On: Undervoltage recording trigger is active

>TrigOpera-tion

Off, On Off On: Overvoltage recording trigger is active

Analogue current signals (I1b-I5b)(Settings to be set for each input)

Operation Off, On On On: The signal is recorded in the disturbance recorder (if present)

<TrigLevel 0-200 % 50 Undercurrent (I<) trigger level in % of current signal (I1b-I5b)

>TrigLevel 0-5000 % 200 Overcurrent (I>) trigger level in % of current signal (I1b-I5b)

<TrigOpera-tion

Off, On Off On: Undercurrent recording trigger is active

>TrigOpera-tion

Off, On Off On: Overcurrent recording trigger is active

Sequence number


Version 2.2-00

Sequen-ceNo

0 - 255 0 Disturbance sequence number

Function block setting inputs

FuncT01 0-255 0 Function type 1
















InfoNo01 0-255 0 Information number 1
















NAME01 0-13 Input1 Signal 1 user name 13 char. for disturbance presentations








Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 384-XENPage 6 – 644












645Disturbance report - Indications

1 ApplicationThe indications from all the 48 selected binary signals are shown on thelocal human-machine interface (HMI) and on the Station Monitoring Sys-tem (SMS) for each recorded disturbance in the disturbance report. TheLEDs on the front of the terminal display start and trip indications.

2 Theory of operationThe indications shown on the HMI and SMS give an overview of the sta-tus of the 48 event signals during the fault. On the HMI, the indicationsfor each recorded disturbance are presented at:


Disturbance n (n=1-10)Indications

All selected signals can be internally produced signals or emerge frombinary input channels.

The indications are registered only during the fault time of a recorded dis-turbance, as long as any trigger condition is activated. A part or all ofthese indications can be automatically scrolled on the local HMI after adisturbance is recorded, until acknowledged with the C button on theHMI. They are selected with the indication mask.

The signal name for internal logical signals presented on the screen fol-lows the signal name, which can be found in the signal list in each func-tion description of this user’s guide. Binary input signals are displayedwith their user-defined names.

The LED indications display this information:

Green LED :• Steady light In service

• Flashing light Internal fail, the INT--FAIL internal signal is high

• Dark No power supply

Yellow LED :• Steady light A disturbance report is triggered

• Flashing light The terminal is in test mode or in configuration mode

Red LED :• Steady light Trig on binary signal with HMI red LED option set.

• Flashing light The terminal is in configuration mode.

1MRK 580 386-XEN


Disturbance report - Indications

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 386-XENPage 6 – 646

3 SettingThe signals to be displayed as indications are selected in the disturbancereport setting. This can be found on the local HMI at:


BinarySignalsInput n (n=1-48)

4 Testing

If TestMode is activated and TestMode/DisturbReport/ is set to ... Then the disturbances ...

Operation = On DisturbSummary = On or Off Are stored as usual in the terminal.

Operation = Off DisturbSummary = On Summary scrolls. No indications. No storage of LED information.

Operation = Off DisturbSummary = Off Are not stored. LED information not stored.

647Disturbance report - Disturbance recorder

1 ApplicationThe aim of disturbance recording is to provide a means for better under-standing of the behaviour of the power network and related primary andsecondary equipment during and after a disturbance. An analysis of therecorded data provides valuable information that can be used to improveexisting equipment. This information can also be used when planning forand designing new installations.

Most of the built-in disturbance recorders offered by various manufactur-ers operate only in connection with the operation of the protective func-tions and they have a very limited capacity for recording times and thenumber of recordings.

This is not the case with the disturbance recorders built into the REx 5xxterminals. These disturbance recorders are characterised by great flexibil-ity as far as starting conditions and recording times, and large storagecapacity are concerned. Thus, the disturbance recorders are not dependenton the operation of protective functions, and they can record disturbancesthat were not discovered by protective functions for one reason or another.

The disturbance recording function in the REx 5xx terminals is fully ade-quate for the recording of disturbances for the protected object.

1.1 Recording capacity The recording function can record all analogue inputs in the transformermodule and up to 48 binary signals. To maximise the use of the memory,the number of analogue channels to be recorded is user-selectable by pro-gramming and can be set individually for each analogue input. Therecorded binary signals can be either true binary input signals or internallogical signals created by the protective functions.

1.2 Memory capacity The maximum number of recordings stored in the memory is 10. Sodepending on the set recording times and the recording of the enablednumber of channels, the memory can contain a minimum of six and amaximum of 10 disturbance recordings comprising of both header partand data part. But the header part for the last 10 recordings is alwaysavailable.

1.3 Recording times The recording times for the pre- and post-fault period, tPre and tPost, areuser-programmable with wide setting ranges.

To avoid uncontrolled recording and subsequent erasing of previousrecordings, in case a trigger should not reset within a reasonable time, alimit time, tLim, can be set to limit the total duration of a recording.

1.4 Triggers Any of the recorded binary signals can be programmed to act as a trigger.The analogue channels have programmable threshold levels for trigger-ing. Both overlevels and underlevels are available. Manual triggering isalso available. This provides a convenient test possibility.

1MRK 580 387-XEN


Disturbance report - Disturbance recorder

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 387-XENPage 6 – 648

1.5 Time tagging The terminal has a built-in, real-time clock and calendar. This function isused for time tagging of the recorded disturbances. The time taggingrefers to the activation of the trigger that starts the disturbance recording.

2 Theory of operationDisturbance recording is based on the continuous collection of networkdata, currents and binary signals, in a cyclic buffer. The buffer operatesaccording to the FIFO principle, old data will be overwritten as new dataarrives when the buffer is full. The size of this buffer is determined by theset pre-fault recording time.

Figure 1: State transition diagram governing the recording modes.

Upon detection of a fault condition (triggering), the data storage continuesin another part of the memory. The storing goes on as long as the faultcondition prevails - plus a certain additional time. The length of this addi-tional part is called the post-fault time and it can be set in the disturbancerecorder. The above mentioned two parts form a disturbance recording.The whole memory acts as a cyclic buffer and when it is full, the oldestrecording is overwritten.

The recordings can be retrieved to the PC with RECOM, the data collec-tion software, and analysed and evaluated manually by using the REVALevaluation software, which is also used for printouts of recorded distur-bances. For automatic evaluation of the recordings, the RESDA softwarepackage is available.

Pre-fault Fault

Post-fault

tLim

trig-on

trig-off

trig-ontPost

ortLim

(Store recording)

(New recording started)

(All triggers)

(New recording started,Store previous recording)

(Store recording, active triggers must reset)


1MRK 580 387-XENPage 6 – 649

Version 2.2-00

The recordings can be divided into two parts, the header and the data part.The data part contains the numerical values for the recorded analogue andbinary channels. The header contains clearly written basic information onthe disturbance. A part of this information is also used by REVAL toreproduce the analogue and binary signals in a correct and user-friendlyway. Such information is, primary and secondary instrument transformerratings.

This information is included in the header:

Table 1: Contents of the header

Type of informationParameter

Stored in parameter database

Stored with disturbance

General

Station, object & unit ID x -

Date and time - x

Sequence number - x

CT earthing x -

Time synchronisation source x -

Recording times tPre, tPost, tLim

- x

Pre-fault Uph-ph, I (RMS) - x

Trig signal and test mode flag - x

Analogue signals

Signal name x -

Primary and secondary instr. transformer rating

x -

Undertrig: level and operation x -

Overtrig: level and operation x -

Undertrig status at time of trig - x

Overtrig status at time of trig - x

Instantaneous Uph-0 at time of trig

- x

Instantaneous Iph-0 at time of trig

- x

Uph-0/Iph-0 (RMS) before trig (pre-fault)

- x

Uph-0/Iph-0 (RMS) after trig (fault)

- x

Binary signals


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 387-XENPage 6 – 650

Table 1 is a summary. For detailed information, see the “User’s Guide forREVAL”.

3 DesignThe disturbance recording function is an optional function in the REx 5xxterminals. The processing of analogue signals is handled by a dedicatedDSP (digital signal processor). Other functions are implemented in themain CPU. The memory is shared with other functions.

The numerical signals coming from the A/D conversion module in serialform are converted to parallel form in a dedicated DSP. The analogue trigconditions are also checked in the DSP.

A check of the start conditions is performed by searching for a maximumvalue. This is a positive peak. The function also seeks a minimum value,which is the negative peak.

When this is found, the absolute average value is calculated. If this valueis above the set threshold level for the overfunction on the channel inquestion, an overfunction start on that channel is indicated. The overfunc-tion is indicated with a greater than (>) sign.

Similarly, if the average value is below the set threshold level for under-function on the channel in question, an underfunction start on that channelis indicated. The underfunction is indicated with a less than (<) sign.

The procedure is separately performed for each channel. This method ofchecking the analogue start conditions gives a function that is insensitiveto DC offset in the signal. The operating time for this start is typically inthe range of one cycle, 20 ms in a 50 Hz network.

The numerical data, along with the result of the trigger condition evalua-tion, are transmitted to the main CPU. The main CPU handles these func-tions:

• Evaluation of the manual start condition

• Evaluation of the binary start condition, both for true binary input signals and for internally created logical signals

• Storage of the numerical values for the analogue channels

Signal name - x

Type of contact (trig level) x -

Trig operation x -

Signal status at time of trig - x

Trig status at time of trig - x

Table 1: Contents of the header

Type of informationParameter

Stored in parameter database

Stored with disturbance


1MRK 580 387-XENPage 6 – 651

Version 2.2-00

The numerical data for the analogue channels are stored in a cyclic pre-fault buffer in a RAM. When a trigger is activated, the data storage ismoved to another area in the RAM, where the data for the fault and thesubsequent post-fault period are stored. Thus, a complete disturbancerecording comprises the stored data for the pre-fault, fault, and post-faultperiod.

The RAM area for temporary storage of recorded data is divided into sub-areas, one for each recording. The size of a subarea is governed by thesum of the set pre-fault (tPre) and maximum post-triggering (tLim) time.There is a sufficient memory capacity for at least four consecutive record-ings with a maximum number of analogue channels recorded and withmaximum time settings. Should no such area be free at the time of a newtriggering, the oldest recording stored in the RAM is overwritten.

When a recording is completed, a post recording processing occurs.

This post-recording processing comprises:

• Merging the data for analogue channels with corresponding data for binary signals stored in an event buffer

• Compression of the data, which is performed without losing any data accuracy

• Storing the compressed data in a non-volatile memory (flash mem-ory)

The recorded disturbance is now ready for retrieval and evaluation. Therecording comprises the stored and time-tagged disturbance data alongwith relevant data from the database for configuration and parameter set-up.

Some parameters in the header of a recording are stored with the record-ing, and some are retrieved from the parameter database in connectionwith a disturbance. Table 1 indicates where the various parameters arestored. This means that if a parameter that is retrieved from the parameterdatabase was changed between the time of recording and retrieval, thecollected information is not correct in all parts. For this reason, all record-ings should be transferred to the Station Monitoring System (SMS) work-station and then deleted in the terminal before any such parameters arechanged.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 387-XENPage 6 – 652

4 SettingThe setting parameters specific for the disturbance recording function areavailable in the menu tree under:


OperationSequenceNoRecordingTimesBinarySignalsAnalogSignals

The list of parameters in the appendix attached to the document “Distur-bance report - Settings”, explains the meaning of the abbreviations used inconnection with setting ranges.

Remember that values of parameters set elsewhere in the menu tree arelinked to the information on a recording. Such parameters are, for exam-ple, station and object identifiers, CT and PT ratios.

The sequence number of the recordings is a specific parameter for the dis-turbance recorder and is used to identify the different recordings. By com-bining the date and the sequence number for a recording, the recording canbe uniquely identified. The sequence number is also shown under:

ServiceReportDisturbReport

SequenceNo

The read value on the local human-machine interface (HMI) display is thesequence number that the next recorded disturbance receives. The numberis automatically increased by one for each new recording and is reset tozero at each midnight. The sequence number can also be set manually.

5 TestingEvaluation of the results from the disturbance recording function requiresaccess to an SMS workstation either permanently connected to the termi-nal or temporarily connected to the serial port on the front. The followingsoftware packages must be installed in the workstation:

Package: For:

SMS-BASE Common functions

RECOM Collection of the disturbance data

REVAL Evaluation and printouts of the recorded data

It could be useful to have a printer for hard copies. The behavior of thedisturbance recording function can be checked when protective functionsof the terminal are tested.


1MRK 580 387-XENPage 6 – 653

Version 2.2-00

When the terminal is set to operate in test mode, there is a separate settingfor operation of the disturbance report, which also affects the disturbancerecorder.

A manual trig can be started any time. This results in a snap-shot of theactual values of all recorded channels.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 387-XENPage 6 – 654

655Disturbance report - Event recorder

1 ApplicationWhen using a front-connected PC or Station Monitoring System (SMS),an event list can be available for each of the recorded disturbances in thedisturbance report. Each list can contain up to 150 time-tagged events.These events are logged during the total recording time, which depends onthe set recording times (pre-fault, post-fault and limit time) and the actualfault time. During this time, the first 150 events for all the 48 selectedbinary signals are logged and time tagged. This list is a useful instrumentfor evaluating a fault and is a complement to the disturbance recorder.

To obtain this event list, the event recorder function (basic in some termi-nals and optional in others) must be installed.

2 Theory of operationWhen one of the trig conditions for the disturbance report is activated, theevents are collected by the main processing unit, from the 48 selectedbinary signals. The events can come from both internal logical signals andbinary input channels. The internal signals are time tagged in the mainprocessing module, while the binary input channels are time taggeddirectly on each I/O module. The events are collected during the totalrecording time, tRecording, and they are stored in the disturbance reportmemory at the end of each recording.

The name of the binary input signal that appears in the event list is theuser-defined name that can be programmed in the terminal.

The time tagging of events emerging from internal logical signals andbinary input channels have a resolution of 1 ms.

3 SettingThe settings of the event recorder consist of the signal selection and therecording times. It is possible to select up to 48 binary signals, eitherinternal signals or signals coming from binary input channels. These sig-nals coincide with the binary signals recorded by the disturbancerecorder. The disturbance summary indications that are to scroll automat-ically on the local human-machine interface (HMI), can only be selectedfrom these 48 event channels.

The signal selection is found at:


BinarySignalsInput n (n=1-48)

Each of the up to 48 event channels can be selected from the signal list,consisting of all available internal logical signals and all binary inputchannels.

1MRK 580 385-XEN


Disturbance report - Event recorder

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 385-XENPage 6 – 656

For each of the binary input and output signals, a user-defined name canbe programmed at:

ConfigurationI/O

Slotnn-XXXX (ex. Slot15-BOM3)

4 TestingDuring testing, the event recorder can be switched off if desired. This isfound in the SMS or Substation Control System (SCS).

657Disturbance report - Fault locator

1 ApplicationThe main objective of line protection and monitoring terminals is fast,selective and reliable operation for faults on a protected line section.Besides this, information on distance to fault is very important for thoseinvolved in operation and maintenance. Reliable information on the faultlocation greatly decreases the downtime of the protected lines andincreases the total availability of a power system.

The distance to the fault, which is calculated with a high accuracy, isstored for the last ten recorded disturbances. This information can be readon the HMI or transferred via serial communication within the StationMonitoring System (SMS) or Station Control System (SCS).

The distance to fault can be recalculated for the latest 10 disturbances byusing the measuring algorithm for different fault loops or for changed sys-tem parameters.

2 Distance-to-fault locatorThe distance-to-fault locator block (FLOC-) in the REx 5xx terminals isan essential complement to different line protection functions, since itmeasures and indicates the distance to the fault with great accuracy. Thus,the fault can be quickly located for repairs. See the terminal diagram ofthe function block in the appendix.

The calculation algorithm considers the effect of load currents, double-end infeed and additional fault resistance.

The function indicates the distance to the fault as a percentage of the linelength, in kilometers or miles as selected on the HMI.

The accuracy of measurement depends somewhat on the accuracy of thesystem parameters as entered into REx 5xx (for example source imped-ances at both ends of the protected line). If some parameters have actuallychanged in a significant manner relative to the set values, new values canbe entered locally or remotely and a recalculation of the distance to thefault can be ordered. In this way, a more accurate location of the fault canbe achieved.

In order to compensate for the influence of the zero-sequence mutualimpedance Zm0 on the distance-to-fault calculation in case of faults ondouble circuit lines, the terminal has a special current transformer inputfor the residual current from the parallel line. This current is used only forthe fault location function and not for any protection function.

Any start of the disturbance reporting unit also starts the operation of theFLOC- function. The distance to the fault automatically appears on thelocal HMI, if the fault is also detected by the phase selection elementswithin the terminal. The terminal saves, in any other case, the pre-faultand fault values of currents and voltages for a particular disturbance. Atany time a calculation of the distance to fault for a selected fault loop canbe initiated manually.

1MRK 580 388-XEN


Disturbance report - Fault locator

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 388-XENPage 6 – 658

The information on distance to fault automatically appears on the localHMI for the first fault only, if more than one fault appears within a timeshorter than 10 seconds. Automatic reclosing on persistent faults enablesthis. In such a case the first set of data is more accurate than the secondset. The unit also stores the phasors of currents and voltages for the lastfaults. A calculation can be initiated locally or remotely.

The percentage value is also binary coded, thus the distance to fault valuecan also be read on binary outputs of the terminal. The SPA-address61V13 also contains the latest distance to fault value.

Additional information is specified in symbols before the distance-to-faultfigure:

* A non-compensated model was used for calculation

E Error, the fault was found outside the measuring range

> The fault is located beyond the line, in forward direction

Two signs can be combined, for example, *>.

3 Measuring principleFor transmission lines with voltage sources at both line ends, consider theeffect of double-end infeed and additional fault resistance when calculat-ing the distance to the fault from the currents and voltages at one line end.If this is not done, the accuracy of the calculated figure will vary with theload flow and the amount of additional fault resistance.

The calculation algorithm used in the distance-to-fault locator in REx 5xxline-protection terminals compensates for the effect of double-end infeed,additional fault resistance and load current.

3.1 Accurate algorithm for measurement of distance to fault

Figure 1: shows a single-line diagram of a single transmission line, that isfed from both ends with source impedances ZA and ZB. Assume, that thefault occurs at a distance F from terminal A on a line with the length L andimpedance ZL. The fault resistance is defined as RF. A single-line modelis used for better clarification of the algorithm.

Disturbance report - Fault locator 1MRK 580 388-XENPage 6 – 659

Version 2.2-00

Figure 1: Fault on transmission line fed from both ends

From Figure 1: it is evident that:

(Equation 1)

where:

IA is the line current after the fault, that is, pre-fault current plus currentchange due to the fault

IF is the fault current

p is a relative distance to the fault

The fault current is expressed in measurable quantities by:

(Equation 2)

where:

IFA is the change in current at the point of measurement, terminal A

DA is a fault current-distribution factor, that is, the ratio between the faultcurrent at line end A and the total fault current

For a single line, the value is equal to:

(Equation 3)

In case of phase short circuits, the change in the line currents is useddirectly. For earth faults, the better defined positive-sequence quantities,which eliminate the influence of the zero sequence currents of the net-work are used.

Thus, the general fault location equation for a single line is:

(Equation 4)

pZLZA (1-p).ZL ZB

RF

IF

AIA IB

B

L

F

UA

UA IA p ZL IF RF⋅+⋅⋅=

IF

IFA

DA-------=

DA

1 p–( ) ZL ZB+⋅ZA ZL ZB+ +

-----------------------------------------=

UA IA p ZL⋅ ⋅IFA

DA------- RF⋅+=


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 388-XENPage 6 – 660

The expressions for UA, IA and IFA for different types of faults are inTable 1 below.

The KN complex quantity for zero-sequence compensation for the singleline is equal to:

(Equation 5)

∆I is the change in current, that is the current after the fault minus the cur-rent before the fault.

In the following, the positive sequence impedance for ZA, ZB and ZL isinserted into the equations, because this is the value used in the algorithm.

For double lines, the fault equation is:

(Equation 6)

where:

I0P is a zero sequence current of the parallel line

Z0M is a mutual zero sequence impedance

DA is the distribution factor of the parallel line, which is:

(Equation 7)

The KN compensation factor for the double line becomes:

(Equation 8)

Table 1:

Fault type: UA IA IFA

L1-N UL1A IL1A + KN x INA x ∆(IL1A - I0A)



L1-L2-L3, L1-L2,L1-L2-N

UL1A-UL2A IL1A - IL2A ∆IL1L2A

L2-L3, L2-L3-N UL2A-UL3A IL2A - IL3A ∆IL2L3A

L3-L1, L3-L1-N UL3A-UL1A IL3A - IL1A ∆IL3L1A

32---

32---

32---

KN

Z0L Z1L–

3 Z1L⋅-----------------------=

UA IA p Z1L

IFA

DA------- RF I0P Z0M⋅+⋅+⋅ ⋅=

DA

1 p–( ) ZA ZL ZB+ +( ) ZB+⋅2 ZA ZL 2 ZB⋅+ +⋅

------------------------------------------------------------------------=

KN

Z0L Z1L–

3 Z1L⋅-----------------------

Z0M

3 Z1L⋅----------------

I0P

I0A-------⋅+=


Version 2.2-00

From these equations it can be seen, that, if Z0m = 0, then the generalfault location equation for a single line is obtained. Only the distributionfactor differs in these two cases.

Because the DA distribution factor according to equation (3) or (7) is afunction of p, the general equation (6) can be written in the form:

(Equation 9)

where:

(Equation 10)

(Equation 11)

(Equation 12)

and:

• ZADD = ZA + ZB for parallel lines• IA, IFA and UA are given in the above table • KN is calculated automatically according to equation (8)• ZA, ZB, ZL, Z0L and Z0M are setting parameters

For a single line, Z0M = 0 and ZADD = 0. Thus, equation (9) applies toboth single and parallel lines.

Equation (9) can be divided into real and imaginary parts:

(Equation 13)

(Equation 14)

If the imaginary part of K3 is not zero or close to zero, RF can be solvedaccording to equation (14), and then inserted to equation (13). Accordingto equation (13), the relative distance to the fault is solved as the root of aquadratic equation.

Equation (13) gives two different values for the relative distance to thefault as a solution. A simplified load compensated algorithm, that gives anunequivocal figure for the relative distance to the fault, is used to establishthe value that should be selected.

If the load compensated algorithms according to the above do not give areliable solution, a less accurate, non-compensated impedance model isused to calculate the relative distance to the fault.

3.2 The non-compensated impedance model

In the non-compensated impedance model, IA line current is used insteadof IFA fault current:

(Equation 15)

where IA is according to Table 1.

p2 p K1 K2 K3 RF⋅–+⋅– 0=

K1

UA

IA ZL⋅---------------

ZB

ZL ZADD+-------------------------- 1+ +=

K2

UA

IA ZL⋅---------------

ZB

ZL ZADD+-------------------------- 1+

⋅=

K3

IFA

IA ZL⋅---------------

ZA Z+ B

Z1 ZADD+-------------------------- 1+

⋅=

p2 p Re K1( ) Re K2( ) RF Re K3( )⋅–+⋅– 0=

p Im K1( ) Im K2( ) RF Im K3( )⋅–+⋅– 0=

UA p Z1L IA RF IA⋅+⋅ ⋅=


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 388-XENPage 6 – 662

The accuracy of the distance-to-fault calculation, using the non-compen-sated impedance model, is influenced by the pre-fault load current. So,this method is only used if the load compensated models do not functionand the display indicates whether the non-compensated model was usedwhen calculating the distance to the fault.


Version 2.2-00

4 Design, distance-to-fault calculation

When to calculate the distance to fault, pre-fault and fault phasors of cur-rents and voltages are filtered from disturbance data stored in digital sam-ple buffers.

When the disturbance report function is triggered, the fault locator func-tion starts to calculate the frequency of the analogue channel U1. If thecalculation fails, a default frequency is read from database to ensure fur-ther execution of the function.

Then the sample for the fault interception is looked for by checking thenon-periodic changes. The channel search order is U1, U2, U3, I1, I2, I3,I4, I5 and U5.

If no error sample is found, the trig sample is used as the start sample forthe Fourier estimation of the complex values of currents and voltages. Theestimation uses samples during one period before the trig sample. In thiscase the calculated values are used both as pre-fault and fault values.

If an error sample is found the Fourier estimation of the pre-fault valuesstarts 1.5 period before the fault sample. The estimation uses samples dur-ing one period. The post-fault values are calculated using the RecursiveLeast Squares (RLS) method. The calculation starts a few samples afterthe fault sample and uses samples during 1/2 - 2 periods depending on theshape of the signals.

The pre-fault time (tPre) should be at least 0.1 s to ensure enough samplesfor the estimation of pre-fault trip values.

The phase selectors from the distance protection function provide the nec-essary information for the selection of the loop to be used for the calcula-tion. The following loops are used for different types of faults:

• for 3 phase faults: loop L1 - L2

• for 2 phase faults: the loop between the faulted phases

• for 2 phase to earth faults: the loop between the faulted phases

• for phase to earth faults: the phase to earth loop


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 388-XENPage 6 – 664

5 ConfigurationThe FLOC- function block is configured with the CAP 531 configurationtool. The inputs shall be configured to proper terminals and the outputscan be connected to desired function.

6 SettingThe system parameters required for the correct operation of a FLOC func-tion are available under:

SettingsFunctions

Group n (n=1-4)LineReference

The list of parameters in the appendix attached to this document explainsthe meaning of the abbreviations. Figure 2: also presents these systemparameters graphically. Note, that all impedance values relate to their sec-ondary values and to the total length of the protected line. The conversionprocedure follows the same rules as for the distance-protection function.

Figure 2: Simplified network configuration with network data, required for settings of the fault location-measuring function

For a single-circuit line, the figures for mutual zero-sequence impedance(X0M, R0M) are set at zero.

The source impedance is not constant in the network. However, this has anegligible influence on the accuracy of the distance-to-fault calculation,because only the phase angle of the distribution factor has an influence onthe accuracy. The phase angle of the distribution factor is normally verylow and practically constant, because it is dominated by the positive-sequence line impedance, which has an angle close to 90°. Thus, alwaysset the source impedance resistance to values other than zero. If theactual values are not known, the values that correspond to the sourceimpedance characteristic angle of 85° give satisfactory results.

R1A+jX1AZ0m=R0m+jX0m

R1L+jX1L

R0L+jX0L

R1L+jX1L

R0L+jX0L

R1B+jX1B


Version 2.2-00

7 TestingOperation of the FLOC- function depends on the measurement of differ-ent currents and voltages in all three phases. Therefore only measure-ments with three-phase testing equipment give correct results. Testingequipment with three independent voltage sources and one current source,which connects the current into different measuring loops for differenttypes of faults should not be used. ABB Network Partner advises,although it does not absolutely request, the use of RTS 21 (FREJA) testingequipment for purposes of secondary injection testing.

The distance to fault, as calculated for each fault separately, will automat-ically be displayed on the local HMI for each fault that also causes thenon-delayed tripping operation and has been detected by the built-in,phase-selection function. The FLOC- function will not calculate the dis-tance to the fault if faults are repeated in periods shorter than 10 seconds.The values of the currents and voltages are stored in the terminal memoryas new disturbances. Start of the calculation of a distance to fault canalways be manually initiated.

Distances to faults for the last 10 recorded disturbances can be found onthe local HMI under the menu:


Disturbance n (n=1-10)FaultLocator

The testing procedure for the RTS 21 (FREJA) test set is:

1.1 Set up FREJA for manual testing as described in the “General set upof FREJA for manual testing”.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 388-XENPage 6 – 666

1.2 On the 3PZ display, set FREJA at the following parameters:

1.3 Set the test point (|Z| fault impedance and ZΦ impedance phaseangle ) for a condition that meets the requirements.

1.4 Supply the relay with healthy conditions (press key <W> W - Healthy key for at least two seconds).

1.5 Apply a fault condition (press the <S> S - Faulty/Auto open key).

1.6 Check that the distance-to-fault value displayed on the HMI complieswith the following equations (the error should be less than five per-cent):

(Equation 16)

in% for two- and three-phase faults

Table 2: Test settings


I Higher than 30% Ir

DIgoal 111XX XXXXX if three-phase tripping is selected.If single-phase tripping is programmed, set DIgoal configuration at the type of fault selected.

Healthy conditions U = 63,5 V, I = 0 A & ZΦ = 0°

R, X scale and Origo pos. Suitable for relay setting

Impedance |Z| Test point

Note:Zx ≤ (X0 + 2 ⋅ X1)/3 For single-phase

faultsZx ≤ X1 For three and two

phase faultsZx ≤ (X0 + 2 ⋅ X1 ±XM)/3 For single-phase

fault with mutual zero-sequence cur-rent

Impedance

angle ZΦ Test angleZΦ arctan[(X0 + 2 ⋅ X1) / (R0 + 2R1)] For

single-phase faults

ZΦ arctan(X1/R1) For two-phase faults

Digital outputs Not used

pZx

X1------- 100⋅=


Version 2.2-00

(Equation 17)

in% for single-phase-to-earth faults

(Equation 18)

in% for single-phase-to-earth faults with mutual zero sequence current

Where:

p is the expected value of a distance to fault in percent

Zx is a set test point on FREJA

X0 is a set zero-sequence reactance of a line

X1 is a set positive-sequence reactance of a line

XM is a set mutual zero-sequence impedance of a line

p3 Z⋅ x

X0 2 X1⋅+----------------------------- 100⋅=

p3 Z⋅ x

X0 2 X1 XM±⋅+--------------------------------------------- 100⋅=


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 388-XENPage 6 – 668

8 Recalculation of a distance to fault

From the application perspective, there are two main reasons for theimplementation and use of the option to recalculate the distance to fault:

• A new fault appears on the line within a time interval shorter than 10 s after the latest one. In this case, the FLOC- function will not automatically calculate the new distance to the fault, but the values of the fault currents and voltages will remain stored in a disturbance reporting memory.

• The system conditions, especially the source impedances, have changed substantially compared to the settings in the active setting group. If more accurate values are known, these can be entered into the terminal and recalculate the distance to the fault with greater pos-sibility for obtaining much more accurate results.

A distance to fault locally for the last 10 stored disturbances can be recal-culated by using a local HMI or the facilities of an SMS and SCS. Forrecalculation on the local HMI, see Figure 3: and do this:

1. Display the Disturbance report menu.

2. Position the cursor on CalcDistToFlt. Here you select recalculation ofthe distance to the fault.

3. Press the E button one time. A new menu window is displayed. Use thearrow keys to select one of the last 10 stored disturbances.

4. Confirm the selection: press the E button one time—after the cursor ispositioned on the selected disturbance. The window that displays the Cal-cFlt/dist n line confirms that the disturbance will be recalculated for dis-turbance n.

5. Press the E button one time. This lets you select a fault loop by usingthe arrow keys.

6. Select a desired fault loop, and press the E button again. The terminalrecalculates the distance to the fault for the selected fault loop. The resultsare displayed on the HMI.

Note: FaultLoop=PhSel is one option among possible fault loops. Here,the distance to the fault is recalculated for the fault loop that you origi-nally selected with the phase selector function.


Version 2.2-00

Figure 3: Recalculation of a distance to fault

The result, that is displayed in the last window depends on the units thathave been selected during the setting procedure on a terminal. The resultscan be shown in kilometers, miles or percents of the total line length. Twoadditional symbols can be displayed before the value of a distance to fault(N and M in Figure 3:).

If no symbol appears in the N position, then the distance that was calcu-lated by the DFL unit is within the total line length that was set in the faultlocator function. If the fault is detected on the adjacent lines, then thegreater than (>) symbol is displayed in the n position.

These symbols in the M position mean:

These same symbols apply to the automatic display of the results on thelocal HMI—immediately after the fault.

To exit the menu used for recalculating a distance to fault, press the C but-ton twice.

CalcDistToFlt

REx5xx/DistRepDisturbances

Manual TrigE

V

VDisturbance n

.DistRep/CalcFlt

Disturbance n+1E

V

V

Disturbance(n-1)

FltLoop=L3-NDist=NM 57.8km

.CalcFlt/Dist n

FaultLoop=L1-N

.CalcFlt/Dist n

E E C FaultLoop=L3-N

.CalcFlt/Dist n

Table 3: Symbols

Symbol: Description:

No symbol A normal RANZA (compensated algorithm is used for the calculation)

E Indicates that the displayed result is inaccurate because not enough information is available for the calculation

* Only the impedance algorithm is used for the calcula-tion (See “Measuring principle” on page 658.)


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 388-XENPage 6 – 670

9 Appendix

9.1 Function block

9.2 Signal list

PSL1

FLOC-

DISTH4PSL2PSL3RELEASE

DISTH8

DISTH2DISTH1

DISTL8DISTL4DISTL2DISTL1

DISTOK

Table 4: List of signals for the FLOC- function block


FLOC- PSL1 IN Fault locator phase selection indication L1



FLOC- RELEASE IN Fault locator Release

FLOC- DISTH8 OUT Fault locator BCD output H8




FLOC- DISTL8 OUT Fault locator BCD output L8




FLOC- DISTOK OUT Fault locator distance Ok


Version 2.2-00

9.3 Setting table

Table 5: Settings of the line references


Length unit km, mile km Line length unit in km or mile

Line length 0.00- 10000.00

As above

40.00 Line length value in present length unit

X1 0.001-1500.000

ohm 12.000 Positive sequence line reactance.

R1 0.001-1500.000

ohm 2.000 Positive sequence line resistance.

X0 0.001-1500.000

ohm 48.000 Zero sequence line reactance.

R0 0.001-1500.000

ohm 8.000 Zero sequence line resistance.

X1SA 0.001-1500.000

ohm 12.000 Positive sequence source reactance, near end.

R1SA 0.001-1500.000

ohm 2.000 Positive sequence source resistance, near end.

X1SB 0.001-1500.000

ohm 12.000 Positive sequence source reactance, far end.

R1SB 0.001-1500.000

ohm 2.000 Positive sequence source resistance, far end.

Xm0 0.001-1500.000

ohm 0.000 Mutual reactance from parallel line.

Rm0 0.001-1500.000

ohm 0.000 Mutual resistance from parallel line.

Table 6: Settings for the fault locator


Distance Unit

%, km/mi % Unit for distance to fault presentation. If km/mi (mile) is selected, presented unit depends on the unit selected under the Length Unit in the setting table for line reference


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 388-XENPage 6 – 672

673Disturbance Report - Trip value recorder

1 ApplicationThe main objective of line protection and monitoring terminals is fast,selective and reliable operation for faults on a protected object. Besidesthis, information on the values of the currents and voltages before andduring the fault is valuable to understand the severity of the fault.

The trip value recorder in the REx 5xx series of terminals provides thisinformation. The function is an optional software module in the terminal.

The function calculates the pre-fault and fault values of currents and volt-ages and presents them as phasors with amplitude and argument.

2 DesignPre-fault and fault phasors of currents and voltages are filtered from dis-turbance data stored in digital sample buffers.

When the disturbance report function is triggered, the trip value recorderfunction starts to calculate the frequency of the analogue channel U1. Ifthe calculation fails, a default frequency is read from database to ensurefurther execution of the function.

Then the sample for the fault interception is looked for by checking thenon-periodic changes. The channel search order is U1, U2, U3, I1, I2, I3,I4, I5 and U5.

If no error sample is found, the trig sample is used as the start sample forthe Fourier estimation of the complex values of currents and voltages. Theestimation uses samples during one period before the trig sample. In thiscase the calculated values are used both as pre-fault and fault values.

If an error sample is found the Fourier estimation of the prefault valuesstarts 1.5 period before the fault sample. The estimation uses samples dur-ing one period. The postfault values are calculated using the RecursiveLeast Squares (RLS) method. The calculation starts a few samples afterthe fault sample and uses samples during 1/2 - 2 periods depending on theshape of the signals.

The pre-fault time (tPre) should be at least 0.1 s to ensure enough samplesfor the estimation of pre-fault trip values.

1MRK 580 389-XEN


Disturbance Report - Trip value recorder

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 389-XENPage 6 – 674

3 Displaying pre-fault and fault phasors of the currents and voltages

When the Trip value recorder function is built into the REx 5xx terminals,it records and displays:

• The pre-fault phasors

• The fault phasors

Figure 1: shows typical examples of the corresponding data windows. Theappendix in this document contains explanations of the different parame-ter names.

Figure 1: Typical data windows, which display the phasors of voltages and currents.

The phasors of the pre-fault and fault voltages and currents are availableunder the menu:


Disturbance n (n=1-10)TripValues

PreFault (Fault)

Figure 1:a and 1b shows typical data windows. The first row indicates ifthe pre-fault or the fault value of the phasor is presented. The name of thephasor is located in the second row. Its RMS value appears in the thirdrow, while the fourth row displays information about the relative phaseposition compared, as a reference, to the voltage in the L1 phase.

3.1 Setting of the user-defined names for phasors

Customer specific names for all the ten analogue inputs (five currents andfive voltages) can be entered. Each name can have up to 13 alphanumericcharacters. These names are common for all functions within the distur-bance report functionality. See the document “Terminal identification” forfurther description and settings of the analogue inputs.

The user-defined names for the analogue inputs are set under the menu:


U1 (U2..U5, I1..I5)

U1=57.35 kV

.TripVal/PreFlt

0.00 deg

I1=4560 A

.TripVal/Flt

87.0 dega) b)


1MRK 580 389-XENPage 6 – 675

Version 2.2-00

4 Appendix

Table 1: List of phasors

Default parameter: Description:

Phasors of the pre-fault primary voltages and currents for the disturbance n = 1 to 10; Menu tree: Disturb.Report—Disturbances—Disturbance n—TripValues—PreFault

U1 Phase value of the phase L1 voltage—RMS value and relative phase angle



U4 Residual voltage 3Uo—RMS value and relative phase angle

U5 Phase value of the busbar voltage, used for the purposes of synchro-check and dead-line-check function—RMS value and relative phase angle

I1 Phase value of the phase L1 current—RMS value and relative-phase angle



I4 Residual current 3Io - RMS value and relative-phase angle

I5 Residual current 3Io from the parallel line for the fault location function only—RMS value and relative-phase angle

Frequency Frequency before the disturbance

Phasors of the fault primary voltages and currents for the disturbance n = 1 to 10;Menu tree: Disturb.Report—Disturbances—Disturbance n—TripValues—Fault

U1 Phase value of the phase L1 voltage—RMS value and relative-phase angle



U4 Residual voltage 3Uo—RMS value and relative phase angle

U5 Phase value of the busbar voltage, used for the purposes of synchro-check and dead-line-check function—RMS value and relative phase angle




I4 Residual current 3Io—RMS value and relative-phase angle

I5 Residual current 3Io from the parallel line for the purposes of a fault location function only—RMS value and relative-phase angle


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 389-XENPage 6 – 676

677Monitoring of AC analogue measurements

1 ApplicationFast, reliable supervision of different analogue quantities is of vital impor-tance during the normal operation of a power system.

Operators in the control centres can, for example:

• Continuously follow active and reactive power flow in the network

• Supervise the busbar voltage level and frequency

Different measuring methods are available for different quantities. Cur-rent and voltage instrument transformers provide the basic information onmeasured phase currents and voltages in different points within the powersystem. At the same time, currents and voltages serve as the input measur-ing quantities to power and energy meters, protective devices and so on.

Further processing of this information occurs within different control,protection, and monitoring terminals and within the higher hierarchicalsystems in the secondary power system.

The REx 5xx protection, control, and monitoring terminals have a built-inoption to measure and further process information about up to five inputcurrents and five input voltages. The number of processed alternate mea-suring quantities depends on the type of terminal and built-in options.Additional information are also available:

• Mean values of measured currents I in the first, three current-mea-suring channels

• Mean values of measured voltages U in the first, three voltage-mea-suring channels

• Three-phase active power P as measured by the first, three current- and voltage-measuring channels

• Three-phase reactive power Q as measured by the first, three current- and voltage-measuring channels

• Frequency f

The accuracy of measurement depends on the requirements. Basic accu-racy satisfies the operating (information) needs. An additional calibrationof measuring channels is necessary and must be ordered separately whenthe requirements on accuracy of the measurement are higher. Refer to thetechnical data and ordering particulars, for the particular terminal.

The information on measured quantities are then available to the user ondifferent locations:

• Locally by means of the local human-machine interface (HMI) unit• Locally by means of a front-connected personal computer (PC)• Remotely over the LON bus to the station control system (SCS)• Remotely over the SPA port to the station monitoring system (SMS)

1MRK 580 390-XEN


Monitoring of AC analogue measurements

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 390-XENPage 6 – 678

1.1 User-defined measuring ranges

Each measuring channel has an independent measuring range from theothers. This allows the users to select the most suitable measuring rangefor each measuring quantity on each monitored object of the power sys-tem. In doing so, they optimize the functionality of the power system.

1.2 Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity

Users can continuously monitor the measured quantity in each channel bymeans of four built-in operating thresholds (figure 1). The monitors oper-ate in two different modes of operation:

• Overfunction, when the measured current exceeds the HiWarn or HiAlarm pre-set values

• Underfunction, when the measured current decreases under the Low-Warn or LowAlarm pre-set values

Figure 1: Presentation of the operating limits

Each operating level has its corresponding functional output signal:

• HIWARN

• HIALARM

• LOWWARN

• LOWALARM

The logical value of the functional output signals changes according tofigure 1.

visf_210.vsd

HIWARN = 1

HIALARM = 1

HIWARN = 0

HIALARM = 0

Hysteresis

HiAlarm

HiWarn

LowWarn

LowAlarm

LOWWARN = 1

LOWALARM = 1

LOWALARM = 0

LOWWARN = 0

Y

t


1MRK 580 390-XENPage 6 – 679

Version 2.2-00

The user can set the hysteresis, which determines the difference betweenthe operating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range foreach measuring channel separately. The hysteresis is common for all oper-ating values within one channel.

1.3 Continuous supervision of the measured quantity

The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally andremotely. The measurement is continuous for each channel separately, butthe reporting of the value to the higher levels (control processor in theunit, HMI and SCS) depends on the selected reporting mode. The follow-ing basic reporting modes are available:

• Periodic reporting

• Periodic reporting with dead-band supervision in parallel

• Periodic reporting with dead-band supervision in series

• Dead-band reporting

Users can select between two types of dead-band supervision:

• Amplitude dead-band supervision (ADBS)

• Integrating dead-band supervision (IDBS)

1.3.1 Amplitude dead-band supervision

If the changed value —compared to the last reported value— is largerthan the ± ∆Y predefined limits that are set by users, and if this is detectedby a new measuring sample, then the measuring channel reports the newvalue to a higher level. This limits the information flow to a minimumnecessary. Figure 2 shows an example of periodic reporting with theamplitude dead-band supervision. The picture is simplified: the process isnot continuous but the values are evaluated with a time interval of onesecond from each others.

Figure 2: Amplitude dead-band supervision reporting

visf_232.vsd

Y

t

Value Reported(1st)

Value ReportedValue Reported

Y1

Y2

Y3

∆Y

∆Y

∆Y

∆Y

∆Y

∆Y

Value Reported


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 390-XENPage 6 – 680

After the new value is reported, the new + ∆Y limits for dead-band areautomatically set around it. The new value is reported only if the mea-sured quantity changes more than defined by the new +∆Y set limits.

1.3.2 Integrating dead-band supervision

The measured value is updated if the time integral of all changes exceedsthe pre-set limit (figure 3), where an example of reporting with integratingdead-band supervision is shown. The picture is simplified: the process isnot continuous but the values are evaluated with a time interval of onesecond from each others.

The last value reported (Y1 in figure 3) serves as a basic value for furthermeasurement. A difference is calculated between the last reported and thenewly measured value during new sample and is multiplied by the timeincrement (discrete integral). The absolute values of these products areadded until the pre-set value is exceeded. This occurs with the value Y2that is reported and set as a new base for the following measurements (aswell as for the values Y3, Y4 and Y5).

The integrating dead-band supervision is particularly suitable for monitor-ing signals with low variations that can last for relatively long periods.

Figure 3: Reporting with integrating dead-band supervision

1.3.3 Periodic reporting The user can select the periodic reporting of measured value in time inter-vals between 1 and 3600 s. The measuring channel reports the value evenif it has not changed for more than the set limits of amplitude or integrat-ing dead-band supervision. To disable periodic reporting, set the reportingtime interval to 0 s (figure 4).

visf_233.vsd

Y

t

Value Reported(1st)

Y1

ValueReported

A1Y2

ValueReported

Y3

Y4

AValueReported

A2

Y5

A3A4

A5 A7A6

ValueReported

A2 >=pre-set value

A1 >=pre-set valueA >=

pre-set value

A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >=pre-set value


1MRK 580 390-XENPage 6 – 681

Version 2.2-00

Figure 4: Periodic reporting

1.3.4 Periodic reporting with parallel dead-band supervision

The newly measured value is reported:

• After each time interval for the periodic reporting expired, OR

• When the new value is detected by the dead-band supervision func-tion

The amplitude dead-band and the integrating dead-band can be selected.The periodic reporting can be set in time intervals between 1 and 3600seconds.

Figure 5: Periodic reporting with amplitude dead-band supervision in parallel

1.3.5 Periodic reporting with serial dead-band supervision

Periodic reporting can operate serially with the dead-band supervision.This means that the new value is reported only if the set time periodexpired AND if the dead-band limit was exceeded during the observed

visf_231.vsd

Val

ue 1

Y

t

Val

ue 2

Val

ue 3

Val

ue 4

Value Reported(1st)

Value Reported

Val

ue 5

Value Reported

Y1

Y2

Y5

Value Reported Value Reported

Y3Y4

t (*)

(*)Set value for t: RepInt

t (*) t (*) t (*)

visf_234.vsdVal

ue 1

Y

t

Val

ue 2

Val

ue 3

Val

ue 4

Value Reported(1st)

Value ReportedValueReported

Val

ue 5

Value Reported

Y1

∆Y

∆Y

ValueReported

t (*) t (*) t (*) t (*)


Value Reported

∆Y∆Y

Value Reported

∆Y

∆Y

ValueReported

∆Y∆Y


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 390-XENPage 6 – 682

time (figures 6 and 7). The amplitude dead-band and the integrating dead-band can be selected. The periodic reporting can be set in time intervalsbetween 1 and 3600 seconds.

Figure 6: Periodic reporting with amplitude dead-band supervision in series

Figure 7: Periodic reporting with integrating dead-band supervision in series

1.3.6 Combination of periodic reportings

The reporting of the new value depends on setting parameters for thedead-band and for the periodic reporting. Table 1 presents the dependencebetween different settings and the type of reporting for the new value of ameasured quantity.

visf_211.vsdVal

ue 1

Y

t

Val

ue 2

Val

ue 3

Val

ue 4

Value Reported(1st)

Value Reported

∆Y

∆Y

Value notReported

Val

ue 5

Value Reported

Y1

Y2

Y3

∆Y

∆Y

Value notReported

t (*) t (*) t (*) t (*)


visf_212.vsd

Y

t

Val

ue 1

Val

ue 2

Val

ue 3

Value Reported(1st)

Value notReported

Y1

ValueReported

A1 A2

Y2

t (*) t (*)


A1 <pre-set value

A1 + A2 >= pre-set value


1MRK 580 390-XENPage 6 – 683

Version 2.2-00

* please, refer to the setting table for the explanation

2 Theory of operation and Design

The design of the alternating quantities measuring function follows thedesign of all REx 5xx-series protection, control, and monitoring terminalsthat have distributed functionality, where the decision levels are placed asclosely as possible to the process.

The measuring function uses the same input current and voltage signals asother protection and monitoring functions within the terminals (figure 8on page 684). The number of input current and voltage transformersdepends on the type of terminal and options included. The maximum pos-sible configuration comprises five current and five voltage input channels.

Measured input currents and voltages are first filtered in analogue filtersand then converted to numerical information by an A/D converter, whichoperates with a sampling frequency of 2 kHz.

Table 1: Dependence of reporting on different setting parameters:

EnD

eadB

*

EnI

Dea

dB*

EnD

eadB

P*

Rep

Int*

Reporting of the new value

Off Off Off 0 No measured values is reported

Off On On t>0 The new measured value is reported only if the time t period expired and if, dur-ing this time, the integrating dead-band limits were exceeded (periodic reportingwith integrating dead-band supervision in series)

On Off On t>0 The new measured value is reported only if the time t period has expired and if,during this time, the amplitude dead-band limits were exceeded (periodic report-ing with amplitude dead-band supervision in series)

On On On t>0 The new measured value is reported only if the time t period expired and if at leastone of the dead-band limits were exceeded (periodic reporting with dead-bandsupervision in series)

Off On Off 0 The new measured value is reported only when the integrated dead-band limitsare exceeded

On Off Off 0 The new measured value is reported only when the amplitude dead-band limitswere exceeded

On On Off 0 The new measured value is reported only if one of the dead-band limits wasexceeded

x x Off t>0 The new measured value is updated at least after the time t period expired. If thedead-band supervision is additionally selected, the updating also occurs when thecorresponding dead-band limit was exceeded (periodic reporting with paralleldead-band supervision)


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 390-XENPage 6 – 684

The numerical information on measured currents and voltages continuesover a serial link to one of the built-in digital signal processors (DSP). Anadditional Fourier filter numerically filters the received information, andthe DSP calculates the corresponding values for the following quantities:

• Five input measured voltages (U1, U2, U3, U4, U5). RMS values

• Five input measured currents (I1, I2, I3, I4, I5). RMS Values

• Mean RMS value, U, of the three phase-to-phase voltages calculated from the first three phase-to-earth voltages U1, U2 and U3

• Mean RMS value, I, of the first three measured RMS values I1, I2, and I3

• Three-phase active power, P, related to the first three measured cur-rents and voltages (I1, U1, I2, U2, I3, U3)

• Three-phase, reactive power, Q, related to the first three measured currents and voltages (I1, U1, I2, U2, I3, U3)

• Mean value of frequencies, f, as measured with voltages U1, U2, and U3

Figure 8: Simplified diagram for the function

This information is available to the user for operational purposes.

3 Setting instructionsThe basic terminal parameters can be set from the HMI under the sub-menu:


Generalfr, CTEarth

So users can determine the rated parameters for the terminal:

• Rated frequency fr

• Position of the earthing point of the main CTs (CTEarth), which determines whether the CT earthing point is towards the protected object or the busbar.

visf_213.vsd

AD DSP

5I

5U

PROCESSING

CALIBRATION

SCS

HMI

SMS

LOGIC


1MRK 580 390-XENPage 6 – 685

Version 2.2-00

The other basic terminal parameters, related to any single analog input,can be set under the submenu:


U1, U2, U3, U4, U5, I1, I2, I3, I4, I5, U, I, P, Q, f

So the users can determine the base values, the primary CTs and VTsratios, and the user-defined names for the analog inputs of the terminal.

Under U1:

• ac voltage base value for analog input U1: U1b

• voltage transformer input U1 nominal primary to secondary scale value: U1Scale

• Name (of up to 13 characters) of the analog input U1: Name

Under U2:




Under U3:




Under U4:




Under U5:




Under I1:

• ac current base value for analog input I1: I1b

• current transformer input I1 nominal primary to secondary scale value: I1Scale

• Name (of up to 13 characters) of the analog input I1: Name


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 390-XENPage 6 – 686

Under I2:




Under I3:



• Name (up to 13 characters) of the analog input I3: Name

Under I4:




Under I5:



• Name (up to 13 characters) of the analog input I5: Name

Under U:

• Name (up to 13 characters) of the phase to phase voltage U: Name

Under I:

• Name (up to 13 characters) of the average current I: Name

Under P:

• Name (up to 13 characters) of the active power P: Name

Under Q:

• Name (up to 13 characters) of the reactive power Q: Name

Under f:

• Name (up to 13 characters) of the frequency value f: Name

The names of the first 10 quantities automatically appears in the REVALevaluation program for each reported disturbance.

SMS and the CAP 531 configuration tool have to be used in order to setall remaining parameters that are related to different alternating measuringquantities.


1MRK 580 390-XENPage 6 – 687

Version 2.2-00

In the settings menu it is possible to set all monitoring operating valuesand the hysteresis directly in the basic units of the measured quantities foreach channel and for each quantity:


AnalogSignals

The dead-band limits can be set directly in the corresponding units of theobserved quantity for the:



The IDBS area is defined by the following formula:

(Equation 1)

where:

is a set operating value for IDBS in corresponding unit

is the reading frequency. It has a constant value of 1Hz

is the time between two samples (fixed to 1s).

The setting value for IDBS is IDeadB, and is expressed in the measuringunit of the monitored quantity (kV, A, MW, Mvar or Hz). The value isreported if the time integral area is greater than the value IDBS.

If a 0.1 Hz variation in the frequency for 10 minutes (600 s) is the eventthat should cause the reporting of the frequency monitored value, than theset value for IDeadB is 60 Hz.

The hysteresis can be set under the setting Hysteres.

Alarm and warning thresholds have to be set respectively under the set-tings HiAlarm (LowAlarm) and HiWarn (LowWarn).

The setting table lists all the setting parameters.

Note: It is important to set the time for periodic reporting and deadband inan optimised way to minimise the load on the station bus.

IDBSIDeadB

ReadFreq----------------------------- IDeadB ts⋅= =

IDeadB

ReadFreq

ts1

ReadFreq-----------------------------=


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 390-XENPage 6 – 688

4 TestingStabilized ac current and voltage generators and corresponding current,voltage, power and frequency meters with very high accuracy are neces-sary for testing the alternating quantity measuring function. The operatingranges of the generators must correspond to the rated alternate current andvoltage of each terminal.

Connect the generators and instruments to the corresponding input termi-nals of a unit under test. Check that the values presented on the HMI unitcorrespond to the magnitude of input measured quantities within the lim-its of declared accuracy. The mean service values are available under thesubmenu:

Service ReportServiceValues

The phasors of up to five input currents and voltages are available underthe submenu:

Service ReportPhasors

Primary

The operation of ADBS or IDBS function can be checked separately withthe RepInt = 0 setting. The value on the HMI follows the changes in theinput measuring quantity continuously.

Configure the monitoring output signals (see the signal list) to the corre-sponding output relays. Check the operating monitoring levels by chang-ing the magnitude of input quantities and observing the operation of thecorresponding output relays.

The output contact changes its state when the changes in the input mea-suring quantity are higher than the set values HIWARN, HIALARM, orlower than the set values LOWWARN, LOWALARM.

5 Appendix

5.1 Function block

DAxx-BLOCK DAxx-HIALARM


visf_230.vsd

DAxx-HIWARN

DAxx-LOWWARNDAxx-LOWALARM


1MRK 580 390-XENPage 6 – 689

Version 2.2-00

5.2 Signal list

*1) The xx within the signal name corresponds to the following measur-ing quantities:

xx = 01 input measuring voltage U1





xx = 06 input measuring current I1





xx = 11 mean value U of the three phase to phase voltages calculated from the first three phase voltages U1, U2 and U3

xx = 12 mean value I of first three currents I1, I2 and I3

xx = 13 three phase active power P measured by first three voltage and current inputs

xx = 14 three phase reactive power Q measured by first three voltage and current inputs

xx = 15 mean value of frequency f as measured by first three voltage inputs U1, U2 and U3

5.3 Setting table

Table 2:


DAxx- BLOCK IN Block updating of value for U1

DAxx- HIALARM OUT High Alarm U1

DAxx- HIWARN OUT High Warning U1

DAxx- LOWALARM OUT Low Alarm U1

DAxx- LOWWARN OUT Low Warning U1

Table 3:


For each voltage input channels U1 - U5:

Operation Off, On Off Direct Analogue Input U1 - U5 Off/On

Hysteres 0.0-1999.9 kV 5.0 Alarm hysteresis for U1 - U5 in kV

EnAlRem Off, On On Immediate event when an alarm is disabled for U1 - U5(produces an immediate event at reset of any alarm monitor-ing element, when On)


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 390-XENPage 6 – 690

EnAlarms Off, On On Set to ’On’ to activate alarm supervision for U1 - U5(produces an immediate event at operation of any alarm mon-itoring element, when On)

HiAlarm 0.0-1999.9 kV 220.0 High Alarm level for U1 - U5 in kV

HiWarn 0.0-1999.9 kV 210.0 High Warning level for U1 - U5 in kV

LowWarn 0.0-1999.9 kV 170.0 Low Warning level for U1 - U5 in kV

LowAlarm 0.0-1999.9 kV 160.0 Low Alarm level for U1 - U5 in kV

RepInt 0-3600 s 0 Time between reports for U1 - U5 in seconds. Zero = Off(duration of time interval between two reports at periodic reporting function. Setting to 0 disables the periodic reporting)

EnDeadB Off, On Off Enable amplitude dead band supervision for U1 - U5

DeadBand 0.0-1999.9 kV 5.0 Amplitude dead band for U1 - U5 in kV

EnIDeadB Off, On Off Enable integrating dead band supervision for U1 - U5

IDeadB 0.0-1999.9 kV 10.0 Integrating dead band for U1 - U5 in kV

EnDeadBP Off, On Off Enable periodic dead band reporting U1 - U5

For each voltage input channels I1 - I5:

Operation Off, On Off Direct Analogue Input I1 - I5 Off/On

Hysteres 0-99999 A 50 Alarm hysteresis for I1 - I5 in A

EnAlRem Off, On On Immediate event when an alarm is disabled for I1 - I5(produces an immediate event at reset of any alarm monitor-ing element, when On)

EnAlarms Off, On Off Set to ’On’ to activate alarm supervision for I1 - I5(produces an immediate event at operation of any alarm mon-itoring element, when On)

HiAlarm 0-99999 A 900 High Alarm level for I1 - I5 in A

HiWarn 0-99999 A 800 High Warning level for I1 - I5 in A

LowWarn 0-99999 A 200 Low Warning level for I1 - I5 in A

LowAlarm 0-99999 A 100 Low Alarm level for I1 - I5 in A

RepInt 0-3600 s 0 Time between reports for I1 - I5 in seconds. Zero = Off(duration of time interval between two reports at periodic reporting function. Setting to 0 disables the periodic reporting)

EnDeadB Off, On Off Enable amplitude dead band supervision for I1 - I5

DeadBand 0-99999 A 50 Amplitude dead band for I1 - I5 in A

EnIDeadB Off, On Off Enable integrating dead band supervision for I1 - I5

IDeadB 0-99999 A 10000 Integrating dead band for I1 - I5 in A

EnDeadBP Off, On Off Enable periodic dead band reporting I1 - I5

Mean phase-to-phase voltage measuring channel U:

Operation Off, On Off Direct Analogue Input U Off/On

Hysteres 0.0-1999.9 kV 5.0 Alarm hysteresis for U in kV

Table 3:



1MRK 580 390-XENPage 6 – 691

Version 2.2-00

EnAlRem Off, On On Immediate event when an alarm is disabled for U(produces an immediate event at reset of any alarm monitor-ing element, when On)

EnAlarms Off, On On Set to ’On’ to activate alarm supervision for U(produces an immediate event at operation of any alarm mon-itoring element, when On)

HiAlarm 0.0-1999.9 kV 220.0 High Alarm level for U in kV

HiWarn 0.0-1999.9 kV 210.0 High Warning level for U in kV

LowWarn 0.0-1999.9 kV 170.0 Low Warning level for U in kV

LowAlarm 0.0-1999.9 kV 160.0 Low Alarm level for U in kV

RepInt 0-3600 s 0 Time between reports for U in seconds. Zero = Off(duration of time interval between two reports at periodic reporting function. Setting to 0 disables the periodic reporting)

EnDeadB Off, On Off Enable amplitude dead band supervision for U

DeadBand 0.0-1999.9 kV 5.0 Amplitude dead band for U in kV

EnIDeadB Off, On Off Enable integrating dead band supervision for U

IDeadB 0.0-1999.9 kV 10.0 Integrating dead band for U in kV

EnDeadBP Off, On Off Enable periodic dead band reporting U

Mean current measuring channel I:

Operation Off, On Off Direct Analogue Input I Off/On

Hysteres 0-99999 A 50 Alarm hysteresis for I in A

EnAlRem Off, On On Immediate event when an alarm is disabled for I(produces an immediate event at reset of any alarm monitor-ing element, when On)

EnAlarms Off, On Off Set to ’On’ to activate alarm supervision for I(produces an immediate event at operation of any alarm mon-itoring element, when On)

HiAlarm 0-99999 A 900 High Alarm level for I in A

HiWarn 0-99999 A 800 High Warning level for I in A

LowWarn 0-99999 A 200 Low Warning level for I in A

LowAlarm 0-99999 A 100 Low Alarm level for I in A

RepInt 0-3600 s 0 Time between reports for I in seconds. Zero = Off(duration of time interval between two reports at periodic reporting function. Setting to 0 disables the periodic reporting)

EnDeadB Off, On Off Enable amplitude dead band supervision for I

DeadBand 0-99999 A 50 Amplitude dead band for I in A

EnIDeadB Off, On Off Enable integrating dead band supervision for I

IDeadB 0-99999 A 10000 Integrating dead band for I in A

EnDeadBP Off, On Off Enable periodic dead band reporting I

Active power measuring channel P:

Operation Off, On Off Direct Analogue Input P Off/On

Table 3:



Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 390-XENPage 6 – 692

Hysteres 0.0-9999.9 MW 5.0 Alarm hysteresis for P in MW

EnAlRem Off, On On Immediate event when an alarm is disabled for P(produces an immediate event at reset of any alarm monitor-ing element, when On)

EnAlarms Off, On Off Set to ’On’ to activate alarm supervision for P(produces an immediate event at operation of any alarm mon-itoring element, when On)

HiAlarm 0.0-9999.9 MW 300.0 High Alarm level for P in MW

HiWarn 0.0-9999.9 MW 200.0 High Warning level for P in MW

LowWarn 0.0-9999.9 MW 80.0 Low Warning level for P in MW

LowAlarm 0.0-9999.9 MW 50.0 Low Alarm level for P in MW

RepInt 0-3600 s 0 Time between reports for P in seconds. Zero = Off(duration of time interval between two reports at periodic reporting function. Setting to 0 disables the periodic reporting)

EnDeadB Off, On Off Enable amplitude dead band supervision for P

DeadBand 0.0-9999.9 MW 1.0 Amplitude dead band for P in MW

EnIDeadB Off, On Off Enable integrating dead band supervision for P

IDeadB 0.0-9999.9 MW 10.0 Integrating dead band for P in MW

EnDeadBP Off, On Off Enable periodic dead band reporting P

Reactive power measuring channel Q:

Operation Off, On Off Direct Analogue Input Q Off/On

Hysteres 0.0-9999.9 Mvar 5.0 Alarm hysteresis for Q in Mvar

EnAlRem Off, On On Immediate event when an alarm is disabled for Q(produces an immediate event at reset of any alarm monitor-ing element, when On)

EnAlarms Off, On Off Set to ’On’ to activate alarm supervision for Q(produces an immediate event at operation of any alarm mon-itoring element, when On)

HiAlarm 0.0-9999.9 Mvar 300.0 High Alarm level for Q in Mvar

HiWarn 0.0-9999.9 Mvar 200.0 High Warning level for Q in Mvar

LowWarn 0.0-9999.9 Mvar 80.0 Low Warning level for Q in Mvar

LowAlarm 0.0-9999.9 Mvar 50.0 Low Alarm level for Q in Mvar

RepInt 0-3600 s 0 Time between reports for Q in seconds. Zero = Off(duration of time interval between two reports at periodic reporting function. Setting to 0 disables the periodic reporting)

EnDeadB Off, On Off Enable amplitude dead band supervision for Q

DeadBand 0.0-9999.9 Mvar 1.0 Amplitude dead band for Q in Mvar

EnIDeadB Off, On Off Enable integrating dead band supervision for Q

IDeadB 0.0-9999.9 Mvar 10.0 Integrating dead band for Q in Mvar

EnDeadBP Off, On Off Enable periodic dead band reporting Q

Frequency measuring channel f:

Table 3:



1MRK 580 390-XENPage 6 – 693

Version 2.2-00

Operation Off, On Off Direct Analogue Input f Off/On

Hysteres 0.0-99.9 Hz 1.0 Alarm hysteresis for f in Hz

EnAlRem Off, On On Immediate event when an alarm is disabled for f(produces an immediate event at reset of any alarm monitor-ing element, when On)

EnAlarms Off, On Off Set to ’On’ to activate alarm supervision for f(produces an immediate event at operation of any alarm mon-itoring element, when On)

HiAlarm 0.0-99.9 Hz 55.0 High Alarm level for f in Hz

HiWarn 0.0-99.9 Hz 53.0 High Warning level for f in Hz

LowWarn 0.0-99.9 Hz 47.0 Low Warning level for f in Hz

LowAlarm 0.0-99.9 Hz 45.0 Low Alarm level for f in Hz

RepInt 0-3600 s 0 Time between reports for f in seconds. Zero = Off(duration of time interval between two reports at periodic reporting function. Setting to 0 disables the periodic reporting)

EnDeadB Off, On Off Enable amplitude dead band supervision for f

DeadBand 0.0-99.9 Hz 1.0 Amplitude dead band for f in Hz

EnIDeadB Off, On Off Enable integrating dead band supervision for f

IDeadB 0.0-99.9 Hz 5 Integrating dead band for f in Hz

EnDeadBP Off, On Off Enable periodic dead band reporting f

Reporting of events to the station control system (SCS) through LON port

EventMask U1

No Events, Report Events

Enables (Report Events) or disables (No Events) the reporting of events from channel DA01 to the SCS

EventMask U2



EventMask U3



EventMask U4



EventMask U5



EventMask I1



EventMask I2



EventMask I3



EventMask I4



EventMask I5



Table 3:



Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 390-XENPage 6 – 694

EventMask U



EventMask I



EventMask P



EventMask Q



EventMaskf



Table 3:


695Monitoring of DC analogue measurements

1 ApplicationFast, reliable supervision of different analogue quantities is of vital impor-tance during the normal operation of a power system. Operators in thecontrol centres can, for example:

• Continuously follow active and reactive power flow in the network

• Supervise the busbar voltages

• Check the temperature of power transformers, shunt reactors

• Monitor the gas pressure in circuit breakers

Different measuring methods are available for different quantities. Cur-rent and voltage instrument transformers provide the basic information onmeasured phase currents and voltages in different points within the powersystem. At the same time, currents and voltages serve as the input measur-ing quantities to power and energy meters.

Different measuring transducers provide information on electrical andnon-electrical measuring quantities such as voltage, current, temperature,and pressure. In most cases, the measuring transducers change the valuesof the measured quantities into the direct current. The current value usu-ally changes within the specified mA range—in proportion to the value ofthe measured quantity.

Further processing of the direct currents obtained on the outputs of differ-ent measuring converters occurs within different control, protection, andmonitoring terminals and within the higher hierarchical systems in thesecondary power system.

The REx 5xx control, protection and monitoring terminal have a built-inoption to measure and further process information from 6 up to 36 differ-ent direct current information from different measuring transducers. Sixindependent measuring channels are located on each independent mAinput module and the REx 5xx terminals can accept from one up to sixindependent mA input modules, depending on the case size. Refer to thetechnical data and ordering particulars for the particular terminal.

Information about the measured quantities are then available to the useron different locations:

• Locally by means of the local human-machine-interface (HMI)

• Locally by means of a front-connected personal computer (PC)

• Remotely over the LON bus to the station control system (SCS)

• Remotely over the SPA port to the station monitoring system (SMS)

1.1 User-defined measuring ranges

The measuring range of different direct current measuring channels is set-table by the user independent on each other within the range between -25mA and +25 mA in steps of 0.01 mA. It is only necessary to select theupper operating limit I_max higher than the lower one I_min.

1MRK 580 391-XEN


Monitoring of DC analogue measurements

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 391-XENPage 6 – 696

The measuring channel can have a value of 2% of the whole range I_max- I_min above the upper limit I_max or below the lower limit I_min,before an out-of-range error occurs. This means that with a nominal rangeof 0-10 mA, no out-of-range event will occur with a value between -0.2mA and 10.2 mA.

User can this way select for each measuring quantity on each monitoredobject of a power system the most suitable measuring range and this wayoptimise a complete functionality together with the characteristics of theused measuring transducer.

1.2 Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity

The user can continuously monitor the measured quantity in each channelby means of six built-in operating limits (figure 1). Two of them aredefined by the operating range selection: I_Max as the upper and I_Minas the lower operating limit. The other four operating limits operate in twodifferent modes:

• Overfunction, when the measured current exceeds the HiWarn or HiAlarm pre-set values

• Underfunction, when the measured current decreases under the Low-Warn or LowAlarm pre-set values

Figure 1: Presentation of the operating limits

Each operating level has its corresponding functional output signal:

• RMAXAL

• HIWARN

• HIALARM

• LOWWARN

visf_240.vsd

HIWARN = 1

HIALARM = 1

HIWARN = 0

HIALARM = 0

Hysteresis

HiAlarm

HiWarn

LowWarn

LowAlarm

LOWWARN = 1

LOWALARM = 1

LOWALARM = 0

LOWWARN = 0

Y

t

I_MaxRMAXAL = 1

RMAXAL = 0

I_MinRMINAL = 1

RMINAL = 0


1MRK 580 391-XENPage 6 – 697

Version 2.2-00

• LOWALARM

• RMINAL

The logical value of the functional output signals changes according tofigure 1 on page 696.

The user can set the hysteresis, which determines the difference betweenthe operating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range foreach measuring channel separately. The hysteresis is common for all oper-ating values within one channel.

1.3 Continuous supervision of the measured quantity

The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally andremotely. The measurement is continuous for each channel separately, butthe reporting of the value to the higher levels (control processor in theunit, HMI and SCS) depends on the selected reporting mode. The follow-ing basic reporting modes are available:

• Periodic reporting

• Periodic reporting with dead-band supervision in parallel

• Periodic reporting with dead-band supervision in series

• Dead-band reporting

Users can select between two types of dead-band supervision:



1.3.1 Amplitude dead-band supervision

If the changed value —compared to the last reported value— is largerthan the ± ∆Y predefined limits that are set by users, and if this is detectedby a new measuring sample, then the measuring channel reports the newvalue to a higher level. This limits the information flow to a minimumnecessary. Figure 2 on page 698 shows an example of periodic reportingwith the amplitude dead-band supervision.

The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the values areevaluated at a time intervals depending on the sampling frequency chosenby the user (SampRate setting).

After the new value is reported, the new + ∆Y limits for dead-band areautomatically set around it. The new value is reported only if the mea-sured quantity changes more than defined by the new +∆Y set limits.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 391-XENPage 6 – 698

Figure 2: Amplitude dead-band supervision reporting

1.3.2 Integrating dead-band supervision

The measured value is updated if the time integral of all changes exceedsthe pre-set limit (figure 3), where an example of reporting with integratingdead-band supervision is shown. The picture is simplified: the process isnot continuous but the values are evaluated with a time interval of onesecond from each others.

The last value reported (Y1 in figure 3) serves as a basic value for furthermeasurement. A difference is calculated between the last reported and thenewly measured value during new sample and is multiplied by the timeincrement (discrete integral). The absolute values of these products areadded until the pre-set value is exceeded. This occurs with the value Y2that is reported and set as a new base for the following measurements (aswell as for the values Y3, Y4 and Y5).

The integrating dead-band supervision is particularly indicate for monitor-ing signals with low variations that can last for relatively long periods.

Figure 3: Reporting with integrating dead-band supervision

visf_232.vsd

Y

t

Value Reported(1st)

Value ReportedValue Reported

Y1

Y2

Y3

∆Y

∆Y

∆Y

∆Y

∆Y

∆Y

Value Reported

visf_233.vsd

Y

t

Value Reported(1st)

Y1

ValueReported

A1Y2

ValueReported

Y3

Y4

AValueReported

A2

Y5

A3A4

A5 A7A6

ValueReported

A2 >=pre-set value

A1 >=pre-set valueA >=

pre-set value

A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >=pre-set value


1MRK 580 391-XENPage 6 – 699

Version 2.2-00

1.3.3 Periodic reporting The user can select the periodic reporting of measured value in time inter-vals between 1 and 3600 s (setting RepInt). The measuring channelreports the value even if it has not changed for more than the set limits ofamplitude or integrating dead-band supervision (figure 4). To disable theperiodic reporting, set the reporting time interval to 0 s .

Figure 4: Periodic reporting

1.3.4 Periodic reporting with parallel dead-band supervision

The newly measured value is reported:

• After each time interval for the periodic reporting expired, OR

• When the new value is detected by the dead-band supervision func-tion

Both amplitude and integrating dead-bands can be selected. The periodicreporting can be set in time intervals between 1 and 3600 seconds.

Figure 5: Periodic reporting with amplitude dead-band supervision in parallel

visf_231.vsd

Val

ue 1

Y

tV

alue

2

Val

ue 3

Val

ue 4

Value Reported(1st)

Value Reported

Val

ue 5

Value Reported

Y1

Y2

Y5

Value Reported Value Reported

Y3Y4

t (*)


t (*) t (*) t (*)

visf_234.vsdVal

ue 1

Y

t

Val

ue 2

Val

ue 3

Val

ue 4

Value Reported(1st)

Value ReportedValueReported

Val

ue 5

Value Reported

Y1

∆Y∆Y

ValueReported

t (*) t (*) t (*) t (*)


Value Reported

∆Y∆Y

Value Reported

∆Y∆Y

ValueReported

∆Y

∆Y


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 391-XENPage 6 – 700

1.3.5 Periodic reporting with serial dead-band supervision

Periodic reporting can operate serially with the dead-band supervision.This means that the new value is reported only if the set time periodexpired AND if the dead-band limit was exceeded during the observedtime (figures 6 and 7). The amplitude dead-band and the integrating dead-band can be selected. The periodic reporting can be set in time intervalsbetween 1 and 3600 seconds.

Figure 6: Periodic reporting with amplitude dead-band supervision in series

Figure 7: Periodic reporting with integrating dead-band supervision in series

visf_211.vsdVal

ue 1

Y

t

Val

ue 2

Val

ue 3

Val

ue 4

Value Reported(1st)

Value Reported

∆Y

∆Y

Value notReported

Val

ue 5

Value Reported

Y1

Y2

Y3

∆Y

∆Y

Value notReported

t (*) t (*) t (*) t (*)


visf_212.vsd

Y

t

Val

ue 1

Val

ue 2

Val

ue 3

Value Reported(1st)

Value notReported

Y1

ValueReported

A1 A2

Y2

t (*) t (*)


A1 <pre-set value

A1 + A2 >= pre-set value


1MRK 580 391-XENPage 6 – 701

Version 2.2-00

1.3.6 Combination of periodic reportings

The reporting of the new value depends on setting parameters for thedead-band and for the periodic reporting. Table 1 presents the dependencebetween different settings and the type of reporting for the new value of ameasured quantity.

* please, refer to the setting table for the explanation

Table 1: Dependence of reporting on different setting parameters:

EnD

eadB

*

EnI

Dea

dB*

EnD

eadB

P*

Rep

Int*

Reporting of the new value

Off Off Off 0 No measured values is reported

Off On On t>0 The new measured value is reported only if the time t period expired and if, dur-ing this time, the integrating dead-band limits were exceeded (periodic reportingwith integrating dead-band supervision in series)

On Off On t>0 The new measured value is reported only if the time t period has expired and if,during this time, the amplitude dead-band limits were exceeded (periodic report-ing with amplitude dead-band supervision in series)

On On On t>0 The new measured value is reported only if the time t period expired and if at leastone of the dead-band limits were exceeded (periodic reporting with dead-bandsupervision in series)

Off On Off 0 The new measured value is reported only when the integrated dead-band limitsare exceeded

On Off Off 0 The new measured value is reported only when the amplitude dead-band limitswere exceeded

On On Off 0 The new measured value is reported only if one of the dead-band limits wasexceeded

x x Off t>0 The new measured value is updated at least after the time t period expired. If thedead-band supervision is additionally selected, the updating also occurs when thecorresponding dead-band limit was exceeded (periodic reporting with paralleldead-band supervision)


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 391-XENPage 6 – 702

2 Theory of operation and DesignThe design of the mA input modules follows the design of all REx 5xx-series protection, control, and monitoring terminals that have distributedfunctionality, where the decision levels are placed as closely as possible tothe process.

Each independent measuring module contains all necessary circuitry andfunctionality for measurement of six independent measuring quantitiesrelated to the corresponding measured direct currents.

On the accurate input shunt resistor (R), the direct input current (from themeasuring converter) is converted into a proportional voltage signal (thevoltage drop across the shunt resistor is in proportion to the measured cur-rent). Later, the voltage signal is processed within one differential type ofmeasuring channel (figure 8).

Figure 8: Simplified diagram for the function

The measured voltage is filtered by the low-pass analogue filter beforeentering the analogue to digital converter (A/D). Users can set the sam-pling frequency of the A/D converter between 5 Hz and 255 Hz to adaptto different application requirements as best as possible.

The digital information is filtered by the digital low-pass filter with the(sinx/x)3 response. The filter notch frequency automatically follows theselected sampling frequency. The relation between the frequency corre-sponding to the suppression of -3 dB and the filter notch frequency corre-sponds to the equation:

Using optocouplers and DC/DC conversion elements that are used sepa-rately for each measuring channel, the input circuitry of each measuringchannel is galvanically separated from:

• The internal measuring circuits

• The control microprocessor on the board

visf_241.vsd

I R UA

D

DC

DCUdc

MeasuringConverter

REx 5xx Terminal

f 3dB– 0 262, fnotch⋅=


1MRK 580 391-XENPage 6 – 703

Version 2.2-00

A microprocessor collects the digitized information from each measuringchannel. The microprocessor serves as a communication interface to themain processing module (MPM).

All processing of the measured signal is performed on the module so thatonly the minimum amount of information is necessary to be transmitted toand from the MPM. The measuring module receives information from theMPM on setting and the command parameters; it reports the measuredvalues and additional information—according to needs and values of dif-ferent parameters.

Each measuring channel is calibrated very accurately during the produc-tion process. The continuous internal zero offset and full-scale calibrationduring the normal operation is performed by the A/D converter. The cali-bration covers almost all analogue parts of the A/D conversion, butneglects the shunt resistance.

Each measuring channel has built in a zero-value supervision, whichgreatly rejects the noise generated by the measuring transducers and otherexternal equipment. The value of the measured input current is reportedequal to zero (0) if the measured primary quantity does not exceed +0.5%of the maximum measuring range.

The complete measuring module is equipped with advanced self-supervi-sion. Only the outermost analogue circuits cannot be monitored. The A/Dconverter, optocouplers, digital circuitry, and DC/DC converters, are allsupervised on the module. Over the CAN bus, the measuring modulesends a message to the MPM for any detected errors on the supervised cir-cuitry.

3 Setting instructionsSMS and the CAP 531 configuration tool have to be used in order to setall the parameters that are related to different DC analogue quantities.

Users can set the 13 character name for each measuring channel.

All the monitoring operating values and the hysteresis can be set directlyin the mA of the measured input currents from the measuring transducers.

The measured quantities can be displayed locally and/or remotely accord-ing to the corresponding modules that are separately set for each measur-ing channel by the users (five characters).

The relation between the measured quantity in the power system and thesetting range of the direct current measuring channel corresponds to thisequation:

(Equation 1)

Where:

is the set value for the minimum operating current of a chan-nel in mA

Value ValueMin I IMin–( ) ValueMax ValueMin–IMax IMin–

--------------------------------------------------------------⋅+=

IMin


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 391-XENPage 6 – 704

is the set value for the maximum operating current of a chan-nel in mA

is the value of the primary measuring quantity corre-sponding to the set value of minimum operating current of a channel,

is the value of the primary measuring quantity corre-sponding to the set value of maximum operating current of a chan-nel,

is the actual value of the primary measured quantity

Figure 9 shows the relationship between the direct mA current I and theactual value of the primary measured quantity, .

Figure 9: Relationship between the direct current (I) and the measured quantity primary value (Value)

The dead-band limits can be set directly in the mA of the input direct cur-rent for:

• Amplitude dead-band supervision ADBS

• Integrating dead-band supervision IDBS

The area [mAs] is defined by the following equation:

(Equation 2)

where:

is the set value of the current level for IDBS in mA

IMax

ValueMin

IMin

ValueMax

IMax

Value

Value

Value

IMin

ValueMin

ValueMin IMax - ValueMax IMin

IMax - IMin

IMax

ValueMax

I

visf_242.vsd

IDBS

IDBSIDeadB

SampRate------------------------------ IDeadB ts⋅= =

IDeadB


1MRK 580 391-XENPage 6 – 705

Version 2.2-00

is the sampling rate (frequency) set value, in Hz

is the time between two samples in s.

If a 0.1 mA variation in the monitored quantity for 10 minutes (600 s) isthe event that should cause the trigger of the IDBS monitoring (reportingof the value because of IDBS threshold operation) and the sampling fre-quency (SampRate) of the monitored quantity is 5 Hz, than the set valuefor IDBS (IDeadB) will be 300 mA:

(Equation 3)

(Equation 4)

The polarity of connected direct current input signal can be changed bysetting the ChSign to On or Off. This way it is possible to compensate bysetting the eventually wrong connection of the direct current leedsbetween the measuring converter and the input terminals of the REx 5xxseries unit.

The setting table lists all setting parameters with additional explanation.

Note: It is important to set the time for periodic reporting and deadband inan optimised way to minimise the load on the station bus.

SampRate

ts1

SampRate------------------------------=

IDBS 0,1 600⋅ 60 mA s ][= =

IDeadB IDBS SampRate⋅ 60 5⋅ 300 mA ][= = =


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 391-XENPage 6 – 706

4 TestingA stabilized direct current generator and mA meter with very high accu-racy for measurement of direct current is needed in order to test the dcmeasuring module. The generator operating range and the measuringrange of the mA meter must be at least between -25 and 25 mA.

Connect the current generator and mA meter to the corresponding directcurrent input terminals. Check that the values presented on the HMI mod-ule corresponds to the magnitude of input direct current within the limitsof declared accuracy. The service value is available under the submenu:

Service ReportI/O

Slotnm-MIMxMIxy-Value

where:

nm represents the serial number of a slot with tested mA input mod-ule

x represents the serial number of a mA input module in a terminal

y represents the serial number of a measuring channel on module x.

The operation of ADBS or IDBS function can be checked separately withthe setting of RepInt = 0. The value on the HMI must change only whenthe changes in input current (compared to the present value) are higherthan the set value for the selected dead band.

Configure the monitoring output signals (see the signal list) to the corre-sponding output relays. Check the operating monitoring levels by chang-ing the magnitude of input current and observing the operation of thecorresponding output relays.

The output contact changes its state when the changes in the input mea-suring quantity are higher than the set values RMAXAL, HIWARN,HIALARM, or lower than the set values LOWWARN, LOWALARM,RMINAL.


1MRK 580 391-XENPage 6 – 707

Version 2.2-00

5 Appendix

5.1 Function blocks

MAXMOD: REx 5xx terminals can accept from one up to six indepen-dent mA input modules, depending on the case size. Refer to the technicaldata and ordering particulars for the particular terminal.

MIx1-POSITION MIx1-ERROR

Monitoring of DC analogue measurementsChannel Input 1 of Module x (x=1...MAXMOD)

visf_243.vsd

MIx1-INPUTERR

MIx1-HIALARMMIx1-HIWARN

MIx1-BLOCKMIx1-RMAXAL

MIx1-RMINALMIx1-LOWALARM

MIx1-LOWWARN

Monitoring of DC analogue measurementsChannel Inputs 2 to 6 (y) of Module x (x=1...MAXMOD)

MIxy-INPUTERR

MIxy-HIALARMMIxy-HIWARN

MIxy-BLOCK

MIxy-RMAXAL

MIxy-RMINALMIxy-LOWALARM

MIxy-LOWWARN


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 391-XENPage 6 – 708

5.2 Signal listTable 2:


Module signals and input 1

MIx1- POSITION IN Position of module number x

MIx1- BLOCK IN Block updating of values input 1

MIx1- ERROR OUT Board Error on module number x. It signalises also the wrong module on the specified position.

MIx1- INPUTERR OUT Error on input 1

MIx1- RMAXAL OUT Rangemax Alarm input 1

MIx1- HIALARM OUT High Alarm input 1

MIx1- HIWARN OUT High Warning input 1

MIx1- LOWWARN OUT Low Warning input 1

MIx1- LOWALARM OUT Low Alarm input 1

MIx1- RMINAL OUT Rangemin Alarm input 1

Input 2

MIx2 BLOCK IN Block updating of values input 2








Input 3









Input 4









1MRK 580 391-XENPage 6 – 709

Version 2.2-00

The x within the block name corresponds to the module number.

5.3 Setting table


Input 5









Input 6









Table 2:


Table 3: Setting table for a generic input module


Module Parameter

SampRate 5-255 Hz 5 Sampling Rate for mA Input Module x

Input 1

Name Usr def. string String MI61-Value

Use defined name for input 1. String length up to 13 charac-ters, all characters available on the HMI can be used

Operation Off, On Off Input 1 On/Off

Calib Off, On On Set to ’On’ to use production calibration for Input 1

ChSign Off, On Off Set to ’On’ if sign of Input 1 shall be changed

Unit 0-5 Unit1 State a 5 character unit name for Input 1

Hysteres 0.0-20.0 mA 1.0 Alarm hysteresis for Input 1 in mA

EnAlRem Off, On Off Immediate event when an alarm is removed for Input 1

I_Max -25.00-25.00 mA 20.00 Max current of transducer to Input 1 in mA

I_Min -25.00-25.00 mA 4.00 Min current of transducer to Input 1 in mA


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 391-XENPage 6 – 710

EnAlarm Off, On Off Set to ’On’ to activate alarm supervision for Input 1

HiAlarm -25.00-25.00 mA 19.00 High Alarm level for Input 1 in mA

HiWarn -25.00-25.00 mA 18.00 High Warning level for Input 1 in mA

LowWarn -25.00-25.00 mA 6.00 Low warning level for Input 1 in mA

LowAlarm -25.00-25.00 mA 5.00 Low Alarm level for Input 1 in mA

RepInt 0-3600 s 0 Time between reports for Input 1 in seconds

EnDeadB Off, On Off Enable amplitude dead band supervision for Input 1

DeadBand 0.00-20.00 mA 1.00 Amplitude dead band for Input 1 in mA

EnIDeadB Off, On Off Enable integrating dead band supervision for Input 1

IDeadB 0.00-1000.00 mA 2.00 Integrating dead band for Input 1 in mA

EnDeadBP Off, On Off Enable periodic dead band reporting Input 1

MaxValue -1000.00-1000.00

(*) 20.00 Max primary value corr. to I_Max, Input 1.It determines the maximum value of the measuring transducer primary measuring quantity, which corresponds to the maxi-mum permitted input current I_Max

MinValue -1000.00-1000.00

(*) 4.00 Min primary value corr. to I_Min, Input 1.It determines the minimum value of the measuring transducer primary measuring quantity, which corresponds to the mini-mum permitted input current I_Min

Input 2

























1MRK 580 391-XENPage 6 – 711

Version 2.2-00

MaxValue -1000.00-1000.00


MinValue -1000.00-1000.00


Input 3






















MaxValue -1000.00-1000.00


MinValue -1000.00-1000.00


Input 4








Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 391-XENPage 6 – 712


















MaxValue -1000.00-1000.00


MinValue -1000.00-1000.00


Input 5




















1MRK 580 391-XENPage 6 – 713

Version 2.2-00






MaxValue -1000.00-1000.00


MinValue -1000.00-1000.00


Input 6









I_Max -25.00 - 25.00 mA 20.00 Max current of transducer to Input 6 in mA

I_Min -25.00 - 25.00 mA 4.00 Min current of transducer to Input 6 in mA












MaxValue -1000.00-1000.00


MinValue -1000.00-1000.00





Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 391-XENPage 6 – 714

Note: (*) is referred to the five characters user-defined setting parametercalled “Unit” where the user can write the name of the unit of the measur-ing converter input measuring quantity.

715Pulse counter

1 ApplicationThe pulse counter function provides the Substation Automation systemwith the number of pulses, which have been accumulated in the REx 5xxterminal during a defined period of time, for calculation of, for example,energy values. The pulses are captured on the Binary Input Module (BIM)that is read by the pulse counter function. The number of pulses in thecounter is then reported via LON to the station HMI or read via SPA as aservice value.

The normal use for this function is the counting of energy pulses for kWhand kvarh in both directions from external energy meters. Up to 12 binaryinputs in a REx 5xx can be used for this purpose with a frequency of up to40 Hz.

2 Theory of operationThe registration of pulses is done for positive transitions (0−>1) on one ofthe 16 binary input channels located on the Binary Input Module (BIM).Pulse counter values are read from the station HMI with predefinedcyclicity without reset, and an analogue event is created.

The integration time period can be set in the range from 30 seconds to 60minutes and is synchronised with absolute system time. That means, acycle time of one minute will generate a pulse counter reading every fullminute. Interrogation of additional pulse counter values can be done witha command (intermediate reading) for a single counter. All active counterscan also be read by the LON General Interrogation command (GI).

The pulse counter in REx 5xx supports unidirectional incrementalcounters. That means only positive values are possible. The counter uses a32 bit format, that is, the reported value is a 32-bit, signed integer with arange 0...+2147483647. The counter is reset at initialisation of the termi-nal or by turning the pulse counter operation parameter Off/On.

The reported value to station HMI over the LON bus contains Identity,Value, Time, and Pulse Counter Quality. The Pulse Counter Quality con-sists of:

• Invalid (board hardware error or configuration error)• Wrapped around• Blocked• Adjusted

The transmission of the counter value by SPA can be done as a servicevalue, that is, the value frozen in the last integration cycle is read by thestation HMI from the database. The pulse counter function updates thevalue in the database when an integration cycle is finished and activatesthe NEW_VAL signal in the function block. This signal can be connectedto an Event function block, be time tagged, and transmitted to the stationHMI. This time corresponds to the time when the value was frozen by thefunction.


1MRK 580 394-XEN

Pulse counter

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 394-XENPage 6 – 716

3 DesignThe function can be regarded as a function block with a few inputs andoutputs. The inputs are divided into two groups: settings and connectables(configuration). The outputs are divided into three groups: signals(binary), service value for SPA, and analogue event for LON.

Figure 1: shows the pulse counter function block with connections of theinputs and outputs.

Figure 1: Overview of the pulse counter function

The BLOCK and TMIT_VAL inputs can be connected to Single Com-mand blocks, which are intended to be controlled either from the stationHMI or/and the local HMI. As long as the BLOCK signal is set, the pulsecounter is blocked. The signal connected to TMIT_VAL performs oneadditional reading per positive flank. The signal must be a pulse with alength >1 second.

The BIM_CONN input is connected to the used input of the functionblock for the Binary Input Module (BIM). If BIM_CONN is connected toanother function block, the INVALID signal is activated to indicate theconfiguration error.

The NAME input is used for a user-defined name with up to 19 charac-ters.

Each pulse counter function block has four output signals: INVALID,RESTART, BLOCKED, and NEW_VAL. These signals can be connectedto an Event function block for event recording.

PulseCounterBLOCK

TMIT_VAL

BIM_CONN

NAME

SingleCmdFunc

OUTx

SingleCmdFunc

OUTx INPUTPulse

OUT

I/O-moduleBIx

“PCxx-name”

EVENT

INVALID

RESTART

BLOCKED

NEW_VAL

INPUT1

INPUT2

INPUT3

INPUT4Pulse length > 1 s

DatabasePulse counter value:0...2147483647

LON analogue event data msg(M_PC_T)*Identity*Value*Time*Pulse Counter Quality

SMS settings1. Operation = Off/On2. Cycle time = 30s...60min3. Analogue Event Mask = No/Report

Pulse counter 1MRK 580 394-XENPage 6 – 717

Version 2.2-00

The INVALID signal is a steady signal and is set if the Binary Input Mod-ule, where the pulse counter input is located, fails or has wrong configura-tion.

The RESTART signal is a steady signal and is set when the reported valuedoes not comprise a complete integration cycle. That is, in the first mes-sage after terminal start-up, in the first message after deblocking, and afterthe counter has wrapped around during last integration cycle.

The BLOCKED signal is a steady signal and is set when the counter isblocked. There are two reasons why the counter is blocked:

• The BLOCK input is set, or • The Binary Input Module, where the counter input is situated, is

inoperative.

The NEW_VAL signal is a pulse signal. The signal is set if the countervalue was updated since last report.

4 SettingFrom SMS under the “Set Pulse Counter 1...12” menu, these parameterscan be set individually for each pulse counter:

• Operation = Off/On• Cycle Time = 30s / 1min / 1min30s / 2min / 2min30s / 3min / 4min /

5min / 6min / 7min30s / 10min / 12min / 15min / 20min / 30min / 60min.

Under “Mask - Analogue Events” in SMS, the reporting of the analogueevents can be masked:

• Event Mask = No Events/Report Events

The configuration of the inputs and outputs of the pulse counter functionblock is made by the CAP 531 configuration tool.


On the Binary Input Module, the debounce filter time is fixed set to 5 ms,that is, the counter suppresses pulses with a pulse length less than 5 ms.The input oscillation blocking frequency is preset to 40 Hz. That meansthat the counter finds the input oscillating if the input frequency is greaterthan 40 Hz. The oscillation suppression is released at 30 Hz. From SMSunder the “Configure I/O-modules” menu and from the local HMI, thevalues for blocking/release of the oscillation can be changed. Note that thesetting is common for all channels on a Binary Input Module, that is, ifchanges of the limits are made for inputs not connected to the pulsecounter, the setting also influences the inputs on the same board used forpulse counting.

Pulse counter

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 394-XENPage 6 – 718

5 TestingThe test of the pulse counter function requires at least a SPA (or LON)connection to a station HMI including corresponding functionality. Aknown number of pulses are with different frequency connected to thepulse-counter input. The test should be performed for the settings opera-tion = Off/On and for blocked/deblocked function. The pulse countervalue is then read by the station HMI.

6 Appendix

6.1 Function block

6.2 Signal list

PulseCounter

BLOCKTMIT_VALBIM_CONNNAME

INVALIDRESTART

BLOCKEDNEW_VAL

PCxx

PC01- BIM_CONN IN Binary input module connection used for pulse aquisition

PC01- BLOCK IN Block aquisition

PC01- TMIT_VAL IN Asyncronous reading. Pulsing of this input makes an additional reading of the pulse input. Value is read at TMIT_VAL positive flank

PC01- BLOCKED OUT Set when BLOCK input is set or when the used BIM is inoperative

PC01- INVALID OUT Set when used BIM fails or has wrong configuration

PC01- NEW_VAL OUT New value exists. Set if counter value has changed since last read report

PC01- RESTART OUT Set if counter value does not comprise a full integration cycle for read report

PC01- NAME See settings table

Pulse counter 1MRK 580 394-XENPage 6 – 719

Version 2.2-00

6.3 Setting table


NAME User def. string

String PC01-NAME

User defined name String length up to 19 characters. Can only be set using the CAP 531 configuration tool

Operation Off, On Off Pulse counter Off/On. Can only be set from SMS

CycleTime 30s, 1min, 1min30s, 2min, 2min30s, 3min, 4min, 5min, 6min, 7min30s, 10min, 12min, 15min, 20min,30min, 60min

15min Reporting of counter value cycle time in minutes and seconds. Can only be set from SMS

EventMaskx No events, Report events

No events

Mask for analogue events from pulse counter x (x=01-12). Can only be set from SMS

Pulse counter

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 394-XENPage 6 – 720

1

Contents Page

Hardware design .........................................................................................7–3Introduction..................................................................................................... 7–3

Platform configurations................................................................................... 7–4Full length platform............................................................................... 7–43/4 width platform................................................................................. 7–5Half width platform ............................................................................... 7–6

Configuration options................................................................. 7–7

Construction and hardware characteristics.............................................7–9Modules.......................................................................................................... 7–9

Transformer input Module (TRM)......................................................... 7–9A/D-conversion Module (ADM) .......................................................... 7–10Main Processing Module (MPM) ........................................................ 7–11Signal Processing Module (SPM) ...................................................... 7–12Power Supply Module (PSM)............................................................. 7–12Input/Output modules......................................................................... 7–14

Binary In/Out Module (IOM) ..................................................... 7–15Binary Input Module (BIM) ....................................................... 7–16Binary Output Module (BOM)................................................... 7–17

Milliampere Input Module (MIM)......................................................... 7–18Human machine interface (HMI) ........................................................ 7–19

Remote end data communication modules............................................7–21Introduction................................................................................................... 7–21

Optical communication module .................................................................... 7–22Long distance communication............................................................ 7–22Short distance communication ........................................................... 7–22

Galvanic communication module ................................................................. 7–23

Carrier module.............................................................................................. 7–24

Serial communication module.................................................................7–25Hardware description ................................................................................... 7–25

Hardware modules

Hardware modulesPage 7 – 2

3Hardware design

1 IntroductionThe terminal is assembled in a closed case that is 1/2, 3/4 or full width ofa standard 19-inch wide rack. The height is 6U.

This terminal is made with a technology that fulfils all modern electro-magnetic interference requirements. These requirements are fulfilled byhaving a closed and partly welded steel case around the printed circuitboard assemblies. The terminal has very good separation between theinternal, sensitive signals, and the external, polluted process signals. Thisis achieved by keeping all process signals in the back of the case and theinternal signals in a mother-board where all sensitive bus communicationruns.The mother-board is located behind the front panel of the terminal.

All external serial buses for Substation Control System (SCS), StationMonitoring System (SMS) and the front-connected PC are insulated withfibre optical links to avoid disturbances. This, in combination with a gooddesign of transformers, power supply and binary inputs give a terminal,that can withstand the electromagnetic interference tests.

The product is based on harmonized standards. The standards are listed inflap 3 Product introductions, sections Requirements and technical data.

If a COMBITEST test switch is included an additional box type RHGS isused. It has the same principal design as the terminal case and the width1/4 of 19-inch. It is possible to mount the RHGS-box by the side of a REx5xx product of size 3/4x19 inch or smaller.

Figure 1: Basic block diagram

HMI unit

U

I

A/D

SP1

SP2

SP3

SP4

SP5

SP6

SP7

SP8

SP9

SP10

SP11

SP12

TRM

In

Out

In

Out

32-b

it c

ontr

olle

r

Com

mun

icat

ion

SCS

ADM SPM MPM BIO

1MRK 580 395-XEN


Hardware design

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 395-XENPage 7 – 4

2 Platform configurationsThe basic configuration of the REx 5xx terminal consists of the followingmodules:

• Main processing module. All information is processed or passed through this module before it is sent from the terminal. The module is used for configuration of the terminal and storage of all its set-tings. It is also used for communication (position S10 in the full sized rack else S9).

• Signal processing module with up to 12 digital signal processors used for all measuring functions.

• Human machine interface (HMI) built-in to the front cover and con-tains LEDs, a LCD and an optical connector for a front-connected PC. For this front communication, you need an optional special cable, with an opto-to-RS232, built-in converter.

• A Power supply containing a DC/DC converter, which provides full isolation between the terminal and the external battery system. The power supply consists of a two stage converter which gives a very wide input-voltage range, from 48 V up to 250 V. It delivers +5, +12 and -12 Volts. There are two different types depending on the plat-form size, see below.

2.1 Full length platform

Figure 2: Hardware structure of the full width 19” case

The basic addition to the configuration of the terminal for the full width19” case consists of the following modules:

• A power supply that can provide 30W (position S40)

• Full width 19” backplane with 13 slots available for I/O.

REx 5xx

S2 S8 S10 S12 S14 S16 S18 S20 S22 S24 S26 S28 S30 S32 S34 S36 S38 S40

C

E

visf_226

Hardware design 1MRK 580 395-XENPage 7 – 5

Version 2.2-00

2.2 3/4 width platform

Figure 3: Hardware structure of the 3/4 of full width case

The basic addition to the configuration of the terminal for the 3/4 of fullwidth case consists of the following modules:

• A power supply that can provide 20W and contains both an external CAN-port and I/O (position S13).

• A 3/4 of full width backplane with 8 slots available for I/O.

REx 5xx

S1 S7 S9 S11 S13 S15 S17 S19 S21 S23 S25 S27 S29

C

E

visf 227

Hardware design

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 395-XENPage 7 – 6

2.3 Half width platform

Figure 4: Hardware structure of the 1/2 of full width case

The basic addition to the configuration of the terminal for the 1/2 of fullwidth case consists of the following modules:

• A power supply that can provide 20W and contains both an external CAN-port and I/O (position S13).

• A 1/2 of full width backplane with 3 slots available for I/O.

REx 5xx

S1 S7 S9 S11 S13 S15 S17 S19

C

E

visf_228

Hardware design 1MRK 580 395-XENPage 7 – 7

Version 2.2-00

2.3.1 Configuration options

Optionally these hardware modules are available:

• Binary input/output modules, that can be of type Binary input mod-ule (16 inputs), Binary output module (24 relays or 12 command relays), and a combined Binary input/output module (8 inputs and 12 output relays).

• A Milliampere Input Module.

• One or two optical serial communication modules, intended for remote fibre optic communication. Having two modules will enable the terminal to be a part of SMS in parallel with a Substation Auto-mation System (SA). These are mounted on the Main Processing Module if used.

• RTXP 24 test switch.

• Differential communication modules. A galvanic module with five different configurations, an optical module or a carrier module with a slot for either a galvanic or an optical module. (at position S38 on the full width case, S19 on the half of full width case and S29 on the 3/4 of full width case).

• A Transformer module with five voltage and five current input trans-formers (at position S2 on the full width case else S1).

• An A/D-conversion (AD) module for up to 10 analogue inputs, oper-ating with a sampling frequency of 2000 Hz. It has a bandwidth of 250 Hz, and a dynamic range for currents, from 0,01 to 100 ⋅ Ir, and for voltages, from 0,01 to 2 ⋅ Ur (at position S8 on the full width case else S7).

Figure 5: Internal hardware structure showing a full width case configu-ration

SA

PC/SMS

SPM

C

E

ShieldShield

Shield

TRM

S2

ADM

S8

MPM

S10

BIM, BOM, IOM, MIM

numbers depending on the

rack sizeDiffcom

S38

PSM

S40

...............

CAN-bus (1 Mbit/s)

Analogue

bus

Serial

bus

HDLC-bus

HMI

HMI serial communication links

visf_229.vsd

Hardware design

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 395-XENPage 7 – 8

9Construction and hardware characteristics

1 Modules

1.1 Transformer input Module (TRM)

Current and voltage input transformers form an isolating barrier betweenthe external wiring and internal circuits of the terminal. They adapt thevalues of the measuring quantities to the static circuitry and prevent thedisturbances to enter the terminalYou can connect 10 analogue inputquantities to the transformer module that consists of:

• Five voltage transformers that cover a rated range from 100 to 125 V or 220 V.

• Five current transformers in two versions - one for 1 A and one for 5 A rated current.

The TRM module also exists in a variant with only five current transformers.

The input quantities are the following:

• Three phase currents

• Residual current of the protected line

• Residual current of the parallel circuit (if any) for compensation of the effect of the zero sequence mutual impedance on the fault locator measurement or residual current of the protected line but from a par-allell core used for CT circuit supervision function or independent earthfault function.

• Three phase voltages

• Open delta voltage for the protected line (for an optional directional earth-fault protection)

• Phase voltage for an optional synchronism and energizing check.

Figure 1: Block diagram of the TRM

Bac

kpla

ne c

onne

ctor

Vol

tage

Inpu

t con

nect

orC

urre

nt In

put c

onne

ctor CT CT

CT

CT

CT

VT

VT

VT

VT

VT

1MRK 580 396-XEN


Construction and hardware characteristics

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 396-XENPage 7 – 10

1.2 A/D-conversion Module (ADM)

The incoming signals from the intermediate current transformers areadapted to the electronic voltage level with shunts. To gain dynamic rangefor the current inputs, two shunts with separate A/D channels are used foreach input current. By that a 16-bit dynamic range is obtained with a12 bits A/D converter.

The next step in the signal flow is the analogue filter of the first order,with a cut-off frequency of 500 Hz. This filter is used to avoid aliasingproblems.

The A/D converter has a 12-bit resolution. It samples each input signal (5voltages and 2 . 5 currents) with a sampling frequency of 2 kHz.

Before the A/D-converted signals are transmitted to the main processingmodule, the signals are band-pass filtered and down-sampled to 1 kHz ina digital signal processor (DSP).

The filter in the DSP is a numerical filter with a cut-off frequency of250 Hz.

The transmission of data between the A/D-conversion module and theMain processing module is done on a supervised serial link ofRS485 type. This transmission is performed once every millisecond andcontains information about all incoming analogue signals.

Figure 2: Block diagram for the ADM

Bac

kpla

ne c

onne

ctor

Analog filters &current shunts

PLD

DS

P

A/D

-co

nver

ter

Ana

log

MU

X

Controllogic &buffers

1-5 Voltageinputs

5-7 Currentinputs


1MRK 580 396-XENPage 7 – 11

Version 2.2-00

1.3 Main Processing Module (MPM)

The terminal is based on a pipelined multi-processor design. The 32-bitmain controller, receives the result from the Signal processing moduleevery millisecond.

All memory management are also handled by the main controller. Themodule has 8MB of disc memory and 1MB of code memory. It also has8MB of dynamic memory.

The controller also serves four serial links: one high-speed CAN bus forInput/Output modules and three serial links for the different types of HMIcommunication explained below.

The main controller makes all decisions, based on the information fromthe Signal processing module and from the binary inputs. The decisionsare sent to the different output modules and to these communication ports:

• Local HMI module including a front-connected PC, if any, for local human-machine communication

• LON communication port at the rear (option)

• SPA/IEC communication port at the rear (option)

Figure 3: Block diagram for the MPM

To allow easy upgrading of software in the field, FUT, a special connectoris used, the Download connector. The RTC on the module has beenadjusted for year 2000.

Bac

kpla

ne c

onne

ctor

SP

M c

onne

ctor

Dow

nloa

dco

nnec

tor

Maincontroller

LON

CAN

DRAM (SIMM)

SP

A/IE

CLO

N

Disc Flash (8MB)

Code Flash (1MB)

8-bit Data bus

32-b

it D

ata

bus

CAN bus

SCM

SCM


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 396-XENPage 7 – 12

1.4 Signal Processing Module (SPM)

All analogue data are received in all of the up to 12 (16 bits) digital signalprocessors (DSP). In these DSPs, the main part of the filtering and the cal-culations occur. The result from the calculations in the DSPs is sent everymillisecond on a parallel bus to the (32 bit) main controller on the Mainprocessing module.

Figure 4: Block diagram of the SPM

1.5 Power Supply Module (PSM)

There are two different types of power supply modules. The Power sup-plies contains a built-in, self-regulated DC/DC converter that provides fullisolation between the terminal and the external battery system. The wide-input voltage range of the DC/DC converter converts an input voltagerange from 48 to 250V, including a ±20% tolerance on the EL voltage.The output voltages are +5, +12 and -12 Volt.

DSP12

DSP11

DSP10 DSP8

DSP9

DSP6 DSP4 DSP1

DSP2

DSP3DSP5DSP7

MP

M-c

onne

ctor


1MRK 580 396-XENPage 7 – 13

Version 2.2-00

The first type of PSM, used in the half and 3/4 of full width platforms, hasan external CAN-port used for the connection of two platforms and built-in I/O with four optical isolated inputs and five outputs. It can provide upto 20W.

Figure 5: Block diagram for the PSM used in the half and 3/4 of full width cases.

The second type of PSM has no CAN or I/O but it can provide 30W forthe extended number of modules in the full width platform.

Figure 6: Block diagram for the PSM used in the full width case.

Bac

kpla

ne c

onne

ctor

Pro

cess

con

nect

orC

AN

&de

bug

Opto isolatedinput

Opto isolatedinput

Opto isolatedinput

Opto isolatedinput

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Power supply

Micro-controller

Memory

PWM

CAN

Bac

kpla

ne c

onne

ctor

Inpu

t con

nect

or

PowersupplyFilter

Supervision


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 396-XENPage 7 – 14

1.6 Input/Output modules The number of inputs or outputs in REx 5xx can be selected in a variety ofcombinations depending on the size of the rack. There are no basic I/Oconfiguration of the terminal. The table below shows the number of avail-able inputs or output modules for the different platform sizes.

Note! Standard factory configuration for REx 5xx terminals requires min-imum one binary input/output module.

A number of signals are available for signalling purposes in the terminal,and all are freely programmable. The voltage level of the input/outputmodules is selectable at order RL48, 110, or 220 (48/60 V ±20%, 110/125V ±20% or 220/250 V ±20%). The Binary in/out module and the Binaryinput module are also available in an RL 24 version (24/30 V ±20%).

For more information about IOM, BIM and BOM see figure 7, whichshows the operating characteristics of the binary inputs of the three volt-age levels.

Figure 7: Voltage dependence for the binary inputs

These modules communicates with the Main Processing Module via theCAN-bus on the backplane.

Platform size1/1 of fullwidth

3/4 of full width

1/2 of full width

I/O slots available 13 8 3

300

176

144

8872

3832

1918

24/30VRL24

48/60VRL48

110/125VRL110

220/250VRL220

RL

Volt

Functionguaranteed

Functionuncertain

No functionguaranteed


1MRK 580 396-XENPage 7 – 15

Version 2.2-00

The design of all binary inputs enables the burn off of the oxide of therelay contact connected to the input, despite the low, steady-state powerconsumption, which is shown in figure 8.

Figure 8: Current through the relay contact

1.6.1 Binary In/Out Module (IOM)

The Binary in/out module contains eight optical isolated binary inputs andtwelve binary output contacts. Ten of the output relays have contacts witha high-switching capacity (Trip and signal relays). The remaining tworelays are of reed type and for signalling purpose only. The relays aregrouped together as can be seen in the terminal diagram.

Figure 9: Block diagram for the binary input/output module

30

110ms 20ms

Time

Incoming pulse

Approx. currentin mA

Bac

kpla

ne c

onne

ctor

Pro

cess

con

nect

orP

roce

ss c

onne

ctor

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Rel

ay

Rel

ay

Relay Relay

Micro-controller

PWM

Memory

CA

N

Deb

ug&

isp

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 396-XENPage 7 – 16

1.6.2 Binary Input Module (BIM)

The Binary input module contains 16 optical isolated binary inputs. Thebinary inputs are freely programmable and can be used for the input logi-cal signals to any of the functions. They can also be included in the distur-bance recording and event-recording functions. This enables the extensivemonitoring and evaluation of operation for the terminal and for all associ-ated electrical circuits. You can select the voltage level of the Binary inputmodules (RL24, 48, 110, or 220) at order.

Figure 10: Block diagram of the Binary Input Module

Bac

kpla

ne c

onne

ctor

Pro

cess

con

nect

orP

roce

ss c

onne

ctor

Micro-controller

Memory

CA

N

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input


1MRK 580 396-XENPage 7 – 17

Version 2.2-00

1.6.3 Binary Output Module (BOM)

The Binary output module has either 24 single-output relays or 12 com-mand-output relays. They are grouped together as can be seen in the blockdiagram below. All the output relays have contacts with a high switchingcapacity (Trip and signal relays).

Figure 11: Block diagram of the Binary Output Module

Two single output relays can be connected in series (which gives a com-mand output relay) in order to get a high security at operation of high volt-age apparatuses.

Figure 12: One of twelve binary output groups

Bac

kpla

ne c

onne

ctor

Pro

cess

con

nect

orP

roce

ss c

onne

ctor

Micro-controller

Memory

CA

N

Rel

ayRelay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Rel

ay

Rel

ay

Rel

ay

Out1

Out2

Common

Set1

Superv

Set2

Superv


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 396-XENPage 7 – 18

The output relays are provided with a supervision function to ensure ahigh degree of security against unwanted operation. The status of the out-put contacts (on/off) is continously read back and compared with theexpected status. If any discrepancy occurs, an error is reported. This func-tion covers:

• interrupt or short circuit in an output relay coil

• failure of an output relay driver.

1.7 Milliampere Input Module (MIM)

The Milliampere Input Module has six independent analogue channelswith separated protection, filtering, reference, A/D-conversion and opticalisolation for each input making them galvanic isolated from each otherand from the rest of the module.

The differential analogue inputs measure DC and low frequency currentsin range of up to +/- 20mA. The A/D converter has a digital filter withselectable filter frequency. All inputs are calibrated separately and storedin a non-volatile memory and the module will self-calibrate if the temper-ature should start to drift. This module communicates, like the other I/O-modules, with the Main Processing Module via the CAN-bus.

Figure 13: Block diagram of the Milliampere Input Module

Bac

kpla

ne c

onne

ctor

Pro

cess

con

nect

or

Micro-controller

Memory

CA

N

Protection& filter

A/D Converter

Volt-ref

Opto-isolation

DC/DC

Protection& filter

A/D Converter

Volt-ref

Opto-isolation

DC/DC

Protection& filter

A/D Converter

Volt-ref

Opto-isolation

DC/DC

Protection& filter

A/D Converter

Volt-ref

Opto-isolation

DC/DC

Protection& filter

A/D Converter

Volt-ref

Opto-isolation

DC/DC

Protection& filter

A/D Converter

Volt-ref

Opto-isolation

DC/DC


1MRK 580 396-XENPage 7 – 19

Version 2.2-00

1.8 Human machine interface (HMI)

The local HMI module consists of three LEDs (red, yellow, and green), anLCD display with four lines, each contain 16 characters, six buttons andan optical connector for PC communication.

Figure 14: Local HMI

The LED indication module is equipped with 18 LEDs, which can light ineither red, yellow or green color. The LED is also equipped with adescription text for each of the LEDs.

Figure 15: LED indication module, front panel

E

C

green red

LEDs

yellow

Optical connectorfor local PC

Push buttons

Liquid Crystal Displayfour rows16 characters/rowREx 5xx *2.0

C = QuitE = Enter menu

Start TripReady

064.ai

Indication descriptionLED


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 396-XENPage 7 – 20

The PC is connected via a special cable, that has a built-in optical to elec-trical interface. Thus, disturbance-free local serial communication withthe personal computer is achieved. You need the SMS-BASE and SM software for this communication. A PC greatly simplifies the commu-nication with the terminal. It also gives the user additional functionalitywhich is unavailable on the HMI because of insufficient space. The LEDson the HMI display this information:

Table 1: The local HMI LED display

LED indication Information

Green:

Steady In service

Flashing Internal failure

Dark No power supply

Yellow:

Steady Disturbance Report triggered

Flashing Terminal in test mode

Red:

Steady Trip command issued from a protection function

Flashing Terminal in blocked or configuration mode

21Remote end data communication modules

1 IntroductionRemote end communication can be either dedicated optical fibres, directgalvanic communication or multiplexed communication links. This can bemanaged either with dedicated modules or via a carrier module with eithera galvanic or an optical sub-module. The dedicated galvanic module canbe of five different configurations. All modules communicates with themain processing module via the CAN-bus and an HDLC-bus on the back-plane.

1MRK 580 397-XEN


Remote end data communication modules

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 397-XENPage 7 – 22

2 Optical communication module

2.1 Long distance communication

The optical communication module is designed to work with both 9/125µm single-mode fibres and 50/125 or 62,5/125 µm multimode fibres at1300 nm wavelength. The connectors are of type FC-PC (SM) or FC(MM) respectively. Two different levels of optical output power are usedto cover distances from 0 to approximately 30km. The optical power is seton the HMI. The attenuation in fibres is normally approximately 0.8dB/km for multimode and 0.4 dB/km for single-mode. Additional attenua-tion due to installation can be estimated to be 0.2dB/km for multimodeand 0.1 dB/km for single-mode fibres. For single-mode fibre and highoutput power this results in a maximum distance of 32km.

2.2 Short distance communication

The optical communication module can also be connected over a shortoptic link to an optical-to-electrical converter of type FOX6Plus orFOX20 for connection to equipments with interface according to CCITTstandard G.703, co-directional, at 64 kbits/s. The connectors are of typeST

Figure 1: Block diagram for the optical communication module.

Interfaceconverter& control

logic

Micro-controller

Memory

CAN

Fail indicator

Opto

reciever

Opto driver

Bac

kpla

ne c

onne

ctor


1MRK 580 397-XENPage 7 – 23

Version 2.2-00

3 Galvanic communication moduleThe communication module of galvanic type is intended for use togetherwith multiplexers or other communication equipment. The requirementfor this is that the protection is within the same building as the communi-cation equipment, within a distance less than 100m, and that the environ-ment is relatively free from noise. In this case the protection may beconnected directly to the multiplexer via shielded cables with twistedpairs.Both ends of the communication line must have common ground.

The equipment is available for the following interfacing recommendationsspecifying the interconnection of digital equipment to a PCM multiplexer:

• V.36 co-directional

• V.36 contra-directional

• X.21

• RS530/422 co-directional

• RS530/422 contra-directional

Note! For best performance contra-directional operation is recommendedfor V.36 and RS530/422.

Co-directional operation should only be used when operating two units ina back-to-back configuration, e.g. at laboratory testing.

V.36 also fulfills the older recommendation V.35. The connection is doneby DSub connectors, 15 pin for X.21 and 25 pin for V.36 and RS530.

Figure 2: Block diagram for the galvanic communication module

Micro-controller

Memory

CAN

Opt

o is

olat

ion

DC/DC

Trans-ceivers

Pro

cess

con

nect

or X

3P

roce

ss c

onne

ctor

X2

Bac

kpla

ne c

onne

ctor


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 397-XENPage 7 – 24

4 Carrier moduleThe third kind of differential communication module is the carrier moduleable to connect a communication sub-module to the platform. It adds theCAN-communication and the controls with the rest of the platform. Thisadds the capability to transfer binary signals between for example two dis-tance protection units.

There are two types of sub-modules that can be added to the carrier mod-ule, one short range galvanic communication module and a short rangeoptical communication module. The carrier module senses the type ofsub-module via one of the two connectors.

The short range optical communication module can also be connectedover a short optical link to an optical-to-electrical modem of type FIBER-DATA 21-15X for connections to equipments with interface according toV.35, V.36 or FIBERDATA 21-16X for connections to equipments withinterface according to X21, RS530 or G.703 at 64 kbit/s

The short range optical module has ST type connectors. .

Figure 3: Block diagram for the carrier module.

Micro-controllerMemory

CAN

Sub-module

Bac

kpla

ne c

onne

ctor

25Serial communication module

1 Hardware descriptionThe serial communication modules are placed in slots at the rear part ofthe Main processing module. One or two modules can be applied on theMain processing module (see “Construction and hardware characteristic”,section “Main processing module”). One slot is intended for LON com-munication and the other for SPA or IEC communication. The two serialcommunication modules enable the terminal to be a part of a SubstationAutomation system (LON or SPA), and/or a Station Monitoring System(SPA).

There are four different types of SCMs:

The serial communication module can have connectors for two plasticfibre cables or two glass fibre cables. The incoming optical fibre is con-nected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical fibre to the TXtransmitter output. When the fibre optic cables are laid out, pay specialattention to the instructions concerning the handling, connection, etc. ofthe optical fibres. The modules can be identified with a number on thelabel on the module.

Table 1: SCM types

Communication: Fibre connection: Label Connection

LON Plastic, snap-in 1MRK00168-EA X15

LON ST, glass, bayonet 1MRK00168-DA X15

SPA/IEC Plastic, snap-in 1MRK00168-FA X13

SPA/IEC ST,glass, bayonet 1MRK00168-DA X13

1MRK 580 398-XEN


Serial communication module

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 398-XENPage 7 – 26

1

AA/D-conversion module 7–10active group 5–9active power P 6–677ADM 7–10AND 5–29AR 6–481, 6–511AR01-CBCLOSED 6–484, 6–514AR01-CBREADY 6–485, 6–514AR01-CLOSECB 6–486, 6–515AR01-INHIBIT 6–485, 6–514AR01-INPROGR 6–485AR01-OFF 6–484, 6–514AR01-ON 6–484, 6–514AR01-P1PH 6–486, 6–515AR01-P3PH 6–486, 6–515AR01-PLCLOST 6–485, 6–514AR01-READY 6–485, 6–515AR01-SP1 6–485AR01-START 6–484, 6–514AR01-SYNC 6–485, 6–514AR01-TP1 6–485AR01-TP2 6–485, 6–515AR01-TPTRIP 6–485, 6–515AR01-TRSOTF 6–485, 6–515AR01-UNSUC 6–486, 6–515AR01-WAIT 6–485, 6–515AR01-WFMASTER 6–486, 6–515ASD 6–247auto-reclosing 6–481, 6–511

Bback-up trip 6–245baud rate 4–15BFP 6–243BIM 5–18, 7–16binary in/out module 7–15binary input module 5–18, 7–16binary output module 5–19, 7–17block functions 4–19blocking scheme 6-159BOM 5–19, 7–17breaker-failure protection 6–243buttons 4–25

Ccables 6–33CAN bus 7–11carrier guard signal 6-160CDxx-signal name 6–379CMxx-signal name 6–608COMBITEST 4–18command dialogue 6–377command function 6–375commissioning 4–17configurable logic 5–27

configuration 4–16, 4–35configuration mode 4–16cover 4–4cut-out sizes 4–8

DDAR 6–481, 6–511data part 6–649DBLL 6–383, 6–409, 6–428, 6–459Dead bus live line 6–383, 6–409,

6–428, 6–459Dead line live bus 6–383, 6–409,

6–428, 6–459dead-band supervision 6–679, 6–697direct inter-trip 6-161directional comparison logic 6–287,

6–294directional measurement 6–38distance protection 6–29DISTREP CLEARED 4–21disturbance overview 6–630disturbance report 6–629, 6–635disturbance summary 6–630DLLB 6–383, 6–409, 6–428, 6–459DSP 7–12

Eearthing wire 4–10electrical terminals 4–10energizing check 6–407event function 6–617EVxx-signal name 6–621, 6–622extremely inverse 6–278

Ffault current reversal 6–169, 6–293fault locator 6–673fault loop equations 6–34fault tracing 4–20ferrule 4–12fibre optic 4–13filter 7–10flush mounting 4–7, 4–8FreqDiff 6–381, 6–407, 6–426, 6–456frequency f 6–677front communication 4–14full-scheme distance protection 6–30

Ggasket 4–4

Hhardware design 7–9header 6–649

Index 1MRK 580 410-XEN


Index

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 410-XENPage 9 – 2

HSAR 6–481, 6–511hysteresis 6–679, 6–697

II/O system 5–17identifiers 5–6indications 6–645input/output module 5–20, 7–14installation 4–4instantaneous o/c protection 6–255,

6–265INT-- CPUFAIL 4–20INT-- CPUWARN 4–20INT-- WARNING 4–20INT--ADC 4–20integrating dead-band 6–679, 6–697internal clock 5–5internal events 4–21, 57INT--FAIL 4–20INT--IOyy 4–20INT--RTC 4–20INT--TSYNC 4–20IOM 5–20, 7–15IOP (I/O position) 5–22

Lled indications 6–645limit time 6–632LNT 4–16load encroachment 6–33logarithmic inverse 6–278LON 4–14, 7–25LON Network Tool 4–16loop equations 6–34

MmA input module 5–20, 6–695main processing module 7–11maintenance 4–23man machine interface 7–19manual trig 6–634mean values 6–677measuring range 6–678mechanical installation 4–4memory 6–629, 6–647memory voltage 6–39menu tree 4–41MicroSCADA 3–7MIM 5–20, 6–706MMI 4–24, 7–19MMI--BLOCKSET 4–14mounting angles 4–4mounting kits 4–4MPM 7–11

Nnormal inverse 6–278

Ooptical fibre 3–7, 7–25OR 5–29overcurrent protection 6–255, 6–265overvoltage protection 6–331

Pphase selection 6–73PhaseDiff 6–381, 6–407, 6–426, 6–456phasors 6–688positive sequence memory 6–36post-fault recording time 6–632power supply module 7–12pre-fault recording time 6–632PSM 7–12pulse 5–32

Qquadrilateral characteristic 6–30

Rrack mounting 4–4reactive power Q 6–677receiving 4–4reclosing counters 6–483, 6–513reclosing programs 6–487recording capacity 6–647recording times 6–632remote communication 4–15repair instruction 4–22restricted settings 5–13retrip 6–245, 6–248RTXP 24 4–18

Ssampling frequency 7–10scheme communication 6-159screw terminals 4–9sealing strip 4–4secondary injection test 4–18self-supervision 4–20SequenceNo 6–635serial communication module 4–14,

7–25SETTING CHANGED 4–21setting group 5–9setting restriction 5–14side-by-side mounting 4–6signal processing module 7–12slave number 4–15socket 4–12

Index 1MRK 580 410-XENPage 9 – 3

Version 2.2-00

SPA 4–14, 7–25SPM 7–12storage 4–4synchro-check 6–381, 6–407, 6–426,

6–456

Tterminal identification 5–5test mode 4–17, 6–639TEST-INPUT 4–17tied lines 6–45timer 5–30transformer input module 7–9transient blocking logic 6–169, 6–293trig signals 6–634tripping logic 6–537TRM 7–9

Uunblocking function 6-160

Vvery inverse 6–278voltage connector 4–10

Wwall mounting 4–9

XXOR 5–33

Zzones 6–30

Index

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 410-XENPage 9 – 4

table of contents 1mrk 580 227-xen technical reference ... · table of contents technical reference...

Documents